Musicians Guide

(includes PC3K6, PC3K7, and PC3K8)

KurzweilisaregisteredtrademarkofYoungChangCo.,Ltd.2009Allrightsreserved.YoungChang,Kurzweil,V.A.S.T.,PC3K, PC3,KDFX,Pitcher,andLaserVerb,KSP8,K2661,K2600,K2500,andK2000aretrademarksofYoungChangCo.,Ltd.All otherproductsandbrandnamesaretrademarksorregisteredtrademarksoftheirrespectivecompanies.Productfeaturesandspecifications aresubjecttochangewithoutnotice. Youmaylegallyprintuptotwo(2)copiesofthisdocumentforpersonaluse.Commercialuseofanycopiesofthisdocument isprohibited.YoungChangCo.retainsownershipofallintellectualpropertyrepresentedbythisdocument.

910523-002 V1 December 2010

CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL

The lightning flash with the arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.

IMPORTANT SAFETY & INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS
WARNING: When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following: 1. Read all of the Safety and Installation Instructions and Explanation of Graphic Symbols before using the product. 2. This product must be grounded. If it should malfunction or break down, grounding provides a path of least resistance for electric current to reduce the risk of electric shock. This product is equipped with a power supply cord having an equipment-grounding conductor and a grounding plug. The plug must be plugged into an appropriate outlet which is properly installed and grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordinances. DANGER: Improper connection of the equipment-grounding conductor can result in a risk of electric shock. Do not modify the plug provided with the product - if it will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician. Do not use an adaptor which defeats the function of the equipment-grounding conductor. If you are in doubt as to whether the product is properly grounded, check with a qualified serviceman or electrician. 3. WARNING: This product is equipped with an AC input voltage selector. The voltage selector has been factory set for the mains supply voltage in the country where this unit was sold. Changing the voltage selector may require the use of a different power supply cord or attachment plug, or both. To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, refer servicing to qualified maintenance personnel. 4. Do not use this product near water - for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, or the like. 5. This product should only be used with a stand or cart that is recommended by the manufacturer. 6. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and speakers or headphones, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. 7. 8. 9. 10. The product should be located so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. The product should be located away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, or other products that produce heat. The product should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on the product. This product may be equipped with a polarized line plug (one blade wider than the other). This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the plug. The power supply cord of the product should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time. When unplugging the power supply cord, do not pull on the cord, but grasp it by the plug. Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through openings. The product should be serviced by qualified service personnel when: A. The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the product; C. The product has been exposed to rain; D. The product does not appear to be operating normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; E. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged. Do not attempt to service the product beyond that described in the user maintenance instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel. WARNING: Do not place objects on the products power supply cord, or place the product in a position where anyone could trip over, walk on, or roll anything over cords of any type. Do not allow the product to rest on or be installed over cords of any type. Improper installations of this type create the possibility of a fire hazard and/or personal injury.

11.

12. 13.

14.

15.

RADIO AND TELEVISION INTERFERENCE

WARNING: Changes or modifications to this instrument not expressly approved by Young Chang could void your authority to operate the instrument. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or other equipment use only high quality shielded cables. NOTE: This instrument has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This instrument generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this instrument does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the instrument off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the instrument and the receiver. Connect the instrument into an outlet on a circuit other than the one to which the receiver is connected. If necessary consult your dealer or an experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions. NOTICE This apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications. AVIS Le present appareil numerique nemet pas de bruits radioelectriques depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques de la class B prescrites dans le Reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des Communications du Canada.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

ii

Important Safety Instructions

1)Readtheseinstructions 2)Keeptheseinstructions. 3)Heedallwarnings. 4)Followallinstructions. 5)Donotusethisapparatusnearwater. 6)Cleanonlywithdrycloth. 7)Donotblockanyoftheventilationopenings.Installinaccordancewiththemanufacturers instructions. 8)Donotinstallnearanyheatsourcessuchasradiators,heatregisters,stoves,orotherapparatus (includingamplifiers)thatproduceheat. 9)Donotdefeatthesafetypurposeofthepolarizedorgroundingtypeplug.Apolarizedplughas twobladeswithonewiderthantheother.Agroundingtypeplughastwobladesandathird groundingprong.Thewidebladeorthethirdprongareprovidedforyoursafety.Iftheprovided plugdoesnotfitintoyouroutlet,consultanelectricianforreplacementoftheobsoleteoutlet. 10)Protectthepowercordfrombeingwalkedonorpinched,particularlyatplugs, conveniencereceptacles,andthepointwheretheyexitfromtheapparatus. 11)Onlyuseattachments/accessoriesspecifiedbythemanufacturer. 12)Useonlywithacart,stand,tripod,bracket,ortablespecifiedbythe manufacturer,orsoldwiththeapparatus.Whenacartisused,usecautionwhen movingthecart/apparatuscombinationtoavoidinjuryfromtipover. 13)Unplugthisapparatusduringlightningstormsorwhenunusedforlongperiodsoftime. 14)CAUTION:Dangerofexplosionifbatteryisincorrectlyreplaced.Replaceonlywiththesameor equivalenttype(CR2032). 15)Referallservicingtoqualifiedservicepersonnel.Servicingisrequiredwhentheapparatushas beendamagedinanyway,suchaspowersupplycordorplugisdamaged,liquidhasbeenspilled orobjectshavefallenintotheapparatus,theapparatushasbeenexposedtorainormoisture,does notoperatenormally,orhasbeendropped. Warning- To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture. Do not expose this equipment to dripping or splashing and ensure that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases, are placed on the equipment. To completely disconnect this equipment from the AC Mains, disconnect the power supply cord plug from the AC receptacle.

iii

Kurzweil International Contacts

ContacttheKurzweilofficelistedbelowtolocateyourlocalKurzweilrepresentative.

AmericanMusic&Sound 5304DerryAvenue#C AgouraHills California91301USA

telephone:(800)9944984 fax:(818)5970411 Email:Info@AmericanMusicAndSound.com

KurzweilCo.,LTD iParkBuilding#102,Floor9 JeongjaDong9,BundangGu SoungnamShi,GyeonggiDo463859 SouthKorea

www.ycpiano.co.kr www.youngchang.com www.kurzweil.com

TECHNICALSUPPORT Email:support@Kurzweil.com

iv

Table Of Contents
KurzweilInternationalContacts......................................................................................................................................iv

Chapter 1

Introduction

KeepingCurrent ..............................................................................................................................................................12 OverviewofthePC3K.....................................................................................................................................................12 HowthePC3KWorks .....................................................................................................................................................13 VASTSynthesis ................................................................................................................................................................13 KB3ToneWheelEmulation ...........................................................................................................................................13 VA1Programs .................................................................................................................................................................13 HowtoUseThisManual ................................................................................................................................................14 DoIHaveEverything?....................................................................................................................................................14 BootLoader.......................................................................................................................................................................14 Battery................................................................................................................................................................................14 Options ..............................................................................................................................................................................15 SoundROMExpansionCard..................................................................................................................................15 Pedals..........................................................................................................................................................................15 RibbonController .....................................................................................................................................................15 BreathController ......................................................................................................................................................15

Chapter 2

Startup

MakeConnections ...........................................................................................................................................................21 MakeMusic.......................................................................................................................................................................21 StartuptheDetails ........................................................................................................................................................22 BeforeYouStart... .....................................................................................................................................................22 ConnectingthePowerCable(LineCord) .............................................................................................................22 ConnectingAudioCables........................................................................................................................................22 ConnectingMIDI ......................................................................................................................................................23 Pedals..........................................................................................................................................................................24 Breath..........................................................................................................................................................................24 Ribbon ........................................................................................................................................................................25 SwitchingOnthePower ..........................................................................................................................................25 USBStoragePort.......................................................................................................................................................26 USBComputerPort ..................................................................................................................................................26 SettingtheClock .......................................................................................................................................................27 PC3KPrograms ................................................................................................................................................................27 SelectingPrograms ...................................................................................................................................................27 EasyAudition............................................................................................................................................................27 ProgramModeDisplay ...........................................................................................................................................27 VASTPrograms.........................................................................................................................................................28 KB3Programs............................................................................................................................................................28 Setups ................................................................................................................................................................................29 QuickAccess.....................................................................................................................................................................29 TheOtherModes ...........................................................................................................................................................210 SoftwareUpgrades ........................................................................................................................................................210

TOC-i

Chapter 3

User Interface Basics

ModeSelection .................................................................................................................................................................31 ModeButtons ...................................................................................................................................................................32 BankButtons.....................................................................................................................................................................32 Sliders ................................................................................................................................................................................33 ProgramandCategoryButtons .....................................................................................................................................34 Pickingfavorites .......................................................................................................................................................34 PitchWheelandModWheel .........................................................................................................................................35 Navigation ........................................................................................................................................................................36 TheDisplay................................................................................................................................................................36 Pages ...........................................................................................................................................................................36 TheTopLine..............................................................................................................................................................36 TheBottomLine........................................................................................................................................................36 TheSoftButtons........................................................................................................................................................37 TheCursorButtons ..................................................................................................................................................37 TheChan/LayerButtons..........................................................................................................................................37 TheEditButton .........................................................................................................................................................38 TheExitButton .........................................................................................................................................................38 DataEntry .........................................................................................................................................................................39 TheAlphaWheel ......................................................................................................................................................39 ThePlus/MinusButtons ..........................................................................................................................................39 TheAlphanumericPad ............................................................................................................................................39 DoubleButtonPresses ...........................................................................................................................................310 IntuitiveDataEntry.......................................................................................................................................................311 ChangingtheCurrentLayerinMultiLayerPrograms ....................................................................................311 Search...............................................................................................................................................................................312 QuickSongRecordingandPlayback..........................................................................................................................312

Chapter 4

The Operating Modes

WhattheModesAre .......................................................................................................................................................41 SelectingModes ...............................................................................................................................................................41 FindingSquareOne..................................................................................................................................................42 UsingtheModes ..............................................................................................................................................................42 ProgramMode ..........................................................................................................................................................42 SetupMode................................................................................................................................................................42 QuickAccessMode ..................................................................................................................................................43 EffectsMode ..............................................................................................................................................................43 MIDIMode ................................................................................................................................................................43 MasterMode .............................................................................................................................................................43 SongMode .................................................................................................................................................................43 StorageMode ............................................................................................................................................................43

Chapter 5

Editing Conventions

IntroductiontoEditing ...................................................................................................................................................51 WhatsanObject?......................................................................................................................................................51 ObjectTypeandID ..........................................................................................................................................................52 SavingandNaming.........................................................................................................................................................53 ROMObjects .............................................................................................................................................................54 MemoryObjects ........................................................................................................................................................54

TOC-ii

KeyboardNaming ....................................................................................................................................................55 DeletingObjects ...............................................................................................................................................................56 DependentObjects ...................................................................................................................................................56 SavingandLoadingFilesStorageMode...................................................................................................................56 SpecialButtonFunctions ................................................................................................................................................57

Chapter 6

Program Mode

VASTandKB3Programs................................................................................................................................................61 VASTProgramStructure ................................................................................................................................................62 KB3ProgramStructure ...................................................................................................................................................64 KB3Mode ..................................................................................................................................................................64 RealtimeControlsinKB3Mode............................................................................................................................65 PlayingKB3Programs .............................................................................................................................................65 KB3ModeButtons(MuteButtons) ........................................................................................................................65 MIDIControlofKB3Programs..............................................................................................................................66 TheProgramModePage ................................................................................................................................................69 ControlSetup ............................................................................................................................................................69 TheSoftButtonsinProgramMode .....................................................................................................................610 ControllerEntryValuesinProgramMode.........................................................................................................610 EditingVASTPrograms................................................................................................................................................611 TheSoftButtonsintheProgramEditor ..............................................................................................................611 TheMODEButtonsintheProgramEditor.........................................................................................................612 AlgorithmBasics ............................................................................................................................................................613 CommonDSPControlParameters ......................................................................................................................614 AltInputforAlgorithms(CascadeMode)..........................................................................................................617 DynamicVAST........................................................................................................................................................618 TheKEYMAPPage........................................................................................................................................................619 Keymap ....................................................................................................................................................................619 Transpose(Xpose)...................................................................................................................................................619 KeyTracking(KeyTrk) ...........................................................................................................................................619 VelocityTracking(VelTrk) .....................................................................................................................................620 Method(AltMethod) ..............................................................................................................................................620 Stereo ........................................................................................................................................................................620 TimbreShift .............................................................................................................................................................621 PlaybackMode........................................................................................................................................................621 AlternativeController(AltControl) .....................................................................................................................621 AlternativeSwitch(AltControlandAltMethod) ...............................................................................................621 TheLAYERPage ............................................................................................................................................................622 LowKey(LoKey)....................................................................................................................................................623 HighKey(HiKey)...................................................................................................................................................623 LowVelocity(LoVel)..............................................................................................................................................623 HighVelocity(HiVel).............................................................................................................................................623 PitchBendMode(Bend)........................................................................................................................................623 Trigger(Trig) ...........................................................................................................................................................623 DelayControl(DlyCtl)...........................................................................................................................................623 MinimumDelay(MinDly),MaximumDelay(MaxDly) ..................................................................................624 Enable .......................................................................................................................................................................624 EnableSense(S) ......................................................................................................................................................624 Opaque .....................................................................................................................................................................625 SustainPedal(SusPdl) ...........................................................................................................................................625

TOC-iii

SostenutoPedal(SosPdl) .......................................................................................................................................625 FreezePedal(FrzPdl) .............................................................................................................................................625 IgnoreRelease(IgnRel) ..........................................................................................................................................625 HoldThroughAttack(ThrAtt) .............................................................................................................................626 HoldUntilDecay(TilDec).....................................................................................................................................626 ThePITCHPage.............................................................................................................................................................626 TheAMPPage................................................................................................................................................................626 TheAlgorithm(ALG)Page ..........................................................................................................................................627 TheDSPControl(DSPCTL)Page ................................................................................................................................628 TheDSPModulation(DSPMOD)Page ......................................................................................................................629 TheOUTPUTPage ........................................................................................................................................................630 Pan ............................................................................................................................................................................631 PanMode .................................................................................................................................................................631 Output:Pan,Gain,andMode...............................................................................................................................632 PanTable ..................................................................................................................................................................632 CrossfadeandCrossfadeSense(XFadeSense) ...................................................................................................632 DrumRemap ...........................................................................................................................................................632 ExclusiveZoneMap ...............................................................................................................................................633 TheCOMMONPage .....................................................................................................................................................633 PitchBendRangeUpandDown..........................................................................................................................634 Monophonic ............................................................................................................................................................634 LegatoPlay ..............................................................................................................................................................634 Portamento ..............................................................................................................................................................634 PortamentoRate......................................................................................................................................................635 AttackPortamento..................................................................................................................................................635 Globals......................................................................................................................................................................635 Output:Gain,Pan,andPanMode .......................................................................................................................635 DemoSong...............................................................................................................................................................636 TheLFOPage .................................................................................................................................................................637 MinimumRate ........................................................................................................................................................638 MaximumRate........................................................................................................................................................638 RateControl.............................................................................................................................................................638 LFOShape................................................................................................................................................................638 LFOPhase ................................................................................................................................................................638 TheASRPage .................................................................................................................................................................639 Trigger ......................................................................................................................................................................639 Mode.........................................................................................................................................................................639 Delay.........................................................................................................................................................................639 Attack .......................................................................................................................................................................640 Release......................................................................................................................................................................640 TheFunction(FUN)Page .............................................................................................................................................640 TheAmplitudeEnvelope(AMPENV)Page...............................................................................................................641 AttackSegmentTimes ...........................................................................................................................................642 AttackSegmentLevels...........................................................................................................................................642 DecaySegment........................................................................................................................................................643 ReleaseSegments....................................................................................................................................................643 LoopType ................................................................................................................................................................643 NumberofLoops....................................................................................................................................................643 TheEnvelope2(ENV2)andEnvelope3(ENV3)Pages ...........................................................................................643 TheEnvelopeControl(ENVCTL)Page ......................................................................................................................644 Adjust .......................................................................................................................................................................645

TOC-iv

KeyTracking............................................................................................................................................................645 VelocityTracking ....................................................................................................................................................646 Source,Depth ..........................................................................................................................................................646 Impact.......................................................................................................................................................................646 TheProgramFX(PROGFX)Page ................................................................................................................................647 Insert .........................................................................................................................................................................647 Aux1,Aux2 ............................................................................................................................................................647 Output ......................................................................................................................................................................647 AuxiliarySendParameters....................................................................................................................................648 Aux1Mod,Aux2Mod ...........................................................................................................................................648 TheLayerFX(LYR_FX)Page .......................................................................................................................................649 TheControllers(CTLS)Page........................................................................................................................................650 FunctionSoftButtons ....................................................................................................................................................651 SetControllers(SetCtl)...........................................................................................................................................651 NewLayer(NewLyr) .............................................................................................................................................651 DuplicateLayer(DupLyr) .....................................................................................................................................651 ImportLayer(ImpLyr)...........................................................................................................................................651 DeleteLayer(DelLyr).............................................................................................................................................651 Name ........................................................................................................................................................................651 Save...........................................................................................................................................................................652 Delete........................................................................................................................................................................652 INFO .........................................................................................................................................................................652 EditingVASTProgramsWithKVAOscillators.........................................................................................................653 BasicUseofKVAOscillators ................................................................................................................................653 SettingKVAOscillatorType .................................................................................................................................654 AdvancedUseOfKVAOscillators ......................................................................................................................655 EditingKB3Programs...................................................................................................................................................660 TheToneWheels(TONEWL)Page .............................................................................................................................660 UpperToneWheelKeymap..................................................................................................................................660 UpperVolumeAdjust ............................................................................................................................................661 NumberofToneWheels ........................................................................................................................................661 OrganMap...............................................................................................................................................................661 WheelVolumeMap................................................................................................................................................661 Globals......................................................................................................................................................................661 LowerTranspose/UpperTranspose ...................................................................................................................661 TheDrawbars(DRAWBR)Page ..................................................................................................................................662 Mode.........................................................................................................................................................................662 Steps..........................................................................................................................................................................662 Volume .....................................................................................................................................................................662 Tune ..........................................................................................................................................................................662 TheSetDrawbars(SetDBR)SoftButton.....................................................................................................................662 ThePITCHPage.............................................................................................................................................................663 TheAMPPage................................................................................................................................................................663 ThePERC1Page.............................................................................................................................................................664 Percussion ................................................................................................................................................................664 Volume .....................................................................................................................................................................664 Decay ........................................................................................................................................................................664 Harmonic .................................................................................................................................................................665 VelTrack....................................................................................................................................................................665 LowHarm.................................................................................................................................................................665 HighHarm................................................................................................................................................................665

TOC-v

StealBar.....................................................................................................................................................................665 ThePERC2Page.............................................................................................................................................................665 PercLevel,DecayTime,OrgLevel .........................................................................................................................665 TheKEYCLKPage .........................................................................................................................................................666 KeyClick...................................................................................................................................................................666 Volume .....................................................................................................................................................................666 Decay ........................................................................................................................................................................666 VelTrk .......................................................................................................................................................................666 Pitch ..........................................................................................................................................................................667 Random ....................................................................................................................................................................667 ReTrigThresh ...........................................................................................................................................................667 NoteAttack..............................................................................................................................................................667 NoteRelease ............................................................................................................................................................667 TheMISCPage ...............................................................................................................................................................668 PreampResp.............................................................................................................................................................668 Leakage ....................................................................................................................................................................668 LeakMode ................................................................................................................................................................669 SpeedCtl ...................................................................................................................................................................669 VibChorCtl...............................................................................................................................................................669 VibChorSel...............................................................................................................................................................669 VolAdjust .................................................................................................................................................................669 BendRngUp,BendRngDn .....................................................................................................................................669 Sustain ......................................................................................................................................................................669 Sostenuto..................................................................................................................................................................669 LesliePedal ...............................................................................................................................................................669 TheEQPage....................................................................................................................................................................670 TheOUTPUTPage ........................................................................................................................................................670 TheProgramFX(PROGFX)Page ................................................................................................................................671 TheLFO,ASR,andFUNPages ...................................................................................................................................671 ProgrammingTips.........................................................................................................................................................671

Chapter 7

Setup Mode

TheControlSetup............................................................................................................................................................72 ZonestatusLEDsinSetupMode...........................................................................................................................74 SoloingaZone...........................................................................................................................................................75 TheSetupEditor ..............................................................................................................................................................75 TheChannel/Program(CH/PROG)Page .....................................................................................................................76 Program......................................................................................................................................................................76 Destination.................................................................................................................................................................77 Channel ......................................................................................................................................................................77 MidiBank....................................................................................................................................................................77 MIDIProgram(MidiProg) ......................................................................................................................................78 Status ..........................................................................................................................................................................78 InputChannel ...........................................................................................................................................................78 MIDIBankMode(BankMode) ...............................................................................................................................79 EntryProgramChange(EntryProgChg)...............................................................................................................79 Arpeggiator ...............................................................................................................................................................79 TheKey/Velocity(KEYVEL)Page ..............................................................................................................................710 LowKey(LoKey),HighKey(HiKey) .................................................................................................................711 Transpose .................................................................................................................................................................711

TOC-vi

NoteMap .................................................................................................................................................................711 VelocityScale(VelScale) ........................................................................................................................................712 VelocityOffset .........................................................................................................................................................713 VelocityCurve(VelCurve).....................................................................................................................................715 LowVelocity(LoVel),HighVelocity(HiVel).......................................................................................................717 ThePan/Volume(PAN/VOL)Page .............................................................................................................................718 EntryVolume,ExitVolume...................................................................................................................................718 EntryPan,ExitPan .................................................................................................................................................718 TheBENDPage..............................................................................................................................................................719 BendRange(Semitones)andBendRange(Cents):UpandDown .................................................................719 AuxBend1UpandAuxBend1Down ..............................................................................................................720 AuxBend2Range ..................................................................................................................................................720 Controllers ......................................................................................................................................................................720 ContinuousControllers .........................................................................................................................................721 SwitchControllers ..................................................................................................................................................722 TheControllerDestinationList ............................................................................................................................722 ShiftKeyNumber,ShiftKey(ShKeyNum,ShiftKey) .......................................................................................727 ContinuousControllerParameters ......................................................................................................................730 SwitchControllerParameters ...............................................................................................................................731 TheWHEELPage...........................................................................................................................................................733 TheSLIDERandSLID2Pages......................................................................................................................................734 TheContinuousControlPedal(CPEDAL)Page .......................................................................................................735 ThePressure(PRESS)Page...........................................................................................................................................736 TheFootswitchPages(FTSW1,FTSW2,FTSW3) ...................................................................................................737 TheArpeggiatorSwitch(ARPSW)Page ...................................................................................................................738 TheSWITCHPage .........................................................................................................................................................739 TheRIBBONPage..........................................................................................................................................................740 TheRibbonConfiguration(RIBCFG)Page ................................................................................................................741 RibbonConfiguration ............................................................................................................................................741 PositionMode(PosMode) .....................................................................................................................................741 Spring .......................................................................................................................................................................742 Center .......................................................................................................................................................................742 TheARPEGGIATOR&ARPEGGIATOR2(ARP1,ARP2)Pages ...........................................................................742 TheARPEGGIATORPage.....................................................................................................................................743 TheARPEGGIATOR2Page..................................................................................................................................750 RealtimeControlofArpeggiatorParameters ...................................................................................................754 TheCOMMONPage .....................................................................................................................................................756 Tempo.......................................................................................................................................................................756 ClockSource ............................................................................................................................................................756 AuxFXChannel......................................................................................................................................................756 KB3Channel............................................................................................................................................................757 Mutes ........................................................................................................................................................................757 ArpeggiatorGlobal(ArpGlobal) ..........................................................................................................................757 ArpeggiatorSync(ArpSync).................................................................................................................................757 Riffs ..................................................................................................................................................................................758 TheRIFF1Page .......................................................................................................................................................758 TheRIFF2Page .......................................................................................................................................................761 RealtimeControlofRiffParameters...................................................................................................................766 TheFXPages:FX,AUXFX1,AUXFX2,andMASTFX ..............................................................................................767 TheProgrammableSwitchPages:SWPRG1toSWPRG8 ........................................................................................767 TheUtilitySoftButtons.................................................................................................................................................767

TOC-vii

Name ........................................................................................................................................................................767 Save...........................................................................................................................................................................767 Delete........................................................................................................................................................................768 NewZone(NewZn) ...............................................................................................................................................768 DuplicateZone(DupZn) .......................................................................................................................................768 ImportZone(ImpZn).............................................................................................................................................768 DeleteZone(DelZn)...............................................................................................................................................768 TRIGGERKEYS(KEYTRG)..........................................................................................................................................769 RecordingASetupToSongMode ..............................................................................................................................769

Chapter 8

Quick Access Mode

SoftButtonsInQuickAccessMode.......................................................................................................................82 TheQAEditor ..................................................................................................................................................................82

Chapter 9

Effects

BasicOverview.................................................................................................................................................................91 EffectsStagesandRouting ......................................................................................................................................91 ProcessorPowerAllocation ....................................................................................................................................92 ANoteonModes......................................................................................................................................................93 AuxOverride.............................................................................................................................................................93 MasterEffects ............................................................................................................................................................94 EffectsMode .....................................................................................................................................................................95 TheCHANFXPage..........................................................................................................................................................95 TheAUXFX1andAUXFX2Pages .................................................................................................................................95 Override .....................................................................................................................................................................96 Chain ..........................................................................................................................................................................96 Output ........................................................................................................................................................................96 ModOverride............................................................................................................................................................96 SendLevelsandPre/PostIns. .................................................................................................................................96 TheMASTERPage...........................................................................................................................................................97 Mode...........................................................................................................................................................................97 Order ..........................................................................................................................................................................97 MasterFX ...................................................................................................................................................................97 TheChainEditor..............................................................................................................................................................98 TheMAINPage................................................................................................................................................................98 EditingEffectblocks ................................................................................................................................................99 TheMODPages ...............................................................................................................................................................99 Box ..............................................................................................................................................................................99 Param..........................................................................................................................................................................99 Adjust .........................................................................................................................................................................99 Source .........................................................................................................................................................................99 Depth ..........................................................................................................................................................................99 FXLFO,FXASR,andFXFUNpages ..............................................................................................................................99 INFOEDITpage(INFO)................................................................................................................................................910 EffectsParameters..........................................................................................................................................................910 GeneralParameters........................................................................................................................................................910 Delays ..............................................................................................................................................................................912 ComplexEcho .........................................................................................................................................................912 SpectralMultitapDelays .......................................................................................................................................913

TOC-viii

GatedDuckingDelay.............................................................................................................................................913 DegenRegen.............................................................................................................................................................913 Equalizers(EQ) ..............................................................................................................................................................913 Enhancers.................................................................................................................................................................914 EQMorpher.............................................................................................................................................................914 Compressors,Expanders,andGates .......................................................................................................................... 914 Expansion ................................................................................................................................................................915 MultibandCompression........................................................................................................................................915 Gates .........................................................................................................................................................................915 SuperGate ...............................................................................................................................................................916 Chorus .............................................................................................................................................................................916 Flanger.............................................................................................................................................................................917 Quantize+Flange ...................................................................................................................................................917 LaserVerb ........................................................................................................................................................................917 Filters ...............................................................................................................................................................................918 ResonantFilter ........................................................................................................................................................918 EnvelopeFilter ........................................................................................................................................................918 TriggeredFilter........................................................................................................................................................918 LFOFilter .................................................................................................................................................................919 Distortion ........................................................................................................................................................................919 Polydistort................................................................................................................................................................920 RotatingSpeakers ..........................................................................................................................................................920 Vibrato/Chorus........................................................................................................................................................921 TremoloandAutoPan ...................................................................................................................................................922 AutoPan ...................................................................................................................................................................922 Tremolo ....................................................................................................................................................................922 Pitcher..............................................................................................................................................................................922 RingModulation ............................................................................................................................................................923 StereoSimulation ...........................................................................................................................................................923 StereoImage ............................................................................................................................................................924 StereoAnalyze................................................................................................................................................................924 FXModDiagnostic .........................................................................................................................................................924 MonoAlgorithms...........................................................................................................................................................925

Chapter 10 MIDI Mode

TheTRANSMITPage ....................................................................................................................................................101 ControlSetup ..........................................................................................................................................................102 Destination...............................................................................................................................................................102 Channel ....................................................................................................................................................................102 Transpose .................................................................................................................................................................102 VelocityMap(Transmit) ........................................................................................................................................103 PressureMap(Transmit) .......................................................................................................................................104 ProgramChange(ProgChang) .............................................................................................................................105 ChangeSetups(ChgSetups)..................................................................................................................................105 TheRECEIVEPage ........................................................................................................................................................105 BasicChannel ..........................................................................................................................................................106 MIDIReceiveMode(MIDIMode) .......................................................................................................................106 AllNotesOff ...........................................................................................................................................................106 ProgramChangeMode(PrgChgMode) ..............................................................................................................106 VelocityMap(Receive) ..........................................................................................................................................107

TOC-ix

PressureMap(Receive) .........................................................................................................................................108 SystemExclusiveID(SysExID) ............................................................................................................................109 BankSelect ...............................................................................................................................................................109 LocalKeyboardChannel(LocalKbdCh) ...........................................................................................................1010 TheChannelsPage.......................................................................................................................................................1013 Enable .....................................................................................................................................................................1013 Program..................................................................................................................................................................1013 Pan ..........................................................................................................................................................................1014 Volume ...................................................................................................................................................................1014 ProgramLock,PanLock,VolumeLock ............................................................................................................1014 ProgramChangeFormats...........................................................................................................................................1015 ExtendedProgramChanges ...............................................................................................................................1015 QAccess ..................................................................................................................................................................1016 TheSoftButtonsinMIDIMode.................................................................................................................................1018 ProgramChange(PrgChg)..................................................................................................................................1018 ResetChannels(RsetCh)......................................................................................................................................1018 Panic........................................................................................................................................................................1018

Chapter 11 Master Mode

MAIN...............................................................................................................................................................................111 Tune ..........................................................................................................................................................................112 Transpose .................................................................................................................................................................112 FXMode...................................................................................................................................................................112 DrumRemap ...........................................................................................................................................................112 IDEntry....................................................................................................................................................................112 SetupControllers(SetupCtls) ...............................................................................................................................112 MasterTableLock(MasterLock) .........................................................................................................................113 DemoButton ...........................................................................................................................................................113 ButtonsMode(Buttons).........................................................................................................................................113 MAPS...............................................................................................................................................................................114 VelocityMap(Master)............................................................................................................................................114 PressureMap(Master)...........................................................................................................................................116 Intonation.................................................................................................................................................................117 KeyActionMap ......................................................................................................................................................118 IntonationKey(Int.Key)........................................................................................................................................118 DefaultSequence ....................................................................................................................................................119 OUTPUT..........................................................................................................................................................................119 OutputClock ...........................................................................................................................................................119 DigitalOutputVolume(Dig.outvolume)..........................................................................................................119 DigitalOutput(Dig.Out) ......................................................................................................................................119 AuxOutPairMode ................................................................................................................................................119 ClockSource ..........................................................................................................................................................1110 TEMPO ..........................................................................................................................................................................1110 GeneralMIDIMode(GMOn,GMOff)....................................................................................................................1111 OBJECT..........................................................................................................................................................................1112 Rename...................................................................................................................................................................1112 Delete......................................................................................................................................................................1113 Utils................................................................................................................................................................................1114 CLOCK ..........................................................................................................................................................................1115 Reset...............................................................................................................................................................................1116

TOC-x

Loader............................................................................................................................................................................1116 About .............................................................................................................................................................................1116 Save ................................................................................................................................................................................1116 SAMPLEMEMORY(MEMORY) ..............................................................................................................................1117 MAP........................................................................................................................................................................1117 Defragment(Defrag) ............................................................................................................................................1117 PreviewSample(PRVIEW) ........................................................................................................................................1117

Chapter 12 Song Mode and the Song Editor

GettingStartedwiththeSequencer ............................................................................................................................121 WhatisaSequencer?..............................................................................................................................................121 SongMode:TheMAINPage .......................................................................................................................................121 CurrentSong(CurSong) ........................................................................................................................................122 Tempo.......................................................................................................................................................................122 RecordingTrack(RecTrk) ......................................................................................................................................123 Program(Prog) .......................................................................................................................................................123 TrackNumber(Trk:#).............................................................................................................................................123 Volume(Vol)............................................................................................................................................................124 Pan ............................................................................................................................................................................125 Mode.........................................................................................................................................................................126 Location(Locat) ......................................................................................................................................................126 ModeIndicators(+andx): ....................................................................................................................................126 ActivityIndicators ..................................................................................................................................................126 TrackStatusIndicators...........................................................................................................................................126 TrackChannels........................................................................................................................................................127 SoftButtonsontheMAINPage ........................................................................................................................... 127 TheSaveChangesDialog ......................................................................................................................................128 SongMode:TheBIGPage ..........................................................................................................................................1210 TimeIn ...................................................................................................................................................................1210 TimeOut ................................................................................................................................................................1210 SongEnd ................................................................................................................................................................1211 Loop........................................................................................................................................................................1211 Punch......................................................................................................................................................................1211 Metro ......................................................................................................................................................................1211 SongMode:TheFXPages ..........................................................................................................................................1211 SongMode:TheMIXERPage ....................................................................................................................................1212 TheRec,Play,andStopSoftButtons .................................................................................................................1212 TheKeepSoftButton ...........................................................................................................................................1212 TheDoneSoftButton ...........................................................................................................................................1212 SongMode:TheMETROPage...................................................................................................................................1213 Metronome ............................................................................................................................................................1213 CountOff ................................................................................................................................................................1213 Program..................................................................................................................................................................1213 Channel ..................................................................................................................................................................1213 StrongNote............................................................................................................................................................1214 StrongVel...............................................................................................................................................................1214 SoftNote ................................................................................................................................................................1214 SoftVel ...................................................................................................................................................................1214 TheRec,Play,andStopSoftButtons .................................................................................................................1214 TheDoneSoftButton ...........................................................................................................................................1214

TOC-xi

SongMode:TheFilterPages(RECFLTandPLYFLT).............................................................................................1215 Notes.......................................................................................................................................................................1215 LoKey .....................................................................................................................................................................1215 Hi.............................................................................................................................................................................1215 LoVel.......................................................................................................................................................................1216 Hi.............................................................................................................................................................................1216 Controllers .............................................................................................................................................................1216 Controller...............................................................................................................................................................1216 LoVal.......................................................................................................................................................................1216 Hi.............................................................................................................................................................................1216 PitchBend ...............................................................................................................................................................1216 ProgChange ...........................................................................................................................................................1216 MonoPress .............................................................................................................................................................1216 PolyPress ................................................................................................................................................................1216 TheRec,Play,andStopSoftButtons .................................................................................................................1216 TheDoneSoftButton ...........................................................................................................................................1216 SongMode:TheMISCPage .......................................................................................................................................1217 ControlChase........................................................................................................................................................1217 Quant ......................................................................................................................................................................1217 Grid.........................................................................................................................................................................1217 Swing ......................................................................................................................................................................1218 Release....................................................................................................................................................................1218 KeyWait.................................................................................................................................................................1218 SongMode:TheSTATSPage .....................................................................................................................................1218 TheSongEditor............................................................................................................................................................1219 SongEditor:TheCOMMONPage ............................................................................................................................1219 Tempo.....................................................................................................................................................................1219 TimeSig...................................................................................................................................................................1219 FXTrack .................................................................................................................................................................1220 DrumTrack.............................................................................................................................................................1220 MidiDst ..................................................................................................................................................................1220 SoftButtonsontheCOMMONPage .................................................................................................................1221 SongEditor:TheTRACKPage ..................................................................................................................................1221 CommonParametersforEditSong:TrackFunctions .....................................................................................1222 Region/CriteriaBoxParameters .........................................................................................................................1222 SoftButtonsontheTRACKPage .......................................................................................................................1223 SongEditor:TrackFunctions .....................................................................................................................................1224 Erase .......................................................................................................................................................................1224 Copy .......................................................................................................................................................................1224 Bounce ....................................................................................................................................................................1225 Insert .......................................................................................................................................................................1226 Delete......................................................................................................................................................................1226 Quantize.................................................................................................................................................................1227 Shift.........................................................................................................................................................................1228 Transpose ...............................................................................................................................................................1228 Grab ........................................................................................................................................................................1229 Change ...................................................................................................................................................................1230 Remap.....................................................................................................................................................................1231 SongEditor:TheEVENTPage...................................................................................................................................1231 InitialProgram,Volume,Pan..............................................................................................................................1232 Location..................................................................................................................................................................1232

TOC-xii

Bar,Beat,andTick ................................................................................................................................................1232 EventTypeandValue ..........................................................................................................................................1232 SoftButtonsontheEVENTPage .......................................................................................................................1233 TempoTrack ..........................................................................................................................................................1233

Chapter 13 Storage Mode

StorageModePage ........................................................................................................................................................131 UsingUSBDevices .................................................................................................................................................132 Directories .......................................................................................................................................................................133 Path ...........................................................................................................................................................................133 DiskDriveInformation..........................................................................................................................................133 CommonDialogues.......................................................................................................................................................134 TheSelectDirectoryDialogue ..............................................................................................................................134 TheFileName/NewDirectory/RenameDialogue.............................................................................................134 TheSTOREPage ............................................................................................................................................................135 TheStoreAdvancedPage......................................................................................................................................136 TheLOADPage .............................................................................................................................................................137 Loading.WAVand.AIFAudioFiles ...................................................................................................................137 LoadingIndividualObjectsFroma.P3KOrCompatibleFileType ...............................................................138 LoadingMethods....................................................................................................................................................139 TheUtilities(UTILS)Page ..........................................................................................................................................1311 SoftButtonsontheUtilitiesPage .......................................................................................................................1311 Export ............................................................................................................................................................................1312 Format ...........................................................................................................................................................................1312

Chapter 14 Keymap and Sample Editing

TheKeymapEditor .......................................................................................................................................................141 KeymapEditorParameters ...................................................................................................................................143 TheSoftButtonsintheKeymapEditor...............................................................................................................145 SpecialDoubleButtonPressesintheKeymapEditor.......................................................................................146 BuildingaKeymap ........................................................................................................................................................147 EditingSamples .............................................................................................................................................................149 TheMiscellaneous(MISC)Page ........................................................................................................................... 149 TheTRIMPage......................................................................................................................................................1412

Appendix A Specifications
MIDIImplementationChart .........................................................................................................................................A1 Specifications ...................................................................................................................................................................A2

Appendix B PC3K Bootloader

UsingtheBootloaderMenu ................................................................................................................................... B1 SystemUpdate(PC3KSoftware,Objects,Etc.) ................................................................................................... B2 RunDiagsPC3KDiagnosticsUtility .................................................................................................................. B2 SystemReset............................................................................................................................................................. B2 SystemUtilities ........................................................................................................................................................ B3

TOC-xiii

Appendix C Changing PC3K Voltage

Removingthefuseholder ...................................................................................................................................... C1

Appendix D PC3K Objects (V 1.31)

Programs ..........................................................................................................................................................................D1 Setups ...............................................................................................................................................................................D9 EffectPresetswithAlgorithms ...................................................................................................................................D11 HowtoUseTheseTables......................................................................................................................................D11 Reverbs ....................................................................................................................................................................D11 Delays ......................................................................................................................................................................D15 Chorus .....................................................................................................................................................................D17 Flange ......................................................................................................................................................................D18 Phaser ......................................................................................................................................................................D18 Trem/Panner/Spatial..........................................................................................................................................D19 Rotary ......................................................................................................................................................................D19 Distortion ................................................................................................................................................................D20 Dynamics ................................................................................................................................................................D21 EQ/Filters ..............................................................................................................................................................D21 Chorus/Combi......................................................................................................................................................D23 Flange/Combi .......................................................................................................................................................D24 EffectChains..................................................................................................................................................................D26

Appendix E PC3K Legacy File Conversion

ObjectTypesandConversionDetails .......................................................................................................................... E1 Soundblock(SampleObjects) ................................................................................................................................ E1 KeymapObjects ....................................................................................................................................................... E1 ProgramObjects....................................................................................................................................................... E1 SetupObjects ............................................................................................................................................................ E1

Index

TOC-xiv

Introduction

Chapter 1 Introduction
Greetings.Yournewinstrumentoffersamazingacoustic,electric,andsynthesizersounds, combinedwithsampleloadingandadvancedprogrammingfeaturesthatwillletyoucreate almostanysoundyoucanimagine.ThismanualcoversthePC3Kinits88,76,and61note configurations(PC3K8,PC3K7,andPC3K6.)Forthemostpart,anywherewetalkaboutthe PC3Kinthismanualwemeananyoftheseinstruments. ThePC3Kcomesloadedwith64MBofROMsounds,poweredbyKurzweilsnewestcustom chipset.Inadditiontothegreatsoundsandprogrammingfeatures,thePC3Kisfullyequipped withperformancefeaturesyoulluseateverygig.Forexample,therearenineconveniently situatedslidersforaccuratelyemulatingthedrawbarsonatonewheelorgansuchasa HammondB3.AndthePC3Ks24dedicatedsoundselectbuttons,alongwithitsQuickAccess bankswillletyouinstantlychooseandchangesoundswheneveryoulike. InadditiontothemanyimpressivefeaturesandsoundsofthePC3,thePC3Kallowsuserstotap intothemassivewealthofsamplesandprogramsdevelopedforourlegendaryKSeriesoverthe past18years.ThePC3KiscapableofloadingmostKseriesobjectfiles(withextensions.KRZ, .K25,or.K26,)includingsamples,keymaps,programs,andsetups,(seeAppendix Efordetails,) onceagainunderscoringourcommitmenttotheconceptofnonobsolescencebydesign. Additionally,thePC3Kcanload.PC3filesthatwerecreatedwiththePC3.ThePC3Kcanalso loadWAVEandAIFFfiles(seepage 137fordetails.)Youcanchoosetodelveintotheextensive librariesofexistingKSeriessamplesordecidetofillthePC3Ksflashmemorywithyourown customsamples.Ineithercase,youhavethemostpowerfulversionofKurzweilsV.A.S.T technologyeverdevelopedatyourfingertipstohelpsculptyoursounds.Samplefilescanbe loadedviaUSBfromathumbdriveordirectlyfromacomputer. ThePC3Koffers128megabytesofusersamplememory,andsamplesremainloadedevenwhile powerisoff.OncesamplesareloadedintothePC3Ksflashmemory,thereiszeroloadtimefor thosesampleswhenpoweringontheinstrument. Advancedprogram,keymapandsampleeditingfeaturesallowyoutocustomizeyoursounds further.Youreabletomapanysampletoanykey,tuneindividualsamples,changethestart,alt start,looppointandendpointofsamplesandevenassignacontrollertoadjustsamplestart pointinrealtime. IfyouveusedotherKurzweilgear,youllhavenotroublegettingupandrunningquickly.Bear inmind,however,thatthePC3Ksbeautiesaremorethanskindeep;youllwanttoreadthis manual,aswellasthematerialsatthewww.kurzweil.comwebsitetotakefulladvantageofyour instrument.

1-1

Introduction Keeping Current

Keeping Current
Checkfornewdocumentationandoperatingsystemupgradesbeforeyoustartusingyour instrument.WhennewsoftwareisavailableforthePC3K,itwillbepostedat www.kurzweil.com.YoullusethePC3KsBootLoader(describedinthismanual)toupgrade yourinstrumenttousethenewsoftware. Picturedbelowisthe88keyPC3K8.

Arp

SW

Overview of the PC3K

ThePC3Ks800+programsincludetheOrchestralandContemporarysoundblocks,General MIDI(GM),StereoTripleStrikePiano,ClassicKeysforrealisticvintageelectricpianosounds, andnewStringSections.Multizoneperformancesetupsarealsoprovided;manyofthese setupsusenotetriggerstoplayfactoryrecordedsongsthatprovidegroovesandarpeggiation thatmakegreattemplatesforperformanceorrecording.Anonboardsequencerwithfront paneltransportbuttonsletsyourecordyourideasanytimeinspirationstrikes.Thissequencer (Songmode)letsyouplaybackMIDItype0or1sequences,recordandplaybackyourown songs,andrecordmultitimbralsequencesreceivedviaMIDI. BeforewegetintoexplainingVAST,hereareafewofthefeaturesthatbythemselvesmakethe PC3Kanimpressivestageandstudiomachine.Ithas128voicepolyphonyandisfullymulti timbral,sothatdifferentprogramscanbeplayedoneachMIDIchannel.Theresanonboard digitaleffectsprocessorprovidingmultiplesimultaneouseffects,includingrealtimeeffects control,internallyorviaMIDI.Infact,thePC3Koffersmoreeffectsprocessingpowerthan KurzweilsmuchlaudedKSP8studioeffectsprocessor. ThePC3Koffers128megabytesofusersamplememory.SamplescanbeloadedviaUSBfroma thumbdriveordirectlyfromacomputer,andsamplesremainloadedevenwhilepowerisoff. OncesamplesareloadedintothePC3Ksflashmemory,thereiszeroloadtimeforthosesamples whenpoweringontheinstrument.ThePC3KiscompatiblewithmostKseriesobjectfiles(with extensions.KRZ,.K25,or.K26,)includingsamples,keymaps,programs,andsetups(see Appendix Efordetails.)Additionally,thePC3Kcanload.PC3filesthatwerecreatedwiththe PC3.ThePC3KcanalsoloadWAVEandAIFFfiles(seepage 137fordetails.) Inadditiontothestandardstereoaudiooutputpair,therearetwoadditionalbalancedanalog outputs,aswellasadigitaloutput.Alloftheoutputsareavailabletoyousimultaneously. Forbackup,storage,andmovingfiles,therestwotypesofUSBportsonthebackpanelofthe PC3K.AUSBstorageportallowsyoutoconnectaUSBdevicesuchasathumbdrive,anda secondUSBComputerportletsyouconnectthePC3KtoacomputerforfiletransferandMIDI connectivity.

1-2

Introduction How the PC3K Works

How the PC3K Works

ThePC3KintegratesthreeMIDIdrivencomponents:aMIDIcontroller(thekeyboard,oran externalMIDIcontroller),asoundengine,andaneffectsprocessorthatemploysthesame effectsusedinKurzweilsKSP8.ThesoundenginerespondstotheMIDIeventsgeneratedby theMIDIcontroller,andturnsthemintosoundsthatareprocessedwithinthevariable architectureofthealgorithmsorbyoscillatorsforKB3programs.Theresultingsoundcanthen beroutedthroughthePC3Kseffectsandtotheaudiooutputs.

VAST Synthesis
ThePC3KsVariableArchitectureSynthesisTechnology(V.A.S.T.)letsyoubuildsoundsfrom realisticinstrumentalsamplesandsampledsynthwaveformsthenmodifythenatureofthose soundsthroughawidevarietyofdigitalsignalprocessing(DSP)functions.ThePC3Kalso generatesitsownsynthwaveforms,whichcanbecombinedwiththesamplesorusedontheir own. WhilemanyothersynthesizersmayofferafixedsetofDSPtools(typicallyfiltering,pitch,and amplitudemodulation)thePC3KsVariableArchitectureletsyouarrangeacombinationofDSP functionsfromalonglistofchoices.Thefunctionsyouchoosedefinethetypeofsynthesisyou use. EachlayerofeveryprogramhasitsownDSParchitecture,whichwecallanalgorithm.Within eachalgorithm,youcanselectfromavarietyofDSPfunctions.Eachfunctioncanbe independentlycontrolledbyavarietyofsourcesincludingLFOs,ASRs,envelopes,asetof uniqueprogrammablefunctions(FUNs),aswellasanyMIDIcontrolmessage.Themany differentDSPfunctionsandthewealthofindependentcontrolsourcesgiveyouanextremely flexible,trulyvastcollectionoftoolsforsoundcreationandmodification. ThePC3KofferspowerfuleditingfeatureswecallDynamicV.A.S.T.andCascadeMode. DynamicV.A.S.T.allowsyoutowireyourownalgorithms,combiningdifferentDSP functionsinanyorderyoulike,includingparallelandserialconfigurations. CascadeModeletsyourouteanylayerofaprogramintotheDSPofanyotherlayer.Anyof the32layersofaprogramcangointoanyotherlayer.

Whenyourereadytojumpinandstartcreatingprograms,turntoChapter 6.

KB3 Tone Wheel Emulation

InadditiontoVASTsynthesis,thePC3Koffersmanyoscillatorbasedprogramsthatgiveyou theclassicsoundoftonewheelorgansliketheHammondB3.KB3mode,aswecallit,is completelyindependentofVAST,andhasitsownsetofeditingprocedures.Ninededicated slidersonthePC3Ksfrontpanelgiveyourealtimedrawbarcontrolovertheseorgansounds. Buttonsabovethesliderscontrolrotatingspeakerspeed,percussion,andotherorganfeatures. ThequickestwaytogettotheKB3programsisbypressingtheKB3button(abovethesliders,to theleftofthescreen).TheblueLEDintheKB3buttonwilllightwhenthecurrentprogramisa KB3program.

VA-1 Programs
TheVA1(VirtualAnalogSynthesizer)programsincludedwiththePC3Kofferrealistic emulationsofclassicanalogsynthesizers,builtfromKurzweilsuniqueantialiasedDSP generatedoscillators.ThePC3Kspowershapedoscillatorsletyoutransitionsmoothlyfromone waveformintoanotherinrealtime,withoutusingcrossfades.

1-3

Introduction How to Use This Manual

VA1programsarescatteredthroughoutthePC3K.LookforthemintheSynthCategoryandthe ClassicKeysBank.YoullseeKVAOscillatorappearintheKeymapscreenonthelefthand sideofthedisplay.

How to Use This Manual

ThismanualdescribeshowtoconnectandpowerupyourPC3K,gettingaroundthefrontpanel, andabriefdescriptionoftheoperatingmodes.Forinformationoneditingandadvanced programmingfeatures,refertoadditionalmaterialprovidedontheKurzweilwebsite: http://www.kurzweil.com ThebestwaytoreadthismanualiswithyourPC3Kinfrontofyou.Bytryingtheexampleswe givetoillustratevariousfunctions,youcangetaquickunderstandingofthebasics,thenmove ontothemoreadvancedfeatures.

Do I Have Everything?
YourPC3Kshippingcartonshouldincludethefollowinginadditiontoyourinstrument: Powercable Sustainpedal USBcable GettingStartedmanual(thisbook) Warrantycard

Ifyoudonthaveallofthesecomponents,pleasecallyourKurzweil/YoungChangdealer. YoumayalsowanttopurchaseaUSBthumbdriveforportablebackupsandstorage.

Boot Loader
WhenyouneedtoupdatethePC3Kssoftwareorrundiagnostictests,youllusetheBoot Loader.TobringuptheBootLoader,holddowntheExitbutton(belowthecursorbuttons,to therightofthedisplay)whilepoweringonyourPC3K.RefertoAppendix Bfordetailsonthe BootLoader.

Battery
ThePC3KusesaCR2032batterytopoweritsclock.Thebatteryshouldlastfiveyears,anda messagewilltellyouwhenthebatteryneedsreplacing.Theaccesspanelonthebottomofthe PC3K(whichyoucaneasilyremovewithascrewdriver)allowsyoutogetatthebatteryfor removalandreplacement. CAUTION:Dangerofexplosionifbatteryisincorrectlyreplaced.Replaceonlywiththesameor equivalenttype(CR2032).

1-4

Introduction Options

Options
AskyourKurzweildealeraboutthefollowingPC3Koptions:

Sound ROM Expansion Card

ThePC3Khasasocketfora64MBexpansioncardtoaddadditionalKurzweilROMsounds. Thisisuserinstallable(theexpansionkitcomeswithcompleteinstructions).

Pedals
ThePC3Khasjacksforthreeswitchpedals(forfunctionslikesustainorprogram/setup changes)andtwocontinuouspedals(forfunctionslikevolumecontrolandwah).YourKurzweil dealerstocksthefollowingoptionalpedals: FS1 KFP1 KFP2M CC1 Standardboxshapedswitchpedal Singlepianostyleswitchpedal Doublepianostyleswitchpedalunit Continuouspedal

Ribbon Controller
Theresadedicatedmodularjack(likeatelephonejack)ontherearpanelofthePC3Kfor connectingthis600mm(24inch)ribboncontroller.YoucanconfigurethePC3Ktousethe ribbonasasinglelargecontroller,orathreesectioncontrollerwithindependentsettingsfor eachsection.

Breath Controller
YoucanplugaYamaha(orequivalent)breathcontrollerintothededicatedjackonthePC3Ks rearpanel.

1-5

Introduction Options

1-6

Startup Make Connections

Chapter 2 Startup
Ifhookingupnewgearisfamiliartoyou,andyoujustwanttogetgoing,heresaquick descriptionofwhatyouneedtogetstartedwithyourPC3K.Ifyouneedmoreinformation, thoroughdescriptionsofeachstepfollow.

Make Connections
1. Setthekeyboardonahard,flat,levelsurface.Makesuretoleaveplentyofroomfor ventilation. 2. FouradhesivebackedrubberfeetareprovidedwithyourPC3K.Ifyouwanttoattach themtothebottomofthePC3K(recommendedtopreventscratchingyourtabletop), carefullyturnthekeyboardover,removethepaperbackingfromtherubberfeetand attachthemnow,neareachcorner,allonthesamelevel. 3. Connectthepowercable. 4. Makesureyoursoundsystemisatasafevolumelevel.AlsomakesurethatthePC3Ks MASTERVOLUMEslider(onthefarleftsideofthefrontpanel)isallthewaydown. 5. Pluginapairofstereoheadphonesorrunstandard(1/4inch)audiocablesfromyour amplifierormixertotheMIXaudiooutputsonthePC3K.(UsetheMainLeftoutfor mono.)Balanced(TRSorStereo)cablesarerecommended.

Make Music
1. PowerupyourPC3K,raisetheleveloftheMASTERVOLUMEslider,andcheckoutsome oftheprogramsandsetups.ThePC3KstartsupinProgrammodebydefault.Pressoneof themodebuttonstotheleftofthedisplaytoswitchmodes. 2. Ifyouheardistortion,reducethegainonyourmixingboard,orusethepadifithasone. 3. ScrollthroughtheprogramlistwiththeAlphaWheel,orthededicatedCategoryand Programbuttons,andtrythePC3Ksmanysounds.

2-1

Startup Startupthe Details

Startupthe Details
ThissectionwalksyouthroughthehookupofyourPC3K.Welltakealookattherearpanel, thendescribethepower,audio,andothercableconnections.

Before You Start...

DontconnectanythinguntilyoumakesureyourPC3Kisproperlyandsafelysituated.Also,if yourPC3Khasbeenoutinthecold,giveittimetowarmuptoroomtemperaturebeforestarting it,sincecondensationmayhaveformedinsidethePC3K.Itisnormalfortherearpanelnearthe MIDIjackstobecomewarmafterawhile.

Connecting the Power Cable (Line Cord)

ThePC3KrunsonACpower:100,120,230,or240voltsat5060Hz.Yourdealerwillsetthe voltageswitchtomatchthevoltageinyourarea.Thevoltagelevelissetwithaselectoronthe rearpanelofthePC3K.Unlessyouaresureitneedstobechanged,youshouldntadjustthis. WhenyouveconnectedthecableatthePC3Kend(asyoufacethebackofthePC3K,thepower connectionisattheright),plugitintoagroundedoutlet.Ifyourpowersourcedoesnothavethe standardthreeholeoutlet,youshouldtakethetimetoinstallapropergroundingsystem.This willreducetheriskofashock.

Connecting Audio Cables

Analog Afteryouveturneddownthelevelonyoursoundsystem,connectthePC3Ksanalogaudio outputstoyoursoundsystemusingapairofstereoormonoaudiocables.Monocableswill alwayswork,butifyouregoingintobalancedinputs,usestereocablesforabettersignalto noiseratioandabitmorevolume.ThePC3Ksanalogoutputsarebalanced,andgeneratea hottersignalthansomepreviousKurzweilinstruments. Youllfindfour1/4inchbalancedaudiooutputjacksontherearpanel.Fornow,connectone endofeachaudiocabletoyourmixingboardorPAsysteminputs,andconnecttheotherendto thejacksmarkedMainLeftandRightontherearpanelofthePC3K.Ifyouhaveonlyoneinput available,usethePC3KsMainLeftoutputtogetthefullsignalinmono. InMastermodeyoucansettheAuxoutputstoduplicatetheMainOutsusefulformonitoring andotheroperations.Theyarealwaysinstereo,asistheheadphoneout.

2-2

Startup Startupthe Details

Digital FordigitalaudiooutputfromthePC3K,connecta75OhmcoaxialcablefromthePC3KsRCA DigitalOutjacktotheAESorS/PDIFinputofthereceivingdevice.YoumayneedanRCAto XLRadaptertoconnectwiththereceivingdevice.Ifthereceivingdevicereceivesonlyoptical signals,youllneedaconverteraswell.ThePC3KsMasterPage(presstheMastermodebutton) letsyouselectarangeofusefulsampleratesforthedigitaloutput. TheRCAjacklabeledSyncInallowsyoutosynchronizethePC3KsS/PDIFDigitalAudio outputsampleratetoanexternalS/PDIFsource.Althoughnoaudiosignalisreceivedbythe SyncInjack,itsclockisreceivedandmaybeusedtosettheoutputsamplerate.Formore, pleaseseeMasterModePage1:DigitalOutputonpage 119.NOTE:SyncInisNOTaWord Clockinput.OnlyavalidS/PDIFsignalisrecognized.

Connecting MIDI
ThesimplestMIDIconfigurationusesasingle5pinMIDIcable:eitherfromtheMIDIOutport ofyourPC3KtotheMIDIInportofanotherinstrument,orfromtheMIDIOutportofanother MIDIcontrollertotheMIDIInportofthePC3K.Thereareallsortsofpossibleconfigurations, includingadditionalsynths,personalcomputers,MIDIeffectsprocessors,andMIDIpatchbays. Dependingonyoursystem,youmaywanttousethePC3KsMIDIThruporttopassMIDI informationfromaMIDIcontrollertothePC3Kandontothenextdeviceinyoursystem.You canalsoconnectMIDIdevicestothePC3KsMIDIOutport,whichcansendchannelizedMIDI informationfromthekeyboardorthroughthePC3KfromyourMIDIcontroller. TheMIDIThruportcanbeconfiguredtoserveasanadditionalMIDIOutbyslidingthenearby switchtotheOutposition.

YoucanalsousethePC3KsUSBporttosendandreceiveMIDI.BydefaultthePC3Kwillshow upasaUSBMIDIdevice.IfyouchooseUSBTemporaryDrivefromStoragemode,thePC3K willtemporarily(whileonthatStoragemodepage)becomeavirtualstoragedeviceandUSB MIDIwillbedisabled.Differenthostprogramsonyourcomputermayindicatevariouserrorsas theUSBMIDIdeviceisnolongerpresent.LeavingStoragemodewillrestoreUSBMIDI functionality. USBMIDIand5pinMIDIcanbeusedatthesametime;theMIDIsignalswillbecombinedinto asingle16channelMIDIstream.

2-3

Startup Startupthe Details

Pedals
PlugyourswitchorcontinuouspedalsintothecorrespondingjacksonthePC3Ksrearpanel. WerecommendusingtheKurzweilpedalsdescribedonpage 15,butyoucanusealmostany switchorcontinuouspedal,aslongasitadherestothefollowingspecifications(asmostpedals do): Switchpedals Continuouspedals
1

/4inchtipsleeveplug

10kOhmlineartaperpotentiometer,1/4inchtipringsleeveplug withthewiperconnectedtothetip.

Ifyouuseathirdparty(nonKurzweil)switchpedal,makesureitsconnectedbeforeyouturn onyourPC3K.Thisensuresthatthepedalwillworkproperly(itmightfunctionbackwardoff whenitsdownandonwhenitsupifyouturnonyourPC3Kbeforeplugginginthepedal). Similarly,dontpressanyofyourswitchpedalswhilepoweringup,becausethePC3Kverifies eachpedalsorientationduringpowerup.Ifyourepressingapedal,youmightcauseittowork backward. Thepedalsareindependentlyprogrammablewithineachzoneofeverysetup.Herearethe defaultsettingsforthefivepedalsyoucanusewiththePC3K: SwitchPedal1 SwitchPedal2 SwitchPedal3 ContinuousControlPedal1 ContinuousControlPedal2 Controller64(Sustain) Controller66(Sostenuto) Controller67(Soft) Controller11(Expression/Volume) Controller4(FootPedal)producesawaheffectinmanysetups

Breath
The3.5mmjacklabeledBreathacceptsastandardbreathcontroller,whichsendsstandardMIDI Breath(MIDI2)messages.ThePC3Kspresetprogramsandsetupsdontrespondtobreath,but ifyouhaveotherinstrumentsthatdorespondtoBreath,youcancontrolthemfromthePC3Kvia MIDI. YoucanalsoprogramthePC3KsothatthebreathcontrollersendsadifferentMIDImessage. ThiswouldenableyoutouseabreathcontrollertoaffectthePC3K,butthenotherinstruments receivingMIDIfromthePC3KwouldnolongerrespondtothePC3Ksbreathcontroller(unless youalsoprogrammedthemtoreceivethesameMIDIControllerthatthePC3Ksbreath controllerissending).

2-4

Startup Startupthe Details

Ribbon
PlugtheoptionalKurzweilRibbonControllerintothemodularRibbonjackontherearpanel. Theribboncontrolleritselfshouldrestonaflatsurface;itfitsnicelybetweenthekeysandthe buttonsandslidersonthefrontpanel. Theribbonisacontinuouscontroller.YoucanprogramtheribboncontrollertosendMIDI Controllermessages1127,aswellasseveralspecializedmessages.Itgeneratesvaluesof0127 forwhateverMIDIControllersyouassignittosend.Justpressit,andslideyourfingeralongthe ribbontochangethevalueofthemessageitssending. Youcanconfiguretheribbontohaveonecontrolsectionthatrunsitsentirelength,ortohave threesectionsofequallength.Itsendsitshighestvalueswhenyoupressitattheendwherethe cableconnects.Whenyouconfigureittohavethreesections,eachsectionsendsitshighest valuesattheendclosesttothecable. Caution:ThemodularjackisdesignedforconnectiontotheKurzweilRibbonControlleroptiononly. DontpluganyothermodularplugsintotheRibbonjack.

Switching On the Power

ThePC3Kspowerswitchisontherearpanel,adjacenttothepowercableconnection. Whenyoupowerup,thedisplaybrieflyshowssomestartupinformation.TheProgrammode displaythenappears.Itlookslikethediagrambelow,thoughyourPC3Kmaybedifferentfrom theexample.

Thefirsttimeyoupowerup(orafterareset),yourinstrumentwillbesettooperateonMIDI Channel1(asshownatthefarrightofthetoplineabove). Setthevolumeatacomfortablelevel.Youllgetthebestsignaltonoiseratioifyoukeepthe PC3Katfullvolume,andadjustthelevelfromyourmixingboard.Youmayalsowanttoadjust thedisplaycontrastandbrightness.TherearetwosmallknobsontherearpanelofthePC3Kfor thispurpose.

2-5

Startup Startupthe Details

USB Storage Port

YoucanplugaUSBmassstoragedevicesuchasathumbdriveintothePC3Kforbackingup, archiving,sharingyourwork,andupdatingyoursoftware.AnysizeUSBmassstoragedevice willwork,thoughthumbdrivesarerecommendedfortheirportability,durability,andlow price.TheUSBStorageportisonthebackpanelofthePC3K,butitiseasilyaccessiblefromthe frontoftheinstrument.AUSBconnectorwillonlyfitintotheportiforientedproperly,sodont forceitintotheport,asthismaydamageyourPC3KorUSBdevice.Ifyouarehavingtrouble insertingyourUSBconnectorintotheport,tryflippingtheconnectorover. Caution:DonotremoveaUSBdevicewhilethedisplaysaysLoading...orSaving....RemovingaUSB deviceduringafiletransfercancausedatacorruption.

USB Computer Port

NexttotheUSBStorageportonthebackpanelofthePC3KisaUSBComputerport.TheUSB ComputerportworksforMIDI(transmitandreceive)ortoconnectyourPC3Ktoacomputer forfiletransfer.Bydefault,theUSBportissettoMIDImode.WhenselectingUSBPC connectioninStoragemode,USBMIDIwilltemporarilybedisabled. WerecommendthatyouusetheUSBcableprovidedwithyourPC3Kanddonotuseextension USBcables.ThePC3KsUSBComputerportisonlyintendedforconnectiontoaUSBTypeA port. InUSBStoragemode,aPC3Kvirtualdrivewillappearonyourcomputerdesktop.One importantthingtoknowhereisthatthisisavirtualdrive.Youcansavetothisdrivefromthe PC3K,butyoumustimmediatelytransferthatfiletoyourdesktop(orotherfolder).Youmust copydatafromthePC3Kvirtualdrivetoyourcomputersdriveorelsethedatawillbelost. Note:WhentransferringfilestoandfromthePC3KviatheUSBComputerPort,themaximum sizeoffilesthatcanbetransferredisapproximately1.6MB.Thisissuitableformostobjects. Fortransferringaudiosamplefiles,usetheUSBStoragePortwithaUSBmassstoragedevice suchasathumbdrive.WhenusingtheUSBStoragePorttotransferfiles,thefilesizethatcan betransferredislimitedonlybythesizeoftheUSBmassstoragedevice,andthePC3Ks availableobjectandsamplememory. WhenyouleaveStorageMode,therewillbeaprompttellingyouthatthePC3Kisturningback intoaUSBMIDIdevicewhichyouhavetoacknowledge.Ifyouhaventcopiedthefile(s)to yourdesktop(orotherplaceonthecomputer)itwontbeonthevirtualdiskwhenyouleave storagemode. Dependingonyourcomputersoperatingsystem,youmaysometimesseeascarydevice removalwarningonyourdesktop(forexample,whenthePC3KleavestheBootLoader).You maydisregardsuchamessagewithoutworriesofdamagetoyourPC3Korcomputer.

2-6

Startup PC3K Programs

Setting the Clock

ThefirsttimeyoustartupyourPC3Kisprobablyagoodtimetosettheinstrumentsclockto yourcurrentlocaltime.DothisfromtheMasterPage. TheclockwilltimestampyourfilesthathavebeenstoredviaUSB.

PC3K Programs
ThePC3KpowersupinProgrammode,whereyoucanselectandplayprograms(called patches,presets,orvoicesonotherinstruments).Programsarepresetsoundscomposedofupto 32layersofsamplesorwaveforms.IfyouveleftProgrammode,justpresstheProgrammode buttonorExitbuttontoreturn.

Selecting Programs
WhenyouareinProgrammode,therearefourbasicwaystoselectaPC3Kprogram: PressoneoftheBankbuttons(abovetheslidersontheleftsideofthefrontpanel)toselecta bank,thenpressaCategorybuttonandaProgrambuttontochoosewithinthebank.The CategoryandProgrambuttonsareonthefrontpanel,betweenthescreenandthealpha wheel. TypetheprogramsID(number)onthealphanumericbuttonpad,thenpressEnter.Ifyou makeamistake,pressClear,thenstartover. ScrollthroughthelistusingtheAlphaWheel ScrollthroughthelistusingthePlusorMinusbuttonundertheAlphaWheel,orthecursor buttons(thearrowbuttonstotherightofthedisplay).

ThePC3KhasvarioussettingsforrespondingtoMIDIProgramChangecommandsfrom externalsources.TheseareexplainedinChapter 10,sowewontgointothemhere.Youshould beabletochangeprogramsbysendingProgramChangecommandsfromyourMIDIcontroller.

Easy Audition
Anytimeyouwanttohearwhataprogramsoundslike,highlighttheprogramsname(whilein Programmode)thenpressthePlay/Pausebuttontoplayabriefsample.TheDemoButton parameterontheMasterModeIIpagemustbeonforEasyAuditiontowork;theparameteris onbydefault.MastermodeisdescribedinChapter 11.

Program Mode Display

TakeaminutetofamiliarizeyourselfwiththeProgrammodedisplay.Itgivesyousomehelpful basicinformation,liketheMIDItransposition,whatMIDIchannelyoureon,andwhich programiscurrentlyselected.

2-7

Startup PC3K Programs

Info Box Theresaboxattheleftsideofthedisplay.Theinfobox,asitscalled,displaysinformationabout thecurrentprogram(theresalsoaninfoboxforSetupmode). Soft buttons OnmostPC3Kscreens,thebottomlineofthedisplayidentifiesthefunctionofeachofthe buttonsbeneaththedisplay.Wecallthesebuttonssoftbuttons,becausetheydodifferentthings dependingonwhatscurrentlyshowinginthedisplay. InProgramandQuickAccessmodes,youcanchangeoctaveswiththeOctavandOctav+ buttonsunderthedisplay.TheInfosoftbuttonshowsyourelevantdetailsaboutthecurrent item.TheXpose/Xpose+buttonsareashortcutforquicktranspositioninsemitone(halfstep) increments.YoucanusethemtotransposetheentirePC3Kasmuchasthreeoctavesupor down.Thetoplineofthedisplayshowsthecurrentamountoftransposition(Xpose).Pressboth Xposebuttonssimultaneouslytoreturntranspositiontozero. ThePanicbutton(oradoublepressofCancelandEnteratthebottomofthealphanumeric keypad)sendsanAllNotesOffmessageandanAllControllersOffmessagebothtothePC3K andoverall16MIDIchannels.Youwontneeditoften,butitsnicetohave.

VAST Programs
AnormalVASTprogramiswhatmostofthefactoryprogramsare.Theinfoboxcontains detailsaboutthedifferentlayersineachprogram,usuallyindicatingthekeymapusedineach layer.Thelineunderthekeymapnameindicatesthelayerskeyboardrange.Inthiscase,only thefirsttwodisplayedlayersextendacrosstheentirekeyboard(A 0toC 8).Thesymboltothe rightofeachlayershowsthatthekeymapisastereokeymap.

KB3 Programs
KB3(organ)programsdifferfromVASTprogramsinthattheydonthavelayers.Insteadthey relyonoscillatorsthatmimicthetonewheelsusedinmanypopularorgans.Consequently,the infoboxshowsonlythewaveformusedintheprogram.Becauseoftheirarchitecture,KB3 programsrequiredifferentprocessingwithinthePC3K.KB3programsplayonlyonasingle channelatatime(VASTprogramswillworkfineonthatchannel,too). ThequickestwaytogettotheKB3programsisbypressingtheKB3buttonthatsabovethe sliders. Whenyourereadytostartdoingyourownprogramming,checkoutChapter 6.

2-8

Startup Setups

Setups
Setupsarepresetcombinationsofprograms.Setupscanhaveupto16zones,eachofwhichcan beassignedtoanyrangeofthekeyboard(overlappingorsplit).Eachzonecanhaveitsown program,MIDIchannel,andMIDIcontrolassignments,aswellasriffandarpeggiatorsettings. PresstheSetupmodebuttontotheleftofthedisplay.ItsLEDwilllight,tellingyouthatyoure inSetupmode.NoticethattheSetupmodedisplayissimilartotheProgrammodedisplay.Ifthe setuphasfourorfewerzones,theboxattheleftshowsyoutheprogramsassignedtoeachofthe setupszones.Ifthesetupiscomposedofmorethanfourzones,thentheboxdisplaysthefirst fourzones;atthetopoftheboxwillbetextshowingthetotalnumberofzones.Seepage 71for amoredetaileddescription.

Manysetupsincludearpeggiationandnotetriggeredsongstocreatesomeprettyamazing groovesthatyoucanuseasis,orastemplatesforyourownmaterial.Asyouplaywiththese setups,experimentwiththeslidersandothercontrollersforawiderangeofeffects.Someof thesegrooveskeepplayingafteryouvereleasedthekeysthatgotthemgoing.Whenyouwant tostopthem,selectanothersetup,orpresstheSetupmodebutton(orStopforriffs).

Quick Access
AreallyconvenientwaytoselectprogramsandsetupsistouseQuickAccessmode,whereyou selectaQuickAccessbankfromalistoffactorypresetoruserprogrammedbanks.Eachbank containstenmemoryslots,orentries,whereyoucanstoreanycombinationofprogramsor setups.WhileyoureinQuickAccessmode,youcanselectanyprogramorsetupinthebank withbuttons0through9orthecursorkeys. ThePC3KcomeswithafewQuickAccessbanksalreadyprogrammedsoyoucangetanideaof howtheywork.YoullprobablycreateyourownQuickAccessbankstohelpyouselect programsandsetupswithaminimumofsearching.PresstheQuickAccessmodebuttontothe leftofthedisplay.ItsLEDlights,totellyouyoureinQuickAccessmode. ThetoplineofthedisplaytellsyouwhichQuickAccessbankisselected.UsetheChan/Layer buttons(totheleftofthedisplay)toscrollthroughthebanks.Thenamesofeachoftheten entriesinthebankarelistedinthecenterofthedisplay.Manyoftheirnameswillbe abbreviated.Thecurrentlyselectedentrysfullnameisshownnearthebottomofthedisplay. Theamountoftranspositionisdisplayedtotheleftoftheentryname.Ifthecurrententryisa program,youllseethecurrentkeyboard(MIDI)channeldisplayedtotherightoftheentrys name.Ifitsasetup,youllseethewordSetup. TheentriesontheQuickAccesspagearearrangedtocorrespondtothelayoutofthenumeric buttonsonthealphanumericpad. WhenyourereadytocreateyourownQuickAccessbanks,turntoChapter 8tolearnaboutthe QuickAccessEditor.

2-9

Startup The Other Modes

The Other Modes

Therearefiveothermodebuttonsonthefrontpanel.SeeChapters3and4formoredetailed descriptionsofthemodes. Effectsmode MIDImode Mastermode Songmode Storagemode Enable/disableeffectspresets,andsetAuxoverrides. ConfigurethePC3KforsendingandreceivingMIDIinformation. Defineperformanceandcontrolsettings. Recordandeditsequences(songs);playType0andType1MIDI sequences. Loadandsaveprograms,setups,sequences,andotherobjectsviaUSB device.

Software Upgrades
ItseasytoupgradethePC3Ksoperatingsystemandobjects(programs,setup,etc.)usingthe bootloadertoinstallupgradesintoflashROM.Whenupgradesareavailableyoucandownload themfromwww.kurzweil.com andinstallthemviaoneofthePC3KstwoUSBports. Asupgradedsoftwarebecomesavailable,youcaneithergetfilesfromyourYoungChangdealer ordownloadthenewstufffromtheWeb. Tostayintouch,checkoutourWebsite: www.kurzweil.com Whenyouveacquiredanupgrade,youcaninstallityourselfinamatterofminutes.Usethe BootLoader,asdescribedinAppendix B.

2-10

User Interface Basics Mode Selection

Chapter 3 User Interface Basics

ThischapterwillshowyouhowtogetaroundthefrontpanelofyourPC3K.Yourinteractions canbedividedintothreeprimaryoperations:modeselection,navigation,anddataentry.There isalsoanassignablecontrolsection.

Arp

SW

Mode Selection
ThePC3Kisalwaysinoneofeightprimaryoperatingmodes.Selectamodebypressingoneof themodebuttonstheyretotheleftofthedisplay.EachmodebuttonhasanLEDthatlightsto indicatethecurrentmode.Onlyonemodecanbeselectedatatime. Programmode Setupmode Selectandplayprograms,andmodifythemwiththeProgramEditor. Selectandplaysetups(16keyboardzoneswithindependentMIDI channel,programandcontrolassignments),andmodifythemwiththe SetupEditor.

QuickAccessmode Selectfromalistofpresetbanks,eachcontainingalistoftenprograms and/orsetupsthatcanbeviewedinthedisplayforeasyselection.Modify thepresetbanksandcreateyourownwiththeQuickAccessEditor. Effectsmode MIDImode Enable/disableeffectsorsetAuxoverrides. DefinehowyourPC3KsendsandreceivesMIDIinformation,and configureeachchanneltoreceiveindependentprogram,volume,and panmessagesthatoverridethenormalProgrammodesettings. DefineperformanceandcontrolcharacteristicsfortheentirePC3K.

Mastermode

3-1

User Interface Basics Mode Buttons

Songmode

UsethePC3Kssequencertorecordandplaybackyourkeyboard performance,playType0andType1MIDIsequences,andrecordmulti timbralsequencesreceivedviaMIDI. InterfacewiththePC3KsUSBstorageorcomputerportstoloadandsave programs,setups,samples,andmore.

Storagemode

ThePC3KstonewheelorganemulationiscalledKB3mode.Youautomaticallyenterthismode whenyouselectaKB3program.TheKB3Bankbuttontakesyoutheredirectly.

Mode Buttons

Whenyoupressamodebutton,itsLEDlightsuptoindicatethatthemodehasbeenselected.If pressingamodebuttondoesnotlightitsLED,presstheExitbuttononeormoretimes,thentry again. Additionallabelingforeachmodebuttonindicatesspecialfunctionsthatrelatetosomeofthe PC3Kseditors.

Bank Buttons
TheBankbuttons,situatedinthetopleftcornerofthePC3Ksfrontpanel,letyouchoose differentbanksofprograms(e.g.,KB3programsorClassicKeysprograms).Withineachbank, youcanusetheProgramandCategorybuttons(totherightofthedisplay)toselectindividual programs.

TheBankbuttonshavespecialfunctionsinKB3mode,indicatedbylabelsbeneatheachbutton.

3-2

User Interface Basics Sliders

Sliders
InKB3mode,thePC3Ksnineslidersemulateanorgansdrawbars.Forexample,sliderA emulatesanorgans16drawbar.Inothermodes,thesliderscanbeusedtosendvaluesfor differentMIDIcontrollers.Ineithercase,youmayhavetomovethesliderpastthecurrentvalue foritsselectedfunctionbeforeslidermovementwillhaveanyeffect.

MostVASTprogramsusetheslidersforthesefunctions: A B C D E F G H I Data MIDI13 MIDI22 MIDI23 MIDI24 MIDI25 MIDI26 MIDI27 MIDI28 Filterfrequency,Brightness Filterresonance,Tremoloratecontrol Layervolume,Envelopecontrol,LoEQ Layervolume,Envelopecontrol,HiEQ Layervolumeforthumpsandrelease FXcontrol1 FXdistortiondrive FXdistortionwarmth Reverb/delaycontrol

3-3

User Interface Basics Program and Category Buttons

Program and Category Buttons

UsetheProgramandCategorybuttons,inconjunctionwiththeBankbuttons,todirectlyselect PC3Kprograms.Eachofthe16categoriescontains8programs.

Picking favorites
Whenyouselectaprogramwithinacategory,yourselectionwillberemembered.Forexample, chooseprogram3intheOrgancategory(pressCategory:Organ,thenProgram:3).Nowmove tothestringsbypressingtheCategory:Stringsbutton.IfyoupresstheCategory:Organbutton again,youwillbereturnedtoprogram3intheOrgancategory.Inthisway,eachcategorycan haveafavoriteprogram. Youcanmakeprogramselectionswithineachcategoryaheadoftime.Thisway,youllbeableto accesstheprogramyouwantinanycategorysimplybypressingappropriatecategorybutton. Importantthingstorememberaboutyourfavorites: YoumustsaveyourPC3KsMasterTabletorememberyourselectionsacrosspowercycles. SeeChapter 11forinformationabouttheMasterTable. Yourselectionsarebankdependent.Inotherwords,youcansaveeightintheBase1bank, eightintheExp1bank,etc.

3-4

User Interface Basics Pitch Wheel and Mod Wheel

Pitch Wheel and Mod Wheel

Arp

SW

Pitch

Mod

TotheleftofthePC3KskeyboardarethePitchWheelandtheModWheel,aswellastheSW andArpbuttons. PushthePitchWheelawayfromyoutoraisethepitchofthenote(s)youareplaying.Pullit towardsyoutolowerthepitch.Mostprogramsaresetsothatthepitchwheelwillraiseand lowerpitchbyawholestep,althoughsomeprogramsusethepitchwheeltolowerpitchbyas muchasanoctave.ThePitchWheelhasaspringsothatitwillsnapbacktoplace(i.e.,backto theoriginalpitch)whenyoureleaseit. TheModWheelperformsavarietyoffunctions.Differentprogramsmayuseitforfiltersweeps, tremolo/vibrato,wah,orlayervolume. TheArpbuttonturnsonandoffthePC3KsArpeggiator. TheSWbutton(MIDI29)canbeprogrammedtodoavarietyofthings.Oftenitisusedforlayer enableoreffectenable.

3-5

User Interface Basics Navigation

Navigation
Thenavigationsectionofthefrontpanelconsistsofthedisplayandthebuttonssurroundingit. ThesenavigationbuttonswilltakeyoutoeveryoneofthePC3Ksprogrammingparameters.

The Display
YourprimaryinterfacewiththePC3Kisitsbacklitgraphicdisplay.Asyoupressvarious buttons,thisfluorescentdisplayreflectsthecommandsyouenterandtheeditingchangesyou make.Theamplesizeofthedisplay(240by64pixels)enablesyoutoviewlotsofinformationat onetime.

Pages
Withineachmode,thefunctionsandparametersareorganizedintosmaller,relatedgroupsthat appeartogetherinthedisplay.Eachoneofthesegroupsofparametersiscalledapage.Each modehaswhatwecallanentrylevelpage;itsthepagethatappearswhenyouselectthatmode withoneofthemodebuttons.Withineachmodeanditseditor(s),thevariouspagesareselected withthenavigationbuttons.Therearemanypages,butthereareafewfeaturescommontoeach page. TheillustrationbelowshowstheentrylevelpageforProgrammode.

The Top Line

Onthetoplineofmostpages,theresareminderofwhichmodeyoureinandwhichpage youreon.Manypagesdisplayadditionalinformationinthetopline,aswell.The Programmodepageabove,forexample,showsyouthecurrentamountofMIDItransposition andthecurrentlyselectedMIDIchannel.Thetoplineisalmostalwaysreversedthatis,it hasawhitebackgroundwithbluecharacters.

The Bottom Line

Thebottomlineisdividedintosix(sometimesfewer)setsofreversedcharactersthatserveas labelsforthesixbuttonsdirectlybeneaththedisplay.Theselabelsandthefunctionsofthe buttonschangedependingonthecurrentlyselectedpage.Consequentlythebuttonsthat selectthesefunctionsarecalledsoftbuttons.

3-6

User Interface Basics Navigation

The Soft Buttons

Thesoftbuttonsarecalledsoftbecausetheirfunctionschangedependingonthecurrently selectedmodeandpage.Sometimestheyperformspecificfunctions,likechangingMIDI channelsinProgrammode.IntheProgramEditorandothereditors,theyrealsousedtomove todifferentpagesofprogrammingparameters.Ifasoftbuttonslabelisinallcapitalletters (KEYMAP,forexample),pressingthecorrespondingsoftbuttontakesyoutoapageof parameters.Ifthesoftbuttonislabeledinlowercaseormixedcaseletters(Save,forexample), thesoftbuttonperformssomekindoffunction.

The Cursor Buttons

Totherightofthedisplayarefourbuttonsarrangedinadiamondfashion.Thesearecalledthe cursorbuttons.Theymovethecursoraroundthecurrentlyselectedpage,inthedirection indicatedbytheirlabels.Thecursorisahighlighted(reversed)rectangle(sometimesitsan underscore).Itmarksthevalueofthecurrentlyselectedparameter.

ProgrammingthePC3Kinvolvesselectingvariousparametersandchangingtheirvalues.Select parametersbyhighlightingtheirvalueswiththecursor.Youcanchangethehighlightedvalue withanyofthedataentrymethodsdescribedinthedataentrysectionbelow.

The Chan/Layer Buttons

TotheleftofthedisplayaretwobuttonslabeledChan/Layer.Theirfunctiondependsonthe currentmode.InProgrammode,forexample,theyshiftthroughtheMIDIchannels,showing theprogramassignedtoeachchannel.ThischangestheMIDIchannelthePC3Kusesinternally, aswellasthechannelyoureusingtosendinformationtoothersynthsconnectedtothePC3Ks MIDIOutport(MIDIslaves).ChangingthecurrentMIDIchannelalsochangesthe correspondingsettingontheMIDImodeTRANSMITpage.WhenyoupressbothChan/Layer buttonsatthesametimeyouwillbereturnedtoChannel1,Checkoutthechartonpage 310for moreshortcutsyoucanmakewithdoublebuttonpresses. WhenyoureintheProgramEditor,theChan/Layerbuttonsletyouvieweachlayerinthe program.Youcanseethecorrespondingparametersineachlayerbyscrollingthroughthe layerswiththesebuttons.IntheSetupEditor,theChan/Layerbuttonsscrollthroughthezones inthecurrentsetup.InQuickAccessmode,theyscrollthroughtheQuickAccessbanks,andin Songmodetheyscrollthroughrecordingtracks. Wellletyouknow,whenapplicable,whattheChan/Layerbuttonsdo.

3-7

User Interface Basics Navigation

The Edit Button

TheEditbuttonactivateseachofthePC3Kseditors,andactsasashortcuttomanypageswithin theProgramEditor.PressingtheEditbuttontellsthePC3Kthatyouwanttochangesomeaspect oftheobjectmarkedbythecursor.Forexample,whenaprogramisselectedandyoupressEdit, youentertheProgramEditor.Ifasetupisselected,youentertheSetupEditor. Thereareeditorsaccessiblefromjustabouteveryoperatingmode.Toenteraneditor,choose oneofthemodes(modeselection),andpressEdit.Aneditingpageforthatmodewillappear. Youcanthenselectparameters(navigation)andchangetheirvalues(dataentry).Ifthevalueof theselectedparameterhasitsowneditingpage,pressingtheEditbuttonwilltakeyoutothat page.Forexample,intheProgramEditor,onthePITCHpage,youmightseeLFO1assignedas thevalueforPitchControlSource1.Ifyouselectthisparameter(thecursorwillhighlightits valueLFO1inthiscase),thenpresstheEditbutton,youlljumptothepagewhereyoucan edittheparametersofLFO1.Naturally,youcanfindeverypageinthecurrenteditorbyusing thesoftbuttons,butoftenitseasiertousetheEditbuttonshortcut.

The Exit Button

PressExittoleavethecurrenteditor.Ifyouvechangedthevalueofanyparameterwhileinthat editor,thePC3Kwillaskyouwhetheryouwanttosaveyourchangesbeforeyoucanleavethe editor.SeeChapter5forinformationonsavingandnaming.TheExitbuttonalsotakesyouto Programmodeifyoureontheentrylevelpageofoneoftheothermodes.Ifatsomepointyou cantseemtogetwhereyouwanttogo,pressExitoneormoretimestoreturntoProgrammode, thentryagain.

3-8

User Interface Basics Data Entry

Data Entry
ThedataentrysectionofthefrontpanelincludestheAlphawheel,thePlus/Minusbuttons,and the14buttonalphanumericpad.

The Alpha Wheel

TheAlphaWheelisespeciallyusefulbecauseitcanquicklyenterlargeorsmallchangesin value.IfyouturntheAlphaWheeloneclicktotheright,youllincreasethevalueofthe currentlyselectedparameterbyoneincrement.Oneclicktotheleftdecreasesthevaluebyone increment.Ifyouturnitrapidly,youlljumpbyseveralincrements.YoucanalsousetheAlpha Wheeltoenternameswhenyouresavingobjects.

The Plus/Minus Buttons

ThesebuttonsarelocatedjustundertheAlphaWheel.ThePlusbuttonincreasesthevalueofthe currentlyselectedparameterbyone,andtheMinusbuttondecreasesitbyone.Thesebuttons aremostusefulwhenyourescrollingthroughashortlistofvalues,orwhenyouwanttobesure yourechangingthevaluebyoneincrementatatime.OnepressofthePlusorMinusbutton correspondstooneclicktotherightorleftwiththeAlphaWheel.Thesebuttonswillrepeatif pressedandheld. PressingthePlusandMinusbuttonssimultaneouslywillmoveyouthroughthecurrentlistof valuesinlargechunksinsteadofonebyone.Dontconfusethesebuttonswiththe+/buttonon thealphanumericpad.Thisbuttonisusedprimarilyforenteringnegativenumericvaluesand switchingfromuppercasetolowercaseletters(andviceversa).

The Alphanumeric Pad

Asitsnameimplies,thissetof14buttonsletsyouenternumericvalues,andtoenternamesone characteratatime.Dependingonwhereyouare,thePC3Kautomaticallyenterslettersor numeralsasappropriate(youdonthavetoselectbetweenalphabeticornumericentry). Whenyoureenteringnumericvalues,pressthecorrespondingnumericbuttons,ignoring decimalplacesifany(toenter1.16,forexample,press1,1,6,Enter).Thedisplaywillreflect yourentries,butthevaluewontactuallychangeuntilyoupressEnter.BeforepressingEnter, youcanreturntotheoriginalvaluebypressingCancel.PressingClearisthesameaspressing0 withoutpressingEnter. Whenenteringnames,youcanusetheLeft/Rightcursorbuttonsorthe<<</>>>softbuttonsto movethecursortothecharacteryouwanttochange.Usethelabelsunderthealphanumeric buttonsasaguidetocharacterentry.Pressthecorrespondingbuttononeormoretimestoinsert thedesiredcharacterabovethecursor.TheCancelbuttonisequivalenttothe>>>softbutton, andEnteristhesameasOK.TheClearbuttonreplacesthecurrentlyselectedcharacterwitha space.The+/buttontogglesbetweenuppercaseandlowercaseletters. Theresalsoaconvenientfeaturecalledkeyboardnaming,whichletsyouusethekeyboardto entercharactersinnames.Seepage 55.

3-9

User Interface Basics Data Entry

Double Button Presses

Pressingtwoormorerelatedbuttonssimultaneouslyexecutesanumberofspecialfunctions dependingonthecurrentlyselectedmode.Makesuretopressthematexactlythesametime.

In this mode or editor

pressing these buttons simultaneously

ARP, SW Octav-, Octav+ Chan/Layer Plus/Minus Up/Down cursor buttons Left/Right cursor buttons Plus/Minus

does this:
Brings up quick arpeggiator configuration page. Reset MIDI transposition to 0 semitones. Double-press again to go to previous transposition. Set current MIDI channel to 1. Sets layer 1 in Program editor. Step to next Program bank (increments of 128). Starts playback of demo song for current Program. Stop with Stop transport button. Brings up TEMPO page. Moves through list of Setups in increments of 128. Set zone 1. Brings up TEMPO page. Toggle between Play and Stop. Select all tracks on any TRACK page in Song Editor. Brings up TEMPO page. Select all items in a list. Move cursor to end of name in naming dialog. Clear all selections in a list. Move cursor to beginning of name in naming dialog. Select Layer 1. Scroll through the currently selected parameters list of values in regular or logical increments (varies with each parameter). Reset MIDI transposition to 0 semitones. Double-press again to go to previous transposition. Select Utilities menu. Reset MIDI transposition to 0 semitones. Double-press again to go to previous transposition. Display TEMPO page. Toggle between Play and Stop of current song. Panic (sends all notes/controllers off message on all 16 channels). Toggle between next free ID and original ID. Moves cursor to the end of the name. Moves cursor to the end of the name.

Program mode

Setup mode

Chan/Layer Left/Right cursor buttons Up/Down cursor buttons

Song mode

Chan/Layer Left/Right cursor buttons Left/Right cursor buttons

Storage mode

up/down cursor buttons Chan/Layer Plus/Minus 2 leftmost soft buttons Center soft buttons 2 rightmost soft buttons Left/Right cursor buttons Up/Down cursor buttons Cancel/Enter

Program Editor

Any Editor

Save Dialog Rename Dialog

Plus/Minus buttons Plus/Minus buttons Left/Right cursor buttons

3-10

User Interface Basics Intuitive Data Entry

Intuitive Data Entry

Manyparametershavevaluesthatcorrespondtostandardphysicalcontrollers.Inmanycases, youcanselectthesevaluesintuitively,ratherthanhavingtoscrollthroughtheControlSource list.Dothisbyselectingthedesiredparameter,thenholdingtheENTERbuttonwhilemoving thedesiredphysicalcontrol. Forexample,ontheLAYERpageintheProgramEditor,youcansettherangeofthecurrently selectedlayerasfollows:usethecursorbuttonstomovethecursortothevaluefortheLoKey parameter,press(andhold)theEnterbutton,thenpressthenoteyouwishtobethelowestnote forthecurrentlydisplayedlayer.ThenoteyoutriggeredwillappearasthevaluefortheLoKey parameter.RepeattheprocessfortheHiKeyparameter. Anotherexample:selectProgram199whileinProgrammode.PressEdittoentertheProgram Editor.PressthePITCHsoftbuttontoselectthePITCHpage.MovethecursortotheSrc1 parameter.HoldtheEnterbutton,andmovethePitchWheel.PWheelwillbeselectedasthe valueforSrc1. Youcanalsousethekeyboardtochoosecontrolsources,sincemostkeynumberscorrespondto avalueonthecontrolsourcelist.Ifyouhaveacertaincontrolsourcethatyouuseoverandover (forexample,LFO1),thiscanbethequickestwaytoenteritsvalue.Todothis:highlighta parameterwhichusesavaluefromthecontrolsourcelist,holddownEnter,thenstrikethekey correspondingtothecontrolsourceyouwanttochoose.LFO1,forexample,isassignedtoB5. Also,foralmosteveryparameter,youcanholdtheEnterbuttonandmovetheDataSlider (SliderA)torunthroughtherangeofvaluesforthecurrentlyselectedparameter.Thisisnotas preciseastheAlphaWheel,butmuchfaster.

Changing the Current Layer in Multi-Layer Programs

Wheneditingamultilayerprogram,youcanquicklyswitchbetweenlayersbyholdingthe Enterbutton,thenstrikingakey.ThePC3Kwillchangethecurrentlayertothatkeyslayer.If thekeyispartofmorethanonelayer,subsequentkeystrikeswillcyclethrougheachlayerthat hasthatkeyinitsrange. Note:ThismethodforchangingthecurrentlayerinamultilayerprogramwillNOTworkifthe currentlyhighlightedparameterhasanotenumberorcontrolsourceforitsvalue.Inthiscase,thekeyyou strikewillfunctionasdescribedinIntuitiveDataEntry,above.

3-11

User Interface Basics Search

Search
Theresaconvenientwaytofindanystringofcharacterswithinthecurrentlyselectedlist,or rangeofvalues.HoldtheEnterbuttonandpressanyofthenumericbuttons.Adialogappears. Typeinthestringofcharactersyouwanttofind.Forexample,ifyourelookingattheprogram listandyouwanttofindallprogramscontainingthewordHorn,youwouldtypehorn. Thisfunctionisnotcasesensitive;itwillfindupperandlowercasecharactersregardlessof whatyoutype. Whenyouvetypedthestringofcharactersyouwanttofind,pressEnter.ThePC3Ksearches throughthecurrentlistofobjectsorvalues,findsallitemsthatmatchthestringofcharacters youtyped,anddisplaysthefirstoneitfinds.HoldEnterandpressoneofthePlus/Minus buttonstosearchforthenexthigherorlowernumberedobjectthatcontainsthestringof characters. Thestringyouselectremainsinmemory.Youcanstoreandselectastringofcharacterswith eachofthenumericbuttons.HoldEnterandpressoneofthenumericbuttonsatanytimeto selectthatstringforasearch.Whenthestringappears,youcanchangeit,orjustpressEnterto findthatstring.

Quick Song Recording and Playback

TherearethreebuttonslabeledRecord,Play/Pause,andStopbelowthemodeselection buttons.Theycontroltherecordingandplaybackofsongsfromanymode;youdonthavetobe inSongmodetorecordorplayback.However,youllneedtomakesurethattheDemoButton parameteronMasterModePage2issettoOff.OtherwisethesebuttonsareusedforEasy Audition(seepage 27).MasterModeisdescribedinChapter 11.

Usingthesebuttonsaffectsthecurrenttrackofthecurrentsongthatis,thesongandtrackthat wereselectedthelasttimeyouwereinSongmode.Whenyourecord,therecordingtrackand recordingmodearedeterminedbythecurrentsettingsinSongmode;likewisefortheplayback modewhenyoureplayingasong. WhenthesequencerstatusisSTOPPED(neithertheRecordbuttonLEDnorthePlay/Pause buttonLEDislitorflashing),pressRecordtoputthesequencerinRECREADYstatus.The RecordbuttonLEDlights(red).ThenpressPlay/Pausetostartrecording.ThePlay/Pause buttonflashes(green)toindicatethetempo.AnycountoffisdeterminedbythecurrentSong modesettingfortheCountOffparameter.PressPlay/PauseorStoptoendrecordingandgoto theSavedialog,whereyoucansavethesong,ordiscardit. WhenthesequencerstatusisSTOPPED,pressPlay/Pausetobeginplayingthecurrentsong. PressPlay/Pauseagaintopauseplayback,andagaintoresume.PressStoptoendplayback. SeeChapter12formoreinformationonSongMode.

3-12

The Operating Modes What the Modes Are

Chapter 4 The Operating Modes

Inthischapterwelldiscussthetheorybehindthemodeconcept,andwelldescribethebasic operatingfeaturesofeachmode.

What the Modes Are

ThemodesexisttomakethePC3Klogicaltoworkwith.Withasmanyperformanceand programmingfeaturesasthePC3Khas,itshelpfultobreakthemintogroups.Thesegroupsare calledmodes.Thereareeightprimarymodes;theyredescribedbrieflyinthesectioncalled UsingtheModes on page 42,thentherestofthemanualisdedicatedtoexplainingeachprimary modeinturn. Eachmodeisnamedforthekindofoperationsyouperformwhileinthatmode,andeach modeseditor(ifany)containsalloftheparametersrelatedtoeditingthetypeofobjectfoundin thatmode.InSetupmode,forexample,youselectsetups(andonlysetups)forperformanceor editing.AllofthesetupeditingparametersaregroupedtogetherontheSetupEditorpage, whichisaccessiblethroughSetupmode.

Selecting Modes
WhenthePC3Kison,itsalwaysoperatinginoneoftheeightprimarymodesrepresentedby theLEDhighlightedbuttonstotheleftofthedisplayorinoneoftheeditorscorrespondingto thecurrentoperatingmode.Pressingoneofthemodebuttonsselectsthecorrespondingmode. Thisisthemodesentrylevel.Attheentrylevel,theLEDoftheselectedmodeislit.Onlyone modecanbeselectedatatime. Fromanyprimarymode,youcangettoanyotherprimarymodesimplybypressingoneofthe modebuttons.Ifyoureinaneditor,however,youmustpressExittoreturntothemodesentry levelbeforeselectinganothermode. AllofthemodesexceptStoragemodegiveyouaccesstooneormoreeditorsforchangingthe valuesoftheparameterswithinthatmode.PresstheEditbuttontoentertheeditorofthe currentlyselectedmode.Whenyoudothis,themodeLEDgoesout. Itspossibletoenteranothermodeseditorwithoutleavingthecurrentlyselectedmode.For example,ifyoupressEditwhileinSetupmode,youllentertheSetupEditor.TheSetupEditor pagewillappear,andtheProgramparameterwillbehighlightedbythecursor.IfyoupressEdit again,youllentertheProgramEditor,whereyoucaneditthecurrentlyselectedprogram. Whileyoucaneditandsaveprogramsasyounormallywould,yourestillinSetupmode,and youcantselectanothermodeatthispoint.WhenyouexittheProgramEditor,youllreturnto theSetupEditorpage.PressExitagain,andyoullleavetheSetupEditor,returningtotheSetup modepage.

4-1

The Operating Modes Using the Modes

Thefollowingtableliststheproceduresformovingbetweenmodesandeditors.Notethatthe Exitbuttonwontalwaystakeyouwherethetablesaysitwill;itoftendependsonhowyougot whereyouare.Thetableassumesthatyouveenteredagiveneditorviaitscorrespondingmode. YoullalwaysreturntoProgrammodeeventuallyifyoupressExitrepeatedly.

Current Mode/ Editor Status Any mode Program mode Program Editor Setup mode Setup Editor Quick Access mode Quick Access Editor Song mode Most editors

Available Modes/ Editors All other modes Program Editor Program mode Effects Editor Setup Editor Setup mode Program Editor Quick Access Editor Quick Access mode Song Editor Program Editor Previous mode or editor

How to Get There Press corresponding mode button Press Edit Press Exit On PROGFX page, select Insert, then press Edit Press Edit Press Exit On CH/PRG page: select LocalPrg parameter; press Edit Press Edit Press Exit Select CurSong parameter; press Edit Select Program parameter; press Edit Press Exit

Finding Square One

If,atanytime,youdontknowwhereyouare,andthemodeLEDsareallunlit,pressExitoneor moretimes.Thiswillreturnyoutotheentrylevelofwhatevermodeyouwerein,andifyou pressExitenoughtimes,youwillalwaysreturntoProgrammode,thestartupmode.Ifyouve madeanychanges,youllbeaskedwhetheryouwanttosavebeforeleavinganyeditor.Pressthe NosoftbuttonortheExitbuttonifyoudontwanttosave.Ifyouwanttosave,pressthe RenameorYessoftbutton,andyoullseetheSavedialog,whichisdescribedinSavingand Naming on page 53.

Using the Modes

YoucanplayyourPC3Kregardlessofthemodeyourein.ThePC3KsMIDIresponseisalmost alwaysactive.Evensotherearethreemodesthataremoreperformanceorientedthanthe others.TheseareProgram,Setup,andQuickAccessmodes.Welldescribeeachoftheeight modesbrieflyinthissection.

Program Mode
ThePC3KstartsupinProgrammode,whereyoucanselect,play,andeditprograms.The Programmodeentrylevelpageshowsthecurrentlyselectedprogram,aswellasasmall segmentoftheprogramlist. TheProgramEditortakesyoutothecoreofthePC3Kssoundeditingparameters.

Setup Mode
Setupmodeletsyouselect,play,andeditsetups.Setupsconsistofupto16separatezones,split oroverlapping,eachhavingitsownprogram,MIDIchannel,andcontrolparameters.Setupsare greatforperformancesituations,whetheryoureplayingmultiplePC3Kprogramsor controllingadditionalsynthsconnectedtothePC3KsMIDIOutport.Chapter7describesSetup mode.

4-2

The Operating Modes Using the Modes

IfyoureusingadifferentMIDIcontroller,youcanmakeuseofSetupmodeevenifyourMIDI controllercantransmitononlyoneMIDIchannelatatime.Todothis,gototheRECEIVEpage inMIDImode(bypressingtheRECVsoftbuttonwhileinMIDImode),andsettheLocal KeyboardChannelparametertoavaluethatmatchesthetransmitchannelofyourMIDI controller.WhenyouselectSetupmode,thePC3KwillinterpretincomingMIDIinformation accordingtothesettingsforthecurrentlyselectedsetup.SeethediscussionoftheLocal KeyboardChannelparameterinChapter10fordetails.

Quick Access Mode

Anotherfeatureforliveperformance,QuickAccessmodeenablesyoutocombineprograms andsetupsintobanksoftenentries.Eachoftheseprogramsorsetupscanbeselectedwitha singlealphanumericbutton.DifferentbanksareselectedwiththeChan/Layerbuttons.Theresa selectionoffactorypresetbanks,andyoucanusetheQuickAccessEditortocreateyourown banksandstoretheminthePC3Ksmemory.TheresafulldescriptioninChapter8. YoucanalsouseQuickAccessbanksasawaytoremapincomingoroutgoingProgramChange commands.

Effects Mode
EffectsmodesetsthebehaviorofthePC3Kseffectsprocessor.TheEffectsmodepageletsyou tellthePC3Khowtoselecteffectsconfigurationscalledchains.Chapters9showsyouhow.

MIDI Mode
YoulluseMIDImodetoconfigurethePC3KsinteractionwithotherMIDIinstruments,by settingparametersfortransmittingandreceivingMIDI.Youllalsouseittoconfigureyour PC3Kformultitimbralsequencing.OntheCHANNELSpage,youcanassignaprogramtoeach channel,andenableordisableeachchannelsresponsetothreetypesofMIDIcontrolmessages: ProgramChange,volumeandpan.SeeChapter10.

Master Mode
Mastermode,describedinChapter 11,containstheparametersthatcontroltheentirePC3K. Globalsettingsfortuning,transposition,velocityandaftertouchsensitivity,andother preferencesareadjustedhere.YoucanalsogettoGMModefromhereandsetthesamplerate forthePC3Ksdigitaloutput.

Song Mode
Songmodeenablesyoutoplaysequences(songs)storedinthePC3Ksmemory,andprovidesa fullyfeaturedsequencerthatyoucanusetorecordsongs.Youcanalsorecordmultitimbrally viaMIDI,orloadstandardMIDIfiles(Type0or1).TheSongEditoralsoenablesyoutomodify existingsequencesstoredinmemory.SeeChapter 12.

Storage Mode
StoragemodeletsyouloadandsaveprogramsandotherobjectsusinganUSBdevice.See Chapter 13.

4-3

The Operating Modes Using the Modes

4-4

Editing Conventions Introduction to Editing

Chapter 5 Editing Conventions

Introduction to Editing
Programming(editing)thePC3Kalwaysinvolvesthreebasicoperations:modeselection, navigation,anddataentry. First,selectthemodethatrelatestotheobjectyouwanttoeditaprogram,asetup,etc.Then selecttheobjectyouwanttoedit,andpresstheEditbuttontoentertheeditorwithinthatmode. Forprograms,setups,songs,andquickaccessbanks,theseobjectsareselectedwhenyouare onthemainpageoftheircorrespondingmode.InthesecasesyoucanpresstheEditbuttonwith anythingselectedontheirmainpagetoaccesstheireditor.Oftentherewillbemoreobjects insideofthesemainpageeditors,suchasshiftpatternsandvelocitypatterns,andtheycanbe editedbyselectingtheirparameterwiththecursorandpressingtheEditbutton.Aneditor containsalltheparametersthatdefinetheobjectyoureprogramming. Next,younavigatearoundtheeditorspage(s)withthesoftbuttons,andselectparameterswith thecursor(arrow)buttons.Whenyouveselectedaparameter(itsvalueishighlightedbythe cursor),youcanchangeitsvaluewithoneofthedataentrymethods.Whenyouchangeavalue, youllnormallyhearitseffectontheobjectyoureediting.ThePC3Kdoesntactuallywriteyour editingchangestomemoryuntilyousavetheobjectyoureworkingon.Itthenallowsyouto choosebetweenwritingovertheoriginalobject,orstoringthenewlyeditedversioninanew memorylocation.

Whats an Object?
Ifyouvebeenwonderingwhatwemeanbythetermobject,itsanexpressionweusefor anythingthatcanbenamed,saved,deleted,oredited.Heresalistofallthetypesofobjects: Programs FactorypresetoruserprogrammedsoundsstoredinROMorflash memory.A programisoneormorelayersofsound,withprogrammable DSPfunctionsappliedtothekeymapswithineachlayer. FactorypresetoruserprogrammedV.A.S.T.DSPFunctionsstoredin ROMorflashmemory.AnAlgorithmcontainstheDSPconfigurationand settingsthatareusedinaprogram. FactorypresetoruserprogrammedMIDIperformancepresetsconsisting ofupto16zones,eachwithitsownprogram,MIDIchannel,and controllerassignments,and(optionally)arpeggiationspecifications. Sequencefilesloadedintomemory,orMIDIdatarecordedinSongmode. FactorypresetoruserprogrammedconfigurationsofthePC3Ks onboarddigitalaudioeffectsprocessor.

Algorithms

Setups

Songs Chains

QuickAccessbanks Factorypresetoruserprogrammedbanksoftenentrieseach,thatstore programsandsetupsforsinglebuttonaccessinQuickAccessmode. Intonationmaps Factorypresetoruserprogrammedpitchoffsetsforeachnoteinall octaves.Setfrommastermode,intonationmapsareusedtochangethe PC3Ksintonationinallmodes.

5-1

Editing Conventions Object Type and ID

Shiftpatterns

Factorypresetoruserprogrammedsequencesofnoteshiftinformation, usedbythearpeggiatorfordetailedarpeggiations,orbytheShiftKey Numbercontrollerdestination. Factorypresetoruserprogrammedsequencesofnotevelocityshift information,usedbythearpeggiatorfordetailedvelocitytriggeringin arpeggiation. ThevaluesthataresetfortheglobalcontrolparametersontheMaster modepage,aswellasthesettingsfortheparametersontheTransmit, Receive,andChannelspagesinMIDImode,andtheprogramscurrently assignedtoeachMIDIchannel. Containsalistofdependentobjectsneededbytheotherobjectsinafileat thetimethefilewassaved.

Velocitypatterns

Mastertables

Nametables

Object Type and ID

ThePC3KstoresitsobjectsinmemoryusingasystemofIDnumbersthataregenerally organizedintobanks.EachobjectisidentifiedbyitsobjecttypeandobjectID;thesemakeit unique.Anobjectstypeissimplythekindofobjectitis,whetheritsaprogram,setup,song,or whatever.TheobjectIDisanumberfrom1tothemaximumthatdistinguisheseachobjectfrom otherobjectsofthesametype.Forexample,withinabankyoucanhaveasetup,aprogram,and aneffect,allwithID201;theirobjecttypesdistinguishthem.Youcant,however,havetwo programswithID201. Object Type
Program Setup Velocity Map

Object ID
201 404 1

Object Name
Hot Keys Silicon Bebop Linear

ROM(factorypreset)objectshaveIDnumbersinanumberofbanks.Whenyousaveobjectsthat youveedited,thePC3KwillaskyoutoassignanID.IftheoriginalobjectwasaROMobject,the PC3KwillsuggestthefirstavailableIDintheUserBank(startingat1025).Iftheoriginalobject wasamemoryobject,youllhavetheoptionofsavingtoanunusedID,orreplacingtheoriginal object.Doublepresstheand+buttons(beneaththealphawheel)toselectthenextavailable userlocation. ObjectsofdifferenttypescanhavethesameID,butobjectsofthesametypemusthavedifferent IDstobekeptseparate.Whenyouresavinganobjectthatyouveedited,youcanreplacean existingobjectofthesametypebygivingitthesameID.Theobjectyouarereplacingwillbe deletedpermanently.Thereisoneexceptiontothis:IfyouwriteoveraROMobject(factory preset,)youcanalwaysreverttotheoriginalfactoryROMobjectbydeletingyounewobjectthat usestheID.TheobjectthatyouhadreplacedtheROMobjectwithwillbepermanentlydeleted, andtheoriginalROMobjectwillappearinitsplace. ManyparametershaveobjectsastheirvaluestheIntonationparameterontheMastermode page,forexample.Inthiscase,theobjectsIDappearsinthevaluefieldalongwiththeobjects name.YoucanenterobjectsasvaluesbyenteringtheirIDswiththealphanumericpad.Thisis especiallyconvenientforprograms,sincetheirIDnumbersareusuallythesameastheirMIDI programchangenumbers. TheobjecttypeandIDenableyoutostorehundredsofobjectswithoutlosingtrackofthem,and alsotoloadfilesfromstoragewithouthavingtoreplacefilesyouvealreadyloaded.

5-2

Editing Conventions Saving and Naming

Saving and Naming

Whenyouveeditedanobjecttoyoursatisfaction,youllwanttostoreitinmemory.Theresa standardprocedureforsavingandnaming,whichappliestoallobjects.YoucanpresstheSave softbutton,ofcourse,butitseasiertopresstheExitbutton,whichmeansIwanttoleavethe currenteditor.Ifyouhaventactuallychangedanythingwhileintheeditor,youllsimplyexit tothemodeyoustartedfrom.Ifyouhavemadechanges,however,thePC3Kwillaskyouifyou wanttosavethosechanges.ThisisthefirstSavedialog,theExitpage.PressCanceltoresume editing,Notoexittheeditor,orYestosaveyoureditsandmovetotheSavepage. TheRenamesoftbuttonontheSavepagetakesyouimmediatelytothenamingdialog,where youassignanametotheobjectyouresaving.Youhaventsavedyet,butyoullbeabletoafter youvenamedtheprogram. Thecursorunderlinesthecurrentlyselectedcharacter.Pressthe<<<or>>>softbuttonstomove thecursorwithoutchangingcharacters.Pressanalphanumericbuttononeormoretimesto enteracharacterabovethecursor.Thecharactersthatcorrespondtothealphanumericbuttons arelabeledundereachbutton.Ifthecharacterthatappearsisnottheoneyouwant,pressthe buttonagain.Pressthe+/buttononthealphanumericpadtoswitchbetweenupperandlower casecharacters. Press0oneormoretimestoenterthenumerals0through9.PressClear(onthealphanumeric pad)toerasetheselectedcharacterwithoutmovinganyothercharacters.PresstheDeletesoft buttontoerasetheselectedcharacter.Allcharacterstotherightofthecursorwillmoveone spaceleft.PresstheInsertsoftbuttontoinsertaspaceabovethecursor,movingallcharactersto therightofthecursoronespacetotheright. PresstheCancelsoftbuttonifyoudecidenottonametheobject.PressOKwhenthenameisset thewayyouwanttosaveit. Inadditiontothelettersandnumerals,therearethreesetsofpunctuationcharacters.Theeasiest waytogettothemistopressoneofthealphanumericbuttonstoselectacharacterclosetothe oneyouwant,thenscrolltoitwiththeAlphaWheel.Heresthewholelist: !#$%&()*+,./0123456789 :;<=>?@AthroughZ [\]^_`athroughz.(space). PressingthePlus/Minusbuttonssimultaneouslyisashortcuttothefollowingcharacters: 0,A,aand(space). Ifyourewonderinghowwecameupwiththissequenceofcharacters,itscomposedofASCII characters33through122. WhenyoupressOK,thefinalSavedialogappears,whereyouassignanIDtotheeditedobject. Ifyouchangeyourmindaboutthename,presstheRenamesoftbuttonforanothertry. Note:Foranadditionalnamingmethod,seeKeyboardNamingbelow.

5-3

Editing Conventions Saving and Naming

ROM Objects
IftheobjectyoustartedfromwasaROM(factorypreset)object,thePC3Kwillautomatically suggestthenextavailable(unused)IDastheIDfortheeditedobject.IfthatstheIDyouwant, presstheSavesoftbutton,andtheobjectwillbestoredinmemorywiththatID.Otherwise,you canselectanyIDfrom1tothemaximum.Thispagealsogivesyoutheopportunitytoreturnto thenamingdialog(asdescribedintheprevioussection)or,bypressingtheObjectsoftbutton, toaccesstheObjectUtilities(seeTheUtilities(UTILS)Page on page 1311). IfyouselectanIDthatsalreadyinuse,thePC3Kwilltellyouthatyouregoingtoreplacethe ROMobjectthatsalreadybeenassignedthatID.Ifyoudontwanttodothat,youcanselecta differentID.OryoucanpressthePlus/MinusbuttonssimultaneouslytotogglebetweentheID thatthePC3KsuggestedandtheoriginalID.OrpresstheCancelsoftbuttontocancelthe operation. IfyoudecidenottocancelorchangetheID,andyoupresstheReplacesoftbutton,thePC3K willwriteyournewlyeditedobjectovertheexistingROMobject.Actually,itonlyappearsthat way,sinceyoucanttrulywritetoROM.TheROMobjectwillreappearifyoudeletethenewly editedobject(therearesoftbuttonsineacheditorfordeletingobjects).

Memory Objects
Iftheoriginalobjectwasamemoryobject,thePC3Kwillassumeyouwanttoreplaceit,andwill suggestthesameIDastheoriginalobject.(InallmodesotherthanSongmode,adiamondicon precedinganitemsIDindicatesamemoryobject).AswithROMobjects,youcancancel, replace,orchangetheIDandsavetoanunusedID.Ifyoureplaceamemoryobject,however,its definitelygone!

5-4

Editing Conventions Saving and Naming

Keyboard Naming
Thekeyboardnamingfeature makesnamingobjects convenient,bylettingyouuse thekeyboard(oryourMIDI controller)toenterthenameof theobjectyouremodifying. WhenyoureinaRename dialog,useeitheroftheChan/ Layerbuttonstochange betweenthekeyboardnaming states:Off(disabled),On,and Adv(Advance). WhensettoOnorAdv,thekeys (MIDInotenumbers,actually) correspondtoallthecharacters shownonpage 53.Thereare alsoequivalentstothecursor movement,insertion,deletion, andOK(Enter)buttons. Onrequiresyoutomovethe cursortoentereachletter,justas youhavetodowhenusingthe normaldataentrymethodsfor naming.Advautomatically movesthecursoronespaceto therighteachtimeyoustrikea key,justlikeatypewriteror computerkeyboard.Thisisthe mostconvenientsetting.
A0 to C8 (Standard 88-note Keyboard)
A0

Move cursor to start of name Move cursor left one space Move cursor right one space (Shift) (Space) a A b B c C d D e E f F g G h H i I j J k K l L m M n N o O p P q Q r R s S t T u U v V w W x X y Y z Z (Space) (Shift) Move cursor left one space Move cursor right one space Move cursor to end of name

C2

Delete; move characters left one space Insert; move characters right one space 1 Wheel ! tch Absolute Value 2 @ 3 #

C3

4 $ 5 % 6 ^ 7 & 8 *

C4

9 ( 0 (zero) ) - (Hyphen) = (Equals) (Backspace) _ (Underscore) +

C5

; (Semicolon) ' (Apostrophe) , (Comma) . (Period) / (Slash) > ? <

: (Colon) '' (Quote)

C6

[ (Left bracket) ` (Back quote) ] (Right bracket) \ (Backslash) (OK, Enter) Delete; move characters left one space Insert; move characters right one space

C7

Use the (Shift) keys or Sustain pedal to enter upper-case and special characters

C8

5-5

Editing Conventions Deleting Objects

Deleting Objects
Withinmosteditors,therearesoftbuttonsfordeletingobjects.Whenyouwanttodeletean object,presstheDeletesoftbutton,andthePC3Kwillaskyouifyouwanttodeletetheobject. (Atthispointinthedialog,youcanselectanotherobjectwithanyofthedataentrymethods.) PressOKifyouwanttodeleteit,orpressCancelifyoudont.ThePC3Kwontletyoudelete ROMobjects(alsoknownasfactoryobjects). Memoryobjects,ontheotherhand,aregonewhenyoudeletethem!IfyouvereplacedaROM objectbysavingamemoryobjectwiththesameID,theROMobjectisinvisible,butstillthere. DeletingthememoryobjectstoredatthesameIDwillrestoretheROMobject. Youlloftendeleteobjectstogainmemoryspace,ortoorganizethememorybanksbeforesaving objectstostorage.Todeletemultipleobjects,usetheDeleteObjectsutilityavailableinMaster mode.Itsdescribedonpage 1113.

Dependent Objects
Adependentobjectisanobjectthatslinkedinmemorywithatleastoneotherobject.For example,ifyoucreateasetupthatusesaprogramthatyoualsocreated,thatprogramisa dependentobjectofthesetup. Whenyoustarttodeleteanobjectthathasdependentobjects,theDeletedialoggivesyoua choice:Deletedependentobjects?IfyoupressYes,thePC3Kwilldeletetheobjectandallits dependentobjectswhenyouexecutetheDeletefunction.Inourexample,ifyouweredeleting thesetupyoucreated,andyouchosetodeletedependentobjects,thedependentprogram wouldgetdeletedaswell.IfyoupressNoattheDeletedependentobjects?prompt,thePC3K deletesonlytheobject,butkeepsthedependentobjects.Inourexample,thesetupwouldget deleted,butthedependentprogramwouldremain. Whendeletingobjectsandtheirdependents,thePC3Kdeletesonlythosedependentobjectsthat arentdependentonotherobjectsthatyourenotdeleting.Forexample,supposeyouhavetwo setupsthatcontainthesameprogram.Ifyoudeleteoneofthesetups,anddeletedependent objectswithit,thesetupgetsdeleted,buttheprogramthatscontainedintheothersetup remainsinmemory.

Saving and Loading FilesStorage Mode

Savingafilesimplyinvolvesselectingobjectsoracompletebankofobjectstobestoredasa singlefile.AllobjectswithIDswithinthatrangewillbesavedtothefile.Whenyouloadafile, thePC3Kasksyouwhichbankwillreceivethefile.Youcanloadafileintoanyofthesixteen banks,regardlessofthebankitwassavedfrom.ThePC3Kwillautomaticallyreassigntheobject IDs. SeeChapter 13formoreinformationonloadingandsavingfiles.

5-6

Editing Conventions Special Button Functions

Special Button Functions

TheModebuttonsandtheChan/Layerbuttonshaveadditionalfunctions,dependingonthe modeoreditoryourein.Thetablebelowdescribessomeofthesespecialbuttonfunctions. Button
Program Mute 1 Setup Mute 3 Q Access Solo Effects FX Bypass

Special Function
Mutes Layer 1 of current program in Program Editor.

Mutes Layer 3 of current program in Program Editor.

Solos current layer in Program Editor.

In Program Editor, bypasses (mutes) current programs FX preset (plays program dry.) In Chain Editor, mutes/unmutes currently selected effects box, and the Effect Mode buttons LED will light when a muted effects box is selected, and unlight when an unmuted effects box is selected. Mutes Layer 2 of current program in Program Editor. Mutes Layer 4 of current program in Program Editor. Mutes active layer of current program in Program Editor. Negates effect of unsaved edits and plays last-saved (unedited) version of object being edited in Program Editor. In Program Editor, these two buttons scroll through layers of current program; in Setup Editor, scroll through zones of current setup; in Quick Access mode, scroll through entries in current Quick Access bank; In Song Mode, change recording track. Whenever cursor is highlighting an editable object or parameter, takes you to corresponding editor or programming page

MIDI Mute 2 Master Mute 4 Song Mute Active Storage Compare Chan / Layer

Edit

5-7

Editing Conventions Special Button Functions

5-8

Program Mode VAST and KB3 Programs

Chapter 6 Program Mode

ProgramsarethePC3Ksperformancelevelsoundobjects.Theyrepresetsoundsequivalentto thepatches,presets,voices,ormultisthatyoufindonothersynths. ProgrammodeistheheartofthePC3K,whereyouselectprogramsforperformanceand editing.ThePC3Kispackedwithgreatsounds,butitsalsoasynthesizeroftrulyamazingdepth andflexibility.Whenyourereadytostarttweakingsounds,theProgramEditoristheplaceto start. ThePC3Kofferstwonewpowerfuleditingfeatures:CascadeModeandDynamicVAST. CascadeModeletsyourouteanylayerofaprogramintotheDSPofanyotherlayer.Anyof the32layersofaprogramcangointoanyotherlayer. DynamicVASTletsyouwireyourownalgorithms.YoucancombinedifferentDSP functionsinanyorderyoulike,includingparallelandserialconfigurations.

VAST and KB3 Programs

ItisimportanttounderstandthedifferencebetweenVASTprogramsandKB3programs. VASTprogramscontainupto32layers,eachofwhichcontainsakeymaporKVAoscillator. Keymapsconsistsofanumberofsamplesassignedtoaparticularkeyboardrange.KVA oscillatorsusepowerfulDSPtogeneratearangeofsimpleandcomplexwaveforms(seeEditing VASTProgramsWithKVAOscillators on page 653formoredetails.) KB3programsuseamuchdifferentarchitecture.Therearenolayersoralgorithms,justasetof oscillators(designedtoemulatethetonewheelsinaHammondOrgan)thatstartrunningas soonasyouselectaKB3program. Thenexttwosectionsgivemoredetaileddescriptionsofthedifferencesinstructurebetween VASTprogramsandKB3programs.Thereareseveralperformancefeatures(andafewissues) uniquetoKB3programs;thesearediscussedonpage64.Afterthat,therearedescriptionsof theProgrammodefeaturesthatarecommontobothtypesofprograms.

6-1

Program Mode VAST Program Structure

VAST Program Structure

YoumightwanttotakealookatFigure 61 on page 63,whichdepictsthehierarchyofaVAST program,fromindividualsamplesallthewayuptosetups,whichcancontainupto16 programs. EveryVASTprogramcontainsatleastonelayer.Alayerconsistsofakeymapandanalgorithm forprocessingthesamplescontainedinthekeymap.Eachsampleisaseparatedigitalrecording ofsomekindofsound:musical,vocal,industrial,anysoundatall.Individualsamplesare assignedtospecifickeyranges(fromA2toD3,forexample),andarealsoassignedtobe triggeredatspecificattackvelocities.Theseassignmentsconstitutethekeymap. Whenyoutriggeranote,thePC3Klookstothekeymapofeachlayerofthecurrentlyactive VASTprogram(s)todeterminewhichsamplestoplay.Thesoundenginethenfetchesthe requestedsamplesandgeneratesadigitalsignalrepresentingthesoundofthesamples.This signalfirstpassesthroughtheDSPfunctionsthatmakeupthealgorithm.Itthenpassesthrough thePC3Kseffectsprocessor,andfinallyappearswithsomelevelofeffectsappliedtoitat oneormoreoftheaudiooutputs. ThelayeristheVASTprogramsbasicunitofpolyphony,thatis,eachlayerconstitutesoneofthe 128voicechannelsthePC3Kcanactivateatanytime.Ifyouhaveaprogramthatconsistsoftwo layerscoveringthenoterangefromA0toC8,eachkeyyoustriketriggerstwovoicechannels. Note:OneexceptiontothisstructureiswhenusingaKVAoscillator,thesoundsourceforthatlayeris notderivedfromakeymap,butisgeneratedatthealgorithmstage(thoughkeymapinformationisstill usedtosetkeyrangeandmaximumamplitude.)Afterthis,thestructureisthesameasdescribedabove. SeeEditingVASTProgramsWithKVAOscillators on page 653formoredetails.

6-2

Program Mode VAST Program Structure

Zone Zone Zone 1 2 3

Zone Zone 4 5

Zone Zone 6 7

Zone 8

16 keyboard zones each with independent program, MIDI channel, and control assignments

Selected for performance and editing in Program mode; up to 32 layers per program

A keymap processed through an algorithm, modulated by control sources

Up to 128 sample roots, assigned to play at programmable key and velocity ranges

Individual digital sound recordings stored in ROM; stereo samples use two voices of polyphony

Figure 6-1

VAST Program Structure

6-3

Program Mode KB3 Program Structure

KB3 Program Structure

TheresnothingquitelikethesoundoftheclassicHammondB3tonewheelorgan,especially whenplayedthroughaLeslierotatingspeakersystem.Wevedoneextensivetestingand analysiswithseveraltonewheelorgans,andcreatedourownmodelstoemulatetheunique tonewheelsound.Weeventookintoaccountthewaythatolderorgansstarttosounddifferent (andarguablybetter)astheircapacitorsbegintoleakandweincludedaparameterthatlets youvarytheamountofgrunge(leakage)inyoursound. KB3programsuseoscillatorstoemulatethetonewheelsound.Eachoscillatoroperates independently,andhasitsownpitchandamplitudecontrol.Youcancontrolhowmany oscillatorsareusedforaKB3program.Therearetwooscillatorspervoice,foratotalof256.You canuseupto91oftheminaKB3program(the92ndisreservedtoproducekeyclick).Because theoscillatorsstartrunningassoonasyouselectaKB3program,therearealwaysvoices availableunlikeVASTprograms,whichstartstealingnoteswhenyoureachthepolyphony limit. Theoscillatorswellcallthemtonewheelsfromhereonaredividedintoanupperandlower group.TheuppertonewheelsusethesamplesinthePC3Kskeymapstogeneratesound,while thelowertonewheelsusesinewaves.YoucanchangethekeymapofaKB3programsupper tonewheelstoproducealargearrayofsounds.Bychangingthekeymapfromsinetoasaw waveitispossibletoemulatethesoundofclassiccomboorgansliketheVoxandFarfisa models.

KB3 Mode
KB3programsaredifferentenoughfromVASTprogramsthatweusethetermKB3modeto describewhatsgoingonwhenyouplayaKB3program.WheneveryouplayaKB3program, youareinKB3mode.TheblueLEDintheKB3buttonwilllightwhenthecurrentprogramisa KB3program. IfyouwanttocreateyourownKB3program,startbyeditinganexistingKB3program. YoucanplayKB3programsonlyonasinglechannelatatime.

6-4

Program Mode KB3 Program Structure

Real-time Controls in KB3 Mode

YouhaverealtimecontrolovermanycomponentsofKB3programsdirectlyfromthefront panel.Theslidersemulatethedrawbarsthataresoessentialtothetonewheelsound,whilethe buttonsabovethem(theyrecalledtheMutebuttons,becausetheynormallymuteandsolo zonesinSetupmode)cancontroltheKB3effects:Leslie,vibrato,chorus,andpercussion. WhenyoureinProgrammode,theMutebuttonsalwayscontrolKB3effects.Inasetup containingaKB3program,ifyouwanttheMutebuttonstocontrolKB3effects,youllhaveto editthesetup,becauseinSetupmode,theMutebuttonsmuteandunmutezonesbydefault. 1. GotoSetupmode,andselectthesetupyouwanttoedit.PressEdit. 2. PresseithermoresoftbuttonuntilyouseetheCOMMONsoftbutton.Pressit,andyour displayshouldshowthefollowingscreen:

3. SelecttheMutesparameterandchangeitsvaluetoKB3Control. 4. Dontforgettosave.

Playing KB3 Programs

Oneofthestandardperformancefeaturesofmanytonewheelorgansisthesetofdrawbarsfor emulatingthestopsonapipeorgan.Movingthedrawbarscontrolstheamplitudeofeitherthe fundamentalsortheharmonicsofthenotes(outtoincreaseamplitude,intodecreaseit). ThePC3Ksslidersserveastheninedrawbarsfoundonmosttonewheelorgans.Pushingthe slidersupistheequivalentofpushingthedrawbarsin(removingfundamentalsorharmonics).
Subharmonics 16' Slider A 5 /3' Slider B
1

Fundamental 8' Slider C

Harmonics 4' Slider D 2 2/3' Slider E 2' Slider F 1 3/5' Slider G 1 1/3' Slider H 1' Slider I

Table 6-1

Standard Drawbar Settings for the Hammond B3

KB3 Mode Buttons (Mute Buttons)

WhentheMutebuttonsareenabledforKB3control,theirLEDsindicatethestatusofthe variouseffectsforthecurrentKB3program.Thisstatusissavedaspartofeachprogram.You canchangetheeffectsinrealtimebypressingthebuttons(orbysendingtheappropriateMIDI ControllervaluesfromyourMIDIcontroller).

6-5

Program Mode KB3 Program Structure

Innormaloperationalmodes,usingtheMutebuttonstochangeaprogramsKB3effectsdoesnt affecttheprogram;theeffectsreturntotheirprogrammedsettingsthenexttimeyouselectthe program.If,however,youreinaneditorwhenyouchangetheeffects,youreactuallyediting theprogram.Ifyoulikethechanges,youcansavetheprogramwiththenewKB3effects settings.Ifyoudontlikethechanges,youcanexitwithoutsaving,andtheprogramwillrevert toitsprevioussettings. TheMutebuttonsalsosendMIDIControllerinformationtothePC3KsMIDIOutport.See Column2ofTable 63tocheckwhichControllernumbersthebuttonssend. Ofcourse,youcanchangetheprogrammedsettingsfortheKB3modebuttons.Foreachofthe buttons,theresacorrespondingparameterintheProgramEditor.

Effect Category 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Percussion Vibrato Rotary

Button Name Fast / Slow On / Off Chorus / Vibrato Depth 1 / 2 / 3 On / Off Volume Loud / Soft Decay Fast / Slow Pitch High / Low

Corresponding Page and Parameter MISC: SpeedCtl MISC: VibChorCtl MISC: VibChorSel MISC: VibChorSel PERC: Percussion PERC: Volume PERC: Decay PERC: Harmonic

Comments

Disabled if Button 2 is off Disabled if Button 2 is off Disabled if Button 5 is off Disabled if Button 5 is off Disabled if Button 5 is off

Table 6-2

KB3 Mode Buttons and Corresponding Parameters

MIDI Control of KB3 Programs

WhenyoureplayingaKB3programfromanexternalMIDIsource,therearetwothingstokeep inmind: CertainMIDIControllernumbersalwayscontrolspecificKB3features ThevalueoftheLocalKbdChparameteraffectshowKB3programsrespondtoMIDI Controllermessages

Controller Numbers Table 63liststheMIDIControllernumbersthatcontrolKB3features.Thefirstcolumnlists theControllernumbersthatKB3programsalwaysrespondto(thePC3Kalsosendsthese ControllernumberstoitsMIDIOutportwhenyoureusingthelocalkeyboardchannelwell saymoreaboutthatonpage 67).

6-6

Program Mode KB3 Program Structure

KB3 Program Feature

MIDI Controller Number

PC3K

Drawbar1 Drawbar2 Drawbar3 Drawbar4 Drawbar5 Drawbar6 Drawbar7 Drawbar8 Drawbar9 Expression Pedal Percussion On/Off Percussion High/Low Percussion Loud/Soft Percussion Fast/Slow Rotating Speaker Slow/Fast Vibrato/Chorus On/Off Vibrato/Chorus Selector Key Click Level Leakage Level

6 13 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 11 73 72 71 70 68 95 93 89 90

Table 6-3

KB3 MIDI Controller Assignments

Local Keyboard Channel ThelocalkeyboardchannelenablesthePC3KtoreceiveMIDIinformationonasinglechannel, thenrechannelizethatinformationsoyoucanplayandcontrolall16zonesofasetup,evenif yourMIDIsourcetransmitsononlyonechannel.WhenyoureinProgrammode,thelocal keyboardchannelremapsincominginformationtothePC3Kscurrentchannel(theoneshown inthetoplineofthedisplay). TheLocalKbdparameter(ontheRECEIVEpageinMIDImode)definesthelocalkeyboard channel.WhenyoureinProgrammode,andplayingaKB3program,youmaywanttoleave LocalKbdsettoNone,whichisitsdefaultvalue.InthiscasetheMIDIControllermessagesfor KB3controllistedinTable 63arecertaintowork. Therearesomepossibledisadvantagestothis,however.First,thePC3Kdoesntrelayincoming MIDItoitsMIDIOutport.Perhapsmoreimportantly,ifyouchangethechannelonyourMIDI source,thePC3KplaystheprogramonthechannelusedbyyourMIDIsourceregardlessof thePC3Kscurrentchannel.Forexample,ifyourMIDIsourcetransmitsonChannel1,andyou setthePC3Kscurrentchannelto2,youllstillplaytheprogramassignedtoChannel1.Ifthats thewayyoulikeit,theresnoproblem.

6-7

Program Mode KB3 Program Structure

Youmayfinditmoreconvenienttousethelocalkeyboardchannel.Inthiscase,thePC3K remapsincomingMIDItothePC3Kscurrentchannel,soinProgrammode,youllalwaysplay theprogramonthePC3Kscurrentchannel.IncomingMIDIalsogetssenttothePC3KsMIDI Outport.Ontheotherhand,inthiscaseyourMIDIsourcestransmittingchannelmustmatch thePC3Kslocalkeyboardchannelforanythingtowork.Furthermore,forKB3programs,some oftheMIDIControllernumberslistedinTable 63wontnecessarilywork. Thingsareabitdifferentforplayingsetups.Inthiscase,youmustusethelocalkeyboard channeltobeabletoplayandcontrolallofthesetupszones.SetLocalKbdtomatchthechannel yourexternalMIDIsourceisusing(soif,forexample,yourMIDIsourcetransmitsonChannel1, setLocalKbdto1).AllMIDIinformationthatthePC3Kreceivesonthelocalkeyboardchannel getsremappedtothechannelsandcontroldestinationsusedbythezonesinthesetup. ThePC3KalsoremapscertainMIDIControllermessagesthatitreceivesonthelocalkeyboard channel,sothattheycorrespond(inmostcases)tothedefaultassignmentsforthePC3Ks physicalcontrollers(ModWheel,sliders,ribbons,etc.).Whilethisensuresthatthephysical controllersworkinaconsistentandrelativelystandardfashionformostsetupsandVAST programs,itnecessitatesafewadjustmentstomakeincomingMIDIControllermessagescontrol theKB3featureslistedinTable 63.Withouttheseadjustments,someoftheKB3featureswont respondtoMIDIControllermessagesthisistruewhenyoureplayingprogramsaswellas whenyoureplayingsetups. Tomakeeverythingworkproperly,youneedtomakesurethatalltheappropriatephysical controllersareassignedforKB3control.Physicalcontrollerassignmentsarehandledbysetups, andaredefinedbyparametersonseveralpagesintheSetupEditor.Eachzoneofasetuphasits owncontrollerassignments.Programsdonthavecontrollerassignments,sotheyborrow themfromaspecialsetupthatsreservedforthatpurpose.ThissetupiscalledtheControlSetup; itsdeterminedbythevalueoftheControlSetupparameter(ontheTRANSMITpageinMIDI mode).YoucanreadaboutControlSetupsindetailonpage 69. Whenyoureplayingasetuponthelocalkeyboardchannel,eachzonethatusesaKB3program musthavetheappropriatephysicalcontrollerassignments.WhenyoureplayingaKB3 program,Zone1oftheControlSetupmusthavetheappropriatephysicalcontroller assignments. Onefinalwordfornowaboutusingthelocalkeyboardchannel:alltheMIDIinformation receivedonthelocalkeyboardchannelalsogetssentafterbeingremappedtothePC3KsMIDI Outport.TheresadiscussionofthelocalkeyboardchannelinChapter10.

6-8

Program Mode The Program Mode Page

The Program Mode Page

ThetoplineoftheProgrammodeentrylevelpageshowsyourmodelocation,thepresentMIDI transposition,theMIDIbanknameandMIDIprogramnumberofthehighlightedprogram,and thecurrentMIDIchannel. TheinfoboxattheleftoftheProgrammodepagegivesyouinformationaboutthecurrent program.Generally,theinfoboxshowsthekeymapassignedtoeachlayer.Thelinebeneaththe nameofthekeymapindicatesthekeyboardrangeofthatlayer.Inthediagramabove,for example,theresonelayerthatextendsfromC0toC8thedefaultrange.Therepresentationof theselayerrangesisapproximate;theyreintendedtoletyouknowifyouhavealayered keyboard(linesoverlapping)orasplitkeyboard(linesnotoverlapping).Theinfoboxcan displayuptofourlayersatatime.Ifthecurrentprogramhasmorethanfourlayers,youcan viewtheirkeymapsbypressingandholdingdowntheEnterbuttonandscrollingwiththe Chan/Layerbuttons. ForKB3programs,theinfoboxshowsthekeymapusedfortheuppertonewheels. Note:ForVASTlayersusingKVAoscillators,theinfoboxmayormaynotshowthenameoftheoscillator beingused.SeeAdvancedUseOfKVAOscillators on page 655formoredetails.

Control Setup
TheControlSetupdefineswhatthePC3Ksphysicalcontrollers(wheels,sliders,pedals,etc.)do whileyoureinProgrammode.Itsaconvenientwaytoapplythecontrollerassignmentsinyour setupsglobally.JustchooseanexistingsetuptobetheControlSetupusingtheControlSetup parameterontheMIDImodeTRANSMITpage.

WhileyoureinProgrammode,manyofthecontrollerassignmentsforZone1oftheControl Setupalsoapplytotheprogramsyouplay(thisistrueforMIDIcontrolmessagesaswell,unless youhaveturnedoffMIDIcontrol).

6-9

Program Mode The Program Mode Page

IfyoudontlikethewaythephysicalcontrollersworkinProgrammode,youcaneitherselecta differentControlSetup,oredittheexistingone.AnychangesyoumaketothecurrentControl SetupwillalsoaffectthewaythatsetupworksinSetupmode. ThereareafewimportantpointstorememberabouttheControlSetup: ThecurrentControlSetupgovernscontrollerassignmentsforallmodesexceptSetup,where eachsetuphasitsownuniqueassignments. ThecurrentControlSetupisusedbyallprogramsinProgrammode. YoucannotchangetheControlSetupfromwithinProgrammode. TheControlSetupdoesntaffectthesoundofaprogram,onlytheassignmentsofcertain physicalcontrollers.Thesamplesandkeymapsassignedtoaprogramareunaffectedbythe ControlSetup.WhileyoureinProgrammode,thePC3Kignorestheprogramsassignedto thesetupthatyouchooseastheControlSetup. AlmostalloftheVASTprogramsinthePC3Karedesignedtorespondtothecontroller assignmentsinthedefaultControlSetup(126 Internal Voices).Thereforeyoullwanttouse 126 Internal VoicesastheControlSetupinmostcases.However,ifyouwanttochangethe controllerassignmentsforanyprogramorsetofprograms(eitherVASTorKB3),usea ControlSetupthathasthecontrollerassignmentsyouwant.

The Soft Buttons in Program Mode

UsetheOctavandOctav+softbuttonstotransposeupordownbyafulloctave.Pressingboth Octavbuttonssimultaneouslyreturnsthetranspositiontoitsoriginalsetting. PressingthePanicsoftbuttonsendsanAllNotesOffmessageandanAllControllersOff messageonall16MIDIchannels. PresstheInfosoftbuttontoseeallofthecontrollerassignmentsofthecurrentprogram.Scroll downthepageusingtheAlphaWheelorthePlus/Minusbuttons. TheXpose/Xpose+buttonsareashortcutforquicktranspositioninsemitone(halfstep) increments.YoucanusethemtotransposetheentirePC3Kasmuchasthreeoctavesupor down.Thetoplineofthedisplayshowsthecurrentamountoftransposition(Xpose).Pressing bothXposebuttonssimultaneouslyreturnsthetranspositiontozero.TheXposebuttons transposethePC3K,aswellasanyMIDIdevicesconnectedtothePC3KsMIDIOutport. Changingthetranspositionwiththesoftbuttonsalsochangesthecorrespondingsettingonthe MIDImodeTRANSMITpage.

Controller Entry Values in Program Mode

Tocaptureentryvaluesforsliders,gototheControllerspagebypressingtheCTLSsoftbutton intheprogrameditor.Thesoftbuttonnexttoit,SetCtl,allowsyoutocapturethevaluesof yoursliders,MwheelandMIDI29(theSWbutton,locatedabovetheModWheel). Similarly,whenusingaKB3program,youcancapturetheentryvaluesforthedrawbars(the sliders)bypressingtheSetDBRsoftbuttonintheKB3programeditor(thisbuttonislocated nexttotheDRAWBRsoftbutton).

6-10

Program Mode Editing VAST Programs

Editing VAST Programs

TheProgramEditoriswhereyoubegintomodifythePC3Ksresidentsounds,andtobuildyour ownsoundsaroundsamplekeymapsorKVAoscillators(seeEditingVASTProgramsWithKVA Oscillators on page 653forsomedifferences.)Theresvirtuallynolimittothesoundsyoucan createusingthetoolsintheProgramEditor. Note:ThissectiondescribestheProgramEditorasitappliestoVASTprograms.SeeEditingKB3 Programs on page 660forinformationabouteditingKB3programs. ToentertheProgramEditor,startinProgrammodeandpressEdit.TheProgrammodeLED willgoout,andtheKEYMAP(Keymap)pagewillappear.

Thetoplineofthedisplaygivesyoutheusualreminderofyourlocation.Italsotellsyouwhich layeryoureviewing,andhowmanylayersthereareintheprogram.Youcanusethe Chan/Layerbuttonstoscrollthroughthelayers,iftheprogramhasmorethanone. Heresamethodforjumpingquicklytoaspecificlayerinaprogramitsespeciallyusefulin multilayereddrumprograms.HoldtheEnterbuttonandstrikeakey.Thedisplaywillshowthe layer(s)assignedtothatkey.Ifmorethanonelayerisassignedtothesamekey,repeatedly strikingthekey(whilecontinuingtoholdtheEnterbutton)willcyclethroughalllayers assignedtothatkey.ThismethodwillworkinmostplaceswithintheProgramEditor,butthere isanexception:iftheparameteryouhavehighlightedhasanotenumberorcontrolsourceasits value,thenholdingEnterandstrikinganotewillcallupthatnoteorcontrolsource.Forall otherparameters,however,thismethodwillswitchbetweenlayers.

The Soft Buttons in the Program Editor

TheProgramEditorssoftbuttonsarelabeledbythewordsthatappearinthebottomlineofthe display.ThesebuttonshavetwoimportantjobsintheProgramEditor:selectingpages,and selectingspecificfunctions.Ifasoftbuttonislabeledinalluppercaseletters,pressingitwilltake youtothepageitdescribes.Ifthebuttonislabeledinmixeduppercaseandlowercaseletters, pressingitwillexecutethesoftwarefunctiondescribedbythelabel.PressingtheLAYERsoft button,forexample,willtakeyoutotheLayerpage,whilepressingtheSavesoftbuttonwill initiatetheprocessforsavingthecurrentlyselectedprogram. TherearemorepagesandfunctionsintheProgramEditorthantherearesoftbuttons.Therefore, twoofthesoftbuttonsarededicatedtoscrollingthroughthelistofpagesandfunctions.Ifyou dontseethebuttonforthepageorfunctionyouwanttoselect,pressoneofthesoftbuttons labeledmore,andthelabelswillchange.Thisdoesntchangethecurrentlyselectedpage,it merelychangestheselectionofavailablesoftbuttons.

6-11

Program Mode Editing VAST Programs

TwoofthesoftbuttonsintheProgramEditorarespecialcases.Theyrethesoftbuttonsthat selecttheeditingpagesforthefirstandlastDSPfunctions(PitchandLevel,respectively)ofthe currentprogramsalgorithm.OneofthesesoftbuttonsislabeledPITCH,andpressingitwill takeyoutotheDSPCTL(DSPControl)pagewiththePitchparameterhighlighted.Theother oneofthesesoftbuttonsislabeledAMP,andpressingitwilltakeyoutotheDSPCTLpagewith theLevelparameterhighlighted. Additionally,pressingtheDSPCTLsoftbuttonwilltakeyoutotheDSPCTLpage.

The MODE Buttons in the Program Editor

WhenintheProgrameditor,eachoftheMODEselectbuttonhasadifferentfunction.Beside eachbuttonisthenameofitsfunctionintheProgrameditor.Whenactivated,thebuttonsLED willlightup. Mute 1, 2, 3, and 4 EachofthetopfourMODEselectbuttonsservetomuteoneofthecurrentprogramsfirstfour layers.PressingtheProgrambuttonmuteslayer1,pressingtheMIDIbuttonmuteslayer2, pressingtheSetupbuttonmuteslayer3,andpressingtheMasterbuttonmuteslayer4. Solo PressingtheQAccessbuttonsolosthecurrentlayer. Mute Active PressingtheSongbuttonmutesthecurrentlayer. FX Bypass PressingtheEffectbuttonbypassesalleffects.Note,however,thatifeitheroftheAuxOverrides inEffectsmodeareactive,thenthoseeffectsarestillapplied. Compare PressingtheStoragebuttoncallsuptheCompareEditor,whichrecallstheprogrampreedit settings,allowingyoutocompareyoureditedprogramwiththeoriginalprogram.Pressingthe StoragebuttonagainreturnsyoutotheProgrameditor. UsingtheCompareEditormakesnochangestothecurrentprogram.

6-12

Program Mode Algorithm Basics

Algorithm Basics
PresstheALGsoftbuttonintheProgramEditortotakeyoutotheAlgorithm(ALG)page.The basicdefinition:analgorithmisthewiring(signalpath)ofasampletotheaudiooutputs, throughaseriesofdigitalsignalprocessing(DSP)functionsthatyouselect.ThePC3Ks algorithmsarethecoreofVariableArchitectureSynthesisTechnology.TheDSPfunctionsare synthesistools(filters,oscillators,etc.)thatyouassigntothevariousstagesofthealgorithm.The DSPfunctionsyouchoosedeterminethetypeofsynthesisyouuse. Eachofthe59availablealgorithmsrepresentsapresetsignalpath.WithournewDynamic VASTfeature,youcaneditanypresetsignalpathandmakeyourown,uniquealgorithms,but thatwillbeexplainedfurtheroninthissection.TakealookatAlgorithm1inthediagrambelow. Itsoneofthesimplestalgorithms.

TheDSPfunctionsarerepresentedbytherectangularblocks.Thelinesconnectingtheblocks togetherindicatestheflowofthedigitalsignalfromlefttoright;theyrepresentwhatwecallthe wireofthealgorithm:theactualphysicalpaththatthesignalfollowsthroughthealgorithm. SelectingdifferentalgorithmscanbecomparedtoconnectingdifferentDSPfunctionswith differentwiringdiagrams. Thinkoftheleftsideofeachblockasitsinput,andtherightsideasitsoutput.Dependingonthe algorithm,thesignalmaysplitintotwowires,enablingpartofthesignaltobypasscertain portionsofthealgorithm.Splitwiresmayrejoinwithinthealgorithm,ortheymaypassallthe waythroughassplitsignals.Ifthelastblockhastwowiresatitsoutput,wecallitadouble outputalgorithm.Ifithasonewire,itsasingleoutputalgorithm,eveniftherearetwowiresin earlierportionsofthealgorithm. Eachblockofthealgorithmrepresentsacertainfunctioninthesignalpath.Ineverynon cascadedalgorithm(seeAltInputforAlgorithms(CascadeMode)below),thesignalflowsfirst throughaonestageDSPfunctionthatcontrolsthepitchofthesamplesinthekeymap(this functionisrepresentedasablocklabeledPITCHintheupperrighthandcornerofthedisplay). Infact,thefirstDSPfunctionineachalgorithmalwayscontrolspitch,eventhoughitdoesnt applyineveryinstanceand,aswillbeexplainedlaterinthissection,itisbypassedincascaded algorithms.Similarly,thelastDSPfunctionalwayscontrolsthefinalamplitudeofthesignal (thisfunctionisrepresentedasablocklabeledAMPintheupperrighthandcornerofthe display). ThenumberoffunctionparametersaDSPfunctioncanhavedependsontherelativesizeofits functionblockontheAlgorithmpage;forinstance,afunctionblockthatisthreeslotslongcan haveuptothreefunctionparameters,whereasafunctionblockthatistwoslotslongcanhave uptotwofunctionparameters.Foreachfunctionparameter,theresacorrespondingsubpage onboththeDSPCTLandDSPMODpages.OntheDSPCTLsubpages,therearefineadjustand hardwiredparameterswithwhichyoucanmakefixedadjustmentstothefunctionparameter.On theDSPMODsubpages,thereareprogrammableparametersthatyoucanassigntoanycontrol

6-13

Program Mode Algorithm Basics

sourceintheControllerListtomodulatethefunctionparameter.Theaboveitalicized parametertypesaredescribedinCommonDSPControlParameters on page 614.More informationonthesubpagescanbefoundinTheDSPControl(DSPCTL)Page on page 628and TheDSPModulation(DSPMOD)Page on page 629. HighlightinganyofthefunctionblocksontheALGpageandpressingtheEditbuttontakesyou totheDSPCTLpage.

Common DSP Control Parameters

ThetypeofDSPfunctionavailableforanyfunctionblockdependsonthealgorithm.Someofthe specializedfunctionslikethePANNERarealwayslocatedjustbeforethefinalAMPfunction. Others,likethethreeinputfunctions,appearonlyinalgorithmsthatarestructuredforthree inputfunctions. YoucanchangethenatureofeachlayerofaprogramsimplybyassigningdifferentDSP functionstothelayersalgorithm.Yourlevelofcontrolgoesmuchdeeperthanthat,however. EachDSPfunctionhasoneormoreparameterstowhichyoucanpatchavarietyofcontrol sourcestomodifythebehavioroftheDSPfunctionsthemselves. Theparametersonthevariouscontrolinputpagesareverysimilar;infact,therearesix parametersthatappearonalmosteverypage.Consequentlywerefertothemasthecommon DSPcontrolparameters.Althoughtheparametersonthecontrolinputpagesdifferslightly fromfunctiontofunction,youcanexpecttoseesomeorallofthecommonDSPcontrol parameterswheneveryouselectthecontrolinputpageforanyoftheDSPfunctions.

YoullrecognizethecommonDSPcontrolparameters,alongwithseveralotherparameters. KeepinmindthattheresasetofcommoncontrolparametersforeachoftheDSPfunctions;in thiscaseweredescribingthemonlyastheyapplytothepitchcontrolfunction. Function-parameter UnliketheotherfivecommonDSPparameters,thefunctionparametersareaccessibleonboth theDSPCTLpageandtheDSPMODpage.Theyarelistedalongthelefthandsideofeachpage; anychangesmadetothemononepagearereflectedintheother.Thelabelofeachfunction parameterdependsonitsfunctioninthecurrentprogramsalgorithm.Forexample,thePitch functionsfunctionparameterislabeledPitch;whereasthetwoblockLopassfunctions functionparametersarelabeledLPFrqandLPRes.

6-14

Program Mode Algorithm Basics

Byadjustingthefunctionparameter,youcanaddafixedamountofadjustmenttoanyDSP function.ForthePitchfunction,adjustingthefunctionparameterwillchangethepitchin semitoneincrements.Usethisasastartingpointtosetthepitchwhereyouwantittobe normally.Thiswillshiftthepitchofthecurrentlyselectedlayer,andwillaffecttheplaybackrateof sampledsounds.Sampledsoundshaveanupperlimitonpitchadjustment.Itsnormalforthe pitchesofsampledsoundstopin(stopgettinghigher)whenyouadjustthepitchupwardin largeamounts.Theoscillatorwaveformscanbepitchedhigher.Anysoundcanbepitched downwardwithoutlimit. Theprimaryuseofadjustingthefunctionparameterorfineadjustparameter(whichwillbe explainedunderthenextheading)istooffsetthecumulativeeffectsoftheotherDSPfunction parameters.Forexample,youmightsetahighvalueforkeytracking(definedbelow)fora dramaticchangeineffectacrossthekeyboard.Theeffectmightbetoomuchatoneendofthe keyboard,however,soyoucoulduseoneoftheadjustparameterstoreducetheinitialamount ofthateffect. ThePC3Kalwaysusesrealvaluesofmeasurement,ratherthanjustarbitrarynumbers,for adjustableparameters.Thismeansthatyouspecifypitchinsemitones(ST)andcents(ct),and amplitudeindecibels(dB). Rememberthattheparametersonthecontrolinputpagesarecumulativetheycanaddtoor subtractfromtheeffectsoftheotherparametersonthepage,dependingontheirvalues.For example,evenifyouveadjustedthepitchofasamplesohighthatitpins,theeffectsoftheother parametersmaybringthepitchbackdowntoaworkablerange. Onlythefunctionparameterscanbemodulatedbyacontrolsource. Fine Adjust Parameter Youcanaddslightdetuningtothepitchwiththefineadjustparameters.Noticethatthereare actuallytwofineadjustparametersforthePitchfunction:onethatchangesthepitchincents (100thsofasemitone),andonethatchangesitaccordingtoitsfrequency(inincrementsof Hertzcyclespersecond).Sincewerediscussingtheuniversalcontrolsourceshere,andnot specificallypitch,wellmoveonfornow,astheHzparameterappliesonlytopitchrelated functions.SeeThePITCHPage on page 626foramorethoroughdescriptionofHz. Hard-wired Parameters
Key Tracking

ThisisaquickwaytogetadditionalcontrolbasedontheMIDInotenumberofeachnoteyou trigger.Keytrackingappliesadifferentcontrolsignalvalueforeachnotenumber.Inthecaseof pitch,keytrackingenablesyoutochangethetuningofeachnoterelativetoitsnormalpitch. MiddleCisthezeropoint.Regardlessofthekeytrackingvalue,thereisnoeffectonMiddleC.If yousetanonzerovalueforkeytracking,theeffectincreasesforeachnoteaboveorbelow MiddleC.Inthecaseofpitch,forexample,sayyouassignavalueof5centsperkeyforthekey trackingparameter.TriggeringMiddleC(C4onthePC3K)willplayanormalC4.TriggeringC# 4willplayanote5centshigherthanC#4.TriggeringD4willplayanote10centshigherthanD 4,andsoon.NotesbelowMiddleCwillbetunedlowerthantheirnormalpitches.Ifyouseta negativevalueforkeytracking,notesaboveMiddleCwillbetunedlowerthantheirnormal pitches. KeepinmindthatkeytrackingonthePITCHpageworksinconjunctionwiththekeytracking parameterontheKEYMAPpage.ThisiswhyyoucansettheKeyTrkparameteronthePITCH pageto0ct/key,andnotesstillincreaseinpitchby100cents/keyasyougoupthekeyboard.Its becausetheKeyTrkparameterontheKEYMAPpageisalreadysetat100centsperkey.

6-15

Program Mode Algorithm Basics Velocity Tracking

Apositivevalueforvelocitytrackingwillraisethepitchasyoutriggernoteswithhigherattack velocities.Thisisgreatforgettingatraceofdetuningbasedonyourattackvelocity,especiallyin drumprograms,whereyoucanmakethepitchofthedrumsamplesriseslightlywithhigher velocityNoteOns,justasdrumsdowhenyoustrikethemharder.Negativevalueswilllower thepitchasyouincreasetheattackvelocity. Programmable Parameters

Source 1 (Src1)

ThisparametertakesitsvaluefromalonglistofcontrolsourcesincludingeveryMIDIcontrol number,ahostofLFOs,ASRs,envelopesandotherprogrammablesources. Src1worksintandemwiththeparameterbeneathitonthepage:Depth.Chooseacontrolsource fromthelistforSrc1,thensetavalueforDepth.WhenthecontrolsourceassignedtoSrc1isat itsmaximum,thepitchwillbealteredtothefulldepthyouset.Forexample,ifyousetSrc1to MWheel,andsetDepthto1200ct,thepitchwillriseasyoupushtheModWheeluponyour PC3KorMIDIcontroller,reachingamaximumof1200ct(12semitones,oroneoctave).

Source 2 (Src2)

Thisonesevenmoreprogrammable.LikeSrc1,youchooseacontrolsourcefromthelist.But insteadofsettingafixeddepth,youcansetaminimumandmaximumdepth,thenassign anothercontrolsourcetodeterminehowmuchdepthyouget.Trythisexample.(MakesureSrc1 issettoOFFfirst,sothetwosourcesdontinteract.)StartwithProgram199,andpressEdit. PressthePITCHsoftbuttontoselectthePITCHpage.SettheSrc2parametertoavalueofLFO1, thensettheMinimumDepthparameterto100ct,andMaximumDepthto1200ct.Thensetthe DepthControlparametertoMWheel.ThisletsyouusetheModWheeltovarythedepthofthe oscillationinpitchgeneratedbytheLFO. Now,whentheModWheelisdown,thepitchwilloscillatebetweenasemitone(100ct)upanda semitonedown(thedefaultwaveformforLFO1isasinewave,whichgoespositiveand negative).WiththeModWheelup,thepitchwilloscillatebetweenanoctaveupandanoctave down. SincetheModWheelisacontinuouscontrol,youcanachieveanyamountofdepthcontrol betweentheminimumandmaximum.IfyouhadsettheDepthControltoSustain,forexample, thenyoudgetonlytwolevelsofdepthcontrol:themaximum(1200cents)withyourMIDI controllerssustainpedaldown,ortheminimum(100cents)withthesustainpedalup.

6-16

Program Mode Algorithm Basics

Alt Input for Algorithms (Cascade Mode)

CascademodeisaparticularlypowerfulfeatureofthePC3Kthatallowsyoutocreateunique algorithmsofpreviouslyunattainablelevelsofcomplexity.Thefollowingthreefiguresshowthe signalpathofaprogramconfiguredusingthePC3KsnewCascademode:

OntheALG(Algorithm)pageofeverylayer,theAltInputparameterletsyouselectanyother layertogothroughthecurrentlayersDSP.Youcansetitupsothatlayer1goesintolayer2into 3(asshownabove).Ifyouturndownthevolumeonlayers1and2,thenyouarehearingtrue cascadingitslikeabigchainwitheachalgorithmfeedingintothenext,andwhatyouhearis layer3soutput.Youcanalsohavethevolumesofallthreelayersturnedup,whichwillmixthe signalofallthreelayers.Youcould,inthesameprogram,alsodecidetorunlayer4into5into6 into13into25ifyouwanted.Anyofthe32layerscangointoanyotherlayer.

6-17

Program Mode Algorithm Basics

TheCascademodealgorithms(verymuchliketriplemodeonaK2600)startatID101.Notein theabovefigureshowalgorithm101looksverysimilartoalgorithm1.EachCascademode algorithmcorrespondstoitsnoncascadeequivalent,whichhasthesameIDnumberminus100. Forexample,algorithm105isacascademodeversionofalgorithm5.OntheAlgpage,select whichlayeryouwanttohaverunningthroughyourcascadelayerwiththeAltInputparameter. MakesuretoturndowntheAmpvolumeonyoursourcelayersifyouonlywanttohearwhats comingoutofthefinalcascadelayer.

Dynamic VAST
TheDynamicVASTeditorisyetanotherparticularlypowerfulfeatureofthePC3Kthatallows youtoeditthewiringofanalgorithm.WithDynamicVAST,literallythousandsofwiring schemesarepossible.UsingCascademodeinconjunctionwithDynamicVASTgivesyoualmost infinitecontroloveryourprogramssoundandbehaviorbyenablingyoutocreateyourown unique,complexalgorithms. ToentertheDynamicVASTeditor,selecttheALG(Algorithm)pagebypressingtheALGsoft button.HighlighttheAlgorithmparameter,selectanalgorithm,andpresstheeditbutton.This actioncallsuptheEditAlgorithm(EditAlg)pageinwhichyoucaneditthewiringofthe selectedalgorithm.

Parameter Inputs Outputs Number of Blocks Output Mode

Range of Values 1, 2 1, 2 1 to 4 Normal, Sep. L/R

Default 1 1 2 Normal

Inadditiontohavingaselectablefunction,eachfunctionblockhasthreeeditableparameters: numberofinputs,numberofoutputs,andblocksize(theOutputModeparameterisaneditable parameterofthealgorithmasawhole).WhenyoufirstentertheEditAlgpage,therewillbea cursorintheparameterfield,andthefirstblockofthealgorithmwillbehighlighted.Toselecta blockforediting,movethecursordownthedisplayuntilnoparameterfieldishighlighted; then,usingthe<and>buttons,highlighttheblockyouwishtoedit.Pressthe^buttontomove thecursorbackintotheparameterfields,andthenselecttheparameteryouwishtoedit. TheOutputModeparameterdeterminesthenumberofoutputsfromthealgorithm.With OutputModesettoNormal,thealgorithmhasoneoutput.WithOutputModesettoSep.L/R, thealgorithmhastwooutputs,eachofwhichissenttoaseparatestereochannel. Toeditthesignalpath,selecteitheraninputofablockoranoutputoftheentirealgorithm.By scrollingwithAlphaWheelortheand+buttons,youcanseeeverypossibleconfigurationfor thatselectedsignalpath.

6-18

Program Mode The KEYMAP Page

The KEYMAP Page

PresstheKEYMAPsoftbuttontocalluptheKEYMAPpage.Theparametersonthispageaffect samplerootselection,i.e.,whichsamplesareplayedonwhichkeys.

Parameter Keymap Transpose Key Tracking Velocity Tracking Alt Method Stereo Timbre Shift Playback Mode Alt Control

Range of Values Keymap List -128 to 127 semitones 2400 cents per key 7200 cents Switched, Continuous Off, On 60 semitones Norm, Rvrs, Bidirectional, Noise Control Source List

Default 1 Piano f Left 0 100 0 Switched Off 0 Normal Off

Keymap
AssignakeymapfromROMtothecurrentlayer.Keymapsarecollectionsofsamplesassigned tonoteandvelocityranges.WiththeKeymapparameterselected,presstheEditbuttontoenter theKeymapeditor(seeTheKeymapEditor on page 141fordetails.)

Transpose (Xpose)
Transposethecurrentkeymapupasmuchas127semitones(tenoctavesandaperfectfifth)or downasmuchas128semitones(tenoctavesandaminorsixth).

Key Tracking (KeyTrk)

ThisisoneofthesixcommonDSPcontrolparameters.OntheKEYMAPpage,keytracking affectstheintervalbetweennotes.Thedefaultvalueof100cents(acentisahundredthofa semitone)givesyouthenormalsemitoneintervalbetweeneachnote.Highervaluesincreasethe interval;lowervaluesdecreaseit.Negativevalueswillcausethepitchtodecreaseasyouplay highernotes. Whenyoumakechangestothisparameter,youllneedtokeepinmindthatKeyTrkonthe KEYMAPpageworksinconjunctionwithKeyTrkonthePITCHpage.Therefore,youllneedto checktheKeyTrkvalueonbothpagestoseehowkeytrackingworkswithinaprogram.Unless yourelookingfornonstandardnoteintervals,thevaluesoftheKeyTrkparametersonthe PITCHandKEYMAPpagesshouldaddupto100cents.

6-19

Program Mode The KEYMAP Page

Velocity Tracking (VelTrk)

ThisisanothercommonDSPcontrolparameter.AswiththeotherparametersontheKEYMAP page,thisshiftsthepositionofthekeymap.Differentattackvelocitieswillplaydifferentpitch shiftsofthesamplerootassignedtothatnoterange.Iftheshiftisgreatenough,thenexthigher orlowersamplerootwillbeplayed,whichinsomecases(manydrumprograms,forexample) willplayanentirelydifferentsound.Positivevalueswillplayhigherpitchesofthesampleroot whenyouusehardattackvelocities(theyshiftthekeymapdownward),whilenegativevalues willplaylowerpitches.

Method (AltMethod)
SeeAlternativeSwitch(AltControlandAltMethod)below.

Stereo
Youllusethisparameterwhenyoureworkingwithstereosamples. WhenyousetthisparametertoOn,theKEYMAPpagechangesslightly:

AnadditionalKeymapparameterappears.Thetwokeymapparametersaredistinguishedas Keymap1andKeymap2.TheKEYMAPpageparameterswillaffectbothkeymaps.Whenthe StereoparameterissettoOn,theOUTPUTpageforthecurrentlayerwillshowanadditional pairofPanparameters. ThePC3Kcontainsbothstereoandmonosamples.Keymapsdesignedforstereousearelabeled withnamesbeginningwithStereoorendinginLeft,Right,L,orR.Forstereo keymapplayback,setStereoOnandassigncorrespondingLeftandRightkeymapsto Keymap1andKeymap2respectively.ForkeymapsbeginningwithStereo,assignthesame keymaptobothKeymap1andKeymap2.IfyouselectthesamekeymapforKeymap1and Keymap2,thePC3KautomaticallyusestheleftsideforKeymap1andtherightsidefor Keymap2. Onceyouhavethekeymapsassigned,gototheOUTPUTpageandsetthepanningforeach sampleasdesired.Keepinmindthatusingstereokeymapsreducesthepolyphonyofthe program.Forexample,ifyouhadatwolayerprogramwithstereokeymapsineachlayer,each noteyouplaywoulduse4ofyour128voices,allowingatotalof32notesbeforeallthevoices havebeenused. Ifyourenotusingstereosamples,youshouldsetthisparametersvaluetoOff.

6-20

Program Mode The KEYMAP Page

Timbre Shift
Thisparameterworksonlyonmultisamplekeymaps,andchangestherootselectionforeach keyyouplay.Withthisparameteryoucanradicallyalterthecurrentlayerstimbre(basicsound characteristics).Thenatureofthechangedependsonthetimbreitself,sothisparametercallsfor experimentation.Basically,timbreshiftingchangesanotestimbrebyimposingdifferent harmonicqualitiesontothenote.Atimbreshiftednoteretainsitsoriginalpitch,butits harmonicsarethoseofthesametimbreatahigherorlowerpitch.Positivevaluesforthis parametertendtobrightenasound,whilenegativevaluesdarken. Heresanexample.Ifyoushiftthetimbreup4semitones,thenplayingC4willresultinthepitch C4,butwillactuallyplaythesamplenormallyassignedtoG#3,andshiftitspitchupfour semitones.Thiswillincreasetheplaybackrateofthesample,soalthoughthepitchremains normal,thetimbreisbrighter.YoudgetthesameeffectbysettingtheXposeparameteronthe KEYMAPpageto4semitones,thensettingtheAdjustonthePITCHpageto+4semitones.For multisamplelayerswithnarrowkeyranges,largeamountsoftimbreshiftingwillcause differentsamplerootstobeplayedback.

Playback Mode
Thisgivesyounumerousoptionsformanipulatingthesamplesinthecurrentlayerasyou triggerthem.Normalleavesthesamplesunaffected,whileReverseplaystheminreverse.Ata valueofReverse,thesampleswillcontinuetoloopaslongasnotesaresustained.Toplaythem justonceinreverse,youwouldadjustthelengthofthelayersamplitudeenvelope(explained laterinthischapter).BiDirect(bidirectional)causesthesamplestoloopinfinitely,alternating betweennormalandreversedplayback.Noisereplacesthesampleswithawhitenoise generator.

Alternative Controller (AltControl)

SeeAlternativeSwitch(AltControlandAltMethod)below.

Alternative Switch (AltControl and AltMethod)

Many,butnotall,PC3Ksamplerootshavebeenpreassignedacarefullychosen,fixedalternate samplestartorendpointthatcanbeselectedusingtheAlternateSwitchfeature(AltControland AltMethodparameters).Thisfeatureallowsyoutocontrolthesampleplaybackstart/endtime triggeredbyanycontrolsource. UsetheAltControlparametertospecifyacontrolsourcethatwillcausethesampletobeginor endattheAltpoint.ThenusetheAltMethodparametertochoosebetweenswitchedand continuouscalculationoftheAltpoint.IfthevalueofAltMethodisSwitched,thePC3Kwilluse theAltpointwhentherelevantcontrolsourceisatavaluegreaterthan64atNoteStart.If AltMethodisContinuous,theAltpointwillvarydependingonthevalueoftherelevantcontrol sourceatNoteStart. Asanexample,supposeyoureworkingwithaflutekeymapandwishtocontroltheamountof chiffheardatthebeginningofthesound.OntheKEYMAPpageintheProgramEditor,set AltControltoMWheel.NowtheModWheelcontrolshowmuchoftheinitialsampleattackis used.IfyousetAltMethodtoSwitchedandmovetheModWheelatleasthalfwayup,atNote Startthesamplewillbeginatthepresetalternatestartpoint(inthiscase,slightlypasttheinitial chiff).IfyousettheAltMethodtoContinuous,thePC3Kwillinterpolatethesamplesstarting pointbasedonthepositionoftheModWheel.IftheModWheelis75%ofthewayupatNote Start.thesamplewillbegin75%ofthewaybetweennormalandalternatestartpoints.

6-21

Program Mode The LAYER Page

Emulating Legato Play IfyouplacetheAltpointaftertheinitialattacktransientsofthesample,thenyoucanusetheAlt Switchtoemulatelegatoplayinginanacousticinstrument.Asanexample,setKeymapto 14 Flute.NowsettheAltControlparametertoChanSt(ChannelState).Nowifyouplaynotes separately,theinitialbreathychiffwillbeheard.Butifyouplaythenoteslegato(connecting themsmoothly),theAltpointisusedandyoudonothearthechiff.ThisisbecausetheChanSt isturnedonaslongasanynoteisbeingheld.MostofthePC3KsROMsampleshavetheirAlt pointssetforpurposesoflegatoplay.Inmostcasesthedifferenceinattacksissubtle,butfor somesounds,likedrums,thedifferencecanbemorenoticeable.

The LAYER Page

PresstheLAYERsoftbuttontocalluptheLAYERpage.Hereyoullsetanumberofparameters thataffectthecurrentlayerskeyboardrange,attackandreleasecharacteristics,andresponseto variouscontrols.

Parameter Low Key High Key Low Velocity High Velocity Bend Trig Delay Control Minimum Delay Maximum Delay Layer Enable Enable Sense Enable Min Enable Max Opaque Layer Sustain Pedal Sostenuto Pedal Freeze Pedal Ignore Release Hold Through Attack Hold Until Sustain

Range of Values C -1 to G 9 C -1 to G 9 ppp to fff ppp to fff Off, Key, All Normal, Reversed Control Source list 0 to 25 seconds 0 to 25 seconds Control Source list Normal, Reversed 127 127 Off, On Off, On, On2 Off, On Off, On Off, On Off, On Off, On

Default C0 C8 ppp fff All Normal Off 0 0 On Normal 64 127 Off On On On Off Off Off

6-22

Program Mode The LAYER Page

Low Key (LoKey)

Thissetsthelowestactivenoteforthecurrentlayer.Thisparametersvaluecannotbesethigher thanthevalueforHiKey.ThestandardMIDIkeyrangeisC1G9(0127).MiddleCisC4 (ISP).

High Key (HiKey)

Hereyousetthehighestactivenoteforthecurrentlayer.Thisparametersvaluecannotbeset lowerthanthevalueforLoKey.

Low Velocity (LoVel)

Withthisparameteryoudefinethelowestattackvelocityatwhichthelayerwillbeenabled (generateasound).Thevaluesforthisparameterandthenextareexpressedinthestandard musicaldynamicsmarkings,similartothevaluesavailableforthevelocitymaps.Attack velocitiesthatarebelowthisthresholdwillnottriggernotes.Ifyousetthisparametersvalue higherthantheHiVelvalue,thelayerwillnotplayatall.

High Velocity (HiVel)

Similarly,thiswillsetthehighestattackvelocityatwhichthelayerwillbeenabled.Attack velocitiesabovethisthresholdwillnottriggernotesinthislayer. UsingLoVelandHiVel,youcansetupvelocityswitchingbetweenuptoeightlayers.Ifyou needevenmore,youcandoitusingtheEnableandEnableSense(S)parameters(page 624).

Pitch Bend Mode (Bend)

ThisdetermineshowPitchbendcontrolmessageswillaffectthecurrentlayer.AvalueofAll bendsallnotesthatareonwhenthePitchbendmessageisgenerated.AvalueofKeybends onlythosenoteswhosetriggersarephysicallyonwhenthePitchbendmessageisgenerated (notesheldwiththesustainpedal,forexample,wontbend).Thisisgreatforplayingguitar solosontopofchordsplayachord,holditwiththeSustainpedal,thenplayyourlicksand bendthemallyouwant;thechordwontbendwithit.AvalueofOffdisablesPitchbendforthe currentlayer.

Trigger (Trig)
SetTrigtoRvrstohavenotestriggeredonkeyup.Theinitialvelocitiesofnotestriggeredthis wayaredeterminedbythereleasevelocitiesofthekeysthattriggerthem.Thedefaultsettingis Norm.

Delay Control (DlyCtl)

Hereyouselect,fromtheControlSourcelist,acontrolsourcethatwilldelaythestartofallnotes inthecurrentlayer.ThelengthofthedelayisdeterminedbyMinDlyandMaxDly(described below).YoullassignacontinuouscontrollikeMWheelfortheDlyCtlparameterwhenyou wanttovarythedelaytime,andaswitchcontrolifyouwantthedelaytoeitherbeitsminimum value(switchoff),oritsmaximum(switchon).Thedelaycontrolwillaffectonlythosenotes triggeredafterthedelaycontrolsourceismoved;thedelaytimeiscalculatedateachnotestart, basedonthestatusofthedelaycontrolsourceatthattime.

6-23

Program Mode The LAYER Page

Minimum Delay (MinDly), Maximum Delay (MaxDly)

Thelengthofthedelayisdeterminedbythesetwoparameters.Whenthecontrolsource assignedtoDlyCtlisatitsminimum,thedelaywillbeequaltothevalueofMinDly.Thedelay willbeequaltothevalueofMaxDlywhenthecontrolsourceisatitsmaximum.IfDlyCtlisset toOFF,yougettheminimumdelay.IfitssettoON,yougetthemaximumdelay.Thisdoesnt changethenotesattacktime,justthetimeintervalbetweentheNoteOnmessageandthestart oftheattack.Thedelayismeasuredinseconds.

Enable
Thisassignsacontrolsourcetoactivateordeactivatethelayer.Whenthevalueoftheassigned controlsourceisbetweentheminimumandmaximumthresholdssetbytheSense(S) parameter,thelayerisactive.Whenthevalueoftheassignedcontrolsourceisbelowthe minimumorabovethemaximum,thelayerisinactive.Bydefault,manylayershavetheEnable parametersettoON,sotheminimumandmaximumthresholdsdontmatter.Theyrerelevant onlywhenEnableissettoaspecificcontrolsource(likeMWheel). Somelocalcontrolsources(KeyNumandAttVel,forexample)arenotvalidfortheEnable parameter.Inthesecases,youshouldusetheglobalequivalent(GKeyNumandGAttVelinthis example).

Enable Sense (S)

Thisparameterdetermineshowandwhenalayerisenabledbythecontrolsourceassignedfor theEnableparameter.EnableSensehasthreevalues:orientation,minimum,andmaximum. Supposeforamomentthatyoureeditingaprogram,andinthecurrentlayeryouvesetthe valueofEnabletoMWheel,whichcausestheModWheeltocontrolwhetherthelayerisactive. ThedefaultvaluesforEnableSenseareasfollows:orientationisNorm;minimumis64,and maximumis127.ThismeansthatwhentheModWheelislessthanhalfwayup,thelayeris disabled.ThelayerplaysonlywhentheModWheelismorethanhalfwayup. ChangetheorientationtoRvrs,andthelayerplaysonlywhentheModWheelislessthan halfwayup.ChangetheorientationbacktoNorm,andchangetheminimumto127.Nowthe layerplaysonlywhentheModWheelisallthewayup. YoucouldusethisparametertosetupatwolayerprogramthatwouldletyouuseaMIDI controltoswitchbetweenlayers,sayaguitarsoundandadistortedguitar.Bothlayerswould havetheirEnableparameterssettothesamecontrolsource,sayMWheel.Onelayerwouldhave itsEnableSenseorientationsettoNorm,andtheotherwouldhaveitsettoRvrs.Bothlayers wouldhavetheirEnableSenseminimumssetto64,andtheirmaximumsto127.Thefirstlayer wouldplaywhenyourModWheelwasaboveitsmidpoint,andthesecondlayerwouldplay whentheModWheelwasbelowitsmidpoint.(Youcouldachievethesameeffectbyhavingthe EnableSenseorientationinbothlayerssettoNorm,andtheminimumandmaximumvaluesset asfollows:minimum0andmaximum63foronelayer;minimum64andmaximum127forthe other.) UsingthisparameterinconjunctionwiththeEnableparameter,youcaneasilycreatevelocity switchingforasmanylayersasyouhaveinyourprogram.Thisisusefulfordrumprograms, sinceyoucandefineadifferentvelocitytriggerlevelforeachofthe32layersavailableindrum programs. First,settheEnableparameterfortheLayer1toavalueofGAttVel(globalattackvelocity).This causesthelayertoplaybasedontheattackvelocityofyourkeystrokes.ThensettheEnable Sense(S)parametertoavalueofNorm,andadjustitsminimumandmaximumvalues(thetwo numeralstotherightofNorm)toanarrowrange.Dontusenegativevalues,sincetheydont applywhenyoureusingGAttVelasthelayerenabler.

6-24

Program Mode The LAYER Page

Repeatthisforeachlayerintheprogram.Bearinmindthatifyouwanttosetup32different velocitylevelsforaprogram,withequalintervalsbetweeneachlayer,thenyouhavearangeof 4foreachlevel(Layer1is03,Layer2is47,andsoon).Itwontbeeasytoplayprecisely enoughtotriggerthelayeryouwant.Ontheotherhand,ifyoureusingSongmodeoran externalsequencer,youcaneditattackvelocitylevels,andgetexactlytheresultsyouwant.

Opaque
Anopaquelayerblocksallhighernumberedlayersinitsrange,allowingonlytheopaquelayer toplay.Thisisaneasywaytochangeasmallrangeofnotesinaprogram,leavingtheoriginal soundplayingaboveandbelowthenewsound. Startwithaonelayerprogram,andcreateanewlayer(Layer2)withtheNewLyrsoftbutton. OntheKEYMAPpageforLayer2,selectthekeymapyouwanttouse,thenontheLAYERpage, setLayer2srange(say,C3toD3),andsetitsOpaqueparametertoOn.ThengotoLayer 1,and duplicateit(withtheDupLyrsoftbutton);theduplicatelayerbecomesLayer 3.Younowhavea threelayerprogram.DeleteLayer1(theoriginallayer);Layer2(thenewlayeryoucreated) becomesLayer1,andLayer 3becomesLayer 2.NowLayer 2blocksoutLayer 3(theduplicate oftheoriginallayer)atthenotesC 3D 3.

Sustain Pedal (SusPdl)

Whenthisparameterison,thelayerwillrespondtoallsustainmessages(Controllerdestination 64,Sustain).Whenoff,thecurrentlayerwillignoresustainmessages.On2meansthatthe sustainpedalwillnotcatchthereleaseofanotethatisstillsoundingwhenthesustainmessage isreceived;thiscanbeveryusefulinaprogramthatusesamplitudeenvelopeswithalong releasetime.

Sostenuto Pedal (SosPdl)

WhenSostenutoison,thelayerwillrespondtoallsostenutomessages(Controllerdestination 66,Sostenuto).Whenoff,thelayerignoressostenutomessages.Sostenuto,asyoumayknow,isa featurefoundonpianosthathavethreepedals.PressingtheSostenutopedalonapiano(usually themiddlepedal)sustainsthenoteswhosekeysyouwereholdingdownwhenyoupressedthe pedal.Notesplayedafterthepedalisalreadydowndonotgetsustained.

Freeze Pedal (FrzPdl)

ThisparameteractivatesordeactivatesthelayersresponsetoFreezepedalmessages (Controllerdestination69,Freeze).TheFreezepedalcontrolcausesallnotesthatareonto sustainwithoutdecayuntiltheFreezepedalcontrolgoesoff.Ifanoteisalreadydecaying,itwill freezeatthatlevel.

Ignore Release (IgnRel)

Whenon,thelayerwillignoreallNoteOffmessagesreceivedbythePC3K.Thisshouldbeused onlywithsoundsthatdecaynaturally,otherwisethesoundswillsustainforever.WhenIgnRelis off,thelayerrespondsnormallytoNoteOffmessages.Thisparametercancomeinhandywhen yourPC3Kisslavedtoadrummachineorsequencer,whichsometimesgeneratesNoteOnsand NoteOffssoclosetogetherthattheenvelopedoesnthavetimetoplaybeforethenoteis released.Youllalsowanttousethisparameterwhenyoureplayingstaccato,andthesound youreplayinghasalongamplitudeenvelope.Thisparametershouldbeusedonlywithnotes thateventuallydecaytosilence.Sustainingsoundswillsustainforever. DonotuseIgnoreReleasewithMonophonicprograms(page 634).

6-25

Program Mode The PITCH Page

Hold Through Attack (ThrAtt)

Whenon,thisparametercausesallnotesinthelayertosustainthroughtheentirefirstattack segmentoftheiramplitudeenvelopes,evenifthenoteshavebeenreleased.Ifyouhaveasound withaslowattack,oranattackthatsdelayedwiththedelaycontrol,settingthisparameterto Onwillmakesureyournotesreachfullamplitudeevenifyoureplayingfast.WhensettoOff, noteswillreleaseassoonasyoureleasethenote(generateaNoteOff).Ifthefirstattacksegment ofthelayersamplitudeenvelopeisveryshort,youprobablywontnoticeadifferencebetween valuesofOnandOff.

Hold Until Decay (TilDec)

Whenon,thisparametercausesallnotesinthelayertosustainthroughallthreeattack segmentsintheiramplitudeenvelopesevenifthenoteshavebeenreleased.Loopedamplitude envelopeswillnotloop,however,ifthenotesarereleasedbeforereachingtheendofthefinal attacksegment.Noteswillgointotheirnormalreleasesiftheyarereleasedaftertheenvelope haslooped.WhensettoOff,noteswillreleaseassoonasaNoteOffmessageisgenerated.

The PITCH Page

PressingthePITCHsoftbuttontakesyoutotheDSPCTLpagewiththePitchfunction highlighted.SeeTheDSPControl(DSPCTL)Page on page 628formoreinformationonthePitch function.

The AMP Page

PressingtheAMPsoftbuttontakesyoutotheDSPCTLpagewiththeAmpfunction(labeledas Level)highlighted.SeeTheDSPControl(DSPCTL)Page on page 628formoreinformationon theAmpfunction.

6-26

Program Mode The Algorithm (ALG) Page

The Algorithm (ALG) Page

PresstheALGsoftbuttontocalluptheAlgorithm(ALG)page.Thetoplineofthedisplaygives youtheusualmodereminder,andtellsyouwhichlayeryourelookingat,aswellashowmany layersareinthecurrentprogram.YoucanviewtheALGpagesofanyotherlayersinthe programbyusingtheChan/Layerbuttons.

Thecentralportionofthepageshowsthealgorithmforthecurrentlyselectedlayer.Youseethe numberofthealgorithm(from1to28,101to131,andtheIDsforanyuserdefinedalgorithms) andagraphicrepresentationofthesignalpath,aswellasthecurrentlyselectedDSPfunctions withinthesignalpath. Touseadifferentalgorithm,selecttheAlgorithmparameteranduseanydataentrymethodto selectadifferentone.TochangetheDSPfunctionwithinanalgorithm,movethecursortothe blockyouwanttochange,thenusetheAlphaWheelorPlus/Minusbuttons.Theresa staggeringnumberofcombinationsofalgorithmsandDSPfunctionsalone,nottomentionthe numerouscontrolsthatcanbeusedtomodifytheDSPfunctions. Note:Changingalayersalgorithmcanaffectthelayerssounddrastically.Itsagoodideatobringdown thevolumeofyourPC3Koryoursoundsystembeforechangingalgorithms. SeeAlgorithmBasics on page 613forinformationoneditingalgorithms.

6-27

Program Mode The DSP Control (DSPCTL) Page

The DSP Control (DSPCTL) Page

Beforereadingfurther,besuretoreadAlgorithmBasics on page 613andCommonDSPControl Parameters on page 614. PresstheDSPCTLsoftbuttontocalluptheDSPControl(DSPCTL)page,whichisdisplayed below:

Function

Parameter Pitch Fine Adjust

Range of Values -128 to 127 semitones 100 cents 10.00 Hertz 2400 cents/key 7200 cents (Depends on Function) (Depends on Function) (Depends on Function) (Depends on Function) -96 to 24 decibels 2.00 decibels/key 96 decibels

Default 0 0 0 0 0 (Depends on Function) (Depends on Function) (Depends on Function) (Depends on Function) -6 0 35

Pitch

Hertz Adjust Key Tracking Velocity Tracking

(Function) (Function) (Function) (Function) Level

(Function-Parameter) (Function-Parameter) (Function-Parameter) (Function-Parameter) Level Key Tracking Velocity Tracking

Eachfieldinthelefthandcolumnofthepageisafunctionparameterofthecurrentlayers algorithm.Youcancoarselyadjustthefunctionparameterintheselefthandfieldsasnotedin CommonDSPControlParameters,anyadjustmentsmadetothefunctionparametersonthe DSPCTLpagearereflectedinthecorrespondingfunctionparametersontheDSPMODpage. TherighthandsideoftheDSPCTLpageisthesubpageofthehighlightedfunctionparameter onthesubpagearethefineadjustparametersandhardwiredparameters.Toaccessthe parametersonthesubpage,highlightthefunctionparameteryouwishtoedit,andthenpress the>buttontomovethecursorintothesubpage.

6-28

Program Mode The DSP Modulation (DSPMOD) Page

Thelabelofafunctionparameterdependsonitscorrespondingfunctionblockinthecurrent layersalgorithm.TheaboveDSPCTLpagecorrespondstothefollowingalgorithm:

The DSP Modulation (DSPMOD) Page

Beforereadingfurther,besuretoreadAlgorithmBasics on page 613andCommonDSPControl Parameters on page 614. PresstheDSPMODsoftbuttontocalluptheDSPModulation(DSPMOD)page,whichis displayedbelow:

Parameter Source 1 Depth Source 2 Depth Control Minimum Depth Maximum Depth

Range of Values Control Source List (Depends on Function) Control Source List Control Source List (Depends on Function) (Depends on Function)

Default Off 0 Off Off 0 0

Eachfieldinthelefthandcolumnofthepageisafunctionparameterofthecurrentlayers algorithm.Youcancoarselyadjustthefunctionparameterintheselefthandfieldsasnotedin CommonDSPControlParameters,anyadjustmentsmadetothefunctionparametersonthe DSPMODpagearereflectedinthecorrespondingfunctionparametersontheDSPCTLpage. TherighthandsideoftheDSPCTLpageisthesubpageofthehighlightedfunctionparameter onthesubpagearetheprogrammableparameters.Toaccesstheparametersonthesubpage, highlightthefunctionparameteryouwishtoedit,andthenpressthe>buttontomovethe cursorintothesubpage.

6-29

Program Mode The OUTPUT Page

Eachfunctionparameterssubpagecontainstheprogrammableparametersofthehighlighted functionparameter.Byassigningcontrolsourcestomodulateafunctionparameter,youcan enablerealtimecontrolofyourprogramssoundandbehavior.YoucanassignSrc1toany controlsource,andcanspecifyitsmaximumvaluewiththeDepthparameter.Src2isdifferent youcanassignittoanycontrolsource,butcanalsoassignacontrolsourcetoitsmaximum valuewiththeDptCtlparameter.YoucanthenspecifytherangeofSrc2sdepthwiththe MinDepthandMaxDepthparameters. Note:ThePC3KfeaturesaneasyshortcutforquicklyassigninganyofthePC3Ksrealtimecontrollers (sliders,wheels,buttons,etc.)toacurrentlyselectedparameter(suchastheSrc1andSrc2parameters above.)SimplyholdtheEnterbuttonandmovethedesiredcontroller. Thelabelofafunctionparameterdependsonitscorrespondingfunctionblockinthecurrent layersalgorithm.TheaboveDSPMODpagecorrespondstothefollowingalgorithm:

The OUTPUT Page

PresstheOUTPUTsoftbuttontogettotheOUTPUTpage,whereyousetthelayerspreand postFXpanning.ThereareactuallyfourdifferentconfigurationsoftheOUTPUTpage;which oneyouseedependsonwhetherthecurrentlayerusesastereokeymap,andwhetherituses programFXorlayerspecificeffects(moreonthisinTheProgramFX(PROGFX) Page on page 647andTheLayerFX(LYR_FX)Page on page 649). Regardlessofthepagesconfiguration,thereareparametersforadjustingthepanposition,the panmode,thepantable(ifany),thecrossfadecontrol,andthecrossfadesense.Layersthatuse stereokeymaps,orthatuselayerspecificFX,haveadditionalparametersontheirOUTPUT pages.ThefollowingpageisforamonokeymapprogramthatusesprogramFX:

6-30

Program Mode The OUTPUT Page

Parameter Pan (or Pan 1) (Pan 2) Pan Mode (Output Pan) (Output Gain) (Output Pan Mode) Pan Table Crossfade Control Crossfade Sense Drum Remap Exclusive Zone Map

Range of Values 64 64 Fixed, +MIDI, Auto, Reverse 64 -96 to 48 decibels Fixed, +MIDI Pan Table List Control Source List Normal, Reversed Off, Kurz1, Kurz2 Zone Map List

Default 0 63 +MIDI 0 0 +MIDI 0 None Off Norm Off 0 None

Pan
UsethisparametertopositionthecurrentlayerspreFXsignal.Negativevaluespanthesignal totheleftchannel,positivevaluespantotheright,andavalueofzeropanstothecenter.To adjustthepostFX,finalstagegainandpanningofthecurrentprogram,gototheCOMMON pageandadjusttheOutputparameters(seeTheCOMMONPage on page 633);ortoadjusta layerspostFXaudiosignalindividually,gototheLYR_FXpageandsettheLayerFXMode parametertoLayerSpecificFX(seeTheLayerFX(LYR_FX)Page on page 649),andthenreturn totheOUTPUTpageandadjusttheoutputparameters. Anadditionalpanparameter(Pan2)appearsifyouhavetheStereoparameterontheKEYMAP pagesettoavalueofOn.

Pan Mode
WhenthemodeisFixedthepanpositionremainsasdefinedwiththePanparameter,ignoring MIDIpanmessages.Whenthemodeis+MIDI,MIDIpanmessages(MIDI10)willshiftthe soundtotheleftorrightofthePanparametersetting.Messagevaluesbelow64shiftitleft, whilethoseabove64shiftitright.AsettingofAutoassignsthepansettingofeachnotebased onitsMIDInotenumber.Inthiscase,MiddleC(MIDInotenumber60)isequivalenttothePan parameterssetting.Lowernotesshiftincreasinglyleft,whilehighernotesshiftincreasingly right.AsettingofReverseshiftslownotesright,andhighnotesleft.MIDIpanmessageswill alsoaffectthepanpositionwhenvaluesofAutoandReverseareselected.

6-31

Program Mode The OUTPUT Page

Output: Pan, Gain, and Mode

WhentheLayerFXModeparameterissettoLayerSpecificFXontheLYR_FXpage,three additionalparametersappearontheOUTPUTpage:OutPan,OutGain,andOutPanMode.

TheseparametersareanalogoustotheoutputparametersontheCOMMONpage,butarelayer specifictheCOMMONoutputparametersapplytoalllayers.Youcanusetheoutput parametersontheOUTPUTpagetoadjustthepanningandgainofthepostFXsignalofthe currentlayer.

Pan Table
Thefactorypresetpantablesarekeyspecificpanningschemesbywhichthenotethateachkey producesisuniquelypanned.Thesetablesareparticularlyusefulforproducingthestereo imageofadrumsetwhencreatingpercussionprograms,orforproducingthestereoimageofa pianowhencreatingpianoprograms.

Crossfade and Crossfade Sense (XFadeSense)

TheCrossfadeparameterletsyouselectacontrolsourcetofadethecurrentlayersamplitude fromzerotomaximum.WhenXFadeSenseisNormal,thelayerisatfullamplitudewhenthe Crossfadecontrolisatminimum.WithXFadeSensesettoReverse,thelayerisatzeroamplitude whentheCrossfadecontrolisatminimum. ThisparameterissimilartotheSrc1andDepthparametersfortheAmpfunctiononthe DSPCTLandDSPMODpages,buttheattenuationcurvefortheCrossfadeparameteris optimizedspecificallyforcrossfades. Tocrossfadetwolayersinthesameprogram,assignthesamecontrolsourcefortheCrossFade parametersinbothlayers,thensetoneoftheirXFadeSenseparameterstoavalueofNorm,and theotherstoRvrs.

Drum Remap
TheDrumRemapparametershouldgenerallynotbechanged.ThisparameterletsthePC3K knowhowdrumprogramsaremappedsothatdrumsoundscanbeproperlyremappedwhen usingtheGeneralMIDI(GM)drummap(seebelow.)Kurz1designatesthatthecurrentdrum programwasoriginallyaPC2program,andthatitusesthePC2drummap(programs113119 usethismap.)Kurz2designatesthatthecurrentdrumkitusesthenewPC3Kdrummap(all otherfactorydrumprogramsusethismap:120,241248,369376.)Thenewdrummapissimilar tothatofthePC2,excepttomtomsoundshavebeenmovedintooctaveC3C4,sotheyaremore easilyplayablewiththemainkickandsnaredrumsoundsinthatoctave.Wheneditingakit, makesuretofollowthelayoutofthedrummapbeingusedifyouwanttobeabletoproperly remapthekittotheGMdrummap.ProgramsthathavetheDrumRemapparametersettoOff willnotbeviewedbythePC3Kasdrumprogramsandwillnotbeaffectedwhenremappingto theGMdrummap.

6-32

Program Mode The COMMON Page

Inmostkeyboardsandsynthesizers,drumprogramsaremappedasdictatedbytheGeneral MIDI(GM)industrystandard.TheGMdrummapisntoptimallyintuitiveintermsof playability,sowedevelopedourownuniquekeymapthatismoreintuitiveandlendsbetterto performance.However,theGMdrummapissocommonplacethatmanyplayersfeelmost comfortableplayingdrumprogramswiththeGMdrummap.So,wedesignedthePC3Ksuch thatyoucanremapdrumprogramstotheGMdrummap.Youcansetdrumprogramstoremap totheGMdrummapinMasterMode.OntheMasterModeIscreensetthedrumremap parametertoGM.Toreturndrumprogramstotheiroriginalmaps,setthisparametertoNone. SeeDrumRemap on page 112intheMasterModechapterformoreinformation.

Exclusive Zone Map

TheExclusiveZoneMapisanotherparameterthatappliesprincipallytodrumprograms.When usingadrumprogram,youmaywanttheclosedhihatsoundstocutoffopenhihatsounds. Sinceyoucanremapthekeymapsofdrumprograms,thisparameterremapscutoffkeys accordingly. LikeDrumRemap,youcanusethisparameteronanyprogram,butyouprobablywontwantto dothis.

The COMMON Page

TheCOMMONpageisreachedbypressingtheCOMMONsoftbuttonintheProgramEditor. Hereswhereyoufind12frequentlyusedparametersthataffecttheentirecurrentprogram,not justthecurrentlayer.

NoticethatwhentheMonophonicparameterissettoitsdefaultvalueofOff,thefour monophonicparametersdonotappearonthepage.
Parameter Pitch Bend Range Up Pitch Bend Range Down Monophonic (Legato Play) (Portamento) (Portamento Rate) (Attack Portamento) Globals Output Gain Output Pan Output Pan Mode Demo Song Range of Values 7200 cents 7200 cents Off, On Off, On Off, On 1 to 3000 keys per second Off, On Off, On -96 to 24 decibels 64 Fixed, +MIDI Demo Song List Default 200 -200 Off Off Off 70 On Off 0 0 +MIDI 0 None

6-33

Program Mode The COMMON Page

Pitch Bend Range Up and Down

UsetheseparameterstodefinehowmuchthepitchwillchangewhenyoumoveyourPitch Wheel.ForbothPitchBendRangeparameters,positivevalueswillcausethepitchtobendup, whilenegativevalueswillcausethepitchtobenddown.Largepositivevaluescancause samplestobendtotheirmaximumupwardpitchshiftbeforethePitchWheelisfullyup(or down).Thiswillnothappenwhenbendingpitchdown.

Monophonic
Whenoff,theprogramispolyphonicitcanplayupto128notesatatime.Noticethatwhenthe Monophonicparameterisoff,theLegatoPlayparameterandthethreePortamentoparameters donotappearontheCOMMONpage.Thisisbecauseonlymonophonicprogramscanuse portamento. WhenOn,theprogramwillplayonlyonenoteatatime.Thismakesitpossibletouseandto determinethebehavioroftheportamentofeature.DonotsetIgnoreReleaseOn(page 625) whenyouareusingMonophonicprograms,sincethelackofNoteOffmessageswillprevent youfromswitchingprogramsproperly.

Legato Play
WhenLegatoPlayison,anotewillplayitsattackonlywhenallothernoteshavebeenreleased. Thisisusefulforrealisticinstrumentalsounds.

Portamento
Thisparameteriseitheronoroff.ThedefaultvalueofOffmeansthatportamentoisdisabled forthecurrentprogram. Portamentoisaglidebetweenpitches.Onactualacousticinstrumentslikeviolinandbass,its achievedbyslidingafingeralongavibratingstring.Onmostkeyboardsthatofferportamento, itsachievedbyholdingdownakeythattriggersthestartingnote,thenstrikingandreleasing otherkeys.Thepitchglidestowardthemostrecentlytriggerednote,andremainsatthatpitchas longasthenoteremainson.ThePC3Kgivesyoutwowaystogetportamento.SeetheAttack Portamentoparameterbelow. Whenyoureapplyinglargeamountsofportamentotomultisampledsounds(AcousticGuitar, forexample),thePC3Kwillplaymorethanonesamplerootasthepitchglidesfromthestarting pitchtotheendingpitch.Thismaycauseasmallclickateachsampleroottransition.Youcan reducethenumberofclicksyoullhearbyenteringtheProgramEditorandadjustingthe KeyTrkparameteronboththeKEYMAPandPITCHpages.Thequickestwayistosetthe KeyTrkvalueontheKEYMAPpageto0,andto100onthePITCHpage.Thiswillstretchthe samplerootthatplaysatC4acrosstheentirekeyboard.Nowanyamountofportamentowill playonlyonesampleroot,andtheclickswilldisappear.

6-34

Program Mode The COMMON Page

Theresatradeoffhere,sincemanysoundswillchangeintimbreasthesesinglesamplerootsare pitchshiftedduringtheportamento.Thiswillbemostnoticeableforacousticinstrument sounds,andmaynotbenoticeableatallforsinglecyclewaveformslikesawtoothwaves. Furthermore,somesampleswillnotglideallthewayuptothehighestnotestheresalimitto theamountofupwardpitchshiftingthatcanbeappliedtosamples.Ifthisdoesntworkforyou, youcancompromisebetweenthenumberofclicksandtheamountoftimbrechangebyfurther adjustingtheKeyTrkparametersontheKEYMAPandPITCHpages. AslongasthecombinedvaluesoftheKeyTrkparametersonbothpagesaddupto100,youll havenormalsemitoneintervalsbetweenkeys.Ifyousetbothparameterstovaluesof50,for example,thesoundwillstillplaynormally,andyoullhaveseveralsampleroots(abouthalfthe numberoftheoriginalsound)stretchedevenlyacrossthekeyboard,insteadofjustone.This willgiveyoufewerclicksthanintheoriginalsound,butnotasmuchchangeintimbreassetting theKEYMAPKeyTrkvalueallthewayto0.SettheKEYMAPKeyTrkparameterhigherto reducethechangeintimbre,orsetthePITCHKeyTrkvaluehighertoreducethenumberof clicks.Justmakesurethecombinedvaluesaddupto100,topreservethenormalintervals betweennotes.

Portamento Rate
ThesettingforPortamentoratedetermineshowfastthecurrentnoteglidesfromstartingpitch toendingpitch.Thevalueofthisparametertellsyouhowmanysecondsthenotetakestoglide onesemitonetowardtheendingpitch.Atasettingof12keys/second,forexample,thepitch wouldglideanoctaveeverysecond.Thelistofvaluesisnonlinear;thatis,theincrementsget largerasyouscrolltohighervalues.

Attack Portamento
Thisparametertogglesbetweentwotypesofportamento.WhensettoOn,thePC3Kremembers thestartingpitchsoyoudonthavetoholdanoteontoachieveportamento.Thepitchalways glidestoeachnewnotefromthepreviouslytriggerednote.WhensettoOff,thepitchwillglide tothemostrecentlytriggerednoteonlywhenthepreviousnoteisstillon(inotherwords,you mustuselegatofingering).

Globals
Thisisanothertoggle,whichaffectsLFO2,ASR2,FUNs2and4.Whenoff,thesethreecontrol sourcesarelocal;theyaffecteachindividualnoteinthelayersthatusethemasacontrolsource. Theybeginoperatingeachtimeanoteinthatlayeristriggered. WhentheGlobalsparameterissettoOn,thesecontrolsourcesbecomeglobal,thatistheyaffect everynoteineverylayerofthecurrentprogram,theyrenotspecifictoanyonelayer.When thesecontrolsourcesareglobal,theybeginoperatingassoonastheprogramisselected.When Globalsareon,LFO2,ASR2,andFUNs2and4willappearontheirrespectivepagespreceded bytheletterGtoindicatethattheyreglobal. Youlluseglobalcontrolsourceswhenyouwanttoaffectallnotesinaprogramuniformly,and localcontrolsourceswhenyouwanttoaffecteachnoteindependently.Forexample,youdusea globalLFOcontrollingpitchtocreateaLeslieeffectonanorgansound,sinceyouwantthe affectappliedtoallthenotesyouplay.YoudusealocalLFOcontrollingpitchtocreateavibrato forasoloviolin,sinceyouwanttobeabletovarytherateanddepthofthevibratoforeachnote.

Output: Gain, Pan, and Pan Mode

TheOutputparametersontheCOMMONpageallowyoutoadjustthefinalstagegainand panningofthepostFXsignal.UsetheOutGainparametertocutorboostthesignal.Usethe OutPanparametertopanthesignal;negativevaluespantheaudiosignaltotheleftchannel, positivevaluestotheright,andavalueofzeropanstothecenter.

6-35

Program Mode The COMMON Page

WhentheOPanModeissettoFixedthepanpositionremainsasdefinedwiththeOutPan parameter,ignoringMIDIpanmessages.WhentheOPanModeissetto+MIDI,MIDIpan messages(MIDI10)willshiftthesoundtotheleftorrightofthePanparametersetting.Message valuesbelow64shiftitleft,whilethoseabove64shiftitright.

Demo Song
TheDemoSongparameterallowsyoutochoosethedemosongforthecurrentprogram.The demosongisashort,preprogrammedsongthatgivesyouademonstrationoftheprogramina musicalcontext.YoucanplayaprogramsdemosonginanypageintheProgrammodeby pressingthePlay/Pausebutton,andstopthesongbypressingtheStopbutton(bothbuttonsare locatedundertheMODEbuttonsonthefrontpanel). WhenintheProgrammodeentrylevelpage,youcanhearademosonginwhateverprogram youwantbypressingthePlay/Pausebuttonwithoneprogramselected,andthenselecting anotherprogram.NoneoftheKB3programshavedemosongs,butbythismethod,youcould, forexample,hearthedemosongforprogram83BigOldJupiterplayedwiththeKB3program 53Testify. Note:Youcanalsotriggerandstopdemosongswithasimultaneousdoublebuttonpressoftheupand downcursorbuttons.

6-36

Program Mode The LFO Page

The LFO Page

LFOsarelowfrequency(i.e.,subsonicfrequency)oscillators.YoullusetheLFOpagetodefine thebehaviorofthetwoLFOsavailabletoeachlayer.LFOsareperiodic(repeating)control sources.Thebasicelementsaretherateandshape,whichdefinehowfrequentlytheLFO repeats,andthewaveformofthemodulationsignalitgenerates. WiththePC3K,youcansetupperandlowerlimitsoneachLFOsrate,andassignacontrol sourcetochangetheLFOsrateinrealtime,ifyouwish. Becauseofitsperiodicnature,theLFOisperfectforcreatingeffectslikevibrato(cyclicvariation inpitch)andtremolo(cyclicvariationinamplitude).WhenyoureeditingLFOs,oranycontrol source,rememberthatitmustbeassignedtocontrolsomeparameterbeforeyoullhearthe effectsofyouredits. LFO1isalwayslocal,meaningthatitstriggeredwitheachNoteOnevent,andruns independentlyforeachnoteinthelayer.LFO2islocalbydefault,butcanbemadeglobal.Thisis doneontheCOMMONpage,bysettingtheGlobalsparametertoOn,whichcausesLFO2, ASR2,FUN2andFUN4alltobecomeglobal.Globalcontrolsuniformlyaffecteverynoteineach layer.

Parameter Group (Available for each of LFO1 and LFO2) Minimum Rate Maximum Rate Rate Control LFO Shape LFO Start Phase

Range of Values 1/4 note, 1/8 note, 1/8 triplet, 1/16 note, 0 to 24 Hz 0 to 24 Hz Control Source List LFO Shape List (Ref. Guide) 0, 90, 180, 270 Degrees

Default 0.00 0.00 Off Sine 0

6-37

Program Mode The LFO Page

Minimum Rate
ThisistheslowestrateatwhichtheLFOruns.WhenitsRateControlissettoOFF,orwhenthe controlsourceassignedtoitisatitsminimum,theLFOrunsatitsminimumrate.Aspreviously mentioned,thevalues1/4note,1/8note,1/8triplet,and1/16notesynctheMinimumRatewith thePC3Kssystemtempo.Ofcourse,ifyouchoosetotemposyncyourLFO,thentheLFOrateis fixed,andyoucanspecifyneitherMaximumRatenorRateControl.Thedisplaychangesthusly:

Maximum Rate
ThisisthefastestpossibleratefortheLFO.WhenitsRateControlissettoON,orwhenthe controlsourceassignedtoitisatitsmaximum,theLFOrunsatitsmaximumrate.

Rate Control
AssignanycontrolsourceinthelisttomodulatetheLFOsratebetweenitsminimumand maximum.AcontinuouscontrolliketheModWheelisanaturalchoice,enablingyoutogetjust aboutanyratebetweenminimumandmaximum.Butyoucanuseaswitchcontroltoo,toget justtheminimumormaximumwithnothinginbetween.AssigningMPressastheratecontrol foranLFOvibratogivesyouaneasywaytoincreasethevibratorateinrealtime,asyoucanon manyacousticinstruments.

LFO Shape
TheshapeoftheLFOwaveformdeterminesthenatureofitseffectonthesignalitsmodulating. AneasywaytochecktheeffectsofthedifferentLFOshapesistosetLFO1asthevalueforthe Src1parameteronthePITCHpage,andsettheDepthforSrc1to400centsorso.Thengotothe LFOpage,settheMinandMaxratesforLFO1at0.00 Hzand4.00 Hzorso,andsettheRate controltoMWheel.NowplayyourMIDIcontrollerandyoullheartheLFOsratechangewhen youmoveitsModWheel.SelectdifferentLFOShapesandcheckouttheeffectonthepitch.

LFO Phase
UsethisparametertodeterminethestartingpointoftheLFOscycle.Onecompletecycleofthe LFOis360degrees.0degreesphasecorrespondstoacontrolsignalvalueof0,becoming positive.Each90degreeincrementinthephaserepresentsaquartercycleoftheLFO. WhenanLFOislocal,thephaseparametergivesyoucontroloverthestartingpointoftheLFO foreachnote(forexample,youcouldmakesureeveryvibratostartedbelowthepitchyou playedinsteadofatthepitchyouplayed).TheLFOsphasealsoaffectsglobalLFOs,although itsoftenindistinguishable,sinceglobalLFOsstartrunningassoonastheprogramcontaining themisselected,evenifyoudontplayanynotes.

6-38

Program Mode The ASR Page

The ASR Page

ASRsarethreesectionunipolarenvelopesattack,sustain,andrelease.ThePC3KsASRscan betriggeredbyaprogrammablecontrolsource,andcanbedelayed.ASR1isalwaysalocal control.ASR2islocalbydefault,butbecomesglobaliftheGlobalsparameterontheCOMMON pageissettoOn.ASRsarefrequentlyusedtorampthedepthofpitchoramplitudeinavibrato ortremolo,enablingdelaysinthoseeffects.TheASRpageconsistsoftworowsoffive parameters,onerowforeachoftheASRs.

Parameter Trigger Mode Delay Attack Release

Range of Values Control Source List Normal, Hold, Repeat 0 to 30 seconds 0 to 30 seconds 0 to 30 seconds

Default Off Normal 0 seconds 0 seconds 0 seconds

Trigger
ThisdefinesthecontrolsourcethatstartsthecurrentlayersASRs.TheASRstartswhenthe triggerswitchesfromofftoon.IftheTriggerparameterissettoON,aglobalASRstartsrunning immediatelywhenyouselectaprogramthatcontainsit.AlocalASRstartsrunningassoonas youtriggeranoteinthelayerthatcontainsit.SwitchcontrolsarebettersuitedforASRtriggers becauseoftheirbinary(on/off)nature.AcontinuouscontrolwilltriggertheASRswhenits signalvalueisaboveitsmidpoint.

Mode
ThisparametersetsthesustainsectionoftheASR.TheASRsmodedetermineswhattheASR doeswhenitfinishesitsattacksection.IftheModeparameterissettoNormal,theASRwillrun directlyfromitsattacksectiontoitsreleasesection(nosustain).AtasettingofRepeat,theASR willcyclethroughtheattackandreleasesections,thenloopforwardandcyclethroughagain untiltheASRstriggerswitchesoff.IfthemodeissettoHold,theASRmaintainsitspositionat theendoftheattacksectionuntiltheASRstriggerswitchesoff.TheASRthengoesintoits releasesection.IftheASRstriggerswitchesoffbeforetheattacksectioniscomplete,theASR goesdirectlytoitsreleasesection.

Delay
WhentheASRstriggerswitcheson,theASRwillstartimmediatelyifthisparameterissetto zero.NonzerovalueswillcauseacorrespondingdelaybetweentheASRtriggerandthestartof theASR.

6-39

Program Mode The Function (FUN) Page

Attack
ThisdefineshowlongtheASRtakestorampupfromminimumtomaximumeffecton whateveritspatchedto.

Release
ThisdefineshowlongtheASRtakestofadetominimumfromitsmaximum.IftheASRstrigger switchesoffbeforetheASRhasreachedmaximum,theASRreleasesfromthatlevel.

The Function (FUN) Page

FUNisshortforfunction.ThePC3KsfourFUNsgreatlyextendtheflexibilityofthecontrol sources.EachFUNacceptsinputfromanytwocontrolsources,performsaselectablefunction onthetwoinputsignals,andsendstheresultasitsoutput,whichcanbeassignedlikeanyother controlsource.UsingtheFUNsinvolvesdefiningthemontheFUNpage,thenassigningoneor moreofthemascontrolsources.TheFUNpagelookslikethis:

TherearethreeparametersforeachFUN.Inputsaandbcanbeanycontrolsourcefromthe ControlSourcelist.Thecontrolsourcesyouwanttocombinearetheonesyoullassignasthe valuesfortheseparameters. TheFunctionparameterdetermineswhatmathematicalfunctionisappliedtothetwoinputs. WhenaFUNhasbeenassignedasacontrolsource,thePC3Kreadsthevaluesofthetwocontrol sourcesdefinedasInputsaandb.Itthenprocessesthemaccordingtothesettingforthe Functionparameter,andtheresultingvalueistheFUNsoutput.

6-40

Program Mode The Amplitude Envelope (AMPENV) Page

The Amplitude Envelope (AMPENV) Page

Amplitudeenvelopeshavethreesections:attack,decay,andrelease.Theattacksection determineshowlongeachnotetakestoreachitsassignedamplitudelevelafteryoutriggera NoteOnevent.Thedecaysectiondetermineshowquicklyandhowmuchasustainedsound fadesbeforeaNoteOffistriggered.Thereleasesectiondetermineshowquicklyasoundfades tosilenceafteraNoteOffistriggered. PresstheAMPENVsoftbuttontoreachtheAmplitudeEnvelopepage.Formanyprograms,it willlooklikethediagrambelow,whichtellsyouthattheamplitudeforthecurrentlayeristhe default,naturalROMamplitudeenvelopethatsappliedtoeachsampleandwaveformduring itsoriginaldevelopmentprocess.YoullleavetheamplitudeenvelopeinNaturalmodewhen youdontwanttochangethewaythecurrentlayersloudnessdevelops.

Ifyouwanttobuildyourownamplitudeenvelope,justturntheAlphaWheelaclick.Thevalue NaturalwillchangetoUser,andasetofAMPENVparameterswillappear.Thesoundwill changewhenyoudothis,becausethedefaultsettingsfortheUserenvelope,asshowninthe diagrambelow,takeeffectassoonasyouleaveNaturalmode.ReturningtoNaturalmode appliestheoriginalamplitudeenvelopeonceagain. ManyprogramsfeatureUserenvelopeswithappropriateenvelopesettings.Thisisusuallythe caseforprogramsthatusesamplesofacousticinstruments,sinceitprovidesaconvenient startingpointforyoutoadjusttheenvelopes.

YoulltweaktheparametersontheAMPENVpagewhenyouwanttoshapetheamplitude characteristicsofyoursounds.Agraphicviewoftheamplitudeenvelopewillappearonthe displaytogiveyouavisualsenseoftheenvelopescharacteristics.Thedotsalongtheenvelope graphicindicatethebreakpointsbetweentheenvelopesvarioussegments.Thesmallhorizontal arrowrepresentstheendofthedecaysection.Thesmalldownwardpointingarrowrepresents thebeginningofthereleasesection.

6-41

Program Mode The Amplitude Envelope (AMPENV) Page

BecausethePC3KsROMsamplesarestoredinacompressedformat,applyinganaltered amplitudeenvelopecanchangemorethanjusttheamplitudeofyoursound,sinceitalso changestherateatwhichthesamplesaredecompressedforplayback.Whenthesamplesare madetoplaybackwithalteredenvelopes,thetimbrescanevolveinnewandinterestingways. TheAMPENVpagestoplinegivesyoutheusuallocationreminder,pointsoutthecurrently selectedlayer,andtellsyoutherelativescaleoftheenvelopesgraphicview.Theenvelope graphicshrinksinscaleasthesegmenttimesgetlonger.Thisautozoomfeaturemaximizesthe availabledisplayspace.Trylengtheningoneofthesegmenttimes.Theenvelopegraphicwill stretchtofillthedisplayfromlefttoright.Whenitfillsthedisplay,itwillshrinktohalfitssize, andthetoplinewillindicatethatthescalehaschanged(from[1/1]to[1/2],forexample). Eachparameteronthispagehastwovalues,aslistedbelow.Fortheenvelopesegments,thefirst (upper)valueisthedurationofthesegment,andthesecondistheamplitudelevelatthe completionofthesegment.FortheLoopparameter,thevaluesdefinehowtheenvelopeloops, andhowmanytimestheloopcycles.
Parameter Group Attack Segment 1, 2, 3 Decay Segment Parameter Time Level Time Level Time Release Segment 1, 2, 3 Level Type # of loops Range of Values 0 to 60 seconds 0 to 100% 0 to 60 seconds 0 to 100% 0 to 60 seconds 0 to 150% (Release Segment 3 is always set to 0%) Off, Forward, Bidirectional Infinite, 1 to 31 times

Loop

Attack Segment Times

Theseindicatehowlongittakesforthecurrentlayersamplitudetoreachitsfinallevelfromits startinglevel.

Attack Segment Levels

Thesearethefinallevelsthateachsegmentachievesatcompletion.Thelevelsareexpressedas percentagesofthemaximumpossibleamplitudeforthecurrentlayer.Attacksegment1always startsatzeroamplitude,andmovestoitsassignedlevelinthetimespecifiedbyitstimevalue. Sothedefaultsettingsof0secondsand100%meanthatthefirstsegmentoftheattacksection movesinstantlyfromzeroamplitudeto100%amplitude.IncreasethetimeofAttacksegment1 ifyouwantthesoundtorampupmoreslowly. Attacksegments2and3affectthesoundonlywhenyousetanonzerovaluefortime.Theywill thenmovetotheirassignedlevelsinthetimespecified.Theirstartinglevelsareequaltothe finallevelsoftheprecedingsegment.

6-42

Program Mode The Envelope 2 (ENV2) and Envelope 3 (ENV3) Pages

Decay Segment
Thedecaysectionhasonlyonesegment.Ithasvaluesfortimeandlevel,justasfortheattack section.Thedecaysectionbeginsassoonastheattacksectionhasbeencompleted.Itstartsatthe sameamplitudelevelastheattacksegmentprecedingit,andmovestoitsassignedlevelinthe timespecified.Youllhearanotesdecaysectiononlywhentheattacksectioniscompleted beforeaNoteOffmessageisgeneratedforthatnote. Tocreateasustainingenvelope,simplysettheDecaysegmentsleveltoanonzerovalue.

Release Segments
Liketheattackanddecaysections,eachofthethreesegmentsinthereleasesectionhasvalues fortimeandlevel.Eachsegmentreachesitsassignedlevelinthetimespecifiedforthatsegment. Releasesegment1startsattheNoteOffeventforeachnote,atthecurrentamplitudelevelof thatnotewhetheritsintheattacksectionorthedecaysection.Itthenmovestoitsassigned levelinthetimespecified.Releasesegments2and3startatthefinallevelsofthesegments beforethem.Releasesegments1and2canbesettoanylevelfrom0to150%.Releasesegment3 alwayshasalevelof0%,soyoucantadjustitslevel.InplaceofitsLevelparameteryouseea parameterthatletsyoutogglebetweenUserenvelopesandthesoundspreprogrammednatural envelope.

Loop Type
TherearesevendifferentvaluesforLooptype. AvalueofOffdisablesloopingforthecurrentlayersamplitudeenvelope. Valuesofseg1F,seg2F,andseg3Fareforwardloops.Ineachcase,theamplitudeenvelopeplays throughtheattackanddecaysections,thenloopsbacktothebeginningofthefirst,second,or thirdattacksegments,respectively. Valuesofseg1B,seg2B,andseg3B,arebidirectionalloops.Theamplitudeenvelopeplays throughtheattackanddecaysections,thenreversesandplaysbackwardtothebeginningofthe first,second,orthirdattacksegment,respectively.Whenitreachesthebeginningoftheassigned attacksegment,itreversesagain,playingforwardtotheendofthedecaysection,andsoon.

Number of Loops
AvalueofInfmakestheamplitudeenvelopeloopuntilaNoteOffisgenerated.Valuesof1 through31indicatehowmanytimestheloopwillrepeataftertheamplitudeenvelopehas playedoncethroughitsnormalcycle. Regardlessofthelooptypeandthenumberofloops,eachnotegoesintoitsreleasesectionas soonasitsNoteStategoesoff(thatis,whenaNoteOffisgenerated).Theenvelopewill continuetoloopaslongasNoteStateremainson,whetheritsheldonbyapedal,bytheIgnRel parameter(describedinthesectionentitledTheLAYERPage on page 622),orwhatever.

The Envelope 2 (ENV2) and Envelope 3 (ENV3) Pages

ThePC3KofferstwoenvelopesinadditiontoAMPENV.LikeAMPENV,ENV2andENV3can beassignedlikeanyothercontrolsource.UnlikeAMPENV,however,ENV2andENV3canbe bipolar.Thismeansthatyoucansetnegativevaluesforthem.(Obviously,youcanthavean amplitudelessthanzero,soAMPENVisunipolarthevaluesrangefromeither0to 100%or0 to150%.)Abipolarenvelopecontrollingpitch,forexample,couldmodulatethepitchboth aboveandbelowitsoriginallevel.

6-43

Program Mode The Envelope Control (ENVCTL) Page

AnotherdifferenceisthatAMPENValwayscontrolstheamplitudeofthelayer,soevenifyou useitasacontrolsourceforotherfunctions,itwillstillaffectthelayersamplitude.ENV2and ENV3affectonlythoselayersthathavethemassignedasacontrolsource.Also,AMPENVuses anexponentialattack(theamplituderisesmuchfasterattheendoftheattacksegmentthanit doesatthebeginning),whileENV2andENV3uselinearattacks(theattacksegmentincreasesat thesameratefromstarttofinish).

ThepagesforEnvelopes2and3arereachedwiththesoftbuttonsENV2andENV3.Whenyou selectthesepages,youllfindadisplaythatlooksverymuchliketheAMPENVpage.Theonly differencesarethatyoucanprogramanamountforRel3;theRel1andRel2limits,whichare 100%;andintheenvelopegraphic,whichhasadottedlinerunninghorizontallyacrossthe display.Thisisthezerolevelline;negativelevelvaluesforthevariousenvelopesegmentswill causetheenvelopegraphictodipbelowthisline.

The Envelope Control (ENVCTL) Page

TheEnvelopeControlpagegivesyourealtimecontrolovertheratesofeachsectionofthe amplitudeenvelopeforbothnaturalanduserenvelopes(seeTheAmplitudeEnvelope(AMPENV) Page on page 641.)PresstheENVCTLsoftbuttontoreachtheENVCTLpage.

Thedisplaystoplineremindsyouofthecurrentlayer.Thecolumnontheleftliststhethree sectiontypesoftheamplitudeenvelope,andeachcorrespondinglineliststhevaluesforthefive DSPcontrolparametersthatareavailableforeachsectiontype.TheDSPcontrolparametersare: Adjust,Keytracking,Velocitytracking,andSource/Depth,whicharelistedatthetopofeach correspondingcolumn.WhenAMPENVissettoUsermode,theAttackandReleasesectionson thispageapplytotheattackandreleasesectionsontheAMPENVpage.Itsimportanttokeepin mindthatthevaluesforthevariousparametersarecumulative,meaningthatifforexampleyou setattacktobecontrolledbyKeytrkandVelTrk,theresultingchangeonAttackwouldbe

6-44

Program Mode The Envelope Control (ENVCTL) Page

affectedbythecombinationofthevaluesproducedbyKeyTrkandVelTrk.Alsonotethatunlike previousKurzweilmodels,ENVCTLdoesaffecttheattacksectionsofnaturalenvelopes. Additionally,thebottomlineofthispageletsyoumakeuseoftheImpactfeature,whichletsyou boostorcuttheamplitudeofthefirst20millisecondsofanotesattack. Theparametersandvaluesinthefollowingparameterslist(seebelow)applytoeachofthethree envelopesectionsattack,decay,andrelease.Welldescribethemonlyonce,sincetheir functionsarelargelythesameforeachenvelopesection.Theonlydifferenceiswithvelocity tracking,whichisonlyavailableasaparametertocontrolattacksectionsoftheamplitude envelope(however,youcanassignattackvelocityasthevaluefortheSourceparameterineach ofthesections). Thevaluesofeachoftheseparametersmultiplytheratesoftheenvelopesectionstheycontrol. Valuesgreaterthan1.000xmaketheenvelopesectionsrunfaster(theyincreasetherate),while valueslessthan1.000xmaketheenvelopesectionsrunslower.Sayforexamplethatonthe currentlayersAMPENVpageyouhadsettheDecaysectionstimeat2.00seconds,anditslevel at0%.Thissetsthelayersamplitudetofadetosilencetwosecondsafterthecompletionofthe lastattacksegment.Thedecaytimeistwoseconds;thedecayrateis50%persecond.Nowifyou selecttheENVCTLpageandsettheDecayAdjustparametertoavalueof2.000x,youve increasedthedecayratebyafactoroftwo,makingittwiceasfast.Therateincreasesto100%per second,andthedecaytimeisnowonesecondinsteadoftwo. Note:Since0multipliedbyanynumberequals0,theenvelopeparametersonthispagewillhavenoeffect onanyAMPENVsectionssetto0seconds.AwayaroundthisistochangeanyAMPENVsectionssetto 0to0.02seconds.
Parameter Group (Available for each of Att, Dec, Rel, Imp) Adjust Key Tracking Velocity Tracking Source Depth

Range of Values 0.018 to 50.000x (-24.0 to 24.0 dB for Imp) 0.018 to 50.000x (-2.00 to 2.00 dB for Imp) 0.018 to 50.000x (Not available for Dec or Rel; -24.0 to 24.0 dB for Imp) Control Source List 0.018 to 50.000x (-24.0 to 24.0 dB for Imp)

Adjust
ThisisthefamiliarCoarseadjustfoundonmanyotherpages.Useitheretochangetherateof oneoftheenvelopesectionswithoutreprogrammingtheenvelopeitself.Thisparameterdoesnt giveyourealtimecontrolovertheenvelope.Itis,however,agoodwaytoadjustthenatural envelopeswithoutswitchingtoaUserenvelopeandtryingtoapproximatetheNatural envelope.

Key Tracking
ThisusestheMIDInotenumberofeachkeyasthecontrolinputforthecurrentlayers correspondingenvelopesection.Whenthevalueofthisparameterisgreaterthan1.000x,notes aboveC4willmaketheenvelopesectionrunfaster,whilenotesbelowC4willmakeitrun slower.Whenthevalueofthisparameterislessthan1.000x,notesaboveC4willmakethe envelopesectionrunslower,andnotesbelowC4willmakeitrunfaster.Thisgivesyourealtime envelopecontrolrightfromyourMIDIcontroller.Youmightuseit,forexample,tocausean acousticguitarsoundtodecayquickeratthehighend(setthekeytrackingtoapositivevalue).

6-45

Program Mode The Envelope Control (ENVCTL) Page

Velocity Tracking
Useyourattackvelocityasthecontrolinputforthecurrentlayersattacksection(thisparameter doesntapplytodecayorrelease).Whenthevalueofthisparameterisgreaterthan1.000x, attackvelocitiesgreaterthan64maketheattacksectionrunfaster,andattackvelocitiesbelow64 makeitrunslower.Thisgivesyourealtimeattackcontrolovertheenvelope.

Source, Depth
ThesetwoparametersworktogethertoletyouassignacontrolliketheModWheeltoaffectthe currentlayersamplitudeenvelopeinrealtime.ThevalueoftheSourceparameterdefineswhich controlaffectstheenvelopesection,andthevalueoftheDepthparameterdefineshowmuchthe rateismultipliedwhenthecontrolisatitsmaximumvalue,127.Noeffectishadwhenthe controlisatitsminimumvalue,0,andDepthvaluesarescaledforcontrollervaluesinbetween. Note:Foreachnotetriggered,youcanonlysetthecontrollervaluethatwillscaletheDepthparameterof anenvelopesectionbeforethatsectionoftheenvelopeistriggered.ForcontrollersassignedforAttack,the controllervalueusedwillbethelastreceivedbeforethenoteistriggered.Forcontrollersassignedfor Decay,thecontrollervalueusedwillbethelastreceivedbeforethefinalsectionoftheattackenvelope reachesitsmaximumamplitude.ForcontrollersassignedforRelease,thecontrollervalueusedwillbethe lastreceivedbeforethenoteisreleased.Toputitanotherway,foreachenvelopesection,youcannot changetherateofanotesenvelopeoncethatsectionoftheenvelopehasbeentriggered.

Impact
Impactcanboostorcutnotevolumebyupto24dBduringthefirst20millisecondsoftheattack ofanenvelope.Thisfeatureisaneasywaytogetmorethumpfromyourbassanddrum sounds.

6-46

Program Mode The Program FX (PROGFX) Page

The Program FX (PROGFX) Page

PressthePROGFXsoftbuttontocalluptheProgramFX(PROGFX)page.Thisisthepagethat youwillusetoapplyeffectstoaprogram,andtoconfiguretheroutingofthevariouspreand postFXaudiosignals.Effectschosenonthispageaffecteverylayerofthecurrentprogram.The sectionTheLayerFX(LYR_FX)Page on page 649containsinformationonusinglayerspecific effects.ThePROGFXpagelookslikethis:

Parameter Insert Aux 1, Aux 2 Output Aux Send (dB) Auxiliary Send Parameters Aux Send (%) Aux Pre/Post Insert Type Aux Modulation

Range of Values Chain List Chain List Main, Sec. off, -95 to 24 decibels 0 to 100% Post, Pre dB, % Control Source List

Default 0 None 0 None Main 0 0 Post dB On

OnthePC3K,aprogramcanhaveupto11inserteffectsand2auxeffectsusingupto16DSP units.Aninsertisessentiallyjustaneffectthatyouapplytoaprogramorlayer,whileaux effectsreceivesignalfromallactiveprogramsauxsends.Notethe0/0Unitsinthemiddleofthe toplineofthepage.Thisfigureindicateshowmanyofthetotalunitsarebeingusedbythe highlightedinsert;thelefthandnumberisthesizeoftheinsert,andtherighthandnumberis thetotalnumberofunitsbeingusedbytheprogram. IfyouexceedthemaximumnumberofDSPunits,thePC3Kwillnotifyyouthatyouhavedone so,andnoeffectswillbeappliedtotheprogram.

Insert
TheInserteffectistheeffectschainthatisappliedtothemainaudiobus.

Aux 1, Aux 2
TheAuxeffectistheeffectschainthatisappliedtotheselectedauxiliaryaudiobus.

Output
TheOutputspecifiestheanalogoutputtowhichtheselectedbusisrouted.SettingtheOutputto Mainroutesthesignaloftheselectedbustothemainoutputs.SettingtheOutputtoSec.routes thesignaloftheselectedbustotheauxiliaryoutputs.

6-47

Program Mode The Program FX (PROGFX) Page

Auxiliary Send Parameters

TheAuxiliarySendparametersdeterminestheleveloftheprogramsignalsenttotheauxiliary effectschain. Aux Send TheAuxSendparameterdeterminestheleveloftheprogramsignalsenttotheauxiliaryeffects chain. Pre/Post Insert ThePre/PostInsertparameterdeterminesthepointatwhichtheauxiliaryeffectisappliedtothe signal.WhenthisparameterissettoPost,thePC3Kappliestheauxiliaryeffecttothesignalpost insert,i.e.,aftertheinserteffecthasbeenapplied.WhenthisparameterissettoPre,thePC3K appliestheauxiliaryeffecttothesignalpreinsert. Tohearaprogramputthroughtwoeffectsinseries(i.e.,throughtwocascadedeffects),choose yourdesiredeffectsfortheInsertandeitherAux(forwhateverAuxyouchoose,theother shouldbesetto0None),seteachbusOutputtoMain,andsettheAuxSendparameterto either0dBor100%.Then,setthePre/PostInsertparametertoPost. Tohearaprogramputthroughtwoeffectsinparallel(i.e.,throughtwodistincteffects),choose yourdesiredeffectsfortheInsertandeitherAux(again,forwhateverAuxyouchoose,theother shouldbesetto0None),seteachbusOutputtoMain,andsettheAuxSendparameterto either0dBor50%.Then,setthePre/PostInsertparametertoPre. Withrespecttoeachother,theAuxesarealwaysinparallel,thatis,theycannotbecascaded. Type TheTypeparameterdetermineshowtheselectedwetauxsignal(i.e.,witheffectsapplied)is mixedintothefinalsignal.Additionally,itdeterminestheunitsinwhichtheAuxSend parametervaluesare. WhenTypeissettodB,theAuxSendparametervaluesareinunitsofdecibels(dB).Thevalue specifiedintheAuxSendparameteristheamountofprogramsignalsenttotheauxeffects chain.Tohearequalpartswetsignalanddrysignal(thesignalwithnoeffectsapplied)onthe mainaudiooutput,setthemainInserteffectto0NoneandtheInsertOutputtoMain,andset theAux1effecttoyourdesiredeffectandtheAux1OutputtoMain.Then,settheAux1Sendto 0dB.Ifyouwantonlywetsignalonthemainaudiooutput,setthemainInsertOutputtoSec. keepinmindthatbythismethod,thedrysignalissenttotheauxiliaryaudiooutputs. WhenTypeissetto%,theAuxSendparametervaluesareinunitsofpercent(%).Thevalue specifiedintheAuxSendparameteristhepercentageofwhichthewetauxiliarysignal comprisesthefinalsignaltheinsertsignalcomprisestherestofthefinalsignal.Tohearequal partswetsignalanddrysignalonthemainaudiooutput,setthemainInserteffectto0None andtheInsertOutputtoMain,andsettheAux1effecttoyourdesiredeffectandtheAux1 OutputtoMain.Then,settheAux1Sendto50%.Ifyouwanttohearonlythewetsignal,setthe Aux1Sendto100%.

Aux1 Mod, Aux2 Mod

TheAuxModparametergivesyourealtimecontrolovertheamountofprogramsignalsentto theauxeffectschain.YoucansettheAuxModparametertoanyPC3Kcontrolsource.The amountthatyouspecifyfortheAuxSendparameteristhemaximumvaluethattheAuxMod controlsourcecansendtheminimumvalueis0.

6-48

Program Mode The Layer FX (LYR_FX) Page

The Layer FX (LYR_FX) Page

PresstheLYR_FXsoftbuttontocalluptheLayerFX(LYR_FX)page.Onthispage,youcan applylayerspecificeffects.TherearethreeLayerFXModes:UseProgramFX,LayerSpecific FX,andUseAnotherLayersFX. Use Program FX Mode WithUseProgramFXModeselected,thecurrentlayerwillusetheeffectsconfiguredonthe ProgramFX(PROGFX)page.SeeTheProgramFX(PROGFX)Page on page 647formore informationonprogramFX. Layer-Specific FX Mode WithLayerSpecificFXselected,youcanconfiguretheeffectsforthecurrentlayer.Thismodes parametersaresimilartothoseofthePROGFXpage.Thismodeisshowninthefollowing display:

AlloftheLayerSpecificFXmodeparametershavethesamefunctionsandrangesofvaluesas theircorrespondingparametersonthePROGFXpage.SeeTheProgramFX(PROGFX) Page on page 647formoreinformationontheseparameters. Use Another Layers FX Mode WithUseAnotherLayersFXselected,youcanputthecurrentlayerthroughtheeffectsof anotherlayer.Youcanspecifythelayerthroughwhoseeffectsyouwishtoputthecurrentlayer.

6-49

Program Mode The Controllers (CTLS) Page

The Controllers (CTLS) Page

PresstheCTLSsoftbuttontocalluptheControllers(CTLS)page.TheControllerspageisalist ofthecontrollersonthePC3Kyouwillbemostlikelytouseascontrolsourcesandthevaluesof thosecontrollers.Thepageappearsthusly:

Controller Slider A (6) Slider B (13) Slider C (22) Slider D (23) Slider E (24) Slider F (25) Slider G (26) Slider H (27) Slider I (28) Modwheel (1) Breath Controller (2) Switch 2 (29)

Range of Values None, 0-127 None, 0-127 None, 0-127 None, 0-127 None, 0-127 None, 0-127 None, 0-127 None, 0-127 None, 0-127 None, 0-127 None, 0-127 0, 127

Default Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Inadditiontobeingabletoentercontrollervalues,youcanusetheSetCtlsoftbutton(locatedto therightoftheCTLSsoftbutton),whichcapturesthepositionsofthecontrollerslistedonthe page.Keepinmindthatbecausethecontrollersaredigital,youmustengagethecontrollerevery timeyouchangeprogramsbeforethePC3Krecognizesanychangeinthecontrollervalue.Ifyou changeprograms,andthenpresstheSetCtlsoftbuttonbeforeengaginganyofthecontrollers, thecontrolvalueswillremainatzero. ThenumberinparenthesesthatappearsnexttothecontrollernameistheMIDIcontroller numberwithwhichthatcontrollertransmitsandreceivesbydefault,i.e.,withtheControlSetup setto126InternalVoicesontheMIDImodeTransmitpage.SeeControlSetupandChapter7: SetupModeandSetupEditorformoreinformationontheControlSetup.

6-50

Program Mode Function Soft Buttons

Function Soft Buttons

Theremainderofthischapterdescribesthesoftbuttonsthatperformspecificfunctions,as opposedtoselectingprogrammingpages.Thedescriptionsbelowarearrangedintheorderin whichyouwouldseethesoftbuttonsifyoupressedthemore>buttonrepeatedly.Youcan alwaysgettothesebuttons,regardlessofwhichpageiscurrentlyselected.

Set Controllers (SetCtl)

AsexplainedinTheControllers(CTLS)Page,theSetCtlsoftbuttoncapturesthevaluesofthenine sliders,modwheel,breathcontroller,andswitch.

New Layer (NewLyr)

Createanewlayer,numberedoneabovethehighestexistinglayer.Thenewlayersparameters arethoseofthesinglelayerinProgram999,calledDefaultProgram.Whenyoupressthis button,thePC3Kwilltellyouthatitiscreatinganewlayer,thenwillreturntothepageyou wereon.Thenewlayerbecomesthecurrentlayer,andisthehighestnumberedlayerinthe program.Ifthecurrentprogramalreadyhasitsmaximumnumberoflayers,thePC3Kwilltell youthatyoucantaddanymore. Program999makesagoodtemplateforprogramsthatyoubuildfromthealgorithmup.You mightwanttoeditProgram999toadjustoneormoreparameterstovaluesyouwanttousein yourtemplateprogram.Ifyoulikethesettingsofthedefaultlayerastheyare,however, remembernottomakeanypermanentchangestoProgram999.

Duplicate Layer (DupLyr)

Createacopyofthecurrentlayer,duplicatingthesettingsofallitsparameters.Thecopy becomesthecurrentlayer,andisthehighestnumberedlayerintheprogram.

Import Layer (ImpLyr)

Copyaspecificlayerfromanotherprogramintothecurrentprogram.Thisbuttonbringsupa dialogthatpromptsyoutoselectalayernumberandaprogramnumber.Thedialogtellsyou thecurrentlyselectedlayer,andthetotalnumberoflayersintheprogram.UsetheLayeror Layer+softbuttons(orthealphawheel)tochangethelayernumber.Ifthecurrentprogramhas onlyonelayer,pressingthesebuttonswillhavenoeffect.UseProgorProg+softbuttons(orthe alphawheel)tochangetheprogramnumber. Whileyouareinthisdialog,youcanlistentothelayeryouareselectingtoimport,alongwithall otherlayersinthecurrentprogram.Ifyouwanttohearthelayertobeimportedbyitself,you mustmutetheotherlayers. Whenyouhaveselectedthedesiredlayerfromthedesiredprogram,presstheImportsoft button,andtheselectedlayerwillbecopiedfromtheselectedprogram,becomingthecurrent layer.Importinglayersisaconvenientalternativetocreatinglayersfromscratch.Ifyouhavea favoritestringsound,forexample,andyouwanttouseitinotherprograms,justimportits layer(s)intotheprogramyourebuilding.Thiswillpreservetheenvelopesandallthecontrol settingssoyoudonthavetoreprogramthem.

Delete Layer (DelLyr)

Deletethecurrentlayer.Whenyoupressthisbutton,thePC3Kasksyouifyouwanttodeletethe layer;presstheYessoftbuttontostartthedeletionprocess,ortheNosoftbuttontocancelit. Thispromptpreventsyoufromaccidentallydeletingalayer.

Name
Callupthepagethatenablesyoutochangethenameofthecurrentprogram.

6-51

Program Mode Function Soft Buttons

Save
Starttheprocessofsavingthecurrentprogram.

Delete
Deletethecurrentprogramfrommemory.Youcanalsodeleteanyotherprogramfrommemory byscrollingthroughthelistthatappearswhenyoupresstheDeletesoftbutton,thenpressing Deleteagainwhenthedesiredprogramisselected.IfyouattempttodeleteaROMprogram,the PC3Kwillsayitsdeletingtheprogram,butitdoesntactuallydoit.

INFO
PresstheINFOsoftbuttontogototheINFOEDITpagewhereyoucaneditthecontroller assignmentinfoforthecurrentprogram.OntheINFOEDITpage,usetheChan/Layerbuttons toscrollthroughthecurrentprogramslistofcontrollerassignmentinfo.Eachassignmentinfo entryhasaMIDIcontrollernumberandaTextparametertodescribewhattheassignment controls. Toeditthetextofacontrollerassignment,presstheTextsoftbutton.Tocreateanewcontroller assignmentinfoentry,presstheNewsoftbutton(youwillbepromptedforaMIDIcontroller number.)Tocreateanewcontrollerassignmentinfoentrywiththesametextasthecurrentinfo entry,presstheDupsoftbutton(youwillbepromptedforaMIDIcontrollernumber.)Todelete thecurrentcontrollerassignmentinfoentry,presstheDeletesoftbutton(youwillbeprompted toconfirmorcancel.)ToreturntotheprogrameditorpresstheDonesoftbuttonortheExit button.SeeExport on page 1312fordetailsonexportingprograminfo.

6-52

Program Mode Editing VAST Programs With KVA Oscillators

Editing VAST Programs With KVA Oscillators

ThePC3KusesKVAoscillatorsasanotherwaytogeneratesoundsinVASTprograms.Unlike keymaps,whichplaysamplesstoredinROM,KVAoscillatorscreateDSPgeneratedwaveforms everytimetheyaretriggered.TheKVAoscillatorscancreatearangeofwaveforms,fromhigh qualitysimplewaveformsfamiliartousersofclassicanalogsynths,tocomplexwaveforms whichtakeadvantageofthePC3Ksinternalprocessingpowerandcomplexsignalrouting capabilities.ThoughthePC3Kdoeshavekeymapscontainingsamplesofbasicsynth waveforms,theuseofKVAoscillatorsprovidesuserswithbetterportamento,moremodulation options,highersoundquality,andotheradvantageswhichwillbeexplainedinthissection. LearningtouseKVAoscillatorsinsteadofkeymaps(whereappropriate)issimpleandwill increasetheversatilityofyourVASTeditingcapabilities.VASTprogramsusinglayerswithKVA oscillatorscanalsobecombinedwithotherlayersusingkeymaps.

Basic Use of KVA Oscillators

TounderstandthebasicminimalsetupofaKVAbasedprogram,selecttheprogram1019 VA1NakedPWMPoly,andpresstheEditbutton.IfyouarefamiliarwitheditingVAST programs,thefirstthingyoumaynoticeisthatontheKEYMAPpage,Keymapissetto999 Silence(MoreonthisinAdvancedUseOfKVAOscillators on page 655.)Next,lookatthe AMPENVpage.TheAMPENVmodeissettoUser,whichgivesyoucontrolovertheamplitude envelope(moreonusingNaturalmodelater.)Finally,lookattheALGpage.Inthecurrent algorithmthe3blockKVAoscillatorPWMhasbeenselected,whichgeneratesthesoundforthis layeroftheprogram. Minimal Settings for Basic Use of KVA Oscillators: ThepatchdescribedabovecontainstheminimalsettingsthataKVAlayerneedsinorderto functioninthestyleofaclassicanalogsynth.Theseminimalsettingsare: 1.EditProg:KEYMAPPage:SettheKeymapparameterto999Silence. 2.EditProg:AMPENVPage:SettheEnvelopemodetoUser,andadjusttheamplitudeenvelope toyourliking(seeTheAmplitudeEnvelope(AMPENV)Page on page 641.). 3.EditProg:ALGPage:PickanAlgorithmandsetanOscillator(seeSettingKVAOscillatorType below.)

FurtherbasicVASTsettingsthatyouwilllikelywanttoadjustare: MonophonicOn/Off(seeTheCOMMONPage on page 633.) LevelVelocityTracking(seeTheDSPControl(DSPCTL)Page on page 628.)

ReadtheSettingKVAOscillatorTypesectionbelowtolearnabouthowseteachtypeofoscillator. Afterdoingthis,youcanexperimentwithmakingKVAprogramsbyfollowingtheabove settings,andthensettingandlisteningtoeachtypeofoscillator.Onceyouunderstandhowto dothis,readontotheAdvancedUseOfKVAOscillators section on page 655(seebelow)tolearn howtomakeyourKVApatchesmoreexpressivethroughtheuseofDSPmodulation. Pitch Settings for KVA Oscillators Eachoscillator(exceptfornoisefunctions)hasitsownpitchparameters,andisunaffectedby pitchsettingsthatwouldnormallyaffectkeymaps(suchasthoseontheKeymappage.)Ona programlayer,thecoarsepitchparameterfortheoscillatorinusecanbefoundonboththe DSPCTLandDSPMODpages,intheparameterslistbelowthestandardPitchparameterfor

6-53

Program Mode Editing VAST Programs With KVA Oscillators

keymaps.Foreachoscillator,itscoarsepitchparameterisnamedbyanabbreviationofthe oscillatornamefollowedbyPch.Forexample,thecoarsepitchparameterforasawwave oscillatorwillbecalledSawPch.OntheDSPCTLsubpageforanyoscillatorPch.parameter, youcanadjustfinepitchbycentsandHertz,aswellasKeyTrkandVelTrksettingsforpitch. Note:Besuretodifferentiatebetweenthedifferentpitchparameters,eachusedeitheronlyforkeymapsor onlyforKVAoscillators.ThePitchparameteronthetopleftoftheDSPCTLandDSPMODpagesalways appearsinVASTprogramsbutonlyaffectsthepitchofkeymaps.IfaKVAoscillatorisbeingused,this Pitchparameterwillhavenoaffectonthelayerspitch,inwhichcasetheoscillatorPch.parameter describedabovemustbeusedtocontrolthepitchoftheoscillator.

Setting KVA Oscillator Type

ThePC3Kcomeswith19DifferentKVAoscillators.Thereare11highqualityantialiased oscillators(freeofdigitalartifacts,)and8oscillatorsthatexhibitsomealiasing(digitalartifacts) inthehigheroctaves.TheantialiasedoscillatorsuseupmoreDSPresourcesthantheoneswith aliasing,buttheimprovementinsoundqualityisquitenoticeable.Westronglyrecommend usingtheantialiasedoscillatorsformostapplications. ThetablesbelowlistKVAoscillatorsbytypeandfunctionblocksize.Beforesettinganoscillator, youmustchooseanalgorithmwhichincludesablockthatmatchestheblocksizeforthe oscillatorthatyouwishtouse.SeeTheAlgorithm(ALG)Page on page 627andAlgorithm Basics on page 613formoreonselectingalgorithms.Onceyouhavepickedanalgorithmwith thedesiredblocksize,highlighttheblockandusethealphawheeltoscrollthroughthe availablefunctionsuntilyoufindthedesiredoscillator. TheSYNCSQUAREoscillatorisan8blockoscillatorthatrequirestheuseoftwolayers(4 blockseach)andtheAltInputfeatureofcascademode.Seebelowfordetailsonsettingupthe SyncSquareoscillator. Note:Ifyouputmorethanoneoscillatorinanalgorithm,youwillonlyheartheoutputofthelast oscillatorinthealgorithm,unlessanalgorithmisusedtoroutetheearlieroscillatoraroundthelast oscillatorandintoaMIXfunctionblock,orifthelastoscillatorprocessesitsaudioinput. Anti-Aliased Oscillators Size
1 Block 2 Blocks

Aliased Oscillators Size

1 Block SINE SAW TRI SQUARE NOISE SW+SHP (Sawtooth + Shaper) 2 Blocks SHAPED SAW PWM (Pulse Width Modulation)

Name/Type
LPNOIZ (noise + low pass filter) SINE SINE+ SAW RES NOISE (noise + low pass filter with resonance) SQUARE

Name/Type

3 Blocks 4 Blocks

PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) SYNC SAW SUPER SAW TRIPLE SAW

8 Blocks

SYNC SQUARE (master) >>, >>SYNC SQUARE (slave) (4 blocks each)

6-54

Program Mode Editing VAST Programs With KVA Oscillators

Setting Up The Sync Square Oscillator: TheSyncSquareoscillatorisactuallycomprisedoftwooscillators,amasterandaslave,setup toemulatethewaysyncsquareoscillatorsworkedonclassicanalogsynthesizers.Tocreatea programusingSyncSquare,selectDefaultProgram,#999.Selectnoneonthekeymappage. SelectuserontheAmpenvpageforanampenvelope.OntheALGpage,selectAlgorithm5at thetopofthepage.Usethecursorbuttonstoselectthefunctionblockandusethealphawheel toselecttheSYNCSQUARE(master)>>function.Next,pressthe<<softbuttontochangesoft buttonpagesuntilyouseeDupLyr.PressDupLyrtoduplicatethelayer,creatinglayer2.In layer2,ontheALGpage,changethefunctionblockto>>SYNCSQUARE(slave),andsetthe AltInputparametertoLayer1.ThefinalstepistogotoLayer1sDSPCTLpageandturnthe Levelparameterallthewaydown,to96dB(thisensuresthatyouwillonlyheartheoutputof theslaveoscillatoronlayer2,whichistheintendedfunctionofSyncSquare.) NowtheSyncSquareoscillatorshouldbeworking.TheSyncoffparameter,SyncOffset,isthe mainparameterforshapingthetoneofthissound.Syncoffsetsthesyncoffsetbetweenthe masterandslavesquarewavesineachcorrespondingoscillator,whichchangestheshapeofthe waveformoutputbytheslaveoscillator.TheSyncSquareoscillatorismostexpressivewhenthe Syncoffparametermodulatedduringperformance.UsetheDSPMODpagetoassignan envelopeorcontinuouscontrollerliketheModWheelforthisparametertoheartheeffect(see TheDSPModulation(DSPMOD)Page on page 629,aswellasTheDSPControl(DSPCTL) Page on page 628andCommonDSPControlParametersinAlgorithmBasics on page 613,for detailsonsettingupmodulationandotherwaystocontrolparameters,andseeTheEnvelope2 (ENV2)andEnvelope3(ENV3)Pages on page 643fordetailsonusingenvelopesasmodulation sources.)SeeAdvancedUseOfKVAOscillatorsbelowforsomesimilarexamplesofhowtosetand controlmodulationforoscillatorspecificfunctionsandotherparameters. ToaddaDSPfunctiontotheSyncSquareoscillator,youllneedtousecascademode.For example,toaddafilter,duplicateoneofthelayerstocreatelayer3.Onlayer3,selecttheALG pageandchooseoneofthecascademodealgorithms,algorithms101131.Forthisexample,lets usealg105withthefilter4PoleMogueLPselectedforthefunctionblock.FortheAltInput parameter,selectLayer2.ThisroutesapreLevelparametercopyofLayer2soutputintoLayer 3.Gotolayer2sDSPCTLpageandturnitsleveldownto96dB(otherwisetheunfiltered soundfromlayer2willbeaudibleaswellasthefilteredsoundinlayer3.)Nowyoucanhearthe SyncSquarefromlayers1and2runningthroughthefilterinlayer3.SeeAdvancedUseOfKVA Oscillatorsbelowforexamplesofhowtosetandcontrolmodulationoffilterparameters.

Advanced Use Of KVA Oscillators

ReadtheKVAsectionsabovebeforemovingontothissection. IfyouhavetriedtheprogramdescribedaboveinBasicUseofKVAOscillators,youmayhave noticedthatthereisnovariationinthenotesplayedasidefrompitch.Layersandprograms createdwithKVAoscillatorscanbecomemuchmoreexpressivebyintroducingvariationwith DSPmodulation.ForaKVAoscillatorlayer,youcanuseDSPmodulationjustasyouwouldfor keymaplayers(seeCommonDSPControlParametersinAlgorithmBasics on page 613,TheDSP Control(DSPCTL)Page on page 628,andTheDSPModulation(DSPMOD)Page on page 629.) SeveralKVAoscillatorsalsohavetheirownmodulationparametersthatmustbeaccessedto controltheoscillatorsintendedfunction.Asidefromthesemethods,KVAlayerscanalsobe alteredbyusingkeymapswithnaturalamplitudeenvelopes.Seebelowfordetailsoneach method. Examples of Simple DSP Control and Modulation: Selecttheprogram1019VA1NakedPWMPoly,andpresstheEditbutton.PresstheALGsoft buttontoviewthealgorithmandfunctionblocksinuse.The3blockPWMoscillatorthatyou seeisgeneratingthesoundinthisprogram.Selecttheemptyfunctionblocktotherightofthe PWMblock,andusethealphawheeltoscrolltotheLOPASSfunction.Youshouldimmediately hearadifferenceinthesoundoftheprogram,becausetheLOPASSfunctionissetbydefaultto

6-55

Program Mode Editing VAST Programs With KVA Oscillators

cutsomeofthehighfrequenciesfromanysignalthatpassesthroughit,inthiscasethePWM signalispassingthrough.WiththeLOPASSfunctionstillselected,presstheEditbutton.This bringsyoutothemainparameterfortheLOPASSobjectontheDSPCTLpage,whichisLPFrq (youcanalsoreachthispageusingtheDSPCTLsoftbutton.)Hereyoucanadjusttheinitial valueofthefunction,inthiscaseitiscutofffrequencyforthelowpassfilter.Forthisexample, leavethisinitialvaluesettoitsdefault.WiththeLPFrqparameterselected,pressrightonthe cursorbuttontogettothisfunctionssubpage(therighthalfofthedisplay.)SelecttheVeltrk parameterandusethealphawheeloralphanumericpadtoturnitallthewayupto10800ct. NowkeyboardvelocitieswillaffecttheLPFrqparameter.Avelocityof127willcausethefilters cutofffrequencytomoveup10800centsfromitsinitialvalue,avelocityof0willhavenoeffect onthecutofffrequency,andvaluesinbetweenwillincreasethecutofffrequencybyascaling between0and10800cents.Overall,thiswillcausehigherplayedvelocitiestoincreasethecutoff frequency,makingtheoscillatorsoundbrighter,andlowervelocitiestolowerthecutoff frequency,makingtheoscillatorsoundduller.ThismethodcanbeusedtocontrolanyDSP functionthatisloadedintoanalgorithm.SeeCommonDSPControlParametersinAlgorithm Basics on page 613forothercontrolparametersavailableontheDSPCTLpage. Alternatively,youcouldassigncutofffrequencytobecontrolledbyanycontinuouscontroller, suchastheModWheel.Startagainwiththeuneditedpatch1019VA1NakedPWMPoly.Follow thesamestepsasabove,butinsteadofchanginganyparametersontheDSPCTLpage,pressthe DSPMODsoftbuttontoreachtheDSPModulationpage.Ontheleftsideofthescreen,choose theparameterforLPFrq,andthenpresstherightcursorbuttontoreachtheLPFrqsubpage. Onthissubpage,youcanassignanycontinuouscontrollertocontrolthecutofffrequencyof theLOPASSfunction(orthemainparameterforanyfunctionloadedinthecurrentalgorithm.) SelecttheSrc1parameter,holdtheEnterbuttonandmovetheModWheeltoquicklyselect MWheel(theModWheel)asyourcontrolsource.Next,pressthecursordownbuttontoselect theDepthparameter,thenusethealphawheeloralphanumericpadtoturnitallthewayupto 10800ct.NowtheModWheelwillaffecttheLPFrqparameter.MovingtheModWheelallthe wayup(avalueof127)willcausethefilterscutofffrequencytomoveup10800centsfromits initialvalue,movingtheModWheelallthewaydown(avalueof0)willhavenoeffectonthe cutofffrequency,andvaluesinbetweenwillincreasethecutofffrequencybyascalingbetween 0and10800cents.Nowyouhavethesamecontrolovercutofffrequencyasyoudidinthe previousexample,butnowitiscontrolledbytheModWheel.Overall,movingtheModWheel upwillincreasethecutofffrequency,makingtheoscillatorsoundbrighter,andmovingthe ModWheeldownwilllowerthecutofffrequency,makingtheoscillatorsoundduller.Thisis usefultocontrolaclassicfiltersweepsound.Theabovemethodcanbeusedtocontrolany DSPfunctionthatisloadedintoanalgorithm,andyoucanchooseanycontinuouscontrolleras acontrolsource. Note:WhenaddingprogramswithcontrollerassignmentstoasetupinSetupmode,yoursetupmust haveitscontrollersassignedtothesamedestinationsthatyouassignedascontrolsourcesinyour program.AneasywaytodothisisbyusingtheControlSetupthatyouusedwhenmakingyourprogram asatemplateforyournewsetup(seeTheControlSetup on page 72.)

6-56

Program Mode Editing VAST Programs With KVA Oscillators

Oscillator Specific Control And Modulation Parameters: SeveralKVAoscillatorsalsohavetheirownmodulationparametersthatmustbeaccessedto controltheoscillatorsintendedfunction.Belowisalistoftheseoscillatorsandtheirdistinctive parameters,groupedbyblocksize.Thoughthefollowingparameterscouldbeleftatone setting,utilizingoneoftheDSPCTLorDSPMODtechniquesdescribedintheaboveexamples willexposeawiderrangeofexpressionfromeachoscillator.

1 Block: LPNOIZ Anoisegeneratorcombinedwithalowpassfilter.UsetheNoizFrqparametertocontrolthecut offfrequencyofthefilter. NOISE Asimplenoisegenerator.UsetheNoiseparametertocontrolthenoiseinitialamplitude. SW+SHP(Sawtooth+Shaper) ThisoscillatoriscapableofbasicFMSynthesis.ItsdistinctiveparameterisPchCoar.This oscillatormustcomeafterthesoundsourceinanalgorithm(eitherkeymaporoscillator)in ordertoheartheeffectofPchCoar,whichcanradicallychangewhatevertheoscillatorreceives asaninput.WorkswellplacedafteraSinesource.

2 Block: SINE+ Thisoscillatorhasaneffectonaninputsignalthatissimilartoringmodulation.Itsdistinctive parametersareSin+PchandSine+Am.Thisoscillatormustcomeafterthesoundsourceinan algorithm(eitherkeymaporoscillator)inordertoheartheintendedeffectofSin+PchandSine+ Am,whichcanradicallychangewhatevertheoscillatorreceivesasaninput.TheSin+Pchand Sine+Amparametersaffectthepitchandamplitudeofthesinewaveformwithoutaffectingthe pitchoftheinputsource,thoughtheseparameterswillhaveabigeffectonhowtheinputsignal isprocessed. RESNOISE Anoisegeneratorcombinedwithalowpassfilterwithresonancecontrol.UsetheNoizFrq parametertocontrolthecutofffrequencyofthefilter.UsetheNoizQparametertocontrolthe amplitudeoftheresonance(aboostorcutatthecutofffrequency.)Onetechniqueforuseofthis functionistosetahighvalueforNoizQ(sothatyouhearatheresonancecreateatone,)and thenontheDSPCTLpagesetC4asaninitialfrequencyforNoizFrq,andsetKeytrkto100ct/key ontheNoizFrqsubpage.Doingthiscausesthenoiseresonancefrequencytomatchthenoteof thekeyplayed. SHAPEDSAW TheShapedSawoscillatorisasawtoothoscillatorwiththeabilitytomorphitsoutputshape betweensawtoothandsinewave(withoutcrossfading.)Thisoscillatorsdistinctiveparameteris Shape,whichcontrolsthemorphing.WithShapesetto0,theoscillatorproducesapure sawtoothwave.WithShapesetto127,theoscillatorproducesapuresinewave.Valuesin betweenmorphbetweenthetwowaveshapes.

6-57

Program Mode Editing VAST Programs With KVA Oscillators

PWM(PulseWidthModulation)[Aliased(notrecommended)] ThisoscillatorsdistinctiveparameterisPWMWid,whichadjustspulsewidthfromvaluesof1 99.WithPWMWidsettoavalueof50,PWMproducesasquarewave.ThefurtherthePWM Widparameterissetfrom50,thenarrowerthepulsewidthbecomes,changingtheshapeofthe outputwaveformandthusalteringtheoscillatorstonalquality.

3 Block: PWM(PulseWidthModulation)[AntiAliased(recommended)] Sameas2BlockPWM,Seeabove.

4 Block: SYNCSAW SyncSawconsistsoftwosawwaves,onethatyouhear(theslave)andonethatcontrolstheslave (themaster.)ThisoscillatorsdistinctiveparameterisSyncOff,whichcontrolstheoffsetofthe slaveandmasterwaves.WithSyncOffsetto0,themasterhasnoeffectontheslave.Whenan offsetisset,theslaverestartsitswavecycleeverytimethemasterwavecompletesacycle. Offsetscausetheslavetorestartitscycleinthemiddleofnormalsawtoothcycles,whichcauses theslaveswaveformshapeandsoundtobealtered. SUPERSAW TheSuperSawoscillatorconsistsoftwosawwaves.Thisoscillatorsdistinctiveparameteris Detune,whichhassettingsfrom050cents,allowingyoutodetunebothofthesawwavesbyup to50centsawayfromtherootpitchofthekeyplayed.Detuneaffectsbothsawwaves,oneis detunedabovetheoriginalrootpitch,andtheotherisdetunedbelowtheoriginalrootpitch. TRIPLESAW TheTripleSawoscillatorconsistsofthreesawwaves.Thisoscillatorsdistinctiveparameteris Detune,whichhassettingsfrom050cents,allowingyoutodetunetwoofthesawwavesbyup to50centsawayfromtherootpitchofthekeyplayed.Detuneaffectstwoofthesawwaves,one isdetunedabovetheoriginalrootpitch,andtheotherisdetunedbelowtheoriginalrootpitch. ThethirdsawwavealwaysplaystherootpitchandisnotaffectedbyDetune.

6-58

Program Mode Editing VAST Programs With KVA Oscillators

8 Block: SYNCSQUARE(master)>>,>>SYNCSQUARE(slave) Seeabove,SettingUpTheSyncSquareOscillator: on page 655. Use Of Keymaps and Natural Amplitude Envelopes With KVA Oscillators: KeymapsareimportantinlayersusingKVAoscillators,eventhoughtheirsamplesarenot usuallyheardintheselayers(seethenotebelowforexceptions.)Keymapselectionisimportant becausethemaximumamplitudesetforeachkeyinthekeymapisappliedtotheoscillator.For mostusesofKVAoscillators,userswillwanttousethe999Silencekeymapbecauseeachkeyin thekeymapissettothesamemaximumamplitude,unlikemanyinstrumentkeymaps.The999 Silencekeymapensuresuniformamplitudebehaviorofanoscillator,andwiththeamplitude envelopesettousermode,userscaneasilyshapeallaspectsofanoscillatorsamplitude.The PC3Kalsohastheabilitytoapplynaturalamplitudeenvelopestooscillators.Withanamplitude envelopesettonaturalmode,eachoscillatornotetakesontheamplitudequalitiesofeach sampleinakeymap(witheachnoterelativetosamplekeyplacement.)Eachsampleina keymaphasanaturalenvelopethatwascreatedduringitsoriginaldevelopmentprocess. Naturalenvelopeshavemuchmoredetailthanwhatispossibletocreatewiththeuser amplitudeenvelope,andtheyareusefulwhentryingtomimicspecificinstrumentamplitude envelopes.Whenusingthistechnique,rememberthatthemaximumamplitudeofeachkeyis setbythecurrentkeymap.Youcanstillcontroltheoverallparametersofanaturalenvelopeby usingtheENVCTLpage.Seetheprograms213Perc>Morph>Bass&315ElectroPercSynthfor examplesofKVAlayersthatusethistechnique.Eachprogramusespercussionkeymapswith naturalenvelopestoproduceafast,percussiveattack.AlsonotethatwhenusingaKVA oscillatorandakeymapotherthan999Silence,thelayerwillusethenameofthekeymapinthe infoboxonthemainProgrampage,eventhoughitisnotthetruesoundsourceofthelayer. Note:Thesamplesfromakeymaparenotheardwhenusinganoscillator,unlessanalgorithmisusedto routethekeymapsignalaroundtheoscillatorandintoaMIXfunctionblock,orunlessitisanoscillator thatprocessesitsaudioinput.

6-59

Program Mode Editing KB3 Programs

Editing KB3 Programs

YoucaneditawideassortmentofanyKB3programsparameters.Youcanalsocreateyourown KB3programs,thoughyoumuststartwithanexistingKB3programtodothis.AregularPC3K programcannotbeturnedintoaKB3program.Ifyourenotsurewhetherthecurrentprogram isaKB3program,checktheKB3button(locatedabovetherightmostslider).IftheblueLEDis on,thenthecurrentprogramisaKB3program. EntertheKB3programeditorbypressingtheEditbuttonwhileaKB3programisselectedin programmode.YoullquicklyseethattheKB3editordiffersfromthestandardVASTprogram editor.

The Tone Wheels (TONEWL) Page

KB3ModeusesDSPgeneratedwaveformsforthelowerhalfofitstonewheelsandsamplesfor theupperhalfofitstonewheels.UsingtheparametersontheTONEWLpage,youcanspecify whichsampleyouwishtouse,thenumberoftonewheels(whichwillaffecthowmanyother voicesareavailabletoyou),andotherrelatedsettings.

Parameter Upper Tone Wheel Keymap Upper Volume Adjust Number of Tone Wheels Organ Map Wheel Volume Map Globals Lower Transposition Upper Transposition

Range of Values Sample List -96 to 96 dB 24 to 91 Equal, Pecks, Bobs, Erics Equal, Bright, Mellow, Junky On, Off -120 to 127 semitones -168 to 87 semitones

Upper Tone Wheel Keymap

Usethisparametertoindicatethekeymap(andtherebythesamples)tousefortheuppertone wheels.YoucanuseanykeymapfromROM,thoughyoumustspecifyakeymapthatuses loopedsamplesforKB3Modetoworkcorrectly.WheninProgrammode,thekeymapassigned totheprogramappearsintheinfobox.

6-60

Program Mode The Tone Wheels (TONEWL) Page

Upper Volume Adjust

Sincesamplevolumescanvary,whilethevolumeofDSPgeneratedwaveformswillremain consistent,youmayfinditnecessarytoadjustthelevelofthesamplebasedtonewheels.This parameterletsyouadjusttheamplitudeoftheupper(samplebased)tonewheelsrelativeto amplitudeofthewaveformgeneratedtonewheels.

Number of Tone Wheels

ThisparameterletsyouspecifythenumberoftonewheelsusedbyaKB3program.Theclassic tonewheelorgansused91tonewheels,thoughthelowest12wereforthepedalsonly. Therefore,youmayfind79agoodnumberoftonewheelstospecifyforrealisticorgan emulations.Thiswouldleaveyou88voicesforotherprograms.Youcanspecifyupto91tone wheels.ThenumberofPC3KvoicesusedbyaKB3programis(numberoftonewheels+1)/2, roundedtothenexthighestwholenumberiftheresultisafraction.So,forexample,with79 tonewheelsspecifiedyouwoulduse40voices.Keepinmindthatthesevoicesarepermanently allocatedandrunningwhiletheKB3programisselected,andcannotbestolen.Theadditional voiceusedbyKB3programsisforkeyclick.

Organ Map
Theorganmapcontrolstherelativeamplitudeofeachkey,perdrawbar.Likethewheelvolume maps,thesemapsarebasedonmeasurementswevemadeonactualorgans.Equalusesthe samevolumeforeachkeyanddrawbar,andisnotbasedonarealB3.Pecksisagoodnormal map,fromaB3ingoodcondition.Ericsisabitmoreidealized;itssmoothedout,butless realistic.Bobsismoreuneven,basedonanoldB3.

Wheel Volume Map

Thewheelvolumemapdeterminesthevolumelevelforeachtonewheel.Weveprovided severaltonewheelvolumemapshere,basedonmeasurementswevetakenondifferentorgans. Equalisamapwithalltonewheelsatthesamevolume.ItsnotbasedonarealB3.Brightisa goodnormalmap,basedonaB3ingoodcondition.JunkyisbasedonaB3withanuneven, rolledoffresponse.MellowissomewherebetweenBrightandJunky. YoucanalsoapplyEQtocontrolwheelvolumesbasedonthefrequenciesofeachtonewheel. SeeTheEQPage on page 670.

Globals
Thisisanothertoggle,whichaffectsLFO2,ASR2,FUNs2and4.Whenoff,thesethreecontrol sourcesarelocal;theyaffecteachindividualnoteinthelayersthatusethemasacontrolsource. Theybeginoperatingeachtimeanoteinthatlayeristriggered. WhentheGlobalsparameterissettoOn,thesecontrolsourcesbecomeglobal,thatistheyaffect everynoteineverylayerofthecurrentprogram,notjusttheonetowhichtheyreapplied.When thesecontrolsourcesareglobal,theybeginoperatingassoonastheprogramisselected.When Globalsareon,LFO2,ASR2,andFUNs2and4willappearontheirrespectivepagespreceded bytheletterGtoindicatethattheyreglobal.Youlluseglobalcontrolsourceswhenyouwantto affecteachnoteinagivenlayeruniformly,andlocalcontrolsourceswhenyouwanttoaffect eachlayersnoteindependently.

Lower Transpose / Upper Transpose

Thesetwoparametersletyoutransposetheupperand/orlowertonewheelsinsemitonesteps awayfromtheirdefaulttunings.

6-61

Program Mode The Drawbars (DRAWBR) Page

The Drawbars (DRAWBR) Page

PresstheDrawbrsoftbuttontoviewtheDRAWBRPage.ThispageletsyoueditKB3s drawbars.

Mode
WhenyousetModetoPreset,thepresetdrawbarsettingsonthispagewillbeinstalledat programselection.Thedrawbarvalueswillimmediatelychange,however,assoonasyoumove thecorrespondingdrawbar.SetModetoLiveifyouwantthedrawbarvolumesettingsat programselectiontobedeterminedbythepositionsofthedrawbarcontrollers(sliders).With eithersetting,anyengagementsofthedrawbarcontrollerssubsequenttoprogramselectionwill affectdrawbarvolumes.

Steps
Thisparameterletsyouspecifytheincrementsbywhichdrawbarvolumeswillchange.Choose either08,toapproximatethedrawbarsettingsonactualorgans,orchoose0127forafiner degreeofresolution.

Volume
ThisparameterappearsonlyifyouvesetMode(seeabove)toPreset.UsetheVolume parametertosetthepresetvolumeofeachoftheninedrawbars.Theavailablevalueswillbe 08or0127,dependingonthesettingoftheStepsparameter.

Tune
Thisparameterletsyoutuneeachoftheninedrawbarsupordowninsemitonesteps.The valuesfortheTuneparameterontheDRAWBRpageshownaboverepresentstandarddrawbar settingsonarealB3,asshowninTable 61 on page 65.

The Set Drawbars (SetDBR) Soft Button

PresstheSetDBRsoftbuttontocapturethecurrentpositionofthedrawbars,andusethose positionsasthepresetdrawbarpositionsontheDRAWBRpage.

6-62

Program Mode The PITCH Page

The PITCH Page

ThePITCHpageparametersforKB3programsismuchlikethePITCHpageparametersfor VASTprograms.TheonlydifferenceisthatforKB3programs,therearenoHz,KeyTrk,or VelTrkparameters.ForafulldescriptionofthePITCHpageparameters,seeCommonDSP ControlParameters on page 614,TheDSPControl(DSPCTL)Page on page 628,andTheDSP Modulation(DSPMOD)Page on page 629.

The AMP Page

TheAMPpageparametersforKB3programsismuchliketheAMPpageparametersforVAST programs.TheonlydifferenceisthatforKB3programs,therearenoKeyTrkorVelTrk parameters.ForafulldescriptionoftheAMPpageparameters,seeCommonDSPControl Parameters on page 614,TheDSPControl(DSPCTL)Page on page 628,andTheDSPModulation (DSPMOD)Page on page 629.

6-63

Program Mode The PERC1 Page

The PERC1 Page

Percussionisacharacteristicfeatureoftonewheelorgans.Itsespeciallyusefulwhilesoloing, sincepercussionaddsanextraplink(actuallyanextratoneatadefinedharmonic)tothe attack.YoucanreachthepercussionparametersbypressingthePerc1andPerc2softbuttons.

Parameter Percussion Volume Decay Harmonic Velocity Tracking Low Harmonic High Harmonic Steal Bar

Range of Values Off, On Soft, Loud Slow, Fast Low, High 0 to 100% Drawbar 1 to 9 Drawbar 1 to 9 Drawbar 1 to 9

Percussion
Thisiswhereyouturnthepercussioneffectonoroff.Percussioniscreatedbyadecaying envelopeappliedtooneoftheninedrawbars.Thepercussioneffectissingletriggered,which meansthatonceitstriggered,itwonttriggeragainuntilallkeys(orwhateveryoureusingto triggernotes)goup.Soifnokeysaredown,andyouplayachord,percussiongetsappliedtoall notesinthechord(andinfact,toallnotesthataretriggeredduringtheshortdurationofthe percussionenvelope).Oncetheenveloperunsitscourse,anynotesyouplaywhileatleastone keyishelddowngetnopercussion.Onkeyboardmodels,youcanturnpercussiononoroffby pressingAssignableControllerButton5(Mutebutton5).

Volume
Thisparameterswitchesbetweenloudandsoftpercussionsettings.Theactualamplitudeisset onthePERC2page.Onkeyboardmodels,youcantogglebetweenloudandsoftbypressing AssignableControllerButton6(Mutebutton6).

Decay
Thisparameterswitchesbetweenfastandslowpercussionsettings.Theactualdecayrateisset onthePERC2page.Onkeyboardmodels,youcantogglebetweenslowandfastdecayby pressingAssignableControllerButton7(Mutebutton7).

6-64

Program Mode The PERC2 Page

Harmonic
Thisparameterswitchesbetweenhighandlowharmonicpercussionsettings.Theactualpitchis controlledbytheLowHarmandHighHarmparameters.Onkeyboardmodels,youcantoggle betweenlowandhighharmonicsbypressingAssignableControllerButton8(Mutebutton8).

VelTrack
Hereiswhereyouspecifythedegreetowhichkeyvelocitycontrolspercussionvolume.Avalue ofzerocorrespondstonovelocitytracking,whichislikearealtonewheelorgan.Othervalues addvelocitytracking,sothatincreasedvelocityresultsinlouderpercussion.

LowHarm
ControlswhichdrawbarisusedasthebasisforthepercussionwhenHarmonicissettoLow.On anactualtonewheelorgan,thisisDrawbar4(2ndharmonic).Theactualpitchobtained dependsonthedrawbartuning.

HighHarm
ControlswhichdrawbarisusedasthebasisforthepercussionwhenHarmonicissettoHigh. Onanactualtonewheelorgan,thisisDrawbar5(3rdharmonic).Theactualpitchobtained dependsonthedrawbartuning.

StealBar
Controlswhichdrawbarisdisabledwhenthepercussioneffectisturnedon.Onanunmodified tonewheelorgan,theninthdrawbaristheonedisabled.Anydrawbarcanbeselected.

The PERC2 Page

Parameter Group (Available for each combination of the Volume and Decay parameters on the PERC1 page) Percussion Level Decay Time Organ Volume Level

Range of Values 0 to 24.0 dB 0.01 to 5.10 seconds, in 0.02-second increments -12.0 to 12.0 dB

PercLevel, DecayTime, OrgLevel

Withtheseparametersyoucancontroltheamplitudeanddecaytimeofthepercussioneffectfor allcombinationsoftheVolumeandDecayparameters(onthePERC1page).Youcanalsoadjust theleveloftheorganrelativetothepercussion,foraccurateemulationofclassicorgans.

6-65

Program Mode The KEYCLK Page

The KEYCLK Page

TheKeyClickfeatureaddsadecayingburstofpitchednoisetotheattackofnotes.Unlikethe percussion,thekeyclickismultitriggered,whichmeansthateverynewnotewilltriggerit. Theparametersonthispageprimarilycontrolthedecay,volume,andpitchofthekeyclick.

Parameter Key Click Volume Decay VelTrk Pitch Random Retrig Thresh Note Attack Note Release

Range of Values Off, On -96.0 to 0.0 dB, in 0.5-dB increments 0.005 to 1.280 seconds, in 0.005-second increments 0 to 100% 1 to 120 0 to 100% -96.0 to 0.0 dB, in 0.5-dB increments Normal, Hard, PercHard Normal, Hard

KeyClick
ThisiswhereyouturnKeyClickonoroff.WithKeyClicksettoOff,youmaystillhearaclick dependingonyourNoteAttackandNoteReleasesettings(seebelow.)

Volume
Thisparametersetsthelevelofthekeyclick;thenoisedecaysfromthelevelyousethere.This levelisscaledbythedrawbarlevels,aswellastheexpressionpedallevel.

Decay
Setsthebasicdecaytimeofthenoiseenvelope.Smallervaluesproduceashorterburst.

VelTrk
Controlsthedegreetowhichkeyvelocityaffectsthekeyclickvolume.Avalueofzeromeans thatthekeyvelocityhasnoeffectonthekeyclickvolume(whichislikearealtonewheelorgan). Othervaluesaddvolumeasthevelocityincreases.

6-66

Program Mode The KEYCLK Page

Pitch
Setsthebasicpitchofthekeyclicknoise,relativetothehighesttonewheelspitch.Thepitchis controlledbyasteeplowpassfilterappliedtowhitenoise.Thefilterscutofffrequencyis controlledrelativetokeynumber,higherkeysmovethecutofffrequencyup,lowerkeysmove thecutofffrequencydown.

Random
Controlsthedegreetowhicharandomamountofamplitudevariationisaddedtothekeyclick.

ReTrigThresh
Thisparameterletsyousetthevolumelevelbelowwhichkeyclickmustdecaybeforeitwillbe retriggered.

Note Attack
Controlstheattackcharacteristicofnotes.Normalprovidesasmoothedattack,whileasetting ofHardhasaninstantattackandwillproduceanaudibleclick,inadditiontoanyamountof keyclickspecifiedwiththeotherparametersonthispage(youmightprefernottospecifyany additionalkeyclickwhenyouusethissetting).PercHardsetsahardattacklevelforpercussion only;noteswithoutpercussionuseanormalattack.

Note Release
Controlsthereleasecharacteristicofnotes.AsettingofNormalhasasmoothedrelease,whilea settingofHardhasaninstantrelease.Hardwillproduceanaudibleclick.

6-67

Program Mode The MISC Page

The MISC Page

TheMISCpagecontainsanassortmentofcontrolparameters,includingLesliespeedcontrol andvibrato/chorusselection.

Parameter Preamp/Expression Response Leakage Leak Mode Speed Control Vibrato/Chorus Control Vibrato/Chorus Type Selection Volume Adjust Bend Range Up Bend Range Down Sustain Sostenuto Leslie Pedal

Range of Values Off, On -96.0 to 0.0 dB, in 0.5-dB increments None, Type A, Type X, Type Y, Type Z Slow, Fast Off, On Vib1, Vib2, Vib3, Chor1, Chor2, Chor3 -96 to 96 dB 7200 cents 7200 cents Off, On Off, On None, Sustain, Sost, Soft

PreampResp
SetthisparameterOnorOfftoenableordisablethepreamp+expressionpedalpartoftheKB3 model.TurningthisOn(thedefault)makesKB3programsfunctionlikestockorgans.The expressionpedalinthiscaseismorethanavolumepedal;itactuallyfunctionslikealoudness control,varyingthefrequencyresponsetocompensatefortheearssensitivityatdifferent volumes.Inaddition,thepreampprovidesadeemphasiscurvetocompensateforthebuiltin tonewheelvolumepreemphasis.TurningpreampresponseOffemulatesorgansthathave beenmodifiedtohaveadirectout(beforethepreampandexpressionpedal).

Leakage
Controlsthelevelofthesimulatedcrosstalkandsignalbleedofadjacenttonewheelsinthe model.Thisisprovidedtohelpdirtyupthesoundtomakeitabitmorerealistic.Asettingof 96dBgivesthepuresttones;othervaluesaddmoresimulatedleakage.Thislevelisscaledby thedrawbarlevels,aswellastheexpressionpedallevel.

6-68

Program Mode The MISC Page

LeakMode
Selectsbetweendifferentleakagemodels,determiningwhichleakageharmonicsare emphasized.TypeAprovidesanoveralltonewheelleakage,withalltonewheelsleakingasmall amount.TypeX,TypeY,andTypeZemulatedifferentdegreesofdrawbarleakage,wherethe leakagecomponentscorrespondtotheninedrawbars,insteadofallthetonewheels.

SpeedCtl
SelecteitherFastorSlowtochoosethespeedoftherotaryspeakeremulation.Onkeyboard models,youcantogglebetweenfastandslowspeedusingAssignableControllerButton1 (Mutebutton1). WhenyouselectaKB3program,thePC3KsendsseveralMIDIControllermessagesbothlocally andtotheMIDIOutport.OneofthosemessagesisControllernumber68,withavalue correspondingtothevalueofSpeedCtl(Slow=0,Fast=127).

VibChorCtl
ChooseOnorOfftoturnonoroffeithervibratoorchorus(asselectedwiththeVibChorSel parameter).Onkeyboardmodels,youcantogglebetweenonandoffusingAssignable ControllerButton2(Mutebutton2). WhenyouselectaKB3program,thePC3KsendsseveralMIDIControllermessagesbothlocally andtotheMIDIOutport.OneofthosemessagesisControllernumber95,withavalue correspondingtothevalueofVibChorCtl(Off=0,On=127).

VibChorSel
Choosethevibratoorchorusprogram(therearethreeofeach)youwishtousewiththisKB3 program.NotethatyoumustsetVibChorCtl(alsoontheMISCpage)toOntoheartheeffect. Onkeyboardmodels,youcanselectthevibratoorchorusyouwantusingAssignableController Buttons3and4(Mutebuttons3and4. WhenyouselectaKB3program,thePC3KsendsseveralMIDIControllermessagesbothlocally andtotheMIDIOutport.OneofthosemessagesisControllernumber93,withavalue correspondingtothevalueofVibChorSel(Vib1=0,Vib2=36,Vib3=58,Chor1=79, Chor2 = 100,andChor3=122).

VolAdjust
ProvidesanoverallvolumeadjustfortheKB3model.UsethisparametertonormalizeKB3 programswithotherprograms.

BendRngUp, BendRngDn
RespectivelycontroltheupwardanddownwardpitchbendrangesoftheKB3program.

Sustain
SetOnorOfftoenableordisableresponsetoMIDIsustain(MIDI64).

Sostenuto
SetOnorOfftoenableordisableresponsetoMIDIsostenuto(MIDI66).

LesliePedal
SetthepedalsourcetotogglebetweenFastandSlowfortheLesliespeakerrotationspeed.

6-69

Program Mode The EQ Page

The EQ Page
Thefourcolumnheadersonthispagerepresenttwoshelvingbandsofequalizationandtwo parametricbands.TheKB3EQofferedhere,though,isnotimplementedasatrueEQsection; instead,itadjuststhevolumeofthetonewheelsbasedonfrequency.Ifthetonewheelsare basedonsinewaves,thenthisactssimilarlytoarealEQ.

Parameter Group (Available for each EQ band) Gain Frequency Width

Range of Values -24.0 to 24.0 dB, in 0.2-dB increments 16 to 25088 Hz, in varying increments -128 to 128 Semitones, in 2-semitone increments

EachEQsectionhasGain(G),Frequency(F),andWidth(W)controls.Frequencycontrolsthe centerfrequencyoftheband.Widthcontrolsthebandwidth.Gaincontrolstheamountofboost orcut.

The OUTPUT Page

UsethispagetoroutethecurrentprogramspostFXsignals.ThetwoPanparameters correspondtothoseoftheVASTProgrameditorOUTPUTpage(Seepage 630).TheOutGain parametercorrespondstothatoftheVASTProgrameditorCOMMONpage(Seepage 633).

6-70

Program Mode The Program FX (PROGFX) Page

The Program FX (PROGFX) Page

ThispageisthesameastheVASTProgrameditorPROGFXpage(seepage 647)exceptforone importantdifference:thereisnoPre/Postinsertparameterfortheauxiliarysends.

The LFO, ASR, and FUN Pages

TherestofthepagesLFO,ASR,andFUNarethesameforKB3programsastheyarefor VASTprograms,sowewontdescribethemagainhere.Beginonpage 637tofinddescriptions ofthesepages.

Programming Tips
ThissectionprovidessomestartingpointsforcreatingyourownKB3programs.Rememberthat youllhavetostartwithoneoftheexistingKB3programs. Asdescribedbelow,themostprominentdifferencebetweenorganvintagesisthenumberof tonewheelsused.Keepinmind,however,thatthesoundofanactualtonewheelorganwill dependnotonlyonitsage,butalsoonhowwellithasbeenmaintained. Octavefolding,whereanoctave(orpartofanoctave)isrepeatedatthetoporbottomofthe keyboard,ishandledautomaticallybyKB3Mode,emulatingthefoldingdoneonactualtone wheelorgans. EarlyToneWheelOrgans.Instrumentsofthisperiodhad91tonewheels.Togetthissound,go totheTONEWLpage,select91tonewheels,andsetlowestpitchtoC1.StartwiththeJunky WheelVolumeMapandBobsOrganMap.YoumayalsowanttoincreasetheKeyClicklevel, sincethistendstobecomelouderonolderorgans. MiddlePeriodOrgans.Tomodeloneoftheseinstruments,set82tonewheelsandalownoteof A1.UsetheMellowWheelVolumeMapandEricsOrganMap.SetKeyClicktoamoderate level. TheClassicB3.Forthissound,choose79tonewheelsandsetthelownotetobeC2.Thebest settingsherearetheBrightWheelVolumeMapandPecksOrganMap.Youmayalsowantto reducetheKeyClicklevel.

6-71

Program Mode Programming Tips

6-72

Setup Mode

Chapter 7 Setup Mode

InSetupmode,thePC3Kcantakeontheidentityof16distinctinstrumentsand16distinctMIDI transmitters,eachofwhichcanusethesetupsphysicalcontrollerassignments(oranysubsetof thosecontrollerassignments).Forexample,youcancreateasetupthatissplitinto16different keyboardregions(calledzones).Eachzonecanplayitsownprogram,whilealsotransmitting onitsownMIDIchannel.Eachzonecanalsohaveanindependentarpeggiatorandoneriff.You canalsorecordtheoutputofasetuptoSongmode. SelectingsetupsinSetupmodeismuchlikeselectingprogramsinProgrammodejustuseone ofthenormaldataentrymethodstoscrollthroughthelistofsetups.Thereare,however,some importantdifferencesbetweenaprogramandasetup.Aprogramplaysonasinglekeyboard zoneandonasingleMIDIchannel.Asetupenablesyoutouseupto16keyboard(orMIDI controller)zones,eachofwhichcanhaveitsownprogram,MIDIchannel,andcontrol assignments.Theparametersyoudefineforeachsetupaffectprogramsonlywhileyouarein Setupmode.Anexceptiontothisisthecontrolsetup,whichwediscussonpage 72. PresstheSetupmodebuttontoenterSetupmode.Youllseealistofsetups,whichyoucan selectwithanydataentrymethod.

TheinfoboxonthelefthandsideofthemainSetupmodepagedisplaysthezonesand correspondingprogramsusedinthecurrentsetup.Belowtheprogramnameforeachzoneisa linerepresentingthezoneskeyrange.Forexample,inthesetupabove,AcousticSplit,the zonefortheprogramNYCKitshasakeyrangethatcoverstheentirekeyboard,from approximatelyC1toG9.ThezonesfortheprogramsStudioCStringsandNYCJazzGrand havekeyrangesthatapproximatelycovertheuppertwothirdsofthekeyboard,andUpright Growlercoverspartofthelowerkeyboard.Youcanalsoseewhichzoneshaveariff,indicated byriFFtotherightoftheprogramname.Forexample,inthesetupabove,thezoneforthe programNYCKitshasariff.Iftherearemorethanfourzonesinthecurrentsetup,youcan viewtheotherzonesbyholdingdowntheEnterbuttonandusingtheChan/Layerbuttonsto scrollthroughthecurrentsetupszones. YoucantransposetheentiresetupupordownbyoctaveswiththetwoOctavsoftbuttons.Use thetwoXposesoftbuttonstotransposethesetupupordownbyhalfsteps.Whenyoutranspose asetup,thesplitpointsbetweenzonesremaininplace;eachprogramistransposedwithinits respectivezone. ThePanicsoftbuttonsendsAllNotesOffandResetAllControllersmessagestoallzones,and stopsallarpeggiatorsandriffs.

7-1

Setup Mode The Control Setup

PresstheInfosoftbuttontoseealistofallofthecontrollerassignmentsforallzonesofthe currentsetup.OntheInfopage,usetheAlphaWheel,cursorbuttons,or/+buttonstoscroll throughthelist. WhenyouselectasetupinSetupmode,thePC3KsendsanumberofMIDImessages,oneachof theMIDIchannelsusedbythesetup.Someoftheseinclude:ProgramChangecommands,MIDI BankSelectmessages,PanandVolumemessages,andentryvaluesforphysicalcontrollers (entryvaluesarethevaluesthattakeeffectassoonasyouselectthesetup;therearealso controllerexitvalues,whicharethevaluesofthecontrollerswhenyouleavethesetupeither byselectinganothersetuporbyexitingSetupmode).Thevaluesofallthesemessagesdepend ontheparametersyoudefineintheSetupEditor.

The Control Setup

Inadditiontozonesplittingandlayering,Setupmodeisapowerfulwaytotakeadvantageof thePC3Ksprogrammablesliders,ribboncontrollers,andassignablebuttons.Inorderto providesomeofthesameflexibilityforProgrammode,wecreatedthecontrolsetup,which definesthecontrollerassignmentsforprogramsinProgrammode. Thedefaultcontrolsetupis126 Internal Voices,butyoucanchooseanycontrolsetupyouwant. Todothis,gototheMIDImodeTRANSMITpageanduseanynormaldataentrymethodto changetheControlSetupparameter.WhenyoureenterProgrammode,allprogramswillnow respondtomanyofthecontrollerassignmentsdefinedinZone1ofthecontrolsetup(Zones2 16arenotrelevantinProgrammode,becauseaprogramcanoccupyonlyoneMIDIchannel). Onceyousavechangestothecontrolsetup,thosechangeswillaffectallprogramswhenyouare inProgrammode.Youmaywanttoprogramseveraldifferentcontrolsetups,andswitchamong themfordifferentapplications.

7-2

Setup Mode The Control Setup

Control SetupSetup Editor Page, Zone 1

CH/PROG KEY/VEL PAN/VOL BEND

Parameters Affecting Program Mode

Arpeggiator, Destination, BankMode All ExitVolume, ExitPan AuxBend1Up, AuxBend1Dwn, AuxBend2Rng Tempo, ArpSync All All Dest, Scale, Add, Curv

Parameters Not Affecting Program Mode

LocalPrg, Channel, MIDIBank, MIDIProg, Status, EntryProgChg EntryVolume, EntryPan BendRangeUp(ST), BendRangeUp(ct), BendRangeDown(ST), BendRangeDown(ct), Clock source, ArpGlobal, Aux FX channel, Mutes, KB3 channel

COMMON ARPEGGIATOR RIBCFG Continuous Controller assignment pages (SLIDER, SLID/2, CPEDAL, RIBBON, WHEEL, PRESS) Switch Controller assignment pages (FT SW1, FT SW2, FT SW3, ARP SW, SWITCH, SWPRG1, SWPRG2, SWPRG3, SWPRG4, SWPRG5, SWPRG6, SWPRG7, SWPRG8) RIFF1, RIFF2 FX, AUXFX1, AUXFX2, MASTFX

Ent, Exit

Type, OnControl, OnValue, OffControl, OffValue, EntryState

ExitState

All All

Table 7-1

Control Setup Parameters Affecting Program Mode

7-3

Setup Mode The Control Setup

Insummary,physicalcontrollerdestinations,theircurvesandstates,andtheArpeggiator parametersalldefinecontrollerassignmentsforprogramsinProgrammode.Theother parametershavenoeffect;thiskeepsProgrammoderelativelysimple.Programmodeletsyou changevaluesfortransposition,MIDIchannels,andprogramsindependentlyofthecontrol setup. Onceyousavechangestothecontrolsetup,thosechangeswillaffectallprogramswhenyouare inProgrammode.Forexample,programmingtheLargeRibboninthecontrolsetuptohave threesectionswillmeanthatineveryprograminProgrammode,youwillhaveathreesection LargeRibbon. Youmaywanttoprogramseveraldifferentcontrolsetups,andswitchamongthemfordifferent applications.

Zone-status LEDs in Setup Mode

Takeaminutetoscrollthroughsomeofthefactorysetups.Asyouchangesetups,youllnotice thattheLEDsintheeightbuttonsabovetheprogrammableslidersgoonandoffandchange color.TheseLEDsindicatethestatusofeachofthezonesinthesetup.YoumayalsoseetheSolo buttongoon.Thismeansthatthesetupisconfiguredtohaveonlyonezoneplayingwhenyou selectit. WhileyoureinSetupmode,eachoftheeightzonestatusLEDswillalwaysbeinoneoffour states: Off Emptyzonethatis,azonethathasnoprogramorMIDIchannelassociatedwithit. Forexample,ifyouselectasetupandonlyfourstatusLEDslightup(regardlessof theircolor),thesetupcontainsjustfourzones.WheneveryoureinSetupmode,the numberoflinesintheinfoboxmatchesthenumberofzonestatusLEDsthatarelit. Activezone.Aslongasnootherzoneissoloed,anactivezoneplaysnotesand generatescontrollerinformation,programchanges,andentry/exitcontrollervalues.If anotherzoneissoloed,anactivezoneisbackgroundeditsstatusLEDremains green,butitdoesntplaynotesorgeneratecontrollerinformation. Mutedzone.Mutedzonesdontplaynotesorgeneratecontrollerinformation,but theydogenerateprogramchangesandentry/exitcontrollervalues. Solozone.Asyoumighthaveguessed,onlyonezonecanbesoloedatatime.Whena zoneissoloed,onlythatzoneplaysnotesandgeneratescontrollerinformation.Other zones,iftheyrenotturnedoff,stillgenerateprogramchangesand entry/exitcontrollervalues.Ifazoneismutedandthensubsequentlysoloed,allother zonesarebackgroundedbutthesoloedzoneremainsmuted.

Green

Orange Red

Inperformancesituations,thezonestatusbuttonsprovideaconvenientwaytotemporarily changethestatusofoneormorezones.Thiscanbeveryeffectiveforbringingvoicesand/or controllerconfigurationsintoandoutofyourperformance.Thebestwaytogetfamiliarwith thistechniqueistoplaywiththebuttons,asthenextfewparagraphsdescribe. Selectasetup(lookforonewithlotsofactivezonesthatcoverthewholekeyboard),andplaya fewbars.Youllhearsoundscorrespondingtoeachoftheactivezones(greenLEDs).Ifyousee anymutedzones(orangeLEDS),presstheirzonestatusbuttons,andtheyllbecomeactive; conversely,ifyoupressthezonestatusbuttonofanactivezone,itwillbecomemuted.Play aroundabit.Trymutingallthezones,thenbringingthembackonebyoneuntilallthezonesin thesetupareactive.

7-4

Setup Mode The Setup Editor

Table 72givesyouaquickvisualreminderofhowzonesbehavedependingontheirstatus.

LED Color

Zone Status
Solo, Solo+Muted Active Backgrounded Muted Empty

Data Generated by Zone

Notes Controllers Program Number Entry and Exit Values

Red Green (no others are red) Green (another is red) Orange (Off)

Yes Yes
No No No

Yes Yes
No No No

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No

Yes Yes Yes Yes

No

Table 7-2

Zone Status in Setup Mode

RememberthatanychangesyoumaketozonestatusinSetupmodearetemporary;assoonas youselectanothersetup,thatsetupsprogrammedzonestatustakesover.Tochangeasetups zonestatuspermanently,usetheSetupEditor(seeStatus on page 78).

Soloing a Zone
Tosoloazone,settheStatusparameterontheSetupEditorCH/PROGpage(seeTheSetupEditor andTheChannel/Program(CH/PROG)Pagebelow)toSolo(orSolo+Muted).TheChan/Layer buttonsinadditiontoscrollingthroughthezonesofthecurrentsetupnowselectthesoloed zone.Ifyouscrollthroughthezones,youwillseetheredsoloLEDmovingacrossthemute buttons.Afteronezoneissoloed,youcanchooseadifferentzonetobesoloedbypressingonits zonestatusbutton;thisactionunsolosthepreviouslysoloedzone. Additionally,youcanconfigureasetupsuchthatyoucansolozonesinrealtimebyassigning anyofthecontrollerdestinationstoSoloZn.SeeControllers on page 720formoreinformation oncontrollerdestinationassignmentsinSetupmode.

The Setup Editor

FromSetupmode,presstheEditbuttontoentertheSetupEditor,whereyoucanmakechanges tothecurrentlyselectedsetup.UsethesoftbuttonstoselectthevariousSetupEditorpages.The upperlineofeachpagedisplaystheusualmodereminder,aswellasthecurrentSetupEditor page,andthecurrentzone.UsetheChan/Layerbuttonstoselectoneofuptosixteendifferent zones,eachhavingitsownsetofSetupEditorpages. TheparametersontheSetupEditorpagesdefinewhateachofasetupszonessendsbothto internalprogramsandtotheMIDIOutport.TheyalsodeterminehowthePC3Krespondsto MIDIsignalsreceivedfromaMIDIcontrollerconnectedtothePC3KsMIDIInport(whenthe LocalKeyboardChannelmatchesthetransmitchannelofyourMIDIcontroller). Compare PressingtheStoragebuttoncallsuptheCompareEditor,whichrecallsthesetuppreedit settings,allowingyoutocompareyoureditedsetupwiththeoriginalsetup.Pressingthe StoragebuttonagainreturnsyoutotheSetupeditor.UsingtheCompareEditormakesno changestothecurrentsetup. Thedisplaydiagramsyouseeinthischaptershowthedefaultvaluesforsetup126Internal Voices.

7-5

Setup Mode The Channel/Program (CH/PROG) Page

The Channel/Program (CH/PROG) Page

ThisisthefirstpageyouseewhenyouentertheSetupEditor.Here,youcanselectprograms, MIDIchannels,andMIDIBanknumbersforeachofthesetups16zones.Youcanalsosoloor muteeachzone,andassignzonestobecontrolledbythePC3KsArpeggiator.

Parameter Program Destination Channel MIDI Bank MIDI Program (MidiProg) Status InputChannel MIDI Bank Mode (BankMode) Entry Program Change (EntryProgChg) Arpeggiator

Range of Values Program List Destination List 1 to 16 0 to 127 (Depends on MIDI Bank Mode) Muted, Active, Solo, Solo+Muted None, 1-16 MIDI Bank Mode List On, Off On, Off

Default 1 Standard Grand USB_MIDI+MIDI+Local 1 0 1 Active None Ctl 0/32 On On

Program
Thisselectsaninternalprogramtoplayoneachzone.AsyouchangethevalueofProgram, noticethatMIDIProgramandMIDIBankmatchthelocalprogramandbanknumbers (programs1127fallintoMIDIBank0,128255fallintoMIDIBank1,andsoonbothMIDI BanksandPC3Kbankscanhold128programs).Ifyouwanttotransmitdifferentprogramand banknumbersoverMIDI,highlighteitherMIDIProgramorMIDIBankandselectanewvalue. NotethatchangingtheProgramparameteragainwillresetboththeMIDIProgramandMIDI Bankparameterstomatchthelocalprogramandbanknumbers. NOTE:MIDIBanksandPC3Kbanksarenotthesame,noristhereadirectonetoonecorrespondence betweenthetwo.Asmentionedpreviously,programs1127fallintoMIDIBank0,programs128255 fallintoMIDIBank1,andsoon;programIDs1128fallintoPC3KbankBase1,programs128255fall intoBase2,andsoon(recallthatthePC3Kbanknamesaredisplayedinlefttorightorderabovetheir correspondingmutebuttonsinProgrammode).Forexample,program128DrumsnBellsisMIDIBank 1Program0,andisinPC3KbankBase1;andprogram127MagicCelesteisMIDIBank0Program 127,butisalsoinPC3KbankBase1.

7-6

Setup Mode The Channel/Program (CH/PROG) Page

Destination
ThisparameterdetermineswhetherthecurrentlyselectedzonetransmitsonlytothePC3K (Local),transmitsonlytotheMIDIport(MIDI),transmitsonlytotheUSBport(USB_MIDI), transmitstoapairofdestinations(MIDI+Local,USB_MIDI+Local,orUSB_MIDI+MIDI),or transmitstoalldestinations(USB_MIDI+MIDI+Local).

Channel
TheChannelparameterdefinestheMIDItransmitchannelforthecurrentlyselectedzone.You cansetittoanyofthe16MIDIchannels.Normally,youwillwanteachzoneonaseparateMIDI channel.Thisisnecessaryifyouwanttocombinedifferentprogramsinthesetup. IftwozoneshavethesameMIDIchannel(anddestination),buttheyhavedifferentprogram settings,therewillbeconflicts:noMIDIdevice,includingthePC3K,canrespondcorrectlyto twodifferentsimultaneousProgramChangecommandsononechannel.Theresultwillbethat onlyoneProgramChangewillberecognized,andeverynoteplayedwillsounddouble(ifNote Mapsareon).Thiscancreateoddandunpredictabletimingeffects,andwillreduceyour polyphonyby50%. Nevertheless,therewillbeoccasionswhenstackingzonesonthesameMIDIchannelmight comeinhandy.SupposeyouwantaphysicalcontrolleronthePC3Ktosenddatafortwo differentnumberedMIDIControllersonthesamechannel.Inthiscase,youmustcreatetwozones assignedtothesamechannel,butwithdifferentcontrollerassignments. Heresoneexample:ifareceivingsynthisusingController1formodulationdepthand Controller#13formodulationspeed,youcanincreaseboththedepthandthespeedwith Slider A.StartbyassigningSlider AinZone1toMWheelandinZone2toMIDI13;thenassign bothzonestothesameMIDIchannel.(Youmaywanttomakesureyouarentsendingdoubled notes.UsetheNoteMapparameterontheKEY/VELpagetosetonezonesNoteMaptoLinear andtheotherzonesNoteMaptoOff.) Anotherexample:createtwoormorezonesthatareidenticalexceptfortheirtransposition settings.Nowyoucanplayparallelintervals(orchords)withsinglekeystrikes.

MidiBank
BeforereadingthissectiononMIDIBanks,besuretoreadthenoteinthesection Program on page 76. ThePC3Ksprogramsaredividedinto17MIDIBanks,numbered016.Program46inMIDI Bank3,(whichisPC3KbankOrchestra),forexample,is430LeadOboe.TheMIDIBank parameterdisplayswhichbankthecurrentprogramisassignedto,andautomaticallychanges tomatchtheProgramvalueyouset. YoucansendBankSelectmessagestoexternalMIDIdevicesaswell,bysettingtheDestination parametertoadestinationincludingMIDIorUSB_MIDI,thenchangingMidiBank.Some instrumentsmayhavemorebanksthanthePC3K.BankswitchingviaMIDImakesiteasyfor thePC3Kusertoselectsoundsonexternalinstruments,nomatterhowmanybankstheymight have. WhenyouchangethevalueoftheProgramparameter,thevalueofMidiBankautomatically changescorrespondingly.IfyouwanttotransmitaMIDIBanknumberdifferentfromtheone correspondingtothelocalprogram,selectthelocalprogramfirst,thenchangetheMIDIbank. Ifyouselectanemptybank(likeBank53),thezonewillstillproducesoundonthePC3K, providedthatDestinationissettoadestinationincludingLocal.TheProgramparameterwill displaywhateverinternalprogramyouset,butthebanknumbertransmittedovertheMIDIOut portwillbedifferentfromtheinternalprogramsbanknumber.

7-7

Setup Mode The Channel/Program (CH/PROG) Page

MIDI Program (MidiProg)

MidiProgdefineswhichprogramnumberistransmittedouttheMIDIOutportonthecurrent zonesMIDIchannel. WhenyouchangethevalueoftheProgramparameter,thevalueofMIDIProgautomatically changescorrespondingly.IfyouwanttotransmitaMIDIprogramchangenumberdifferent fromtheonecorrespondingtothelocalprogram,selectthelocalprogramfirst,thenchangethe MIDIprogram. DifferentprogramsareaccessibledependingonthevalueoftheBankModeparameter:

Value of BankMode
Ctl 0 or Ctl 32 Ctl 0/32 K2600 None

Available Programs
0 to 127 0 to 127 0 to 99 None

Status
ThisparameterdetermineswhatthecurrentzonedoeswhenyouselectthesetupinSetup mode.Mutedmeansthatthezonesendsandreceivesprogramchangesandentry/exitcontroller values,butdoesntplaynotes.IfthevalueisActive,thezonesendsandreceivesnormallyvia MIDI.Solocausesonlythecurrentzonetoplay,backgroundingallotherzones (backgroundedzonessendandreceiveprogramchangesandentry/exitcontrollervalues,but dontplaynotes).WithavalueofSolo+Muted,thecurrentzoneisbothsoloedandmuted;when thezoneisntsoloed,itwontproducesound). SeethesectionaboutzonestatusLEDs(page 74)formoreinformationaboutmutingand soloingzones.

Input Channel
InSetupmode,anexternalMIDIdevice(suchasakeyboardorsequencer)willplaynotesofa singleprogrambydefault(iftheLocalKeyboardChannelparameterissettooff,seepage 1010 fordetails.)TheplayedprogramwillbeonaZonethathasaChannelparameter(ontheCH/ PROGpage)whichmatchesthechannelonwhichtheexternalMIDIdeviceistransmitting.(If noZonesChannelparametermatches,theexternaldevicewillplaynotesofthelastprogram thatwasusingthatchannelinProgramModeorfromapreviouslyloadedSongorSetup.) WhentheProgramofaSetupZoneisplayedthisway,SetupMIDIparameters(mostnoticeably keyrangeandtransposition)willnotbeapplied.Ifyouwanttheseparametersapplied,setthe InputChannelparametertomatchthechannelonwhichtheexternalMIDIdeviceis transmitting.ToplaytheentireSetupfromanexternalMIDIdevice,seeLocalKeyboardChannel (LocalKbdCh) on page 1010.WhenLocalKeyboardChannelissettosomethingotherthanOff, theInputChannelparameterhasnoeffectandwillappearinparentheses.InputChannel basicallyhasthesameeffectasLocalKeyboardChannel,exceptyoucanchoosetoplayonlyone orsomeSetupZonesformanexternaldevice,insteadofallZones.ToplaymorethanoneZone fromanexternaldevice,seteachdesiredZonesInputChannelparametertomatchthechannel onwhichtheexternalMIDIdeviceistransmitting.ItisalsopossibletousetheInputChannel parametertousemultipleexternaldeviceswhicheachplayaspecificZoneorZones.Fordetails oncontrollingassignmentsmadetothePC3Ksphysicalcontrollers(sliders,switches,mod wheel,etc.)fromanexternalMIDIdevice,seeContinuousControllerMessagesFromExternalMIDI Devices on page 1010.

7-8

Setup Mode The Channel/Program (CH/PROG) Page

MIDI Bank Mode (BankMode)

TheBankModeyouchoosedetermineshowbanknumberswillbesentoverMIDIwhenthe setupisselected,andinwhatformat.ItalsoaffectshowmanyMIDIbanksandprogramsyou canchoose. Nonemeansnobanknumberissent,justtheprogramnumber.Ctl0meansthatthebank numberissentasaMIDIController#0message.Ctl32meansitissentasMIDIController #32. Ctl0/32meansitissentasadualcontroller(twobyte)message,withthemostsignificantbyte (MSB)ofthebanknumbersentasController0andtheleastsignificantbyte(LSB)asController 32.BankSelectmessagesallowyoutospecifybanksnumbered0127. TheMIDISpecificationisalittleambiguouswhenitcomestoBankSelectmessages,asto whethertheyshouldbeonlyController0,onlyController32,orbothControllerssentasapair. Differentmanufacturersdesigntheirinstrumentstorespondtodifferentschemes,andifyou sendBankSelectinaformaninstrumentdoesntlike,itmayignoreitorinterpretitincorrectly. TheBankModeparameterisdesignedtoallowthegreatestflexibilityinaddressingotherMIDI instruments.UsuallyyoucanlookontheMIDIImplementationchartintheusersmanualofan instrumenttodeterminehowitsdesignedtoreceiveBankSelectmessages,andthenset BankModeforeachzonetosuittheinstrumentthatisreceivingdatafromit.Thedefaultsetting, whichworkswiththelargestnumberofotherinstruments,isCtl0/32. ABankModevalueofK2600isintendedforusewiththeK2000,K2500,orK2600.TheBank SelectmessageissentasController32,withavaluebetween0and127.TheK2000,K2500,and K2600supportonly10banks,with99programsperbank,soProgramChanges100orhigherare sentasBankSelect1,followedbythelasttwodigitsasaProgramChange.Forexample,if Program124isassignedtothezone,thiswillbesentouttheMIDIOutportasBankSelect (Controller32)1,andthenProgramChange24.

Entry Program Change (EntryProgChg)

Thisparameterenablesordisablesbankandprogramchangecommandssenttointernal programsortotheMIDIOutjackwhenyouselectsetups.IfitssettoOn,theprogramnumbers fortheprogramsinthe16zoneswillbesentviaMIDIwhenasetupisselected.Bysettingthis parametertoOff,youcanselectasetuponthePC3Kwithoutchangingtheinternalprogramsor thoseonMIDIdevicesreceivingfromthePC3K.Thisisusefulifyouwanttosendonly controllerdatatothePC3KortoMIDIdevices,withoutchangingprogramassignments.

Arpeggiator
TheArpeggiatorparameterdetermineswhethertheArpeggiatorwillaffectnotesplayedinthe currentzone.TheArpeggiatoraffectsonlythosezonesthathavethisparametersettoavalueof On. Foranygivenzone,theArpeggiatorplaysnotesonlywithinthatzonesKeyRange.Ifthe Arpeggiator,forexample,triestoplayaC#4inazone,butthatzonesKeyRangeendsatC4,the notewillnotsound.However,anotherzonewhoseKeyRangeendsatC5willbeabletoplaythe C#4fromtheArpeggiator.Therefore,settingazonesKeyRangecanbeimportantindeciding howitwillrespondtotheArpeggiator.TheLoKeyandHiKeyparametersonthe ARPEGGIATOR2page(seepage 750)determinewhetherthenotesyouplaygetarpeggiated.

7-9

Setup Mode The Key/Velocity (KEY-VEL) Page

The Key/Velocity (KEY-VEL) Page

TheKey/Velocitypageallowsyoutosetkeyrange,velocityrange,transposition,andNote Mapsforeachzone. Note:MIDIvelocityofnotesplayedonthePC3KkeyboardarefirstaffectedbyanyVelocityScale,Offset, andCurvesettingsmadeoneachzonesKEYVELpage.TheresultingvelocityisthenaffectedbyanyVel MapsettingsmadeontheMasterModeIIpage(seepage 114.)Also,MIDIvelocitiessenttotheUSBor MIDIoutportarefirstaffectedasexplainedabove,andthenaffectedbysettingsontheMIDImode Transmitpage(seepage 101.)

Parameter Low Key High Key Transpose Note Map Low Velocity High Velocity Velocity Scale Velocity Offset Velocity Curve

Range of Values C -1 to G9 C -1 to G9 -128 to +127 Semitones Note Map List 1 to 127 1 to 127 300% -128 to +127 Velocity Curve List (seeVelocity Curve (VelCurve) on page 7-15)

Default C -1 G9 0Linear 1 127 100% 0 Linear

7-10

Setup Mode The Key/Velocity (KEY-VEL) Page

Low Key (LoKey), High Key (HiKey)

TheLoKeyandHiKeyparametersdefinethenoterangeofthecurrentlyselectedzone.The easiestwaytochangethesevaluesistopressandholdtheEnterbuttonandpressthekeyofthe noteyouwishtoenter.Youcansetthesevalueswithnormaldataentrymethodsaswell. Youcancreatenegativerangesaswell.Todothis,selecttheHiKeyparameterandsetitslimit lowerthantheLoKeylimit.Thisresultsinthezonebeingactiveatthetopandbottomofthe keyboard,butbeingsilentintherangebetweenthetwolimits.Thisletsyoucreatealayerwitha holeinthemiddle,whichyoucanthenfillwithadifferentsoundonanotherzone. ThelimitsofMIDIareC1toG9.Theuntransposed88keyrangeisA0toC8.Theuntransposed 76keyrangeisE1toG7.

Transpose
Thischangesthepitchofthezone,withoutchangingitspositiononthekeyboard.Itchangesthe MIDInotenumbersgeneratedbythekeysinthezone,withoutphysicallyshiftingthezone.The rangeis128to127semitones.Sincethereare12semitones(orhalfsteps)toanoctave,youcan transposeupordownovertenoctaves.Ifyoutransposeoutoftherangeoftheactivevoice, however,nonoteswillsound;MIDInotenumberswilltransmit,butnoteswillnot.

Note Map
NoteMapletsyouchangethewaynotesaresentfromthePC3K.ThedefaultsettingisLinear: allnotesgooutasplayed.PressingtheMinusbuttontakesyoutoOff;nonotesaresent,but controllersandothernonnotedataare. SettingNoteMaptoInverseeffectivelyturnsthekeyboardupsidedown,withthehighestkey beingA0andthelowestC9.IfyousetNoteMaptoConstant,allofthekeysonthekeyboard willplaythesamenote.ThenotedefaultstoC4,butyoucanchangethiswiththeTranspose parameter.Thisworkswellwhenyouwantthesoundfromaparticularkeytoplaywithevery noteofanotherzoneforexample,playingaridecymbalwitheverynoteinabassline. Nextarethealternatingnotemaps,whichletyoudividethekeyboardinsomeuniqueways.If youareusingtwoormoreMIDIdevices(includingthePC3K),youcanexpandpolyphonyby assigningeachzonetoadifferentalternatingnotemap.Forexample,ifyouhavetwoPC3Ks, youcanassigntwozonestoeachplaythesameprogramonadifferentPC3K,therebydoubling polyphony. Tosplitazoneintooneoftwoalternatingnotemaps,setNoteMapto1of2;nowthezoneplays oneverysecondkey,startingonC,butwontplayonanyotherkeys.Setanotherzoneto2of2, andthiszonewillplayoneverysecondkey,startingonC#,thuscoveringtheremainingkeys. Threeandfourzonealternatingnotemapsworkthesameway,butcauseeachzonetoplayonly oneverythirdandeveryfourthkey,respectively. Notemapsarealsousedtocreatedrumpatternswiththearpeggiator.SeveraloftheROM setupsusethisfeature.

7-11

Setup Mode The Key/Velocity (KEY-VEL) Page

Velocity Scale (VelScale)

Thisletsyouamplifyordiminishvelocityresponse.Normalresponseis100%.Highervalues makethekeyboardmoresensitive(youdontneedtoplayashardtogethigherMIDIvelocities) whilelowervaluesmakeitlesssensitive(playingharderdoesntchangeMIDIvelocityas much).Youcanalsosetthescaletoanegativenumber,inwhichcasethevelocityresponseis turnedupsidedown:playingharderproducesasoftersoundandviceversa.Thisisusefulfor creatingvelocitybasedcrossfadesbetweenzones.SeethefollowingsectiononVelocityOffset forideasaboutnegativescaling. ThefollowingillustrationshowswhathappenswhenyouchangeVelocityScale.Notethat VelocityScaleistheonlyparameterchangedinthisexample;theotherparametersaresetto theirdefaults(offset=0,curve=linear,min=1,max=127).

127

Velocity Scale: 100%

as you strike the keys harder (increase the velocity) MIDI velocity increases proportionally

MIDI Velocity

Velocity Scale: 200%

MIDI velocity reaches maximum on medium strike velocity

64

Velocity Scale: 50%

MIDI velocity never reaches maximum, even on maximum strike velocity

64 Strike Velocity

127

7-12

Setup Mode The Key/Velocity (KEY-VEL) Page

Velocity Offset
VelOffsetalsochangestheresponse,butinamoredirectway,byaddingorsubtractinga constanttothekeyvelocity.Forexample,ifthisissetto25(assumingascaleof100%),then25is addedtothevelocityofeverykeystroke,usuallymakingthesoundthatmuchlouder.The softestpossiblekeystrokewillhaveavalueof25,whileakeystrokewithvelocityof102will producethesamesoundasanotewithvelocity127(102+25=127).Negativevaluesdiminishthe response:asettingof25meanstheloudestvelocityavailablewillbe102,whileanykeystroke 25orbelowwillproduceavelocityof1(avelocityvalueofzerohasaspecialmeaninginMIDI andcannotbeusedforNoteOns). YoucanthinkofScaleasbeingaproportionalchangetothevelocity,whileOffsetisalinear change.ThemaximumvaluesforOffsetare127.Thefollowingillustrationshowstheeffectsof VelocityOffset.NotethatVelocityOffsetistheonlyparameterchangedinthisexample;the otherparametersaresettotheirdefaults(scale=100%,curve=linear,min=1,max=127). 127

MIDI Velocity

Velocity Offset: +64

low velocity keystrikes produce medium MIDI velocity and greater

64

Velocity Offset: -64

low velocity keystrikes result in MIDI velocity of 1; maximum MIDI velocity reduced

64 Strike Velocity

127

7-13

Setup Mode The Key/Velocity (KEY-VEL) Page

OffsetandScaleworktogether.Ifscalingtakesthevelocityoutoftheballparkforexample, youwanttosetitto300%butthatputsallofyournotesatmaximumvelocityusinga negativeoffset,sayaround60,canmakeitpossibletostillplayatdifferentvolumes,although yourcurvewillstillbealotsteeperthannormal.Ifyouuseanegativescaling,thenyoumust useanoffset:otherwiseallofyourvelocitieswillendupaszeroes(well,onesactually,sincea MIDInoteonwithvelocityzeroissomethingelse).Sotogettrueinversescaling(thatis,minus 100%),youmustsetanoffsetof127togetthefullrangeofvelocities.Settingtheoffsetto127 andthescaleto100%producesaslopelikethis(whichisthesameasthereverselinearcurve): 127

MIDI Velocity

64

64 Strike Velocity

127

NotethatOffsetandScaleaffectonlyMIDIvelocities;thatis,theseparametersdontchange VelocityTrackingintheprogramsthemselves.Therefore,someprograms(suchasorgan sounds,whichoftenhavelowVelTrkvalues)mayrespondonlysubtlytoOffsetandScale,or notatall.

7-14

Setup Mode The Key/Velocity (KEY-VEL) Page

Velocity Curve (VelCurve)

VelCurveletsyoutaperthevelocityresponse.ThedefaultsettingisLinear,whichmeansthat theoutputvelocitychangesdirectlyproportionallytotheplayedvelocity. Expandproducesacurvethatislesssteepthanthelinearcurveatkeystrikevelocitiesbelow64, andsteeperthanthelinearcurveatkeystrikevelocitiesabove64.Inotherwords,whenyoure playingsoftly,youllnoticevelocitydifferenceslessthanwithalinearcurve,whilewhenyoure playinghard,youllnoticevelocitydifferencesmore. Compressproducesavelocitycurvethatistheoppositeoftheexpandedcurvethatis,youll noticevelocitydifferencesmorewhenyoureplayingsoftlythanwhenyoureplayinghard.

127

Velocity Curve: Linear

as you hit the keys harder (increase the velocity) MIDI velocity increases proportionally

MIDI Velocity

Velocity Curve: Compress

MIDI velocity is greater at medium strike velocity than with Linear curve

64

Velocity Curve: Expand

MIDI velocity is less at medium strike velocity than with Linear curve

64 Strike Velocity

127

7-15

Setup Mode The Key/Velocity (KEY-VEL) Page

CrossfadeisdesignedtobeusedintandemwiththeReverseCrossfadecurve,enablingyouto performsmoothcrossfadesbetweendifferentprograms. Bumptapersvelocityresponsetoresembleabellcurve,sothatnotesareloudestwhenyour keystrikevelocityis64.Notesgetsofterasthekeystrikevelocityapproaches0or127. 127 Velocity Curve: Linear

as you hit the keys harder (increase the velocity) MIDI velocity increases proportionally

MIDI Velocity

Velocity Curve: Bump

MIDI velocity is greatest at medium strike velocity

64

Velocity Curve: Crossfade

Below medium strike velocity, MIDI velocity is less than with Linear curve; above medium strike veloci MIDI velocity is greater than with Linear curve

64 Strike Velocity

127

ThenextfourvelocitycurvesareReverseLinear(RvrsLinear),ReverseExpand(RvrsExpand), ReverseCompress(RvrsCompress),andReverseCrossfade(RvrsCrossfade).Thesetaper velocityinreverseofthefivecurveswejustcovered.Forexample,ReverseLinearsresponseis suchthatstrikingakeyharderwillproducealowervolume,strikingitsofterwillproducea highervolume,andsoon.Thisprovidesaconvenientwaytoachievenegativescaling,byletting yousetoneparameterinsteadoftwo.

127

Velocity Curve: Reverse Linear

as you hit the keys harder (increase the velocity) MIDI velocity decreases proportionally

MIDI Velocity

Velocity Curve: Reverse Compress

MIDI velocity is more at medium strike velocity than Reverse Linear curve

64

Velocity Curve: Reverse Expand

MIDI velocity is less at medium strike velocity than Reverse Linear curve

Velocity Curve: Reverse Crossfade

Below medium strike velocity, MIDI velocity is great than with Reverse Linear curve; above medium strik velocity, MIDI velocity is less than with Reverse Lin curve

64 Strike Velocity

127

7-16

Setup Mode The Key/Velocity (KEY-VEL) Page

Low Velocity (LoVel), HighVelocity (HiVel)

LoVelandHiVelsettheminimumandmaximumvelocitylimitsthatthecurrentzonetransmits. Akeystrokeinthecurrentzonewhosevelocityafterithasbeenscaledandoffsetisbelow theminimumdoesnotgenerateaNoteOn.Neitherdoesakeystrokewhosevelocityafter processingisabovethemaximum.Theseparametersareusefulforvelocityswitching havingakeyplaydifferentsoundsdependingonhowhardyoustrikeit. Thevaluescanbeanywherefrom1to127.Aswithotherparameters,zonescanoverlaporbe totallydiscrete,orbeidentical.Usually,LoVelwillhaveasmallervaluethanHiVel,butaswith LoKeyandHiKey,youmayalsocreateagapinvelocityresponse,bysettingnegativerangesfor velocity. 127

MIDI Velocity

Velocity Min: 1, Max: 64

No MIDI Note Ons are transmitted when you strike keys with medium velocity or greater

64

64 Strike Velocity

127

127

MIDI Velocity

Velocity Min: 64, Max: 127

No MIDI Note Ons are transmitted unless you strike keys with velocity of medium or greater

64

64 Strike Velocity

127

7-17

Setup Mode The Pan/Volume (PAN/VOL) Page

The Pan/Volume (PAN/VOL) Page

Bychangingtheparametersonthispage,youcandefinehoweachzonesendsMIDIvolume andpanmessages.

Parameter Entry Volume Exit Volume Entry Pan Exit Pan

Range of Values None, 0-127 None, 0-127 None, 0-127 None, 0-127

Default None None None None

Entry Volume, Exit Volume

EntryVolumeenablesyoutocontroltheinitialMIDIvolumesettingforeachzoneofthecurrent setup.WhenyouselectasetupinSetupmode,MIDIchannelsforzonesthathaveanEntry VolumevalueotherthanNonewillreceivethatvalueasaMIDIvolumecontrolmessage(MIDI Controller07.)Thissetsthestartingvolumelevelforeachzone.SubsequentMIDIvolume controlsignalssenttothesetupsMIDIchannelsaffectthevolumenormally. Whenyouexitthecurrentsetup,eachzonesendsanothervolumecontrolmessage(MIDI Controller07)tosetthevolumesonthePC3KsMIDIchannels,accordingtothevalueoftheExit Volumeparameter(unlessExitVolumeissettoNone.)ThesettingoftheVolumeLock parameterontheMIDImodeCHANNELSpage(seeChapter 10)determineswhetherthis parameterhasanyeffect.

Entry Pan, Exit Pan

YoucansetentryandexitvaluesforPanaswell.Whenyouselectasetup,thePC3Ksendsa MIDIpancontrol(MIDIController10)messageoneachMIDIChannelineachzone;another MIDIpancontrolmessageissentwhenyouexitthesetup.TheEntryandExitvaluesforPanare thesameasthoseforVolume.ThereisalsoaPanLockparameterontheMIDImode CHANNELSpage,whichoverridestheSetupEditorsPansettings. IfyouaretryingtosetthePanandtheprogramdoesntseemtoberesponding,youshould checktheModeparameterontheOUTPUTpageintheProgramEditor.IfitissettoFixed,then thePC3KisignoringtheMIDIPanmessage;settingModeto+MIDIallowsyoutocontrolthe programspanningfromtheSetupEditor. Mostprogramsrespondtopanmessagesonthenextkeystrike.Thismeansthatifyouholda noteandchangethepan,thecurrentnotewillstayatitscurrentpositionuntilyoustrikeit again.However,aPC3KprogramthatusesthePANNERalgorithmwillrespondtorealtime panadjustmentsaswell.

7-18

Setup Mode The BEND Page

The BEND Page

TheparametersontheBENDpagedefinethebendrangesforeachofthethreetypesofpitch bendmessagesthePC3Kcanrespondto.

Parameter Bend Range Up (semitones) Bend Range Up (cents) Bend Range Down (semitones) Bend Range Down (cents) Aux Bend 1 Up Aux Bend 1 Down Aux Bend 2 Range

Range of Values Prog, 0 to 127 semitones Prog, 100 cents Prog, 0 to 127 semitones Prog, 100 cents 0 to 60 semitones 0 to 60 semitones 0 to 60 semitones

Default 2 0 2 0 12 12 2

Bend Range (Semitones) and Bend Range (Cents): Up and Down

BendRangeUp(ST)andBendRangeDown(ST)sendsabendrangemessagetoaninternal programoraMIDIdevice,tellingithowtodefinesubsequentpitchbendmessages.Some programsmaybehavestrangelywhenyouchangetheBendRangevalue,becausetheyuse FUNsorDSPFunctionstoaffectthepitchwheel.Inthatcase,youshouldeithersetthevalueof BendRangetoProg,oredittheprogramitself. NOTE:ThesettingsforBendRangeUpandDownareonlyreflectedinSetupmode.Evenifyouspecify BendRangeUpandDownvaluesforthecontrolsetup(setupassignmentswhicharespecifiedinSetup modeandusedinProgrammode,)bendrangevalueswillnotbereflectedinanymodeexceptSetupmode, andpitchbendmessagesinthecurrentprogram(inProgrammode)willresultinbehaviorasspecifiedfor thePitchBendRangeparametersontheCOMMONpageintheProgramEditor. BendRangeUp(ct)andBendRangeDown(ct)letsyoufinetunethevalueforBendRange (semitones).100centsequalsonesemitone,oronehalfstep;youcansetthisparameter anywherebetween0and100cents. BendRangeUp,inbothsemitonesandcents,affectsallcontrollersthataresettoPitchUp(inthe defaultcontrolsetup,thePWUpparameterontheWHEELpageisassignedtoPitchUp). BendRangeDown,inbothsemitonesandcents,affectsallcontrollersthataresettoPitchDwn (inthedefaultcontrolsetup,thePWDnparameterontheWHEELpageisassignedto PitchDwn).AnyphysicalcontrollerthatusestheControlDestinationlistcanbeassignedto PitchUporPitchDwn.Tokeepthingssimplethough,youwillnormallywanttousePitchUp

7-19

Setup Mode Controllers

andPitchDwn(controllerdestinations130and131)asaPitchWheeldestinations(seePWUp andPWDnonTheWHEELPage on page 733,)anduseMIDI21andMIDI15(controller destinations21and15)forothercontrollers,suchastheSlidersandRibbon(seeAuxBend1Up/ DownandAuxBend2Rangebelow.) KeepinmindthatnotallMIDIdevicesrespondtoBendRangemessages.Withmanyolder MIDIinstruments,youmustsetbendrangesonthedevicesthemselves. ChangingprogramssendsaBendRangemessagewiththecurrentprogramsvalues.Sodoes pressingPanic,whichisaquickwaytoresetyourPC3KorMIDIslavesifyouveuseda controllertomodulatethebendrange.

Aux Bend 1 Up and Aux Bend 1 Down

LikeBendRangeUp/Down,AuxBend1definestherangeforPitchBendmessages,butdoesso forthosephysicalcontrollersassignedtocontrollerdestination21,MIDI21.Therearetwo parametersrelatedtoAuxBend1:anupwardvalue(AuxBend1Up)andadownwardvalue (AuxBend1Dwn).Thismeansthatyoucansetdifferentvaluesforupwardanddownwardpitch shifting.Forexample,youcouldgetthePitchWheeltogiveyoubothvibratoandwhammybar effectsfortheguitarprograminasetup.Inthezonethatcontainstheguitarprogram,set AuxBend1Upto2STandAuxBend1Dwnto12ST,thenassignthePWUpandPWDnparameters ontheWHEELpagetoavalueofMIDI21.NowmovingthePitchWheelupgivesyouawhole toneofupwardbend,whilemovingitdowngivesyouafulloctaveofdownwardbend. Inmostfactorysetups,AuxBend1issetasthedestinationfortheoptionalRibboncontroller (seeTheRIBBONPage on page 740).

Aux Bend 2 Range

ThePC3Kallowsyoutospecifyathirdpitchbendrange;thisiscalledAuxBend2,anditdefines therangeforcontrollerssettocontrollerdestination15,MIDI15.ForAuxBend2,youcanset onlyonerangeforbothupwardanddownwardpitchbending. ANoteAboutContinuousControllersandTheBENDPage: UnlikethePitchWheelandRibboncontroller,othercontinuouscontrollers,suchasaslider,will notautomaticallyreturntotheoriginalcenterpitch.Thiscanmakeithardtoaccuratelyreturn thecontrollertoitscenterpositionbyhand.Inthesecases,itisusefultouseaseparate controllerforbendingonlyupordown.Forexample,tohaveaslideronlybendup,useaslider withanAddvalueof64andaScalevalueof50%,andCurvsettoLinear.Thebottomofthe sliderwillnowbethecenterpitch,andthetopofthesliderwillbethetopofyourbendrange. Tohaveaslideronlybenddown,useasliderwithanAddvalueof127andaScalevalueof 150%,andCurvsettoLinear.Thetopofthesliderwillnowbethecenterpitch,andthebottom ofthesliderwillbethebottomofyourbendrange.Seepage 730formoreonsettingcontinuous controllerparameters.

Controllers
ControllereditingisoneofthestrongestaspectsofthePC3Ksusefulnessasthemaincontroller forasophisticatedMIDIstudio.Inthissection,welltalkabouttwodifferenttypesof controllersastheyapplytothePC3K.Oneisthephysicalcontrollers:thewheels,buttons, pedals,etc.thatyoumovewithyourfingersorfeet.TheotherisMIDIControllers,whichare MIDIcommandssentbythePC3K.Forourpurposes,MIDIControllersincludesthecomplete setofControllersdefinedbytheMIDISpecification,aswellaspitchbend,aftertouch,andafew otherusefulMIDIcommands.Tofendoffconfusion,wellrefertothePC3Ksphysical controllerswithalowercasec,andMIDIControllerswithanuppercaseC.

7-20

Setup Mode Controllers

AnyMIDIControllercanbeusedastheassignmentforanyphysicalcontroller(andformultiple physicalcontrollers,aswell).Orinotherwords,anyphysicalcontrollerliketheModWheelcan beprogrammedtosendanyMIDIcontrolsignal.Inaddition,eachcontrollerineachsetupzone canbetweakedjustlikekeyboardvelocity(oranyotherSetupmodeparameter).Although controllereditingonthePC3Kcanbesomewhatcomplex,itcanalsobeveryrewarding. TogetanideaoftheexpressivecapabilitiesofSetupmode,explorethefactorysetupsthatcome withthePC3K. ThePC3Ksphysicalcontrollersincludethefollowing: Theninesliders(A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,I)intheAssignableControllerssection ThetwoContinuousControlPedaljacks(CCPedal1andCCPedal2) TheoptionalRibbonController,whichyoucandefineasaoneorthreesectioncontroller ThePitchWheel TheModulationWheel(ModWheel) Keyboardaftertouch,orMonoPressure(MPress) TheoptionalBreathController(whichisconnectedtoContinuousControllerPedal2) ThetwoPanelSwitchesabovethePitchandModWheelsandProgramButtons18 ThethreeFootswitchpedaljacks(1,2,and3)

Thefollowingtablesprovideanoverviewofthephysicalcontrollersandtheirparameters.

Continuous Controllers
SeeContinuousControllerParameters on page 730forinformationoneachparameter.

Physical Controller

Setup Editor Page

Parameter:Values
Destination: Control Destination List Scale: -300% to 300% Add: -128 to 127 Curve: Linear, Compress. Expand Entry Value: None, 0 to 127 Exit Value: None, 0 to 127

Sliders A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I

SLID, SLID2

CPedals 1 & 2 / Breath Ribbon Pitch Wheel and Mod Wheel MPressure

CPEDAL RIBBON WHEEL PRESS

(same as Sliders) (same as Sliders) (same as Sliders) (same as Sliders)

Table 7-3

Continuous Controllers

7-21

Setup Mode Controllers

Switch Controllers
SeeSwitchControllerParameters on page 731forinformationoneachparameter.

Physical Controller

Setup Editor Page

Parameter:Values
SwType: Toggle, Momentary, Note Toggle, Note Momentary

Footswitches 1, 2, and 3

FT SW1, FT SW2, FT SW3

Destination: Control Destination List On Value: None, 0 to 127 Off Value: None, 0 to 127 Entry Value: None, Off, On Exit Value: None, Off, On

Arp and SW switches

ARP SW, SWITCH SWPRG1, SWPRG2, SWPRG3, SWPRG4, SWPRG5, SWPRG6, SWPRG7, SWPRG8

(same as Footswitches) (same as Footswitches)

Programmable switches 1 to 8

Table 7-4

Switch Controllers

The Controller Destination List

ThetablebelowcontainstheavailablevaluesfortheDestinationparameterforeachcontroller, inscrollingorder.NotethatthePC3KhasdestinationswithControllerNumbersgreaterthan 127thereare128MIDIControllers,asdictatedbytheMIDIspec.Anydatasenttodestinations withaControllernumberoutsideoftheMIDIrange(i.e.,morethan127)aresentasaPC3K specificprotocol,andarethusnotsentasMIDIdata,andnotsentthroughMIDIOut.

Controller Number
0

Corresponding Destination Name

OFF/Bank

Description
By default, when you enter 0 or Clear for the Destination parameter, the destination will be assigned to OFF. To select Bank as the destination, use the Alpha Wheel or -/+ buttons. Default assignment for Mod Wheel Default assignment for Breath Controller Default assignment for CC Pedal 2 Monophonic PC3K programs respond to this Controller if portamento is turned on

1 2 3 4 5

MWheel Breath MIDI 03 Foot PortTim

Table 7-5

Controller Destination List

7-22

Setup Mode Controllers

Controller Number
6 7 8 9 10

Corresponding Destination Name

Data Volume Balance MIDI 09 Pan

Description
Almost all PC3K programs have this Controller assigned to filter frequency or brightness MIDI Volume MIDI Balance MIDI Panprograms which use the PANNER algorithm will respond to real-time pan adjustments; all other programs will respond on the next note start MIDI ExpressionDefault assignment for CC Pedal 1. An attenuator for fading in and out. It scales between minimum (0) and the current value of Volume Default assignment for Slider B Controls pitchbend for AuxBend2. (see The BEND Page on page 7-19)

11

Express

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2228 29 30, 31 32 3363 64 65 66

MIDI 12 MIDI 13 MIDI 14 MIDI 15 Ctl A Ctl B Ctl C Ctl D MIDI 20 MIDI 21 MIDI 2228 MIDI 29 MIDI 30, 31 Bank 3363 Sustain MIDI 65 Sostenut Default destination for Footswitch 2holds notes that are currently down, but not notes played subsequently (see Sostenuto Pedal (SosPdl) on page 6-25) Default destination for Footswitch 3 lowers the volume by a preset amount and may soften the timbre as well (see The Footswitch Pages (FT SW1, FT SW2, FT SW3) on page 7-37) Forces mono playback Envelopes freeze at current state MIDI Controllers 7083 MIDI Controllers 3363 Default destination for Footswitch 1 Default destination for Ribbon, controls pitchbend for AuxBend1. (see The BEND Page on page 7-19) Default destinations for Sliders C to I Default destination for SW button MIDI Controllers 30, 31

67

Soft

68 69 7083

Legato Freeze MIDI 7083

Table 7-5

Controller Destination List (Continued)

7-23

Setup Mode Controllers

Controller Number
84 8590 91 92 93 94-95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102-108 109 110-119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138

Corresponding Destination Name

Portamen MIDI 8590 GM Reverb MIDI 92 GM Chorus MIDI 94-95 Data Inc Data Dec NRegParL NRegParM RegParL RegParM MIDI 102-108 MIDI 109 MIDI 110-119 Sound Off RstCtls Local Notes Off Poly Omni Mono On Mono Off Pitch PitchRev PitchUp PitchDwn Pressure Tempo KeyNum KeyVel ProgInc ProgDec ProgGoto

Description
Portamento control, best with mono voices, value is relative to key range, makes pitch momentarily slide to a note MIDI Controllers 8590 With PC3K in General MIDI mode, controls Reverb send level With PC3K in General MIDI mode, controls Chorus send level MIDI Controllers 9495 Equivalent to pressing the plus button Equivalent to pressing the minus button Non-Registered Parameter Least Significant Byte Non-Registered Parameter Most Significant Byte Registered Parameter Least Significant Byte Registered Parameter Most Significant Byte MIDI Controllers 102108 Sets arpeggiator velocity when ARPEGGIATOR velocity is set to MIDI 109 mode MIDI Controllers 110119 Stops all sound in the corresponding channel Reset Controllers to defaults in the corresponding channel Sends Note Off Message to all playing notes in the corresponding channel

Pitchvalues above and below 64 bend the pitch up and down, respectively Pitchvalues above and below 64 bend the pitch down and up, respectively Pitchvalues above 0 bend the pitch up Pitchvalues above 0 bend the pitch down Pressure Tempo Triggers playback of notes by Key Numbere.g., C4 is 60 Key Velocity Program Incrementincrements current program number Program Decrementdecrements current program number Go to Programselects program

Table 7-5

Controller Destination List (Continued)

7-24

Setup Mode Controllers

Controller Number
139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150

Corresponding Destination Name

SetupInc SetupDec SetpGoto Start Stop Continue TransUp TransDown ArpOn ArpOff MuteZn ArpOrder

Description
Setup Incrementincrements current setup number Setup Decrementincrements current setup number Go to Setupselects setup Sequencer function Sequencer function Sequencer function Transpose Up (ST) Transpose Down (ST) Any value turns Arpeggiator On. (See The ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-43) Any Value turns Arpeggiator Off. (See The ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-43) Mute Zone values above 64 will mute the zone, values below or equal to 64 will unmute the zone. Arpeggiator Order, each range of values selects one of nine options in order on parameters list: 0-14, 15-28, 29-42, 43-56, 57-70, 71-84, 85-98, 99-112, 113-127. (See The ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-43) Arpeggiator Beats, each range of values selects one of seven options in order on parameters list: 0-18, 19-36, 37-54, 55-72, 73-90, 91-108, 109-127. (See The ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-43) The 88 Arpeggiator Shift steps are scaled over the 128 MIDI controller values, so that 0 = 0 steps and 127 = 88 steps. (See The ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-43) The 60 Arpeggiator Shift Limit steps are scaled over the 128 MIDI controller values, so that 0 = 0 steps and 127 = 60 steps. (See The ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-43) Arpeggiator Shift Limit Option, each range of values selects one of seven options in order on parameters list: 0-18, 19-36, 37-54, 55-72, 73-90, 91-108, 109-127. (See The ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-43) Arpeggiator Velocity, each range of values selects one of twenty-three options in order on parameters list: 0-5, 6-10, 11-15...101-105, 106-110, 111-127. (See The ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-43) The Arpeggiator Duration % values are scaled over the 128 MIDI controller values, so that 0 = 1% and 127 = 100%. (See The ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-43) For Arpeggiator Latch Pedals mode, 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. (See The ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-43) For Arpeggiator Latch Pedals mode, 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. (See The ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-43)

151

ArpBeats

152

ArpShift

153

ArpLimit

154

ArpLmtOp

155

ArpVel

156

ArpDur

157 158

Latch Latch2

Table 7-5

Controller Destination List (Continued)

7-25

Setup Mode Controllers

Controller Number
159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169

Corresponding Destination Name

ArpGliss SusLatch Panic SoloZn RiffOn RiffOff RiffDur RiffVel RiffDly TapTempo KB3Mutes

Description
Arpeggiator Gliss, 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. (See The ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-43) For Arpeggiator Latch Pedals mode, 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. (See The ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-43) Panic Solo Zone Riff On (See Riffs on page 7-58) Riff Off (See Riffs on page 7-58) Riff Duration (See Riffs on page 7-58) Riff Velocity (See Riffs on page 7-58) Riff Delay (See Riffs on page 7-58) Tap Tempo (See TEMPO on page 11-10) KB3 Mutesin Setup Mode, values of 63 and below disable the mute buttons for KB3 programs in that setup, and a values above 64 enable them Sets ARPEGGIATOR values for Shift to negative. 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-43) Selects one of the 128 patterns in the current ARPEGGIATOR ShiftPatt Bank. (See The ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-43) Each increment of 7 (0-6, 7-13...112-127) selects one of the 17 ARPEGGIATOR ShiftPatt Banks. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-43) Selects one of the 128 patterns in the current ARPEGGIATOR VelPatt Bank. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-43) Each range of seven values (0-6, 7-13...112-127) selects one of the 17 ARPEGGIATOR VelPatt Banks. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-43) Sets arpeggiator velocity when ARPEGGIATOR velocity is set to Fixed. (SeeThe ARPEGGIATOR Page on page 7-43) Shift Key Number (see below) Shift Key (see below) Same as 176 ShKeyNum, but the Shift Patterns velocity will be modified by the current velocity pattern of the zone.

170 171

-Arp Shift ShiftPatt

172

ShiftPBank

173

VelPatt

174

VelPBank

175 176 177 178

VelFixed ShKeyNum ShiftKey ShKeyNuV

Table 7-5

Controller Destination List (Continued)

7-26

Setup Mode Controllers

Shift Key Number, Shift Key (ShKeyNum, ShiftKey)

Thesecontrollerdestinationsallowyoutoplaymusicalscalesandsinglenotepatternsonany programmablecontinuouscontrollerinasetup,withouttheneedofplayingthephysicalkeysof thekeyboard.Thesefeaturesareespeciallyusefulforplayingfastarpeggiations.These destinationsonlyworkwhencombinedwithotherdestinationsandfeatures,sobesuretoread thiswholesectiontogainacompleteunderstanding. UsingaKurzweilRibbonasacontrollergivesyouthemostoptions,butthesedestinationscan alsobecontrolledbyanyslider,pedal,keypressure,etc.UsingtheKurzweilRibbonprovides moreaccuratecontrolsinceithasalongerphysicalrangethanothercontrollers.Also,ifyouset itinAbsolutemode,youcanjumpfromonenotetoanyothernoteinthepatterninanyoctave. Withaslideryouhavetogothroughalltheintermediatenotesofthepattern.Awayofpartially doingthiswithslidersistoassigntheShiftKeyNumbercontrollertoseveralsliderswith differentranges.(SeeTheRibbonConfiguration(RIBCFG)Page on page 741fordetailsonRibbon options,andScaleandAdd on page 730fordetailsonchangingcontrollerranges.) ShiftKeyNumber(ShKeyNum,controllerdestination176)worksinasimilarwaytoKey Number(KeyNum,controllerdestination134).Bothcontrollersbasicallygeneratea monophonicstreamofnotes.ThedifferenceisthatKeyNumberplaysthroughallnotes chromatically,whileShiftKeyNumberonlyplaysnotesrelativetoaShiftPattern. Forexample,whencontrollingShiftKeyNumberfromaslider,notesaretriggeredfromaShift Patterninforwardsorderasyoumovethesliderup,andbackwardsorderasyoumovethe sliderdown.IfinourzonewehaveselectedtheShiftPattern2:minor,thenotesbeingplayedby thesliderwillbeonlytheroot,theminorthirdandfifthinthechosenkey,triggeringnotesin anyoctaveupanddownthekeyboard.(SeeShiftKeybelowfordetailsonselectingtherootnoteand octave.) Selecting The Desired Notes: YoumustselectaShiftPatternforthedesiredzoneinorderforShiftKeyNumbertohavean effect.ToselectaShiftPatternforthecurrentzoneinasetup,enterthesetupeditorandgotothe ARPEGGIATORpage.SelectaShiftPatternfromtheShiftPattfield.Ifusingmultiplezones,a differentpatterncanbeselectedforeach.TheShiftPattfieldisusuallyusedwiththe arpeggiator,butcanalsobeusedincombinationwiththecontrollerdestinationsShiftKeyNote, ShiftKey,andKeyVelocity.ThesedestinationscanuseazonesShiftPatternwhetherthe arpeggiatorisonoroffwithoutconflict.FormoreinformationonShiftPatternssuchasediting andsaving,seeShiftPattern(ShiftPatt) on page 748.(NotethattheShiftPattUporDownoptions,as wellasanyofthearpeggiatorparametersotherthanShiftPattdonothaveaneffectonShiftKeyNumber.) Youcanalsosetcontrollerstodestination171(ShiftPatt)toselectapatternfromthecurrent bankof128shiftpatterns,anddestination172(ShiftPBank)toselectabankfrombanksof128 shiftpatternseach. Selecting The Desired Velocity: InordertohaveanotesoundwhenusingShiftKeyNumber,youfirstneedtosendaKey Velocitymessage(KeyVel,controllerdestination135)withanonzerovelocity.Youmustseta controllertothisdestination,itsusefultosetasliderorothercontinuouscontrollerinorderto controlvelocitywhileplaying.ThenextnotestobetriggeredbyShiftKeyNumberwillbe playedwiththelastreceivedKeyVelvelocity.Onenotetriggeredbythesecontrollerssounds untilanothernoteistriggeredoruntilaKeyVelmessagewithvelocity0issent.

7-27

Setup Mode Controllers

Selecting The Desired Key (Root Note): ShiftKey(ShiftKey,controllerdestination177)allowstheusertoselectthekey(rootnote)of theShiftPatterntriggeredbyShiftKeyNumber.AShiftPatternisarelativepatternbasedona rootnote.AllnotestriggeredbyaShiftPatternareshiftedfromtherootnotebythevalueof eachpatternstep(inhalfsteps.) Shift Key Settings Value
0-9 10-19 20-29 30-39 40-49 50-59 60-68 69-78 79-88 89-98 99-108 109-118 119-127 C C# D D# E F F# G G# A A# B Last Note Played

Key (root note)

WhenusingaShiftPatternwithShiftKeyNumberyoucanselectthekeywithoneormore controllerssettotheShiftKeydestination.Youcanuseacontinuouscontrollersuchasaslider tocyclethroughkeys,orswitchessettopredeterminedkeys.Forexample,ifyouareplayinga songthatmovesbetween2or3keys,acoupleofswitchescouldbeprogrammedinorderto sendtheappropriateShiftKeymessageforeachkeychange.Thatwayallthenotesyouare triggeringwithaShiftKeyNumbercontrollerwillbeintheappropriatescale.Youcouldalso createasetupforasongwithmultiplezones,eachwithitsownpresetkeyandappropriate shiftpattern.Thatway,foreachchordchangeyoucouldmoveadifferentcontrollerthatwould createthecorrectharmony. AnotherwaytochooseakeyistosetShiftKeytoLastNotePlayedmode,inwhichthelastnote playedinthezonewillsetthekey.Forexample,youcouldsetthezonebeingusedforShiftKey NumbertohaveaKeyRangethatcoversonlyafewofthekeyboardslowestoctaves.This wouldallowyoutoplayrootnotebasslinesthatchangethekeythatShiftKeyNumberplaysin, leavingtheupperoctavesofthekeyboardopenforusebyotherzones. IfShiftKeyissettoLastNotePlayedandnonoteisplayed,thedefaultkeyisC.Eachzonecan haveadifferentShiftKey,soyoucanhavezonespreprogrammedwiththekeysyouwantto use,orhavethemallinthesamekey,orjustchangethekeyinrealtimewhileyouareplaying.

7-28

Setup Mode Controllers

A Note About Octave Range: WhenusingShiftKeyNumber,shiftpatternswithmorethan12stepsbegintriggeringnotesin higheroctaves.Thisisdonebecauselongershiftpatternsuseupmoreofacontrollersrange, andlimitthenumberofoctavesthatasinglecontrollercantrigger.Sincethelowestoctaveofa programisoftentoolowtobemusicallyuseful,thePC3Kwillautomaticallystarttriggering notesfromlongershiftpatternsinhigheroctaves.Thissavesroominthecontrollersrangeof valuesfortriggeringmoreusefuloctaves.SeethetablebelowforShiftPatternsteprangesand theircorrespondingstartingoctave. Default Octave Shifting Total # of Shift Pattern Steps
1-12 13-24 25-36 37-48

Starting Octave
C0-C1 C1-C2 C2-C3 C3-C4

Selecting The Desired Octave Range: Youadjustthestartingoctavemanually,usingtheAddparameteronthecorresponding controllerssetuppage.IntheAddfield,theadditionorsubtractionofthenumberofstepsin yourcurrentshiftpatternwillraiseorlowerthestartingoctaveinrelationshiptothedefault startingoctave.Forexample,inashiftpatternwith3steps,anAddvalueof9wouldcausea controllervalueof0tomakeShiftKeyNumbertriggernotesinoctaveC3C4,3octavesabove thedefaultC0C1.Addvaluesthatarenotmultiplesofthenumberofcurrentshiftpatternsteps willchangewhichstepthepatternbeginsonatcontrollervalue0,thusoffsettingthe relationshipbetweenallofthecontrollersvaluesandcurrentshiftpatternssteps. Adjusting Controller Range: WhenusingShiftKeyNumber,thenumberofstepsintheShiftPatternalsoaffectstherangeof valuesthatwillcauseacontrollertotriggerashiftpatternstep,andinturnaffecttheuseful rangeofthephysicalcontroller.Withashiftpatternof12notes,the128differentnotesthatthe PC3Kcantriggerareevenlyspacedovertherangeofthecontroller.Patternswithlessthan12 stepswilltriggernotesineveryoctaveoverashorterrangeofthecontroller.Forexample,ina shiftpatternwith3steps,bydefaultthecontrollervalues0to2willtriggernotesstartinginthe lowestpossibleoctave,andcontrollervalues27to30willtriggernotesinthehighestpossible fulloctave.Usingasliderforthiscontroller,onlyabout1/4thofthelengthofthesliderwouldbe triggeringnotes.Thisdecreasedusefulrangemakesthecontrollerhardertouseaccurately.To remedythis,youcanadjustacontrollersbehaviorbyusingtheScaleparameteronthe correspondingcontrollerssetuppage(seeScalebelow.)AdjusttheScalevaluetostretchthe usefulvaluesofthecontrolleracrossitswholephysicalrange.Ascalevalueoflessthan100% willbehelpfulforpatternswithfewerthan12steps.Experimentbyadjustingthescalevalue untilthehighestdesirednoteistriggeredatthetopofthecontrollersphysicalrange.SeeScale intheContinuousControllerParameterssectionofthischapterformoredetailsontheScale parameter.Forshiftpatternswithmorethan12steps,youwillrunoutofcontrollervalues beforeyourshiftpatterntriggersineveryoctave.Ifyouwanttobeabletoaccessallofthe availableoctaves,youcanachievethisbysettingmultiplecontrollerstoShiftKeyNumber. Next,usetheScaleandAddparametersforeachcontroller,adjustingeachtotriggerthedesired rangeofoctaves(seeAddbelow.)

7-29

Setup Mode Controllers

Continuous Controller Parameters

Thecontinuous(physical)controllersarethosethathavearangeofvalues:thetwowheels,the optionalribboncontroller,theninesliders,thetwoContinuousControlpedals,theoptional breathcontroller(thejackofwhichisconnectedtoCCpedal2),andmonopressure(aftertouch). Asthetableonpage 721shows,allofthemusethesameparameters.Eachparametersfunction isdescribedbelow. Dest UsethisparametertoselectadestinationfromtheMIDIControllerDestinationlist(see page 722). Scale Afteryouveselectedacontinuousphysicalcontroller,youcanmodifythecontrollersresponse similarlytothewaysyoucanmodifyvelocityresponse.Refertothegraphsbeginningon page 712forillustrationsofthevelocityscalingparameters. Scaleletsyouamplifyordiminishtheactionofthecontroller.Fullscaleis100%.Highervalues willmakethecontrollermoresensitive,andlowervalueswillmakeitlessso.Settingthescaleto anegativenumbermakesthecontrolleractionworkinreverse.Aswithvelocity,youcanusea controllertocrossfadebetweentwozonesbysettingthescalingforonezonepositiveandthe othernegative.Maximumscalevaluesare+300%and300%. Add Thisaddsorsubtractsaconstanttothecontroller,andatthesametimesetsminimumor maximumvalues(theresnoneedforseparateMaxandMinparameters).IfAddis25,the minimumvalueofthecontrollerwillbe25.Ifitis25(andscaleis100%)thefirstonefifthofthe controllersmovement(25/1271/5)willsendvalueof0,andthemaximumvalueofthe controllerwillbe102(=12725).Aswithvelocity,Scaleisaproportionalchangetothecontroller, whileOffsetisalinearchange.ThevaluesforOffsetrangefrom128to127. Curv Thisletsyoutaperthecontrollerresponse.ThedefaultsettingisLinear,whichmeansthatthe responsefollowsastraightlineasyoumovethecontroller. SettingCurvtoExpandproducesacurvethatislesssteepthanthelinearcurveatkeystrike velocitiesbelow64,andsteeperthanthelinearcurveatkeystrikevelocitiesabove64.Inother words,whenyoureplayingsoftly,youllnoticevelocitydifferenceslessthanwithalinear curve,whilewhenyoureplayinghard,youllnoticevelocitydifferencesmore. SettingCurvtoCompressproducesavelocitycurvethatistheoppositeoftheexpanded curvethatis,youllnoticevelocitydifferencesmorewhenyoureplayingsoftlythanwhen youreplayinghard. Youcanalsocreatereverseversionsofthethreedescribedcurves.First,selectyourdesired curve.ThensettheScaleparameterto100%,andsettheAddparameterto127.Thismakesthe selectedcontrollersendavalueof127whenallthewaydownandavalueof0whenalltheway up. Togetanideaofhowthesecurvesaffectcontrollerresponse,refertotheVelocityCurvecharts, whichbeginonpage 712.

7-30

Setup Mode Controllers

Entry (Ent) and Exit Values Entryvalueallowsyoutospecifyaninitialvalueforacontrollerinasetupthatwillbesent wheneveryouselectthatsetup.Forexample,ifyouwanttomakesurethatallofthemodulation inazoneisturnedoffwhenyouselectasetup,assignaphysicalcontrollertoadestinationof MIDI01(MWheel)andsetEntryValueto0. Entryvaluesignorethecurrentpositionofthephysicalcontrollerwhenthesetupisselected.In fact,ifthephysicalcontrollerisaboveorbelowtheentryvaluewhenthesetupisselected (whichitoftenis),movingthecontrollerwillhavenoeffectuntilitispastitsentryvalue.Inthe modulationexampleabove,movingtheassignedcontrollerwontturnonanymodulationuntil itspushedallthewaydown,andthenupagain. AnentryvalueofNoneisquitedifferentfromavalueof0.Nonemeansthattherewillbeno initialcontrollercommandwhenthesetupisselected,andanysubsequentmovementofthe physicalcontrollerwillbeeffective. ExitValuetellsthePC3Ktosendavalueforthatcontrollerwheneveryouleavethesetup,either byselectinganothersetuporbyselectingadifferentmodealtogether.Itcanbeveryusefulwhen acontrollerisdoingsomethingtothesound,andyoudontwantthateffecttocontinueafteryou leavethesetup.Forexample,ifyouwanttomakesureazonespitchreturnstonormal wheneveryouleaveasetup,youwouldsetExitValueto64foranycontrollerwhoseDestination parameterissettoPitchUp.Again,Nonemeansnocommandissent.

Switch Controller Parameters

Switch(physical)controllershaveonlytwostates:onandoff.ThePC3Kswitchcontrollersare: PanelSwitchesArpandSW FootswitchPedals1,2,and3 ProgrammableSwitches18(ProgramSelectbuttons18)

KeepinmindthefollowingtwothingswhenworkingwiththePC3Ksswitches.First,the buttonsabovetheslidersarededicatedtozonestatusandmuting,aswellassequencermuting, andarenotassignablecontrollers.Second,inProgrammode,theProgramSelectbuttons functionasprogramselectbuttonsifnoneofthemareassignedinthecontrolsetup;ifatleast oneProgrammableSwitchisassignedinthecontrolsetup,thentheassignedProgramSelect buttonsactasassigned,butnoneofthebuttonsfunctionasprogramselectbuttons. Switch Type (Type) Theparametersforswitchcontrollersareslightlydifferentfromthoseforcontinuous controllers.ThefirstparameterisType.ThechoicesavailableareMomentaryinwhicha switchsactionlastsonlyaslongasyouarepushingit,andToggle,inwhichtheswitchsaction lastsuntilyoupressitagain. Momentarymodeisusedforfunctionslikesustainorportamento,whileTogglemodeisused forfunctionssuchasarpeggiatoron/off.Thebuttonsshowwhichmodetheyareinbythe behavioroftheirlights:ifabuttonisinMomentarymode,itslightglowsonlyaslongasyouare holdingit,whileifitisinTogglemode,thelightstaysonuntilyoupressitagain.Bearinmind thatbuttonassignmentsareindependentperzone,andsincetheresjustasinglelightper button,thelightshowsthestateofthebuttononlyforthecurrentzone.Whenyoupressthe button,however,itexecutesitsassignmentsforallzonesthatusethatbutton. On Control (OnControl) OnControldetermineswhatMIDIControllerorothermessagewillbesentwhentheswitchis onthatis,eitherpressedandheldortoggledfromtheoffposition.Thelistofavailable controllersonpage 722isthesameasforthecontinuouscontrollers,andcanbeaccessedthe sameway.

7-31

Setup Mode Controllers

Off Control (OffControl) OffControldetermineswhatMIDIControllerorothermessagewillbesentwhentheswitchis offthatis,eitherunpressedortoggledfromtheonposition.Thelistofavailablecontrollerson page 722isthesameasforthecontinuouscontrollers,andcanbeaccessedthesameway. OnValue OnValuesetsthevalueoftheControllerwhentheswitchison.Inthecaseofconventionally switchedfunctions,suchassustain,theOnValuewillbe127.(Forexample,thedefaultfor Footswitch1isController64SustainwithanOnValueof127.)However,youmightwant touseabuttonorpedalasasoftswitch,inwhichcaseyoumightsetOnControlto7(Volume) andOnValueto50,andOffControlto7andOffValueto127.OnControlandOffControlcanalso bothbesettoOff,sothatturningontheswitchhasnoeffectatallinthiszone.Thiscanbe usefulwhenyouareusingoneswitchformultiplefunctionsindifferentzones. OffValue OffValueisthevalueoftheControllerwhentheswitchisoff.Thedefaultvalueis0.Youmight wanttochangethis,asinthesoftswitchexampleabove:inordertobringthezoneuptofull volumewhenyoureleasethepedal,setOffValueto127. Entry (Ent) and Exit States EntryStatedetermineswhetheraninitialsettingfortheswitchwillbesentwhenthesetupis selected.Therearethreechoices:None(nochange),Off(theOffvalue),andOn(theOnvalue). WithaPanelSwitchbutton,iftheEntryStateisOn,thebuttonwilllightassoonasyouselect thesetup. ExitStatesimilarlydetermineswhetherasettingfortheswitchwillbesentwhenyouleavethe setup,eitherforanothersetuporforProgrammode.Thesamethreechoices(On,Off,and None)areavailable.Thisisveryusefulforturningoffsustainswhenchangingsetups.

7-32

Setup Mode The WHEEL Page

The WHEEL Page

Thetwowheelsaretypicalofwhatisfoundonmanykeyboards.Theleftoneisnormallyused forpitchbendandspringsbacktocenter,whiletherightwheelisnormallyusedasastandard ModWheel.OntheWheelpageintheSetupeditor,thepitchwheelhastwoparametersone forpushingthepitchwheelupandoneforpushingitdownwhereasthemodwheelhasone. TheWHEELpageparametersaredescribedinContinuousControllerParameters on page 730.

Parameter Destination (PWUp) Destination (PWDn) Destination (MWhl) Scale Add Curve Entry Value Exit Value

Range of Values Control Destination List Control Destination List Control Destination List 300% -128 to 127 Linear, Compress, Expand None, 0 to 127 None, 0 to 127

Default PitchUp PitchDwn MWheel 100% 0 Linear None None

7-33

Setup Mode The SLIDER and SLID2 Pages

The SLIDER and SLID2 Pages

YoucanassigneachofthePC3Ksnineprogrammablesliderstoadestinationoneachofthe16 zones.Or,youcanassignanycombinationofsliderstothesamezone,allowingyou tremendousflexibility.Forexample,youcanassignSlidersAandBtomodulatepitchand volumeonZone1,thenassignSliderCtocontrolpanningonZones2,3,and10. TheSLIDERsoftbuttongivesyouaccesstoSlidersAE.PresstheSLID2softbuttontoprogram Sliders FI.TheSLIDERpageparametersaredescribedinContinuousController Parameters on page 730.

Parameter Destination (Slider A) Destination (Slider B) Destination (Slider C) Destination (Slider D) Destination (Slider E) Destination (Slider F) Destination (Slider G) Destination (Slider H) Destination (Slider I) Scale Add Curve Entry Value Exit Value

Range of Values Control Destination List Control Destination List Control Destination List Control Destination List Control Destination List Control Destination List Control Destination List Control Destination List Control Destination List 300% -128 to +127 Linear, Compress, Expand None, 0 to 127 None, 0 to 127

Default Data MIDI 13 MIDI 22 MIDI 23 MIDI 24 MIDI 25 MIDI 26 MIDI 27 MIDI 28 100% 0 Linear None None

7-34

Setup Mode The Continuous Control Pedal (CPEDAL) Page

The Continuous Control Pedal (CPEDAL) Page

Ifyoulookatthebackoftheinstrument,youwillseethattherearetwojacksforpluggingin twoCC(ContinuousControl)pedalsandajacklabeledBreathController.Likethenine programmablesliders,youcanassignthesecontrollersoneachofthe16zones,oryoucan assignanycombinationofthesecontrollerstothesamezone. TheCPEDALpageparametersaredescribedinContinuousControllerParameters on page 730.

Parameter Destination (CPed1) Destination (CPed2) Destination (Breath) Scale Add Curve Entry Value Exit Value

Range of Values Control Destination List Control Destination List Control Destination List 300% -128 to +127 Linear, Compress, Expand None, 0 to 127 None, 0 to 127

Default Express Foot Breath 100% 0 Linear None None

7-35

Setup Mode The Pressure (PRESS) Page

The Pressure (PRESS) Page

ThePC3Kfeaturesmonopressure,commonlycalledaftertouchonotherkeyboards. Awordaboutpressure:KeyRangeinazonedoesnotdefinewhichnoteswillgeneratepressure inthatzone.Ifpressureisenabledinazone,playingwithaftertouchanywhereonthekeyboard willproducedata.Forexample,ifZone1sKeyRangeisC3C5andyouplayC2andpush downonthenote,pressuremessageswillbesentfromZone1.Aswithanyotherphysical controller,however,youcandisablepressureinanyzone,orscaleitoroffsetitdifferentlyinthe variouszones.Itmighthelptothinkofpressureasanextrawheelwheelsoperateinazone regardlessofKeyRange,andsodoespressure. ThePRESSpageparametersaredescribedinContinuousControllerParameters on page 730. Note:MIDIpressuregeneratedonthePC3KkeyboardisfirstaffectedbyanyPressureScale,Offset,and CurvesettingsmadeoneachzonesPRESSUREpage.Theresultingpressurevaluesarethenaffectedby anyPressMapsettingsmadeontheMasterModeIIpage(seepage 116.)Also,MIDIpressuremessages senttotheUSBorMIDIoutportarefirstaffectedasexplainedabove,andthenaffectedbysettingsonthe MIDImodeTransmitpage(seepage 101.)

Parameter Destination Scale Add Curve Entry Value Exit Value

Range of Values Control Destination List 300% -128 to +127 Linear, Compress, Expand None, 0 to 127 None, 0 to 127

Default MPress 100% 0 Linear None None

7-36

Setup Mode The Footswitch Pages (FT SW1, FT SW2, FT SW3)

The Footswitch Pages (FT SW1, FT SW2, FT SW3)

Onthebackoftheinstrument,therearethreejacksforFootswitchpedals. Allthefootswitchesinthedefaultcontrolsetuparesettoaswitchtypethatdoesntgeneratea note,andconsequentlytherangeofvaluesfortheirrespectiveDestinationparametersisthe ControlDestinationlist.TherearethreeFootswitchpages,oneforeachFootswitch. TheFTSWpageparametersaredescribedinSwitchControllerParameters on page 731.

Parameter Type On Control On Value Off Control Off Value Entry State Exit State

Range of Values Momentary, Toggle Control Destination List None, 0 to 127 Control Destination List None, 0 to 127 None, Off, On None, Off, On

Default Momentary Ft Sw1: Sustain Ft Sw2: Sostenut Ft Sw3: Soft 127 Ft Sw1: Sustain Ft Sw2: Sostenut Ft Sw3: Soft 0 None None

7-37

Setup Mode The Arpeggiator Switch (ARP SW) Page

The Arpeggiator Switch (ARP SW) Page

ThePC3KkeyboardofferstwoPanelswitches,locatedabovethepitchandmodwheels.Theleft switchistheArp(shortforarpeggiator)button.Bydefault,theArpswitchfunctionsasthe arpeggiatorswitch,andtogglesonandoffthePC3Karpeggiator,butyoucanassignthisswitch toanyController. SeeTheARPEGGIATORPage on page 743forinformationonhowtoconfigurethePC3Ks arpeggiator. TheARPSWpageparametersaredescribedinSwitchControllerParameters on page 731.

Parameter Type On Control On Value Off Control Off Value Entry Value Exit Value

Range of Values Momentary, Toggled Control Destination List None, 0 to 127 Control Destination List None, 0 to 127 None, Off, On None, Off, On

Default Toggled ArpOn 127 ArpOff 0 None None

7-38

Setup Mode The SWITCH Page

The SWITCH Page

TherightPanelswitchistheSWbutton,locatedabovetheModwheel.Bydefault,thisswitchis assignedtoMIDI29,butyoucanassignthisswitchtoanyMIDIController. TheSWITCHpageparametersaredescribedinSwitchControllerParameters on page 731.

Parameter Type On Control On Value Off Control Off Value Entry Value Exit Value

Range of Values Momentary, Toggled Control Destination List None, 0 to 127 Control Destination List None, 0 to 127 None, Off, On None, Off, On

Default Toggled MIDI29 127 MIDI29 0 None None

7-39

Setup Mode The RIBBON Page

The RIBBON Page

TheRIBBONpageletsyoudefinethecontrollerassignmentforthePC3Ksribboncontroller. TheoptionalRibboncontrollersensesmovementwhenyoupressonitandmoveyourfingerleft orright;thiscreatesnumerouspossibilitiesforcontrollingpitch,volume,panning,crossfades betweenzones,oranyotherusesyoumightimagine. TheoptionalRibboncontrollercanbeusedasasinglelongcontroller,oritcanbedividedinto threeseparatesections,eachwithitsowncontrollerassignments(thisisdoneontheRIBCFG page,seebelow).Thetwosmallarrowsabovethestripindicatetheboundariesofthethree sections.Thelargearrowabovetheribbonpointstothecenteroftheribbon,forwhentheribbon isconfiguredinonesection. NotethattherearethreeassignableparametergroupsontheRIBBONpage.WhentheRibbonis settoactasasinglesectioncontroller,theonlyparametersthataffectitsbehaviorarethoseof Section1(Sect1).WhentheRibbonissettoactasathreesectioncontroller,eachparameter groupaffectsonlyitsrespectiveRibbonsection. Tomodifyotherribbonparameters,gototheTheRibbonConfiguration(RIBCFG)Pagebelow. TheRIBBONpageparametersaredescribedinContinuousControllerParameters on page 730.

Parameter Destination Scale Add Curve Entry Value Exit Value

Range of Values Control Destination List 300% -128 to +127 Linear, Compress, Expand None, 0 to 127 None, 0 to 127

Default MIDI21 100% 0 Linear None None

7-40

Setup Mode The Ribbon Configuration (RIBCFG) Page

The Ribbon Configuration (RIBCFG) Page

OnceyouveselectedadestinationfortheoptionalRibboncontroller,youcanusethe parametersontheRIBCFGpagetodefinehowtheribbonsrespondtofingerpositionand pressure.

Parameter Ribbon Configuration Position Mode Spring Center

Range of Values One Section, Three Sections Relative, Absolute On, Off 0 to 127

Default One Section Relative On 64

Ribbon Configuration
YoucanusetheRibbonasonecontroller,ordivideitupintothreesmallersections,eachwithits owncontrollerassignments.ChooseavalueofOneSectionorThreeSectionsfortheRibbon Configurationparameter.WithThreeSectionschosen,thepagechangessuchthatyoucan adjusttheparametersofeachsection:

Position Mode (PosMode)

WhenyoutouchtheRibbon,thePC3Krespondsinoneoftwoways,dependingonthesettingof thePosModeparameter.RelativemeansthatwhereveryoutouchtheRibbonbecomesthezero pointforwhatevertheRibboniscontrolling;youwontnoticeanychangeinthesounduntil youslideyourfinger.Relativemodetendstobethemostnaturalforperformancejustwiggle yourfingeranywhereontheRibbontogetvibratoinmanyfactoryprogramsandsetups.You getthesameeffectnomatterwhereyoudothewiggling.

7-41

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

AbsolutemeansthatthezeropointfortheRibbonisalwaysatexactlythesamephysical locationontheribbon.BydefaultthisisthecenteroftheRibbon,althoughyoucanusethe Centerparametertoputthezeropointelsewhere.InAbsolutemode,justtouchingtheRibbon affectsthesound(unlessyoutouchitatexactlythezeropoint).Everymovementyoumake alongtheRibbonsendscontrolvaluesbasedonhowfaryouarefromthezeropoint.

Spring
WhenSpringisOn,theControllertowhichyouveassignedtheRibbonspringsbacktoits zeropointautomaticallywhenyouliftyourfingerofftheribbon.Thisisgenerallythebehavior youwant. WhenSpringisOff,theControllertowhichyouveassignedtheRibbonsticksatitscurrent valuewhenyouliftyourfingerofftheRibbon.Whilethiscanbeuseful,youshouldbecareful withit.WhenSpringisOff,iftheRibbonisdoingsomethingwhenyouexitthesetup,itll continuedoingthatwhenyoureturntothesetup.Thiscanbegoodorbad.Ifyouwanttoset SpringtoOffinasetup,butwanttobesureoftheinitialsoundofthesetup,gototheRIBBON pageinthesetup,andforeachRibbonforwhichyouvesetSpringtoOff,settheentryvalue (Ent)parametertoavalueof0(orwhateveryoulike).

Center
ThisdefinesthezeropointfortheRibbon(orforeachsectionontheRibbon)thepointat whichtheControllertowhichtheRibbonisassignedhasnoeffectonthesound.Youcanchoose anypointbetween0and127.Avalueof64putsthezeropointinthephysicalcenterofthe Ribbon.Valuesof0and127placethezeropointatthesectionsextremeleftandextremeright. NotethatsettingtheSpringparametertoOffdisablestheCenterparameterforthatribbon. Thevalueyouchooseforthisparametercanhaveconsiderableeffect.Inmanyfactorysetups, forexample,theRibbonaffectspitch.Inthesesetups,changingthevalueoftheCenter parameterwouldtransposethesetup.

The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

EachzoneinasetuphasitsownArpeggiator.Whenactivated,eachArpeggiatortakesMIDI noteinputfromthePC3Kkeyboard(orviaMIDI)andoutputsarhythmicpatternofMIDI notes.Youcancontrolthespeedandnatureofthepatterninrealtime.EachArpeggiatorcan affectboththePC3KandexternalMIDIinstruments.ThenotesproducedbytheArpeggiatorin agivenzonegotoallofthatzonesdestinations:local,MIDI,orboth.Youcanalsosetonezones arpeggiatortooverridearpeggiatorsonotherzonesusingtheArpeggiatorGlobal(ArpGlobal) parameteronSetupModesCOMMONpage. TheconceptbehindthePC3KsArpeggiatorsisfairlysimple,althoughtheoptionsareextensive. YoumightthinkofeachArpeggiatorasanoteprocessor,generatingcomplexoutputfrom relativelymodestinput.Youcanselectanynumberofnotesfortheinput,andtellthe Arpeggiatortorecognizeandrememberthem.Thisiscalledlatchingthenotes.The Arpeggiatorthenprocessesthembyplayingthemrepeatedly,and/ortransposingthemupand downthekeyboard.Youhavecontroloverseveralprocessingparameters:velocity,order, duration,transposition,orchestration,whetherthenotesareplayedsimultaneously,and whethertheintervalsbetweennotesarefilledchromatically.YoucanalsotelltheArpeggiator howtodealwithnewinformationcomingfromthekeyboardwhentheArpeggiatorisalready processingnotes. Thearpeggiatoralsoincludesstepsequencersfornoteandvelocityshifting,allowingyouto morepreciselycontrolhowyourMIDInoteinputisprocessed.Setthearpeggiatorparameters ontheARPEGGIATORandARPEGGIATOR2pages:

7-42

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

The ARPEGGIATOR Page

Note:InProgramMode,pressingtheArpbuttonwillbringyoutoasimilarArpeggiatorscreenforthe currentprogram.

Parameter Active Beats Play Order

Range of Values On/Off 1/1 (Whole Notes) to 1/384 (96 notes per beat) Played, Upwards, Downwards, UpDown, UpDown Repeat, Random, Shuffle, Walking, Simultaneous 1% to 100% First, Played, Last, Aftertouch, MIDI 109, Fixed, Pattern (1-74 factory patterns, user created patterns,) Human1-4, Chimp1-4, MissNotes1-9 88 Semitones 0-60 Stop, Reset, Unipolar, Bipolar, Float Res, Float Uni, Float Bip Off, (1-69 factory patterns, user created patterns)

Default Off 1/16 (16th Notes) Played

Duration Velocity

100% Played

ShiftAmount ShiftLimit Limit Option ShftPattrn (Shift Pattern)

0 24 Unipolar Off

Active ThefirstparameterontheArpeggiatormenuisActive,whichspecifieswhetherornotthe Arpeggiatorisonforthecurrentzone.Thisparametercanbeswitchedfromthe ARPEGGIATORpage,orforrealtimecontrol,itcanbeswitchedonusingControllernumber 147(ArpOn)andswitchedoffusingControllernumber148(ArpOff );theseControllerscan,of course,beassignedasthedestinationofaPC3Kphysicalcontroller. TurningActiveonaffectszoneswhoseZoneArpegvaluesarealsosettoOn.Bysettingthe ZoneArpegparameter(ontheCH/PRGpage)toOfforOnintheindividualzonesofasetup, youcanchoosewhichzoneswillbecontrolledbytheArpeggiatorwhenitison. Beats TheBeatsparametersetsthenumberofnotesperbeat.Thetempoisbasedonquarternotes. Therefore,ifyousetitto1/4,youwillgetonenoteperbeatoftheclock.At1/16,youwillget 4 notesperbeat,andsoforth.Youcangoallthewayto96notesperbeat(1/384),butatmost tempos,divisionssmallerthan1/64willsoundprettymuchthesame.TofindaBeatsvalue,

7-43

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

multiplythenotesyouwantperbeatby4.Forexample,4notesperbeat(16thnotes)wouldbe 4*4=16,aBeatsvalueof1/16.Threenotesperbeat(8thnotetriplets)wouldbe3*4=12,aBeats valueof1/12.Sixnotesperbeat(16thnotetriplets)wouldbe6*4=24,aBeatsvalueof1/24.Note thatwhenrecordingarpeggiationstoaPC3KMIDItrack,youmustturnonrealtime quantizationandsetittothesameGridvalueinorderfortheselectedBeatsvaluetosync properlywiththetempogrid(seeQuantandGrid on page 1217.) Play Order ThisparameterdeterminestheorderinwhichthePC3Kplaysarpeggiatednotes.Playedcauses themtoplaybackinthechronologicalorderinwhichyouplayedandlatchedthem.Upwards meansthatnotesplayinascendingpitchorder,regardlessoftheirchronologicalorder. Downwardsmeansdescendingpitchorder.UpDowncausesnotestoplayfromlowestpitchto highest,thenfromhighestpitchtolowest,repeatingthecycleuntilyoustopthearpeggiation. Thenotesattheverytopandverybottomonlyplayonce.UpDownRepeatissimilarto UpDown,exceptthatthenotesatthetopandbottomplaytwice(repeat)whentheArpeggiator reversesdirection. Randomplaysthecurrentlylatchednotesincompletelyrandomorder.Shuffleplaysthemat random,butkeepstrackofthenotessothatnonoterepeatsuntilalloftheothershaveplayed. Walkisarandomwalkorder:eachsuccessivenoteiseitherthenextorpreviousnote(in chronologicalorder).Forexample,supposeyouvelatchedfournotesG 4,B 4,D 5,andF 5 inthatorder.ThefirstnotetheArpeggiatorplaysistheG 4.ThesecondnotewillbeeitherB 4 (thenextnotechronologically),orF 5(thepreviousnotechronologicallythatis,thelast latchednote).IfthesecondnoteisB 4,thethirdnotewillbeeitherD 5orG 4.Ifthesecondnote isF 5,thethirdnotewillbeeitherG 4orD 5. SimultaneousmakestheArpeggiatorlatcheachnoteyouplayandrepeatitintimewiththe Tempovalue,sortoflikeadigitaldelaywithnodecay.IfyouplayaCandholditwhileyouplay anEandaG,theArpeggiatorwillplayallthreenotesatthesametimeandatthesametempo. SimultaneousalsoworkswellwithShiftandLimit,allowingyoutoshiftmultiplenotes simultaneously. Duration Durationdetermineshowlongeacharpeggiatednoteplays.100%meansthatanotesustains untilthenextonesoundsverylegato.50%meansthatthenotefillshalfthespacebetween itselfandthenextnote.Thelowestvalueis1%stacattissimo.Thisparameterhasnoeffecton percussionsoundsorothersoundswhosedurationisfixed. Velocity Velocitysetstheattackvelocityoftheplayednotes.WithVelocitysettoFirst,allnotesplayat thevelocityofthefirstplayednote.WithVelocitysettoPlayed,eachnoterepeatswiththesame velocityyouplayeditat.WithVelocitysettoLast,allnotesplayatthevelocityofthemost recentlyplayednote.WithVelocitysettoAftertouch,thevelocitiesarecontrolledbykeyboard pressure:asyouholdandpushdownonanykey,thevelocitiesgethigher,andasyoueaseup theygetlower. WithVelocitysettoMIDI109,MIDIcontroller109continuallysetsthearpeggiatorvelocity.This workswellwhenMIDIcontroller109issettoaknoborexpressionpedal. WithVelocitysettoFixed,allnotesplaywiththesamevelocity.ThedefaultFixedvelocityis 100.LikeMIDI109,Youcancontrolthisvelocityamountinrealtimebyassigningacontroller toVelFixed,controllerdestinationnumberis175.Inputfromanyphysicalcontrollerassignedto sendVelFixed(oranyentryvalueforacontrollerassignedtosendVelFixed)overridesthe programmedvalueoftheVelocityparameter,disablingituntilyouselectadifferentsetup(orin Programmode,untilyouselectadifferentcontrolsetupontheMIDImodeTRANSMITpage).

7-44

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

Patternengagesastepsequencerforarpeggiatorvelocitypatterns,whichshiftsthevelocityof eacharpeggiatednoteaccordingtoasequencedpattern.Thereare74preprogramedvelocity patternsthatyoucanchoosefromtheVelPattfield,someofwhichcreaterhythmsbyusing velocityvaluesof127ornonetoleaverestsinthearpeggiation.Thesequencerusesthe velocityreceivedfromthefirstnoteplayedasthecenterpositiontoshiftvelocitiesupordown from.Ifnootherkeysareplaying,patternswillstartovereachtimeakeyispressed(thereare someexceptionstothiswhenusingARPEGGIATORLatchparametersotherthanKeys,thougha newlytriggeredpatternwillalwaysstartatstep1.)Whentriggeringvelocitypatternsfrommore thanonekeyatatime,eachconsecutivestepofthepatternshiftsthevelocityfromadifferent inputtedkey,theorderofwhichisdecidedbytheorderparameterontheARPEGGIATORpage. Note:Forpatternswithnegativevelocityvalues,ifthevelocityofthefirstplayednoteislowenoughthat apatternstepcouldresultinavelocityofzero,somenotesmayhaveavelocityofzeroandtherefore producenosound. YoucanedittheincludedpatternsbypressingEditwithapatternhighlightedintheVelPatt field(seeeditscreenbelow.)ThetoplineoftheEditVelocityPattpagedisplaysthepatterns nameandtotalnumberofsteps.Thispagealsoshowsthefullnameforapatternwhosename doesnotfitontheARPEGGIATORpage.Eachpatterncanhaveupto48steps,andeachstep canshiftvelocitiesby127steps.Youcaninsertastepwithavalueofnonebyentering127 andthenshiftingdownonemorestep.Astepwiththevaluenonecausesthearpeggiatorto playnothingforthatstep,allowingyoutocreaterhythmicpatternsbyusingnonetoleave spaces.PressingStepremovesthelaststepinthelist,pressingStep+insertsanewvelocitystep attheendofthelist(thepatterneditorremembersthevaluesofremovedstepsuntilyousaveor exit.)Usethecursortomovebetweenpatternsteps,usethealphawheel,alphanumericpad,or plus/minusbuttonstoenterthevelocityshiftamountforeachstep.PressMoretoseeasecond pageforpatternswithmorethan24steps. PressDeletetodeletethepatternfrommemory.PressRenametorenamethepatternandsave. PressingSavegivesyoutheoptiontosavethepatternorrenameandsave.Tocreateanew VelPatt,editanexistingpatternandchooseRenamewhensaving.PressExittoreturntothe ARPEGGIATORpage.Whenexitingtheeditor,itwillautomaticallygiveyoutheoptiontosave thepatternifchangeshavebeenmade.Formoredetailedinstructionsonthesefunctions,see SavingandNaming on page 53.

TheHuman1throughHuman4settingsrandomlychangeplayednotevelocitywithinarangein ordertomakearpeggiationsoundmorehumanlike,witheachnotevaryingslightlyinvelocity. TheHumansettingsusethevelocityreceivedfromthefirstnoteplayedasthecenterofthe randomizationrange.Eachnoteofthearpeggiatorwillrandomlychooseavelocitywithinthe givenrange.(Seethetablebelowforvelocityranges.)

7-45

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

TheChimp1throughChimp4settingsfunctioninasimilarfashiontotheHumansettings(see above.)LiketheHumansettings,theChimpsettingsrandomlychangeplayednotevelocity withinarange,buttheChimpsettingshavelargerrandomizationranges.TheChimpsettings usethevelocityreceivedfromthefirstnoteplayedasthecenteroftherandomizationrange. Eachnoteofthearpeggiatorwillrandomlychooseavelocitywithinthegivenrange.(Seethe tablebelowforvelocityranges.) Note:ForHumanandChimpmodes,ifthevelocityofthefirstplayednoteislowenoughthattheselected randomizationrangecouldresultinavelocityofzero,somenotesmayhaveavelocityofzeroandtherefore producenosound. Velocity Randomization Range
3 6 10 15 25 35 50 64

Velocity Setting
Human1 Human2 Human3 Human4 Chimp1 Chimp2 Chimp3 Chimp4

MissNotes1throughMissNotes9makesthePC3Krandomlymissplayingapercentageof inputtednotes.Seethetablebelowforpercentagesandtheirequivalentsettings.Eachofthese settingsalsorandomlychangessomeoftheinputtedvelocitiesinarangeof5,withthe purposeofsimulatingamorehumanplayedsound. Note:MissedNotesareactuallyoutputasnoteswithavelocityofzero. Velocity Setting

MissNotes1 MissNotes2 MissNotes3 MissNotes4 MissNotes5 MissNotes6 MissNotes7 MissNotes8 MissNotes9

Approximate % of Notes Missed

% 10 % 20 % 30 % 40 % 50 % 60 % 70 % 80 % 90

7-46

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

Shift Amount YoucantelltheArpeggiatortotransposeallofthecurrentlylatchednoteseachtimeitplays throughthem.Shiftdetermineshowmuchtranspositionwilloccurforeachcycleofnotes.For example,ifyouhavelatchedC4andF4,andyouassignaNoteShiftof2,theArpeggiatorwill playC4,F4,D4,G4,E4,A4,andsoonuntilitreachestheLimitvalue.TheShiftvaluescanrange from88to88,with0(thedefault)beingnotransposition. Shift Limit LimitdetermineshowfarupordowntheArpeggiatorshiftsfromtheoriginalnote.The minimumvalueis0,andthemaximumis60.WhentheArpeggiatorreachesthelimit,the ArpeggiatorrespondsaccordingtothesettingfortheLimitOptionparameter. Limit Option ThisparameterdetermineswhattheArpeggiatordoeswhenithasshiftedthecurrentlylatched notesup(ordown)totheshiftlimit.StopcausestheArpeggiatortostopwhenitreachesthe shiftlimit.ResetcausestheArpeggiatortoreturntoitsoriginalpitchandrepeatthelatched cycleofnotes,transposingeachcycleaccordingtothesettingsforNoteShiftandShiftLimit.If thelimitallowsthenotestogooutofMIDIrange(forexample,ifyousetShiftto12,setthelimit to60,andplayC6),thenthoseghostnotesdontsound,buttheytakeuprhythmicspace:the Arpeggiatorwaitsforthecycletoplayitselfoutbeforestartingover. Unipolarmeansthatafterplayinguptotheshiftlimit,theArpeggiatorbeginsshiftingnotesin theoppositedirection,untilitreachestheoriginalpitch,whereitreversesagain.Todetermine thenextnotewhenitreachestheshiftlimit,theArpeggiatorcalculatestheintervalbetweenthe shiftlimitandwhatthenextnotewouldbeiftheshiftlimitwerentthere.Itthenplaysthenote thatisthecalculatedintervallowerthanthelastnotebeforetheshiftlimit.Thesamething happensinreversewhenthearpeggiatednotesgetbackdowntotheoriginalpitch.The followingtablemakesthiseasiertovisualizebyshowingtheresultofarpeggiatingonenote (C4)inUnipolarmode,withNoteShiftsetto3STandvariousvaluesforShiftLimit.

Resulting Arpeggiation (When LimitOption is Unipolar) Shift Limit Up 6 ST (F#4) C4, D#4, F#4, Down D#4, C4 Up D#4, Same notes play in both directions when Shift Limit is a multiple of Note Shift Last upward note before shift limit is F#4, next upward note would be A4, which is 2 ST from shift limit (G4); therefore first downward note is E4 (2 ST below last upward note) A4 is 1 ST from shift limit, therefore first downward note is F4 (1 ST lower than last upward note) All symmetrical again; now A4 is within shift limit Next upward note would be C5, which is 2 ST from shift limit C5 is 1 ST from shift limit Symmetrical again, including C5 Comment

7 ST (G4)

C4, D#4, F#4,

E4, C#4,

D#4,

8 ST (G#4) 9 ST (A4) 10 ST (A#4) 11 ST (B4) 12 ST (C5)

C4, D#4, F#4, C4, D#4, F#4, A4 C4, D#4, F#4, A4, C4, D#4, F#4, A4, C4, D 4, F 4, A4, C5,
# #

F4, D4, F#4, D#4, C4, G4, E4, C#4, G#4, F4, D4, A4, F 4, D 4, C4,
# #

D#4, D#4, D#4, D#4, D#4,

BipolarstartsoutthesamewayasUnipolar,butduringdownwardnoteshifting,itcontinues pasttheoriginalpitchuntilithitstheshiftlimitintheoppositedirection,whereitreversesagain.

7-47

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

FloatResaddsabitofapparentrandomnesstotheprocess.Floatmeansthatwhenthe Arpeggiatorreachestheshiftlimit,itresetsbutnottoitsoriginalpitchaswithplainReset. LikeUnipolarandBipolar,itlooksatthefirstnotethatwouldexceedtheshiftlimit,and calculatestheintervalbetweenthatnoteandtheshiftlimit.Itthenrestartsthecycleoflatched notes,transposingtheentirecyclebytheintervalitjustcalculated,thenshiftingeach subsequentcyclebythevalueofNoteShift,untilitreachestheshiftlimitagain. Heresaverysimpleexample.SupposethattheonlynoteintheArpeggiatorcycleis C4,Note Shiftis 4(athird),andShiftLimitis 7(sonoteswontgetshiftedaboveG4).TheArpeggiator playsC4,thenE4.ThenextnoteshouldbeG#4,butthatsabovetheshiftlimitsothePC3K calculatesthedifferencebetweenthatG#4andtheshiftlimit(G4):onesemitone.Itaddsthat differencetotheoriginalstartingnote(C4)andplaysthatnotenextC#4.Thenextnote(F4)is withintheshiftlimit,butthenextnote(A4)isnt,soitgetstranslatedintoD4andsoon. FloatUniusesthesameconceptandappliesittoUnipolarmode:whentheArpeggiatorreaches theshiftlimit,itcalculatesthedifferencebetweenthenextnoteandthelimit,andtransposesthe nextcycleofnotesdownbythatinterval,thenshiftseachsubsequentcycledownuntilitreaches theoriginalpitch.FloatBipissimilartoFloatUni,butthedownwardshiftlimitisntthe originalpitch,itsthenegativeoftheShiftLimitvalue. TheArpeggiatorcanbealotoffun,evenifyoudontalwaysunderstandexactlywhatitsdoing. Keepinmindthatthestrangerthealgorithmyousetup,themoreunlikelythenoteswillstay closetoonekey,soifyouwanttocreatesomethingthatsgoingtosoundatalldiatonic,keepit simple. Shift Pattern (ShiftPatt) ShiftPattengagesastepsequencerforarpeggiatornotepatterns.Theinputtednotenumberof eachplayedkeyisshiftedaccordingtoasequencedpattern,thusShiftPattern.Thereare69 preprogramedshiftpatternsincludingmanyusefulchords,intervals,andrhythms.Each patterncanhaveupto48steps,andeachstepcanshiftnotesby127halfstepsorplaynothing. StepsareplayedbackattheratesetforBeatsontheARPEGGIATORpage.Keepinmindthat ShiftPatternsareeffectedbyeveryparameterontheARPEGGIATORpage,whichcanbethe causeofunexpectedvariation,orawaytoaddinterestingvariationtoapattern. ShiftPatternsaremosteasilyusedandunderstoodwhentriggeredbyonlyonekeyatatime. OnewaytopreventtriggeringfrommultiplekeysistouseoneoftheLatchtypes1NoteAuto, 1NoteAutoLow,or1NoteAutoHiwhenusingashiftpattern(seeLatch on page 750,below.) Triggeringshiftpatternsfromonekeyallowsthepreprogramedpatternstosoundlikewhat youwouldexpectfromtheirnames.Ifnootherkeysareplaying,patternswillstartovereach timeakeyispressed(therearesomeexceptionstothiswhenusingARPEGGIATORLatchparameters otherthanKeys,thoughanewlytriggeredpatternwillalwaysstartatstep1.)WhentriggeringShift Patternsfrommorethanonekeyatatime,eachconsecutivestepofthepatternshiftsthenote fromadifferentinputtedkey,theorderofwhichisdecidedbytheorderparameteronthe ARPEGGIATORpage.Thismeansthateachkeywillnotbeshiftedbyeverystepofthepattern, causingyoutoonlyhearpartofthepatternfromeachkey,oftenmakingthepattern unrecognizable.ThoughtriggeringaShiftpatternfrommultiplekeyscanbeusedcreatively,it canalsomakeithardtopredictwhattheoutputwillbe. YoucanedittheincludedpatternsbypressingEditwithapatternhighlightedintheShiftPatt field(seeeditscreenbelow.)ThetoplineoftheEditShiftPattpageshowsthefullnamefora patternwhosenamedoesnotfitontheARPEGGIATORpage.Thispagealsodisplaysthe patternstotalnumberofsteps,aswellaspatterndirection.PressingStepremovesthelaststep inthelist,pressingStep+insertsanewnotestepattheendofthelist(thepatterneditor remembersthevaluesofremovedstepsuntilyousaveorexit.)Usethecursortomovebetween patternsteps,usethealphawheel,alphanumericpad,orplus/minusbuttonstoenterthenote shiftamountforeachstep.PressMoretoseeasecondpageforpatternswithmorethan24steps. Youcaninsertastepwithavalueofnonebyentering127andthenshiftingdownonemore

7-48

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

step.Astepwiththevaluenonecausesthearpeggiatortoplaynothingforthatstep,allowing youtocreaterhythmicpatternsbyusingnonetoleavespaces.Whenthearpeggiator determinestherangeofpatternnotesplayedwiththeLimitparameter(seebelow,)stepswitha valueofnonewillbecalculatedasastepvalueof0. Usethechanup/downbuttonstochangethedirectioninwhichpatternstepsareplayed (indicatedbyUp,Down,orFlatontherightofthetopline.)WithpatterndirectionsettoUp, thepatternplaysasexpected,startingatsteponeandmovingupthrougheachsteptowards step48.WithpatterndirectionsettoDown,thepatternstartsatstepone,butthenmovestothe laststepandcontinuestomovebackwardsthroughthestepsdowntowardsstep1. Additionally,patternssettoDownbaseallnotesaftersteponeintheoctavebelowthefirstnote played.Thesesettingsaremostusefulforarpeggiatingchordpatternsupwardsordownwards fromtherootnote.PatternssettoFlatwillnotrepeatinotheroctaveslikethosesettoUpor Down(dependingontheLimitparameter.)PatternssettoFlatplaywithouttransposition,the Limitparameterwillnottransposethepatternbutitcanstillrestrictnoterange.

PressDeletetodeletethepatternfrommemory.PressRenametorenamethepatternandsave. PressingSavegivesyoutheoptiontosavethepatternorrenameandsave.Tocreateanew ShiftPatt,editanexistingpatternandchooseRenamewhensaving.PressExittoreturntothe ARPEGGIATORpage.Whenexitingtheeditor,itwillautomaticallygiveyoutheoptiontosave thepatternifchangeshavebeenmade.Formoredetailedinstructionsonthesefunctions,see SavingandNaming on page 53.

7-49

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

The ARPEGGIATOR 2 Page

Parameter Latch Low Key High Key Glissando SyncTo SyncType Num Beats

Range of Values Keys, Overplay, Arpeg, Add, Auto, Pedals, Autohold, 1NoteAuto C -1 to G9 C -1 to G9 Off, On First Avail., Riff1-16, Main Seq., Arp1-16, FirstRiff.Av., FirstArp.Av., None, DownBeat, AnyBeat, DownBeatWait, AnyBeatWait 1-32

Default Keys C -1 G9 Off First Avail. None 4

Latch LatchdetermineshowtheArpeggiatorrespondstonoteswhentheyaretriggered. KeysmeansthattheArpeggiatorplaysonlywhileyouareholdingoneormorekeysdown(or notetriggerson).Asyouplaydifferentnotes,theygetaddedtotheArpeggiator,andasyou releasenotes,theygettakenout.IfyouplaynotesfasterthantheArpeggiatorscurrenttempo, eachsubsequentnotewillbeaddedtothearpeggiationatthenextdivisionofabeat.Thiscan causealagbetweenthetimeyouplaythenoteandthetimeyouhearitinthearpeggiation. Inthenextthreemodes,theArpeggiatorlatchesnotesonlywhenMIDIController157(Latch) sendsavalueofOn(64orhigher).Aneasywaytoexperimentwiththesemodesistoassignthe ModWheeltosendMIDI157. InOverplaymode,theArpeggiatorlatchesanynotesthatarebeingheldwhenLatchturnson, andcontinuesplayingthem,evenafteryouletthemgo,untilLatchturnsoff.Anynotesthatyou playafterLatchisalreadyondonotgetarpeggiated,eveniftheyreinthearpeggiationrange. Arpegissimilar:anynotesheldwhenLatchgoesonarelatchedandarpeggiated,andkeep goinguntilLatchgoesoff.Anynotesyouplayoutsidethearpeggiationrangeplaynormally. Notesthatyouplayinsidethearpeggiationrangedonotplaynormally;rather,ifyouholdthem on,theybecomepartofthearpeggiation.Theydropoutofthearpeggiationassoonasyou releasethem. LikeOverplayandArpeggiation,AddmeansthatallnotesbeingheldwhenLatchgoesonget latched,andkeepplayinguntilLatchgoesoff(evenifyouvereleasedthenotes).Anynotesyou playafterLatchisalreadyonalsogetlatched.

7-50

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

AutoisindependentofLatch;everynoteyouplayisautomaticallylatched,andtheArpeggiator runsaslongasyouholdatleastonearpeggiatednote.Aslongasyoukeepholdingonatleast onenote(itdoesnthavetobethesamenotethewholetime),everynoteyouplayinthe arpeggiationrangegetslatched. PedalsissortofacombinationofKeys,Add,andOverplaymodes.ItreliesonbothLatch(MIDI 157)andLatch2(MIDI158).Ifneitherlatchcontrollerison,noteswillarpeggiateonlywhileyou areholdingdownkeys(similartoKeysmode).IfyouactivateController158,thekeyscurrently helddownwilllatch,andanyadditionalkeysplayedwhileController158isonwillalsolatch (similartoAddmode).WhenController158isoff,anykeysthatarenotcurrentlyhelddown willberemovedfromthearpeggiation.IfyouactivateController157,keyscurrentlyhelddown willlatch,andanyadditionalkeysplayedwhileController157isonwillplaynormally(similar toOverplaymode).ThismodeiscalledPedalsmodebecauseyoumightwanttoassign Footswitch1toLatch(Controller157)andFootswitch2toLatch2(Controller158)tomakethe pedalsfunctionsimilarlytosustainandsostenutopedals.Additionally,youcouldassignone FootswitchtoSusLatch(Controller160)doingthismakestheFootswitchactasasustainpedal whenArpisoff,andasaLatchpedalwhenArpison. AutoholdissimilartoAuto.Holdingatleastonearpeggiatednoteonandplayingothernotes latchesthosenotes.UnlikeinAutomode,ifyoustopholdingatleastonearpeggiatednoteon, thearpeggiationcontinuesplaying(althoughyoucantlatchanymorenotes).Inthiscase,ifyou strikeanotherkeywithinthesetupsarpeggiationrange,youstartanewarpeggiationsequence. Autoholdisusefulforarpeggiatingchords:whenyouplayachord,itgetslatched,and continuesarpeggiatingafteryoureleasethechord.Whenyouplayanotherchord,theprevious chordgetsunlatched,andthenewonegetslatched.YoucanusethePanicsoftbuttontostop arpeggiationatanytime. 1NoteAutoissimilartoAutohold,exceptonlythelastnoteplayedislatched(evenifpreviously playednotesarestillbeingheld.)1NoteAutoisspecificallydesignedforusewithShiftPatterns (seeabove,)becauseShiftPatternsaredesignedtobeplayedfromonenoteatatime(though youcanuse1NoteAutowithoutaShiftPatternaswell.)Using1NoteAutoforzonesthatusea ShiftPatternensuresthatShiftPatternswillsoundcorrectbyonlyallowingonenoteatatimeto triggerthepattern.YoucanusethePanicsoftbuttontostoparpeggiationatanytime. 1NoteAutoLowand1NoteAutoHiarealsodesignedforusewithShiftPatterns.Theywork similarlyto1NoteAuto,except1NoteAutoLowalwayslatchesthelowestnotewhenholding multiplenotes,and1NoteAutoHialwayslatchesthehighestnotewhenholdingmultiplenotes. YoucanalsousetheselatchtypeswithoutaShiftPatternifdesired. Low Key (LoKey) and High Key (HiKey) TheArpeggiatorprocessesnoteswithintherangeoftheseparameters.Notesoutsidethe specifiedrangeplaynormally,anddonotbecomepartofthearpeggiationsequence.Setthe LoKeyandHiKeyparametersusingthedataentrywheelorbuttons. Glissando WhentheGlissandoparameterisOn,theArpeggiatorchromaticallyfillsbetweenlatchednotes. WhenGlissandoison,theArpeggiatorignorestheNoteShift,ShiftLimit,andLimitOption parameters. Youmustlatchatleasttwonotestogetaresult.WhenGlissandoison,allnotesplayedinthe arpeggiationrangegetlatched,althoughyouwontnecessarilygetmeaningfulresultsfromall latchednotes.Ingeneral,trytogeteachsubsequentnoteyoulatchtobeachangeindirection. Forexample,trylatchingthefollowingsequenceofnotes:C4,C5,G4,G5,C5,C6,G4,G5.The glissandochangesdirectionaroundeachchangeindirectionofthelatchednotes.

7-51

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

SyncTo TheSyncToparameterdetermineswhatanarpeggiatorwillsyncto.Anarpeggiatorcansyncto anotherarpeggiator,ariff,orasongplayingfromSongmode.Youcanchooseaspecific arpeggiatororrifftosynctobysettingSyncTotoArp116orRiff116,andthecurrent arpeggiatorwillalwayssynctothatarpeggiatororriff.Forexample,ifyouhaveanarpeggiator onabasssoundinzone1andanarpeggiatoronaleadsoundinzone2,youmayalwayswant theleadarpeggiationinzone2tosynctothebassarpeggiationinzone1.Inthiscaseyouwould settheSyncToparameterinzone2toArp1. Youmaywanttohavealittlemorefreedomandnotbetiedtothebassarpeggiationinzone1as themaintimekeeper.Maybeyouwanttostartwiththeleadarpeggiationinzone2andhave thebassarpeggiationinzone1startlater.InthiscaseyouwouldsettheSyncToparameterfor zone2toFirstArp.Av.Withthissetting,thearpeggiatorwilllookforthefirstavailable arpeggiatortosyncto.Soifboththebassarpeggiationandtheleadarpeggiationhavethis parametersettoFirstArp.Av.,thearpeggiationthatisstartedfirstwillbethemain timekeeper.Iftheleadarpeggiatorstartsfirst,thebassarpeggiatorwillseethatasthefirst availablearpeggiatortosynctoandwilldoso.Ifthebassarpeggiatorisstartedfirst,thelead arpeggiatorwillseethatasthefirstavailablearpeggiatortosynctoandwilldoso.Thiscanbe veryhandyifyouareusingmultiplearpeggiatorsandwanttodosomeliveimprovisation;you canstartandstopdifferentarpeggiatorsandaslongisthereisonearpeggiatorplaying,any arpeggiatorwithSyncTosettoFirstArp.Av.willsyncbackupwhentriggeredagain. YoucanalsochooseFirstRiff.Av.,whichbehavesthesamewayasFirstArp.Av.,butmakesyour arpeggiatorlookforthefirstavailablerifftosyncto.AsettingofMainSeq.willsyncthe arpeggiatortothesongcurrentlyloadedinSongmode.YoucanselectasonginSongmode, thenplayitfromsetupmodewiththefrontpanelPlay/Pausebutton.(Doingthistemporarily replacestheprogramsinyoursetupszoneswiththeprogramusedforeachchannelinthesong,soits besttomakeasetupthatusesthesameprogramsasyoursongonthesameMIDIchannels.Ifyouplanon syncingriffswithasong,itmaybeeasiertostartbycreatingasetup,thenrecordingthesetupintoa song.SeeRecordingASetupToSongMode on page 769fordetails.)AsettingofFirstAvail.will syncthearpeggiatortothefirstavailablearpeggiator,riff,orsongfromSongmode. Note:IfyouhavemultiplearpeggiatorsorriffsalreadyplayingwhenusingFirstArp.Av.,FirstRiff.Av., orFirstAvail.forthecurrentarpeggiator,thecurrentarpeggiatorwillsynctothearpeggiatororriffof thelowestnumberedzonethathasanarpeggiatororriffplaying. SyncType TheSyncTypeparameterallowsyoutochoosehowyourarpeggiatorwillsynctoother arpeggiators,riffs,orasongplayingfromSongmode. WithSyncTypesettoNone,yourarpeggiatorwillstartplayingassoonasitistriggered.Itwill notsynctoanything.WithSyncTypesettoDownBeat,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingto syncto,thecurrentarpeggiatorwillwaitforthedownbeatofthenextmeasurebeforestarting; so,youcantriggerthearpeggiatortostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncatthe downbeatofthenextmeasure.IfSyncingtoanarpeggiator,seeNumBeats on page 753fordetails onchangingwhenanarpeggiatorsdownbeatwilloccur.WithSyncTypesettoAnyBeat,ifthereis alreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,thearpeggiatorwillwaitonlyuntilthenextbeat. Dependingonwhenyoutriggerthearpeggiator,itwillsyncup,butitmaybeonanupbeatora downbeat. WithSyncTypesettoDownBeatWait,ifthereissomethingplayingtosyncto,thearpeggiator willwaitforthedownbeatofthenextmeasuretostart.ThedifferencefromDownBeatisthatif thereisnothingtosyncto,thearpeggiatorwillnotstart.Thiscanbeusefulifyouwanttostart multiplearpeggiatorssyncedtosomethingelse.Forexample,youcouldhaveabassarpeggiator

7-52

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

settoDownBeatWait,forinstance,andtriggerthearpeggiatorwhilenootherarpeggiatorsare running.Assoonasyoustartsomethingelsetosyncto,thebassarpeggiatorwillstartplayingas well(providedthatitissettosynctosomethingelseorthefirstavailable.)Ifsomethingtosync toisalreadyrunning,DownBeatWaitbehavesjustlikeDownBeat. WithSyncTypesettoAnyBeatWait,ifthereissomethingplayingtosyncto,thearpeggiatorwill waitforthenextbeattostart.ThedifferencefromAnyBeatisthatifthereisnothingtosyncto, thisarpeggiatorwillnotstart.Thiscanbeusefulifyouwanttostartmultiplearpeggiators syncedtosomethingelse.YoucouldhaveabassarpeggiatorsettoAnyBeatWait,forinstance, andtriggerthearpeggiatorwhilenootherarpeggiatorsarerunning.Assoonasyoustart somethingtosyncto,thebassarpeggiatorwillstartplayingaswell(providedthatitissetto synctosomethingelseorthefirstavailable).Ifanotherarpeggiatorisalreadyrunning, AnyBeatWaitbehavesjustlikeAnyBeat. WithSyncTypesettoLoop,ifthereisalreadyarifforsongplayingtosyncto,thecurrent arpeggiatorwillwaitfortheplayingrifforsongtorestartitsloop(ifitislooped)beforestarting (seeLoop on page 762forloopingriffs,andLoop on page 1211forloopingsongs.)Thiswayyou cantriggerthearpeggiatortostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncatthestartofthe playingrifforsongsloop(providedthatitissettosynctoariff,song,orthefirstavailable). WithSyncTypesettoStop,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,thecurrent arpeggiatorwillwaitforwhatisplayingtostopbeforestarting.Thiswayyoucantriggerthe arpeggiatortostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncattherelease(stopping)oftheriff, arpeggiator,orsongthatyouaresyncingto. WithSyncTypesettoStartWait,ifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,thecurrentarpeggiator willwaitforsomethingitcansynctotobeginplayingfirstbeforestarting.Thisissimilarto DownBeatWait,butitwillonlytriggerthearpeggiatorthefirsttimethatwhateveritissyncing tostarts.Thiswayyoucantriggerthearpeggiatortostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsync atthestartoftheriff,arpeggiator,orsongthatyouaresyncingto.Ifyoustopthearpeggiator andtrytostartitagainwhilethethingyouaresyncingtoisalreadyplaying,StartWaitwillnot startthearpeggiator. WithSyncTypesettoLoopWait,ifthereisalreadyarifforsongplayingtosyncto,thecurrent arpeggiatorwillwaitfortheplayingrifforsongtorestartitsloop(ifitislooped)beforestarting (seeLoop on page 762forloopingriffs,andLoop on page 1211forloopingsongs.)Thiswayyou cantriggerthearpeggiatortostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncatthestartofthe playingrifforsongsloop.ThedifferencefromLoopisthatifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto, thearpeggiatorwillnotstart.Iftherifforsongthatyouaresyncingtoisalreadyrunning, LoopWaitbehavesjustlikeLoop. WithSyncTypesettoStopWait,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,thecurrent arpeggiatorwillwaitforwhatisplayingtostopbeforestarting.Thiswayyoucantriggerthe arpeggiatortostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncattherelease(stopping)oftheriff, arpeggiator,orsongthatyouaresyncingto.ThedifferencefromStopisthatifthereisnothing playingtosyncto,thearpeggiatorwillnotstart.Thiscanbeusefulifyouwanttogetyour arpeggiatorreadytosyncbeforeyoustartwhateveryouaresyncingitto.Iftherifforsongthat youaresyncingtoisalreadyrunning,StopWaitbehavesjustlikeStop. Num Beats Thisaffectsthesyncingofotherarpeggiatororriffzonestothecurrentzone,onlyifthoseother zoneshaveaSyncTypesettingofDownbeatorDownbeatWait.Forzonesbeingsyncedtothe currentzonesarpeggiator,thisdetermineshowmanynotesmustbeplayedbythecurrent zonesarpeggiatorbeforeadownbeatoccurs.BydecreasingorincreasingthevalueoftheNum Beatsparameter,youcanmakezoneswithaSyncTypesettingofDownbeatorDownbeatWait behaveasifdownbeatsareoccurringlessormorefrequently.

7-53

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

Real-time Control of Arpeggiator Parameters

Youcanhaverealtimecontroloverseveralarpeggiatorparameters,byassigningphysical controllerstospecialarpeggiatorControllerDestinations.Anyinput(orentryvalue)froma physicalcontrollerassignedtoanarpeggiatorControllerDestinationoverridestheprogrammed valuesfortheparametersofthearpeggiatoronthatcontrollerszone.Theoverrideremainsin effectuntilyouselectadifferentsetup(oradifferentprograminProgrammode.)Remember, eachofthefollowingControllerDestinationsaffectsonlythearpeggiatorforthezonewhich yourcontrollerisassignedto.

Controller Number
147 148 150

Corresponding ARPEGGIATOR Parameter

ArpOn ArpOff ArpOrder

Operation
Any controller value turns the Arpeggiator On. Any controller value turns the Arpeggiator Off. Arpeggiator Order, each range of values selects one of nine options in order of the parameters list: 0-14 (Played,) 15-28 (Upwards, etc.,) 29-42, 43-56, 57-70, 71-84, 85-98, 99-112, 113-127 (Simultaneous.) Arpeggiator Beats, each range of values selects one of seven options in order of the parameters list: 0-18 (Quarter notes,) 19-36 (8th notes, etc.,) 37-54, 55-72, 73-90, 91-108, 109-127(32nd triplets.) The 88 Arpeggiator Shift steps are scaled over the 128 MIDI controller values, so that 0 = 0 steps and 127 = 88 steps. The 60 Arpeggiator Shift Limit steps are scaled over the 128 MIDI controller values, so that 0 = 0 steps and 127 = 60 steps. Arpeggiator Shift Limit Option, each range of values selects one of seven options in order on parameters list: 0-18 (Stop,) 19-36 (Reset, etc.,) 37-54, 55-72, 73-90, 91-108, 109-127 (FloatBip.) Arpeggiator Velocity, each range of values selects one of twenty-three options in order on parameters list: 0-5 First,) 6-10 (Played, etc.,) 11-15...101-105, 106-110, 111-127 (MissNotes9.) The Arpeggiator Duration % values are scaled over the 128 MIDI controller values, so that 0 = 1% and 127 = 100%. For Arpeggiator Latch Pedals mode, 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. For Arpeggiator Latch Pedals mode, 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. Arpeggiator Gliss, 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. For Arpeggiator Latch Pedals mode, 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on. Sets ARPEGGIATOR values for Shift to negative. 0-63 = off, 64-127 = on.

151

ArpBeats

152

ArpShift

153

ArpLimit

154

ArpLmtOp

155

ArpVel

156

ArpDur

157 158 159 160 170

Latch Latch2 ArpGliss SusLatch -Arp Shift

7-54

Setup Mode The ARPEGGIATOR & ARPEGGIATOR 2 (ARP1, ARP2) Pages

Controller Number
171 172

Corresponding ARPEGGIATOR Parameter

ShiftPatt ShiftPBank

Operation
Selects one of the 128 patterns in the ShiftPatt Bank for the ARPEGGIATOR page of a controllers zone. Each increment of 7 (0-6, 7-13...112-127) selects one of the 17 ShiftPatt Banks for the ARPEGGIATOR page of a controllers zone. Selects one of the 128 patterns in the VelPatt Bank for the ARPEGGIATOR page of a controllers zone. Each range of seven values (0-6, 7-13...112-127) selects one of the 17 VelPatt Banks for the ARPEGGIATOR page of a controllers zone. Sets arpeggiator velocity when velocity is set to Fixed for the ARPEGGIATOR page of a controllers zone.

173 174

VelPatt VelPBank

175

VelFixed

7-55

Setup Mode The COMMON Page

The COMMON Page

TheCOMMONpagecontainsparametersthataffecteveryzoneinthecurrentsetup.

Parameter Tempo Clock Source Aux FX Channel KB3 Channel Mutes Arpeggiator Global Arpeggiator Sync

Range of Values 20 to 300 Internal, External 1 to 16 1 to 16 Zone Mutes, KB3 Control Off, Arp 1 to 16 Not in Sync, Sync Mode

Default 120 Internal 1 1 Zone Mutes Off Not in Sync

Tempo
WhenClockSourceissettoInternal,theTempoparametersetsthePC3Ksystemstempo.The TempoparametervaluesareinunitsofBPM(beatsperminute).Youcanalsosetthetempo usingthetaptempofunction.Presstheleftandrightcursorbuttonssimultaneouslytoaccess theTEMPOpage(seeTEMPO on page 1110.)

Clock Source
WiththeClockSourceparameter,youcansetthePC3Kwithinthecurrentsetuptogenerate itsowntempobysettingClockSourcetoInternal,oryoucansetthePC3Ktosyncupwiththe tempofromanotherdeviceassumingthedeviceissendingMIDIclockdatatothePC3Kvia MIDIorUSBbysettingClockSourcetoExternal.WhenClockSourceissettoExternal,the Tempoparameterdisappearsfromthedisplay.

Aux FX Channel
TheAuxFXChanneldeterminestheFXchannelthroughwhichtheauxsendsofallofthezones inthecurrentsetuparesent.Forexample,ifazone2inasetuphasaprogramwith25Basic Delay1/8asanAuxFX,andzone2isassignedtochannel5,thensettingtheAuxFXChannelto 5sendstheprogramsofallofthezonesinthesetupthroughzone2sProgramsAuxFX(i.e., through25BasicDelay1/8).

7-56

Setup Mode The COMMON Page

KB3 Channel
Withthisparameter,youcanspecifytheKB3channelinthecurrentsetup.Notethatifyou assignaKB3programtoazonenotassignedtotheKB3channel,thePC3Kwillnotifyyouon theCH/PRGpage. ForsetupswithKB3andVASTprograms,youcanprogramaswitchtotogglebackandforth betweenhavingtheslidersandmutebuttonsfunctionastheywouldwithKB3programs,and havingtheslidersandmutebuttonsfunctionastheywouldwithVASTprograms.IntheSetup editor,gototheCOMMONpageandsettheMutesparametertoKB3Control.Nowpicka switchsaySW,whichisrightnexttotheArpbutton.GototheSWITCHpage(or correspondingeditorpageforwhateverswitchyouchoose),andsetOnControltoKB3Mutes (enter169,orscrolltotheendoftheControllerList).Dothisforallzonesinthesetup.Nowyou cantogglebackandforthbetweenhavingdrawbarsorhavingslidersworkonthenonKB3 soundsbypressingtheSWswitch. SeeEditingKB3Programs on page 660formoreinformationontheKB3modeandtheKB3 channel.

Mutes
TheMutesparametergivesyoumanualcontroloverthebehaviorofthebuttonsabovethe programmablesliders.Theresreallyonlyonecaseinwhichyoudneedtoworryaboutthis parameter:whenyouhaveasetupthatcontainsbothVASTprogramsandaKB3program,and youwantthebuttonstocontrolKB3features. Bydefault,thePC3KusestheMutebuttons(thebuttonsabovetheslidersonkeyboardmodels) tocontrolthemutingandunmutingofzoneswhichmeansyoudonthaverealtimecontrol overanyKB3features.ChangetheMutesparametertoKB3ControltousetheMutebuttonsas realtimeKB3controllers.Thewhitelabelingabovethebuttonsdescribestheirfunctions.

Arpeggiator Global (ArpGlobal)

WiththeArpGlobalparameter,youcanseteachzonesArpeggiatortoactasiftheyallhavethe sameparametersontheARPEGGIATORpage.InadditiontoOFF,thereareasmanyArpGlobal settingsastherearezonesinthecurrentsetup.Forexample,inasevenzonesetup,youcan selectavalueofOFF,orArp17forArpGlobal.ThenumberoftheArpGlobalsettingindicates whichzonesArpeggiatorisbeingglobalized.Thus,inthissamesevenzonesetup,with ArpGlobalsettoArp4,allsevenzoneswillbehaveasspecifiedbytheARPEGGIATORpage parametersforzone4.

Arpeggiator Sync (ArpSync)

SettingArpSynctoSyncModeallowsyoutoarpeggiateacrosszonesboundaries.Therearetwo importantpointstokeepinmindwhenusingSyncMode: Makesurethatthearpeggiatorkeyrangesofeachzonethatyouwanttosynccoverthe entirekeyboard,ratherthancoveringtherangeofthecurrentzone.Ifthearpeggiator keyrangesdonotcoincide,thenplayingkeysinseparatezoneswillsoundnodifferentfrom havingArpSyncsettoNotinSync.

Forregulararpeggios,makesuretheBeatsparametersettingsontheARPEGGIATORpageof eachzonethatyouwanttosyncarethesame.DifferentBeatsvaluesresultinirregularbut potentiallyveryinterestingarpeggios.

7-57

Setup Mode Riffs

Riffs
RiffsarefullsongsorindividualtracksofasongcreatedinthePC3KsSongmodethatyoucan triggerinsetupmode.StandardMIDIfilesmayalsobeimportedtoSongmodeandthenused asriffsinsetups.Everyzoneinasetupcanhaveitsownriffacompletelyindependent sequence.Youcanuseasetupwithmanyriffstotriggerandstoploopedsequencesofdifferent instrumentparts.Alternatively,asingleriffcanplaymultipleinstrumentparts.Eachriffcould beusedasadifferentsongsectionofabackingtrack. Touseariff,firstgotoSongmodeandnotetheID#ofthesong,sectionofsongandtrackthat youwilluseforyourriff.NextgotoSetupmodeandcreateasetup.OntheCH/PRGpageofthe SetupEditor,choosetheprogramthatyouwanttousefortheriffonthecurrentzone.Program changesthatarerecordedinsongmodewillbeignoredwhenusingthesongasariffinasetup. YoucanalsosetuptheplaybackeventfilterinSongmodetoignoreothertypesofeventsas well.Onceyouhaveselectedyourprogram,pressthemoresoftbuttonuntilyougettothe RIFF1andRIFF2pages.Thefollowingsectionsdescribethecontentsofthesepages. Note:Bydefault,settingazonetotriggerariffwilldisabletheabilitytoplaynotesofthatzones programfromthekeyboard.Toreenablethisability,seeLocal on page 762.

The RIFF1 Page

ThefirstRiffpageappearsasshownbelow,andhasthefollowingparameters:

Parameter Riff Song (Bar) Start (Beat) (Tick) (Bar) Stop Transpose Root Note SrcTrack (Source Track) Re Channel (Beat) (Tick)

Range of Values Off, On Song List (dependent on sequence) 1 to (dependent on time signature) 0 to 959 (dependent on sequence) 1 to (dependent on time signature) 0 to 959 Off, On C -1 to G9 ALL, 1 to 128 Off, On

Default Off 0 None 1 1 0 2 1 0 Off C4 ALL Off

7-58

Setup Mode Riffs

Riff SettingtheRiffparametertoOnwillenabletherifffeatureforthecurrentzoneinsetupmode. SettingthisparametertoOffwilldisabletheriffforthiszone. Song SelectthesongyouwishtouseintheSongparameterbyusingtheAlphaWheel,/+buttons,or thealphanumericpad. Start UsetheStartparametertospecifytheriffstartpoint.ThetimeformatisBar:Beat:Tick.Barcan besettoanybarinthesequence,andBeatcanbesettoanybeatinthatbar(beatrangeis dependentontimesignature.)Tickcanbesetfrom0to959.Sincethereare960possiblestart pointswithinabeat,youcanspecifyyourrifftostartonanycommonbeatsubdivisionmoments (andafewuncommonones).ThefollowingTickvaluescorrespondtothefollowingbeat subdivisionmoments: Beat Subdivision
Quarter note 8th note

Beat Subdivision Moment

1st 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 1st 2nd 0 0 480 0 320 640 0 240 480 720 0 192 384 576 768 0 160 320 480 640 800

Tick Value

8th note triplet

16th note

16th note quintuplet

3rd 4th 5th 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th

16th note triplet (sextuplets)

Table 7-6

Subdivision Values

7-59

Setup Mode Riffs

Stop UsetheStopparametertospecifytheriffstoppoint.LiketheStartparameter,thetimeformat forStopisBar:Beat:Tick.Barcanbesettoanybarinthesequence,andBeatcanbesettoany beatinthatbar(beatrangeisdependentontimesignature.)Tickcanbesetfrom0to959.Refer toTable 76forTickvalues. ThePC3KrestrictstheselectablevaluesfortheStopparametersuchthatthecurrentriffisat leastonebeatlong. Transpose/Root Note WiththeTransposeparametersettoOn,theriffwilltransposetothevaluesetintheRootNote parameter.So,ifyouhaveariffwhoserootnoteisC4,youcansetanewrootnoteinthesetup sothattheriffwillplayinthecorrectrange.Inthisscenario,ifyouwanttotriggeryourrifffrom C1butitwasrecordedatC4,youwouldsetTransposetoOnandRootNotetoC1.Yourriffwill nowplayinthedesiredrangewhentriggeredfromtheC1key,whichnowcorrespondstothe noteC4. SrcTrack (Source Track) TheSrcTrackparameterdeterminesthesourcetrackoftheriff(fromtheriffsoriginalsequence inSongmode.)AlongwiththeStartandStopparameters,SrcTrackallowsyoutouseasingle sequenceasariffformanyzones,andtoselectadifferentsourcetrackandStart/Stopparameter settingforeachzonetoavoidhavingtocreateaspecialsequenceforeachriff. Tocreateasetupwithmultipleriffseachplayingasingleinstrumentpart,setasingletrackfor theSrcTrackparameter,andthattrackofthesequencewillplaywiththeprogramonthecurrent zone.Repeattheprocessonotherzonesusingthesamesongfortheriff,butusingadifferent SrcTrackforeachzone. Tocreateasetupwithasingleriffthatplaysmultipleinstrumentparts,setSrcTracktoALL. EachtrackofthesequencewillplayitstrackthroughthezoneswhichhavecorrespondingMIDI channels(MIDIchannelsaresetforeachzoneonTheChannel/Program(CH/PROG)Pageofthe SetupEditor,seepage 76.) Re Channel UsetheReChannelparameterwhenthecurrentzonesMIDIchannelandthechannelthatthe riffwasrecordedonarenotthesame.WhenReChannelissettoOn,thetrackselectedforthe SrcTrackparameterwillplaythroughtheMIDIchannelofthecurrentzone.Forexample,ifyou wanttouseariffonzone2/MIDIchannel2andtheriffwasrecordedontrack4/MIDIchannel4, youwillneedtoturnReChannelon.IfyouweretodothisandkeepReChannelsettoOff,the riffwouldplayusingtheprogramfromzone4insteadofzone2. WhenReChannelissettoOnandALLisselectedforSrcTrack,allofthetracksofthesequence willplaythroughtheMIDIchannelofthecurrentzone. Note:TracknumbersdonthavetomatchMIDIchannelnumbersinSongmode(thoughtheydo bydefault.)AsongthatusesnondefaultMIDIchannelsforitstrackscancausesomeconfusion whenusingitasariff.Forexample,usingariffonzone1,youcouldsettheriffsSrcTrack parameterto1,andexpecttherifftoplayonzone1(ifitissettoMIDIchannel1.)ButinSong mode,ifthesongyouareusingfortheriffhastrack1settoaMIDIchannelotherthan1,theriff willplayonthezonethathasthattracksmatchingMIDIchannel.Inthiscase,setReChannelto Oninorderfortherifftoplaythroughtheprogramoftheriffszone.

7-60

Setup Mode Riffs

The RIFF2 Page

ThesecondRiffpageappearsasshownbelow,andhasthefollowingparameters:

Parameter Trigger Release CondRel Local Loop BPM Sync Zone Sync Type Release Sync Zone (RelSynZn) Release Sync Type (RelSynTyp) Duration Velocity Offset (HiKey) (LoKey) (HiKey) (LoKey)

Range of Values C -1 to G9 C -1 to G9 C -1 to G9 C -1 to G9 Off, On Off, On Once, Forever Sequence, Setup, External, 20 to 400 First Avail., Riff 1-16, Main Seq, Arp 1-16, FirstRiff.Av., First Arp.Av None, DownBeat, AnyBeat, DownBeatWait, AnyBeatWait, Loop, Stop, StartWait, LoopWait, StopWait First Avail., Riff 1-16, Main Seq, Arp 1-16, FirstRiff.Av., First Arp.Av None, DownBeat, AnyBeat, DownBeatWait, AnyBeatWait, Loop, Stop, StartWait, LoopWait, StopWait 1 to 1000% 0 to 255% -32768 to 32767

Default C -1 G9 C -1 G9 Off Off Forever Sequence First Avail. None First Avail. None 100% 100% 0

Trigger Thereareafewwaystotriggerriffsinsetupmode.OntheRiff2pageyoucanusetheTrigger fieldtosetakeyboardkeytotriggertheRiff.Also,anyphysicalcontrollercanbeassignedto controllerdestination163RiffOn. Tosetthekeyrangetotriggeryourriff,usethecursorbuttonstoselecttheleftvalueinthe Triggerfield(thiswillbethelowendofthetriggerkeyrange.)Nowyoucanselectthekey numberbyscrollingtheAlphaWheel,oryoucanuseintuitiveentrybypressingandholdingthe Enterbuttononthealphanumericpadandpressingthedesiredkeyonyourkeyboard.Youwill seethisvaluechangeasyoupressakey.

7-61

Setup Mode Riffs

Next,moveyourcursortotherighttohighlightthesecondvalueoftheTriggerfield(thiswillbe thehighendofthetriggerkeyrange.)Useoneofthemethodsdescribedabovetoselectakey valueforthistriggerfield.Ifyouwanttohaveonlyonekeystartariff,settheTriggerkeyrange fromA#0toA#0forexample,andyourriffwillbetriggeredtostartonlybypressingtheA#0 key.Ifyouwantyourtriggerkeyrangetobelarger,setyourTriggerkeyrangetobe,for instance,A#0toA#1.Nowanykeythatispressedwithinthisrangewilltriggeryourrifftostart. Note:theLoKeyandHiKeyvaluesontheKEYVELpagedoaffecttheriff.Ifyourriffstriggerandrelease notesarenotwithintheLoKeyandHiKeyrangeontheKEYVELpage,yourriffwillnotbeabletobe triggeredfromthekeyboard. Release Thewayyoureleaseriffsisanalogoustothewayyoutriggerthem.Youcanassignaphysical controllertodestination164RiffOff,oryoucanselectakeyorkeyrangewiththeRelease parameter.Yousetthisthesamewaythatyousetthetriggerrange.Moveyourcursorsothatthe leftfieldoftheReleaseparameterishighlighted(thiswillbethelowendofthetriggerkey range.)NowselectakeyvaluebyusingtheAlphaWheel,/+buttonsorintuitiveentry.Move yourcursortotherightfieldandrepeattheprocess(thiswillbethehighendofthetriggerkey range.)IfyousetbothoftheReleasevaluestoA0,theRiffwillstopwhenyoureleaseA0. So,ifyouusethesettingsdescribedaboveandintheTriggersectionabove,yoursetupsriffwill startwhenyoupressA#0,anditwillstopwhenyoupressandreleaseA0. Note:theLoKeyandHiKeyvaluesontheKEYVELpagedoaffecttheriff.Ifyourriffstriggerandrelease notesarenotwithintheLoKeyandHiKeyrangeontheKEYVELpage,yourriffwillnotbeabletobe triggeredfromthekeyboard. Conditional Release (CondRel) TheCondRelparameterallowsyoutohaveariffplayonlywhileakeyispressedandheld,and nothingwillstoporrestartthatriffuntilthekeyisreleased.Touseconditionalrelease,setthe samerangefortheTriggerandReleaserangesontheRIFF2page.Anykeythatispressedand heldwithinthisrangewillplaytheselectedriff.Releasethekeyandtheriffwillstop.Playing anyotherkeyinthiszonewhiletriggeringariffwithCondReleveniftheyarewithinthe TriggerandReleaserangeswillnotretriggerorstopthezonesriff. Local Ifyouwanttotriggeryourriffwithoutplayingthecurrentzonesprogram,setLocaltoOff. LocalissettoOffbydefaultsincemostuserswontwanttoplaytheprograminthezonethey areusingforariff,butonlywishhearthatzonesprogramasabackingtrack.WithLocalsetto On,youwillplaythecurrentzonesprogramanytimeakeyispressed.Thiscouldcreate undesiredgracenotesifyoutriggerariffthathasadownbeatatthesametimeyouare playinganote. Loop Ifyouwantyourrifftoloopindefinitely,setthisparametertoForever.Ifyouwanttohaveit playonceandthenstopuntilyouretriggerit,setthisparametertoOnce. BPM Therearefourchoicesherethatwilldeterminewhatcontrolsthetempoofyourriff.WithBPM settoSequence,theoriginaltempoinwhichtheriffwasrecordedwillbeused.WithBPMsetto Setup,thetemposetontheCOMMONorTEMPOpageswillbeused.Whensyncingmultiple riffsitisconvenienttoseteachriffsBPMparametertoSetup.Doingthis,youcanchangethe tempoofallriffsatonceontheTEMPOpage(seeTEMPO on page 1110.)AvalueofSetupis alsousefulforsyncingriffstoazonesarpeggiator.WithTempoBPMsettoExternal,theriffwill

7-62

Setup Mode Riffs

synctoexternalMIDIclock.Youcanalsomanuallychooseatempobyselectingavaluefrom20 to400forBPM.UsetheAlphaWheelor/+buttonstochoosebetweentheoptionsorseta tempo.YoucanalsousethealphanumericpadfollowedbypressingtheEnterbuttontoentera tempo. SyncZone TheSyncZoneparameterdetermineswhichzoneariffwillsyncto.Youcanchoosetosynctoa rifforarpeggioinaspecificzonebysettingSyncZonetoRiff116orArp116,andthecurrent riffwillalwayssynctotherifforarpeggiointhesetzone.Forexample,ifyouhaveadrumriff inzone1andabassriffinzone2,youmayalwayswantthebassriffinzone2tosynctothe drumriffinzone1.InthiscaseyouwouldsetthebassriffSyncZonetoRiff1. Youmaywanttohavealittlemorefreedomandnotbetiedtothedrumriffasthemain timekeeper.Maybeyouwanttostartwiththebassriffandhavethedrumriffstartlater.In thiscaseyouwouldsetSyncZonetoFirstRiff.Av.Withthissetting,theriffwilllookforthefirst availablerifftosyncto.Soifboththedrumriffandthebassriffhavethisparametersetto FirstRiff.Av.,theriffthatisstartedfirstwillbethemaster.Ifthebassriffstartsfirst,thedrum riffwillseethatasthefirstavailablerifftosynctoandwilldoso.Ifthedrumriffisstartedfirst, thebassriffwillseethatasthefirstavailablerifftosynctoandwilldoso.Thiscanbevery handyifyouhavemultipleriffsandwanttodosomeliveremixing;youcouldhavethedrums dropout,andaslongisthereisariffplayingtheywillsyncbackupwhentriggeredagain. YoucanalsochooseFirstArp.Av.,whichbehavesthesamewayasFirstRiff.Av.,butmakesyour rifflookforthefirstavailablearpeggiatortosyncto.AsettingofMainSeq.willsynctheriffto thesongcurrentlyloadedinSongmode.YoucanselectasonginSongmode,thenplayitfrom setupmodewiththefrontpanelPlay/Pausebutton.(Doingthistemporarilyreplacestheprograms inyoursetupszoneswiththeprogramusedforeachchannelinthesong,soitsbesttomakeasetupthat usesthesameprogramsasyoursongonthesameMIDIchannels.Ifyouplanonsyncingriffswitha song,itmaybeeasiertostartbycreatingasetup,thenrecordingthesetupintoasong.SeeRecordingA SetupToSongMode on page 769fordetails.)AsettingofFirstAvail.willsynctherifftothefirst availableriff,arpeggiator,orsongfromSongmode. Note:IfyouhavemultipleriffsorarpeggiatorsalreadyplayingwhenusingFirstRiff.Av.,FirstArp.Av., orFirstAvail.forthecurrentriff,thecurrentriffwillsynctotherifforarpeggiatorofthelowest numberedzonethathasarifforarpeggiatorplaying. SyncType TheSyncTypeparameterallowsyoutochoosehowyourriffwillsynctootherriffs, arpeggiators,andSongs(dependingonyoursettingsmadefortheSyncZoneparameter.)With SyncTypesettoNone,yourriffwillstartplayingassoonasitistriggered.Itwillnotsyncto anything.WithSyncTypesettoDownBeat,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,the currentriffwillwaitforthedownbeatofthenextmeasurebeforestarting;so,youcantriggerthe rifftostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncatthedownbeatofthenextmeasure.If Syncingtoanarpeggiator,seeNumBeats on page 753fordetailsonchangingwhenanarpeggiators downbeatwilloccur.WithSyncTypesettoAnyBeat,ifthereisalreadyasomethingplayingto syncto,theriffwillwaitonlyuntilthenextbeat.Dependingonwhenyoutriggertheriff,itwill syncup,butitmaybeonanupbeatoradownbeat. WithSyncTypesettoDownBeatWait,theriffwillwaitforthedownbeatofthenextmeasureto start.ThedifferencefromDownBeatisthatifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,theriffwillnot start.Thiscanbeusefulifyouwanttostartmultipleriffssyncedtooneriff.Youcouldhavea bassriffsettoDownBeatWait,forinstance,andtriggertheriffwhilenootherriffsarerunning. Assoonasyoustartanotherriff,thebassriffwillstartplayingaswell(providedthatitissetto synctoanotherriffortothefirstavailableriff.)Ifanotherriffisalreadyrunning, DownBeatWaitbehavesjustlikeDownBeat.

7-63

Setup Mode Riffs

WithSyncTypesettoAnyBeatWait,theriffwillwaitforthenextbeattostart.Thedifference fromAnyBeatisthatifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,thisriffwillnotstart.Thiscanbe usefulifyouwanttostartmultipleriffssyncedtooneriff.Youcouldhaveabassriffsetto AnyBeatWait,forinstance,andtriggertheriffwhilenootherriffsarerunning.Assoonasyou startanotherriff,thebassriffwillstartplayingaswell(providedthatitissettosynctoanother rifforthefirstavailable).Ifsomethingisalreadyplayingtosyncto,AnyBeatWaitbehavesjust likeAnyBeat. WithSyncTypesettoLoop,ifthereisalreadyarifforsongplayingtosyncto,thecurrentriff willwaitfortheplayingrifforsongtorestartitsloop(ifitislooped)beforestarting(see Loop on page 762forloopingriffs,andLoop on page 1211forloopingsongs.)Thiswayyoucan triggertherifftostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncatthestartoftheplayingriffor songsloop. WithSyncTypesettoStop,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,thecurrentriffwill waitforwhatisplayingtostopbeforestarting.Thiswayyoucantriggertherifftostartaheadof time,andhaveitstartinsyncattherelease(stopping)oftheriff,arpeggiator,orsongthatyou aresyncingto. WithSyncTypesettoStartWait,ifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,thecurrentriffwillwait forsomethingitcansynctotobeginplayingfirstbeforestarting.Thisissimilarto DownBeatWait,butitwillonlytriggertheriffthefirsttimethatwhateveritissyncingtostarts. Thiswayyoucantriggertherifftostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncatthestartofthe riff,arpeggiator,orsongthatyouaresyncingto.Ifyoustoptheriffandtrytostartitagainwhile thethingyouaresyncingtoisalreadyplaying,StartWaitwillnotstarttheriff. WithSyncTypesettoLoopWait,ifthereisalreadyarifforsongplayingtosyncto,thecurrent riffwillwaitfortheplayingrifforsongtorestartitsloop(ifitislooped)beforestarting(see Loop on page 762forloopingriffs,andLoop on page 1211forloopingsongs.)Thiswayyoucan triggertherifftostartaheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncatthestartoftheplayingriffor songsloop.ThedifferencefromLoopisthatifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,theriffwill notstart.Iftherifforsongthatyouaresyncingtoisalreadyrunning,LoopWaitbehavesjust likeLoop. WithSyncTypesettoStopWait,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,thecurrentriff willwaitforwhatisplayingtostopbeforestarting.Thiswayyoucantriggertherifftostart aheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncattherelease(stopping)oftheriff,arpeggiator,orsong thatyouaresyncingto.ThedifferencefromStopisthatifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,the riffwillnotstart.Thiscanbeusefulifyouwanttogetyourriffreadytosyncbeforeyoustart whateveryouaresyncingitto.Iftherifforsongthatyouaresyncingtoisalreadyrunning, StopWaitbehavesjustlikeStop. RelSynZn (Release Sync Zone) RelSynZnhasthesamesettingsavailableasSyncZone(seeSyncZone,above,)butRelSynZn determineswhatthereleasing(stopping)ofthecurrentriffwillbesyncedtowhenaparameter otherthanNoneisselectedforRelSynTyp(seebelow.) RelSynTyp (Release Sync Type) RelSynTyphasthesamesettingsavailableasSyncType(seeSyncType,above,)butRelSynTyp determineshowthereleasing(stopping)ofthecurrentriffwillbesyncedtootherriffs, arpeggiators,andSongs(dependingonyoursettingsmadefortheRelSynZnparameter.)With RelSynTypsettoNone,yourriffwillstopplayingassoonasitisreleased.Itwillnotsyncto anything.WithRelSynTypsettoDownBeat,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,the currentriffwillwaitforthedownbeatofthenextmeasurebeforestoppingwhenreleased;so, youcantriggertherifftostopaheadoftime,andhaveitstopinsyncatthedownbeatofthenext measure.IfSyncingtoanarpeggiator,seeNumBeats on page 753fordetailsonchangingwhenan

7-64

Setup Mode Riffs

arpeggiatorsdownbeatwilloccur.WithRelSynTypsettoAnyBeat,ifthereisalreadyasomething playingtosyncto,theriffwillwaitonlyuntilthenextbeatbeforestoppingwhenreleased. Dependingonwhenyoureleasetheriffitwillstopinsyncwithabeat,butitmaybeonan upbeatoradownbeat. WithRelSynTypsettoDownBeatWait,theriffwillwaitforthedownbeatofthenextmeasureto stopwhenreleased.ThedifferencefromDownBeatisthatifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto, theriffwontstopwhenreleased.Ifanotherriffisalreadyrunning,DownBeatWaitbehavesjust likeDownBeat. WithRelSynTypsettoAnyBeatWait,ifthereisalreadyasomethingplayingtosyncto,theriff willwaitforthenextbeatbeforereleasing.ThedifferencefromAnyBeatisthatifthereis nothingplayingtosyncto,thisriffwillnotstopwhenreleased.Thiscanbeusefulifyouwantto stopariffinsynconlywhenanotherriffisplaying.Ifsomethingisalreadyplayingtosyncto, AnyBeatWaitbehavesjustlikeAnyBeat. WithRelSynTypsettoLoop,ifthereisalreadyarifforsongplayingtosyncto,thecurrentriff willwaitfortheplayingrifforsongtorestartitsloop(ifitislooped)beforestoppingwhen released(seeLoop on page 762forloopingriffs,andLoop on page 1211forloopingsongs.)This wayyoucanreleasetherifftostopaheadoftime,andhaveitstopinsyncatthestartofthe playingrifforsongsloop. WithRelSynTypsettoStop,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,thecurrentriffwill waitforwhatisplayingtostopbeforereleasing.Thiswayyoucantriggerthecurrentriffto releaseaheadoftime,andhaveitstopinsyncattherelease(stopping)oftheriff,arpeggiator,or songthatyouaresyncingto. WithRelSynTypsettoStartWait,ifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,thecurrentriffwillwait forsomethingitcansynctotobeginplayingfirstbeforereleasing.Thisissimilarto DownBeatWait,butitwillonlyreleasetheriffthefirsttimethatwhateveritissyncingtostarts. Thiswayyoucantriggertherifftostopaheadoftime,andhaveitstopinsyncatthestartofthe riff,arpeggiator,orsongthatyouaresyncingto.Ifyourestarttheriffandtrytoreleaseitagain whilethethingyouaresyncingtoisalreadyplaying,StartWaitwillnotstoptheriff. WithRelSynTypsettoLoopWait,ifthereisalreadyarifforsongplayingtosyncto,thecurrent riffwillwaitfortheplayingrifforsongtorestartitsloop(ifitislooped)beforestopping(see Loop on page 762forloopingriffs,andLoop on page 1211forloopingsongs.)Thiswayyoucan triggertherifftostopaheadoftime,andhaveitstopinsyncatthestartoftheplayingriffor songsloop.ThedifferencefromLoopisthatifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,theriffwill notstopwhenreleased.Iftherifforsongthatyouaresyncingtoisalreadyrunning,LoopWait behavesjustlikeLoop. WithRelSynTypsettoStopWait,ifthereisalreadysomethingplayingtosyncto,thecurrentriff willwaitforwhatisplayingtostopbeforereleasing.Thiswayyoucantriggertherifftostop aheadoftime,andhaveitstartinsyncattherelease(stopping)oftheriff,arpeggiator,orsong thatyouaresyncingto.ThedifferencefromStopisthatifthereisnothingplayingtosyncto,the riffwillnotstopwhenreleased.Iftherifforsongthatyouaresyncingtoisalreadyrunning, StopWaitbehavesjustlikeStop. Note:ForallRelSynTypsettingsexceptStop,StartWaitandStopWait,ariffcansyncitsrelease withitsself.Forexample,youcoulduseriff1andsyncittoitsselfbysettingRiff1forthe RelSynZnparameter.Then,ifyousetDownBeatfortheRelSynTypparameter,whenreleased theriffwouldalwayswaituntilitsnextdownbeattostop.

7-65

Setup Mode Riffs

Duration (Dur) DurationchangesthedurationofeachMIDInote.Theoriginaldurationsofthenotesinthe sequencearemultipliedbytheselectedpercentage.100%willcausenochange,valuessmaller than100%willresultinshorterdurations,valueslargerthan100%willresultinlonger durations. Velocity VelocitychangesthevelocityofeachMIDInote.Theoriginalvelocitiesofthenotesinthe sequencearemultipliedbytheselectedpercentage.100%willcausenochange,valuessmaller than100%willresultinlowervelocities,valueslargerthan100%willresultinhighervelocities. Offset YoucanfinetunethestarttimeofyourriffinticksbyusingtheOffsetparameter.Apositive valuewilldelaythestarttime,whileanegativevaluewillspeedupthestarttime.

Real-time Control of Riff Parameters

YoucanhaverealtimecontroloverseveralRiffparameters,byassigningphysicalcontrollersto specialRiffControllerDestinations.Anyinput(orentryvalue)fromaphysicalcontroller assignedtoaRiffControllerDestinationoverridestheprogrammedvaluesfortheparametersof theriffonthatcontrollerszone.Theoverrideremainsineffectuntilyouselectadifferentsetup. Remember,eachofthefollowingControllerDestinationsaffectsonlytheriffforthezonewhich yourcontrollerisassignedto. Controller Number
163 164 165

Corresponding Riff Parameter

RiffOn RiffOff RiffDur

Operation
Riff On. Any value triggers the zones Riff if Riff is set to On on RIFF1 page. Riff Off. Any value stops playback of zones Riff. Riff Duration, sets the Duration parameter (see above.) The Duration value is calculated by multiplying the received controller value by 1000, and dividing the answer by 128 (any decimal points are taken off the final value.) Here are some example values: 7 = 54%, 13 = 101%,19 = 148%, 32 = 250%, 64 = 500%, 127 = 992% Riff Velocity, sets the Velocity parameter (see above.) The Velocity value is calculated by multiplying the received controller value by 2. For Example, 25 = 50%, 50 = 100%, 100 = 200%, 127 = 254%. Riff Delay, Controls Offset parameter (see above.) Controller value 64 = 0 offset ticks. Each value away from 64 = 512 offset ticks. For example, 63 = -512 offset ticks, 65 = +512 offset ticks, 0 = -32768 offset ticks, 127 = +32256 offset ticks.

166

RiffVel

167

RiffDly

7-66

Setup Mode The FX Pages: FX, AUXFX1, AUXFX2, and MASTFX

The FX Pages: FX, AUXFX1, AUXFX2, and MASTFX

ThefourSetupmodeFXpagesFX,AUXFX1,AUXFX2,andMASTFXworkthesamewayas theEffectsmodepagesCHANFX,AUXFX1,AUXFX2,andMASTER.SeeChapter 9,Effectsfor informationoneditingthesepages.YoucanusethenEffect(FXBypass)Modebuttontobypass effectswhileediting.

The Programmable Switch Pages: SWPRG1 to SWPRG8

ThePC3KseightProgrammableSwitchesaretheeightProgramSelectbuttonslocatedabove theprogramCategorybuttons.EachbuttonhasitsownSWPRGpage,buteachpageis essentiallyidentical. TheSWPRGpageparametersaredescribedinSwitchControllerParameters on page 731

Parameter Type On Control On Value Off Control Off Value Entry Value Exit Value

Range of Values Momentary, Toggled Control Destination List None, 0 to 127 Control Destination List None, 0 to 127 None, Off, On None, Off, On

Default Toggled OFF None OFF None None None

The Utility Soft Buttons

InadditiontotheSetupEditorspages,therearebasiclibraryandeditingsoftbuttons.Their functionsaredescribedbelow.

Name
Thisenablesyoutorenamethecurrentsetup.Useanydataentrymethodtodothis,including thelettersonthealphanumericbuttonpad.

Save
PressingSavecallsupthestandardSaveDialog.SimultaneouslypressingthePlusandMinus dataentrybuttonstogglesbetweensavingthesetuptothefirstavailableemptylocation,or replacingacurrentlyexistingsetup.Formoredetailedinstructionsonsaving,seeSavingand Naming on page 53.

7-67

Setup Mode The Utility Soft Buttons

Delete
Thiserasesasetupfrommemory,freeingupspacetostoresetupsinotherlocations.(Youcan checkthefreememoryinthePC3Katanytime,onthetoplineoftheMastermodepage.)Press Delete,anduseadataentrymethodtochoosewhichsetupyouwantdeleted.PressDelete again,andanAreYouSure?messagewillappear(unlessyouhavesetavalueofNoforthe ConfirmparameterontheMastermodepage).PressYestodeletethesetup,orNotocancel. Aswithprograms,setupscanbesavedtoanddeletedfrommemoryonly.Thenamesofall setupsinRAMhaveanasterisk(*)nexttothem.IfyoutrydeleteasetupfromROM,thePC3K willignorethedeletecommand,andthesetupwillremaininmemory.

New Zone (NewZn)

PressNewZntocreateanewzonewithdefaultparameters.ThePC3Kimportsthiszonefrom Zone1of128DefaultSetup.Ifthereareparametersorentirepagesyouuseoften,youcan createyourownDefaultSetupandsaveittolocation128;pressingNewZnwillthenimport zonesfromyourcustomDefaultSetup.

Duplicate Zone (DupZn)

Thisaddsanewzonewiththesameparametersasthecurrentzone.

Import Zone (ImpZn)

Youcanimport,orbringin,anyzonefromanysetupinmemory.PressImpZn,anduseany dataentrymethodtochooseasetuptoimportfrom.ThenusetheChan/Layerbuttonstoselect oneofthatsetupszones.NowpressImport,andthezoneyouselectedwillbeaddedtothe currentsetup. Note:Ifyouareusingall16zonesinasetupandyoutrytoadd,duplicate,orimportazone,a NoMoreZonesmessageappears.Youmustdeleteanexistingzonebeforeyoucanadd, duplicate,orimportanynewones.

Delete Zone (DelZn)

Thisdeletesthecurrentzonefromthesetup.UseDelZntofreeupzonessoyoucanaddor importnewones.

7-68

Setup Mode TRIGGER KEYS (KEYTRG)

TRIGGER KEYS (KEYTRG)

TheTRIGGERKEYSpage(seebelow)allowsyoutosetacontrollerdestinationtobetriggered byplayingaspecifickey.

InadditiontogeneratingastandardMIDInoteonmessage,eachkeyofthePC3Kcanbesetto triggeracontrollerdestination.TRIGGERKEYScanbesetindependentlyperZone.Byusing Zoneswithoverlappingkeyranges,asinglekeycantriggermultiplecontrollerdestinations.On theTRIGGERKEYSpage,selecttheKeyfieldandchooseanotebyholdingtheEnterbutton andplayingthedesiredkey(youcanalsousetheAlphaWheel,/+buttonsoralphanumericpad tochooseanote.)Withthedesirednoteselected,usetheDestfieldtoselectacontroller destination(seeTheControllerDestinationListfordetails.)Setavaluetosendtothecontroller destinationwiththeValuefield.Onceadestinationandvalueareset,theplayingthekeywill sendthevaluetothecontrollerdestinationontheZonesMIDIChannel(seeChannel on page 77 fordetailsonsettingeachZonesMIDIchannel.)Thismayalsosendacontinuouscontroller messagetotheMIDIorUSBoutports,dependingontheZonesDestinationparameter(see Destination on page 77fordetails.)

Recording A Setup To Song Mode

TheMIDIoutputofasetupcanberecordedtoasonginSongmode.EachMIDIchannelthatis outputfromasetupisrecordedintoeachtrackofasong(ifthetrackshavecorrespondingMIDI channels.)ProgramsfromeachzoneofyoursetupareautomaticallyassignedtotracksinSong mode.Followthesestepsforproperrecordingofanewsongfromasetup: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. EnterSongmodebypressingtheSongModebutton. OntheSongmodeMAINpage,select0*NewSong*intheCurSngfieldbyentering0on thealphanumericpadandpressingtheEnterbutton.Thisloadsadefaultemptysongfile. OntheSongmodeMAINpage,selectMultintheRecTrkfield. PresstheSetupModebuttontoenterSetupModeandchoosethedesiredsetup. PresstheleftandrightcursorbuttonssimultaneouslytoreachtheTEMPOPage.Entera tempobytappingtheTapsoftbuttonorenteratempointheTempofield.Whenyouare finished,presstheDonesoftbuttontoreturntotheSetupmodemainpage. PresstheRecordbuttonandthenthePlay/Pausebuttontobeginrecording.The metronomewillcountoff1barandthenrecordingwillbegin(youcansetmetronomeand otherrecordingsettingsinSongmode.) PresstheStopbuttontostoprecording.YouwillseetheusualSongmodesavechanges dialogwhereyoucanreview,retry,orsaveyoursong(seeTheSaveChanges Dialog on page 128.)

6.

7.

7-69

Setup Mode Recording A Setup To Song Mode

8.

Aftersavingyoursong,youwillbereturnedtotheSongmodeMAINpage,whereyour savedsongwillbeloaded.YoucancontinuetorecordoreditthesonginSongmodejust asyouwouldwithanyothersong(seeSongModeandtheSongEditor on page 121.)Each programfromeachzoneinyoursetupisautomaticallyassignedtoatrack(changethe RecTrkparameterinordertorecordtoasingletrack.)Youcanalsocontinuetorecord fromSetupmodebygoingbacktostep3,above.Remembertosetthetempo(step5 above)beforerecording,asthesongtempowillchangeifyoursetupissavedwitha differenttempo.

Notes About Recording A Setup To Song Mode Tempo:ThetempoofasetupissetontheSetupMode:COMMONpage(seeTheCOMMON Page on page 756.)Ifyouplantorecordasongfromthesamesetupseveraltimes,itis convenienttosetyourdesiredtempoontheSetupMode:COMMONpageandsaveitwithyour setup.Bydoingthis,youwillnotneedtoresetyoursetuptempotothedesiredsongtempo everytimeyouloadyoursetup(asinstep5,above.) Riffs:IfyouareusingRiffsinyoursetup,dothefollowingtomakeeachRiffplayatyoursetups tempo(whichalsobecomesyoursongstempo.)Foreachzonethathasariff,gotothe SetupMode:RIFF2page(seeTheRIFF2Page on page 761)andsettheBPMparametertoSetup. RemembertosavechangestoyoursetupwhenexitingtheSetupEditor. Effects:WhenrecordingasetupintoSongmode,thesongwillnotretaintheAuxorMaster effectssettingsofyoursetup.Ifyouwouldlikeyoursongtousethesameeffectsasyoursetup, copythesettingsofyoursetupsFX,AUX1,AUX2,andMASTEREFFECTSpagestotheFX, AUX1,AUX2,andMasterEffectspagesinyoursong.Alternatively,playingyoursongfrom setupmodewillallowyoutoheartheeffects.Todothis,loadyoursong,presstheSetupMode buttontoenterSetupmodeandchooseyoursetup,thenpressthePlay/Pausebutton.Thiswill playyoursongfromSetupmode,andtheeffectswillbeintact. MonoPressure:WhenrecordingasetuptoSongmodewithMultselectedforRecTrkinSong mode,youmaynoticethateverytrackhasrecordedMonoPressuremessages,evenifthereis nothingelserecordedonatrack.Ifthisbothersyou,youcansettheMonoPressparameterto OffontheSong:EventFilterRecordingpage(seeSongMode:TheFilterPages(RECFLTand PLYFLT) on page 1215.)ThiswillpreventMonoPressuremessagesfrombeingrecordedtoany track.Alternatively,youcaneraseMonoPressuremessagesfromspecifictracksafterrecording. Todothis,gototheEditSong:Trackpage(seeSongEditor:TheTRACKPage on page 1221.)On theEditSong:Trackpage,usetheChan/Layerbuttonstochoosethetracktoedit(visibleinthe Trackfieldatthetoprightcornerofthedisplay.)SettheFunctionparametertoEraseandthe EventsparametertoMonoPress.UsetheFromandTofieldstoselecttheentirelengthofyour song,andpresstheGosoftbuttontoeraseMonoPressuremessagesfromtheselectedtrack. Repeatthisforeachdesiredtrack.YoucanalsochooseALLfortheTrackparametertoerase MonoPressuremessagesfromalltracks. ControllerMessages:WhenrecordingasetuptoSongmodewithMultselectedforRecTrkin Songmode,youmayoftenberecordingmorecontrollermessagesthanyourealize.Thiscan happenbecausemultiplesetupzonesoftenrespondtothesamephysicalcontrollers.Thisis likelytobethecasewhenyouuseasetupcreatedbyduplicatingzonesanddonotchangethe controllerdestinationassignmentsforeachnewzone.Oftenthisisthedesiredbehavior,suchas whenusingzonestocreatelayers.Forexample,ifzoneonesendspitchbendmessagesfromthe pitchwheel,andyouduplicatethiszonetocreatealayeredzonetwo,youwilllikelywantthe zonetwotosendthesamemessagesfromthepitchwheel.Thiswaythepitchoftheselayered zoneswillbendsimultaneouslywhenusingthepitchwheel.Butsayforexamplethatyoualso haveazonethreewithadifferentkeyrangethanzonesoneandtwo,butwhichsendsthesame messagesfromthepitchwheel.Whileplayingandrecordingyoursetup,thefunctionofthe pitchwheelwillbeobvious,butsomeconfusioncanarisewhenyouhaverecordedyoursetup andyouproceedtorecordmoretracksinSongmode.BecauseyouhaverecordedwithMult selectedforRecTrk,thetrackforzonethreewillhavepitchbendmessagesrecordedwherever

7-70

Setup Mode Recording A Setup To Song Mode

zonesoneandtwohavebendmessages,evenifzonethreewasnotplayinganynotesatthat time.Forexample,letssayzonesoneandtwowerebendingduringbar1.Ifyouwantto separatelyrecordzonethreeduringbars1and2,youwillprobablywanttodeletetheexisting bendmessagesfromzonethreestrack.YoucandothisfromtheEditSong:Trackpage(seeSong Editor:TheTRACKPage on page 1221,andanexampleofitsuseintheMonoPressuresection,above.) Alternatively,ifthereisnothingtopreserveonthetrackforzonethree,youcanrecorditwith thesongModeparametersettoErase,whichwilleraseanyexistingeventsonthetrackduring thetimethatyourecord.JustremembertochangetheRecTrkparameterinordertorecordtoa singletrack.

7-71

Setup Mode Recording A Setup To Song Mode

7-72

Quick Access Mode

Chapter 8 Quick Access Mode

InQuickAccessmode,youcanselectprogramsorsetupswithasinglepressofanalphanumeric button(orwithotherdataentrymethods).ThePC3Koffersanumberofwaystoquicklymake selectionswhileperforming,butonlyQuickAccessmodeletsyoustoreprogramsandsetups togetherforinstantaccess.OnthePC3K,weincludedseveralfactorypresetQAbanksthatare organizedintousefulgroupingsofsoundsthatwethinkyoullfindconvenient.BelowistheQA page:

ThetoplineofthepagedisplaysthecurrentmodeandthecurrentQAbank. UsingQuickAccessmodeinvolvesselectingQuickAccess(QA)banksfromthelistoffactory presetoruserprogrammedbanks.UsetheChan/ZonebuttonstoscrollthroughtheQAbanks. Youcanalsousethebankselectionshortcut:pressthe+/orClearbuttononthealphanumeric pad,andyoullbepromptedtoenterabanknumber.Typethedesirednumberonthe alphanumericpad,thenpressEnter.Thebankisselected,andyoureturntotheQuickAccess modepage. Eachbankcontainstenmemoryslots,orentries,whereyoucanstoreprogramsorsetupsinany combination.Anyprogramorsetupinthecurrentlyselectedbankcanbeselectedwiththe numericbuttons0through9. Ifthehighlightedentrycontainsaprogram,thebottomrighthandfieldofthepagedisplaysthe channelonwhichtheprogramentriesaretransmitted(thischannelisthecurrentchannelin Programmode).Ifthehighlightedentrycontainsasetup,thebottomrighthandfieldofthepage displaysthewordSetup. TheMIDIProgramChangecommandsthatthePC3KreceiveswheninQuickAccessmodecan differfromthoseinProgramorSetupmode.Thisdependsonthesettingyouhaveforthe PrgChgModeparameteronMIDIReceivepageinMastermode.IfPrgChgModeissetto ExtendedorK2600,thePC3KrespondstoProgramChangecommandsasitwouldinProgram orSetupmode.IfPrgChgModeissettoQAccess,thePC3KrespondstoProgramChange commandsbycallingupthecorrespondingentryinthecurrentQAbank,nottheactual programnumberoftheentry.

8-1

Quick Access Mode The QA Editor

Soft Buttons In Quick Access Mode

UsetheOctavandOctav+softbuttonstotransposeupordownbyafulloctave.Pressingboth Octavbuttonssimultaneouslyreturnsthetranspositiontoitsoriginalsetting. PresstheInfosoftbuttontoseeallofthecontrollerassignmentsofthecurrentprogram.Scroll downthepageusingtheAlphaWheel,cursororthe/+buttons. TheXpose/Xpose+buttonsareashortcutforquicktranspositioninsemitone(halfstep) increments.YoucanusethemtotransposetheentirePC3Kasmuchasthreeoctavesupor down.Thebottomlineofthedisplayshowsthecurrentamountoftransposition(Xpose). PressingbothXposebuttonssimultaneouslyreturnsthetranspositiontozero.TheXpose buttonstransposethePC3K,aswellasanyMIDIdevicesconnectedtothePC3KsMIDIOut port.ChangingthetranspositionwiththesoftbuttonsalsochangestheTransposesettingonthe MastermodeMIDITransmitpage.

The QA Editor
UsetheQAEditortocustomizeexistingQAbanks.EntertheQAeditorfromQAmodeby pressingtheEditbutton.

Thetoplinegivesyoutheusualmodereminder,thecurrentQAbank,andthecurrententry (correspondingnumericbuttonforthehighlightedobject.)Thecursorhighlightstheobject (programorsetup)thatsstoredinthecurrententry. Selecting A Quick Access Entry To Edit PressingtheChan/Zonebuttonsscrollsthroughthetenentriesthenumberofthecurrent entryisdisplayedinthetoprightcorner.Astheentrynumberchanges,thehighlightedobjects atthecenterofthepagechangeaswell,showingyouwhatsstoredineachentry.Onthepage above,forexample,entry0isthecurrententry. Selecting A Program For A Quick Access Entry Above,theTypefieldtellsyouthattheobjectstoredatentry0isaprogram.Thecursor highlightstheprogramsIDandname.UsetheAlphaWheelor/+buttonstoscrollthroughthe listofprograms.PressoneoftheCategorybuttonstoseealistofprogramsinthatcategory,or presstheAllCategorybuttontoseealistofallprograms.

8-2

Quick Access Mode The QA Editor

Selecting A Setup For A Quick Access Entry Ifyouwanttostoreasetupinthecurrententryinsteadofaprogram,presstheTypesoft buttonwhenyoudothis,noticethattheTypefieldchangefromProgramtoSetup(alsonotice thatthechannelindicatordisappears,sincesetupscantransmitoverseveralchannels).Thelist ofobjectschangesfromtheprogramlisttothesetuplist.Justaswithprograms,thecursor highlightsthesetupsIDandname.UsetheAlphaWheelor/+buttonstoscrollthroughthe setups.YoucanalsousethealphanumericpadfollowedbytheEnterbuttontochooseaSetup byID#. KeepinmindthatyoucanhavebothsetupsandprogramsinthesameQAbank. Naming And Saving A Quick Access Bank Whenyouvefilledeachentrywiththeobjectyouwant,presstheNamesoftbuttonifyouwant torenamethebank,orpresstheSavesoftbuttontobeginthesaveprocedure.Or,presstheExit buttontoexittheQAeditor,andtheSaveChanges?dialogcomesup.

8-3

Quick Access Mode The QA Editor

8-4

Effects Basic Overview

Chapter 9 Effects
ThePC3Kboastsapowerfuleffectsprocessorthatputsthepowerofanentirestudioatyour fingertips.ThischaptercontainseverythingyoullneedtoknowtousethePC3Kseffectsand ChainEditortotheirfullestpotentials. Thischapterbeginswithafewpreliminarydescriptionsofbasicroutingconceptsandeffects terminology.Thesectionthatfollowscontainsamoreindepthdescriptionoftheworkingsof thePC3Keffectsprocessor,andinstructionsonhowtoconfiguretheEffectsmodepages.After thatisabriefoverviewofusingeffectsinProgrammode.Thepenultimateandlastsections containinstructionsonhoweditandcreateyourownChains,andacomprehensiveglossaryof theeffectsparametersyoullencounterintheChainEditor.

Basic Overview
Thissectiongivesageneral,bigpictureoverviewoftheeffectsroutinginthePC3K,aswellas descriptionsofthefundamentalconceptsofeffectsstagesandrouting,effectsallocation,Aux overriding,andmastereffects.

Effects Stages and Routing

Therearethreetypesofeffectsthatareappliedduringdifferentstagesinaprogramssignal path:InsertEffects,Auxiliary(Aux)Effects,andtheglobalmasterEQ/compressor.InsertEffects areplaceddirectlyinthesignalpathattheoutputofaprogramasdescribedintheProgram modechapter,theseInsertEffectscanapplytoeitherthewholeprogramoronlytoselected layerswithintheprogram.EachprogramalsohastwostereoAuxSendsthatgototheAux1 andAux2Effects,bothofwhichcanbesettobeappliedeitherpreorpostInsertEffect.The masterEQ/compressorareappliedgloballytothesignalatthemainoutputs. TheobjectusedforInsertandAuxEffectsisreferredtoasaChain.AChainisinturna sequenceofeffectboxescascadedinseries,orisasingleeffectbox.Eachprogramcanhaveone mainInsertChainanduptotwoAuxChains.Also,individuallayerswithinaprogramcanhave theirownInsertChainthatwillbeusedinsteadoftheprogramsmainInsertChain.Youcan selectfromthesamesetofChainstouseforbothAuxandInsertEffects.Thefollowingfigure showsthesignalpathforaprogramthatdoesnotuselayerspecificeffects:

Comp

EQ Output Comp

Program
Pre Send Levels

Insert Chain
Post

Master FX Order

EQ

AUX 1 Chain AUX 2 Chain

9-1

Effects Basic Overview

NotethatwhenanAuxEffectisappliedpostInsert,thewetAuxsignalhasaseriesofeffects appliedtoiti.e.,cascadedeffects.WhenanAuxEffectisappliedpreInsert,thewetAuxsignal hasnoInserteffectappliedtoit,andthefinaloutputhasparalleleffectsi.e.,distincteffects. Formultitimbralusei.e.,multiprogramusemultipleprogramscanhavetheirInsertEffects loadedsimultaneously.TheAuxEffectsareglobal,andtherecanbeonlyoneset(Aux1and Aux2)loadedatatime.InProgrammode,theAuxEffectscomefromtheprogramloadedon thecurrentselectedchannel.InSongandSetupmodes,thereisanoptiontoselectthetrackor zonewhoseprogramspecifiestheAuxEffects.Alternatively,theAuxEffectscanbesetdirectly ontheAUXFX1andAUXFX2pagesinSongorSetupmode,orbyusingtheEffectbuttonin Programmode.Thefollowingfigureshowsthesignalpathsforamultitimbralsetuporsong: Program
ZONE/TRACK 1 Pre Send Levels

Insert Chain
Post

Comp

EQ Output Comp

Program
ZONE/TRACK 2 Pre Send Levels

Insert Chain
Post

Master FX Order

EQ

Etc.

AUX 1 Chain AUX 2 Chain

Processor Power Allocation

EachEffectChainiscomposedofaneffectboxoraseriesofeffectboxes.Eacheffectboxusesa certainamountofthePC3Kseffectsprocessingpower.Theamountofprocessingpowerused byaneffectboxorChainreflectshowcomplextheeffectsalgorithmismorecomplexeffects requiremoreprocessingpower.Accordingly,eachChainandeffectboxusesacertainnumber ofDSPunitsyoucanhaveupto16DSPunitsusedatatime. InProgrammode,theprogramsloadedoneachofthe16MIDIchannelsarenormally consideredactive,soeffectsareloadedforasmanyasispossible.InadditiontoapairofAux Effects(whethertheyaretheprogramsortheoverridesinEffectsmodemoreonthislater),the InsertEffectofeachchannelsprogramisactive.FortheDSPunits,thecurrentlyselected programwillhavepriority,followedbylowesttohighestMIDIchannel.Youcanhaveupto11 activeInsertEffects.

9-2

Effects Basic Overview

TheCHANFXpageinEffectsmodeortheFXpageineitherSetuporSongmodeprovides perchannelcontrolovereffectsallocation.Thechannelwithaboxarounditschannelnumberis thecurrentchannelinProgrammode,orthespecifiedAuxEffectchannelinSetupandSong mode.EachchannelcanbesettoYtoallocateeffectsforthatchannel,ortoNtonotallocate effectsforthatchannel.SomechannelssettoYmaybedisplayedas(Y).Thismeansthateffects resourcesarenotavailableforthatchannel,andthatchannelseffectsarenotloaded.Settinga channeltoNdoesnotdisablethatchannelseffectssettings;ratheritonlyspecifiesthatno effectsareallocatedforthatchannel.Asthecursorismovedfromlefttoright,theInsertand(if itsthecurrentchannelorspecifiedAuxEffectschannel)AuxEffectsforthatchannelare displayedbelowtheallocationlineofthepage.ThenumberofDSPunitsrequiredtoloadeffects forthecursorhighlightedchannelisshownatthetopofthepage.

A Note on Modes
BesuretoreadthesectiononusingeffectsinProgrammode,TheProgramFX(PROGFX) Page on page 647. TheconfigurationsinEffectmodeapplyineverymodeexceptforSetupmodeandSongmode. InbothSetupandSongmode,theconfigurationsforeachmodesownfourEffectspagesprevail overtheconfigurationsinEffectsmode.

Aux Override
InEffectsmode,Setupmode,andSongmode,theAUXFX1andAUXFX2pagesprovide overridesforAuxChainselectionandotherAuxEffectsparameters.Normally,theAuxEffects Chainsarespecifiedbytheprogramonthecurrentchannelor,inSetupmodeandSongmode, bytheprogramonthespecifiedAuxEffectschannel.TheChainspecifiedfortheAuxoverride (aswellasthesendlevelsandotherparameters)isappliedtotheprograminsteadofthe programsAuxEffect.Also,sendlevelsandotherparametersnormallyspecifiedwithin individualprogramscanbesettofixedvaluesontheAuxOverridepages. ThisisparticularlyusefulinSetupmodeandSongmode,whicharemultitimbralmodes.Ifyou wantedtoapplyaneffecttoallzonesortracksinthecurrentsetuporsong,changingeach programseffectswouldnotonlybealongprocessbutuseupalotofDSPunits.Bysettingthe AuxoverrideEffecttoyourdesiredChain,youcanapplythesameeffecttoupto16zonesor trackswithouthavingtouseupanymoreDSPunits. NoticethatinProgrammode,ifanAuxeffectisoverrideninEffectmode,thetoplineofthe PROGFX(orLYR_FX)pageindicatesthatcorrespondingChaindoesnotuseupanyDSPunits. SincetheChainisnotapplied,thePC3Kdoesnotallocateresourcesforit.

9-3

Effects Basic Overview

Master Effects
TherearetwoMasterEffectsthatareappliedatthefinalstageofthesignalpath:anEQanda Compressor.Theseareglobaleffects,andapplytoallsignalsroutedtothePC3Ksprimary outputs.NeithertheEQnortheCompressoruseupanyDSPunits,soyouneedntaccountfor themwhenallocatingeffectsprocessingpower. SeeEqualizers(EQ) on page 913andCompressors,Expanders,andGates on page 914for explanationsoftheparametersfortheMasterEQandCompressor. TheMasterEffectscanbeaccessedintheMASTERpageinEffectsmode,ortheMASTFXin SetupmodeandSongmode.

9-4

Effects Effects Mode

Effects Mode
PresstheEffectmodeselectbuttontoenterEffectsmode.Asstatedpreviously,the configurationsinEffectmodeapplyineverymodeexceptforSetupmodeandSongmode thesemodeshavetheirownEffectspage(almostidenticaltothoseinEffectsmode)whose configurationstakeprecedenceoverthoseofEffectmode.

The CHANFX Page

NOTE:InSetupmodeandSongmode,thispagecorrespondsinappearanceandfunctiontotheFXpage, thoughtheFXpageworksonapersetup/songbasis. PressingtheCHANFXsoftbuttoncallsuptheCHANFXpage.Thispageiswhereyoullallocate effectsprocessingpower.SeeProcessorPowerAllocation on page 92foradescriptionofreading andconfiguringtheCHANFXpage.

The AUXFX1 and AUXFX2 Pages

NOTE:InSetupmodeandSongmode,thesepagescorrespondsinappearanceandfunctiontothe AUXFXpages,thoughtheyworkonapersetup/songbasis. PressingtheAUXFX1softbuttonortheAUXFX2softbuttoncallsup,respectively,theAUXFX1 pageortheAUXFX2page.Asstatedabove,inEffectsmode,Setupmode,andSongmode,the AUXFX1andAUXFX2pagesprovideoverridesforAuxChainselectionandotherAuxEffects parameters.SeeAuxOverride on page 93foradescriptionoftheAuxoverrides. EachAUXFXpageappearsasshownbelow(thepageshownbelowistheAUXFX1page):

Parameter Override Chain Output Mod Override Send Level Pre-/Post- Insert

Range of Values No, Yes Chain List auto, Pri., Sec. Control Source List [p], -96 to 24 dB [p], pst, pre

Default No 0 None auto None [p] [p]

9-5

Effects The AUXFX1 and AUXFX2 Pages

IfOverrideissettoNo,thetoplineofthepagedisplaystheAux1Chainthatisloadedforthe currentprogram,aswellasthecurrentchannel.Inthecaseofthescreenshotbelow,theAux1 Chainofthecurrentprogramis906MediumHall2,andthecurrentchannelis6.

Override
ThisparameterswitchesonorofftheAuxoverride.SetOverridetoYestoselectanoverride AuxChainonthispage.SetOverridetoNotoallowthecurrentprogram(orzoneortrack).

Chain
WhenOverrideissettoYes,youcanselectanoverrideAuxChainforthepagescorresponding Auxbus.ThisparameterisnotvisiblewhenOverrideissettoNo.

Output
ThisparameterspecifiesthephysicalaudiooutputpairforthepagescorrespondingAux Chainsoutput.ThesettingsPri.andSec.refer,respectively,totheprimary(labeledMAINon thebackpanel)andsecondary(labeledAUXonthebackpanel)physicalaudiooutputsofthe PC3K.SettingOutputtoautousestheoutputpairspecifiedinthecurrentprogram(orthe programonthespecifiedAuxEffectschannel).

Mod Override
ThisparametercanbeusedtooverridetheModControlsourceofthecurrentprogram(orthe programonthespecifiedAuxEffectschannel).AsettingofNoneyieldsnooverrideinMod Controlsource,andusestheModControlsourcespecifiedinthecurrentprogram.

Send Levels and Pre/Post Ins.

Therearetwoparametersforeachofthe16MIDIchannels:SendLevel(toprow)andPre/Post Insert(bottomrow).ThesettingfortheparameterSendLeveldeterminesifthecurrentprograms AuxSendLevelisoverridden,andifso,bywhatvalue.ThesettingfortheparameterPre/Post InsertdeterminesifthecurrentprogramsAuxroutingisoverridden,andifso,bywhatrouting. PremeansthattheAuxSendtakesplacebeforeanyInsertEffectisapplied,whereasasettingof PstmeansthattheAuxSendtakesplacepostInsertEffect.(Ofcourse,iftheprogramonthe channelhasnoInsertEffectsloaded,thenthisparameterwillmakenodifference.)ForbothSend LevelandPre/PostInsert,avalueof[p]meansnooverride(i.e.,usethevaluesspecifiedinthe program).

9-6

Effects The MASTER Page

The MASTER Page

NOTE:InSetupmodeandSongmode,thispagecorrespondsinappearanceandfunctiontothe MASTFXpage,thoughtheMASTFXpageworksonapersetup/songbasis. PressingtheMASTERsoftbuttoncallsuptheMASTERpage.TheMASTERpagecontainsthe settingsforthemasterEQandCompressor.Thepageappearsasshownbelow:

Parameter Mode Order Master FX

Range of Values Master, Setup Compressor => EQ, EQ => Compressor Master FX Enabled, Master FX Bypassed

Default Master Compressor => EQ Master FX Enabled

ThetwoboxesinthechainontheMASTERpagearethemasterCompressorandEQEffects. PresstheEditbuttonwhileeitheroftheseboxesisselectedtoedittheparametersfortheboxs effect.SeeEqualizers(EQ) on page 913andCompressors,Expanders,andGates on page 914for descriptionontheEQandCompressorparameters.

Mode
ThesettingfortheMasterEffectscanbesetdirectlyonthispage,oroptionallyinthecontrol setup.TosetuptheMasterEffectsfromtheMASTERpage,settheModeparametertoMaster. Tousethesettingsinthecurrentcontrolsetup,selectSetup.ControllingtheMasterEffectsfrom thecontrolsetupallowsforconvenientswitchingbetweendifferentconfigurations.

Order
UsetheOrderparametertodeterminetheorderofthetwoeffects.SettingOrdertoCompressor =>EQroutessignalthroughtheCompressorfirst,andthenthroughtheEQ.SettingOrdertoEQ =>CompressorroutessignalthroughtheEQfirst,andthenthroughtheCompressor.

Master FX
TheMasterFXparameterdetermineswhethertheMasterEffectsareenabledorbypassed. SettingMasterFXtoMasterFXEnabledenablestheMasterEffects.SettingMasterFXtoMaster FXBypassedbypassestheMasterEffects,andeffectivelyremovesthemfromthesignalpath. SeeMasterEffects on page 94foradescriptionoftheMasterEffects.

9-7

Effects The Chain Editor

The Chain Editor

PressingtheeditbuttonwhileaChain(otherthan0None)ishighlightedonanyofthevarious effectspageswillcalluptheChaineditor.FromtheProgrameditor,theprogramsInsertand AuxChainscanbeeditedfromthePROGFXandLYRFXpages.InSetup,Song,andEffectmode, ChainsselectedforAuxoverridescanbeeditedfromtheAUXFX1andAUXFX2pages. AChainismadeupofanumberofeffectboxesofwhichyoucanhaveupto16inaChain thateachhaveasingleeffectloaded.Thesettingsforalloftheparametersofeacheffectboxare alsostoredwithintheChain.Thereare15ModControlsthatallowforrealtimecontrolover anyparameterfromanyeffectboxintheChain.PerChainControlsourcesarealsoprovidedto beusedasinputstotheeffectMods(twoFXLFOs,twoFXASRs,andfourFXFUNs.)Thesework similarlytotheLFOs,ASRsandFUNsinProgrammode,butareonlyavailableforusewiththe effectMods.

The MAIN Page

PressingtheMAINsoftbuttoncallsuptheMAINpage.TheMAINpageiswhereyouconfigure thelengthofaChainandselecttheindividualeffectsthatmakeuptheChain.TheChaineditor MAINpageoftheChain269PnoEnhancRvb3appearsasshownbelow:

AtthetoprightofthedisplayisthenumberofDSPunitsusedbythecurrentlyselectedeffect box,andbytheChainasawhole.2/5Unitsindicatesthatthecurrenteffectboxisusingtwo DSPunitsandtheChainisusingatotaloffiveDSPunitsforallofitseffects.Thereareatotalof 16unitsavailableforalloftheChainsthatarecurrentlyloadedbyprogramsandanyactiveAux overridesfromSetup/Song/Effectsmode. NOTE:Insomeconfigurations,notall16unitsareavailableforusewithmultiuniteffectsbecauseofthe waytheDSPisallocated. LikeallotherrepresentationsofsignalpathsinthePC3Kdisplay,theprogramsignalmoves fromlefttorightthroughtheChain.PressingtheInsertsoftbuttonaddsaneweffectboxtothe Chaininthecurrentlyselectedblockslot,andpushesthecurrentlyselectedeffectboxdownthe Chaintotheright.PressingtheRemovesoftbuttontakesthecurrentlyselectedeffectoutofthe Chain.Theeffectloadedintotheselectedeffectboxcanbechangedbynumericentry,withthe AlphaWheel,orwiththe+/buttons;andcanbechangedwitheithertheeffectboxortheEffect fieldatthebottomofthepagehighlighted.The+/doublebuttonpresswilljumptothenext effectcategory.PressingtheEffectModebuttonwillmuteorunmutetheselectedeffectsbox. TheEffectModebuttonsLEDwilllightwhenamutedeffectsboxisselected,andunlightwhen anunmutedeffectsboxisselected.

9-8

Effects The MOD Pages

Editing Effect-blocks
Toedittheparametersofaneffect,selectitseffectboxontheMAINpageandpresstheEdit button.Foreacheffect,thereareoneormorepagesofparametersthatarespecifictothateffect. AnyparametercontrolledbyaneffectModwilldisplayavalueofFxModandcannotbeedited. ToreturntotheMAINpageofthechaineditor,presstheExitbutton.

The MOD Pages

Therearethreepagesforconfiguringeffectsmods:MOD1,MOD2,andMOD3.Allthreepages areessentiallyidenticalinappearanceandfunction.TheMODpagesappearasshownbelow (thebelowMODpagescreenshotsisfortheChain269PnoEnhancRvb3):

Box
TheBoxparameterspecifieswhicheffectboxintheChaintowhichtheModwillbeapplied.

Param
TheParamparameterselectswhichparameterofthespecifiedboxseffectwillbemodulated.

Adjust
TheAdjustparametersetsafixedvalueforthespecifiedparameter(Param)thatisapplied beforeanymodulation.

Source
TheSourceparameterdeterminestheControlsourcethatwillmodulatetheparameter(Param) inrealtime.ThiscanbeanyofthenormalchannelControlsources(sliders,modwheel,pedals, etc.)oroneoftheChainspecificControlsources(FXLFOs,FXASRs,andFXFUNs).

Depth
TheDepthparameterdeterminestherangeofmodulationthattheControllerwillapply.When theControlsourcehasavalueof0,theparameters(Params)valuewillbetheAdjustvalue. Whenthecontrolsourceisallthewayup,theparameters(Params)valuewillbetheAdjust valueplustheDepthvalue.

FXLFO, FXASR, and FXFUN pages

TheFXLFO,FXASR,andFXFUNpagesarethepagesfromwhichyouedittheEffectsonly Controlsources.TheseareControlsourcesthatcanbeusedbytheeffectsModsinthecurrent Chain.TheparametersonthesepagesworkexactlylikethoseofthecorrespondingControl sourcesinprogrammode(seeTheLFOPage,TheASRPage,andTheFunction(FUN)Pagein ProgramMode).

9-9

Effects INFOEDIT page (INFO)

INFOEDIT page (INFO)

PresstheINFOsoftbuttontogototheINFOEDITpagewhereyoucaneditthecontroller assignmentinfoforthecurrentChain.OntheINFOEDITpage,usetheChan/Layerbuttonsto scrollthroughthecurrentChainslistofcontrollerassignmentinfo.Eachassignmentinfoentry hasaMIDIcontrollernumberandaTextparametertodescribewhattheassignmentcontrols. Toeditthetextofacontrollerassignment,presstheTextsoftbutton.Tocreateanewcontroller assignmentinfoentry,presstheNewsoftbutton(youwillbepromptedforaMIDIcontroller number.)Tocreateanewcontrollerassignmentinfoentrywiththesametextasthecurrentinfo entry,presstheDupsoftbutton(youwillbepromptedforaMIDIcontrollernumber.)Todelete thecurrentcontrollerassignmentinfoentry,presstheDeletesoftbutton(youwillbeprompted toconfirmorcancel.)ToreturntotheChaineditorpresstheDonesoftbuttonortheExitbutton. SeeExport on page 1312fordetailsonexportingChaininfo.

Effects Parameters
ThissectioncontainsdescriptionsofthePC3Ksmanyeffectsparameters,andinstructionson howtousethem.Readthroughthischaptertogetagoodgeneralunderstandingofthe parameters. Thedescriptionsheredonotincludealloftheparametersassociatedwitheveryeffect,and someeffectsmaynothavesomeoftheparametersdescribedherefortheircategory.Amore completereference,witheveryeffectandthemeaningandrangeofeveryparameter,arranged intheordertheyappearonthescreen,canbefoundintheKSP8AlgorithmReferenceGuideonthe Kurzweilwebsite,www.kurzweil.com.

General Parameters
Thereareanumberofparametersthatarecommontoalloralmostallalgorithms,andwelldeal withthosefirst. Wet/Drybalancesthelevelsoftheprocessedandunprocessedsignalspassingthroughthe preset.Therangeis0%wet(thesignalisunprocessed)through100%wet(nodrysignalis present).Asettingof50%wetmeansthedryandprocessedsignalsareroughlyequalinlevel.In somealgorithms,separateWet/DryparametersareprovidedfortheLeftandRightinput channels.Insomecases,thisparameterscanhavenegativevalues,whichindicatethattheWet signalispolarityinverted. OutGainsetsthegainattheoutputofapreset. In/Outenablesordisablestheeffect.YoucanthinkofitasaWet/Dryparameterwithonlytwo positions:100%(In)and0%(Out). HFDampingisthecutoff(3dB)frequencyofa6dB/octavelowpassfilterthatsinsertedbefore theprocessor.Inthecaseofprocessorswheremultipleiterationsofthesignalareheard,suchas inadelay,eachiterationofthesignalwillpassthroughthefilter,andwillthereforebeduller. XCouple(CrossCouple).Instereoeffects,thiscontrolshowmuchofanysignalbeingfedback isgoingtothechanneloppositetotheonewhereitfirstappeared.At100%,allfeedbackfrom signalsattheleftinputgoestotherightchannelandviceversa,causingaspreadingorinthe caseofdelaylines,apingpongeffect.At0%,fedbacksignalsstaywiththechannelthey cameinon.

9-10

Effects General Parameters

A>Bcfg(configuration).Incombinationalgorithmsthatcontaintwo(ormore)components, andwhosenameuses<>,asin719Reverb<>Compress,theorderinwhichthesignalpasses throughthetwocomponentscanbechanged.Forexample,thisalgorithmcanbeconfiguredso thesignalpassesthroughthereverbfirstandthenthecompressor,orthroughthecompressor firstandthenthereverb.Thecfgparameterdeterminestheconfiguration,anditsvalueis contextsensitiveinthisexample,thechoiceswouldbeRvb>CmpandCmp>Rvb. A/Dry>Bisalsofoundinmanycombinationalgorithms,andcontrolstheamountofsignalthat willpassdry(unprocessed)throughthefirstcomponentintothesecondcomponent.Different combinationalgorithmsusedifferentvariationsonthisparameter,dependingonthecontext. Therangeis0to100%. Reverbs RoomTypechangestheconfigurationofthealgorithmtosimulateawidearrayofroomtypes andsizesincludingbooths,smallrooms,chambers,hallsandlargespaces.Becausethis parameterchangesthestructureofthereverbalgorithm,youneedtobecarefulwhenassigning itaMODchangingitinrealtimewhilesignalispassingthroughitislikelytocauseaudible artifacts.Roomtypesindifferentalgorithmswithsimilarnamesdonotnecessarilysoundthe same. RvrbTimeistheRT60thetimeittakesforthereverbtodecayto60dBbelowitsinitiallevel inseconds.Itisaccurateassumingthatseveralotherparameters(HFDamping,DiffScale,Size Scale,andDensity)areattheirnominallevels.ItisadjustableuptoInf,whichcreatesan infinitelysustainingreverb. LateRvbTimadjuststhebasicdecaytimeofthelateportionofthereverbafterdiffusion. L/RPreDly(PreDelay)isthetimebetweenthestartofasoundandtheoutputofthefirst reverbreflectionsfromthatsound.Longerpredelayscanhelpmakelargerspacessoundmore realistic.Longertimescanalsohelpimprovetheclarityofamixbyseparatingthereverbsignal fromthedrysignal,sothedrysignalisnotobscured. EarRefLvladjuststhemixleveloftheearlyreflectionportionofalgorithmswhichofferearly reflections. LateLvladjuststhemixlevelofthelatereverbportionofalgorithmswhichofferearly reflections. DiffScalescalesthediffusionoftheearlyreflections,thatis,howspreadouttheyareasa groupovertime.Atverylowsettings,theearlyreflectionsstarttosoundquitediscrete,andat highersettingstheearlyreflectionsareseamless.Itisadjustablefrom0.00to2.00,with1.00 beingnominalforthegivenRoomType. Densitycontrolshowtightlytheearlyreflectionsarepackedintime.LowDensitysettings grouptheearlyreflectionsclosetogether,whilehighervaluesspreadthereflectionsfora smootherreverb.Itisadjustablefrom0.00to4.00,with1.00beingnominal(andusuallyoptimal) forthegivenRoomType. Expansecontrolstheamountoflatereverbenergybiasedtowardtheedgesofthestereoimage. Asettingof0%willbiasenergytowardsthecenter.Movingawayfrom0%willbiasenergy towardsthesides.Positiveandnegativevalueswillhaveadifferentcharacter. Buildadjuststheenvelopeofcertainportionsofthereverb.Positivevaluesspeedupthe envelope,andnegativevaluesslowitdown. SizeScalechangesthesizeofthecurrentroom.Alteringthisparameterwillchangethereverb timeandalsocausesomecolorationofthereverb.Itisadjustablefrom0.00to4.00,with1.00 beingnominal(andusuallyoptimal)forthegivenRoomType.

9-11

Effects Delays

InfinDecay,whenturnedOn,causesthereverbtailtodecayindefinitely.WhenitsOff,the decaytimeisdeterminedbytheRvrbTimeorLateRvbTimparameters.Thisisagood parametertocontrolwithafootswitch. WetBal(WetBalance).Somereverbalgorithmsareactuallytwostereoreverbsinone,witheach onereceivingadifferentmonosignal.Thisbalancestheoutputsofthetworeverbs0%means theyarebeingmixedequally.

Delays
TherearetwotypesoftapsintheMultitapdelays:TheLooptap,whichhasafeedbackloop backtoitsinput,andthenumberedtaps.Thenumberedtapscanbesingleiterationsortheycan repeataspartofaloop,buttheydonothaveindividualfeedbackpaths. Fdbk(Feedback)LevelcontrolstherepeatingfunctionoftheLoopTap.Asettingof0%means therewillonlybeasingledelay,whileasettingof100%meansthesignalkeepsrepeating withouteverstopping. Bothtypesoftapsareindividuallyadjustablefrom0to2.55seconds.TheLoopCrsandTapn Crs(nbeingthenumberofthetap)parameterssetthecoarsevalueoftheloopin20ms increments,whiletheLoopFineandTapnFineparameterssetthefinevaluein0.2ms increments. InDelayalgorithmsthatusetempotodeterminetaplengths,thereisaTempoparameterwhich canbesetfrom1to255BPMortoSystem.TheLoopLengthandTapnDelaysarethen expressedinbeatsrelativetothatoverallTempo. Holdisaswitchthat,whenturnedon,locksanysignalcurrentlyinthedelayandplaysit untilHoldisturnedoff.WhenHoldison,nosignalcanenterthedelayandFeedbackissetto 100%.Agoodparametertocontrolwithafootswitch. DryBal(Balance)istheleft/rightbalanceofthedrysignal.At100%,onlytheleftdrysignal goestotheleftoutput,whileat100%onlytherightdrysignalpassestotherightoutput,andat 0%,equalamountsoftheleftandrightdrysignalspasstotheirrespectiveoutputs. TapnLevelisthelevelofeachnumberedtap,from0%to100%,relativetotheoveralloutputof theeffect. TapnBalistheleft/rightbalanceofeachofthenumberedtaps.At100%,onlytheleftchannelof tapngoestotheleftoutput,whileat100%onlytherightchanneloftapngoestotheright output.At0%,equalamountsoftheleftandrightchannelsofthetappasstotheirrespective outputs.Insomedelays,pairsoftaps(1and5,2and6,etc.)arecontrolledtogetherasstereo pairs. DelayScaleletsyouchangethelengthsofallthetapstogether.Itsrangeis0to10x. NotethatitispossibleforthePC3Ktorunoutofdelaymemorywithovergeneroussettingsof DelayScaleorveryslowTempos.SomeDelayalgorithmswillsimplygotoamaximumvalue andstaythere,whileinsome,acalculationismadethatautomaticallycutsthedelaytimesin half,therebymaintainingarelationshipwithtempo.

Complex Echo
Thisalgorithmhastwofeedbacktapsperchannelaswellasthreeindependenttaps,andalsoa feedbackdiffuserforsmearingthedelays.Feedbackline1feedsthesignalbacktothedelay inputofthesamechannel,whilefeedbackline2feedsthesignalbacktotheoppositechannel.

9-12

Effects Equalizers (EQ)

FB2/FB1>FBisabalancecontrolbetweenfeedbacklines1and2.0%(minimum)turnsoff feedbackline2,onlyallowinguseoffeedbackline1.50%isanevenmixofbothlines,and100% (maximum)turnsoffline1. LDiffDlyandRDiffDlyadjuststhedelaylengthsofthediffusers.Rangeis0to100ms. DiffAmtadjuststhediffuserintensity.Rangeis0to100%. CFdbknDlyadjuststhedelaylengthoftheCchannelsnthfeedbacktap,fedbacktotheC channelsdelayinput.Rangeis0to2600ms.

Spectral Multitap Delays

These4and6tapdelayshavetheirfeedbackandoutputtapsmodifiedwithshapersandfilters. Inthefeedbackpathofeachtapareadiffuser,hipassfilter,lopassfilter,andimager.Eachdelay taphasashaper,combfilter,andbalanceandlevelcontrols. FdbkImagesetstheamountthatthestereoimageisshiftedeachtimeitpassesthroughthe feedbackline.Rangeis100to100%. TapnShapradjuststheintensityoftheshaperateachoutputtap.Rangeis0.10to6.00 x. TapnPitchadjuststhefrequencyofthecombfilterateachoutputtap.RangeisC1toC8,in semitones. TapnPtAmtadjuststheintensityofthecombfilterateachoutputtap.Rangeis0to100%.

Gated Ducking Delay

Thisrunsthelastthingyouplayedthroughaloopingdelay,butonlywhenyouarentplaying. GatedDuckingDelayisgreatforthatannouncersound,sound,sound,sopopularinMonster Truckradiospots.

DegenRegen
Thisonesabigloopingdelaywithlotsofgain,distortionandfiltering,andwithacompressor tokeepitallundercontrol.Verycool.

Equalizers (EQ)
ThePC3KhasbothGraphicandParametricEQalgorithms.ParametricEQsectionsarealso foundonanumberofcombinationalgorithms. TheGraphicequalizerisavailableasstereo(linkedparametersforleftandright)ordualmono (independentcontrolsforleftandright).Ithas10bandpassfiltersperchannel,eachofwhose gainisadjustablefrom12dBto+24dB. Likeallgraphicequalizers,thefilterresponseisnotperfectlyflatwhenallgainsaresettothe samelevel(exceptat0dB),butratherhasripplefrombandtoband.Tominimizethisripple,itis besttocentertheoverallsettingsaround0dB. TheParametricequalizer(5BandEQ)hastwobandsofshelvingfiltersandthreebandsof trueparametricEQ. TrebFreqandBassFreqsetthecenterfrequenciesfortheshelvingfilters.Bothoftheseare adjustableoverthefullrangeof16to25088Hz,inincrementsofasemitone. TrebGainandBassGaincontroltheamountofcutorboostabove(Treb)orbelow(Bass)the centerfrequency.Therangeis79to+24dB.

9-13

Effects Compressors, Expanders, and Gates

MidnGainsetsthecutorboostfortheparametricbandn,witharangeof79to+24dB. MidnFreqsetsthecenterfrequencyforparametricbandn,witharangeof16to25088Hz,in incrementsofasemitone. MidnWidthsetthebandwidthofthefilteronbandn,witharangeof0.01to5octaves.

Enhancers
Enhancersmodifythespectralcontentoftheinputsignalbyboostingexistingspectralcontent, orstimulatingnewones.Twoandthreebandversionsareprovided. Driveadjuststheinputintoeachband.Increasingthedrivewillincreasetheeffects.Rangeis 79.0to24.0dB. Xferadjuststheintensityofthetransfercurves.Rangeis100to100%.

EQ Morpher
Thisalgorithmusestwofourbandbandpassfilters,AandB,andmovesbetweenthem,which amongotherthings,canproduceaveryconvincingsimulationofahumanvocaltract. FreqScaleoffsetsthefilterfrequenciesforeachsetoffilters.Aftersettingthefilterparameters (Freq,Gain,andWidth),theFreqScaleparameterswillmoveeachofthefourfilterfrequencies togetherbythesamerelativepitch.Rangeis8600to8600cents. MorphA>B.Whensetto0%theAparametersarecontrollingthefilters,andwhensetto 100%,theBparameterscontrolthefilters.Between0and100%,thefiltersareatinterpolated positions.WhenmorphingfromAtoBsettings,theAfilter#1willchangetotheBfilter#1,A filter#2movestoBfilter#2,andsoon.Rangeis0to100%.

Compressors, Expanders, and Gates

AwiderangeofCompressionandExpansioneffectsisavailableinthePC3K.Thevarious algorithmsincludedifferentcombinationsof: compressorswithsoftkneecharacteristicthecompressionactioncomesingraduallyas thesignallevelapproachesthethreshold compressorswithhardkneecharacteristicthecompressionactioncomesinabruptly whenthesignalreachesthethreshold expanders multibandcompressorsthatbreakthesignalupintothreefrequencybandsandcompress themallseparately sidechainsoroutputEQs reverbsandcompressorsincombination gates gatedreverbs

AlloftheCompressionalgorithmsusetheseparameters: FdbkComprs(FeedbackCompression)selectswhethertousefeedforward(setthistoOut)or feedback(setthistoIn)compression.Thefeedforwardconfigurationusestheinputsignalas asidechainsource,whichisusefulwhenthecompressorhastoactreallyquickly.Thefeedback configurationusesthecompressoroutputasthesidechainsource,whichlendsitselftomore subtle,butnotasquickreacting,compression. Atk(Attack)Timeforthecompressorisadjustablefrom0.0to228.0ms. Rel(Release)Timeforthecompressorisadjustablefrom0to3000ms.

9-14

Effects Compressors, Expanders, and Gates

SmoothTimesmoothstheoutputoftheexpandersenvelopedetectorbyputtingalowpassfilter inthecontrolsignalpath.SmoothingwillaffecttheAttackorReleasetimesonlywhenthis parameterislongerthanoneoftheothertimes.Therangeis0.0to228.0ms. SignalDly(Delay)putsasmalldelayinthesignalrelativetothesidechainprocessing,sothat thecompressor(orgate)knowswhattheinputsignalisgoingtobebeforeithastoactonit. Thismeansthecompressioncankickinbeforeanattacktransientarrives.Inthe SoftKneeCompressandHardKneeCompressalgorithms,delayisreallyonlyusefulinfeed forwardconfiguration(FdbkComprsisOut).Forothercompressors,thedelaycanbeusefulin feedbackconfiguration(FdbkComprsisIn).Therangeis0to25ms. Ratioistheamountofgainreductionimposedonthecompressedsignal,adjustablefrom1.0:1 (noreduction)to100:1,andInf:1. ThresholdisthelevelindBFS(decibelsrelativetofullscale)abovewhichthesignalbeginstobe compressed.Adjustablefrom79.0to0dB. MakeUpGainallowsadditionaloutputgaintocompensateforgainreductioninthe compressor.ItisessentiallythesameparameterasOutGain,withwhichitissummed.The minimumis79.0,andthemaximumsummedgain(MakeUpGain+OutGain)is+24.0dB.

Expansion
AlgorithmscontainingExpandershavethesecontrols: AtkorExpAtk(Attack),howfasttheexpanderturnsoffwhentheinputsignalrisesabovethe thresholdlevel,adjustablefrom0.0to228.0ms. RelorExpRel(Release),howfasttheexpanderturnsbackonafterthesignaldropsbelowthe thresholdlevel,adjustablefrom0to3000ms. RatioorExpRatio,howmuchthegainisreducedbelowtheexpansionthreshold,adjustable from1:1.0(noexpansion)to1:17(extremedownwardexpansion). ThresholdorExpThreshold,thelevelbelowwhichthesignalisexpanded,adjustablefrom 79.0to0dB. Inaddition,thetwosegmentcompressorswithexpanderhaveseparateRatioandThreshold controlsforeachofthecompressionsegments.

Multiband Compression
TheMultibandCompressionalgorithmhasAttack,Release,Smooth,SignalDelay,Ratio, Threshold,andMakeUpGainparametersforeachofthethreebands(Low,Mid,and High).Inaddition,ithas: Crossover1andCrossover2.Thesesetthefrequencieswhichdividethethreecompression frequencybands.Thetwoparametersareinterchangeable,soeithermaycontainthehigher frequencyvalue.Therangeis16to25088Hz,inincrementsofasemitone.

Gates
SCInputletsyouselectwhichinputchannel(s)willcontrolthesidechain,whichisresponsible foropeningandclosingthegate.ItcanbesettoL,R,ortheaverageofthetwochannels, (L+R)/2.Youcanusethis,ifyouarrangethesignalpathsandpancontrolsappropriately,togate onemonosignalwithadifferentmonosignalthevenerableKeyfexeffect. GateTimeisthetimethatthegatewillstayopenafterthesidechainsignalreachesthe Threshold.Itsrangeis0to3000ms.

9-15

Effects Chorus

Duckingreversestheactionofthegate.NormallythisifsettoOff,andthegateopenswhen theinputsignalrisesabovethethreshold.ButwhenthisisOn,thegatecloseswhentheinput signalrisesabovethethreshold. Atk(Attack)Timeisthetimeforthegatetorampfromclosedtoopen(reverseifDuckingison) afterthesignalrisesabovethreshold,adjustablefrom0.0to228.0ms. Rel(ease)Timeisthetimeforthegatetorampfromopentoclosed(reverseifDuckingison) afterthegatetimerhaselapsed,adjustablefrom0to3000ms.

Super Gate
SuperGateisamoresophisticatedgatethatincludesthesetwofunctions: EnvTimeistheamountoftimeittakesforthesidechainsignalenvelopetodropbelowthe threshold.Ifthistimeistooshort,thegatecancloseandopentooquicklyfromamplitude modulationinthesidechainsignal.Ifitistoolong,thegatemaystaycloseduntiltheenvelope hasachancetofall,andsomesignalswouldnotgetthrough.Thisparameterisonlyineffect whenRetriggerisOff. Retriggerdetermineswhetherthegatetimerwillresetitselfeachtimethesidechainsignalgoes abovethethreshold.IfitisOn,thetimerresetsitself,andthereforethegatestaysopenaslong asthesignalisabovethethreshold,orkeepsgoingabovethethreshold,withintheinterval specifiedbyGateTime.IfitisOff,thegateclosesdownafterEnvTimehaselapsed, regardlessoffthesidechainlevel,andthesidechainlevelmustfallbelowthethresholdand comebackupagainbeforethegatewillopenagain.

Chorus
Chorusisaneffectwhichgivestheillusionofmultiplevoicesplayinginunison.Theeffectis achievedbydetuningcopiesoftheoriginalsignalandsummingthedetunedcopiesbackwith theoriginal.Lowfrequencyoscillators(LFOs)areusedtomodulatethepositionsofoutputtaps fromadelayline.Themovementofthetapscausesthepitchofthesignaltoshiftupanddown, producingtherequireddetuning. Thechorusesareavailableasstereoordualmono.Thestereochoruseshavetheparametersfor theleftandrightchannelsganged,whilethedualmonochoruseshaveseparateleftandright controls. FdbkLevelisthelevelofthefeedbacksignalfromtheLFO1delaytapintothedelayline. Negativevaluespolarityinvertthefeedbacksignal. TapLvlsetsthelevelsoftheLFOmodulateddelaytaps.Negativevaluespolarityinvertthe signal.Settinganytaplevelto0%turnsitoff. TapPansetsthestereopositionforagiventapsoutput.Therangeis100%forfullyleft,to100% forfullyright. LFORatesetsthespeedofmodulationofthedelaylineswitharangeof0.01to10Hz. LFODpthsetsthemaximumdetuningdepthoftheLFOmodulateddelaylines,witharange from0to50cents(=1/2semitone). TapDlyaddsextradelayinfrontoftheLFOmodulateddelaytapsfrom0to230ms. L/RPhaseorLFOnLRPhsadjuststherelativephasesoftheLFOsfortheleftandrightchannels inthestereoChoruses.

9-16

Effects Flanger

Flanger
Flangingistheprocessofaddingorsubtractingasignalwithatimedisplacedreplicaofitself, whichresultsinaseriesofnotchesinthefrequencyspectrum,generallyreferredtoasacomb filter.InthePC3K,theflangerisamultitapdelayline,all(butone)ofwhosetapscanhavetheir lengthsmodulatedupanddownbyalowfrequencyoscillator(LFO).TherateoftheLFOis expressedinTempo(seeChapter4). StatDlyLvl(StaticDelayLevel)isthelevelofthefirst,nonmovingtap.Negativevaluesinvert thepolarityofthetap.Therangeis100to100%;0%turnsthetapoff. DlyCrsandDlyFinarethecoarseandfinelengthcontrolsfortheStaticdelay(StatDly)and fortheminimumvalueofthemovingdelays(Dlyn).Thecoarserangeis0to228ms,andthe finerangeadjuststhecoarserangeinsamples(=1/48,000sec=20.8sec)from127to127. XcursCrsandXcursFindeterminehowfartheLFOmodulateddelaytapscanmovefromthe centeroftheirranges.ThetotalrangeoftheLFOsweepistwicetheexcursion.Iftheexcursionis setto0,theLFOdoesnotmoveandthetapbehaveslikeasimpledelaylinesettotheminimum delay.Thecoarserangeis0to228ms;therange0to5msismosteffectiveforflanging.Thefine rangeadjuststhecoarserangeinsamplesfrom127to127.

Quantize + Flange
TheQuantizeportionofthisalgorithmproducesdigitaldistortionknownasquantizationnoise, bylimitingthenumberofbitsavailabletothesignal. DynamRange(dynamicrange)controlshowmanybitstoremovefromthesignaldatawords. Thelowerthelevel,thegreaterthedistortion.At0dBthehottestofsignalswilltogglebetween onlytwoquantizationlevels,therebyproducingasquarewave.Every6dBaddeddoublesthe numberofquantizationlevels,reducingthenoiseandgettingclosertotheoriginalsignal.Ifthe signalhasalotofheadroom(availablesignallevelbeforedigitalclipping),thennotall quantizationlevelswillbereached.Rangeis0to144dB. Headroomsetstheavailablesignallevelbeforedigitalclipping.Settingthisproperlyprevents thesignalfromgettingridiculouslyloudatlowlevelsofDynamRange.Youwanttohaveit matchtheamountoflevelstillavailableabovetheinputsignal:thisisdonebyfindingthe DynamRangelevelatwhichthesignalstartsgettinglouder,andsettingHeadroomtomatchthe DynamRangevalue.Rangeis0to144dB. DCOffsetaddsapositiveDCOffsettotheinputsignal,whichallowsyoutoaltertheposition wheredigitalzeroiswithrespecttoyoursignal.AtlowDynamRangesettings,thiscancause theoutputtosputter.RangeisOff/79.0to0.0dB.

LaserVerb
LaserVerbisanewkindofreverbwhichproducesadelayedtrainofcloselyspacedreflections, orimpulses.Astimepasses,thespacingbetweentheimpulsesgetswider,whichcreatesa discerniblebuzzypitchthatgetslowerasthespacingincreases.Thesignalcanbefedbackinto itselftoextendtheeffect. DlyCoarseistheoveralldelaylength,whichcontrolsthedurationordecaytime.0.5secisa goodstartingpoint.Rangeis0to1.3secondsinthe2Uversionofthealgorithm,and0to2 secondsinthe3Uversion. DlyFineadjuststhedelaywitharesolutiondownto0.2ms.Rangeis20.0to20.0ms.

9-17

Effects Filters

Spacingdeterminesthestartingpitchofthedescendingbuzzandhowfastitdescends,by settingtheinitialseparationofimpulsesandthesubsequentrateofincreasingimpulse separation.Thespacingbetweenimpulsesisgiveninsamples(20.8s).Atlowvalues,thebuzz startsathighfrequenciesanddropsslowly,whileathighvaluesthebuzzstartsatalowerpitch anddropsrapidly.Rangeis0.0to40.0samples,witharesolutionof0.2sample. Contourcontrolstheoverallshapeofthereverb.Whensettoahighvalue,soundspassed throughthereverbstartatahighlevel,anditslowlydecays.Asthecontrolvalueisreduced,it takesmoretimefortheeffecttobuildupbeforedecaying.Atavalueofaround34%,thereverb behaveslikeareversereverb,buildinguptoahit.Whenitissettozero,thealgorithmactslikea simpledelay.Rangeis0to100%.

Filters
TherearefourtypesofResonantFilteralgorithmsinthePC3K.Allofthemhavethese parametersincommon: FilterType(orFiltType)canbeLowpass,Highpass,Bandpass,orNotch(bandcut). Resonanceistheresonanceofthefilter,adjustablefrom0to50dB.

Resonant Filter
Frequency(orFreq)isthefixedresonantfrequencyofthefilter.Itsrangeis16to8372Hz.

Envelope Filter
EnvelopeFilterisaresonantfilterwhosecenterfrequencycanbemadetovaryaccordingtothe leveloftheincomingsignal. FilterTypecanbeLowpass,Highpass,Bandpass,orNotch(bandcut). MinFreqistheminimumresonantfrequencyofthefilter,thatis,thefilterfrequencywhenthe inputgainisbelowthetriggeringthreshold.Itsrangeis16to8372Hz. Sweepdetermineshowfartheresonantfrequencymoveswhentheinputlevelincreases.At positivelevelsitmovesupinpitch,andatnegativelevelsitmovesdown.Thehighestpossible resonantfrequencyis8372Hz,thelowestis0Hz.Thisparametersrangeis100%to+100%. Resonanceistheresonanceofthefilter,adjustablefrom0to50dB. AtkRateadjuststheupwardslewoftheattackportionoftheenvelopedetector.Rangeis0to 300.0dB/sec. RelRateadjuststhedownwardslewofthereleaseportion.Rangeis0to300.0dB/sec. SmoothRateslowsdowntheenvelopefollower.IfitissettoalowerratethanAtkRateorRel Rate,itcandominatethoseparameters.Rangeis0to300.0dB/sec.

Triggered Filter
TheTriggeredFilterisasweepingresonantfilterthattriggerswhenacertaininputthresholdis reached,andthenfollowsitsownenvelope,consistingofaninstantaneousattackandan exponentialrelease,ratherthantheenvelopeoftheinputsignal. MaxFreqistheresonantfrequencyofthefilteratthepeakoftheinternalenvelope.Itcanbeset lowerthanMinFreq(above),inwhichcasethefilterwillsweepdownwards,thenbackup. Rangeis16to8372Hz.

9-18

Effects Distortion

Triggeristheinputsignalthresholdatwhichtheenvelopedetectortriggers.Rangeis79to 0dB. Retriggeristheinputsignalthresholdatwhichtheenvelopedetectorresets,sothatitcan triggeragain.ThisparameterisonlyusefulwhenitissetbelowthevalueofTrigger.Rangeis from79to0dB. EnvRateistheenvelopedetectordecayrate.Thiscanbeusedtopreventfalsetriggering.When thesignalenvelopefallsbelowtheretriggerlevel,thefiltercanbetriggeredagainwhenthe signalrisesabovethetriggerlevel.Sincetheinputsignalcanfluctuaterapidly,itisnecessaryto adjusttherateatwhichthesignalenvelopecanfalltotheretriggerlevel.Therangeis0to300.0 dB/sec. RelRateisthedownwardslew(release)rateofthetriggeredenvelopegenerator.Therangeis0 to300.0dB/sec. SmthRateslowsdowntheenvelopefollower.Ifsetlowerthanthereleaserate,itwilldominate it.Youcanalsousethesmoothingratetolengthentheattackoftheinternalenvelope.Therange is0to300.0dB/sec.

LFO Filter
TheLFOfilteriscontinuouslysweptbetweentworesonantfrequenciesoveraperiodoftime. TheLFOfrequency,expressedinBPMandbeats,canbefixedorsettofollowSystemtempo. (SeeChapter4forinformationabouttempocontrolofPC3Kparameters.) MinFreqandMaxFreqarethelowandhighlimitsoftheresonantfrequencyasthefilteris swept.YoucansettheMinFreqhigherthantheMaxFreq,inwhichcasethefilterwillsweep upsidedownrelativetothecontrollingclock.Therangeforbothis16to8372Hz. LFOShapeisthewaveformtypefortheLFO.ChoicesareSine,Saw+,Saw,Pulse,andTri. LFOPlsWid(PulseWidth).WhentheLFOShapeissettoPulse,thissetsthepulsewidthasa percentageofthewaveformperiod.Whenthewidthissetto50%,theresultisasquarewave. Thisparameterhasnoeffectifotherwaveformtypesarechosen.Rangeis0to100%. LFOSmoothsmooths(removesthehigherharmonicsfrom)theSaw+,Saw,andPulse waveforms.ASawtoothwavebecomesmorelikeatrianglewave,andaPulsewavebecomes morelikeasinewave.Rangeis0to100%.

Distortion
DistortionalgorithmsonthePC3Kmayalsoincludeaparametricequalizeroracabinet simulator. DistDriveappliesaboosttotheinputsignaltooverdrivethedistortionalgorithmintosoft clipping.Thiswilltendtomakethesignalveryloud,soyoumayhavetoreducetheOutGainas thisparameterisincreased.Rangeis0to96dB. Warmthisalowpassfilterinthedistortioncontrolpath.Thisfiltermaybeusedtoreducesome oftheharshnessofsomedistortionsettingswithoutreducingthebandwidthofthesignal. Rangeis16to25088Hz. Highpassallowsyoutoreducethebasscontentofthedistortioncontentinthesmaller distortionalgorithmsthatdonthavetrueparametricEQ.Rangeis16to25088Hz. CabPresetselectsfromeightcabinetsimulationswhichhavebeencreatedbasedon measurementsofrealguitaramplifiercabinets.Thepresetsare:Basic,Lead12,2x12,Open12, Open10,4x12,Hot2x12,andHot12.

9-19

Effects Rotating Speakers

CabBypassswitchesonandoffthecabinetsimulationpartofthealgorithm.Whenthisissetto In,thecabinetsimulationisactive;whenitisOut,thereisnocabinetaction. CabinetHPandCabinetLParehighpassandlowpassfilterstosetthefrequencyresponse limitsofthecabinets.Rangeofbothfiltersis16to25088Hz.

Polydistort
Thisisamorecomplexdistortionalgorithmthatprovidestwo,four,orsixstagesofdistortion. Curvencontrolsthecurvatureoftheindividualdistortionstages.0%isnocurvature(no distortionatall).At100%,thecurvebendsoversmoothlyandbecomesperfectlyflatrightbefore itgoesintoclipping.Maximumvalueis127%. LPnFreqareshelvingfrequenciesforonepolelowpassfiltersoneachofthedistortionstages. LP0Freqhandlestheinitiallowpasspriortothefirstdistortionstage.Theotherlowpass controlsfollowtheirrespectivedistortionstages.Rangeis16to25088Hz.

Rotating Speakers
AnalgorithmthatincludesRotatingSpeakersbreaksthesignalintotwofrequencybands, rotateseachbandseparatelythroughavirtualspeaker,andthencombinestheoutputswitha pairofvirtualmicrophoneswhoseanglerelativetothespeakersisadjustable.Anumberof verysophisticatedparametershavebeenincludedintheRotatingSpeakersalgorithm,togive theeffectagreatdegreeofrealism.Becauseofthecomplexityofthealgorithms,youmightwant toapproachanyparametersthatseemalittleobscuretoyouwithcaution. RotoInOutengagesorbypassestherotaryspeakereffect. Therearefourvirtualmicrophones,withtwoeachonthewoofer(LoMicAandLoMicB)and onthetweeter(HiMicAandHiMicB).Eachmicrophonehas: Pos(position),theangleofthemicrophonefromthefrontofthevirtualspeaker,from180to 180degrees; Lvl(level)from0to100%;and Pan,theleft/rightpanningofthemicrophonesoutput,from100%(fullleft)to100%(fullright). Otherparameters: LoBeamWandHiBeamWsettheacousticradiationpatterns(beamwidth)ofthetwo driversintherotatingspeaker.Ifyouimaginelookingdownontherotatingspeaker,thisisthe anglebetweenthe6dBlevelsofthebeam.Therangeisfrom45to360.At360,thedriveris omnidirectional. Xover(Crossover)isthefrequencyatwhichhighandlowfrequencybandsaresplitandsentto separaterotatingdrivers.Therangeis16to25088Hz. LoGainandHiGainarethegainsofthesignalpassingthroughtherotatingwooferortweeter, respectively.TherangeisOff/79.0to24.0dB. LoSizeandHiSizearetheeffectivesizes(radiusofrotation)oftherotatingspeakersin millimeters.ThisaffectstheamountofDopplershiftorvibratoofthelowfrequencysignal.The rangeis0to250mm. LoTremandHiTremcontrolthedepthoftremolo(amplitudemodulation)ofthesignals.Itis expressedasapercentageoffullscaletremolo.Therangeis0to100%.

9-20

Effects Rotating Speakers

LoResonateandHiResonatearesimulationsofcabinetresonantmodesexpressedasa percentage.Forrealism,youshoulduseverylowsettings.Therangeis0to100%. LoResDlyandHiResDlyarethenumberofsamplesofdelayineachresonatorcircuitin additiontotherotationexcursiondelay.Therangeis10to2550samples. LoResXcursandHiResXcursarethenumberofsamplesofdelaytosweepthroughthe resonatorattherotationrateofeachrotatingspeaker.Therangeis0to510samples. ResH/LPhssetstherelativephasesofthehighandlowresonators.Theanglevalueindegreesis somewhatarbitraryandyoucanexpecttheeffectofthisparametertoberathersubtle.The rangeis0to360.0degrees. MicAngleistheangleofthevirtualmicrophonesindegreesfromthefrontoftherotating speaker.Fortheleftmicrophonetheangleincreasesclockwise(whenviewedfromthetop), whilefortherightmicrophonetheangleincreasescounterclockwise.AssigningaMODtothis parametershouldbedonewithcaution:realtimeadjustmentstoitwillresultinlargesample skips,whichwillcauseclicksinthesignalpassingthrough.Therangeis0to360.0degrees.(In Distort+Rotaryonly.) Thefollowingparametersrelatetorotationspeed: Speedsetstherotatingspeakerstorunateithertheslowrateorthefastrate. Brake,whensettoOn,slowstherotatingspeakerstoahalt. LoMode,intheNormalsetting,willgiveyoufullcontrolofthelowfrequencyspeakerwith theSpeedparameter.TheNoAccelsettingwillholdthelowfrequencyspeakerattheslow speed,andtheSpeedparameterwillhavenoeffectonitsspeed,thoughBrakewillstillwork.In theStoppedposition,thelowfrequencyspeakerwillnotspinatall. LoSlowandHiSlowaretherotationratesinhertz(Hz)ofthespeakerswhenSpeedissetto Slow. LoFastandHiFastaretherotationrateinhertz(Hz)ofthespeakerswhenSpeedissettoFast. LoSlow>FstandHiSlow>Fstarethetimesforthespeakerstoacceleratefromtheslowspeedto thefastspeed. LoFst>SlowandHiFst>Slowarethetimesforthespeakertodeceleratefromthefastspeedto theslowspeed. LoAccelCrvandHiAccelCrvaretheshapesoftheaccelerationcurvesforthespeakers.0%isa constantacceleration.Positivevaluescausethespeakertospeedupslowlyatfirstthenquickly reachthefastrate.Negativevaluescauseaquickinitialspeedupthenslowlysettleintothefast speed.Ifsettoalownegativevalue,itwillovershoot. LoSpinDirandHiSpinDirarethedirectionsofrotationofthespeakers.Thechoiceisclockwise (CW)orcounterclockwise(CCW).

Vibrato/Chorus
TheVibrato/Chorusalgorithm(andalsotheKB3Effectsalgorithm)simulatesthevibratoand choruseffectsonatonewheelorgan,andisusedinconjunctionwiththeRotarySpeaker.Ithas severaluniqueparameters: VibChInOutisanin/outswitchfortheVibrato/Choruseffect. Vib/ChoristhetypeofVibrato/Choruseffecttobeused.Thechoicesarefromthreevibratos, V1,V2,V3,orthreechoruses,C1,C2,C3.

9-21

Effects Tremolo and AutoPan

Tremolo and AutoPan

TremoloisamplitudemodulationusinganLFO.AutoPanmovesthesignalbetweentheleftand rightchannels,usinganLFO.Theyhaveseveralparametersincommonandseveralunique ones. LFORateistherateoftheLFO.Therangeis0to10.00Hz,orinTremoloBPMalgorithm,0to 12.00xthetempo. RateScalemultipliesthespeedoftheLFOrateintotheaudiorange.Therangeis1to25088x. Whenabove16x,thevaluesincrementinsemitonesteps.WhentheLFORateissetto1.00Hz, thevalueofthisparameterisequaltotheLFOfrequencyinHertz. LFOShapeisthewaveformtypefortheLFO.ChoicesareSine,Saw+,Saw,Pulse,andTri. LFOPlsWidorPulseWidth.WhentheLFOShapeissettoPulse,thissetsthepulsewidthasa percentageofthewaveformperiod.Whenthewidthissetto50%,theresultisasquarewave. Thisparameterhasnoeffectifotherwaveformtypesarechosen.Rangeis0to100%.

AutoPan
Origindeterminestheaxisforthepanningmotion.At0%,thepanningiscenteredbetweenthe speakers.Positivevaluesshifttheaxistotheright,whilenegativevaluesshiftittotheleft.At 100%or+100%(therangelimits),thereisnopanningaction. ImageWidthisthewidthoftheoriginalinputprogrammaterialbeforeitisautopanned.At0% (minimum),theinputimageisshrunktoasinglepointsource,allowingmaximumpanning excursion.At100%(maximum),theoriginalwidthismaintainedsonopanningcanoccur. PanWidthcontrolstheamountofpanexcursion.Itisthepercentageoftotalpanningmotion availableafterOriginandImageWidthareset.Rangeis0to100%. CentrAtten(Attenuation)istheamountthesignalleveldropsasitispannedthroughthecenter ofthestereoimage.Forthesmoothesttracking,awidelyacceptedsubjectivereferenceis3dB. Valuesabove3dBwillcausesomewhatofabumpinlevelasanimagepassesthroughthe center,whilevaluesbelow3dBwillcauseadip.Rangeis12to0dB.

Tremolo
DepthcontrolstheamountofattenuationappliedwhentheLFOisatitsdeepestexcursion point.Rangeis0to100%. LFOPhaseshiftsthephaseofthetremoloLFOrelativetothebeatreference.Rangeis0.0to 360.0degrees. 50%WeightistherelativeamountofattenuationaddedwhentheLFOisatthe6dBpoint.This causestheLFOshapetobowup(positivevalues)ordown(negativevalues).Rangeis16to 3dB. L/RPhasesetsthephaserelationshipofthechannels.InflipstheleftchannelsLFOoutof phase,withtheresultthattheeffectturnsintoanautobalancer.OutleavestheleftLFOalone.

Pitcher
Pitcherappliesafiltertotheinputsignalwhichhasaseriesofpeaksinthefrequencyresponse. Thesepeaksarenormallyadjustedsothattheirfrequenciesareallmultiplesofaspecific, selectablefrequency,whichimposesastrongsenseofpitchattheselectedfundamental frequency.

9-22

Effects Ring Modulation

Pitch.Thefundamentalpitchimposedupontheinput,inMIDInotenumbersfromC1toG9. PtchOffstisanoffsetfromthepitchfrequencyinsemitones,from12.0to12.0.Itcanbeuseful toassignpitchbend,aribbon,oranothercontinuouscontrollertothisparameterthrougha MOD. OddWts,PairWts,QuartrWts,HalfWtsareparametersthatcontroltheshapeofthe frequencyresponseofPitcher.Anexactdescriptionofwhateachonedoesis,unfortunately, impossible,sincethereisagreatdealofinteractionbetweenthem.Formoreinformationand examples,seetheKSP8AlgorithmReferenceGuide.

Ring Modulation
Ringmodulationmultipliestwosignals(thecarrierandthemodulator)togethertoproduce unusual,oftennonharmonic,overtones.TheRingModulatoralgorithminthePC3Khastwo modes:L*Rinwhichtwomonosignalsaremodulatedtogether;andOsc,inwhichthe inputisstereo,anditismodulatedwiththesumoffivewaveformsthataregeneratedfrom oscillatorswithinthealgorithmitself.Fouroftheseoscillatorsaresinewaves,whileone (Oscillator1)offersaselectionofwaveforms. Wet/Dry.WhenthealgorithmisinL*Rmode,thiscontrolshowmuchoftheleftsignalonlyis passeddry(therightsignalisntpasseddryatall). ModModeselectsbetweenthetwomodes. Osc1LvlisthelevelofOscillator1,from0to100%. Osc1FreqisthefrequencyofOscillator1,from16to25088Hz. Osc1ShapeisthewaveshapeofOscillator1,selectablefromSine,Saw+,Saw,Pulse,andTri. Osc1PlsWid(PulseWidth).WhenOsc1ShapeissettoPulse,thissetsthepulsewidthasa percentageofthewaveformperiod.Whenthewidthissetto50%,theresultisasquarewave. Thisparameterhasnoeffectifotherwaveformtypesarechosen.Rangeis0to100%. Osc1Smoothsmooths(removesthehigherharmonicsfrom)theSaw+,Saw,andPulse waveforms.ASawtoothwavebecomesmorelikeatrianglewave,andaPulsewavebecomes morelikeasinewave.Rangeis0to100%. Theotherfouroscillators,Sine2throughSine5,eachhaveLvlandFreqcontrols.

Stereo Simulation
TheMonotoStereoalgorithmconvertsamonauralinputtosimulatedstereooutput. InSelectselectstheinputsignaltobestereoized.ItcanbeLeft,Right,orboth:(L+R)/2. CenterGainisthelevelofthesummedleftandrightchannels.RangeisOff/79.0to24.0dB. DiffGainisthelevelofthedifferencesignalproduced,whichisthespatialcomponentofthe stereosignal.RangeisOff/79.0to24.0dB. DiffBassGcontrolsthegainofabassshelffilteronthedifferencesignal.Byboostingthelow frequencycomponentsofthedifferencesignal,youcanincreasethesenseofacoustic envelopment.Rangeis79.0to24.0dB. DiffBassFisthetransitionfrequencyforthebassshelffrequency.Rangeis16to25088Hz.

9-23

Effects Stereo Analyze

TheprocessedsignalissplitintothreefrequencybandsLo,Mid,andHigheachofwhichcan bedelayedandpannedseparately. Crossover1and2arethetwoCrossoverfrequenciesatwhichthebandsplitfilterssplitthe signalintothreebands.Thetwoparametersareinterchangeable:eithermayhaveahigher frequencythantheother.Rangeis16to25088Hz. Pan[High/Mid/Low]setsthepanpositionforeachband.Rangeis100%(fullyleft)to100% (fullyright.) Delay[High/Mid/Low]setsthedelayforeachband.Rangeis0to1000ms.

Stereo Image
Thisalgorithmprovidesenhancementforastereosignal.Italsofeaturesastereocorrelation meter.ItusessomeparametersfromMonotoStereoandsomefromStereoAnalyze (following).

Stereo Analyze
Inthisalgorithmyoucanlookatthetwochannelsofastereosignal,andalsotheirinversions, sums,anddifferences.Youcanadjusttheirgains,andapplysmalldelaystoeitherorboth channels. LInvertandRInvertinvertsthephaseofthechannels. LOutModeandROutModedetermineswhichsignalisgoingtobemeteredandsenttothe outputofeachofthechannels.Thechoicesforeachare:L(left),R(right),(L+R)/2 (normalizedsum),(LR)/2(normalizeddifference),andpolarityinvertedversionsofthese. L/RDelaytimebalancesthetwosignals.Atnegativevalues,therightchannelisdelayed, whileatpositivevalues,theleftchannelisdelayed.Therangeis500to500samples. RMSSettlecontrolshowfasttheRMS(averagereading)meterscanriseorfallwithchanging signallevels.Rangeis0to300dB/second.

FXMod Diagnostic
Thisalgorithmallowsyoutoviewthecurrentlevelsofanydatasliders,MIDIcontrols,switches, orinternallygeneratedVASTLFOs,ASRs,FUNs,etc.whichareavailableasmodulation sources.Ithasnoeffectonanysignalbeingroutedthroughit. Uptoeightmodulationsourcesmaybemonitoredsimultaneously.Meters#1through#4can monitorbipolarsources,meaningsourcesthatcanhavebothpositiveandnegativevalues.The rangeofthebipolarmetersis1to+1.Fourmonopolarmeters#5through#8providebetter resolution,buttherangeislimitedto0though+1.Usethemonopolarmetersforsourceswhich youdonotexpecttogonegative. Eightparametersareprovidedtoconnectmodulationsourcestothemeters.Theparameter valuesarefixedatNoDpthandhavenofunctionexcepttoconnectsourcestometers. Tousethealgorithm,saveastereopresetcontainingthealgorithm,thenachaincontainingthat preset.GotooneoftheChainMODpages,andchooseoneofthemeterparameters(BipoleNor MonopoleN).YouwillnotbeabletomodifytheAdjustorDepthfields,butyoucanselectany sourceyouwant.YoucanviewthemetersonPARAMpage2. Bipole1throughBipole4attachbipolarmodulationsources(thosethatcangopositiveor negative)tothebipolarmeters.Theparametersarenotadjustable.

9-24

Effects Mono Algorithms

Monopole5throughMonopole8attachmonopolarmodulationsources(cangopositiveonly)to themonopolarmeters.Theparametersarenotadjustable.

Mono Algorithms
Manystereoalgorithmsarealsoavailableinamonoconfiguration.RefertotheKSP8Algorithm ReferenceGuideforcompleteinformationonMonoalgorithmparameters.Youcandownloada copyofthismanualattheKurzweilMusicSystemswebsite:www.kurzweil.com.

9-25

Effects Mono Algorithms

9-26

MIDI Mode The TRANSMIT Page

Chapter 10 MIDI Mode

ThePC3KsendsandreceivesMIDIontraditional5pinDINconnectorsandthroughUSB.MIDI canbesentandreceivedonallportsatonce. PresstheMIDImodebuttontoenterMIDImode.TherearethreepagesinMIDImode: TRANSMIT(XMITsoftbutton) RECEIVE(RECVsoftbutton) CHANNELS(CHANLSsoftbutton)

YoullusethesepagestodeterminewhatMIDImessagesthePC3Ktransmits,andhowit respondstotheMIDImessagesitreceivesaswellashoweachMIDIchannelbehaves. WhenyouenterMIDImode,youllseeoneofthethreeavailableMIDImodepages.

The TRANSMIT Page

PresstheXMITsoftbutton,andtheTRANSMITpageappears.Usetheparametersonthispage tocontrolhowthePC3KsendsMIDIinformationtoitsUSBorMIDIOutport.Thesesettingsto someextentaffectthePC3Ksresponsetoitsownkeyboardandcontrollers,buttheyprimarily affecttheresponsesofotherMIDIdevicesthatarereceivingMIDIfromthePC3Konthechannel specifiedwiththeChannelparameteronthispage. Whenaprogramisselected,eitherinProgrammodeorinQuickAccessmode,allofthesettings oftheTRANSMITpageareineffect,exceptforChgSetups,whichonlyapplieswhenloadinga setup. Ifasetupisselected,inSetupmodeorinQuickAccessmode,allofthesettingsofthe TRANSMITpageareineffectexceptforControlSetup,Channel,andProgChang(seebelowfor details.) WhensendingMIDItotheUSBorMIDIoutportfromSongmode,Songmodeignoresallofthe settingsontheTransmitpageexceptControlSetup(seebelowfordetails.)

10-1

MIDI Mode The TRANSMIT Page

Parameter Control Setup Destination Channel Transposition Velocity Map Pressure Map Program Change Change Setups

Range of Values Setup List USB_MIDI, MIDI, Local 1 to 16 60 semitones Velocity Map List Pressure Map List Off, On Immediate, KeyUp

Default 126 Internal Voices USB_MIDI+MIDI+Local 1 0 1 Linear 1 Linear On Immediate

Control Setup
Thisiswhereyouselectthecurrentcontrolsetup,Zone1ofwhichsetsthephysicalcontroller assignmentsforallprogramswhileyoureinProgrammode.Thisparameterdoesnotapplyto Setupmode.RefertoTheControlSetup on page 72formoreinformationonthecontrolsetup.

Destination
TheDestinationparametertellsthePC3KwhichportswillcarryMIDIinformation,and determinesifthePC3KssoundenginewillreceiveMIDIdata.Selectthedesireddestinationor anycombinationofdestinationsdependingonyourneeds.Forexample,avalueofLocal disablestheUSBandMIDIOutports.UsethissettingwhenyouwanttoplaythePC3K,butnot tosendanyMIDIinformationtootherMIDIinstruments(localcontrolonly.)Alternatively,you wouldsetthisparametertoMIDIorUSB_MIDIifyouonlywantedtosendMIDIdatatoother MIDIinstrumentsfromtheMIDIportorUSBport,andnoMIDIdatawouldbesentlocallyto thePC3Kssoundengine.AvalueofMIDI+LocalwouldsendMIDIdataonlytotheMIDIout portandthePC3Kssoundengine. ForSetupmode,thisparameteractsasafinalfilterforwhichportswillsendMIDIinformation. Forexample,ifthisparameterissettoMIDI_USB+MIDI,andasetupzonehasitsDestination parametersettoMIDI+LocalontheSetupMode:CH/PRGpage,MIDIdatawillbesentonly throughthetraditionalMIDIport.Bothparameters,MIDIXmitDestinationandthesetup DestinationparameterintheSetupMode:CH/PRGpageactasfiltersandbothareactiveinSetup mode. Note:ThisparameterhasnoeffectonSongmode.InSongmodeeachtracksdestinationignoresthis parameter.

Channel
ThisdefineswhichMIDIchannelthePC3KusestotransmitMIDImessageswhennotusinga setuporSongmode(eachzonedeterminesthisinasetup,eachtrackdeterminesthisinasong.) ThevalueforthisparametermatchesthecurrentMIDIchanneldisplayedonthetoplineofthe Programmodepage.IfyouchangethecurrentMIDIchannelwhileinProgrammode,the settingofthisparameterchangesaccordingly,andviceversa.

Transpose
ThisparameteraffectsthetranspositionthatsappliedtotheMIDIdatastream.Adjustingthis parametertransposesthePC3Ksnotes,aswellasnotesonslavesreceivingfromthePC3K.This transpositionsettingmirrorstranspositionsettingsfromtheProgramandSetupmainpages.Its valueisaddedtotranspositionsettingsmadeelsewhere.ThisparameterhasnoeffectonMIDI datasentfromSongmode.

10-2

MIDI Mode The TRANSMIT Page

Velocity Map (Transmit)

ChangetheMIDITransmitVelocityMapsettingifyouaretriggeringexternalMIDIgearwhich isproducingnotesthataretooloudortooquietbasedonyourplayingstyle(howlightorheavy thatyouplaythekeys.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidestrangeofvelocityexpression,but youmaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnotsuityourplayingstyle. MIDI Sources PC3KKeyboard MIDIInviaMIDIInportorUSBComputerport

VelocityMapSettingsonMIDIModeReceivePage

KEYVELpageforcurrentControlSetup(inProgramMode)orcurrentZone(inSetupMode)

VelocityMapSettingsonMasterModeMAPSPage

PC3KSongMode

VelocityMapSettingsonMIDIModeTransmitPage

MIDI Destinations PC3KSoundEngine to PC3Kaudiooutputs MIDIOutviaMIDIOutportorUSBComputerport

ThetransmitVelocityMapaffectsthewaythePC3KsendsMIDIvelocityvaluestoitsUSBor MIDIOutport(seethecircledboxaboveforitslocationintheMIDIsignalflow.)Differentmaps outputdifferentMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesamereceivedMIDIattackvelocity.Eachmap appliesadifferentcurvetoreceivedMIDIattackvelocitiesandremapsthemtonewvelocities beforetransmittingthemtotheUSBorMIDIOutport(thisparameterhasnoeffectonMIDI datasentfromSongmodeortothePC3Kssoundengine.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidest rangeofvelocityexpression,butyoumaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnot suityourplayingstyle.SeethediagramabovefortheotherpagesthataffecttheMIDIattack velocitybeforereachingthetransmitVelmap. Thedefaultmap,Linear,allowsMIDIvelocitiestopassunchanged.MapsLight13makeit increasinglyeasiertoproducehighMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesamekeystrikevelocity(with Light3beingtheeasiest,)sothesemapsmayworkbetterforuserswhoplaywithalighter touch.Hard13makeitincreasinglyhardertoproducehighMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesame keystrikevelocity(withHard3beingthehardest,)sothesemapsmayworkbetterforusers whoplaywithahardertouch.PianoTouchsimulatesthegeneralvelocityresponseofan acousticpiano,andisbestsuitedforplayingacousticpianosounds.EasyTouchissimilartothe Lightsettings,makinghighvelocitieseasiertoplay,butitallowsmoresensitivecontrolover playinghighvelocitiesbynotboostingtheMIDIvelocityforfaststrikevelocitiesasmuchasit doesformediumstrikevelocities.GMReceivemimicsthevelocitymapcommonlyusedby keyboardsthatusetheGeneralMIDI(GM)soundset.TheGMReceivemapmakesmedium strikevelocitiesproducehigherMIDIvelocitiescomparedtotheLinearmap.

10-3

MIDI Mode The TRANSMIT Page

Pressure Map (Transmit)

ChangetheTransmitPressureMapsettingifyouaretriggeringexternalMIDIgearwhichis producingMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesthataretoohighortoolowbasedonyourplaying style(howsoftorhardthatyoupressthekeys.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidestrangeof pressureexpression,butyoumaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnotsuit yourplayingstyle. MIDI Sources PC3KKeyboard MIDIInviaMIDIInportorUSBComputerport

PressureMapSettingsonMIDIModeReceivePage

PRESSpageforcurrentControlSetup(inProgramMode)orcurrentZone(inSetupMode)

PressureMapSettingsonMasterModeMAPSPage

PC3KSongMode

PressureMapSettingsonMIDIModeTransmitPage

MIDI Destinations PC3KSoundEngine to PC3Kaudiooutputs MIDIOutviaMIDIOutportorUSBComputerport

ThetransmitPressureMapaffectsthewaythePC3KsendsMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesto itsUSBorMIDIOutport(seethecircledboxaboveforitslocationintheMIDIsignalflow.) DifferentmapsoutputdifferentMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesforthesamereceivedMIDI pressure(aftertouch)value.EachmapappliesadifferentcurvetoreceivedMIDIpressure (aftertouch)valuesandremapsthemtonewvaluesbeforetransmittingthemtotheUSBorMIDI Outport(thisparameterhasnoeffectonMIDIdatasentfromSongmodeortothePC3Ks soundengine.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidestrangeofpressure(aftertouch)expression, butyoumaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnotsuityourplayingstyle.See thediagramabovefortheotherpagesthataffectMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesbefore reachingthetransmitPressureMap. Thedefaultmap,Linear,allowsMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuestopassunchanged.Maps24 makeitincreasinglyeasiertoproduceMIDIpressurevaluesforthesamephysicalpressure appliedtoakey(with4Easiestbeingtheeasiest.)Maps47makeitincreasinglyharderto produceMIDIpressurevaluesforthesamephysicalpressureappliedtoakey(with7Hardest beingthehardest.)

10-4

MIDI Mode The RECEIVE Page

Program Change (ProgChang)

WhenProgChangissettoOn,thePC3KsendsprogramchangecommandstoitsUSBorMIDI OutportwhenyouselectprogramsorsetupsfromthefrontpanelorfromyourMIDIcontroller. SelectavalueofOffwhenyouwanttochangeprogramsonthePC3Kbutdontwanttosend programchangecommandstotheUSBorMIDIOutport.Thisparameterdoesntaffectthetype ofprogramchangecommandthatssent;itjustdetermineswhetheranycommandissentatall. (ThetypeofprogramchangecommandisdeterminedbythesettingsontheCH/PROGpagein theSetupEditorofyourcontrolsetup.SeeTheControlSetup on page 72formoredetails.) Note:TheProgChangparameterappliestoallmodesexceptSongmodeandSetupmode(orwhenasetup isloadedfromQuickAccessmode.)SetupsdisregardtheProgChangsettingandinsteadusethe EntryProgChgparameterontheSetupMode:CH/PROGpage(SeeTheChannel/Program(CH/PROG) Page on page 76.)SongsdisregardthisProgChangsettingandinsteadusetheProgChangparameteron theSong:EventFilterPlaybackpage,accessedfromthePLYFLTsoftbuttoninSongmode.

Change Setups (ChgSetups)

Thisparameterdeterminestheexacttimingofsetupchangeswhenyouselectadifferent setupeitherbyanormaldataentrymethodorviaMIDIprogramchangecommands.Choose KeyUptoindicatethatyouwantsetupchangestotakeplaceonlywhenyouvereleasedall currentlyheldnotes.ChooseImmediatetoindicatethatyouwantsuchchangestohappen immediatelywhenyouselectthesetup.

The RECEIVE Page

PressRECVtoselecttheRECEIVEpage,whereyoudefinethePC3Ksresponsetoincoming MIDIsignals(withoneexceptionpertainingtoQuickAccessmode,whichwellexplainlater).
Parameter Basic Channel MIDI Mode All Notes Off Program Change Mode Velocity Map Pressure Map System Exclusive ID Bank Select Local Keyboard Channel Range of Values 1 to 16 Omni, Poly, Multi Normal, Ignore Program Change Type List Velocity Map List Pressure Map List 0 to 127 Ctl 0, Ctl 32, Ctl 0/32 None, 1 to 16 Default 1 Multi Normal Extended 1 Linear 1 Linear 0 Ctl 0/32 None

10-5

MIDI Mode The RECEIVE Page

Basic Channel
ThebasicchanneldetermineswhichchannelwillalwaysbeavailabletoreceiveMIDI information.DependingontheMIDIreceivemode(below),theBasicchannelmaybetheonly receivingchannel,oroneofseveral.

MIDI Receive Mode (MIDI Mode)

TheMIDIModeparameterdeterminestheMIDIreceivingcapabilitiesofthePC3K.Whensetto Omni,thePC3KrespondstoincomingMIDIeventsonallMIDIchannels,andplaysthemon thecurrentchannel.Thisisnormallyusedfordiagnosticpurposesonly. AtasettingofPoly,thePC3Krespondsonlytoeventsthataresentonthesamechannelasthe PC3KscurrentMIDIchannel(theonedisplayedonthetoplineoftheProgrammodepage).In Polymode,thecurrentlyselectedchannelisalwaysthebasicchannel,soifyouchangechannels, thebasicchannelchangesaccordingly. WithavalueofMulti(thedefault),thePC3Krespondstoeventsonallactivechannels.Thisis themodeyoullusewhenyouredrivingthePC3Kwithasequencer,sinceyoucanplaya differentprogramoneachchannel.Atthissetting,youcanturnindividualchannelsonandoff (ontheCHANNELSpage,describedlaterinthischapter).

All Notes Off

IfthisparametersvalueissettoNormal,thePC3KrespondstoAllNotesOffmessagesreceived overMIDI.Ignorecausesthesemessagestobeignored.IfyoureusingaRolandproductasa MIDIcontrollerforyourPC3K,youllwanttosetthevalueofthisparametertoIgnore.Thisis becausesomeolderRolandproductsoccasionallysendanAllNotesOffmessagewhennokeys arehelddownevenifyouresustainingnoteswithapedal.Youmightfindallyoursustains missingfromyoursequence,forexample,ifyouredrivingyourPC3KfromoneofRolands hardwaresequencers.SettingthisparametertoIgnoretakescareofthisproblem. Regardlessofthesettingforthisparameter,thePC3KalwaysrespondstoitsownPanicbutton byshuttingoffallactivenotesandcontrollers.

Program Change Mode (PrgChgMode)

ThisdetermineshowthePC3KrespondstoprogramchangecommandsreceivedviaMIDI.See ProgramChangeFormats on page 1015foranexplanationofthevariousvaluesavailableforthis parameter.

10-6

MIDI Mode The RECEIVE Page

Velocity Map (Receive)

ChangethereceiveVelocityMapsettingifyouaretriggeringthePC3KwithexternalMIDIgear whichisproducingnotesthataretooloudortooquiet.Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidest rangeofvelocityexpression,butyoumaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnot suityourplayingstyle. MIDI Sources PC3KKeyboard MIDIInviaMIDIInportorUSBComputerport

VelocityMapSettingsonMIDIModeReceivePage

KEYVELpageforcurrentControlSetup(inProgramMode)orcurrentZone(inSetupMode)

VelocityMapSettingsonMasterModeMAPSPage

PC3KSongMode

VelocityMapSettingsonMIDIModeTransmitPage

MIDI Destinations PC3KSoundEngine to PC3Kaudiooutputs MIDIOutviaMIDIOutportorUSBComputerport

ThereceiveVelocityMapaffectsthewaythePC3KreceivesMIDIvelocityvaluesfromitsUSB orMIDIInport(seethecircledboxaboveforitslocationintheMIDIsignalflow.)Different mapsoutputdifferentMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesamereceivedMIDIattackvelocity.Each mapappliesadifferentcurvetoreceivedMIDIattackvelocitiesandremapsthemtonew velocitiesbeforelettingthempass(thisparameterhasnoeffectonMIDIdatasentfromthe PC3Kskeyboard.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidestrangeofvelocityexpression,butyou maywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnotsuityourplayingstyle.Seethe diagramabovefortheotherpagesthataffecttheMIDIattackvelocitybeforereachingthe receiveVelocityMap. Thedefaultmap,Linear,allowsMIDIvelocitiestopassunchanged.MapsLight13makeit increasinglyeasiertoproducehighMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesamekeystrikevelocity(with Light3beingtheeasiest,)sothesemapsmayworkbetterforuserswhoplaywithalighter touch.Hard13makeitincreasinglyhardertoproducehighMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesame keystrikevelocity(withHard3beingthehardest,)sothesemapsmayworkbetterforusers whoplaywithahardertouch.PianoTouchsimulatesthegeneralvelocityresponseofan acousticpiano,andisbestsuitedforplayingacousticpianosounds.EasyTouchissimilartothe Lightsettings,makinghighvelocitieseasiertoplay,butitallowsmoresensitivecontrolover playinghighvelocitiesbynotboostingtheMIDIvelocityforfaststrikevelocitiesasmuchasit doesformediumstrikevelocities.GMReceivemimicsthevelocitymapcommonlyusedby keyboardsthatusetheGeneralMIDI(GM)soundset.TheGMReceivemapmakesmedium strikevelocitiesproducehigherMIDIvelocitiescomparedtotheLinearmap.

10-7

MIDI Mode The RECEIVE Page

Pressure Map (Receive)

ChangethereceivePressureMapsettingifyouaretriggeringthePC3KwithexternalMIDIgear whichisproducingMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesthataretoohighortoolowbasedonyour playingstyle(howsoftorhardthatyoupressthekeys.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidest rangeofpressure(aftertouch)expression,butyoumaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthe defaultdoesnotsuityourplayingstyle. MIDI Sources PC3KKeyboard MIDIInviaMIDIInportorUSBComputerport

PressureMapSettingsonMIDIModeReceivePage

PRESSpageforcurrentControlSetup(inProgramMode)orcurrentZone(inSetupMode)

PressureMapSettingsonMasterModeMAPSPage

PC3KSongMode

PressureMapSettingsonMIDIModeTransmitPage

MIDI Destinations PC3KSoundEngine to PC3Kaudiooutputs MIDIOutviaMIDIOutportorUSBComputerport

ThereceivePressureMapaffectsthewaythePC3KreceivesMIDIpressure(aftertouch)values fromitsUSBorMIDIInport(seethecircledboxaboveforitslocationintheMIDIsignalflow.) DifferentmapsoutputdifferentMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesforthesamereceivedMIDI pressure(aftertouch)value.EachmapappliesadifferentcurvetoreceivedMIDIpressure (aftertouch)valuesandremapsthemtonewvaluesbeforelettingthempass(thisparameterhas noeffectonMIDIdatasentfromthePC3Kskeyboard.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidest rangeofpressure(aftertouch)expression,butyoumaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthe defaultdoesnotsuityourplayingstyle.Seethediagramabovefortheotherpagesthataffect MIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesbeforereachingthereceivePressureMap. Thedefaultmap,Linear,allowsMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuestopassunchanged.Maps24 makeitincreasinglyeasiertoproduceMIDIpressurevaluesforthesamephysicalpressure appliedtoakey(with4Easiestbeingtheeasiest.)Maps47makeitincreasinglyharderto produceMIDIpressurevaluesforthesamephysicalpressureappliedtoakey(with7Hardest beingthehardest.)

10-8

MIDI Mode The RECEIVE Page

System Exclusive ID (SysExID)

TheSysExIDparameterdifferentiatesbetweenmorethanoneMIDIdeviceofthesamemodel. Youwontneedtochangethedefaultsettingof0unlessyouhavemultiplePC3Ks(orK2600s, K2500s,orK2000s)receivingSysExmessagesfromasinglesource.Inthatcase,makesureeach instrumenthasadifferentSysExID.ThenyoucandirectSysExmessagestotheappropriate PC3KwiththeSysExIDbytethatsincludedwitheverySysExmessage.Avalueof127specifies OmniReceive.Thatis,atthisvalue,aPC3KrespondstoaSysExmessageregardlessofthe SysExIDofthemessage.

Bank Select
BankSelectallowsyoutochoosebetweenhavingthePC3KrespondtoController0orController 32orboth.Thereasonforthisisthatvariousmanufacturershavechosenonemethodorthe other.Thethreepossiblevaluesforthisparameterare: Ctl0 Ctl32 Ctl0/32 Respondstocontroller0only. Respondstocontroller32only. Respondsto0or32.

10-9

MIDI Mode The RECEIVE Page

Local Keyboard Channel (LocalKbdCh)

TheLocalKeyboardChannelparametermainlyaffectshowexternalMIDIdevicesinteractwith SetupMode.WhentheLocalKbdChparameterissettomatchthechannelonwhichtheexternal MIDIdeviceistransmitting,thesetupwillplayontheexternalMIDIdeviceasitdoesonthe PC3Kskeyboard.WhentheLocalKbdChparameterissettoOff,anexternalMIDIdevicewill triggerasingleprogram.ThetriggeredprogramwillbeonaZonethathasaChannelparameter (ontheSetupEditorCH/PROGpage)whichmatchesthechannelonwhichtheexternalMIDI deviceistransmitting.(IfnoZonesChannelparametermatches,theexternaldevicewilltrigger theprogramthatwaslastusedbythatchannelinProgramorSetupMode.)WhentheProgram ofaSetupZoneistriggeredthisway,SetupMIDIparameters(mostnoticeablykeyrangeand transposition)willnotbeapplied.(SeeInputChannel on page 78formoreexternalMIDIdevice optionsinSetupmode.) TheLocalKeyboardChannelparameteralsoaffectshowexternalMIDIdevicesinteractwith ProgramMode.WhentheLocalKbdChparameterissettomatchthechannelonwhichthe externalMIDIdeviceistransmitting,theexternalMIDIdevicewillplaytheprogramonthe channelcurrentlyselectedontheProgramModemainpage.WhentheLocalKbdChparameter issettoOff,anexternalMIDIdevicewilltriggertheprogramonthechannelthatitis transmitting,nomatterwhichchanneliscurrentlyselectedontheProgramModemainpage. Continuous Controller Messages From External MIDI Devices WhenusinganexternalMIDIdevicewiththePC3K,youcancontrolmanyofthePC3Ks programparametersbysendingMIDIContinuousControllermessages(CCs)fromtheexternal MIDIdevice.EachparameterthatyouwishtocontrolmusthaveaCCnumberassigned.To controlaparameter,youmustsendthecorrectCCnumbertothechannelwhichcontainsthe program. FordetailsoncontrollableparametersofVASTprogramsseeTheDSPModulation(DSPMOD) Page on page 629,TheLFOPage on page 637,TheASRPage on page 639,TheFunction(FUN) Page on page 640,TheEnvelopeControl(ENVCTL)Page on page 644,TheMOD Pages on page 99,FXLFO,FXASR,andFXFUNpages on page 99.ForKB3programsseeThe PITCHPage on page 663,TheAMPPage on page 663,TheLFO,ASR,andFUN Pages on page 671,andTheMODPages on page 99,FXLFO,FXASR,andFXFUN pages on page 99.
Assigning A CC Control Source

Foreachprogram,theProgramEditorcanbeusedtoassignaPC3Kphysicalcontroller/CC numberforeachcontrollableparameterinthatparameterssourcefield.Sourcefieldsarenamed dependingontheirpage:Src1,Src2,RateCt,Trigger,Inputa,Inputb,andSource.Anyprogram parametersthathavebeenassignedtoanyofthePC3Ksphysicalcontrollers(sliders,switches, wheels,etc.)arealreadysetuptobecontrolledbyCCsfromanexternalMIDIdevice.Each parameterssourcefield(describedabove)willshowanameorMIDInumber(assignments madetoslidersBthroughIcanbecontrolledbytheMIDICCnumberslabeledbeloweach slider.)Forsourcesthatshowaname,acorrespondingMIDICCnumbercanbefoundby findingthenameinTheControllerDestinationList(seepage 722.)
Using External CCs In Program Mode, Local Keyboard Channel None

InProgramMode,tocontrolanassignedprogramparameterwithLocalKeyboardChannelset toNone,sendthecorrectCCnumbertothechannelwhichcontainstheprogram.
Using External CCs In Program Mode, Local Keyboard Channel On

InProgramMode,tocontrolanassignedprogramparameterwithaLocalKeyboardChannel set,selecttheprograminProgramModeandsendthecorrectCCnumbertothechannelsetfor LocalKeyboardChannel.

10-10

MIDI Mode The RECEIVE Page Using External CCs In Setup Mode, Local Keyboard Channel Off, Input Channel None

TocontrolaprogramparameterviaexternalMIDICCinSetupMode,theparametermustfirst haveasourceassignedwithintheProgramEditor,asdescribedintheAssigningACCControl Sourcesectionabove.Tocontrolanassignedparameter,sendthecorrectCCnumbertothe channelfortheSetupzonewhichcontainstheprogram.

Using External CCs In Setup Mode, Local Keyboard Channel On, Input Channel None

TocontrolaprogramparameterviaexternalMIDICCinSetupMode,theparametermustfirst haveasourceassignedwithintheProgramEditor,asdescribedintheAssigningACCControl Sourcesectionabove.TocontrolanassignedparameterwithaLocalKeyboardChannelset, sendthecorrectCCnumbertothechannelsetforLocalKeyboardChannel.(IftheCC#islisted intheExternalMIDICCRemappingtablebelow,theCCwillberemappedtothedestination setforthatphysicalcontrollerintheSetupEditor.Inthiscase,youmustusetheSetupEditorto assignthatphysicalcontrollersdestinationtotheoriginalCCnumberthatyousent.For destinationsthatshowaname,acorrespondingMIDICCnumbercanbefoundbyfindingthe nameinTheControllerDestinationList(seepage 722.)) WithintheSetupEditor,youcanalsosetaPC3KphysicalcontrollertosendaCCnumbertoa programonazone.IfthisisdonewithaLocalKeyboardChannelset,youwillalsobeableto controlaparameterbysendingthedefaultCCnumberforthatphysicalcontrollertothe channelsetforLocalKeyboardChannel.ThetablebelowliststhedefaultCCnumberusedto controltheassignmentsofPC3KphysicalcontrollerswhileinSetupMode. Also,foreachphysicalcontroller,ifaCC#islistedintheAdditionalMIDICC#WhichAlways ControlsTheParameterAssignedToEachPC3KPhysicalControllerInSetupModecolumn, thenthatphysicalcontrollersassignmentcanalwaysbecontrolledbytheCC#listedinthat column.Forphysicalcontrollerswherethisisthecase,thephysicalcontrollersassignmentwill respondtotheCC#listedintheAdditionalMIDICC#WhichAlwaysControlsTheParameter AssignedToEachPC3KPhysicalControllerInSetupModecolumn,aswellasthephysical controllersdefaultCCnumber.
Using External CCs In Setup Mode, Local Keyboard Channel None, Input Channel On

TocontrolaprogramparameterviaexternalMIDICCinSetupMode,theparametermustfirst haveasourceassignedwithintheProgramEditor,asdescribedintheAssigningACCControl Sourcesectionabove.TouseanInputChannel(seepage 78,)LocalKeyboardChannelmustbe settoNone.Tocontrolanassignedparameterforaprogramonazonethathasan InputChannelset,sendthecorrectCCnumbertothechannelsetforthatzonesInputChannel. (IftheCC#islistedintheExternalMIDICCRemappingtablebelow,theCCwillbe remappedtothedestinationsetforthatphysicalcontrollerintheSetupEditor.Inthiscase,you mustusetheSetupEditortoassignthatphysicalcontrollersdestinationtotheoriginalCC numberthatyousent.Fordestinationsthatshowaname,acorrespondingMIDICCnumber canbefoundbyfindingthenameinTheControllerDestinationList(seepage 722.)) WithintheSetupEditor,youcanalsosetaPC3KphysicalcontrollertosendaCCnumbertoa programonazone.IfthisisdonewithaInputChannelset,youwillalsobeabletocontrola parameterbysendingthedefaultCCnumberforthatphysicalcontrollertothechannelsetfor InputChannel.ThetablebelowliststhedefaultCCnumberusedtocontroltheassignmentsof PC3KphysicalcontrollerswhileinSetupMode. Also,foreachphysicalcontroller,ifaCC#islistedintheAdditionalMIDICC#WhichAlways ControlsTheParameterAssignedToEachPC3KPhysicalControllerInSetupModecolumn, thenthatphysicalcontrollersassignmentcanalwaysbecontrolledbytheCC#listedinthat column.Forphysicalcontrollerswherethisisthecase,thephysicalcontrollersassignmentwill respondtotheCC#listedintheAdditionalMIDICC#WhichAlwaysControlsTheParameter AssignedToEachPC3KPhysicalControllerInSetupModecolumn,aswellasthephysical controllersdefaultCCnumber.

10-11

MIDI Mode The RECEIVE Page

External MIDI CC Remapping Default MIDI CC# Which Controls The Parameter Assigned To Each PC3K Physical Controller In Setup Mode
NA, responds to MIDI pitch bend messages 1 No Default 29 11 4 2 No Default 64 66 67 21 No Default No Default 6 13 22-28 No Default

PC3K Physical Controller

Additional MIDI CC# Which Always Controls The Parameter Assigned To Each PC3K Physical Controller In Setup Mode
None None 69 70 None None None None None None None 18 19 20 None None None None

Pitch Wheel Mod Wheel Arp Button SW Button Continuous Pedal 1 Continuous Pedal 2 Breath Pressure (key pressure) Foot Switch 1 Foot Switch 2 Foot Switch 3 Ribbon Section 1 Ribbon Section 2 Ribbon Section 3 Slider A (Data) Slider B Sliders C-I Programable Switches 1-8

10-12

MIDI Mode The Channels Page

The Channels Page

PresstheCHANLSsoftbuttontoselecttheCHANNELSpage,whereyoucandefinenumerous parametersforeachMIDIchannelindependently.UsetheChan/Layerbuttonstoselectthe MIDIchannelyouwishtoworkon. TheCHANNELSpageisveryusefulwhenyouredoingmultitimbralsequencing,with programsassignedtonumerousMIDIchannels.TheCHANNELSpageletsyousetseveral controlcharacteristicsforeachMIDIchannel.Thismakesiteasytoadjusttheplaybackofthe sequencewithouteditingthesequenceitself.Forexample,youmightturnofftheEnable parameterforoneormorechannelstomutethetracksonthosechannels.Youcouldalsosetthe VolLockparametertoOn,toignoreanyMIDIvolumemessagesthePC3Kreceivesonagiven MIDIchannel.
Parameter Enable Program Pan Volume Program Lock Pan Lock Volume Lock Range of Values Off, On Program list 0 to 127 0 to 127 Off, On Off, On Off, On Default On Program ID 1 64 (centered) 127 (maximum) Off Off Off

Enable
Usethisparametertoturnthecurrentlyselectedchannelonoroff.Whenon,thechannelwill receiveMIDIinformation,andthesettingsoftheparametersontheMIDICHANNELSpage willbeineffect.Whenoff,thechannelwillignoreallMIDIinformation.

Program
Usethisparametertoassignaprogramtothecurrentlyselectedchannel.Thechannelwillstill respondtoprogramchangecommandsreceivedviaMIDI,unlessthePrgLockparameter (describedbelow)issettoOn.

10-13

MIDI Mode The Channels Page

Pan
ThisoffsetsthepanpositionofthecurrentprogramassetontheOUTPUTpageintheProgram Editor.Avalueof0ismaximumoffsettotheleft,64isnooffset,and127ismaximumoffsetto theright.ChangingthevalueofthisparameterislikeinsertingaMIDIpanmessage.MIDIPan (MIDI10)messageswillchangethevalueofthisparameter,unlessthePanLockparameter (describedbelow)issettoOn. IftheModeparameterontheOUTPUTpageintheProgramEditorissettoFixed,changingthe valueofPanontheCHANNELSpageinMIDImodehasnoeffect.

Volume
Thissetsthevolumeforanyprogramassignedtothecurrentlyselectedchannel.Avalueof0is silence,andavalueof127isfullvolume.Thevalueofthisparameterwillchangeinresponseto MIDIVolume(MIDI07)messages,unlesstheVolLockparameter(describedbelow)issettoOn.

Program Lock, Pan Lock, Volume Lock

WhentheparameterlocksaresettoOn,thethreeparameterstheycontroldonotrespondto theirrespectiveMIDIcontrollermessages.Inthatcase,youcouldchangetheProgram,Pan,and Volumesettingsfromthefrontpanel,butnotviaMIDI.

10-14

MIDI Mode Program Change Formats

Program Change Formats

ThePC3KcanstoremoreprogramsthantheMIDIprogramchangespecificationcanhandle (MIDIletsyousendprogramchangenumbersfrom0to127or1to128only).Sowevedesigned asystemthatmakesprogramselectionmoreflexible.Thisistruewhetheryoureselecting programsfromthePC3Ksfrontpanel,orviaMIDI.

Program Change Type

Extended

For Use With:

Bank changes and Program changes. A bank has 128 ids. Note that our system will recognize 16 banks, from 0 to 15. (2048 ids). This is for connecting a PC2 or a generic MIDI device as a controller device. Bank changes and Program changes. A bank has 100 ids. Our system will recognize in this case 21 banks, from 0 to 20. For example, with MIDI out from a K2600 into the MIDI in of a PC3K, if you scroll or enter a number in the K2600 you will see the same numbers in the K2600 and in the PC3K if the programs exist. Other PC3Ks (or K2600s, K2500s or K2000s) similarly set, when in Quick Access mode

K2600

QAccess

ThePC3Kgivesyouthousandsofprogramchangenumberstoworkwith.Theseareorganized into16banksof128each(thememorybanks).AprogramsobjectIDisitsprogramchange number,asdiscussedinChapter5.Thismakesiteasytokeeptrackofyourprograms.ThePC3K canuseseveraldifferentformatsforinterpretingprogramchangecommands.Thevalueforthe ProgChgModeparameterontheRECEIVEpagedetermineswhichformatisused,andtheone youshouldselectdependsonyourMIDIsystem. IfyouexpectyoullalwayschangeprogramsfromyourPC3Ksfrontpanel,selectingprograms isassimpleasenteringtheprogramchangenumber(theprogramsobjectID)onthe alphanumericpad,andpressingEnter.EvenprogramnumbersabovetheusualMIDIlimitof 127canbeselectedthisway.

Extended Program Changes

IfyourecontrollingyourPC3KfromaMIDIdevicethatcanhandletheMIDIController0or32 programchangeformat,youllhavethegreatestflexibilityifyousettheProgChgType parametertoavalueofExtended. Whenyoureusingtheextendedprogramchangeformat,thendependingonthevalueofthe BankSelectparameterontheRECEIVEpageinMIDImode,thePC3Kwillrespondtoeither MIDIController0or32programchangecommandsforbankselection,andstandardprogram changecommandsforprogramchangeswithinthecurrentbank.Differentvalueshavedifferent results,asshowninthefollowingtable:

Program Change Command Type MIDI controller 0 or 32 (MC 0 or MC 32) Standard (PCH)

Value of Message 0 to 16 0 to 127

Result Selects memory bank zeros900s Selects correspondingly numbered program in current memory bank

10-15

MIDI Mode Program Change Formats

IfyourPC3Kisalreadyinthememorybankyouwanttouse,youcansenditsinglePCHsfrom 0to127,toselectprogramswithinthatmemorybank.ThePC3Ksresponsedependsonthe settingfortheBank/SelectparameterontheMIDIModeRECVpage.Ifyouwanttochangethe memorybank,thePC3KmustreceiveeitheranMC0or32messagewithvalue0127.Thenext PCHintherange0127willselectthecorrespondinglynumberedprograminthenewly selectedbank.Thefollowingtableofexamplesshouldhelpmakeitclear.

Bank Change Command Received MC 0 or 32: value 0 MC 0 or 32: value 1 MC 0 or 32: value 1 MC 0 or 32: value 7

Program Change Command Received PCH: value 99 PCH: value 41 PCH: value 129 None

Result Program 99 (Base1 bank, 99th program) Program 169 (Base2 bank, 41st program) Program 258 (Classic Keys bank, 2nd program) KB3 bank selected, no change in current program (bank selection is pending for next PCH)

QAccess
UsingthissettingissimilartousingtheExtendedprogramchangeformat,butitgoesonestep further.Incomingprogramchangecommandsareinterpretedjustastheyareinthenormal Extendedformat.Buttheresultingprogramchangenumber,insteadofselectingaprogram, selectsaQuickAccessbankentry(youmustbeinQuickAccessmodeforthistowork).There aretwoadvantagestousingthisformat.First,itallowsyoutoselectbothprogramsandsetups usingprogramchangecommands,withouthavingtoswitchbetweenProgramandSetup modes.Second,youcanremapincomingprogramchangecommandstoselectprogramsor setupswithdifferentIDs.Thisishandyifthesendingunitcantsendprogramchange commandshigherthan127. First,abriefreviewofQuickAccessbankstructure.EachQuickAccessbankcanstoreten entries,eachofwhichcanbeaprogramorasetup.EachofthePC3Ks10memorybankscan store20QuickAccessbanks(excepttheZerosbank,whichcanstore75).Thereforewhenyoure inQuickAccessmode,youhaveaccessto200(or750intheZerosbank)programsorsetups withoutleavingthecurrentlyselectedmemorybank.TheQAExtprogramchangeformatlets youselectanyoneofthoseprogramsorsetupsviaMIDI.Ifyouselectanothermemorybank, youhaveadifferentsetof200programsandsetupsatyourdisposal.Whenyoureusingthis format,thePC3KwillrespondtoMC0or32messagesforselectingQAbanks,andtoPCHsfor selectingentrieswithinthecurrentbank.PCHsselectentriesaccordingtotheirchronological listingwithintheQAbank(notaccordingtotheirIDs).
Command Type MIDI controller 0 or 32 (MC 0 or MC 32) Standard (PCH) Value Range 0 to 127 0127 Result Selects QA bank 0n, 1n, 2n, 3n, 4n, 5n, 6n, 7n in current memory bank Selects last digit (n above) of QA bank, and entry within that bank

DependingontheQAbankentryyouwanttoselect,youllsendthePC3KeitheraPCH(value0 to127),oraMIDIController0or32message(value0to127)followedbyaPCH.Sendinga singlecommandwillletyouselectfromarangeof10QAbanksandselectanentrywithinthat bank(seethetablebelow).ToselectadifferentrangeofQAbanks,sendanMC0or32message followedbyaPCH.

10-16

MIDI Mode Program Change Formats

TheMC0or32messagesselectstherangeofQAbanks(0sthrough70s),whilethePCHselects thebankwithinthatrange,aswellastheentrywithinthatbank.NeithertheMC0or32northe PCHselectsadifferentmemorybank.Infact,youcantchangethememorybankviaMIDIwhen usingthisformat.Allprogramandsetupselectionsaremadewithinthecurrentlyselected memorybank.YoullknowwhichmemorybankisselectedbylookingattheIDofthecurrently selectedQuickAccessbankinthetoplineoftheQuickAccessmodepage. QAccess and MIDI Transmission IfyoureinQuickAccessmodeandyoureusingtheQAccessformatfortheprogramchange type,selectingQAbanksorbankentriesfromthePC3K(withthealphanumericbuttonpad,the cursorbuttons,theAlphaWheel,thePlus/Minusbuttons,ortheChan/Layerbuttons)also sendscorrespondingprogramchangecommandstothePC3KsUSBandMIDIOutport.The PC3KsendseitheranMC0or32messagefollowedbyaPCH.Thefollowingtablesgivespecific examples.
Commands Sent MC 0 or 32 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 2 2 7 0 0 1 1 1 PCH 10 19 20 29 99 0 99 0 99 59 0 59 99 77 99

Current QA Bank 1 1 2 2 9 12 19 20 29 75 100 105 110 117 119

Entry From Alphanumeric Pad 0 9 0 9 9 8 9 0 9 9 0 9 9 7 9

Table 10-1

QAccess Program Change Examples

10-17

MIDI Mode The Soft Buttons in MIDI Mode

The Soft Buttons in MIDI Mode

ThefirstthreesoftbuttonsselectthethreeMIDImodepages.ThePrgChgsoftbuttonletsyou sendaprogramchangecommandonanyMIDIchannel.TheRsetChsoftbuttonletsyoureturn allchannelparameterstotheirdefaultvalues.ThePanicsoftbuttonsendsanAllNotesOffand anAllControllersOffmessagestothePC3Kandonall16MIDIchannels.

Program Change (PrgChg)

Whenyoupressthissoftbutton,adialogappearsthatletsyousendprogramchangesoutthe USBorMIDIOutport,butdoesnotchangeinternalprograms.TheChan/Layerbuttons,theUp/ Downcursorbuttons,andtheChanandChan+softbuttonscanallbeusedtochangethe channelonwhichtheprogramchangecommandwillbesent.TheLeft/Rightcursorbuttons,the Plus/Minusbuttons,theAlphaWheelandtheProgandProg+softbuttonscanallbeusedto changetheprogramchangenumberthatwillbesent.Whenyouvesetthechannelandthe programchangenumber,presstheSendsoftbuttontosendtheprogramchangecommand.Or presstheCancelsoftbuttonifyoudontwanttosendit.Youcanchangethechannelandthe programnumberasmanytimesasyouwantbeforeyoupressSend.Youalsocanusethe alphanumericpadtoselectaprogramnumberdirectly.

Reset Channels (RsetCh)

Whenyoupressthissoftbutton,thePC3Kasksifyouwanttoresetallchannels.Ifyoupress Yes,allsettingsontheCHANNELSpagewillreturntotheirdefaultvalues.Whentheprojects over,youcanresettheChannelstorestoretheaudioroutingtoeachindividualprogram(a valueofProg),ratherthanselectingeachchannelspageandsettingthePairparameterbacktoa valueofProg.PressNoifyoudecidenottoresetthechannels.

Panic
PanicsendsAllNotesOffandAllControllersOffmessagestothePC3KandallMIDIchannels.

10-18

Master Mode MAIN

Chapter 11 Master Mode

PresstheMastermodebuttontoenterMastermode,whichcontainsparametersaffectingthe PC3Ksoverallperformanceandsystemsetup.YoucansetthesystemClocksothatthePC3K willtimestampyourfilescorrectly.YoucanusetheObjecttooltorenameordeleteselectionsof objects.YoucanalsoentertheBootLoadertoaccessanumberofsystemandfileutilities,oruse ResettodeletealluserobjectsandrestorethePC3Ksmemorytoitsoriginalfactorysettings. WhenyouexitMasterMode(orMIDIMode)thePC3KsavesaMasterTable(unless MasterTableLockisOnmoreonthisbelow.)TheMasterTableremembersthesettingsofthe Masterpages,aswellasthestateofthePC3K,suchaswhichprogramsareassignedtoeach channel,settingsforMIDIModeTransmitandReceivepages,andMasterFXsettings.Explicit savingoftheMasterTableisalsopossible.

MAIN
OntheMasterModeMAINpageyoullfindparametersforsettingtheoveralltuningand transpositionofthePC3K,overallFXsettings,drumprogramremapping,clocksourceoptions, IDentryoptions,demosongoptions,aswellasoptionsforsavingmastermodesettingsand remotetriggeringofPC3Kfunctions.

Parameter Tune Transpose FX Mode Drum Remap ID Entry Setup Controllers (SetupCtls) Master Lock Demo Button Buttons Mode

Range of Values 100 cents -128 to 127 semitones Performance, Multitrack None, GM Global, Bank Instant, Pass Entry On, Off On, Off Off, On

Default 0 0 Performance None Global Instant Off On Off

11-1

Master Mode MAIN

Tune
AdjustingthevalueofthisparametertuneseveryprograminthePC3Kbytheamountyou specify.Tuningcanbeadjustedupordown100cents(onesemitone)inonecentincrements. Thisparameterisusefulforgettingintunewithrecordingsandacousticinstruments.Adjusting thetuninginMastermodedoesnotchangethesettingsonthePITCHpageofindividual programs,butwillbeaddedtoanyadjustmentsyoumakethere.Mastermodetuning adjustmentsaffectonlytheaudiooutputofPC3Kprogramnotes,andnotnotessentviaMIDI.

Transpose
LiketheTuneparameterabove,TransposeaffectseveryPC3Kprogram,butnotthosenotessent totheMIDIOutport.YoucanadjusttheMIDItranspositionsenttotheMIDIOutportonthe TRANSMITpageinMIDImode.

FX Mode
WithFXModesettoPerformance,thePC3Kminimizesdisruptionofexistingeffectswhen changingprograms,andentryvalueswillnotdisruptsustainednoteswhenchangingprograms inProgramorQuickAccessmodes.WhencontrollingthePC3Kfromanexternalsequencerin ProgramMode,youwillwanttosetFXModetoMultitracktominimizeeffectdisruption.FX ModeissettoPerformanceasadefault,withsomeexceptions.InSongmode,Multitrackmode isalwaysused,despitehowthisparameterissetinMasterMode.Also,theFXModeparameter doesnotaffectSetupModebecauseitusesitsownFXmode.

Drum Remap
ThisparameterwillremapallDrumprogramstoconformtotheGeneralMIDI(GM)drummap, astandarddrummapusedinmanykeyboardsandsynthesizers.TheGMdrummapisnt optimallyintuitiveintermsofplayability,sobydefaultthePC3Kusesauniquekeymapthatis moreintuitiveandlendsbettertoperformance.However,theGMdrummapisso commonplacethatmanyplayersfeelmorecomfortableplayingdrumprogramswiththeGM drummap.Becauseofthis,thePC3Kisdesignedsuchthatyoucanremapdrumprogramsto theGMdrummap. WhentheMasterPageDrumRemapissettoNone,noremappingtakesplaceinProgrammode. WhentheMasterPageDrumRemapissettoGM,thePC3KremapsDrumprogramstotheGM drummap.

ID Entry
Globalmeansthatanyentryyoumakefromthealphanumerickeypadwillselecttheobject indicated,regardlessofthebankitisin.Forexample,inprogrammodetype36ofthe alphanumerickeypadtoselectprogram36. IfNumericEntryissettoBank,yourselectionwillbelimitedtothecurrentlyselectedbank.For instance,inProgrammode,ifyouareinOrchestrabankandyouenter65,thenthecurrent programbecomesprogram65oftheOrchestrabank,viz.449HornSectLayer.

Setup Controllers (SetupCtls)

TheSetupControllersparameteraffectshowthePC3KsphysicalcontrollersrelatetoEntry ValuesinSetupMode(seeEntry(Ent)andExitValues on page 731.)WiththeSetupControllers parametersettoInstant,movingaphysicalcontrollerassignedwithinaSetupwillinstantly sendanewMIDIvaluetothatassignment.WiththeSetupControllersparametersetto PassEntry,movingaphysicalcontrollerassignedwithinaSetupwillnotsendanewMIDIvalue tothatassignmentuntilthephysicalcontrollerpassesthevaluesetforitsEntryValue.Instantis setbydefault,butPassEntrycanbeusefulsothatSetupcontrollerassignmentsdontjumpfar fromtheirentryvalueswhenfirstmovingaphysicalcontroller.

11-2

Master Mode MAIN

Master Table Lock (Master Lock)

WithMasterLocksettoOff,thePC3KwillsavethecurrentMastermodeconfigurationwhen youexitMastermode(orMIDImode).ThisinformationisstoredinaMasterTableobject(see Save on page 1116belowformoredetailsonwhatissavedwithaMasterTable.) IfyouhaveaparticularMasterconfigurationthatyouwouldliketosafeguardagainsttheauto savingfeature,setMasterLocktoOn.WiththeMasterLockon,thePC3Kdoesnotsaveany changesunlessyoupresstheSavesoftbutton.NotethatifyouwouldlikeMasterLocktostay onnexttimeyouturnonthePC3K,youmustpresstheSavesoftbuttontostorethestateof MasterLocktotheMasterTable.

Demo Button
TheDemoButtonparameterdetermineswhatpressingthePlay/Pausebuttondoesinprogram mode.WiththeDemobuttonparametersettoOn,thePlay/Pausebuttonplaysademosongfor thecurrentprogram.(Toplayademosong,theDemoSongparametermustbesetinthe programeditorforthecurrentprogram,seepage 636fordetails.)WiththeDemobutton parametersettoOff,thePlay/PausebuttonplaysthelastsongthatwasselectedinSongMode. Ifademosongissetforthecurrentprogram,itcanalwaysbeplayedfromprogrammodeby simultaneouslypressingtheupanddowncursorbuttons.

Buttons Mode (Buttons)

IfyousettheButtonsparametertoOn,pressinganybuttonsonthePC3KwillgenerateSystem Exclusive(SysEx)messagesthataresenttotheMIDIOutport.Thisenablesyoutodotwo things:controlaremotePC3K,and/orrecordsequencesofprogrammingbuttonpressestoa sequencerorSysExsoftwarepackage. IfyouhavetheMIDIInportofanotherPC3KconnectedtothefirstonesMIDIOutport,the secondinstrumentwillrespondtoeverybuttonpressonthefirstinstrument,justasifyouwere pressingthebuttonsofthesecondone.Keepinmindthatbothdevicesmustbeinexactlythe samestate(thesamepageinthesamemode,withidenticallistsofRAMobjects)whenyoustart. Otherwisethebuttonpressesyoumakeonthefirstinstrumentmayexecuteotherfunctionson thesecondinstrument. Again,itsimportanttokeepinmindthatthestateofyourPC3Kmustbeidenticaltoitsstate whenyourecordedthesequenceofbuttonpresses.Ifyouveaddedordeletedanyobjects storedinRAM,forexample,thesequenceofbuttonpresseswillselectdifferentobjectswhen youplaybackthebuttonpresssequence. NOTE:MakesurethisparameterissettoOffbeforeyouinitiateaSysExdumpofanykind.Ifthis parameterisonwhenyoustartadump,thebuttonsyoupresstobeginthedumpwillalsogenerateSysEx messages.

11-3

Master Mode MAPS

MAPS
OntheMAPSpageyoullfindparametersforsettingkeyboardbehaviorforvelocity,pressure, intonation,andkeyactionmaps.YoucanalsosetthedefaultsequenceforSongmode.

Velocity Map (Master)

ChangetheMasterVelocityMapsettingifyoufindthatthePC3Kisnotproducingthedesired velocities(tooloudortooquiet)basedonyourplayingstyle(howlightorheavythatyouplay thekeys.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidestrangeofvelocityexpression,butyoumaywant tochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnotsuityourplayingstyle. MIDI Sources PC3KKeyboard MIDIInviaMIDIInportorUSBComputerport

VelocityMapSettingsonMIDIModeReceivePage

KEYVELpageforcurrentControlSetup(inProgramMode)orcurrentZone(inSetupMode)

VelocityMapSettingsonMasterModeMAPSPage

PC3KSongMode

VelocityMapSettingsonMIDIModeTransmitPage

MIDI Destinations PC3KSoundEngine to PC3Kaudiooutputs MIDIOutviaMIDIOutportorUSBComputerport

TheMasterVelocityMapisanoverallcontrolforMIDIvelocitiesusedinthePC3K.MIDI velocitiesarevaluescreatedforeachnotedependingonhowhardyoustrikeakey.TheMaster VelocityMapaffectsMIDIvelocityvaluesforallMIDIsourcesanddestinationsusedinthe PC3K(seethecircledboxaboveforitslocationintheMIDIsignalflow.)Differentmapsusedfor theMasterVelocityMapgeneratedifferentMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesamephysicalkeystrike

11-4

Master Mode MAPS

velocity.EachmapappliesadifferentcurvetoreceivedMIDIattackvelocitiesandremapsthem tonewvelocitiesbeforelettingthempass.Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidestrangeofvelocity expression,butyoumaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnotsuityourplaying style.SeethediagramabovefortheotherpagesthataffecttheMIDIattackvelocitybeforeand afterreachingtheMasterVelocityMap. Thedefaultmap,Linear,allowsMIDIvelocitiestopassunchanged.Light13makeit increasinglyeasiertoproducehighMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesamekeystrikevelocity(with Light3beingtheeasiest,)sothesemapsmayworkbetterforuserswhoplaywithalighter touch.Hard13makeitincreasinglyhardertoproducehighMIDIvelocityvaluesforthesame keystrikevelocity(withHard3beingthehardest,)sothesemapsmayworkbetterforusers whoplaywithahardertouch.PianoTouchsimulatesthegeneralvelocityresponseofan acousticpiano,andisbestsuitedforplayingacousticpianoprograms.EasyTouchissimilarto theLightsettings,makinghighvelocitieseasiertoplay,butitallowsmoresensitivecontrolover playinghighvelocitiesbynotboostingtheMIDIvelocityforfaststrikevelocitiesasmuchasit doesformediumstrikevelocities.GMReceivemimicsthevelocitymapcommonlyusedby keyboardsthatusetheGeneralMIDI(GM)soundset.TheGMReceivemapmakesmedium strikevelocitiesproducehigherMIDIvelocitiescomparedtotheLinearmap.GMReceiveeffects notesfromthePC3KskeyboardaswellastheMIDIinport.Thismapisautomaticallyused whenthePC3KisinGMmode(seeGeneralMIDIMode(GMOn,GMOff)below,)thoughusers maywanttousetheGMReceivemapwhengeneratingMIDIoutsideofGMmodewhichwill laterbeplayedbackbyaGMsystem.

11-5

Master Mode MAPS

Pressure Map (Master)

ChangetheMasterPressMapsettingifyoufindthatthePC3Kisnotproducingthedesired MIDIpressure(aftertouch)values(toohighortoolow)basedonyourplayingstyle(howsoftor hardthatyoupressthekeys.)Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidestrangeofpressure expression,butyoumaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnotsuityourplaying style. MIDI Sources PC3KKeyboard MIDIInviaMIDIInportorUSBComputerport

PressureMapSettingsonMIDIModeReceivePage

PRESSpageforcurrentControlSetup(inProgramMode)orcurrentZone(inSetupMode)

PressureMapSettingsonMasterModeMAPSPage

PC3KSongMode

PressureMapSettingsonMIDIModeTransmitPage

MIDI Destinations PC3KSoundEngine to PC3Kaudiooutputs MIDIOutviaMIDIOutportorUSBComputerport

TheMasterPressMapisanoverallcontrolforMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesusedinthe PC3K.MIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesarecreatedforeachnotedependingonhowhardyou pressonakeythatisbeinghelddown.TheMasterPressMapaffectsMIDIpressure(aftertouch) valuesforallMIDIsourcesanddestinationsusedinthePC3K(seethecircledboxaboveforits locationintheMIDIsignalflow.)DifferentmapsusedfortheMasterPressMapgenerate differentMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesforthesamephysicalkeypressvalue.Eachmap appliesadifferentcurvetoreceivedMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuesandremapsthemtonew valuesbeforelettingthempass.Thedefaultmapprovidesthewidestrangeofpressure (aftertouch)expression,butyoumaywanttochooseadifferentmapifthedefaultdoesnotsuit yourplayingstyle.SeethediagramabovefortheotherpagesthataffectMIDIpressure (aftertouch)valuesbeforeandafterreachingtheMasterPressMap. Thedefaultmap,Linear,allowsMIDIpressure(aftertouch)valuestopassunchanged.Maps24 makeitincreasinglyeasiertoproduceMIDIpressurevaluesforthesamephysicalpressure appliedtoakey(with4Easiestbeingtheeasiest.)Maps47makeitincreasinglyharderto produceMIDIpressurevaluesforthesamephysicalpressureappliedtoakey(with7Hardest beingthehardest.)

11-6

Master Mode MAPS

Intonation
Mostmodernwesternmusicuseswhatisknownasequaltemperament.Thismeansthatthe intervalbetweeneachsemitoneofthe12toneoctaveispreciselythesameaseveryother semitone.However,manydifferentintonationintervalshaveevolvedoverthecenturiesand acrossculturesandinstruments,soequaltemperamentwillnotsoundappropriateforcertain stylesofmusic.ThePC3Ksuppliesyouwith17differentfactoryintonationmapswhichare usefulforarangeofdifferentstyles.Bychangingthevalueforthisparameter,youselectfrom amongtheintonationmapsstoredinthePC3Ksmemory.Youcanfurthercustomizeeachmap orcreateyourownbyeditingamap(seeEditingIntonationMapsbelow.)Eachofthesemaps definesdifferentintervalsbetweeneachofthesemitonesinasingleoctave(usedforalloctaves) bysettingpitchoffsetsforeachnoteincents. ScrollthroughthelistofIntonationmaps,andlistenforthedifferencesbetweensemitones. Someoftheintervalsbetweensemitonesmaybequitedifferentfromequaltemperament,but youllnoticethatallnotesarepreciselytunedwithnotesthatareanoctaveapart.Thisisbecause theintonationmapssettheintervalswithinasingleoctave,andapplythoseintervalstoeach octave. Likemanyinstrumentsbeforetheadaptationofequaltemperament,mostoftheseintonation mapsweredesignedtosoundbestinonespecifickey.Thoughsomemayhavehistoricallybeen inadifferentkey,allofthePC3KsfactoryintonationmapsaresettorootnoteCbydefault.You canchangetherootkeyofthecurrentintonationmapbyusingtheInt.Keyparameter(seethe IntonationKey(Int.Key)sectionbelow.) List and Description of Intonation Maps
0 None 1 Equal 2 Classic Just 3 Just Flat 7th 4 Harmonic 5 Just Harmonic 6 Werkmeister 7 1/5th Comma 8 1/4th Comma 9 Indian Raga 10 Arabic 11 BaliJava1 12 BaliJava2 13 BaliJava3 14 Tibetan 15 CarlosAlpha No intonation map is used, intonation is equal but cannot be edited. No detuning of any intervals. The standard for modern western music. Tunings are defined based on the ratios of the frequencies between intervals. The original tuning of Classical European music. Similar to classic Just, but with the Dominant 7th flatted an additional 15 cents. The perfect 4th, Tritone, and Dominant 7th are heavily flatted. Approximation of a historical intonation. Named for its inventor, Andreas Werkmeister. Its fairly close to equal temperament, and was developed to enable transposition with less dissonance. Approximation of a historical intonation based on the comma system. Approximation of a historical intonation based on the comma system. Based on the tunings for traditional Indian music. Oriented toward the tunings of Mid-Eastern music. Based on the pentatonic scale of Balinese and Javanese music. A variation on 1Bali/Java, slightly more subtle overall. A more extreme variation. Based on the Chinese pentatonic scale. Developed by Wendy Carlos, an innovator in microtonal tunings, this intonation map flats each interval increasingly, resulting in an octave with quarter-tone intervals. This is a Pythagorean tuning, based on the Greek pentatonic scale. The tritone is 12 cents sharp. This is a Pythagorean tuning, based on the Greek pentatonic scale. The tritone is 12 cents flat.

16 Pyth/aug4 17 Pyth/dim5

11-7

Master Mode MAPS

Ingeneral,youshouldselectanonstandardintonationmapwhenyoureplayingsimple melodies(asopposedtochords)inaparticularmusicalstyle.Whenyouuseintonationmaps basedonpentatonicscales,youllnormallyplaypentatonicscalestomostaccuratelyreproduce thosestyles. Editing Intonation Maps Toeditanintonationmaporcreateanewmap,selectanexistingmapandpresstheEditbutton tobringuptheEditIntonationMapscreen(seebelow.)Intonationmapsarebasedaroundaroot key,shownontherightofthetoplineofthescreen.Usethechanup/downbuttonstochange therootkey(thisisthesameaschangingtheInt.Keyparameter(seeIntonationKey(Int.Key) below.)IntonationKeyisnotsavedwiththeintonationmap.)Usethecursortomovebetween notesteps,eachofwhichislabeledbyitsdifferenceinkeyboardstepsfromtheroot.Eachstep canbeshiftedby200cents(100cents=1halfstep.)Usethealphawheel,alphanumericpad,or plus/minusbuttonstoenterthedesiredcentshiftamountforeachstep.

PressDeletetodeletethemapfrommemory.PressRenametorenamethemapandsave. PressingSavegivesyoutheoptiontosavethemaporrenameandsave.Tocreateanewmap, editanexistingmapandchooseRenamewhensaving.PressExittoreturntoMasterpage2. Whenexitingtheeditor,itwillautomaticallygiveyoutheoptiontosavethemapifchanges havebeenmade.Formoredetailedinstructionsonthesefunctions,seeSavingand Naming on page 53.

Key Action Map

TheKeyActionMapdeterminesthedefaultwaythePC3Krespondstokeyactionforspecific keyboardcomponentmodels.Generallyspeaking,youwillnotwanttoaltertheKeyAction Map.ThisparameterisincludedfortherareoccasionwhenaPC3Khasbeensetupatthefactory foradifferentkeyboardcomponentmodelthantheoneinstalled.Ausermaydiscoverthatthey needtochangetheKeyActionMapwhentheyhavetriedalloftheVelocityMapsettingsand stilldonotfeelcomfortablewiththekeyresponseoftheirPC3K.Differentmapsresultin differentresponsesfromthePC3Kforthesamephysicalkeyaction,andeachmapcorresponds toadifferentkeyboardcomponentmodel.Ifyouhavechangedthisparameterandwantto changeitbacktothedefaultmapforyourPC3K,simplyenteravalueof0intheKeyAction Mapparameterfield.

Intonation Key (Int.Key)

Thissetsthetonic,orbasenotefromwhichthecurrentlyselectedintonationmapcalculatesits intervals.IfyouselectGastheintonationkey,forexample,andtheintonationmapyouselect tunestheminor2nddownby50cents,thenG#willbeaquartertoneflatrelativetoequal intonation.IfyouchangetheintonationkeytoD,thenD#willbeaquartertoneflat.Ifyouuse nonstandardintonations,youllwanttosetInt.Keytothekeyyoureplayingin.IftheIntonation parameterissettoEqual,changingInt.Keyhasnoeffect.

11-8

Master Mode OUTPUT

Default Sequence
TheDefaultSequenceparameterspecifiesthesongthatisusedasatemplatefornewandclear songsinSongmode.

OUTPUT
TheOUTPUTpagehasoptionsfordigitalaudiooutputvolumeandsamplerate.Youcanalso settheanalogAuxoutputstomirrortheprimaryanalogoutputs.YoucanalsocontroltheMIDI clocksourceandMIDIclockoutput.

Parameter Output Clock Digital Output Volume (Dig. out volume) Digital Output (Dig.Out) Aux Out Pair Mode Clock Source

Range of Values Off, On Variable, Fixed Digital Output List Normal, Mirror Primary Outputs Internal, External

Default Off Variable 48 KHz Normal Internal

Output Clock
TosendaMIDIclockpulsetotheMIDIOutport,setthisparametertoOn.Otherwise,setitto Off.

Digital Output Volume (Dig. out volume)

TheDigitalOutputVolumeparameterspecifiesthebehaviorofthePC3KsDigitalOutput. SettingthisparametertoVariablemakestheDigitalOutputrespondtochangesmadeonthe volumeslider.SettingthisparametertoFixedmakestheDigitalOutputoutputasignalwitha fixedvolume.

Digital Output (Dig. Out)

ThisDigitalOutputparameterspecifiesthePC3Ksdigitaloutputsamplerate.Internally clockedsampleratesgofrom44.1Kupto192K. Externallysyncedsampleratescover20220KHzin3ranges.Besuretheexternalclock frequencyiswithintherangeyouselect.

Aux Out Pair Mode

TheAuxOutPairModeparameterspecifiesthebehavioroftheSecondaryAudioOutputs (locatedonthebackpanelunderneaththeBalancedAnalogOutputsAUXlabel.Settingthis parametertoNormalmakestheAuxOutputsbehaveassuch.SettingthisparametertoMirror PrimaryOutputsmakestheAuxOutputsoutputthesameaudiosignalasthePrimaryoutput.

11-9

Master Mode TEMPO

Clock Source
WiththeClockSourceparameter,youcansetthePC3Ktogenerateitsowntempobysetting ClockSourcetoInternal,oryoucansetthePC3Ktosyncupwiththetempofromanother deviceassumingthedeviceissendingMIDIclockdatatothePC3KviaMIDIorUSBby settingClockSourcetoExternal.SeeImportantNoteAboutExternalSequencers: on page 128for relatedinformation.

TEMPO
PresstheTEMPOsoftbuttontogototheTEMPOpage(seebelow.)WhentheClockSource parameterissettoInternal(seeClockSource on page 1110,)theTempoparameteronthe TEMPOpagesetsthePC3Kssystemtempo.Thesystemtemposetsthetempoforallmodes exceptSetupMode,whichhasitsowntemposettings.Also,inSongmode,changingtoanew songwilloverridethesystemtempo.TheTempoparametervaluesareinunitsofBPM(beats perminute).

YoucanalsocalluptheTEMPOpagefromanyotherpagebypressingtheleftandrightcursor buttonssimultaneously. SettheTempoparameterwiththe/+buttons,theAlphaWheel,orthealphanumericpad.You canalsosetthesystemtempobytappingtheTapsoftbuttonatthedesiredspeed.Youneedto tapatleasttwiceforatempotobecalculated,thoughtappingseveraltimes(likeoneachbeatof oneormoremeasures)worksbest.Thenewlytappedtempoisdisplayedinthetempofield,and alongthebottomfourProgramCategorySelectbuttonsalitLEDmovesfromlefttorightatthis tempo. Alternatively,atemporarycontrollercanbesetforuseintheTemporaryTAPcontrollerfield, insteadofusingtheTapsoftbutton.TheTemporaryTAPcontrollerfieldlistsgroupsofPC3K controllersinorderoftheirusefulnessfortapping.Listedfirstarethefootswitchesandswitch buttons(thoughitwouldbeeasiertousetheTapsoftbuttonthansetatemporaryswitch button.)AftertheseisNoteOn,whichletsyoutapthetempowithanykeyboardkey.Lastare theMIDIcontrollernumbers,whichincludesallofthecontinuouscontrollers,though continuouscontrollers(suchasaslider)arenoteasyorrecommendedfortappingthetempo. TheTemporaryTAPcontrollerworksonlywhileontheTEMPOpageandwillremainselected whenaccessingtheTEMPOpagefromothermodes,buttheselectionwillreturntoOFFthenext timethePC3Kisturnedon. Youcanalsoassignacontrollertocontrollerdestination168,TapTempo,tobeusedasatap tempobuttonwhennotviewingtheTEMPOpage.Forthosewhofrequentlyusetaptempo,this isatimesavingadditiontoanysetuporcontrolsetup(seeChapter 7,SetupModeformoreon controllersanddestinations.)AnyMIDIvaluesreceivedbydestination168sendatapsignalto

11-10

Master Mode General MIDI Mode (GM On, GM Off)

thetaptempofunction.Thiswouldbebestusedwithaprogrammableswitch(orfootswitch.) ConfiguretheselectedswitchsothatitisToggled,hasitsOnandOffControlssettodestination 168(TapTempo,)andsettheOnandOffValuestoanyvalueotherthanNone.EntryandExit StateshouldbesettoNone.

General MIDI Mode (GM On, GM Off)

ThissoftbuttonenablesordisablesGeneralMIDI(GM)mode.WhenGMmodeisoff(the default,)thebuttonsislabeledGMOn.PresstheGMOnsoftbuttontoenterGMmode.The PC3Kwillpromptyoutoconfirmorcancel.WhenGMmodeisonthebuttonsislabeledGM Off.PresstheGMOffsoftbuttontoexitGMmode.ThePC3Kwillpromptyoutoconfirmor cancel.YoucannotaccessSetupModeorQuickAccessModewhileinGMmode.Asidefrom whatisnotedinthissection,allotherPC3KfunctionsoperatenormallywhileinGMmode.In GMmode,thePC3KcompliesspecificallywiththeGeneralMIDI(GM1)specification. AnOverviewofGeneralMIDI GeneralMIDIisaspecificationcreatedbytheMIDIManufacturersAssociationwhichdefines specificfeaturesthataMIDIinstrumentmusthave(seetheMMAwebsiteatwww.midi.orgfor moreinformation.)Amongotherthings,theGMspecificationsetsastandardbankofprogram namesandnumbers,aswellasastandarddrummappinglayout,sothatsequencescreatedon anyGMinstrumentwillplaybackwiththecorrectinstrumentationonanyotherGM instrument,nomatterthemanufacturer.GMhasmanyuses,forexampleitmakesiteasyfor musicianswhouseMIDIfilestoshareideasandcollaboratewhileusingdifferentsetsof equipment.Alsomanyinstrumentalversionsofpublicdomainsongscanbefoundforfreeon theinternetasGMcompatibleMIDIfiles.These,likeallMIDIfiles,offercertainadvantagesover audiosuchassmallfilesize,theabilitytoedit,orchestrate,orchangetempotoeasilylearnfrom thesequences,orevenconvertnoteinformationtostandardnotationwithathirdparty application. OverviewofGeneralMIDIMode Onceenabled,Programmodewilldisplaythesetof128standardGMprogramnamesonthe rightsideofthescreen(seebelow.)Asidefromthedifferentlayoutandprogramchoice,Program modeoperatesnormally(seebelowforinfoontheleftsideofthescreen.)AdefaultGMsequencewill beloadedwhichsetsFXsendsforreverbandchorus,whicharepartoftheGMspecification. DrumprogramswillalsoberemappedtotheGMdrummap.ThestandardPC3Kprogramswill notbevisibleuntilGMmodeisturnedoff.

11-11

Master Mode OBJECT

ReplacingDefaultGeneralMIDIPrograms ThePC3KsGMsoundsconsistofPC3KprogramstailoredtoworkwellinallGMsequences, butyoucanalsoeditorexchangetheseprogramstosuityourtaste.ThePC3Kprovidesyou withaGMsoundseteditorwhichallowsyoutoreplacethePC3KsdefaultGMprogramswith anyotherPC3Kfactoryorusercreatedprogram.Forexample,youcouldchooseadifferent factoryorusercreatedpianoprogramtoreplacethedefaultGMprogram1,AcGrandPiano. Thisway,anyGMsequencethatusesGMprogram1wouldnowusethenewpianoprogram thatyouselected.Alternatively,youcouldevenchooseadifferentinstrumenttoreplacethe defaultGMprogram1,suchasPC3Kprogram47Harpsichord.Thisway,anyGMsequencethat usesGMprogram1wouldnowusethenewharpsichordprogramthatyouselected.Usinga PC3KprogramthatdoesnotresembletheinstrumentnamedinthecurrentGMprogramwould technicallymakethePC3KincompatiblewithGM,butsomeusersmaywanttodothisasaway toremixGMsequences. ItiseasytoreplacedefaultGMprogramsinordertomakeacustomGMsoundset.OnceinGM mode,therightsideofProgramModescreendisplaysalistoftheGMprogramswiththeir standardGMnames.TheleftsideofthescreenshowsyouwhatPC3Kprogramisbeingusedfor theselectedGMprogram.Pressingleftonthecursormovesyoutothisfield.Usethecursors up/downbuttons,thealphanumericpad,theplus/minusbuttons,orthealphawheelifyouwish toselectadifferentPC3KprogramforthecurrentGMprogram.Dontusetheprogramor categorybuttonsbecausethesewillchangethecurrentlyselectedGMprogram.Thenewly selectedPC3KprogramwillbeusedbythecurrentGMprogram,thoughthenameoftheGM programwillnotchange.Tosavethesesettingsyoumustsavethemastertable(seeSavebelow.) SavedsettingscanberecalledafterpoweringofforleavingGMmode.TorestoreGMmodes factoryselectedprograms,presstheResetsoftbutton(seebelow.)

OBJECT
PressingtheOBJECTsoftbuttoncallsuptheObjectspage(seebelow.)Fromhereyoucanchoose oneoftwoutilityfunctionsforrenamingordeletingselectionsofusercreated(oredited) objects.PresstheRenameorDeletesoftbuttontoaccesseachfunction.

Rename
TheRenameutilityallowsyoutorenameanobjectwithoutenteringtheobjectseditor.The Renamepageshowsalistofallusercreatedobjects,groupedbyobjecttype(seebelow.)Usethe alphawheelorplus/minusbuttonstoselectanobjectfromthelist.PressRenametobringupthe objectRenamescreenandenteranewnamebyfollowingthestandardrenamingprocedure.For moreinformation,seeSavingandNaming on page 53.

11-12

Master Mode OBJECT

AsinallnamingdialogsonthePC3K,youcandoadoublepressoftheLeft/Rightcursor buttonstoputthenamingcursoronthelastcharacterofthestring.Thisishelpfulwhenputting uniquecharactersattheendsofnames. Left/Rightcursorbuttondoublepress>Movecursortotheendofthenameinanynamingdialogue.

Delete
TheobjectDeleteutilityisusefulfordeletingunwantedusercreatedobjectsinordertoincrease freeRAMspaceinyourPC3K.OnthemainDeletepage,foreachobjecttypeyoucanselecta bankofobjectstodelete,arangeofobjectstodelete,ordeleteallobjects.OntheDelete advancedpage,youcanselectasingleobjectormultipleobjectstodelete. Todeleteagrouporrangeofobjects,usethemainDeletepage(seebelow.)Usethecursorto selecttheleftcolumn,thenusethecursor,alphawheelorplus/minusbuttonstoselectoneor moreobjecttypesfromthelist.UsetheSelectsoftbuttontomakeyourselection(s),whichwill bemarkedwithastar.SelectAllTypesifyouwanttodeletealluserobjects(thiswillselectall objecttypesandnumbersautomatically.)Next,usethecursortoselecttherightcolumn,then usethecursor,alphawheelorplus/minusbuttonstoselectoneormorerangesofobject numbersfromthelist.Youcanselectobjectnumbersbybankgrouping(groupsof128),by numberrange(select1...100RangeusetheSetRngsoftbuttonandchooseanyrangeof2048 objects)orselectEverythingtodeleteallobjectsoftheselectedtype.Again,usetheSelectsoft buttontomakeyourselection(s),whichwillbemarkedwithastar.TheClearsoftbuttonwill clearyourselection(s)fromthecurrentlyselectedlist.PresstheDeletesoftbuttontodeleteyour selection,youwillbegiventhechoicetoDeleteorCancel.TheCancelsoftbuttononthemain deletepagewillreturnyoutotheObjectspage.

11-13

Master Mode Utils

Todeletesingleormultipleobjects,gototheDeleteadvancedpagebypressingtheAdvncesoft buttononthemainDeletepage(seebelow.)Therightcolumnshowsyoualistofallusercreated objects.Theleftcolumntellsyouwhattypeeachobjectis,andobjectsaregroupedbytype.Use thealphawheelorplus/minusbuttonstoselectoneormoreobjectsfromthelist.UsetheSelect softbuttontomakeyourselection(s),whichwillbemarkedwithastar.UsetheTypesoftbutton tojumptothelowestnumberedobjectofthenextgroupofobjecttypes.Youcanusethe alphanumericpadtojumptoanobjectoftheselectedtypebynumber,orenter0tojumptothe lowestsavedobjectnumberofthecurrentlyselectedtype.Toreviewwhichobjectsyouhave selected,presstheNextsoftbuttontomovetothenextselectedobjectinthelist.Pressthe Deletesoftbuttontodeleteyourselection,youwillbegiventhechoicetoDeleteorCancel.The CancelsoftbuttonontheDeleteadvancedpagewillreturnyoutothemainDeletepage.

ForDeleteandDeleteadvance,ifanyoftheselectedobjectshavedependentsthatwerenot selected,youwillseethequestion:Deletedependentobjects? IfyouanswerYestothisquestion,alldependentobjectsoftheselectedobjectsaredeleted, unlesstheyarebeingusedasdependentsofotherobjectsthataretoremaininmemory. AnsweringNowilldeleteonlythoseobjectsthatwereselectedandnottheirdependents.

Utils
PressingtheUtilssoftbuttoncallsuptheUtilitypage,whichgivesyouaccesstotwoanalytic anddiagnostictool.Additionally,pressingthetworightmostsoftbuttonswillcallupthe Utilitypagefromanymodeoreditor.TheUtilitiespageappearsasshownbelow:

PressingtheMIDIsoftbuttonlaunchesMIDIScope,ausefulsubprogramthatletsyou monitortheMIDImessagesfromthePC3KandthosereceivedviaMIDI.Thisisagoodwayto makesureyourereceivingMIDIfromMIDImasters.Itsalsogoodformakingsureyour controlsareassignedasyouwantthem,checkingyourattackvelocities,checkingyour controllervalues,etc.

11-14

Master Mode CLOCK

PressingtheVoicessoftbuttoncallsuptheVoiceStatuspage,whichshowsthePC3Ksactive voicechannelsasyouplay.TheVoiceStatuspagesdisplayseachactivevoiceasasolid rectangularblockformonovoicesordisplaysstereopairsofvoicesasa>fortheleftchannel voiceanda<fortherightchannelvoice.Whateversymbolthepagedisplays,whenthekeyofa voiceisreleased,thatvoicessymbolontheVoicesStatuspageturnsintoadotduringthe releaseportionofthatvoicesenvelope.Whenthevoicedecaystosilence,itisnolongeractive, andthedotdisappears.TheVoiceStatussymbolsappearsasshownbelow:

TheVoiceStatuspagegivesyouanindicationoftheenvelopelevelofeachvoice,thoughnot necessarilythevolumelevel.Nonetheless,thiscangiveyouavaluableindicationofhowyour voicesarebeingused.Forexample,ifallormostofthevoicesareactive,thentheresagood chancethatwhenvoicestealingtakesplaceanaudiblevoicewillbereallocated. TheVoicesutilityworksabitdifferentlyforKB3programs.ThePC3Kusesonevoiceof polyphonyforeverytwotonewheelsinaKB3program.IntheVoicesutility,thevoicesusedby thetonewheelsappearassolidrectangularblock,meaningthatthevoicesareusedfortheKB3 program.Theydontgetreallocatedatanytime,sincetheyrealwayson,evenifyourenot playinganynotes.AnyvoicesnotdedicatedtoaKB3programbehavenormally.Soifyouhave asetupthatcontainsaKB3programinonezone,andVASTprogramsinoneormoreother zones,youcanmonitorthevoiceallocationofthenonKB3voicesinthesectionofthedisplay thatisntconstantlyfilledwithsolidrectangularblocks.

CLOCK
PressingtheCLOCKsoftbuttonallowsyoutoviewthePC3KsSystemClock(seebelow.)When objectsaresaved,theyaretimestampedwiththedateandtimeofthisclock.Thistimestamp canbeseeninthefilepropertieswhenviewingthefileswithacomputer.

TheFormatsoftbuttonchangestheviewformatofthedateonthispage.TheSetsoftbutton bringsyoutotheSetclockpagewhereyoucansetthesystemclockanddate.Usethecursorto movebetweenfields,usethealphawheelorplus/minusbuttonstochangeeachfield.OntheSet page,presstheSetsoftbuttontosavechangesandreturntotheSystemClockpage,orthe CancelsoftbuttontoreturntotheSystemClockpagewithoutsavingchanges. TheChronosoftbuttonbringsupthePC3KsChronometer(stopwatch)page(seebelow.)This canbeusefulfortimingthelengthofsongsorperformances.PresstheStartsoftbuttontobegin timing.TheChronometerwillcontinuerunningevenifyouexittootherscreensormodes.Press theStopsoftbuttontostoptiming,theResetsoftbuttontoresettheChronometer,ortheCancel softbuttontoreturntotheSystemClockpage.

11-15

Master Mode Reset

Reset
PresstheResetsoftbuttonifyouwanttoreturnyourPC3Ksmemorytothestateitwasinwhen youboughtit. CAUTION:ResettingthePC3KsystemcausesALLparameterstoberestoredtodefaultvaluesandALL userobjectstobeerased.ThePC3Kwillaskyouifyouwanttodeleteeverything(meaningallRAM objects),andapairofYes/Nosoftbuttonswillappear.PressNoifyouwanttokeepanyobjectsyouhave saved.PressYes,andeverythingstoredinRAMwillbeerased.Afterafewseconds,thePC3Kwillreturn totheProgrammodepage.

Loader
PressingtheLoadersoftbuttoncallsuptheBootLoader.SeeAppendix B.

About
PressingtheAboutsoftbuttoncallsupthegeneralinfopageforthePC3K.Onthispageisthe versionoftheinstalledOSandfactoryobject.Pressanykeytoleavethispage.

Save
PressingtheSavesoftbuttonsavestheMasterTableobject,whichsavesmanyimportantPC3K settingsasdefaults.SincetheMasterTableisalwayssavedwhenexitingMasterMode(orMIDI mode,)theSavesoftbuttonisonlyneededinordertosavewhenMasterTableLockison(see MasterTableLock(MasterLock) on page 113,above.) TheMasterTablesavesthecurrentconfigurationoftheMasterPages(both1and2.)TheMaster Tablealsosavesdefaultsettingsforwhichprogramisselectedoneachofthe16channelsin Programmode(notethatthesechannelsettingsareoftenalteredbyloadingasonginSong mode.)ThecurrentchannelandprogramselectedinProgrammodewhentheMasterTableis savedwillbeloadedbydefaultthenexttimethePC3Kispoweredon.TheMasterTablesaves settingsfromMIDImodefortheTransmit,Receive,andChannelspages.TheMasterTablealso savessettingsforfavoriteprograms(seetheUserInterfaceBasicschapter,page34.)Lastly, theMasterTablesavessettingsfortheMasterEffectspageinEffectmode. OnlyoneMasterTableobjectcanbesavedinthePC3Ksinternalmemory,andthisshouldbe sufficientformostusers.ForuserswhowishtosavealternateMastertablesforquickeraccessto differentsystemconfigurations,theobjectmustbesavedtoanexternaldevice(seetheStorage Modechapter.)

11-16

Master Mode SAMPLE MEMORY (MEMORY)

SAMPLE MEMORY (MEMORY)

PresstheMEMORYsoftbuttontogototheSAMPLEMEMORYpage.TheSAMPLEMEMORY pageshowsinformationaboutthePC3Ksflashmemory,whichisusedtostoreuserloaded samples. TheTotalMemoryfieldshowsthetotalusersamplememoryinstalledinthePC3K,128 megabytes.TheUsedfieldshowshowmuchoftheavailablesamplememoryiscurrentlybeing usedbyusersamples.TheFreefieldshowshowmuchsamplememoryisavailableforuse.The Fragmentationfieldshowsthepercentofthetotalmemoryavailablethatcanbereclaimedfor usebyrunningtheDefragfunction.

MAP
PresstheMAPsoftbuttontoviewtheSAMPLEMEMMAPpage.TheSAMPLEMEMMAP pageshowsamaprepresentingthetotalavailablesamplememoryitsusage.Thisisavisual representationoftheinformationontheSAMPLEMEMORYpage.Whitespacesrepresentused memory,whilebluespacesrepresentavailablememory.Bluespaceswithinwhitespaces representfragmentedblocksofmemory.

Defragment (Defrag)
PresstheDefragsoftbuttontodefragmentthePC3Kssamplememory.Becausethismaytakea longtime,thePC3Kwillaskyoutoconfirmorcanceldefragmentation.Defragmentationcan increasetheavailablesamplememorybyreclaimingandgroupingblocksofsamplememory thathavebecomefragmentedandtoosmallforuseotherwise.

Preview Sample (PRVIEW)

PressthePRVIEWbuttontogotothePREVIEWpage.ThePREVIEWpagecanbeusedto automaticallymakeanewkeymapandprogramusinganysampleorgroupofsampleroots. ProgramscreatedwiththepreviewfunctionaresavedinProgramMode.Thisallowsyouto quicklyhearwhatasampleorgroupofsamplerootswillsoundlikeinaprogram.Thepreview functionisalsoaquickwaytobeginmakinganewprogramwhichcanbeeditedfurtherif desired. ThepreviewfunctionworkswithbothuserandfactoryROMsamples.Ifasinglesampleis selectedasinglekeyrangekeymapwillbecreated.Ifagroupofsamplerootsisselected,the previewfunctionwilltrytocreateakeymapwithmultiplekeyrangesbasedoneachsamples rootkey.Ifthesampleorgroupofsamplerootsarestereo,thecreatedprogramwillbestereo. Tousethepreviewfunction,gotothePREVIEWpage,selectasampleorgroupofsampleroots intheSamplefieldusingtheAlphaWheel,/+buttons,orthealphanumericpad,thenpressthe OKsoftbutton.NextyouwillbeshownalistofbanksbyID#range(bank1=1...128,bank2= 129...256,etc.)UsetheAlphaWheelor/+buttonstochooseabankfromthislist.Thepreview functionwillsavethecreatedprogramandkeymapusingthelowestunusedIDnumbers availableinthatbankorhigher.Thepreviewfunctionwillneveroverwriteexistingprogramsor keymaps.SavingtotheUserbank(1025...1152andabove)willmakeiteasiesttofindthenew programorkeymapsintheProgramslistorKeymapslist.PresstheOksoftbuttontochoosethe selectedbankandcreatethenewprogramandkeymap.Thenewprogramwillbeselectedinthe currentlyselectedchannelinProgramMode.

11-17

Master Mode Preview Sample (PRVIEW)

11-18

Song Mode and the Song Editor Getting Started with the Sequencer

Chapter 12 Song Mode and the Song Editor

Getting Started with the Sequencer
ThePC3Kssequencerisapowerfulandversatiletoolforsongwriters,composers,andanyone elsewhowantstorecordandplaybacksongs.Aswithanytool,however,itsbesttostartwith thebasics.Ifyouarefamiliarwithothersequencers,youwillhavenoproblemusingSongmode inthePC3K.Readthroughthissection,however,tolearnaboutthefeaturesthatmakethe PC3Kssequencerunique.

What is a Sequencer?
Asequencerissimilarinsomewaystoamultitracktaperecorder:youcanrecordandplay backallsortsofmusicandsounds,layersoundsontopofothersounds,andchangeor manipulatethingsthatyouvepreviouslyrecorded.Unlikeataperecorder,however,youdo notactuallyrecordsoundswithasequencer.Rather,youarerecordingcommandsthatcause soundstobeplayed.Nonetheless,wewillsometimesexplainsequencerfeaturesbydrawing analogiestofamiliartaperecordingtechniquessuchassplicingandoverdubbing. Thereareseveraladvantagestorecordingasongbysequencing.Foronething,sequencer commandstakeupmuchlessdiskspacethandigitallyrecordedmusicwould,soyoucangeta lotofinformation(thatis,music)permegabyte.Furthermore,youcaneasilymakechangesto yoursequences.Forexample,youcanchangeindividualnotes,transposeparts,orchange instrumentation.Lastly,youcansharethesequencesyoucreatewithothermusicians.

Song Mode: The MAIN Page

TheSongmodeMAINPageallowsrealtimerecordingandplayback,songandtrackselection. Fromthispageyoucanviewandeditthetrackschannel,program,volumeandpansettings,as wellasotherusefulitems.

Parameter Current Song Recording Track Program Track Status

Range of Values Song List 1 to 16, None, Mult Program List , R, M, P

Default 0*New Song* 1 Current Program

12-1

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MAIN Page

Parameter Channel Volume Pan Tempo Mode Location

Range of Values 1 to 16 0 to 127 0 to 127 20.0 to 400.0 BPM, EXT Merge, Erase -9999:9 to 9999:9

Default 1 to 16 left to right 127 64 120.0 BPM Merge 1:1

TheEventsfieldonthetoplinedisplaysthefreeRAMavailableforeventsintheselectedsong. TheSongStatus,alsoonthetoplineofthedisplay,isalwaysoneofthefollowing:

STOPPED PLAYING REC.READY

Thedefaultsequencerstatus;alsoappearswhenyoupresstheStoporPause button. AppearswhenthePlaybuttonispressed,butonlyifthefollowingconditions aretrue:theRecordwasnotpressedpriortopressingPlay. AppearswhentheRecordbuttonispressedwhileSongStatusisSTOPPED. REC.READYflashes,indicatingthatthesequenceriswaitingtostart recording.

Current Song (CurSong)

ThisshowstheIDand16characternameofthesongcurrentlyselectedforrecording,playback, orediting.Whenasongisselected,ProgramChange,Volume,andPaninformationissenttoall MIDIchannelsassignedtotracksthathavedataonthem,andtheinternalclockissettomatch thesettingoftheTempoparameter.Whenlookingforapreviouslysavedsong,youcanscroll throughsongswhilethesequencerisplayingtoquicklyhearthebeginningofeach.

Tempo
TheTempoparameterdeterminestheinitialtempofortheselectedsong.Thesongwillalways startplaybackattheinitialtempo.Whateverthetempoissettowhenyourecordyourfirsttrack willbethesongsinitialtempo.Duringplayback,thecurrenttempoisshowninthisfield. Duringrecording,temposdialedinheregetrecordedintheTempoTrack.Theinitialtempoand othertempochangescanalsobeeditedintheeventlistfortheTempoTrack.TheTempotrack alsoallowsyoutoprogrammoreprecisefractionaltemposwithtwodecimalplaces. Toquicklychangeasongsinitialtempo,pressRecord(theSongStatuswillchangetoREC READY),setthetempodesired,thenpressStop.Theinitialtempocanalsobechangedwiththe TempoparameterontheCOMMONpageintheSongEditor,oratthetopoftheeventlistforthe TempotrackontheEVENTpageintheSongEditor. Note:Youcanalsosetthetempousingthetaptempofunction.Presstheleftandrightcursor buttonssimultaneouslytoaccesstheTEMPOpage(seeTEMPO on page 1110.) Youcanalsosetthetempotobecontrolledbyanexternalsequencer.UsetheAlphanumericPad toenter0inthetempofield,andpressenter.EXTwillappearinthetempofield.AnyMIDI TimeClock(MTC)signalreceivedatthePC3KsUSBorMIDIinportwillnowsettheSong playbacktempo.

12-2

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MAIN Page

Recording Track (RecTrk)

TheRecTrkparameterdetermineswhichtrackisrecordenabled.Settherecordenabledtrackto Multtorecordmorethanonechannelsimultaneously. WhenRecTrkissettoasingletrack(116),Record(R)isdisplayedforthattrackintheTrack StatusIndicatorregion(abovetheTrackandChannelsregion).Conversely,withoneexception, whenanytracksStatusIndicatorischangedtoRecord(R),thattrackisshownasthevaluefor theRecTrkparameter. TheexceptioniswhenRecTrkisalreadysettoMult,youcanselecttherecordenabledtracksby togglingtheTrackStatusIndicatortoRecord(R),andtheRecTrkwillremainsettoMult. WhenMultisinitiallyselected,alloftheemptytrackswillberecordenabled.Trackscontaining datawillremainsettoplay(P),butyoucanmanuallysetthemtorecord(R). Theparameter(s)belowRecTrkchangeaccordingtothevalueofRecTrk.IfRecTrkissettoa singletrack(116),Progisdisplayedandyoucanselecttheprogramtobeassignedtothattrack. Ifyouswitchthroughthechannels,theprogramalsochanges,showingtheprogramcurrently assignedtothatchannel. IfyouchangeRecTrktoNoneorMulti,thedisplaychangestoshowTrk:#.Thisfieldindicates whichtrackiscurrentlybeingtriggeredbythekeyboard,andyoucanusethisTrk:#fieldto selectatrack.

Program (Prog)
Usethisfieldtoscrollthroughtheprogramsinmemoryandselectaprogrambeforeinitially recordingeachtrackofyoursong.AprogramselectedonthecurrentRecTrkbecomesthe tracksinitialprogramthefirsttimethatthetrackisrecorded.Aninitialprogramistheprogram thatwillbeusedforatrackwhenitisplayedfromthestartofbar1(oranyotherpointifthere arenoprogramchangesandControlChaseisturnedon,seeControlChase on page 1217.) ProgramsselectedinProgramorQuickAccessModeareselectedastheprogramonthecurrent RecTrkwhenyoureturntoSongmode. FollowthesestepstochangethecurrentRecTrksinitialprogramafterrecordinghastakenplace onthattrack.Whilethesequencerisstopped,pressRecord,selecttheprogram,pressStop,and savethesong.Thispreservesallchangesyouhavemadetoanyothertrackparameters:volume, pan,tempo,etc.YoucanalsochangetheinitialprogramatthetopofatracksEVENTlist(see SongEditor:TheEVENTPage on page 1231.) AnyMIDIprogramchangesonthecurrentRecTrkorChancausetheIDandnameofthetracks programtochangeduringplayback.Programchangescanbewrittentotheeventlistofthe currentRecTrkbychangingtheProgparameterwhilerecording.Ifaprogramchangetakes place,theprogramwillonlyreturntotheinitialprogramiftriggeredbyanotherprogram change,orifthesequencerisstoppedandrestartedfromthebeginningofthesequence.One exceptiontothisiswhenusingtheControlChasefeature,youwouldonlyneedtorestartthe sequencebeforethefirstprogramchangeinordertoreturntotheinitialprogram(seeControl Chase on page 1217.) ProgchangestoTrk:#ifRecTrkissettoNoneorMult.Thisfieldindicateswhichtrackis currentlybeingtriggeredbythekeyboard,andyoucanusethisTrk:#fieldtoselectatrack.

Track Number (Trk:#)

ThisparameterisavailableonlywhenRecTrkissettoNoneorMult(replacingtheProg parameter.)Itindicateswhichtrackiscurrentlybeingtriggeredbythekeyboard,andyoucan usethisfieldtoselectatrack.

12-3

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MAIN Page

Volume (Vol)
Youcansetavolumelevelforeachtrackasavaluebetween0and127.Ifthechannelofthe RecTrk(orthecontrolchannel,ifRecTrkissettoMultiorNone)containsanyrecordedvolume change(controller7),thechangewillbereflectedastheVolparametersvalueinrealtime,as wellasontheMIXERpage.Also,changingtheVolvaluewhilerecordingwillwritevolume automation(controller7messages)tothecurrentRecTrkseventlist. Initial Volume Settings Eachsongfiledoesnotautomaticallysaveyourvolumesettingforeachtrack.Tomakeasong saveyourvolumesettingsforeachtrack,youmustwriteaninitialvolumeforeachtrack.Initial volumeisthevolumesettingthatwillbeusedwhenyoursongisplayedbackfromthestartof bar1.Aninitialvolumesettingisessentiallyavolumeautomationmessagethatiswritten beforethefirsttickofatrack.Initialvolumesettingsarenotautomaticallywrittenduring recordingbecausetheymakeithardertotryoutdifferentvolumesettingsforatrack.For example,aninitialvolumewillresetanyvolumeadjustmentsthatyoumakeduringplayback eachtimethesongisstoppedandplayedfromthestartofbar1,orifthesongisstoppedand playedfromanypointiftheControlChaseparametersettoOnontheSong:MISCpage(see SongMode:TheMISCPage on page 1217.)Ifyouplantotryoutdifferentvolumesettings,itis easierifyouwriteaninitialvolumeafteryouhavefoundthedesiredsetting. Setting Initial Volume Per Track FollowthesestepstochangethecurrentRecTrksinitialvolume.Whilethesequenceris stopped,pressRecord,changethevalueofVol,pressStop,andsavethesong(followthesame methodtoquicklysetinitialprogramorpansettings.)Initialprogram,volume,andpancanalso besetatthetopofeachtrackseventlist(seeSongEditor:TheEVENTPage on page 1231.) Setting Initial Values For All Tracks AnimportantlaststepbeforesavingafinishedsongistostoreinitialvaluesofProgram,Volume andPanforalltracks.Thiscanbedoneatanytime,butisbestdoneasalaststepifyouplanto makealotofadjustmentstothesesettings.Towriteinitialsettingsforalltracks,presstheKeep softbuttonontheSong:MIXERpage(seeSongMode:TheMIXERPage on page 1212.)After pressingtheKeepsoftbuttonyoumustsaveyoursongtosavethesesettings(youare automaticallypromptedtosaveuponexitingtheSong:MIXERpage.)PressingtheKeepsoft buttonstoresthecurrentvalueofeachtracksProgram,VolumeandPansettingsasinitial settings.Besurethatthesevaluesoneachtrackaresettothevaluethatyouwishtostore,asthe settingsmayhavechangedifyouhavewrittenanyautomation. Note:DontusetheKeepsoftbuttonifyouwouldlikecertaintrackstonotbestoredwithinitialvalues. Inthiscase,onlysetinitialvaluesforeachdesiredparameterasdescribedabove(seeSettingInitial VolumePerTrack.) Volume Sources When An Initial Volume Is Not Set Ifaninitialvolumeisnotstoredwitheachtrack,thevolumeforeachtrackofyoursongwillbe setdependingonwhatmodeyouwereinprevioustoloadingthesong.IfyouareinSongmode andhaveplayedasong,andthenyouloadasongwithoutinitialvolumes,thevolumeofeach trackofthenewlyloadedsongwillbesetbythepreviouslyplayedsong.Volumesettingsare tiedtoMIDIchannels,sothevolumeofeachtrackwillbedependentonwhichMIDIchannelis assignedtoeachtrackineachsong.IfyouareinSongmodeandyouloadasongthatdoesnot haveinitialvolumeswithoutplayinganothersongfirst,thevolumeoftheMIDIchannelfor eachtrackissetdependingonwhichmodeyouenterSongmodefrom.IfyouenterSongmode fromMIDImode,Programmode,orQuickAccessmode,thevolumeofeachMIDIchannelis setinMIDImodeontheChannelspage.IfyouenterSongmodefromSetupmode,thevolume ofeachMIDIchannelissetifazoneusesthesameMIDIchannelontheSetupModeCH/PROG page(setwiththeChannelparameter.)IfazonedoesuseaMIDIchannelthatoneofthetracks inyoursonguses,thevolumeofthattrackwillbesetbytheExitVolumeparameterofthatzone (ontheSetupMode:PANVOLpage.)IfmultiplezonesusethesameMIDIchannel,the

12-4

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MAIN Page

ExitVolumeofthehighestnumberedzonethatusesthatchannelwillsetthevolumefortracks thatusethatchannel.IfExitVolumeissettoNONE,thevalueforEntryVolumeisused.If EntryVolumeandExitVolumearesettoNONE,thenthetrackforthatchannelusesthevolume setforthatchannelinMIDImodeontheChannelspage.Ifthereisnozonethatusescertain channelsusedbyyoursong,thenthosechannelsinyoursongwillusethevolumesettingof thosechannelsinMIDImodeontheChannelspage.

Pan
Youcansetaninitialpanposition(thebalancebetweentheLeftandRightaudiochannels)for theplaybackandrecordingofeachtrackasavaluebetween0and127.Avalueof64iscenter.If thechanneloftheRecTrkorthecontrolchannelcontainsanypanningdata(controller10),the changewillbereflectedasthePanparametersvalueinrealtime,aswellasontheMIXERpage. Also,changingthePanvaluewhilerecordingwillwritePanautomation(controller10 messages)tothecurrentRecTrkseventlist. Initial Pan Settings EachsongfiledoesnotautomaticallysaveyourPansettingforeachtrack.Tomakeasongsave yourPansettingsforeachtrack,youmustwriteaninitialPanvalueforeachtrack.InitialPanis thePansettingthatwillbeusedwhenyoursongisplayedbackfromthestartofbar1.Aninitial PansettingisessentiallyaPanautomationmessagethatiswrittenbeforethefirsttickofatrack. InitialPansettingsarenotautomaticallywrittenduringrecordingbecausetheymakeitharder totryoutdifferentPansettingsforatrack.Forexample,aninitialPansettingwillresetanyPan adjustmentsthatyoumakeduringplaybackeachtimethesongisstoppedandplayedfromthe startofbar1,orifthesongisstoppedandplayedfromanypointiftheControlChase parametersettoOnontheSong:MISCpage(seeSongMode:TheMISCPage on page 1217.)If youplantotryoutdifferentpanpositions,itiseasierifyouwriteaninitialPanafteryouhave foundthedesiredsetting. Setting Initial Pan Per Track FollowthesestepstochangethecurrentRecTrksinitialPan.Whilethesequencerisstopped, pressRecord,changethevalueofPan,pressStop,andsavethesong(followthesamemethod toquicklysetinitialprogramorvolumesettings.)Initialprogram,pan,andvolumecanalsobe setatthetopofeachtrackseventlist(seeSongEditor:TheEVENTPage on page 1231.) Setting Initial Values For All Tracks AnimportantlaststepbeforesavingafinishedsongistostoreinitialvaluesofProgram,Volume andPanforalltracks.Thiscanbedoneatanytime,butisbestdoneasalaststepifyouplanto makealotofadjustmentstothesesettings.Towriteinitialsettingsforalltracks,presstheKeep softbuttonontheSong:MIXERpage(seeSongMode:TheMIXERPage on page 1212.)After pressingtheKeepsoftbuttonyoumustsaveyoursongtosavethesesettings(youare automaticallypromptedtosaveuponexitingtheSong:MIXERpage.)PressingtheKeepsoft buttonstoresthecurrentvalueofeachtracksProgram,VolumeandPansettingsasinitial settings.Besurethatthesevaluesoneachtrackaresettothevaluethatyouwishtostore,asthe settingsmayhavechangedifyouhavewrittenanyautomation. Note:DontusetheKeepsoftbuttonifyouwouldlikecertaintrackstonotbestoredwithinitialvalues. Inthiscase,onlysetinitialvaluesforeachdesiredparameterasdescribedabove(seeSettingInitialPan PerTrack.) Pan Sources When An Initial Pan Is Not Set IfaninitialPanisnotstoredwitheachtrack,thePanforeachtrackofyoursongwillbeset dependingonwhatmodeyouwereinprevioustoloadingthesong.IfyouareinSongmode andhaveplayedasong,andthenyouloadasongwithoutinitialPansettings,thePanofeach trackofthenewlyloadedsongwillbesetbythepreviouslyplayedsong.Pansettingsaretiedto MIDIchannels,sothePanofeachtrackwillbedependentonwhichMIDIchannelisassignedto eachtrackineachsong.IfyouareinSongmodeandyouloadasongthatdoesnothaveinitial

12-5

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MAIN Page

Pansettingswithoutplayinganothersongfirst,thePanoftheMIDIchannelforeachtrackisset dependingonwhichmodeyouenterSongmodefrom.IfyouenterSongmodefromMIDI mode,Programmode,orQuickAccessmode,thePanofeachMIDIchannelissetinMIDImode ontheChannelspage.IfyouenterSongmodefromSetupmode,thePanofeachMIDIchannel issetifazoneusesthesameMIDIchannelontheSetupModeCH/PROGpage(setwiththe Channelparameter.)IfazonedoesuseaMIDIchannelthatoneofthetracksinyoursonguses, thePanofthattrackwillbesetbytheExitPanparameterofthatzone(ontheSetupMode:PAN VOLpage.)IfmultiplezonesusethesameMIDIchannel,theExitPanofthehighestnumbered zonethatusesthatchannelwillsetthePanfortracksthatusethatchannel.IfExitPanissetto NONE,thevalueforEntryPanisused.IfEntryPanandExitPanaresettoNONE,thenthetrack forthatchannelusesthePansettingofthatchannelinMIDImodeontheChannelspage.Ifthere isnozonethatusescertainchannelsusedbyyoursong,thenthosechannelsinyoursongwill usethePansettingofthosechannelsinMIDImodeontheChannelspage.

Mode
IfModeissettoMergeyouwillbeabletooverdubwhenrecordingonatrackcontaining previouslyrecordeddata.YoullusuallywanttosetModetoMergewhenRecMode(ontheBIG page)issettoLoop.Otherwise,eachtimethroughtheloop,thepreviouslyrecorded informationwillbeerased. IfyousetModetoErase,thepreviouslyrecordeddataontherecordenabledtrackwillbe replacedwiththenewdataonlyduringtheBarsandBeatsyouareactuallyrecording,andthe previouslyrecordeddatabeforeandafterthenewlyrecordedBarsandBeatswillbepreserved.

Location (Locat)
TheBarandBeatdisplayedastheLocatevaluechangesrelativetocurrentlocationofthesong duringplaybackandrecording.YoucansetthistoanegativeBarandBeatlocationtostart playbackasetlengthoftimebeforethebeginningofthesong. WheneveryousettheLocatepoint,thatlocationwillbeusedasthereturnpointwhenStopis pressed.SimplypressStopagaintoresetthesongtothetop(1:1).

Mode Indicators (+ and x):

ModeIndicatorsappearonlyfortracksthatalreadycontaindata. Aplussign(+)appearsabovetheTrackStatusIndicatorofatracksettorecord(R)whenthe ModeparameterissettoMerge. An(x)appearsabovetheTrackStatusIndicatorofatracksettoRecord(R)whentheMode parameterissettoErase.

Activity Indicators
AsmallsquareabovetheTrackStatusIndicatorofatracksettoPlay(P)orMute(M)meansthe trackcontainsdata. Duringplaybackandrecording,theindicatorsabovetrackscontaininganyMIDIdatawillflash asmall,filledinsquarewhenanyMIDIactivityisdetected.

Track Status Indicators

UsingtheUp,Down,Left,andRightcursorbuttonstopositionthecursorontoaTrackStatus Indicator,youcantoggleanemptytrack()intoRecord(R)withtheAlphaWheelorPlus/ Minusbuttons. Onceatrackcontainsdata,itwillhavea(P)asaTrackStatusIndicator,anditwillbeplayed duringplayback.YounowwillbeabletotogglebetweenPlay(P),Mute(M),andRecord(R).

12-6

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MAIN Page

ThetrackselectedastheRecTrkwilldisplayan(R),designatingitastherecordingtrack.Ifthe RecTrkissettoMult,initiallyallemptytrackswillhaveRecord(R)asaTrackStatusIndicator, anyofwhichcanbeswitchedbacktoempty()ifatanytimerecordingonspecifictracksisnot desired. Ifthereisntatrackwithan(R),theRecTrkparametersvaluewillbeNone.(Theexceptionis whentheRecTrkissettoMultandyouhaveswitchedallofthetracksoutofrecordenable.)

Track Channels
EachtrackhasaMIDIChannelthatitusestoreceiveandtransmitdata.Bydefault,tracks116 ofanewsongareassignedtoChannels116respectively,althoughatrackcanplayorrecordon anychannelandthesamechannelcanbeusedformorethanonetrack.Keepinmind,however, thatonlyoneprogramcanbeassignedtoachannelatatime,soifyouhavemorethanonetrack assignedtothesamechannel,theyllplaythesameprogramtheoneonthehighernumbered track,sincethatsthemostrecentProgramChangecommandreceivedonthatchannel.

Soft Buttons on the MAIN Page

Thissectioncontainsdescriptionsofthefunctionsofthefunctionsoftbuttons,thatis,the buttonswithlabelsnotinallcaps.Aswithallothermodes,thesoftbuttonsinSongModethat havelabelsinallcapscallupdifferentpages.Seethefollowingsectionsfordescriptionsonhow thesepageswork. The Rec, Play, and Stop Soft Buttons NOTE:Thesebuttonsaresimilartothetransportcontrolsonatapedeck.Someofthosedecksrequireyou topressPlayandRecordsimultaneouslytobeginrecording.ThePC3Kstransportbuttonsarentlike that,however.Itsimportantthatyoupressonlyoneofthesesoftbuttonsatatimetoinsureproper recordingstartpoints,andtoalwaysbesureofthecurrentsequencerstatus. TheRecsoftbuttonchangestheSongStatustoREC.READYifthecurrentSongStatusis STOPPED.IfthecurrentSongStatusisPLAYING,itwillbeswitchedtoRECORDINGwhenyou pressRec. ThePlaysoftbuttonplaysbackanyrecordeddatawhenpressedwhilethesongstatusis STOPPED.PlaybackwillbeginfromthebarandbeatspecifiedintheLocateparameter.When theSongStatusisRECREADY,pressingthePlaysoftbuttonwillbeginrecording. ThePlaysoftbuttonfunctionsasaPausebutton,butonlywhentheSongStatusisPLAYINGor RECORDING.PressingPlaywhilethesongisplayingwillstoptheplayback,andthelocation remainsatthecurrentbarandbeat,allowingyoutocontinuefromthatlocationbypressing Playagain. PressingPausewhilerecordingwillstoptherecordingprocessasifyouhadpressedStop. TheStopsoftbuttonhaltstheplaybackorrecording,andresetsthesongslocationtoeitherthe defaultBar 1, Beat1value,ortowhateverlocationyoudefinedwiththeLocateparameter.Ifthe locationisdefinedassomethingotherthanBar1,Beat1,pressStoptwicetoresetto1:1. PressingStopwhentheSongStatusisRECORDINGwillalwaysprompttheSavechangesto thissong?dialog(describedbelow),andprovidesyouwiththeopportunitytolistentothenew songandcompareitwiththeold,previouslysaved,songbeforeansweringYesorNo. ThePC3KalsohasdedicatedfrontpanelbuttonsforRecord,Play/Pause,andStop.Youllfind themjustbelowtheeightmodebuttons.Additionallyyoucancontrolthesefunctionsfromany externalsequencerthatsendsMIDIMachineControl(MMC)messages.ThePC3Kwill automaticallylistentoanyMMCmessagesreceivedattheUSBorMIDIinport.ThePC3Kwill alsoautomaticallysenditsownMMCmessagesfromtheUSBandMIDIoutport,enablingthe

12-7

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MAIN Page

PC3Kstransporttocontrolanexternalsequencer.Thisworksfromanymode,thoughin ProgrammodeyouwillwanttomakesurethattheDemoButtonfunctionissettooff.Youcan dothisfromMasterMode,Page2.WhenDemoButtonissettooff,youcanstillhearProgram demosbypressingthecursorupanddownbuttonssimultaneously.

Important Note About External Sequencers:

IfusingthePC3Ktransportcontrolstorecordtoanexternalsequencer,youmustbeinSong modewiththeRecTrksettoNone.Ifthisisnotdone,youwillsimultaneouslyrecordtothe externalsequencerandtheselectedRecTrkifinSongMode,oractivatetheQuickSong Recordingfunctionfromothermodes.Thiswillcauseunwantedsequencestoberecordedinthe PC3Kssequencer. IfyouarealsotriggeringPC3Ksoundsfromtheexternalsequencer,youwillrunintothesame issuewhenusingthetransportontheexternalsequencer(ifitissendingMMC.)Inthiscase, eitherturnoffoutgoingMMContheexternalsequencer,orusethesameprecautionsasabove. The Load and Save Buttons TheLoadsoftbuttoncallsupascrollinglistfromwhichyoucanquicklylocateandloada sequence.YoucanselectasequenceusingeithertheAlphaWheelor/+buttons,oryoucan enterasequencesIDnumber. TheSavebuttoncallsuptheSaveAsdialog. The NewSng and ClrSng Soft Buttons TheNewSngsoftbuttoncreatesanewsongusingtheDefaultSequence(specifiedonPage2of MasterMode)asaparametertemplate.Pressingthisbuttonisthesameasselecting0*New Song*. TheClrSngsoftbuttoncreatesanewsongwhoseparametersaresettothedefaultvalueslisted inthetablebeneaththissectionsheader(SongMode:TheMAINPage).Keepinmindthatthe selectedprogramforthenewsongwillbethecurrentlyselectedprogram.

The Save Changes Dialog

ThefollowingdialogappearsafteryouhaverecordedatrackandpressedStop,orifyouhave enteredtheSongEditorandmadechanges,thenpressedExit,orifyoupressSaveintheSong Editor.

ThePlyNewsoftbuttonallowsyoutoplaythesongwithyourlastrecordedperformance.You willlikelywanttohearthisfirst.

12-8

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MAIN Page

PressingPlyOldwillplaythecurrentsong,minustheperformancethatyoujustrecorded.You cantogglebetweenPlayOldandPlayNewwithoutrestartingthesongbypressingeither buttonwhilethesongisplaying.Thisisusefultocheckifyourlastperformancewasbetteror worsethanwhatwaspreviouslysaved(ifanythingwaspreviouslysaved.) TheLocatefieldallowsyouchooseastarttimefortheoldornewplayback.Thisisusefulwhen youjustwanttohearacertainpartofthesongwithoutlisteningtothewholething.ThePlaying fielddisplayswhethertoNEWorOLDdataisplaying. StophaltstheplaybackofeithertheOldortheNewversionofthesongyouarecurrently auditioning.ThisalsoresetsthesongsstartlocationtoeitherthedefaultBar1,Beat1value,or towhateverlocationyoudefinedintheLocatefield. PressingRetryrestartsrecordingfromthesamepointyoulaststartedrecordingat. Yessavesthesongwiththeperformanceyoujustrecorded.Whateverwasplayedbackwhen youpressedPlayNewwillbetheversionofthesongsavedwhenyoupressYes.Thesaveas dialogwillbedisplayed:

UsetheAlphaWheel,/+buttons,orAlphanumericPadtochooseafreeID#locationtosavethe song,orchooseausedID#locationtooverwriteapreviouslysavedsongwithyournewversion. Whenoverwritingasongfile,thesaveasdialogdisplaysReplacefollowedbythenameof thefilebeingreplaced.PressRenameifyouwouldliketochangethesongsname.PressSaveto savethesong,orCanceltoreturntothepreviousscreen. Ifyoudecidenottosaveorrename,NoreturnsyoutotheSongmodepageinwhichyouwere lastrecording.Changestothecurrentsongarenotsaved,thoughthesequencerwillremember changestocertainsettingsfromtheMAINandBIGpages.ThesesettingsareTempo,Merge/ EraseMode,Locate,trackmutestatus,TimeIn,TimeOut,SongEnd,Loop,Punch,andMetron. Topermanentlysavethesechangeswiththesong,makesuretochooseSavefromthesoft buttonmenubeforepoweringofforloadinganewsong.Alternatively,youwillbepromptedto savethesechangesuponloadinganewsongiftheMAINpagesettingswerechangedwhile recordingorwithrecordingarmed,orifanyoftheBIGpagesettingswerechanged. Formoredetailedinstructions,seeSavingandNaming on page 53.

12-9

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The BIG Page

Song Mode: The BIG Page

OntheBIGpage,thePC3Kdisplaysinalargefont,thepagesnamethecurrenttime/location oftheplayheadofthesequencerinaBar:Beat:Tickformat(liketheRifftime/location display).Alsodisplayedisthecurrentstatusofthesequencer,andtheBIGpagessix parameters.

Parameter (Bar) (Current Position) (Beat) (Tick) (Bar) Time In (Beat) (Tick) (Bar) Time Out (Beat) (Tick) (Bar) Song End Loop Punch Metronome (Beat) (Tick)

Range of Values

Default

Depends on Time Signature 0 to 959 1 to 4 0 to 959 1 to 4 0 to 959 1 to 4 0 to 959 (----), Loop (-----), Punch Rec, Always, Off 0 (----) (-----) Rec 0 0 0

Time In
TheTimeInparameterdeterminesthestarttimeforLooporPunchInrecording(moreonthis below).

Time Out
TheTimeOutparameterdeterminesthestoptimeforLooporPunchInrecording.

12-10

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The FX Pages

Song End
TheSongEndparameterdeterminestheendpointforthesong.NotethatwhenTimeOutand SongEndaresettothesamelocation,changesmadetoSongEndarereflectedinTimeOut. WhenrecordingbeyondyourinitiallyspecifiedSongEndpoint,youllnoticethattheSongEnd locationautomaticallymovesandroundstothenextbar,soastoalwaysbeaheadofthe playhead.ItispossibletomovetheSongEndpointtoalocationbeforeotherMIDIevents(i.e., inthemiddleofthecurrentsong)thesequencerwillignore(butnotdelete)eventsafterthis point.

Loop
WiththeLoopparametersettoLoop,thesequencerwillloopthesegmentofthesongbetween TimeInandTimeOut.

Punch
WiththePunchparametersettoPunch,thesequencer(inRECORDINGmode)willrecord eventsonlybetweenTimeInandTimeOut.

Metro
TheMetroparameterdeterminestherecordingmodesinwhichthemetronomewillplay.With MetrosettoRec,themetronomeonlyplayswhilerecordingisinprogress.WithMetrosetto Always,themetronomeplaysduringplaybackandrecording.WithMetrosettoOff,the metronomedoesntplayatall.

Song Mode: The FX Pages

ThefourSongmodeFXpagesFX,AUXFX1,AUXFX2,andMASTFXworkthesamewayas theEffectsmodepagesCHANFX,AUXFX1,AUXFX2,andMASTER.SeetheEffectsmode chapterforinformationoneditingthesepages.

12-11

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MIXER Page

Song Mode: The MIXER Page

TheMIXERpageshowsthecurrentsettingsfortheprogramnumber,panning,andvolumeof eachtrack(ingroupsof8).Theselectedtracknumber,aswellastherangeoftracksdisplayed onthepage,aredisplayedintheupperrighthandcornerofthescreen.UsetheChan/Layer buttonsorthecursorbuttonstochangethecurrentlyselectedtrack.Togettootherpagesof tracks,continuescrollingpastthefirstorlasttrackonthepage.Thebottompartofthescreen displayscurrentsettingsfortheselectedtrackincludingprogramnumberandname,panning, andvolume. Changingthesettingsforatracksprogram,volume,orpanningwhilethesequenceris recordingwillrecordthesechanges,viewableinthecorrespondingtracksEVENTpage.Upon playback,theseautomatedmixerparameterswilldisplaytheirchangingvaluesinrealtimeon theMIXERpage.BelowisanexampleMIXERpage:

Parameter Current Pan Current Volume Current Program Selected Track (Trk) Current Program** For Selected Track Current Volume** Current Pan**

Range of Values 0 to 127 0 to 127 Program List 1 to 16 Program List 0 to 127 0 to 127

Default None None None 1 (Current Program) 127 64

**Uneditable,thesevaluesareanexpandedviewofthemixervaluesforthecurrentlyselectedtrack,which canbeeditedinthefirstthreerowsoftheMIXERpage.

The Rec, Play, and Stop Soft Buttons

ThesesoftbuttonsfunctionasdescribedinTheRec,Play,andStopSoftButtons on page 127.

The Keep Soft Button

PressingtheKeepsoftbuttoncapturesthecurrentsettingsforeachtracksprogram,panning, andvolumeastheinitialsettings.Remembertosaveifyouwantthesechangetobepermanent!

The Done Soft Button

IfnochangesweremadeintheMIXERpage,pressingtheDonesoftbuttoncallsuptheMAIN page.Ifchangesweremade,pressingtheDonesoftbuttoncallsuptheSaveChangesdialog.

12-12

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The METRO Page

Song Mode: The METRO Page

AlloftheparametersaffectingthesequencermetronomeareontheMETROpage.Likethe otherpagesintheSongEditor,youcansavechangesmadeinthispage.

Parameter Metronome Count Off Program Channel Strong Note Strong Velocity Soft Note Soft Velocity

Range of Values Off, Rec, Always Off, 1, 2, 3, 4 (StartOnly, Always) Program List 1 to 16 0 to 127 0 to 127 0 to 127 0 to 127

Default Rec 1 (StartOnly) 998 Click Track 16 102 127 104 100

Metronome
Thisparameterdeterminestherecordingmodesinwhichthemetronomeplays.With MetronomesettoOff,themetronomeneverplays.WithMetronomesettoRec,themetronome onlyplaysduringrecording.WithMetronomesettoAlways,themetronomeplaysduring playbackandrecording.

CountOff
ThisparameterdeterminesthenumberofmeasuresthePC3Kwillcountoffbeforerecording. WithStartOnlyselected,thePC3Kwillonlycountoffatthebeginningofasequence.With Alwaysselected,thePC3Kwillcountofffromanypointinasequence.

Program
Thisparameterdeterminestheprogramwithwhichthemetronomeisplayed.Ifyouwanteda pianoforametronome,forinstance,youcouldsetProgramtoapianoprogram.Thedefault programis998ClickTrack.

Channel
ThisparameterdeterminestheMIDIchanneltowhichthemetronomeprogramandeventsare sent.

12-13

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The METRO Page

Strong Note
ThisparameterdeterminestheMIDInumberofthenoteplayedbythemetronomeforthe downbeats(the1ofeachmeasure).

Strong Vel
Thisparameterdeterminesthevelocityofthenoteplayedbythemetronomeforthedownbeats (the1ofeachmeasure).

Soft Note
ThisparameterdeterminestheMIDInumberofthenoteplayedbythemetronomeforthe upbeats(the2,3,and4ofeachmeasure).

Soft Vel
Thisparameterdeterminesthevelocityofthenoteplayedbythemetronomefortheupbeats (the2,3,and4ofeachmeasure).

The Rec, Play, and Stop Soft Buttons

ThesesoftbuttonsfunctionasdescribedinTheRec,Play,andStopSoftButtons on page 127.

The Done Soft Button

IfnochangesweremadeintheMETROpage,pressingtheDonesoftbuttoncallsuptheMAIN page.Ifchangesweremade,pressingtheDonesoftbuttoncallsuptheSaveChangesdialog.

12-14

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The Filter Pages (RECFLT and PLYFLT)

Song Mode: The Filter Pages (RECFLT and PLYFLT)

OntheRECFLTandPLYFLTpagesyoucanspecifywhateventareignoredduring,respectively, recordingandplayback.Bothpageshavethesameparameterswiththesamerangesofvalues, butyouwouldusetheRECFLTpagetoconfigurerecordingeventfiltering,andthePLYFLT pagetoconfigureplaybackeventfiltering. BelowistheRECFLTpage.

Parameter Notes Low Key Note Filter Hi Key Low Velocity Hi Velocity Controllers Controller Filter Controller Low Value Hi Value Pitch Bend Program Change Mono Pressure Poly Pressure

Range of Values On, Off C -1 to G 9 C -1 to G 9 0 to 127 0 to 127 On, Off ALL, MIDI Control Source List 0 to 127 0 to 127 On, Off On, Off On, Off On, Off

Default On C -1 G9 0 127 On ALL 0 127 On On On On

Notes
WithNotessettoOff,allnotesareignoredduringrecording/playback.WithNotessettoOn, onlythenoteswithinthespecifiednoterangewithvelocitieswithinspecifiedvelocityrangeare recorded/played.

LoKey
LoKeydeterminesthelowestkeythatisrecorded/playedbackwhenNotesissettoOn.

Hi
TheHitotherightofLoKeydeterminesthehighestkeythatisrecorded/playedbackwhen NotesissettoOn.

12-15

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The Filter Pages (RECFLT and PLYFLT)

LoVel
LoVeldeterminesthelowestnoteon/offvelocitythatisrecorded/playedbackwhenNotesisset toOn.

Hi
TheHitotherightofLoVeldeterminesthehighestnoteon/offvelocitythatisrecorded/played backwhenNotesissettoOn.

Controllers
WithControllerssettoOff,allcontrollersareignoredduringrecording/playback.With ControllerssettoOn,controllerdataonlyofthespecifiedcontrollerandonlywithinthe specifiedvaluerangearerecorded/played.

Controller
TheControllerparameterdetermineswhichcontroller(s)is/arerecorded/playedbackwhen ControllersissettoOn.

LoVal
LoValdeterminesthelowestvalueforthespecifiedcontrollerthatisrecorded/playedback whenControllersissettoOn.

Hi
TheHitotherightofLoValdeterminesthehighestvalueforthatspecifiedcontrollerthatis recorded/playedbackwhenControllersissettoOn.

PitchBend
Thisparameterenables/disablespitchbendeventstoberecorded/playedback.

ProgChange
Thisparameterenables/disablesprogramchangestoberecorded/playedbackthisincludes Controllers0and32(bankchange).

MonoPress
Thisparameterenables/disablesmonophonickeypressureeventstoberecorded/playedback.

PolyPress
Thisparameterenables/disablespolyphonickeypressureeventstoberecorded/playedback.

The Rec, Play, and Stop Soft Buttons

ThesesoftbuttonsfunctionasdescribedinTheRec,Play,andStopSoftButtons on page 127.

The Done Soft Button

IfnochangesweremadeintheRECFLT/PLYFLTpage,pressingtheDonesoftbuttoncallsup theMAINpage.Ifchangesweremade,pressingtheDonesoftbuttoncallsuptheSave Changesdialog.

12-16

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The MISC Page

Song Mode: The MISC Page

TheMISCpagecontainsfivemiscellaneous(butveryimportantanduseful)sequencer parameters.TheMISCpageappearsbelow:

Parameter Control Chase Quantize Grid Resolution Swing Release Quantization Key Wait

Range of Values On, Off Off, 1 to 100% 1/1 to 1/480 -100% to 125% Yes, No Off, On

Default On Off 1/8 0 No Off

Control Chase
Acommonshortcomingofmanyoldersequencersisthatwhenyoustartasequenceatsome pointinthemiddleofsequence,thecontrollersremainattheircurrentlevelsuntilthesequencer comesacrossacontrollerevent.ControlChaseremediesthis(generally)undesiredbehavior. WhenControlChaseisOn,allnonnoteMIDIeventsfromthebeginningofthesonguptothe currenttimearecomputed,andthemostrecentnonnoteMIDIeventissentoutbeforestarting playback.Thisensuresthatthevolume,panning,programchanges,andothercontrollersforthe songarecorrect,regardlessofwhereyoustartthesong.WithControlChasesettoOff,the sequencerbehavesaspreviouslydescribed.

Quant
TheQuantizeparameterdeterminestheamountofrealtimequantization(ifany)appliedtothe sequenceduringrecording.Thepercentagespecifiedforthisparameteristheamountof quantizationthesequencerappliestothegrid(seebelow)foreachNoteeventrecorded. Notethatusingrealtimequantizationhasthesameeffectasrecordingnormally,andthenusing theQuantizeTrackEditingoperation.

Grid
Thegridparameterdeterminestheresolutionofquantizationandthepositionofthegrid points.

12-17

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Mode: The STATS Page

Swing
TheSwingparameterdeterminestheamount(inunitsofpercent)ofswingappliedduring quantization.

Release
TheReleaseparameterdetermineswhetherornotnoteoffeventsarequantized.

Key Wait
WithKeyWaitsettoon,akeystrikewilltriggerplaybackofasequence(iftheplay/pause buttonisarmed,)ortriggerrecordingofasequence(iftherecordbuttonisarmed.)

Song Mode: The STATS Page

TheSTATSpageisadisplayonlypagethatshowsthestatusofthePC3Keventpool.Theevent poolisusedbyallthesequencesloadedatagiventimeinthesystem.Theseinclude:thecurrent song,thecomparesongbuffer,andupto16riffs. TheSTATSpageshownbelowisthestateofthePC3Keventpoolwith0*NewSong*selected, andnootheruserobjectsloadedinanyothermodes:

TheeventsinthePC3Karesimilartoeventsofothersequencerswithasinglemajordifference: theNoteeventsarestoredasasinglebigevent,i.e.,onePC3KNoteeventiscomprisedofthe noteonandnoteoffevents.AllothereventsarestoredassingleeventsonthePC3K. ThefieldsontheSTATSpageare: Maxthemaximumnumberofnotes/eventsinmemory. Usedthetotalnumberofnotes/eventsbeingused. Freethenumberofnotes/eventsthatarefree. Part.thenumberofpartitionedevents,whichareeventsforwhichspaceinmemoryis allocated.Thisistechnicalinformationofimportanceonlytoengineers(andmaybeafew powerusers). Songthetotalnumberofevents(includingnotes)inthecurrentsong. Tempthetotalnumberofeventsinthetempbuffer(thetempbufferisusedwhen grabbingeventsfromadifferentsong). Riffs116thetotalnumberofeventsineachriff.

12-18

Song Mode and the Song Editor The Song Editor

The Song Editor

Ingeneral,youllgettotheSongeditorpagesbypressingtheEditbuttonanytimeyourein Songmode.Theresoneexception:iftheProgramparameteriscurrentlyhighlightedonthe display,youllentertheProgrameditorwhenyoupressEdit. ThereareafewconventionssharedbyalloftheSongeditorpages.Displayedatthetopofeach Songeditorpageisthenameofthepageandthecurrentlyselectedtrack(116,oralltracks).All ofthevaluesfortheparametersfoundinanyoftheSongeditorpagesaresavedinthesong object.

Song Editor: The COMMON Page

PresstheEditbuttononthefrontpanelofthePC3KtodisplaytheCOMMONpageandbegin editingasong.Thisiswhereyouwillfindparameterscommontoalltracks,suchastempoand timesignature,controlparametersforeffects,andsoftbuttonsforswitchingtootherSong editorpages.

Parameter Tempo Time Signature FX Track Drum Track MIDI Destination (Numerator) (Denominator)

Range of Values 0 (external), 20.00 to 400.00 BPM 1 to 99 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, and 64 1 to 16 , D , L, M, U

Default 120 4 4 1 L

Thecurrentlyselectedtrackisdisplayedonthetopline,thoughontheCOMMONpagethis onlyappliestotheDrumTrkandMidiDstparameters(seebelow.)Therestoftheparameterson theCOMMONpageareglobalsettingsforthesonganddonotdirectlyaffectindividualtracks.

Tempo
Thisisanotherplacewherethesongsinitialtempocanbesetormodified.

TimeSig
Affectstheclick,playbacklooping,andlocatefunctionaswellassomeeditingoperations.Does notchangetherecordeddata,thoughitdoeschangethewaydataisdisplayedonthescreen.

12-19

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: The COMMON Page

FX Track
ThePC3KusesthechannelofthetrackspecifiedforFXTrackastheAuxFXchannel.

DrumTrack
AnyofthesongstrackscanbedefinedasDrumTrackssothattheirNoteeventsdonotget transposedwhenatranspositionisappliedwhenusingthetrackasariffinasetup(see Riffs on page 758andTranspose/RootNote on page 760.)Withtracksdesignatedasdrumtracks, youcantransposeawholesongthatisbeingusedasariff,butthedrumtrackswillcontinueto playthecorrectsoundsthattheyplayedintheoriginalkey.Otherwise,thedrumsoundswould changewitheachtransposition. Usethecursorbuttonstoselectatracknumber.Youcanaccess8tracksatonce,eithertracks18 or916.UsetheChan/Layerbuttonstotheleftofthedisplaytoselectoneofthetracks18 (viewedinthetoprightcornerofthepage)inordertoaccesstracks18,orselectoneofthe tracks916toaccesstracks916.WiththedesiredtracknumberselectedintheDrumTrkfield, usetheAlphaWheelor/+buttonstotogglebetweenD,todesignatethetrackasadrumtrack, ortodesignatethetrackasanondrumtrack.

TheDrumTrackssettingsdonothaveanyeffectoneditsmadeontheTRACKpageintheSong Editor.AnytracksdefinedasDrumTracksaretransposedwhenatranspositionisappliedto thesetracksfromtheTRACKpage.

MidiDst

TheMIDIdataoneachtrackhasadestinationassignmentselectablewiththeTrackDest parameter.Therearefourpossibleindicators: L=Local.ThetracksMIDIdatawillbetransmittedlocallyonly,tothePC3Ksinternalsound generator.NoneofthetracksMIDIdatawillbesenttotheUSBorMIDIOutport. M=MIDI.ThetracksMIDIdatawillbetransmittedonlytotheMIDIOut. U=USBMIDI.ThetracksMIDIdatawillbetransmittedonlytotheUSBport. =None. PairsandgroupsoftheabovelettersindicatethatMIDIisbeingsenttoeachletters correspondingdestination.

12-20

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: The TRACK Page

Soft Buttons on the COMMON Page

TRACKcallsuptheTRACKpage.Thispageaccessesusefultrackbasededitfunctions.There isaselectableeditfunctionthatcanbeappliedtotheselectedtrackoralltracksinyoursong. TheTRACKpageisdescribedonpage 1221. EVENTcallsuptheEVENTpage,aneventliststyleeditor.OntheEVENTpageintheSong Editor,youcanscrollthrough,modify,add,ordeleteanyorallofthetracksMIDIevents.The EVENTpageisdescribedonpage 1231. Rec,Play,andStopfunctionasdescribedinTheRec,Play,andStopSoftButtons on page 127. SavecallsuptheSaveasdialog.

Song Editor: The TRACK Page

Thispageallowsyouaccesstousefultrackbasededitfunctions.Thesefunctionsare:
Erase Copy Bounce Insert Delete Quantize Shift Transpose Grab Change Remap

Foreachfunction,thereisasetofparameterstocontrolhowthefunctionoperates,andonwhat regionoftheselectedtrack(s).Asusual,thetoplineofthispagedisplaystheselectedtrackor tracks.Selecttheavailablecurrenttrack(s)foreditingbyusingtheChan/Layerbuttons.Press bothoftheChan/LayerbuttonstogethertoselectAlltracks. BelowisanexampleoftheTRACKpagefortheBouncefunction.

Youwillnoticethatthepageisdividedintotwohalves,withtherighthalfbeingaseparatebox ThisiscalledtheRegion/Criteriabox.Theparametersinthisboxareusedtoselecttherangeof events(fromastartBarandBeattoandendBarandBeat)formodification,aswellaswhich typesofeventsfunctionwillaffect. Theparametersinthisboxwillgenerallybethesameformostfunctions.Forsomefunctions, however,someparametersmaynotapply.Forexample,QuantizeandTransposeapplyonlyto notes,whileRemapappliesonlytoControllers.InadditiontotheRegion/Criteriabox parameters,theLocateparameterisalsofoundoneachfunction.

12-21

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: The TRACK Page

SincetheseparametersarecommontomostTrackfunctions,wewilldefinethemfirst.Then welldescribetheindividualfunctionsalongwiththeparametersspecifictoeach,whichare normallyfoundontheleftsideofthepage.ThefunctionQuantizehasuniqueparameterinits Region/Criteriaboxes.Welldescribethoseparametersalongwiththefunctions. Onceyouvechosenafunctionandsettheparameterstoyourliking,pressGo.Thisexecutesthe editingfunction.Youcanthenplaythesequencetoheartheresultsofyouredit.Ifyoudontlike youredit,simplyexittheeditorandpressNowhenyouareaskedifyouwanttosave.Ifyoudo likeyouredit,youcanpressDoneandthenSave,orjustexittheeditorandsavethechanges. Or,youcangotoanothereditfunction.Keepinmindthough,thatifyouchoosetoperform morethanoneeditwithoutsaving,andyouarenotsatisfiedwithoneofthechangesyoumake, youwillhavetoexittheeditorwithoutsavingandthenredoeachofthechangesyoumade. Thatswhyitsusuallybesttosaveaftereachsuccessfuledit.

Common Parameters for Edit Song: Track Functions

Locate ThisparameterisavailableforeveryfunctionontheTRACKpage.Itappearsatthelowerleft handcornerofthepage. TheLocatebar,beat,andtickwillchangeinrealtimeduringplaybackandrecordingtoreflect thesongscurrentposition.Itcanbesettoanybar,beat,andtick,includingnegativevalues. Playbackbeginsat,andStopresetsthesongtotheLocatebar,beat,andtick.

Region/Criteria Box Parameters

From and To FromandToareavailableinmostTRACKeditfunctionstodefinearangeoftimeonthe selectedtrack(s). TheFromvaluedefinesthefirstbar,beat,andtickinarangeoftimeselectedforediting.TheTo valuedefinesthefinalbar,beat,andtickinarangeoftimeselectedforediting. Events AnyandalltypesofMIDIeventsareavailableforediting,selectableinthisparameter.Some eventswillprovideyouwithsettingsforarangeofvalues,orotherMIDIeventspecificcriteria. AvailableValuesare:All,Notes,Controllers,MonoPress,PitchBend,ProgChange,PolyPress. WhenEventsissettoALL,allMIDIeventsonthetrack(s)youareediting,thatoccurinthe regionoftimebetweentheFromandTosettings,willbeaffectedbytheeditfunction. WhenEventsissettoNotes,notenumberandvelocityrangescanbesetforNoteevents.
LoKey

Determinesthelowestnoteinarangeofnotestobeaffected.Thiscanbesettoany MIDInotevalue;thedefaultisC1.
High Key (Hi)

Determinesthehighestnoteinarangeofnotestobeaffected.Thiscanbesettoany MIDInotevalue;thedefaultisG9.

12-22

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: The TRACK Page LoVel

AnattackvelocityrangecanbespecifiedascriteriaforselectingNoteeventsforediting. TheLoVelparametersetsthelowestvelocityaNoteneedstohaveinordertobeedited. Notesontheselectedtrack(s)withaattackvelocitieslowerthantheLoVelwillnotbe affectedbytheedit.Theavailablevaluesare1127;thedefaultis1.

High Velocity (Hi)

TheHiparametersetsthehighestattackvelocityaNoteneedstohaveinordertobe edited.Notesontheselectedtrack(s)withattackvelocitieshigherthanthevalueofHi arenotaffectedbytheedit.Theavailablevaluesare1127;thedefaultis127. WhenEventsissettoController,theController(s)andaControllervaluerangecanbesetfor Controllerevents.

Controller

TheControllerparameterselectstheController(ifany)orallControllerstobeaffected.
LoVal

Youmayfurtherspecifyaparticularrangeofvaluestoeditbysettingahighandlow value.LoValwilldefinethelowestmodifiablevalueintheselectedcontrollersrecorded data.ValuerangesarenotdefinablewhenCtlissettoAll.AvailableValuesare0127.

High Value (Hi)

Hidefinesthehighestmodifiablevalueintheselectedcontrollersrecordeddata.Value rangesarenotdefinablewhenCtlissettoAll.AvailableValuesare0127.

Soft Buttons on the TRACK Page

FromToisaquickwaytodefinetheregionoftimeyouintendtoedit.Thereareacoupleofways tousethisfeaturewhenthesequenceisplayingbackinrealtime,andbothwayswillsetthe temporalboundariesoftheregion. OnewayistofirstpositionthecursorovertheFromparameterintheRegion/Criteriaboxand thenpressthePlaysoftbutton.Duringplayback,everytimeyoupressFromTo,thePC3K updatesthevalueofFromtomatchthecurrentplaybacklocation.Positionthecursoroverthe ToparametertochangethevalueofToinasimilarfashion. IfyouhaventselectedeithertheFromorToparameter,pressingFromToduringplayback updatesFromorToorbothdependingonthecurrentplaybacklocation(thevalueofthe Locateparameter)atthetimeyoupressFromTo.IfyoupressitwhiletheLocatevalueisearlier inthesongthanthecurrentTovalue,thePC3KupdatestheFromvalue.IfyoupressFromTo again(withoutstoppingplayback)whiletheLocatevalueislaterthanthecurrentFromvalue, thePC3KupdatestheTovalue. PlaywillstarttheplaybackofthesongfromtheBarandBeatsetintheLocateparameter.When thesongisplaying,thissoftbuttonfunctionsasaPausebutton. StopstopstheplaybackofthesongandreturntotheBarandBeatsetastheLocatevalue. GoperformsanyoftheTrackbasededitfunctionsdescribedabove. DonewillreturnyoutotheEditSong:COMMONpage.

12-23

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: Track Functions

Song Editor: Track Functions

Erase
Thisfunctionerasesspecifiedeventsfromaregionoftime,butitdoesntdeletetheregionof time.Theresultislikeerasingasectionofrecordingtape.Ifyouwanttocompletelyremovea segmentandshortenthelengthofthetrack,youcandoitwiththeDeletefunction.

Copy
UsetheCopyfunctiontoduplicatetheselectedeventsfromthecurrenttrackandplacethemin thesametrackoronanothertrack,eithermergingwithoroverwritingexistingdata.

IfyoudonotwanttocopyalloftheMIDIeventsinthedefinedrangeoftimeonthecurrent track,usetheEventsparameterintheRegion/CriteriaboxtoselectaspecificMIDIeventtype youwouldliketheeditfunctiontoaffect.Someeventtypesprovideyoumorecriteriaselection parameters.ItisoftenagoodideatosetEventstoNoteswhencopying,andthenaddany necessarycontrollerorotherdatatothetrackatalatertime. DstTrack:1to16/All SelectadestinationtrackforthecopiedeventswiththeDstTrackparameter.Allselectedevents describedintheRegion/Criteriaboxwillbeplacedinthedestinationtrack(s)atanyBarand Beatyouspecify. IfthecurrentlyselectedtrackisAlltracksthenthedestinationtrackwillbeAlltracksaswell. Nomatterwhatchannelthecurrenttrack(sourcetrack)issettowhenyouusethecopy function,theeventswillbeplayedonthedestinationtrackschannel. Location:Bars:Beats:Ticks Specifyabar,beat,andticklocationinthedestinationtrackwherethecopieddatawillbe placedwiththeLocationparameter.IfthelengthofthecopiedregionextendsfromtheLocation pointbeyondthesongsexistingEndpoint,anewEndpointisdefined.

12-24

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: Track Functions

Mode:Merge/Erase/Slide TheModesettingdetermineswhetherthecopiedeventsmergewith,oreraseexistingeventson thedestinationtrackfromthelocationpointtotheendofthecopiedregion.WithModesetto Slide,thesequencercreatesspaceforthenewevents,andslidestheexistingeventstouniformly latertimesinthesong. Times:1to127 ThevalueselectedfortheTimesparameterdetermineshowmanycopiesoftheselectedregion areplaced,oneafteranother,inthedestinationtrack.

Bounce
UsetheBouncefunctiontomovetheselectedeventsfromthecurrenttracktoanothertrack, eithermergingwithoroverwritingexistingdataonthedestinationtrack.TheBouncefunction differsfromtheCopyfunctioninthattheoriginaldataisnotpreservedintheoriginaltrack.As onamultitracktaperecorder,Bouncewillalwaysputthedatainthesametimelineonthenew trackthatitwasontheoldtrack.

DstTrack:1to16 SelectadestinationtrackfortheeventstobemovedtowiththeDstTrackparameter.Allselected eventsdescribedintheRegion/Criteriaboxwillbeplacedinthedestinationtrackatthedatas originallocation. Nomatterwhatchannelthecurrenttrack(sourcetrack)issettowhenyouusethebounce function,theeventswillbeplayedonthedestinationtrackschannel. Mode:Merge/Erase TheModesettingdetermineswhetherthebouncedeventsmergewith,oreraseexistingevents onthedestinationtrackfromthelocationpointtotheendofthecopiedregion.

12-25

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: Track Functions

Insert
TheInsertfunctionisusedtoaddblanktimetothecurrentsong,modifyingthesongsEnd pointappropriately.TheInsertfunctionwillaffectalltracks.Thisissimilartosplicingapieceof blanktapetoanexistingsegmentofrecordingtape.

Location:Bars:Beats:Ticks TheinsertionpointfortheblanktimebeingaddedisselectedasaBarandBeatLocationvalue. EventsthatoccurredatorafterthisBarandBeat,beforeyouinserttime,arenoterasedwhen youperformthisfunction,rathertheyareoffsetbythelengthoftheblanktimebeingaddedtoa BarandBeatlaterinthesong. Amount:Bars:Beats:Ticks ThelengthoftheblanktimebeingaddedisdefinedasanumberofBarsandBeatsinthe Amountparameter. TherearenoRegion/CriteriaparametersavailablefortheInsertfunction.

Delete
TheDeletefunctionisusedtoremovearegionoftimefromthecurrentsong.Thisfunctionis differentfromtheerasefunctionbecausenotonlydoesitremovetheeventsfromtheselected time,itwilldeletetheentireselectedrangeoftimefromthesong,modifyingthesongsEnd pointappropriately(onalltracks).Thisissimilartocuttingasectionoutofatapeandsplicing theends.

12-26

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: Track Functions

Quantize
UsetheQuantizefunctiontoadjustthetimingofNoteevents.KeepinmindthatonlyNote eventsarequantized;othertypesofevents,suchascontrollers,arenotquantized.

Quant:Off/1to100% TheQuantizeparameterdetermineshowmuchtheselectedNoteeventsaremovedtowards gridlocations.IfsettoOff,noaligningofpreviouslyrecordednotestogridlocationswilloccur. Ifsetto100%,everyrecordedNoteeventwillbealignedtotheclosestgridlocation,definedby theGridsetting.Noteswillbemovedtoapositionhalfwaybetweenthegridlocationandthe originalNoteeventlocationifQuantissetto50%. Grid:1/1to1/480 ThissettingdeterminesthesizeoftheQuantizegrid,expressedasafractionofaBarwitha4/4 meter.SetGridto1/1forwholenotegrid,1/16forsixteenthnotes.Allofthestandardnote durationsandeveryfractionalBardivisionsinbetweenareavailableasthesizeoftheInput Quantizegrid. Swing:100to125% TheSwingpercentageisappliedtothequantizegrid.0%swingisstraighttime,100%produces aswingfeel(tripletfeel).ApositiveSwingvaluedetermineshowcloseeveryothergridlocation ismovedtoapoint1/3ofthewaytowardsthenextgridpoint.NegativeSwingmovesevery othergridlocationclosertoapoint1/3ofthewaytowardsthepreviousgridpoint. Release:Yes/No SettheReleaseparametertoYesifyouwouldlikeeachquantizedNoteeventsNoteOff messagetobealignedtothegridlocationnearesttothetimethekeywasoriginallyreleased.

12-27

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: Track Functions

Shift
TheShiftfunctionallowsyoutooffsettheexistingMIDIeventsforwardorbackwardintime anynumberofticks(1/480thofaBeat)andbeats.ThisfunctiononlyaffectstheEndpointifany oftheshiftedeventsareaftertheEndpointofthesong. EventscannotbeshiftedbeyondtheEndpointorbeforeBar1:Beat1:Tick0.Theeventscanbe shiftedonlyasfarasthesetemporalboundaries.AlleventsthatcantbeshiftedthefullTicks amountwillbeplacedattheboundarylocation.

Amount:Bars:Beats:Ticks TheTicksparameterspecifiesthenumberofbars,beats,andticksthattheMIDIevents,from withintheselectedregion,aremovedforward(forpositivevalues)orbackward(fornegative values)intimerelativetotheiroriginallocations. Mode:Merge/Erase TheModesettingdetermineswhethertheshiftedeventsmergewith,oreraseexistingeventson thedestinationtrackfromthelocationpointtotheendoftheshiftedregion.

Transpose
UsetheTransposefunctiontochangetheMIDINotenumbersoftheselectedNoteevents.

Semitone:128to127semitones AnincrementofonesemitonerepresentsachangeofoneMIDINotenumber.Youcantranspose NoteeventsonlywithintherangeofMIDINotenumbers0to127.

12-28

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: Track Functions

Grab
GrabissimilartotheCopyfunction,exceptthattheGrabfunctionallowsyoutocopyselected datafromtracksthatexistinothersongsinmemory.

SrcSong:SongList TheSourceSongparameterissettotheIDandnameofthesonginmemorythatcontainsthe desiredtrackdatayouwishtograbinordertouseitinthecurrentsong.Thesourcetrackis determinedbytheTrackparameterdisplayedonupperrighthandsideofthepage,selectable withtheChan/Layerbuttons. DstTrack:1to16/All SelectadestinationtrackforthegrabbedeventswiththeDstTrackparameter.Allselected eventsfromthesourcesongandtrackdescribedintheRegion/Criteriaboxwillbeplacedinthe destinationtrack(s)atanybar,beat,andtickyouspecify. IfthecurrentlyselectedtrackisAlltracksthenthedestinationtrackwillbeAlltracksaswell. Nomatterwhatchannelthecurrenttrack(sourcetrackinthesourcesong)issettowhenyou usethegrabfunction,theeventswillbeplayedonthedestinationtrackschannel. Location:Bars:Beats:Ticks Specifyabar,beat,andticklocationinthedestinationtrackwherethegrabbeddatawillbe placedwiththeLocationparameter.Ifthelengthofthegrabbedregionextendsfromthe LocationpointbeyondthesongsexistingEndpoint,anewEndpointisdefined. Mode:Merge/Erase/Slide TheModesettingdetermineswhetherthegrabbedeventsmergewith,oreraseexistingevents onthedestinationtrackfromthelocationpointtotheendofthegrabbedregion.WithModeset toSlide,thesequencercreatesspaceforthenewevents,andslidestheexistingeventsto uniformlylatertimesinthesong. Times:1to127 ThevalueselectedfortheTimesparameterdetermineshowmanycopiesoftheselectedregion areplaced,oneafteranother,inthedestinationtrack.

12-29

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: Track Functions

Change
TheChangefunctionisusedtomodifyattackvelocities,releasevelocities,orthevaluesofany existingcontrollerdataonthecurrenttrack.Astaticchangeofvaluescanbemadeaswellas havingthechangetakeplaceoveraregionoftime. Changecannotmodifyoradddatathatdoesntexistonthecurrenttrack.IfyouhearNote eventsplayedbackonatrack,thenyouknowthereisanattackandreleasevelocityvaluefor eachone,andtheeffectoftheChangefunctioncanusuallybeeasilydetected.Controllervalues aresometimesmoredifficulttochangesincetherecanbeinconsistentgapsoftimebetweeneach controllerevent.

Scale:0%to20000% Theselectedvelocityorcontrollereventsvaluescanbechangedtoapercentageoftheoriginal valuesdeterminedbytheScaleparameter.Asettingof100%hasnoaffect.Valuesarescaled lowerwithaScalepercentagesetfrom0%to99%.LowvaluescanbesethigherusingaScale percentageabove100%onupto20,000%,althoughthemaximumvalueof127cannotbe exceededforanyvelocityorcontrollertype. Offset:128to127 OffsetcanbeusedaloneorinconjunctionwithScaletoaddorsubtractasetamounttoorfrom theoriginal(orscaled)values.Valuesforvelocitiescannotbelessthan1orgreaterthan127. Valuesforcontrollerscannotbelessthan0orgreaterthan127. Asanexample,tosetallVelocitiestoavalueof55,youwouldsetScaleto0%(multipliesall originalvaluesbyzero)andsetOffsetto55(adds55totheproductoftheScaleparameter). Mode:Constant/PosRamp/NegRamp SetModetoConstanttohavevaluesmodifiedinauniformfashion,asdeterminedbytheScale andOffsetsettings,fortheentireselectedregionoftimeandrangeofvalues. WhentheChangefunctionisappliedwithModesettoPosRamp,theselectedvelocityor controllervalueswillgraduallychangeovertheregionoftime,definedbythelocationssetfor theFromandToparameters,fromtheoriginalvaluetothenewvaluedeterminedbytheScale andOffsetsettings.Thefirsteventsbeingmodifiedwithintheregionwillhavelittleorno changefromtheiroriginalvalues.TheamountofScaleandOffsetappliedwillincreaseasthe songapproachestheBarandBeatdefinedintheToparameter,wherethefullamountof describedchangewilloccur. YoucansetModetoNegRamptoachievetheoppositedynamiceffectofPosRamp.NegRamp worksinthesameway,buttheamountofScaleandOffsetappliedwilldecreasefromthefull amountofchangedescribedbyScaleandOffsettolittleornochangeasthesongapproachesthe bar,beat,andtickdefinedintheToparameter.

12-30

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: The EVENT Page

Remap
UsetheRemapfunctiontoapplythevaluesofanyonetypeofcontrollerdata,alreadyrecorded onatrack,toanothercontrollertype.TheeffecttherealtimechangesoftheOldcontrollerhad willbereplacedbytheeffecttheNewcontrollerhasbyusingtheexactsamecontrollervalues.

Old:ControlSourceList(0to120) TheOldControllerissettotheControllertypethatyouwishtoremap.ThisControllerdata mustalreadyexistonthecurrenttrackinordertoapplyittotheNewControllertype. New:ControlSourceList(0to120) TheNewparameterissettotheControllercodeyouwishtohaveusetheexistingvalues, onceusedbytheOldController,toproduceadifferenteffect.

Song Editor: The EVENT Page

EverytypeofrecordedMIDIeventisvisiblefromthispage.Youcanviewandchangethese eventsifnecessary.Eachtrackdisplaysitsinitialprogram,volume,andpanatthetopofits eventlist.Youcanalsoaccessthetempotrack(instructionsbelow.)

Location Initial Program, Volume, Pan

Bar:Beat:Tick

Event Type and Value

Thetoplineofthepagedisplaysthecurrentsongpositioninthecenter,andthecurrently selectedtrackandcorrespondingchannelontheright.UsetheChan/Layerbuttonstoselectan activetracktoviewandedittheMIDIeventsrecordedonit.

12-31

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: The EVENT Page

Toscrollthroughtheevents,makesurethelocation(BarandBeat,inthefirstcolumn)is highlighted.UsetheAlphaWheel,theUpandDowncursorbuttons,orthePlus/Minus buttons.Asyouscrollthroughtheevents,eacheventisexecutedbythesequencer.Inthecaseof Noteevents,youwillhearthenoteplayed,althoughthedurationwillbeshort.Ifyouhave scrolledthroughaSustain(MIDIController64)messagewithanOnvaluethenyouwillhear thenotesustainasifthesustainpedalwasdepressed.Thenotewillcontinuetosustainuntilyou scrollthroughaSustainmessagewithavalueofOff. Youcanalsojumpdirectlytoaspecificbarandbeatbytypingthebarnumberandbeatnumber, thenpressingEnter.Keepinmindifyouhavecontrollerorprogramdataprevioustothepoint thatyoujumpto,thoseeventsmaynothavebeenexecutedandyoumayhearunexpected results.Forexample,ifyouhaveprogramchangesatbar1andbar8,andyoujumpfrombar1 tobar9,anynotesyouscrollthroughwillbeplayedwiththeprogramchangefrombar1.

Initial Program, Volume, Pan

Atthetopoftheeventlistforeachtrack,youcanviewandchangetheinitialprogram,volume andpansettingsforthecurrenttrack.SeeSongMode:TheMAINPage on page 121fordetailson initialsettingsforprogram,volume,andpan.EachoftheseparameterscanbesettoNONEby entering0onthealphanumericpadandthenpressingtheminusbuttontofindNONE.

Location
ThefirstcolumnrepresentstheBarandBeatLocationsofthedifferenteventsinasong.Scroll throughtheeventsontheselectedtrack(s)withtheAlphaWheelorenterinaspecificBarand BeatonthealphanumericbuttonpadtojumptoeventsoccurringonthatBeat.Aquickwayto jumptotheEndpointinatrackistopress9999andthenEnteronthealphanumericbuttonpad.

Bar, Beat, and Tick

Bar,Beat,andTickareeditableparametersforeachevent.Theydeterminewhenanevent happensrelativetotheothereventswithinthesong.

Event Type and Value

TheEventTypeandValueregiondisplaystheMIDIeventtype(andrelatedinformation)ateach Eventlistlocationinthesong.Differenteventtypesdisplaydifferentkindsofinformation,and havedifferenteditablevalues. Theeventtypeistheleftmostfield.Youcanhighlightthisfieldandchangetheeventtype. MIDInoteeventsaredenotedbya>followedbythenotename.The>iseffectivelythe eventtypefornotes,andtochangetheeventtype,highlightthe>.Tochangethenote, highlightthenotename. Table 121liststherangesoftheeditableeventvalues.

Event Type
Program Change (PCHG) Pitch Bend (BEND) Mono Pressure (MPRS) Poly Pressure (PPRS) 0 to 127 -8192 to 8191 0 to 127 0 to 127

Values

C -1 to G 9

Table 12-1

MIDI-event Value Ranges

12-32

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: The EVENT Page

Note events have four editable values: Note Name, Attack Velocity (indicated by a v), Release Velocity (indicated by a ^), and Note Duration. MIDI Note Events (>) Note Number Attack Velocity Release Velocity Note Duration C -1 to G 9 v1 to v127 ^1 to ^127 Bar : Beats : Ticks

MIDI Controller Events (CTRL)

Controller events have two editable values: Controller Type and Controller Value. Defined controllers are referred to by their names. Controller Type Controller Value Control Source List (0 to 127) 0 to 127

Tempo Change

20.00 BPM to 400.00 BPM

Table 12-1

MIDI-event Value Ranges (Continued)

Soft Buttons on the EVENT Page

Cut:RemovesthecurrentlyselectedeventfromtheEventlistandtemporarilystoresitina memorybuffersothatyoucanimmediatelypasteitintoanewlocation. Copy:Makesaduplicateofthecurrentlyselectedeventandtemporarilystoresitinamemory buffersothatyoucanimmediatelypasteitintoanewlocation. Paste:InsertsthemostrecentcutorcopiedeventintotheEventlistatthecurrentlyselected Bar:Beat:Ticklocation.Thepastedeventwillsharethesamelocationwiththeeventthat alreadyexistedatthatlocationintheEventlist,butitwillappearbeforethepreexistingevent. New:Insertsaneweventbyduplicatingthecurrentevent. Done:OntheViewpage,returnstotheEVENTpage.OntheEVENTpage,returnstothe COMMONpage.

Tempo Track
Toaccessthetempotrack,usethechannelup/downbuttonstonavigatetotrack1,thenpress channeldown.Thetempotrackfunctionsthesameastheothertracks,excepttheonlyevent typeavailableistempochange.

12-33

Song Mode and the Song Editor Song Editor: The EVENT Page

12-34

Storage Mode Storage Mode Page

Chapter 13 Storage Mode

StoragemodeletsyouuseaUSBdevice(suchasathumbdrive)toload,save,backup,andcopy filesbetweenthePC3Kandtheoutsideworld. StoragemodeinthePC3Kallowsflexibilitytoorganizefilesandtheircontents.Itsfeaturescan saveyoutimebyallowingyoutoselectandorganizefilesanddirectories. HeresasummaryofStoragemodefunctionality: USBStorageport USBComputerport FAT32filesystemcompatibility Supportforsongfiles(sequences)inMIDIType0andType1format

Storage Mode Page

ToenterStoragemode,presstheStoragebutton,andtheStoragemodepagewillappear:

Inthecenterofthepageyoucanselectoneoftwostoragedestinations:USBdeviceorUSBPC connection.TheserefertoaUSBdevicewhichyoucanplugintotheappropriatetypeofUSB portontherearofthePC3K(UsingUSBDevicesbelowfordetails.)WhenyouselectUSBPC connection,anyUSBMIDIconnectionwillbetemporarilydisconnected,andwillnotbe restoreduntilyouselectUSBdeviceorexitStoragemode. Usethecursortoselectthedestinationthatyouwishtostoreyourfilestoorloadyourfiles from.Thestatusoftheselecteddestinationwillbedisplayedaseitherreadyoryouwillseea Noconnectionmessage.Thetoprighthandcornerofthepagedisplaysthecurrentlyselected storagedestination.Ifyouarehavingtroubleselectingadevicethatyouhavepluggedin,try exitingStoragemodeandthenenteringStoragemodeagain. Thecurrentlyselecteddevicewillbereadfromorwrittentowhenyouload,save,rename,or deletefiles.Usethesoftbuttonstostartanyoftheseoperations.Usethemoresoftbuttonsto accessadditionalpagesofsoftbuttons.HereisabriefdescriptionofeachofStoragemodessoft buttons: STORE SaveobjectsorbanksofobjectsasaPC3Kfileonthecurrentdevice.

13-1

Storage Mode Storage Mode Page

LOAD UTILS USBDrv EXPORT Format

Loadselectedfile(s)orobject(s)fromthecurrentdeviceintoPC3Kmemory. Checkthefreespace,findfiles,andviewdirectoryorganizationandsizes. SelectthevirtualUSBdrivewhentheUSBcomputerportisconnectedtoa computer. ExportMIDIfilescreatedinSongmodeoralistofPrograminfo(controller assignments.) FormattheUSBdevicecurrentlyconnectedtotheUSBStorageport.

Using USB Devices

YoucanplugaUSBmassstoragedevicesuchasathumbdriveintothePC3Kforbackingup, archiving,sharingyourwork,andupdatingyoursoftware.AnysizeUSBmassstoragedevice willwork,thoughthumbdrivesarerecommendedfortheirportability,durability,andlow price.ThereisaUSBStorageportonthebackpanelofthePC3K,butitiseasilyaccessiblefrom thefrontoftheinstrument(seebelow.)

Caution:AUSBconnectorwillonlyfitintotheportiforientedproperly,sodontforceitintothe port,asthismaydamageyourPC3KorUSBdevice.Ifyouarehavingtroubleinsertingyour USBconnectorintotheport,tryflippingtheconnectorover. YoucanalsotransferfilesdirectlytoacomputerthatisequippedwithaUSBportbyusingthe USBComputerportonthebackpanelofthePC3K(seeabove.)ConnectaUSBcablefromthe PC3KsUSBComputerporttoaUSBportonyourcomputer.WhenyouenterStoragemodeand selectUSBPCConnection,avirtualdrivenamedPC3Kwillappearonyourcomputers desktop.LoadfilesfromyourcomputertoyourPC3KbyputtingfilesonthePC3Kvirtual drive,thenselectingUSBPCConnectioninStoragemodetoloadthefiles.Savefilesfromthe PC3KtoyourcomputerbyusingthisconfigurationwiththeStoragemodesStorefunction. SavedfileswilltemporarilyappearonthePC3Kvirtualdriveonyourcomputersdesktop,and youthenmustcopyyoursavedfilestoanotherlocationonyourcomputer.Youmustcopydata fromthePC3Kvirtualdrivetoyourcomputersdriveorelsethedatawillbelost. Note:WhentransferringfilestoandfromthePC3KviatheUSBComputerPort,themaximum sizeoffilesthatcanbetransferredisapproximately1.6MB.Thisissuitableformostobjects. Fortransferringaudiosamplefiles,usetheUSBStoragePortwithaUSBmassstoragedevice suchasathumbdrive.WhenusingtheUSBStoragePorttotransferfiles,thefilesizethatcan betransferredislimitedonlybythesizeoftheUSBmassstoragedevice,andthePC3Ks availableobjectandsamplememory. WhenyouleaveStorageMode,therewillbeaprompttellingyouthatthePC3Kisturningback intoaUSBMIDIdevice.Youmustacknowledgethisprompt.Ifyouhaventcopiedthefile(s)to yourdesktop(orotherplaceonthecomputer)itwontbeonthevirtualdiskwhenyouleave storagemode.

13-2

Storage Mode Directories

Dependingonyourcomputersoperatingsystem,youmaysometimesseeascarydevice removalwarningonyourdesktopafterusingthePC3Kvirtualdrive.Youmaydisregardsucha messagewithoutworriesofdamagetoyourPC3Korcomputer. Caution:DonotremoveaUSBdevicewhilethedisplaysaysLoading...orSaving....RemovingaUSB deviceduringafiletransfercancausedatacorruption. Formatting a USB Device SeeFormat on page 1312.

Directories
Adirectoryletsyougroupfilestogetherasyoumightseparatedocumentsusingfoldersinafile cabinet.YoucancreatedirectoriesonaUSBdevice.Youcanevencreatesubdirectorieswithin directories.Directoriesappearinthenormalfilelistwiththeindicator<dir> totherightofthe directoryname. Directoriesarehandyfororganizingyoursong,andprogramfiles.ThePC3Kprovidesmany operationsforsettingupandmanagingdirectoriesandthefileswithinthem.

Path
ThePathfieldshowsthecurrentdirectoryonthecurrentdevice.Thisfieldisdisplayedupon returningtotheStoragemodepageafteryouhavepressedoneoftheStoragemodesoftbuttons andviewedthefilecontents.ItstaysvisibleontheStoragemodepageuntilyoupowerdownor doasoftreset. ThePC3Kalwaysstartsattheroot(toplevel)directorywhenyoupoweritup,orwhenyou changethevalueoftheCurrentDiskparameter.Whenyouusethediskfunctionstoviewother directories,thePathfieldupdatesthecurrentdirectoryvaluetotrackyourmovements. Therootdirectoryisdisplayedasabackslash: Path:\ IfyoupresstheLoadbuttonandloadafilefromasubdirectorycalledSOUNDS,thePathfield willappearas Path:\SOUNDS\ Thebackslashcharacterisadirectoryseparator,asinthefollowingPath: Path:\NEWTUNE\SAMPLES\DOGS\ ThisrepresentsthedirectoryDOGS,whichisasubdirectoryoftheSAMPLESdirectory,whichis asubdirectoryoftheNEWTUNEdirectoryintherootdirectory.Ifthepathistoolongtofiton thetoplineofthedisplay,itgetsabbreviated.ThemaximumlengthofapathinthePC3Kis 64 characters(includingthebackslashcharacters).

Disk Drive Information

ForUSBdevices,themanufactureranddevicesizearedisplayed.

13-3

Storage Mode Common Dialogues

Common Dialogues
ThesearedialoguesthatthePC3Kcallsupwhenabouttoperformcertainstoragefunctions.

The Select Directory Dialogue

WhenstoringanobjectorgroupofobjectsthePC3Kpromptsyoutoselectadirectoryin whichtosavethatobjectorgroup. Therearethreenavigatingsoftbuttonsontheleftsideofthebottomofthepage: NewDir Open Parent Createnewdirectory.CallsuptheNewDirectorydialogue(seethefollowing section) Opensthehighlighteddirectory. Movesyouuponelevelinthedirectoryhierarchy.Ifthedisplayisalreadyatthe rootdirectory,thisbuttonhasnoeffect.

Whenyouhavechosenyourdirectory,presstheOKsoftbuttontocalluptheFileName dialogue(seethefollowingsection)andcompletesthestoringprocess.

The File Name/New Directory/Rename Dialogue

WhenyoucreateanewfileinStoragemode,createanewdirectory,orrenameafileordirectory, thePC3Kpromptsyoutoentertheobjectsname.ThisFileNamedialogueappearsasshown below,althoughboththeNewDirectoryandRenameappearandfunctionsimilarlytotheFile Namedialogue:

NewfilenameswilldefaulttoeitherFILENAME(afterapowerup),orthenamewillbethatof themostrecentfilesavedorloaded.NewdirectorynameswilldefaulttoeitherDIRNAME (afterapowerup),orthenamewillbethatofthemostrecentfilesavedorloaded.Onceyou chooseanametostartwith(orthedefault),youcaneditthenameusingtheLeftandRight cursorbuttons,theDeleteandInsertsoftbuttons,andthe<<and>>softbuttons. PressedOKsoftbuttonsavestheobjectinthecurrentdirectory. ThedisplayshowsthatthePC3Khascreatedorrenamedtheobject,thentheStoragemodepage reappears.

13-4

Storage Mode The STORE Page

The STORE Page

PressingtheSTOREsoftbuttoncallsuptheStorepage,whereyoucanselectobjectsfromRAM tostoreinthecurrentstoragedevice.Thepageappearsasshownbelow:

Atthetoprightofthepage,thedisplayshowshowmuchmemoryisavailableinthecurrent storagedevice.AlongthebottomofthepagearetheStorepagessixsoftbuttons.Belowisa descriptionofthefunctionofeachsoftbuttons: Select Clear SelectthehighlightedObject/TypeorRange/Bank.Anasterix(*)appearstotheleft ofselectedentries. Clearallselectionsinthecurrentfield.NotethatifyoupresstheClearsoftbutton whileintheRange/Bankfield,onlyselectedRange/Bankentriesarecleared; however,ifpresstheClearsoftbuttonwhileintheObjectTypefield,allselected entriesinbothfieldsarecleared. Setrange.NoteintheRange/BankfieldthatthesecondtolastentryisRangewitha rangeofnumbersnexttoit.YoucansetthisrangeintheSetRangedialogueby pressingtheSetRngbutton.Ifyoutrytosetaninvalidrangesuchas10223 thenthePC3Kwillinformyouthattherangeisinvalid. CallupStoreAdvancedpage(seebelow). Storetheselectedobjectstothecurrentstoragedevice.Pressingthissoftbuttoncalls uptheSelectDirectorydialogue. ExitstheStorepageandreturnsyoutotheStoragemodepage.

SetRng

Advnce Store Cancel

Inthemainbodyofthepagearetwofields:ObjectTypeandRange/Bank.Toselectobjectsfor storage,firstly,selectanObjectType.Ifthereareanyuserdefinedobjectsoftheselectedtype, thesymbol(u)willappeartotherightoftheRange/Bankentryinwhichtheyfall.Thesearethe rangeswhoseobjectsyoucanstore. Youcanstoreanentirebankofobjects,orbypressingtheAdvncesoftbutton,selectindividual objectstobesaved(seeTheStoreAdvancedPage).Ifyouchoosetostoreusingthebankmethod, allRAMobjectswithinthatbankwillbesaved.(YoucannotstoreROMobjects.Ifyouwishto storeaROMobject,suchasaprogram,youmustfirstsaveitinternallyasaRAMprogram.)If anyobjectswithintheselectedbankhavedependentRAMobjectsthatexistinadifferentbank, youwillbeaskedifyouwanttosavedependentobjects.

13-5

Storage Mode The STORE Page

Useoneofthedataentrymethodstoselectabanktobestore.IfyoupresstheCancelsoft button,youllreturntotheStoragemodepage.Afteryouveselectedthebank,pressStore,and theFileNamedialoguewillappear.Namethefile,andpressOK.Whenthefileissaved,the PC3Kaddsanextension(.P3K)tothefilename.ThisenablesthePC3Ktorecognizeitasa Kurzweilfilewhenitexaminesthedirectory.Notethatalthough.P3Kfilesarecollectionsof objects,youcanloadindividualobjectsifyouwantto.SeeLoadingIndividualObjectsFroma.P3K OrCompatibleFileType on page 138. Saving Master Files AmongyourchoicesintheBankdialogareMasterfiles.Masterfilesconsistprimarilyofthe itemsonthetwoMastermodeandMIDImodepages.SavingMasterfilesisagoodwayto configureyourPC3K(oranotherPC3K)toyourperformanceorsequencingneeds.Forexample, youmightsavedifferentMasterfileswitheverysequenceyoucreateusinganexternal sequencer.Then,whenyouloadtheMasterfile,youwouldhaveallthecorrectprograms assignedtotheappropriateMIDIchannels.

The Store Advanced Page

PressingtheAdvncesoftbuttoncallsuptheStoreAdvancedpage,onwhicheveryuserdefined objectaswellasitsobjecttypeonthePC3Kisdisplayedandselectableforstorage.Onthis page,youcanselectandstoreobjectsindividually,ratherthanbyrange.Theobjectsare organizedbynumericalIDandobjecttype. TherearefivesoftbuttonsontheStoreAdvancedpage: Select Next Type Store Cancel Selectthehighlightedobject.Anasterix(*)appearsbetweentheIDandobjecttype ofselectedobjects. Scrolltonextentry.SamefunctionaspressingtheDownor+buttons,orturningthe AlphaWheeloneclickclockwise. Jumptonextobjecttype. Storetheselectedobjectstothecurrentstoragedevice.Pressingthissoftbuttoncalls uptheSelectDirectorydialogue. ExitstheStoreAdvancedpageandreturnsyoutotheStorepage.

Shortcuts when Storing Individual Objects Selectingordeselectingalloftheobjectsatoncecanbedonewiththefollowingdoublepresses (twofrontpanelbuttonssimultaneouslypressed): Left/Rightcursordoublepress:SelectAllObjects Up/Downcursordoublepress:ClearAllSelections

Ifyouwanttostoremostbutnotalloftheitemsfromafile(forexample,iftherearesomesongs inRAMthatyoudontwanttobestoredinthefile),itmaybefastesttofirstselectallobjects usingtheLeft/Rightdoublepress,andthenmanuallydeselectanyunwanteditems.

13-6

Storage Mode The LOAD Page

The LOAD Page

PressingtheLOADsoftbuttoncallsuptheLOADpage(seebelow,)whereyoucanload.P3K, .PC3,.K26,.K25,or.KRZfiles,orindividualobjectsfromwithinthosefiles,aswellas.WAVand .AIFaudiosamplesfromthecurrentstoragedevice(seebelowfordetails.)Alongthebottomof theLoadpage,therearefoursoftbuttons.Belowaredescriptionsoftheirfunctions:

Select

Selectthehighlightedfile.Anasterix(*)appearstotheleftofselectedfiles.To deselectafile,highlightthefileandpresstheSelectsoftbuttonagain.Multiplefiles canonlybeselectediftheyareinthesamedirectory.Enteringanewdirectorywill deselectallfiles. PresstheSelAllsoftbuttontoselectallfilesinthecurrentdirectory(directories withinthecurrentdirectorywillnotbeselected.)PresstheSelAllsoftbuttonagain todeselectallfilesinthecurrentdirectory.Enteringanewdirectorywilldeselectall files. Movesyouuponelevelinthedirectoryhierarchy.Ifthedisplayisalreadyatthe rootdirectory,thisbuttonhasnoeffect.Enteringanewdirectorywilldeselectall files. Openselecteddirectoryorviewobjectswithina.P3Kfileorothercompatible Kurzweilfiletypeforloadingindividualobjects.Seebelowforinstructionson opening.P3KandotherKurzweilfiletypestoviewandloadindividualobjects. Enteringanewdirectorywilldeselectallfiles.Viewingobjectswithina.P3Kfileor otherKurzweilfilewilldeselectanyotherfilesthathadbeenselected. Loadtheselected.P3KfileorothercompatibleKurzweilfiletype,ortheselected .WAVor.AIFfileorfiles.SeebelowforinstructionsonusingtheLoaddialogue whenloadinga.P3KfileorothercompatibleKurzweilfiletype.Seebelowfor detailsonloading.WAVand.AIFfiles. ExitstheLoadpageandreturnsyoutotheStoragemodepage.

SelAll

Parent

Open

OK

Cancel

Loading .WAV and .AIF Audio Files

FromtheLOADpage,.WAVand.AIFaudiofilescanbeloadedandusedwithusercreated keymaps(seeBuildingaKeymap on page 147andEditingSamples on page 149.)Monoand stereofilescanbeloaded,8or16bit,withsampleratesuptoamaximumof96000Hz.Once samplesareloadedtothePC3Ksusersampleflashmemory,samplesremaininthePC3Keven whenthepowerisoff,untiltheyaremanuallydeleted.Also,oncesamplesareloadedtothe PC3Ksusersampleflashmemory,thereisnoloadtimeforthoseusersampleswhenturningon thePC3K.

13-7

Storage Mode The LOAD Page

Toloadauseraudiofileorfiles,selectoneormore.WAVor.AIFfilesfromtheLOADpagefile listandpresstheOKsoftbutton.Youwillbepromptedtochooseabank(groupof128ID numbers)toloadthesampleinto.UsetheAlphaWheelor/+buttonschoosefromthelistof banks.Itisrecommendedtoloadintothefirstuserbank(1025...1152),thismakesiteasiertofind yoursamplelateronintheSamplelist.Next,chooseoneoftheloadingmethodsoftbuttons(see LoadingMethods on page 139fordetails.)GenerallyyouwillwanttousetheFillsoftbuttonto loadthesampleintotheselectedbank.ThisusestheFillloadingmethod,whichloadsthe sampleintothelowestavailableID#,startinginthechosenbank.Anyexistingsampleswillnot beoverwritten.Pressthedesiredsoftbuttontobeginloading.Samplesloadslowly,pleasebe patient.YoucancancelloadingasamplebypressingtheCancelsoftbutton.OntheEditKeymap page(seeTheKeymapEditor on page 141)loadedaudiosamplescanbeselectedintheSample field.OntheEditKeymappageyoucanfindanaudiofilewiththehighestID#byselectingthe Samplefield,entering0onthealphanumerickeypadandpressingEnter,thenpresstheminus ()buttononce(belowtheAlphaWheel.)

Loading Individual Objects From a .P3K Or Compatible File Type

Sincea.P3Kfilecancontainover3000objects,itisoftenusefultoloadonlyasubsetofthe informationcontainedinafile.Youcanselectindividualobjectsorgroupsofobjects(programs, effects,songs)forloadingfromwithinasingle.P3K,.PC3,.K26,.K25or.KRZfile(see Appendix Eforcompatibilitydetails.)TheLoadObjectfeatureisaccessiblefromtheLOAD page.Toactivateit,scrollthefilelistuntilyouhavehighlightedthefilethatyouwishtoload objectsfrom. PressOpentobegintheLoadObjectdialog.ThePC3Kthenscansthefilecontentsinorderto presentalistofalloftheobjectsinthefile.Sometimesthisprocedurecantakeafewmoments, dependingonhowmanyobjectsareinthefile. Theobjectsinthelistareusuallygroupedbytype(program,setup,etc.).Thelistcanbescrolled usingtheAlphawheelortheUporDowncursors.Eachlineinthescrollablelistrepresentsone object,anddisplaystheobjectstype,ID,andname.TheIDnumbersarethesamenumbersthat wereusedtoreferencetheobjectswhenthefilewaslastsavedbythePC3K.Thesenumberswill usuallybedifferentaftertheobjectsareloaded,dependinguponthebank(forexample, 128...255)andmodethatisspecifiedforloading. Aswiththefilelist,enteringinanumberfromthealphanumericbuttonpadwilljumptothe indexedentry,andtypinginalargenumberlike9999willgototheendofthelist. Thesoftbuttonsonthispageareusedformultipleselectionoftheobjectsinthelistaswellasfor movingaroundthelistwhentherearemanyitemsselectedorlisted.Thissamedialogisalso usedformanyotherfunctionsinthePC3K,namelyforsavingselectedobjectsandforseveral objectutilityfunctionsthataredescribedlater. Hereisabriefdescriptionofeachbuttonsfunction: Select Next Type OK Cancel Selectordeselectanobject. Jumptothenextselectedobject. Jumptothenextobjectofadifferenttype. TellPC3Ktoproceedtoloadtheselectedobjects. ExitbacktotheFileListDialog.

PresstheSelectbuttontochoosethehighlightedobjectforloading.Anasterisk(*)isplacedto theleftoftheobjectindexforanyitemsthatareselected.Deselectaselectedobjectbypressing Selectagain.Theasteriskwilldisappear.Theeasiestwaytochooseobjectsforloadingisto scrollthelistandindividuallypressSelectoneachobjectyouwanttoload.

13-8

Storage Mode The LOAD Page

TheNextbuttonwillcausetheindexintothelisttojumptothenextselectedobject,forwardin thelist.Whentheendofthelistisreached,thesearchwillwraparoundfromthebeginning.If youhavemorethanoneobjectselected,thenifyourepeatedlypressNextyoucaneasilycycle throughallselecteditems.Iftherearenoitemsselected,thenthisbuttondoesntdoanything. TheTypebuttonjumpstothenextobjectofadifferenttypefromtheonethatiscurrently highlighted.Thisisaconvenientwaytofindaparticulartypeofobjectinthelist. Whenyouarealldoneselectingobjectstoload,pressOK.Asstatedabove,ifonlyoneobjectis tobeloaded,itisimplicitlyselectedifitisthecurrentlyhighlightedobjectandtherearenoother selectedobjectsinthelist. Cancelreturnstothefilelistdialog,highlightingthefileyoujustopened.Youcanloadthe entirefileafterpressingCancelbypressingOKwhenyoureturntothefilelist. Select All/Deselect All Selectingordeselectingalloftheobjectsatoncecanbedonewiththesamedoublepressesas describedforthefilelistdialog,namely: Left/Rightcursordoublepress:SelectAllObjects Up/Downcursordoublepress:ClearAllSelections

Ifyouwanttoloadmostbutnotalloftheitemsfromafile(forexample,iftherehappenstobea Mastertableinthefilethatyoudontwanttoload),itmaybefastesttofirstselectallobjects usingtheLeft/Rightdoublepress,andthenmanuallydeselectanyunwanteditems.

Loading Methods
OnceyouhavepressedOKtodecideonwhatbanktouse,youwillseethisdialog:

Thesoftbuttonscontrolthemodeforloadingandrenumberingofobjectsfromthefile.Heres howtheywork: OvFill Overwrt Merge FirstdeletesallRAMobjectsintheselectedbank,andthenloadsobjectsusing consecutivenumbering. FirstdeletesallRAMobjectsintheselectedbank,andthenloadsobjectsusingthe objectIDnumbersstoredinthefile. PreservetheobjectIDnumbersstoredinthefilefortheobjectstobeloaded, overwriteobjectsalreadyinmemoryifnecessary.ForfilesthatdonthaveID numbers(.MID,.WAVand.AIFfiles,)MergebehavesthesameasFill. TrytousetheobjectIDnumbersstoredinthefilefortheobjectstobeloaded.Ifan IDnumberisalreadyinuse,incrementtheIDnumberuntilafreeslotisfound.For

Append

13-9

Storage Mode The LOAD Page

filesthatdonthaveIDnumbers(.MID,.WAVand.AIFfiles,)Appendbehavesthe sameasFill. Fill IgnoretheobjectIDnumbersstoredinthefile.Trytouseconsecutivenumbering fromthebeginningoftheselectedbank.IfanIDnumberisalreadyinuse, incrementtheIDnumberuntilafreeslotisfound. Cancelthemodeselection,andgobacktochoosingabank.Scrollingtoadifferent bankvaluewillhavethesameeffectasCancel.

Cancel

Typically,youwilljustwanttousetheFillmethod.Append,Merge,andOverwrttryto preservethenumbersstoredwiththeobjectsinthefile,butthisshouldonlyreallybenecessary ifyoudependonprogramnumbersoreffectnumberstobeatacertainMIDIprogramchange number.OvFillislikeFillexcepttheselectedbank(orEverything)isclearedoutbeforeloading. OverwrtandOvFilloperateindifferentwaysafteraselectedbankhasbeenfilledupforagiven objecttype(forexample,afteryouhaveloadedmorethan128programsintoabank).Overwrt willcontinuetopreservetheobjectIDsstoredinthefile,andwillindividuallyoverwriteobjects inthebankfollowingthejustfilledbank.OvFilldoesnotoverwritepasttheendoftheselected bank;itinsteadskipsoverobjectIDsthatareinuse,loadingonlyintounusedIDs.Becauseof thisdifference,itcansometimesbefastertoloadafileusingOvFillratherthanOverwrt. However,thisappliesonlyiftheobjectstobeloadedwouldextendpasttheendofaselected bank. Notethatwhenloadingintoaspecificbank(asopposedtoloadingasEverything),theobject IDsinthefileareusedasfollows:Thebankdigitisignored,andtheremainderofthenumber isusedwhenthePC3KrebankstheobjectIDintothebankthatyouspecify.Forexample,ifyou saveProgram453intoafile,andloaditbackintothe129...256bank,thePC3Kwillusethe number69(itsbankspecificIDinthe385...512bank)whendecidinguponanewobjectID.Ifthe 129...256bankwaspreviouslyempty,andtheloadmodeisAppend,thentheprogramwillend upwithID197(128+69). ForloadingasEverything,theIDnumberforanobjectstoredinafileistakenliterally,and notrebanked(exceptifFillorOvFillmodeischosen). Thefollowingexampleshowshoweachdifferentloadingmethodsaffecthowfourprograms loadintoabankthatalreadycontainsprograms. Example:StartingwiththefollowingobjectsalreadystoredinthePC3KinternalRAM:

Program ID 129 133 134 139 140

Program Name Piano Stack Ole Upright 1 WestCoastPno&Pad The Ancient DancePnoEchplex

SupposeyouweretoloadafilecontainingthefollowingobjectsintotheBase2(129...256)bank:

Program ID 260 261

Program Name Brighter CP TouchRezSynthCP

13-10

Storage Mode The Utilities (UTILS) Page

Program ID 264 265

Program Name Inside Out CP Pianet Classic

ThefollowingtableshowstheIDsthateachprogramendupwithwhenyouloadtheprograms fromtheClassicKeysbank(255...384)intotheBase2bank:

Original Program ID 129 133 134 139 140 260 261 264 265

Program IDs After Loading Program Name OvFill Piano Stack Ole Upright 1 WestCoastPno&Pad The Ancient DancePnoEchplex Brighter CP TouchRezSynthCP Inside Out CP Pianet Classic Deleted Deleted Deleted Deleted Deleted 129 130 131 132 Overwrt Deleted Deleted Deleted Deleted Deleted 260 261 264 265 Merge 129 Deleted Deleted 139 140 133 134 137 138 Append 129 133 134 139 140 135 136 137 138 Fill 129 133 134 139 140 130 131 132 135

The Utilities (UTILS) Page

PressingtheUTILSsoftbuttoncallsuptheUtilitiespage,wherethePC3Kdisplaysthecontents ofthecurrentdirectory,inanalphabetizedscrollinglist.Ifthecurrentdirectorycannotbe located(forexample,ifyouvechangedUSBdevices),thePC3Kdisplaysthecurrentdevices rootdirectory. Thedisplayshowsthe3characterextensionofallfilesinthedirectory(exceptdirectories themselves).ExtensionsarecreatedwhenthefileissavedbythePC3K.Youcannotmodifythe extensionsonthePC3K.ThisisbecausethePC3Kusestheextensionstotellitwhatkindofdata thefilescontain. DirectoriescreatedbythePC3Khaveupto8characternames,withnoextension.Adirectory canhaveanextensionifitiscreatedonanexternalcomputer(moreonthislater). The.MIDextensionisusedbythePC3KforMIDIType0orType1sequencefiles. Whenloadingfiles,thePC3Kwilltrytofindoutthetypeoffileifitdoesntrecognizethe extension.

Soft Buttons on the Utilities Page

NewDir Delete Rename Copy Open Createanewdirectory. Deletefilesfromthecurrentdevice. Changethefilenameofafile. Singleormultiplefilecopybetweendevices. Opensthehighlighteddirectory.

13-11

Storage Mode Export

Parent

Movesyouuponelevelinthedirectoryhierarchy.Ifthedisplayisalreadyatthe rootdirectory,thisbuttonhasnoeffect.

Whenyoufirstopenadirectoryforviewing,theindexis1(thefirstfileinthelist).ThePC3K rememberstheindexofthepreviousdirectoryyouwereinbeforeyoupressedOpen,soifyou returntothatdirectorybypressingParent,theindexchangesaccordingly.Thisindexis rememberedforoneleveldown,andthereforeisusefulwhensteppingthroughalistof subdirectoriesfromasingledirectorylevel. IntheLoadfunction,pressingOpenforastandardfilewillstarttheLoadObjectfeature.This allowsselectedindividualobjectsfromthefiletobeloadedintothePC3K.Forexample, pressingOpenwhileintheDeletefunctionwilldisplaytheobjectswithinthefileinascrollable list,howevernodeleteactionwillbepossibleontheindividualobjects. PressingtheOKsoftbuttonwillcausethePC3Ktoproceedwiththeselectedfunction.After pressingOK,theremaybefurtherdialogssuchasbankspecification(fortheLoadfunction), confirmation(forDelete),ornameentry(forRename).OneexceptiontothisisintheLoad function;whenadirectoryishighlighted,pressingOKisthesameaspressingOpen(itdisplays thecontentsofthehighlighteddirectory).

Export
PresstheEXPORTsoftbuttontogototheExportpage.TheExportpageallowsyoutoexport MIDIfilescreatedinSongmode,orlistsofcontrollerassignmentinfothatareautomatically createdforeachProgramandeachChain. ToexportaMIDIfilecreatedinSongmode,thesongmustbecurrentlyloadedinSongmode. GotoSongmodeandloadthedesiredsong,thenreturntotheStoragemodeEXPORTpageand presstheSongsoftbutton.Youwillbepromptedfirsttochooseadirectorytosavethefileinto, andthenyouwillbepromptedtonametheMIDIfile.Whenyounamethefile,youcanusethe TypefieldtochoosetoexporteitheraStandardMIDIFiletype1(saveswithmultiplechannels,) orStandardMIDIFiletype0(savesallchannelsas1channel.) ToexportalistofcontrollerassignmentinfoforallPrograms,pressthePrInfosoftbutton.You willbepromptedtochooseadirectorytosaveinto,andthenyouwillbepromptedtonamethe infofile.Acommaseparatedvaluefilewillbeexported. ToexportalistofcontrollerassignmentinfoforallChains,presstheFXInfosoftbutton.You willbepromptedtochooseadirectorytosaveinto,andthenyouwillbepromptedtonamethe infofile.Acommaseparatedvaluefilewillbeexported.

Format
USBdevicescomeformattedandreadytousewiththePC3K.Ifyoueverneedtoformata device,however,youcanuseanycomputerwithUSBdeviceformattingcapability,orformatit usingthePC3K. ToformataUSBdevicewiththePC3K,plugtheUSBdeviceintothePC3KsUSBStorageport, thenpresstheStoragebuttontoenterStoragemode.PressthesoftbuttonlabeledFormat.The PC3Kwillaskyouifyouwanttoformat.PresstheOKsoftbuttontoformatthedevice,orthe CancelsoftbuttontoreturntotheStoragemodemainpage. Caution:FormattingwilleraseallfilesontheUSBdevice,makesureanythingthatyouwish tosaveisbackeduponanotherdevice.

13-12

Keymap and Sample Editing The Keymap Editor

Chapter 14 Keymap and Sample Editing

The Keymap Editor
TheKeymapEditorletsyoucustomizethePC3Ksfactorypresetkeymapsandsavethemto RAM.Youcanalsobuildyourownkeymapsfromscratch(seeBuildingaKeymap on page 147.) Keymapsareanintegralpartofeverylayerofaprogram.Eachkeymapcontainsasetof parametersdeterminingwhichsample(s)thePC3Kwillplaywhenyoutriggeranote.Each layerhasatleastonekeymap,butitcanhavetwokeymapswhenyoureworkingwithstereo samples.Eachofthesestereokeymapsusestwoofthe128availablevoices. Eachkeymapconsistsofasetofkey(note)rangesC4toG4,forexample.Theentirespanof eachkeymapisfromC0toG10.Eachrangehasasamplerootassignedwithintherange.Each samplerootisadistinctROMorRAMsample.Withineachkeyrange,thesamplerootis transposedupanddowntoplayoneachoftherangesnotes.Youcanvieweachrangeby changingthevalueoftheKeyRangeparameterontheKeymapeditorpage.Youcanmix samplesofdifferenttimbreswithinasinglekeymap,andeventuneindividualkeystoanypitch bydefiningkeyrangestosinglenotesandassigningsamplestoeachofthosenotes. Whenyoutriggeranote,thePC3KidentifiesthekeyrangewheretheNoteOneventoccurred.It alsocheckstheattackvelocityvalueofthenote.Itthenaddressesitsmemory,andretrievesthe samplerootthatsassignedtothatkeyrangeandattackvelocityvalue.Ifthenotethats triggeredisnotthenotewherethesamplerootisassigned,thesampleistransposedtoplayat thecorrectpitch.ThePC3Kthengeneratesthedigitalsignalthatrepresentsthesoundofthe note.Atthispointthekeymapsjobisdone,andthesignalproceedsthroughthelayers algorithmandontotheaudiooutputs. Youcanassignasmanykeyrangestoakeymapasyoulike,evencreatingaseparaterangefor eachnote.Thiswouldallowyoutotuneeachkeyindependently,tocreatemicrotonaltunings. Forkeymapsthatuseasingletimbre,liketheGrandPiano,theresakeyrangeforeachsample rootstoredinmemory.Foracousticinstrumentalsounds,themorekeyrangesyouhavefora keymap,themorerealisticthesoundwillbe,sincetherewillbelesspitchshiftingofthesample rootwithinthekeyrange. Ofcourse,youcanassignsamplerootswithdifferenttimbreswithinthesamekeymap.Manyof thedrumkitkeymapsinROM,forexample,haveabout20keyranges,withseveraldifferent timbresassignedasthesampleroots.Youcanalsocreateakeymapwithasinglekeyrangethat spansfromC0toG10,ifyouwanttostretchasinglesamplerootfromC0toG 10.Keepin mind,however,thatsamplescanonlybetransposedupwardbyanoctavefromthesamples originalpitch.Samplescanbetransposeddownwardwithoutlimit. Thinkofakeymapasifitwereasinglepieceofstring,dividedintodifferentsectionsthatadjoin oneanother.Sectionscannotoverlap.IfyouhaveonerangethatgoesfromC4toF4andanother thatgoesfromF#4toC5,thenifyouchangethefirstrangetobeC4toG4,thesecondonewill changetobeG#4toC5. Also,youcanthavenothingassignedtoakeyrange.EvenifitisSilence(#999),therewill alwaysbeasampleassignedtoeveryrangeinthekeymap.Thisissomethingtowatchoutfor whencreatingdrumprograms.Forexample,letssayyouarecreatingaprogramwith20layers. Eachlayerhasitsownkeymap,whichhasjustonesampleassignedtopartofthekeyboardwith therestofthekeyrangeassignedtoSilence.Makesurethatyoulimitthenoterangeofeach

14-1

Keymap and Sample Editing The Keymap Editor

layerusingtheLoKeyandHiKeyparametersontheLAYERpageintheProgramEditor.Ifeach layercoverstheentirerange,theneachnoteyouplayedwouldtrigger20voices(oneforeach layer).Youwouldonlyhearonedrumpernotebecausealltheotherlayersaretriggering Silence.BecauseofthevoicestealingalgorithmsinthePC3K,thevoiceswouldalmost immediatelybecomeavailableagain,sincetheyhavenoamplitude.Butforonebriefinstant,the voicewouldbetriggered,whichcouldcauseothervoicestobecutoff. Youcanalsocreatemultivelocitykeymapsthatis,keymapsthatwillplaydifferenttimbres dependingontheattackvelocitiesofyourNoteOnevents.Program6PopPowerPiano,for example,usesakeymapwiththreevelocityranges.Eachkeyrangeinamultivelocitykeymap containstwoormoredistinctsamplerootsthatthePC3Kchoosesbetween,accordingtothe attackvelocityofthenote.SeeVelocityRanges(VelRng) on page 145fordetails. TheKeymapEditorisnestedwithintheProgramEditor.ThefirststepinusingtheKeymap Editoristoselectthekeymapyouwanttoedit.ThisisdoneontheKEYMAPpageinthe ProgramEditor,usingtheKeymapparameter.Onceyouvedonethis,justpresstheEditbutton, andyoullentertheKeymapEditor.Ifyouwanttoeditadifferentkeymap,presstheExitbutton toreturntotheKEYMAPpageintheProgramEditorandselectthedesiredkeymap.Ifyou wanttobuildakeymapfromscratch,startwiththekeymap999Silence(seeBuildinga Keymap on page 147).ThiskeymaptemplatecontainsonekeyrangefromC0toG10,andisa convenientstartingpointforaddingkeyrangesandassigningsampleroots.TheKeymapeditor pagelookslikethis:

Parameter Sample Key Range Low Key High Key Velocity Range (VelRange) Low Velocity (Lo) High Velocity (Hi) Coarse Tune Fine Tune Master Transpose Volume Adjust

Range of Values Sample Root list Variable from C0-G10 C 0 to G 10 C 0 to G 10 Variable from ppp-fff ppp-fff ppp-fff 128 to 127 semitones -49 to 50 cents -126 ST to127 semitones 24 dB

14-2

Keymap and Sample Editing The Keymap Editor

Keymap Editor Parameters

Sample Thisiswhereyouassignasampleroottothecurrentkeyrange.Dependingonthenatureofthe samplerootanindividualsampleorablockofsamplerootsthesamplesnamelooksabit differentinthedisplay.Eachsamplesnameconsistsofthreeparts:anumeral,aname,anda notenumberforexample,999SilenceC4.Additionally,thenameofstereosampleswillend withanS.(Touseastereosample,theStereoparametermustbesettoOnintheProgramEditor, andtwokeymapsmustbeselected,seeTheKEYMAPPage on page 619fordetails.) ThenumeralisthesampleblockID.Ifthesampleobjectisanindividualsample,thesample blockIDisthesameasthesamplesobjectID.Ifthesampleobjectisagroupofsampleroots,the objectIDofthefirstrootinthegroupdeterminesthesampleblockID.Theremainingrootsin theblockhavethesameID,anddifferonlyintheirnotenumbers. Nextcomesthenameofthesample,whichtypicallydescribesthesamplestimbre.Thefinal partofthesamplesnamereferstothepitchatwhichitwasoriginallysampled.Formany timbres,multiplesamplesaremadeatvariouspitches.AsyouscrollthroughtheSamplelist, youllseeonlythepitchofthesamplechangeuntilyoureachthenextsampleblock.The samplesoriginalpitchissetintheSampleEditor(seeRootKey on page 1410.)Thisdetermines whichkeywillplaythesampleatitsoriginalpitchwhenasampleisusedinakeyrange(see KeyRangebelow.) Key Range Akeyrangeisarangeofkeyboardkeysthatplaysonesample(pervelocityrange,seeVelocity Range(VelRange)belowfordetails.)Eachsampleinakeyrange(pervelocityrange)is transposedbasedoneachsamplesRootKeyparametersothatitplaysatthecorrectpitchonthe keyboardrelativetoitsrootkey(seeEditingSamples on page 149fordetailsontheRootKey parameter.)Otherkeyswithinthekeyrangetransposethesamplechromaticallyrelativetothe rootkey.SamplepitchrelativetotherootkeycanalsobeoffsetusingtheCoarseTuneandFine Tuneparameters,seebelow.) TheKeyRangeparametershowsyouwhichkeyrangeyourecurrentlyviewingorediting(key rangesarenamedbytheirlowestandhighestnotes.)ChangingthevalueoftheKeyRange parameterselectsfromtheavailablekeyranges,andallowsyoutovieworeditthesample assignmentandotherparametersoftheselectedkeyrange.WhentheKeyRangeparameteris selected,youcanalsoscrollthroughavailablekeyrangesusingtheAlphaWheelorthe/+ buttons.MultiplekeyrangesareonlyshownifthecurrentKeymapusesmorethanonekey range.IfthetoplineoftheEditKeymappagedisplaysKeyRange,youcanscrollthroughthe availablekeyrangeswithanyparameteronthepageselectedusingtheChan/Layerbuttons. (PresstheTogglesoftbuttontotogglethetoplinebetweendisplayingKeyRangeand VelRange.) WiththeKeyrangeparameterselected,keyrangescanalsobeselectedbyholdingtheEnter buttonandplayingakey.Thekeyrangeassignedtothatkeywillbeselected. Low Key (Lo), High Key (Hi) Withtheseparametersyoucanuseanyofthedataentrymethodstochangethelowandhigh notesofthecurrentkeyrange.YoucanextendakeyrangetothefullcapacityofthePC3K(C0 toG10).Ifyouextendthecurrentkeyrangeintoanother,theboundariesoftheotherkeyrange willbecomeshortenedtoaccommodatethekeyrangeyouareextending.Ifthekeyrangeyou areextendingcoversanotherkeyrange,theotherkeyrangewillbedeleted. Thesettingforthelowkeycannotbehigherthanthesettingforthehighkey.Similarly,the settingforthehighkeycannotbelowerthanthesettingforthelowkey.

14-3

Keymap and Sample Editing The Keymap Editor

Velocity Range (VelRange) Thisparametershowsthekeyboardvelocityrange(indynamiclevels)thatwilltriggerasample forthecurrentKeyRange.Inakeyrangewithmorethanonevelocityrange,eachvelocityrange canuseadifferentsample,aswellasdifferentCoarseTune,FineTune,andVolumeAdjust settings.Velocityrangesareintendedforusewithinstrumentsamplesrecordedatdifferent velocities.Thishelpstomakeplayingsampledinstrumentssoundmorerealistic.Sample volumesarealsoscaledbasedonkeyboardvelocitywithineachvelocityrange.Velocityranges forthecurrentKeymaparesetusingtheVelRngsoftbutton(seeVelocityRanges (VelRng) on page 145)ortheLowVelocity(Lo),HighVelocity(Hi)parameters(seebelow.)All keyrangesinaKeymapsharethesamesetofvelocityranges.Uptoeightvelocityrangescanbe used. WhentheVelRangeparameterisselected,youcanscrollthroughavailablevelocityrangesusing theAlphaWheelorthe/+buttons.Multiplevelocityrangesareonlyshownifthecurrent Keymapusesmorethanonevelocityrange.IfthetoplineoftheEditKeymappagedisplays VelRange,youcanscrollthroughtheavailablevelocityrangeswithanyparameteronthepage selectedusingtheChan/Layerbuttons.(PresstheTogglesoftbuttontotogglethetopline betweendisplayingVelRangeandKeyRange.) Low Velocity (Lo), High Velocity (Hi) Usetheseparameterstosetthevelocityrangeofthecurrentkeyrange.Ifyouextendthecurrent velocityrangeintoanother,theboundariesoftheothervelocityrangewillbecomeshortenedto accommodatethevelocityrangeyouareextending.Ifthevelocityrangeyouareextending coversanothervelocityrange,theothervelocityrangewillbedeleted. Coarse Tune CoarseTuneallowsyoutotransposeasampleforagivenrange.Thisisextremelyusefulwhen youhavesettheRootkeyofthesampleforonenotebutwanttoassignthesampletoadifferent partofthekeyboardandstillbeabletoplayitwithouttransposition(seeRootKey on page 1410 fordetails.)Forexample,ifyouoriginallysettheRootkeyatC4butwantthesampleassignedto C3,youwouldsetCoarseTuneto12ST,transposingituponeoctave.Nowtheoriginalpitchwill playatC3,oneoctavedown.IfyouexaminethedrumandpercussionkitkeymapsinROM,you willseethatwehavedonethis.MostofourROMdrumsampleshavetheRootkeysetatC4. TheresashortcutforadjustingtheCoarseTuneautomaticallysothatthesampleplayswith minimaltranspositionintheassignedkeyrange.SeeSpecialDoubleButtonPressesintheKeymap Editor on page 146. Fine Tune Thisgivesyoufurtherpitchcontrol.Oncethesamplespitchisclosetothedesirednote,usethe Finetunetosharpenorflattenitasmuchasahalfsemitone. Master Transpose (MasterXpose) Thisparameterdoesnotreallypertaintothekeymapitself.Insteaditisidenticaltothe TransposeparameterfoundontheMIDImodeTRANSMITpage.Ifyouchangethevaluehere, thesamevaluewillbereflectedontheMIDImodeTRANSMITpage,andviceversa.It transposestheentireinstrumentglobally.Thereasonitisplacedonthispageisthatitwillallow youtoassignsamplesacrosstheentirekeyboardeasily,whenyouareusingakeyboardthathas fewerthan88notes. Volume Adjust Hereyoucanadjustthevolumeofthenotesinthecurrentkeyrange.Thisenablesyoutomake eachkeyrangeplayatthesamevolumeevenifthesamplesinthevariousrangeswererecorded atdifferentvolumes.

14-4

Keymap and Sample Editing The Keymap Editor

The Soft Buttons in the Keymap Editor

Toggle PressingtheTogglesoftbuttonswitchesthefunctionthattheChan/Layerbuttonsperform whileontheEditKeymappage.PresstheTogglesoftbuttontotogglethetoplinebetween displayingKeyRangeorVelRange.IfthetoplineofthepagedisplaysKeyRange,thenthe Chan/Layerbuttonswillscrollbetweentheavailablekeyrangesinthekeymap(ifthecurrent keymaphasmorethanonekeyrange.)Thenoterangeforeachkeyrangewillalsobedisplayed onthetopline.IfthetoplineofthepagedisplaysVelRange,thentheChan/Layerbuttonswill scrollbetweentheavailablevelocityrangesinthekeymap(ifthecurrentkeymaphasmore thanonevelocityrange.)Thedynamicrangeforeachvelocityrangewillalsobedisplayedon thetopline. Velocity Ranges (VelRng) PresstheVelRngsoftbuttontoviewtheVELRANGESpage(seebelow.)UsetheVELRANGES pagetoadd,editordeletevelocityrangesforthecurrentkeymap.TheVELRANGESpage showsachartofakeymapsentireavailabledynamicrange,frommostquiet(ppp)tomostloud (fff.)VelocityrangescanalsobeadjustedfromtheEditKeymappage,buttheVELRANGES pageprovidesachartasavisualaid.Eachkeymapcanbesplitintoamaximumofeightvelocity ranges.Eachkeyrangeinakeymapcanuseitsownsampleforeachvelocityrange.Allkey rangesinakeymapsharethesamevelocityranges.

PresstheSplitsoftbuttontosplitthecurrentlyselectedvelocityrangeintotworanges(untilthe maximumofeightvelocityrangeshavebeencreated.)PresstheDeletesoftbuttontodeletethe currentlyselectedvelocityrange.PresstheExitsoftbuttontoreturntotheEditKeymappage. OntheVELRANGESpage,thecurrentlyselectedvelocityrangeishighlightedinthechart,and itsnameisdisplayedintheVelRangefield.WiththeVelRangefieldselected,youcanusethe AlphaWheelor/+buttonstomovebetweentheavailablevelocityranges(ifthereismorethan onevelocityrangeavailable.)YoucanalsousetheChan/Layerbuttonsatanytimetomove betweentheavailablevelocityranges.Ifthereismorethanonevelocityrangeavailable,youcan adjustthedynamicrangeofeachusingLoandHiparameters.TheseHiandLoparametersare thesameastheLowVelocity(Lo)andHighVelocity(Hi)parametersontheEditKeymappage (seeLowVelocity(Lo),HighVelocity(Hi) on page 144fordetails.)Changesmadewitheithersetof parametersareshownonbothpages. New Range (NewRng) TheNewRngbuttonletsyoudefineanewkeyrangetoedit,whetheritstoassignadifferent sample,ortoadjustthepitchorvolume.JustpressNewRng,thenplaythenoteyouwantasthe lownote,thenthehighnote.ThePC3Kwillpromptyouforeachnote.Whenyoutriggerthe highnote,youllreturntotheKeymapeditorpage,andthenewkeyrangeyoudefinedwillbe selected.Thenextchangeyoumakewillaffectonlythateditrange.

14-5

Keymap and Sample Editing The Keymap Editor

Ifyousetanewkeyrangethatscompletelywithinanexistingkeyrange,theexistingkeyrange willbesplitintotwokeyranges,withthenewkeyrangebetweenthetwo.Atthispoint,you mustchangeatleastoneparameterofthenewkeyrangebeforeeditingadifferentkeyrange, otherwisethenewkeyrangewillbemergedwiththeadjacentkeyranges.Ifyousetanew keyrangethatoverlapspartorallofanotherkeyrange,thesampleassignedtothelowerkey rangewillbeappliedtothenewkeyrange.Again,atthispointyoumustchangeatleastone parameterofthenewkeyrangebeforeeditingadifferentkeyrange,otherwisethenewkeyrange willbemergedwiththelowerkeyrangethatitoverlapped. Assign TheAssignsoftbuttonletsyouselectasample,thenspecifythekeyrangetowhichits assigned.Thisenablesyoutoinsertanewkeyrangewithinthecurrentkeymap.Whenyou presstheAssignsoftbutton,adialogappearsthatpromptsyoutoselectasamplefromthe Sampleslist.Scrollthroughthelist,thenpresstheOKsoftbutton.Youllthenbepromptedto definethenewkeyrangebyplayingthenotesyouwanttobethelowestandhighestnotesofthe range.(PresstheCancelsoftbuttonifyouchangeyourmind.)Whenyoutriggerthelowand highnotes,thenewkeyrangeisinserted.Ifthenewkeyrangepartiallyoverlapsanadjacentkey range,theexistingkeyrangewillbeadjustedtoaccommodatethenewrange.Ifthenewkey rangecompletelyoverlapsanexistingkeyrange,theoriginalkeyrangewillbereplaced. Rename Callupthepagethatenablesyoutochangethenameofthecurrentkeymap. Save Starttheprocessofsavingthecurrentkeymap. Delete Deletethecurrentkeymapfrommemory.FactoryROMkeymapscannotbedeleted.

Special Double Button Presses in the Keymap Editor

SupposeyouhaveasamplewhoserootkeyisC4,andyouwanttoassignittoA0,becauseyou dontexpecttoplayitoften.Ifyouwantittoplaybackwithouttransposition,youllhaveto adjusttheCoarseTuneparameter.CalculatingtherightvalueforCoarseTunecangettediousif youreassigningalargenumberofsamples.Fortunately,theresashortcut. 1. Assignasampleroottoakeyrange,eitherusingtheLo,Hi,andSampleparametersor usingtheAssignsoftbutton. 2. HighlightthevalueoftheCoarseTuneparameter. 3. PressthePlus/Minusbuttonsatthesametime.ThevalueofCoarseTunechanges automatically.Ifthesampleisassignedtoonenote,thePC3KsetsCoarseTunesothatthe noteplaysthesamplewithouttransposition.Ifthesampleisassignedtoarangeofnotes, thePC3KsetsCoarseTunesothatthemiddlenoteoftherangeplaysthesamplewithout transposition.

14-6

Keymap and Sample Editing Building a Keymap

Building a Keymap
Readbelowfordetaileddirectionsonmanuallycreatingandeditingakeymap.(Seethepreview functiononpage 1117forawaytoautomaticallycreateaprogramandkeymap.)Tobuilda keymap,firstgototheProgrammodemainpage(thiscanbedonebyrepeatedlypressingthe Exitbutton.)FromtheProgrammodemainpage,usethealphanumericpadtoselectprogram 999DefaultProgram.NextpresstheEditbuttontoentertheProgramEditor.Pressthe KEYMAPsoftbutton,andtheKEYMAPpagewillappear.TheKeymapparameterwillbe automaticallyselected.Press999andEnteronthealphanumericpadtoassignthekeymap999 Silence.Thisisntabsolutelynecessary,butitmakesiteasiertorecognizethekeyrangesthat havesamplesassignedtothemwhenyoustartassigningsamples.Youcanactuallychooseany programorkeymapyouwanttostartwith,butbychoosingthese,youarestartingwitha blankslate. WiththeKeymapparameterstillselected,presstheEditbutton,andyoullentertheKeymap Editor.TheKeyRangeparameterwillbeautomaticallyselected,andyouseeitsvalues:C 0to G 10(theentireMIDIkeyboardrange).TheSampleparameterwillhaveavalueof 999 SilenceC 4. Nowyourereadytostartassigningsamplestokeyrangeswithinthekeymap.Wellassume thatyouveloadedsampleswithrootsatC1,C2,C3,etc.andthatyouplantoassignarootto eachoctave.Tobegin,presstheAssignsoftbutton.Thedisplaywillpromptyoutoselecta sample.UsetheAlphaWheeltoscrolltooneofyoursamples,ortypeitsIDonthe alphanumericpadandpressEnter.Whenyouvefoundthesampleyouwanttouse,pressthe OKsoftbutton.ThedisplaywillsayStrikelowkeyTriggerA0(MIDInotenumber21,the lowestAonastandard88notekeyboard).ThedisplaywillchangetosayStrikeHigh KeyNowtriggerF1(MIDInotenumber29).ThedisplaywillreturntotheKeymapeditor page.TheKeyRangeparameterwillshowA0F1,andtheSampleparameterwillshowthe sampleyouselectedwhenyoustartedtherangeassignment. EachsampleinakeyrangeisautomaticallytransposedbasedoneachsamplesRootKey parametersothatitplaysatthecorrectpitchonthekeyboardrelativetoitsrootkey(seeEditing Samples on page 149fordetailsontheRootKeyparameter.)Otherkeyswithinthekeyrange transposethesamplechromaticallyrelativetotherootkey.Automatictranspositionbasedon eachsamplesRootKeyisimportantifyouwantyoursampletoplayintunewithotherPC3K programsorotherinstruments.ThePC3Kmakesthiseasyifyoursampleshavethecorrect RootKeysettings(asthePC3Ksfactorysamplesdo.)Generallyyoushouldsetakeyrangeso thatthesamplesRootKey(displayedattheendofthesamplename)isinthemiddleofthe range.IfyousetakeyrangethatdoesnotcoverthesamplesRootKey,thesamplewillhaveto automaticallytransposebymanysemitones,andwilllikelynotsoundcorrect.Samplesarealso limitedtoanoctaveofupwardtranspositionfromthesamplesoriginalpitch.Ifyouseta keyrangetoohighbasedontheRootKey,somesamplesmaynotbeabletotransposeupward farenoughtoplayintune,andmanykeysmayplaythesamenote(thehighestnotethatthe samplecanbetransposedto.)Automatictranspositionrelativetotherootkeycanbeoffset usingtheCoarseTuneandFineTuneparametersontheEditKeymappage,(seeCoarseTuneand FineTune on page 144.) Continuingwiththeexample,presstheAssignsoftbuttonagain.Selectanothersamplerootat theprompt,andpresstheOKsoftbutton.NowtriggerF#1fortheLowKeyprompt,andF2for theHighKeyprompt.Atthispointyouvedefinedtwokeyranges,thefirstfromA0toF1,and thesecondfromF#1toF2.Youcanrepeattheprocessasmanytimesasyouwant,creatinga newkeyrangeeachtime. Onceyouhaveyoursamplesassigned,youmayneedtotransposethemsothattheyplayback atthecorrectpitchwithintherangeyouhavechosen.Todothis,highlighttheKeyRange parameter,scrolltotherangeyouneed,thenhighlighttheCoarseTuneparameter.Adjust CoarseTunetobringthesampletotheproperpitchwithinthatkeyrange.Thenscrollbackup totheKeyRangeparameter,selectthenextrange,andcontinueasneeded.

14-7

Keymap and Sample Editing Building a Keymap

Heresafairlyimportantpointthatmayormaynotaffectyourkeymapconstruction.Suppose youwanttobuildakeymapthatusesthesamesampleinseveraladjacentkeyranges,andyou plantoaddabitofdetuningtothesamplesineachrange.Youmightthinkthatyoucouldbuild thekeymapfirst,thengointotheSampleEditorandtweakthesamplesettingsofeachkeyrange whenthekeymapisfinished.Yes,but Supposeyouusedthetechniquewedescribedabovetoassignavocalsamplewhoserootwas C 4toakeyrangefromA3toE4.ThenyouassignedthesamesampletoakeyrangefromF4to B 4.YoumightbesurprisedtofindthatwhenyoufinishedtheF4B4keyrangeandthe Keymapeditorpagereappeared,thecurrentkeyrangewouldnotbeF4toB4,butA3toB4! ThisisbecausethePC3Kautomaticallymergesadjacentkeyrangesthatareidentical(thisis donetosavememory).Therefore,someparametermustbedifferentineachadjacentkeyrange youcreateifyouwanttobuildkeymapsusingthetechniquewejustdescribed.Soifyouwantto usethesamesamplesinadjacentkeyrangeswith,forexample,minorpitchorvolume modification,youshouldmakethosechangestothecurrentsampleontheKeymapeditorpage beforeassigningthenextrange.

14-8

Keymap and Sample Editing Editing Samples

Editing Samples
ToentertheSampleEditor,firstselecttheprogramyouwishtoeditinProgrammode.Withthe programselected,presstheEditbuttontoentertheProgramEditor.Intheprogrameditorthe KEYMAPpagewillbeselected(ifnotpresstheKEYMAPsoftbutton.)WiththeKeyMap parameterselectedontheKEYMAPpage,presstheEditbuttonagaintoentertheKeymap Editor.OntheEditKeymappage,selecttheKeyRangeparameterandusetheAlphaWheelor/ +buttonstochooseoneoftheavailablekeyranges(ifthereismorethanonekeyrange.)Youcan edittheexistingsampleofakeyrange,orchooseanewsampleforthekeyrangeandeditthat. WhentheKeymapparameterisselectedyoucanholdtheEnterbuttonandtriggernotesto selectdifferentkeyranges. Ifyouwanttoselectadifferentsample,usethecursorbuttonstoselecttheSampleparameter. UsetheAlphaWheeltoselectasample.PresstheEditbuttononcemore,andyoullenterthe SampleEditor.Thesamplewillplaythroughtheeffectsofthecurrentprogram.Thenameof stereosamplesendwithanS.Touseastereosample,theStereoparametermustbesettoOnin theProgramEditor,andtwokeymapsmustbeselected,seeTheKEYMAPPage on page 619for details. TherearetwosampleeditingpagesMISC(Miscellaneous)andTRIM.Thesoftbuttonsfor thesepagesarevisiblewhenyouentertheSampleEditor.Youcantriggernotesatanytime whileyoureediting,tohearyourchangesasyoumakethem.Whenyouhavefinishedediting yoursampleorsamples,seethepreviewfunctiononpage 1117forawaytoautomatically createaprogramandkeymapusingasampleorgroupofsampleroots.

The Miscellaneous (MISC) Page

OntheMISCpage,youllsetseveralparametersthataffectthebehaviorofthecurrentsample. Theseparametersaffecttheentiresample.Thecenterofthetoplinedisplaysthetypeofsample, eitherROMBASEforfactorysamplesorFLASHforuserloadedsamples.Therightsideofthe toplinedisplaystherootnumberandRootKeyofthesample.Forstereosamples,LorRis displayedaftertheRoot#parametertoindicatethatyouareviewingparametersfortheleftor rightchannelofthesample.UsetheChan/Layerbuttonstomovebetweenchannelsofstereo samples.Althoughyoucaneditparametersfortheleftandrightchannelsofasample,both channelscanonlybeheardiftheStereoparameterissettoOnintheProgramEditor,andthe samekeymapisselectedfortheKeymap1andKeymap2parametersintheProgramEditor.If theStereoparameterissettoOffintheProgramEditor,onlytheleftchannelofstereosamples willbeheardinmono.Ifthesampleispartofagroupofsampleroots,youcanalsousethe Chan/Layerbuttonstoscrollthrougheachsampleinthegroup.ArepresentativeMISCpageis shownbelow:

14-9

Keymap and Sample Editing Editing Samples

Parameter Root Key Number Pitch Adjust Volume Adjust Alternative Volume Adjust Decay Rate Release Rate Loop Switch Playback Mode Alternative Sample Sense Ignore Release

Range of Values C -1 to G 9 Variable (depends on sample rate) -64.0 to 63.5 dB -64.0 to 63.5 dB 0 to 5000 dB per second 0 to 5000 dB per second Off, On Normal, Reverse, Bidirectional Normal, Reverse Off, On

Root Key Therootkeyrepresentsthekeyboardkeyatwhichthesamplewillplaybackwithout transposition(thatis,atthesamepitchasthepitchoftheoriginalsample).Usethe/+buttonsor AlphaWheeltoselectaRootKeynote,orusethealphanumericpadfollowedbytheEnter buttontoenteraRootKeybyMIDInotenumber. Pitch Adjust Usethisparametertochangethepitchofthesamplerelativetothekeyfromwhichitsplayed. Settingavalueof100cts,forexample,willcausethesampletoplaybackonesemitonehigher thannormal.Thisparameterishandyforfinetuningsamplestoeachotheriftheyreslightlyout oftune. Volume Adjust Uniformlyboostorcuttheamplitudeoftheentiresample. Alternative Start Volume Adjust (AltVolAdjust) Thisparametersetstheamplitudeofthesamplewhenthealternativestartisused.Seepage 621 foradiscussionofAltSwitch. Decay Rate Thisparameterdefineshowlongthesampletakestodecay(fade)tozeroamplitude(silence). DecayRateaffectseachsampleindividually,andisineffectonlywhentheamplitudeenvelope fortheprogram(theModeparameterontheAMPENVpageintheProgramEditor)issetto Natural.IfModeisUser,thesettingsontheAMPENVpageoverridethesettingforDecayRate. DecayRateoperatesintwodifferentways,dependingonthenatureofthesample.IfitsaROM sampleoraKurzweilformatRAMsample,DecayRatetakeseffectintheloopportionofthe sample,afteralltheattackstagesoftheamplitudeenvelopearecomplete.FornonKurzweil RAMsamples,DecayRatetakeseffectassoonasthesamplestarts,regardlessofthelengthofthe attackstages.

14-10

Keymap and Sample Editing Editing Samples

Release Rate Thereleaseratedetermineshowlongthesamplewilltaketodecaytozeroamplitudewhenthe notetriggerisreleased.Thehigherthevalue,thefasterthereleaserate.Thisreleaseaffectseach sampleindividually,andisineffectonlywhentheamplitudeenvelopefortheprogram(the ModeparameterontheAMPENVpageintheProgramEditor)issettoNatural.Inthiscase,the releasebeginsassoonasthenoteisreleased.IfModeisUser,thesettingsontheAMPENVpage overridethesettingforReleaseRate. Tocreateanextendedsampleloopthatwillplaydataafterthesampleslooponkeyup,setthe AlternativeStartsamplepointerafterthesampleendpointer,thensetarelativelylowvaluefor thereleaserate. Loop Switch Thisparameteractivatesordeactivatestheloopingofthecurrentlyselectedsample.Whensetto On,thesamplewillloopaccordingtothesettingsontheTRIMpage.WhensettoOff,the samplewillplaythroughtoitsEndpointandstop. Playback Mode (Playback) Thisparameterletsyoumodifythedirectioninwhichthesampleisplayed.Setittoavalueof ReverseifyouwantthesampletoplayfromitsEnd(E)pointtoitsStart(S)point.Choosea valueofBidirectionaltocausethesampletoplayfromStarttoEnd,thenreversedirectionand playagainfromEndtoLoopandback,repeatinguntilthenotetriggerisreleased(thisworks onlywhentheLoopSwitchparameterissettoOn). Alternative Sample Sense (AltSense) Thisprovidesaconvenientwaytoactivatethealternativestartofasample.WhensettoNormal, thealternativestartwillbeusedwhentheAltSwitchcontrolisOn(thisissetontheKEYMAP page),orwhenthecontrolsourceassignedtoitisaboveitsmidpoint.WhensettoReverse,the alternativestartwillbeusedwhentheAltSwitchcontrolisOff,orwhenthecontrolsource assignedtoitisbelowitsmidpoint. Ignore Release (IgnRelease) WhensettoavalueofOff,thesamplewillreleasenormallywhenthenotetriggerisreleased. WhensettoOn,thenotewillnotrelease,evenwhenthenotetriggerisreleased.Thissetting shouldbeusedonlywithsamplesthatnormallydecaytosilence;nondecayingsampleswill playforeveratthissetting.ThisparameterisequivalenttotheIgnReleaseparameteronthe LAYERpage,butaffectsonlythecurrentlyselectedsample. SampleRate and NumSamples Theseparameterscannotbeedited,butshowthesamplessamplerateandthesampleslength insamples.Samplesthatarelongerthan1millionsamplesaredisplayeda1Ms. The Soft Buttons on the MISC Page
Rename

Callupthepagethatenablesyoutochangethenameofthecurrentsample.
Save

Starttheprocessofsavingthecurrentsample.
Delete

Deletethecurrentsamplefrommemory.FactoryROMsamplescannotbedeleted.

14-11

Keymap and Sample Editing Editing Samples

The TRIM Page

TheTRIMpageletsyousettheStart,AlternativeStart,Loop,andEndpointsofthecurrent sample.ThetoplineindicatestheZoomandGainsettings.ThisGainsettingdoesntaffectthe amplitudeofthesample,justtheviewinthedisplay.Therightsideofthetoplinedisplaysthe rootnumberofthesample.Ifthesampleispartofagroupofsampleroots,youcanusethe Chan/Layerbuttonstoscrollthrougheachsampleinthegroup.

ThefourparametersonthispageareStart(S),AlternativeStart(A),Loop(L),andEnd(E). Selectingtheseparametersandadjustingtheirvaluesenablesyoutomodifyhowthesample playsbackwhennotesaretriggered.Eachoftheseparameterpointsareexpressedinindividual samples.Forexample,aonesecondsampleatasamplerateof44,100Hzwouldhave44,100 valuesavailabletoadjustforeachoftheseparameters. Thereisaverticallineinthecenterofthedisplayindicatingtheplacementofthecurrent parameterinthesamplewaveform.Thesamplewaveformwillmoverelativetothelinewhen eachparameterisselectedoradjusted.Thelineremainsinthecenterofthedisplay,andthe waveformshiftstoindicatethenewpositionofthepoint.Eachparametercanbeadjustedwith the/+buttons,theAlphaWheel,orthealphanumericbuttonpadfollowedbytheEnterbutton. TheStart(S)pointdeterminesthebeginningofthecurrentsample.Youcantruncatethe beginningofthesamplebyincreasingthevalueoftheStart(S)parameter.Youmightdothisto removesilenceatthebeginningofasample,ortoremovesomeoralloftheattack.Youcant decreasetheStartpointofsamplesbelowzero. TheAlternativeStart(A)parameterletsyousetasecond,optionalstartorendpointforthe currentsample.TheAlternativeStartwillbeusedwhentheAltSwitchparameteronthe KEYMAPpageissettoOn,orwhenitssettoaspecificcontrolsourceandthatcontrolsourceis generatingavalueofmorethan+.5.(Forexample,ifyouassignMWheelasthecontrolsource fortheAltSwitchparameter,theAlternativeStartwillbeusedwhentheModWheelor whatevercontrolsourceyouhavesettosendMWheelisaboveitshalfwaypoint.)The AlternativeStartcanbesetbefore,after,oratthesamepointastheStartorEnd. IfyousettheAlternativeStartaftertheEnd,youcanextendtheplayofloopedsamples. Normally,loopedsampleswillplaythroughtotheEnd,thenwillloopbacktotheLooppoint, andcontinueloopinglikethisuntilthenoteisreleased,whentheygointotheirnormalrelease. IftheAlternativeStartissetaftertheEnd,loopedsampleswillloopinthesamewaywhilenotes aresustained.Assoonasyoureleasethenotes,however,thesampleswillplaythroughtothe AlternativeStartpointbeforegoingintorelease. TheLoop(L)parametersetsthebeginningoftheloopedportionofthecurrentsample.The LoopcanbesetatanypointbeforetheEnd,includingbeforetheStartandAlternativeStart.If youtrytomoveitaftertheEnd,theEndwillmovewithit.Whenyouresettingaloopsegment forasample,youshouldadjustboththeLoopandEndparameterssothatthetwoendsofthe waveformwouldmeet(orcomeascloseaspossible)whentheloopoccurs.Youcandothis visuallybyzoominginclosetothewaveform(untilitbecomesasingleline,)thenadjustingthe LoopandEndparametersofthewaveformuntilbothendsarethesamedistanceaboveorbelow

14-12

Keymap and Sample Editing Editing Samples

thezeropointofthedisplay(thehorizontallineinthemiddleofthewaveformdisplay.)Though adjustingthesepointsvisuallyishelpful,alwayslistentothesampleandmakethefinalsettings basedonwhatsoundsbest.Youllnoticeanaudibleclickinyoursampleloopiftheendsofthe waveformdonotmeetwheretheloopoccurs.Thecloseryoucangetthetwoendsofthe waveform,thebetterthesoundqualityofyourloopwillbe.UsingzerocrossingsfortheLoop andEndparametersmayalsohelpreduceclicksatthelooppoint,seeZeroandZero+belowfor details. TheEnd(E)parametersetsthepointatwhichthecurrentsamplewillstopplayback.Typically youllusethisparametertotrimunwantedsilenceofftheendofasample,althoughyoucanuse ittoshortenasampleasmuchasyouwant. NoteOnSavingSamples:Trimmedportionsofasamplearenotsaved.Trimmedportionsbeforethe Start(S),orAlternativeStart(A)points(whicheverhasalowervalue)willbelostuponsaving,and whicheverparameterhadalowervaluewillhaveavalueofzerothenexttimeitisloaded(valuesforall othersamplepointparameterswillbeadjustedrelatively.)TrimmedportionsaftertheAlternativeStart (A)orEnd(E)points(whicheverhasahighervalue)willbelostuponsaving.Ifyouwishtosaveacopyof theoriginaluntrimmedsample,savethetrimmedversionunderadifferentID#(thiswillnotuse additionalsamplememory.)IfyousaveatrimmedfactoryROMsampleatitsoriginalID#,youcan alwaysrestoretheoriginalversionbydeletingthemodifiedversionthatyousaved.Todeleteasample,see OBJECT on page 1112,theDeletefunction. Zoom- and Zoom+ Thesebuttonsincreaseordecreasetheresolutionofthewaveformdisplay,enablingyoutoseea largerorsmallersegmentofthewaveformofthecurrentlyselectedsample.Thetoplineofthe displayindicatesthezoompositionintermsofafractionforexample,1/256whichindicates thenumberofindividualsampleelementsrepresentedbyeachdisplaypixel.Avalueof1/256 meansthateachpixelrepresents256individualsampleelements.Themaximumzoomsetting of1showsyouaverysmallsegmentofthesample.Theminimumsettingof1/16384showsyou thelargestpossiblesegmentofthesample.EachpressofaZoomsoftbuttonincreasesor decreasesthezoombyafactorof4. Gain- and Gain+ Thesebuttonsincreaseordecreasethemagnificationofthecurrentlydisplayedsample waveform,enablingyoutoseethewaveformingreaterorlesserdetail.Attheleftofthedisplay, youllseethemagnificationsetting,whichisexpressedindBunits.Youcanadjustthe magnificationfrom48dB(maximummagnification)to 0 dB.Thisdoesntaffecttheactual amplitudeofthesample,onlythemagnificationofitsdisplay. ThesimplestwaytothinkoftheZoomandGainbuttonsistorememberthattheZoombuttons controltheleft/rightmagnificationofthewaveform,whiletheGainbuttonscontroltheup/ downmagnification.Neitherbuttonhasanyaffectonthesoundofthesample.Youlloftenuse theZoomandGainsoftbuttonstogethertofocusinonaparticularsamplesegment,then magnifyittoseeitinclosedetail. Forexample,youmightwanttozoomouttoviewanentiresamplewaveform,todecidewhich segmentyouwanttoedit.Youcouldthenzoomintofocusonaparticularsegment.Onceyouve zoomedin,youmaywanttoboosttheGaintoenableyoutosetanewStart(S)pointwith greaterprecision,orensurethatyougetasmoothlooptransition. Zero- and Zero+ PressingtheZeroorZero+buttonswillsearchleftorrightrespectivelyforthesamplesnext zerocrossing.Azerocrossingisapointwherethesamplewaveformisneitherpositiveor negative(crossingthehorizontallineinthemiddleofthewaveformdisplay.)Thecurrently selectedparameter(Start(S),AlternativeStart(A),Loop(L),orEnd(E))willbesettothispoint inthesample.Settingtheseparameterstozerocrossingscanhelpminimizeclicksatthestart, end,orlooppointofasample.Itsbesttohaveeachofthesepointssetfirstbyadjustingeach parameterandlisteningtothesample,thenifneededsearchforanearbyzerocrossing.

14-13

Keymap and Sample Editing Editing Samples

14-14

Specifications MIDI Implementation Chart

Appendix A Specifications
MIDI Implementation Chart
Model: PC3K
Manufacturer: Young Chang Digital Synthesizers Function
Basic Channel Default Changed Default Mode Messages Altered Note Number Velocity After Touch Pitch Bender O Control Change O True # Song Pos. System Common Song Sel. Tune System Real Time Clock Messages Local Control Aux Messages All Notes Off Active Sense Reset Notes 0 - 127 True Voice Note ON Note OFF Keys Channels 0 - 127 O O X O O 0 - 31 32 - 63 (LSB) 64 - 127 1 - 999 0 - 127 O O O X O O O O X X *Manufacturers ID = 07 Device ID: default = 0; programmable 0127 O 0 - 127 O O O O O 0 - 31 32 - 63 (LSB) 64 - 127 1 - 999 0 - 127 O* O O X O O O O X X Controller assignments are programmable Standard and custom formats

Date: 12/01/07 Version 1.0

Transmitted
1 1 - 16 Mode 3

Recognized
1 1 - 16 Mode 3

Remarks
Memorized Use Multi mode for multitimbral applications

Program Change System Exclusive

Mode 1: Omni On, Poly Mode 3: Omni Off, Poly

Mode 2: Omni On, Mono Mode 4: Omni Off, Mono

O = yes X =no

A-1

Specifications Specifications

Specifications
PC3K8 Height: (4.33") (11.00 cm) Depth: (13.98") (35.50 cm) Length: (54.33") (138 cm) Weight: (54 lb.) (24.50 kg) PC3K7 Height: (4.33") (11.00 cm) Depth: (13.98") (35.50 cm) Length: (47.75") (121.29 cm) Weight: (37.35 lb.) (16.94 kg) PC3K6 Height: (4.84") (12.30 cm) Depth: (13.98") (35.50 cm) Length: (39.37") (100 cm) Weight: (30.86 lb.) (14.00 kg)

Power Internal AC power supply. User selectable 120/240V AC operation. 120V current 0.5A maximum 240V current 0.25A maximum Typical Power Consumption is 25 watts power-on, 0 watts power-off. Audio Outputs Main and Aux: Balanced 1/4 TRS jack +21DBu maximum output 400 ohms balanced source impedance 24-bit A-to-D converters >120dB dynamic range, balanced Headphones: 8Vrms maximum output, 47 ohms source impedance

A-2

Appendix B PC3K Bootloader

TheBootloaderistheprogramthatrunswhenthePC3Kisfirstturnedon.Itsjobistocheckthat hardwareisfunctional,initializethedigitalsystems,andloadthemainsynthesizerprogram. UndernormalcircumstancesyoumightnotevennoticethattheBootloaderisthereatall,since thePC3Kwillstartuponitsownwithoutanyproblem.However,ifyouwanttoupdateyour unit,orperformmaintenanceonit,youmayneedtointeractwiththeBootloaderprogramitself. ThisappendixdescribeswhattheBootloadercandoandhowyoucanuseitsfunctions. ThefirstthingtounderstandisthatPC3Kexecutableprogramsandallobjectdataresideona filesystemcontainedinsidetheinstrument.Thisfilesystemisbasedonflashmemory technologyandwillpersistacrosspowercycles.WhenthePC3Kstartsup,theBootloadercopies thesynthesizerprogramintomemoryandexecutesitjustlikeaPCbootsupwhenyouturn iton.ThePC3Kalsostoresitsfactorydefinedobjects,andallofyourowncustomizeduser objectsonthefilesystem.TheBootloaderprogramitselfisnotfoundonthefilesystem.Instead, itresidesinaROMchipthatcannotbeerased,andthereforeispermanentlyinstalledinyour PC3K.

Using the Bootloader Menu

NormallytheBootloaderprogramwilldoitstasksandhandovercontroltothesynthesizer programautomatically.IfyouwanttointeractwiththeBootloaderitself,holddowntheExit button(totherightofthedisplay)whileturningthepoweron(whilethemessageInitializing Scannerisdisplayedonthefrontpanel).Insteadofcompletingthebootprocess,theBootloader willdisplayitsmainmenupageonthescreen: PC3K Boot Loader Version 1.0

Run PC3K

System Update

Run Diags

System Reset

System Utilities

Usethesoftbuttonsunderneaththedisplaytochooseanaction. Run PC3K System Update PressthissoftbuttontorunthePC3KfromtheBootLoaderwithout restartingthePC3K. Pressthissoftbuttontoupdatetheentiresystem(OS,objects,etc.)froma .KUFfile(Kurzweilupdatefile.)YouwillbepromptedtochooseaUSB deviceandlocatea.KUFfile. PressthissoftbuttontoenterthePC3Kdiagnosticsutility,whichcanhelp determineiftheresahardwareerroronyourunit. ThiswillclearoutalluserdefinedobjectsandreturnthePC3Ktoits defaultFactorystate.

Run Diags System Reset

B--1

System Utilities Thisoffersamenuoffilesystemfunctionsthatcanbeusefulin maintainingyoursystemordiagnosingsoftwareproblems. YoucanalsoentertheBootloadermenufromtheMasterModemenuduringnormaloperation.

System Update (PC3K Software, Objects, Etc.)

ThemostcommonuseoftheBootloadermenuistoupdateyourPC3Kusingnewversionsof softwareandobjectssuppliedbyKurzweil.UpdatesforthePC3Kcomein.KUFfiles(Kurzweil updatefiles,)whichcanincludeupdatestothePC3Koperatingsystem,factoryobjects,and firmware.Newversionswillbemadeperiodicallyasweaddnewfeaturesorimprove performance;downloadthesefreeupgradesfromourwebsiteatwww.kurzweil.com. PresstheSystemUpdatesoftbuttontoupdatetheentiresystem(OS,objects,etc.)froma.KUF file.YouwillbepromptedtochooseaUSBdeviceandlocatea.KUFfile. PresstheUSBDevicesoftbuttontoupdatefromaUSBdevice(suchasathumbdrive)plugged intotheUSBstorageport.PressthePCUSBsoftbuttontoupdatefromaUSBcableconnectedto acomputertothePC3KsUSBComputerport. TouseaUSBdeviceyoullneedavalidUSBdeviceandacomputerwithaUSBtypeAport. MostmodernWindowsandMacOScomputerssupportUSBdevicesinaverystraightforward way.YoushouldbeabletodraganddropthePC3KfilesrightontotheUSBdevicedirectory. Afterthefilesarecopied,removethedevicefromthecomputerandplaceitintheUSBstorage portontherearpanelofthePC3K.AUSBconnectorwillonlyfitintotheportiforiented properly,sodontforceitintotheport,asthismaydamageyourPC3KorUSBdevice.Ifyouare havingtroubleinsertingyourUSBconnectorintotheport,tryflippingtheconnectorover. TousetheUSBcomputerport,youshouldplugtheUSBcableintothePC3KsUSBcomputer portandtothecomputer.Afteryouenterthebootloadermenu,thecomputershouldrecognize thatanewdeviceisavailablehavingthenameKurzweilPC3K.Filescanbedraggedand droppeddirectlytothisdeviceiconandwillbeimmediatelyavailableonthePC3K. OnceyouhaveselectedthedesiredUSBtype,usethePC3Ksfiledirectorybrowsertofindthe .KUFfilethatyouwishtouseforthesystemupdate.Withthefileselected,presstheOKsoft buttontoinstalltheupdate.Wheninstallationiscomplete,presstheOKsoftbuttontoreturnto theBootLoadermainmenu,thenpresstheRunPC3KsoftbuttontorunthePC3Kwiththe updatedsoftware.

Run Diags - PC3K Diagnostics Utility

ThePC3KDiagnosticsUtilitycanrunspecifichardwarechecksonPC3Ksystems.Mostofthe timeyouwontneedtorunthediagnostics,butifyourehavingproblemswiththeinstrumentit maybehelpfultoperformtheseinteractivetestswhencontactingKurzweilsupport. ToexitthePC3KDiagnosticsUtility,presstheEXITbutton.YouwillreturntothemainBoot Loadermenu.

System Reset
Ifyouvemademany,complexupdatestoyourobjects,andhavesavedanumberoffilesoffto externalstorage,youmightwanttorestoretheinstrumenttoitsdefaultstate.Thisisespecially helpfulifyourehavingproblemsgettingsoundprogramsorsetupstoworkproperly,orthink theremaybesomekindofunderlyinghardwareproblem.(Remembertosaveyourworkinthe Storagemenu.Oncedeleted,thefilesarecompletelyremovedfromthePC3Kandthereisno waytoretrievethem.)Toclearalluserobjectsandrestorethefactorydefaultstate,pressthesoft buttonlabeledSystemResetontheBootloadermenu.ThePC3Kwillaskyoutoconfirmthis action.PressOKtocompletetheclearfunction,andCANCELtostopwithoutalteringanything.

B--2

System Utilities
Format Flash PressthesoftbuttonlabeledFormatFlashtoreinitializetheinternalfilesystem.Thisdeletesall objectsandthecurrentOS.(Ifpossible,remembertofirstsaveyourworkintheStoragemenu. Oncedeleted,thefilesarecompletelyremovedfromthePC3Kandthereisnowaytoretrieve them.)ThiswilldeleteeverythingthatwasstoredinternallyonthePC3K,andleaveaclean, emptyfilesystemreadyforuse. Itispossible(thoughnotlikely)thatthePC3Kfilesystemcanbecomecorrupteddueto hardwarefailureorpoweroutageduringcertainoperations.ThiswillresultintheBootLoader beingunabletobringupthePC3Ksystemcorrectly.Insuchacircumstance,theBootLoader willtakeovercontrolandpresentitsusualmenu.Ifthefilesystemiscompletelycorrupted,it willnotbepossibletoreconfigurewithoutfirstformattingtheinternalflashmemory. Install Module ThissoftbuttonbringsuptheUpdateImagepage,whereyoucaninstallindividualPC3K modules.Mostofthetimeyouwontneedthispage,butKurzweilsupportmayadviseyouto installindividualmodulesifyourehavingproblemswithyourPC3K. Restore Older IfyouhaveupdatedthePC3Ksoftwarebutwishtoreturntotheearlierversion,pressthe RestoreOldersoftbutton.YouwillbebroughttotheRestoreOlderpageandaskedtochoose theimagetorestore.Notethatonlyoneversionofthepreviousimageisavailabletoberestored. Ifyouverestoredonce,anotherrestorewillbringbackthemostrecentlyupdatedversion.

B--3

B--4

Appendix C Changing PC3K Voltage

Inmostcases,youwillnotneedtochangethevoltageonyourPC3K.However,sincedifferent countriesusedifferentstandardvoltagesettings,theremaybetimeswhenyouneedtomakethe change. ThePC3Ksfuseholder(wherethepowercableplugsin)iswhereyouchangethevoltage.The marksonthefuseholderare115and230.115shouldbeusedforvoltagesfrom100to125.230 shouldbeusedfor200to240.Generally,NorthAmericauses115,andEuropeandAsia/ Australiause230,butthereareexceptionstothisgeneralrule. ThePC3Kusestwo250mAfastblowfusesfor230Vortwo500mAfastblowfusesfor115V. Thesecanbeeither1.25X0.25sizeor5mmX20mmsizefuses.Extrafusesarenotprovided, soyouwillneedtoacquirethecorrectfusebeforeyouchangethevoltage.

Removing the fuse holder

Removethepowercord. Pryopenthefuseholdercover.Useathintoolinsertedintotheholewheretheredvoltage indicatorshowsthrough.

C--1

Pullupgentlytoopenthefuseholdercover.Thecoverishingednexttothepowercord connection.

Pryoutthefuseholder.

C--2

Ifthereisonlyonefuseinthefuseholder,youmustremovethemetalclipontheemptyside.

Theclipjustpullsoff:

C--3

Theclipremovedfromthefuseholder:

Removethefuse.Installtwo250mAfastblowfusesfor230Vortwo500mAfastblowfusesfor 115V,oneoneachsideofthefuseholder. Thefuseholderwillaccepteither1.25X0.25sizeor5mmX20mmsizefuses.Ifusing5mmX 20mmsizefuses,installthemtowardstheinsideendofthefuseholdernearthemetalpins,as shownhere:

Replacethefuseholderinthepowerentrymodulewiththeindicatorforthedesiredvoltage towardstheedgeofthemodule,awayfromthepowerswitch.Closethefuseholdercover,and checkthatthedesiredvoltageindicationshowsthroughthehole.Replacethepowercord.

C--4

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Programs

Appendix D PC3K Objects (V 1.31)

Programs
PresstheInfosoftbuttonforcontrollerinformation.

ID
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 79

Program
StandardGrand StudioGrand RubensteinSWComp HorowitzGrand NYCJazzGrand PopPowerPiano ColdPliano GrandEvans BluesPiano1974 RockPiano1974 LolaPiano TakeMeToThePilot DebsGhostPno KenBrnsUprigt SMiLE/RkyRaccoon Piano&String BeateninRhds SteviesRhds GilpinsSuitcase DukesDynoRhds MotorBootyMutron SweetLorettaEP Rhds/WahSW HotrodDynoRhds WoodstockClunker StageMixWurly AiryPad 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52

ID

Program
SupertrampWurly FlydDarkside/Wah WhatdISayWrly DeepFuzzWurly NoQuarterPnt MistyMountainEP UKPopCP70 AcidJazzVelFlute TimbaSynth BluePVCTubes SimpleHipHopLead StereoTouchKoto ModwheelDJ RetroSparkle RealSupasticious JoesClav Rufus/MarleyWAH BlackCowClav HiyaGroundsw TrampledUnderD6 Harpsichord BriteHarpsichord GreggsB RealAllOutB CleanPerc TheNinthBar Levin/GabrlFrtls 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78

ID

Program
LordsB3Mwheel OleTimeGospel FooledAgnVox BostonScreamer PowerPopHorns Sax/TrumpetSctn BigBand/AMradio MeanSalsaSection R&B/FunkSection BassieOrchestra P*FunkHorns 70sStonesHorns BigLAStrings DarkNYCStudio PopTripperStr LoFiStudioStr ViennaOctaves LondonSpiccato Pizzicato Tremolando ChoirComplete HaahSingers ManhattanVoices Aaahlicious NYCinLA CrystalVoices XfadBelltoneRhds

112

145

D-1

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Programs

ID
80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 178

Program
CathedralVox ClassicComp FittyFittyLead BigOldJupiter 9YardsBass BowhSawBass ARPesqueBass DaywalkerBassMW Harpolicious SloQuadraPad PhaseShimmer LePesque WispyOne BladerunnerARP FairlightPad Tronesque SoLushPad BoutiqueSixStr Boutique12Str EmoVerser VoxxedElec12 RealNylon DualStrat BurningTubesMW RockinLeadMW PBass EBass BeastiesBass Flea/Bootsy BigDummy JacoFretless UprightGrowler WhiterShadeB3

ID
113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 211

Program
NYCKits LAKits RockKits Roots/IndieKit Kikz/SnarzMW EarthKikznSnrz AnazlogMachine ProducedKit08 NaturalPerc Rhythm4Reel NewMarimba 2HandSteelDrums RealVibes SteamPunkMallets MagicCeleste DrumsnBells PianoStack DarkGrand GrandPiano440 PianoRecital OleUpright1 WestCoastPno&Pad PerfectPnoPad DreamyPiano PianowDvStrgs PnoAgtStrngs TheAncient DancePnoEchplex IvoryHarp PianoLushness Piano&Wash Piano&VoxPad ARP2500Brass

ID
146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 244

Program
ExtremeHardstrk FagenPhaser RoyalScamRhds AustnCtyLmtsWrly BrightDynamicWly 70sWahLeslieEP 3DogPianet ClassicDXRhds RichEP+Pad 90sFMShimmer BrightHardstrEP CrispandSoft SoftWarmBallad TXStack1 TightBrightFM PolyTechnobreath PianoSynthStack ElecGrandStack BigSyn/HornStack 70sArenaSynth 80sArenaSynth 90sFunkStack NexxProgStack CrispClav StevieFuzz HeartbreakerWAH ChoclateSaltyClv SailinShoesClav StopMakingSense HarpsiRotovibe PhsyclGrafitiClv ParisCmboAccordn DryPumpinDrums

D-2

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Programs

ID
179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 277

Program
DoorsVox Indagardenoveden AnimalsVox MagicWolf Farfisa1 VASTBars13,8&9 1NotePowerRiff MiamiPopHorns 80sPopOctaveSax BuenaVistaBrass TenorExpress Sgt.PepperBrass GoldfingerBrass Bari/TenorSect StudioAStrings StudioBOctaves NashvilleStrings ProcessedStrgs OwensStrings StudioCStrings TenderStrings ToxicStrings MixedChoir ConcertChoir AaahVocals JazzyBalladVox AntiqueAhhChorus BrightSynVox VoxOrgel Vox&Strings PressLead ClassSquare DownwardSpiralMW

ID
212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 310

Program
SynBellMorph Perc>Morph>Bass EvilOctaveWheel TranceRiff SickoSynco BuzzyStrings VA1Saw/Sqr/Pulse AiryImpact SpidersWeb ARPBigSynth ClassPad HarmonicEnvelops Heaven&Earth Bling6String MediumCrunchLead DoubleCleanChrs CompdPhaser TremBucker CascadeSitar HeavyBuckers Nasty70sGuitar FingerBass KneeDeepMinimoog ACBuzzerBass MotownBass SquiresHeavyPik LowdownBass EberhardtFrtls SlyBass MaroonDrums BourneRemixDrum BeastieRetroDrum MonoTrekkies

ID
245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 343

Program
60sRock&Soul HeadhuntersKit FranticHouseDrms Dance/Marilyn MellowMarimba Skullophonic Percussionist ShinySparkles HybridTunedPerc DynamicPerc CagesEnsemble MagicMbira CP80Enhanced GabrielsMelt VideoKilledRadio BrighterCP TouchRezSynthCP PowerCP DarkChorusCP InsideOutCP PianetClassic ShesNotThere WalrusPianet FlamingHohner PowerChordPianet SlyBallad BlackFriday TheseEyes VA1SawLead VA1SqrLead MaroonSynBass VA1DistBassSolo! OrganModePn/Hrp

D-3

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Programs

ID
278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 376

Program
VA1DstPulseWheel NewOrderPulses VA1DetunedPulse VA1DetunedSaws VA1DetunedSqrs VA1EmersonLead MwhlClubsweeper Innervate ChemBrosBassLead UFOPad VA1SliderMorphSQ ShoobieModelC StereoPickups 70sBubblegumClav TreblClavWhlmute Mutron+Synthsw Bi*PhazClav 80sFlangeClav VASTEnvSynClav CharlemagneClav SwitchPickups EvilWomanDeepFuz HeadhuntersWAH MorleyWAHClav DblWAHInsanity Psychedeliclav PrestonSpaceWah Analog/DigHybrid Jump!Obx 80sEndCredits VA1DistleadCC Divider BreakestraKit

ID
311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 409

Program
DiscoDivebomb MutronTweetyPerc DisgustingBass VA1ShaperSweeper ElectroPercSynth MWhlMayhemBass ElectronicaSplit HiPassMWhlBlips PlasmaCannon 32LayerBass! YesesisTronStr MobyTurntblTron SpaceOditty RocknRollSuicide OctaveTronStr SiberianKhatru ModwhlRemixStr PdlPitchbendStr SilentSorrow BandpassChoir SweptTronVoice MellotronFlutes SldrEQMltrnVox StrawberryFlutes WhiteSatinSplt 3WaySplitMltrn RMIHarpsi LambLiesDown RMIPiano&Harpsi BrightRMIPn/Hrp DualModeHarpsi RoyalKingWakeman Reeds&Bells

ID
344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 442

Program
Dr.JohnsRMI PhaseswOrgan SpacedOutBach TobaccoRoadRMI TrafficEP TeknoTempoEcho TrickofthTail RMIClavWAH DreamOnSession LightYearStrings FunkensteinzARP MurkyRezPad StPanPhaseARP ARPStr+Oberheim FXSweepARP HotFilterARP St.PPWMBASS SquareChirpLead MyOldPPG*2.3 KashmirStr+Brs GenesisBroadway GarthsLastWaltz SynbrassPillow WarszawaLayers ELOStringSection OutkastDrums PopRock08Kit HelloBrooklyn SnoopKit EpicRemixDrums ZooYorkRemixDrms RocAFellaKit WoodwindSection

D-4

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Programs

ID
377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 475

Program
CosmicSusPedal DigitalMoonscape FalgorsLament BPMBionicStrngs Swell&Hold Bowie/HeroesPad MeanStereoSweep PulseVowel Winds&Strings Winds,Horn&Str MoreBrass&Str LHTimpRollOrch GothicClimax Denouement PoltergeistTrem ManyCharacters Pizzw/PercUpTop FastStr&Perc FastWinds&Pizz ImperialArmy BattleSceneOrch FinalVictory SloLineInterlude Winds&EspressStr FastWinds&Str SugarPlumFairies AdagioPizzSplit PastoralOrch PastoralClrFlt PastoralDblRds Pastoralw/Pizz Strings&Silver SoloViolaslow

ID
410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 508

Program
PercAtkStrings WilliamTellA WilliamTellB Orchw/BellsOn Winds&EspStr Horns,Winds&Str TripleStrikeOrch TuttiOrchestra StBaroqueHarpsi StringContinuo VivaldiOrchestra TrumpetVoluntary Fifes&Drums SoloFlute TremoloFlute FastOrchFlute Piccolo SoloOboe SlowOboe FastOrchOboe LeadOboe SoloEngHrnprs FastOrchEngHrn SlowEngHornprs LeadEnglishHorn SoloClarinet SloOrchClarinet FastOrchClar LeadClarinet SoloBassoon SoloBassoonvib SoloDblReeds Chimes/Glock

ID
443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 541

Program
EnsembleWWinds BassClar/Clar/Fl SoloFrHorn EnsembleFrHorn LeadFrenchHorn DynOrchFrHorns HornSectLayer SoloBrtTrumpet HardTrumpet LeadTrumpet SoftTrumpet SlowSoftTrp TwoLeadTrumpets LeadMuteTrumpet SoloTenorSax Sax,Horns,MuteTrp SoloTrombone EnsTrombone TromboneSection DynOrchBones BariHornSection DynBariHorns SoloTuba DynOrchTuba LowOrchBrass LowBrassChorale FastOrchBrass BrassFanfare DynOrchTrumpets SoloViolinfast FolkViolinslow SoloViolafast PizzBass/ArcoLead

D-5

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Programs

ID
476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 574

Program
SoloCellofast SoloCelloslow SoloBasso1 SoloBasso2slo StringQuartet SoloHarp OrchHarp1 DelicateHarp HarpArps&Gliss SloOrchChorus PipeStops SoftStops AllStops ChapelOrgan AllStopsAllVox Pipes&Voices OrchTimpani SoloTimpani Tam/Cym/BD/Timp BasicOrchPerc Timp&AuxPerc TempleBlocks ModernBlockery Perc&Blocks StereoTamtam CymbalRollTr Xylophone SoloMarimba OrchMarimba Vibraphone Celeste Glockenspiel VerySloVeryThick

ID
509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 607

Program
BellsAcross CelesteGlockHarp ChimeBell Carillon AdagioStrings AdagioDivisiStr LeadStrings LeadDivisiStr FastStrings FastDivisiStr AggressoStrings AggressDivisiStr AdagioTuttiMix AdagioDivisiMix LeadDivisiMix LeadTuttiMix FastTuttiMix FastDivisiMix AggressTuttiMix AggressDivisiMix Agrslo/Tremhi AgresTrem8ves AgressoHalfTrem FastTremolandi SloStrPrsTrem MarcatoPrsTrem SfzPrsTrem PoltergeistPad AdagioTremSplit FullPizzicato TouchFullPizz VariablePizz FastBassidiv

ID
542 543 544 545 546 547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 640

Program
Lead&Adagio AdagioSplit AdagioBs/VlnI TripleStrikeStr AdagioTutti8ves AdagioDiv8ves AdagioOctaves Lead&8vaAdagio DualSlowSplit LeadTuttiMixB LeadStringsSplit LeadMixOctvs DivisiMix+solo LeadUpperRange LeadDiv8ves DualUpperDivisi DualUppertutti DualHalfTrem FastMixOctaves FastDivisi8ves Marcatodivisi MarcatoMix1 MarcatoMix2 MarcatoMix3 SloMutedStrings LargoMix LargoMix2 LargoconSordino Largo8ves EspressivoLead EspressivoViolas SlowThickMix AdagioMagic

D-6

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Programs

ID
575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588 589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 929

Program
TouchThickMix MoreViola SloStrPrsSwell RiteofStrings AdagioViolinsI AdagioViolinsII AdagioViolindiv AdagioViolas AdagioViolasdiv AdagioCelli AdagioCellidiv AdagioBassi AdagioBassidiv AdagioTremolo LeadViolinsI LeadViolinsII LeadViolinsdiv LeadViolas LeadViolasdiv LeadCelli LeadCellidiv LeadBassi LeadBassidiv LeadTremolo FastViolinI FastViolinII FastViolindiv FastViola FastVioladiv FastCello FastCellodiv FastBassi AllOut

ID
608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 960

Program
FastTremolo LegatoViolinsI LegatoViolinsII LegatoViolindiv LegatoViolas LegatoVioladiv LegatoCelli LegatoCellidiv LegatoBassi LegatoBassidiv LegatoTremolo AggressoViolin AggressoVlnII AggressoViolind AggressoViola AggressoViolad AggressoCello AggressoCellod AgressoBassi AgressoBassid AgressoTremolo RigbysStrings KeyboardStrings StringMachine LushPad AddAPad1 AddaPad2 HiResStringPad LoFiStrings BlueResonance AutoResStrPad EtherealJoe VAST13Ch/Perc2

ID
897 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 1006

Program
EzrasBurner HotTubeGospel B3Midrange Blues&Gospel ProgB3Perc2 ProgB3Perc3 TubeB3Perc ProgB3Perc4 BrightTubeScream ZepelinSolo ArgentB3 MusselShoalsB3 XtremeTubeB3Perc ClassicTrafficB3 WarmB3 WarmerB3 ChorusEchoOrgan SlowPhaseOrgan EchoRoomB LordsDirtBomb MellowMitch SlysRevenge LateNighter FirebreathingC3 MrSmith ErrolG. Testify WahB3+Echoplx SweetnNice SoftChords SputteringingB3 MelvinC. WheelGrowlMoogue

D-7

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Programs

ID
930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959

Program
JsComper BrotherJack ModelOne ThickGospel GrowlerB Ready2Rock Thimmer TheRealABC GospelSpecial InTheCorner NightBaby GimmeSome TheGrinder MeanBean DewDropper TwoOut JsAllOut MySunday GoodStarter Sacrificer LeeMichaelsB3 GMStandardKit GMRoomKit GMPowerKit GMElecKit GMSynthKit GMJazzKit GMBrushKit GMOrchKit VAST13Ch/Perc

ID
961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005

Program
FishersVASTB3 RipplySix RippleSiner RippleThump RippleRevDrum DarkRevDrum SpacerLead RippleSine2 RippleThump2 BluesHarmonica HiArpDelay PercArpSynth Candy*OSyncLead WheelSyncBlips 12SAWMWheelLead HotMalletMWheel ScreaminWhlBass SyncWheelLead ModwheelKotoSyn VASprSaw VASprSaw+Allpass SilentProgram ClickTrack DefaultProgram DiagnosticSine ProphtVSyncLd TempoSyncPulse SloSynOrch Anabrass FatSynOrch

ID
1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 1016 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024

Program
TheWayItIs AlphaCentauri SynOrcWhaleCall DownesLead Minipulse4Pole BPMLead GatedSqrSweepBPM BPMEchplexPad GatedNoisweepBPM CarsSquareLead DataShapeSaw Saw+Mogue4Pole VA1NakedPWMPoly VA1NakedPWMMono VA1NakedSawPoly VA1NakedSqrPoly VA1NakedSqrMono VA1NakedSawMono

D-8

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Setups

Setups
ID
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

SETUP
TeknoRiffSw18 BluesJaminG TechnoSubstance AcousticSplit Slap/EPSplit BlackCowSplit SomeLovingSplt Piano&Pad PedalsModeW/Beat AnaBanana Sanctuary WorldBeneath DeepBurn SyncScene MeanClav/Rhds BigbandPBttn1 MeanPianet/Piano OldtimeyBlues OldR&B OldSchoolJam BrooklynSmoov Country RockrollinA HipHop Jazz Reggae World Dance SlowRock Oldies Funk 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62

ID
Metal

SETUP
LatinDanzhall 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93

ID

SETUP
GrandPad&Magic TinklySweepySpcy PulsingAnthem PedHoldPnoSolo RhythmPadSW TheWonders DropsofJupiter NoComplaints BrightonLush NylonandIvory Drawbr/SlidrSW Mini/E3/Clav LASplit BlumanLive Shwales EdenjsSky Marimbatronic Tronotronic OrchFantasy Stringotronic HarpEnsemble MarimbasGoneWild IvoryEnsemble Spaces BubblePad FatAna FretsoLush DualManualB3 DualManualB32 DualManualB33 DualManualB34

GrowthPad MorriconesFall StringsOld&New MonoBass&ArpSt JazzBass/Piano Bass+KB3Split ZepKB3/Pianet ElectricBass/EP ARP&Bass FretlessSplit BigLead SynBass/Lead Play MovieBuildup GuitarEnsemble BignWarmPn/Gt JoniSplit StrangeLands PercAttackOrch DiscoFanfare Padw/Benefits AnaSoup BlueLightsOn PluckedHammers ForbiddenPlanet ChildhoodMagic Autobeller SquareArper PizzicatoBenefit

D-9

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Setups

ID
94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124

SETUP
MwhlBlipsARP MwheelDJArp MargaritaSplit ConstantGardener RunRagoRun BionicRock PeaSoup WalkingArps EminenceinC VampireNightclub KurzJacinto MusicBed Octavia RosinRhythm Insanity Bells LowChunkerGroove HoldSumNotes ReichPiano AnaBouncer TheFactory FattyFatFat BrassBouncer ElectricDancer TresoPulser MellowTripper SpacePulser MoodArpC2 StrumThurmond DrumnBassr funksetup

ID
125 126 127 128 129

SETUP
HazelJam InternalVoices ClearSetup DefaultSetup GetBerni

D-10

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Effect Presets with Algorithms

Effect Presets with Algorithms

How to Use These Tables
EacheffectpresetinthePC3KisbasedonaneffectalgorithmfromtheKurzweilKSP8effects processor.TomakethefullestuseofthePC3Kseffects,youwillneedtodownloadacopyofthe KSP8AlgorithmReferencefromtheKurzweilMusicSystemswebsite.Thisbookprovides extensivedetailonalleffectsparameters.Foreaseofuse,thealgorithmsareindexedandlinked bynameandnumber. Forexample,tofindinformationontheavailableparametersforPC3Keffectspreset1Small WoodBooth,firstrefertothechartbelowforthenameandnumberofthepresetsunderlying algorithm.Inthiscase,theKSP8algorithmis4ClassicPlace.ThedescriptionoftheClassic Placealgorithmbeginsonpage19oftheKSP8AlgorithmReference,andits3pagesofparameters aredescribedstartingonpage21oftheKSP8AlgorithmReference.

Reverbs
Booth/ Ambience 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Room 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 SmallWoodBooth NaturalRoom PrettySmallPlace NiceLittleBooth SunRoom Soundboard AddMoreAir StandardBooth ADistanceAway LivePlace ViewingBooth SmallCloset AddAmbience WithAMic BrightSmallRoom BassyRoom PercussiveRoom SmallStudioRoom ClassRoom UtilityRoom ThickRoom TheRealRoom SmallDrumRoom RealBigRoom alg4ClassicPlace alg5ClassicVerb alg4ClassicPlace alg1MiniVerb alg5ClassicVerb alg7TQVerb alg10OmniPlace alg8DiffusePlace alg6TQPlace alg8DiffusePlace alg1MiniVerb alg10OmniPlace alg1MiniVerb alg4ClassicPlace alg1MiniVerb alg1MiniVerb alg1MiniVerb alg4ClassicPlace alg5ClassicVerb alg5ClassicVerb alg5ClassicVerb alg5ClassicVerb alg1MiniVerb alg5ClassicVerb 2U 2U 2U 1U 2U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 1U 3U 1U 2U 1U 1U 1U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 1U 2U

D-11

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Effect Presets with Algorithms

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Chamber 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

TheComfyClub SpittyDrumRoom StallOne GreenRoom TablaRoom LargeRoom PlateyRoom Bathroom DrumRoom SmallDarkRoom RealRoom BrtEmptyRoom MedLargeRoom BiggerPercRoom SizzlyDrumRoom LiveChamber BrassChamber SaxChamber PlebeChamber JudgeJudyChamber BloomChamber ClassicalChamber InTheStudio MyGarage CoolDarkPlace

alg9DiffuseVerb alg7TQVerb alg7TQVerb alg7TQVerb alg12PanauralRoom alg7TQVerb alg14GrandPlate alg5ClassicVerb alg12PanauralRoom alg12PanauralRoom alg5ClassicVerb alg7TQVerb alg12PanauralRoom alg7TQVerb alg5ClassicVerb alg11OmniVerb alg1MiniVerb alg1MiniVerb alg1MiniVerb alg7TQVerb alg7TQVerb alg7TQVerb alg4ClassicPlace alg4ClassicPlace alg11OmniVerb

3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 2U 3U 3U 2U 3U 3U 3U 2U 3U 1U 1U 1U 3U 3U 3U 2U 2U 3U

Hall

50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

Small Hall Medium Hall Real Niceverb Opera House Mosque Room Grandiose Hall Elegant Hall Bright Hall Ballroom Spacious Hall

alg 5 Classic Verb alg 1 MiniVerb alg 5 Classic Verb alg 5 Classic Verb alg 7 TQ Verb alg 1 MiniVerb alg 1 MiniVerb alg 1 MiniVerb alg 1 MiniVerb alg 5 Classic Verb

2U 1U 2U 2U 3U 1U 1U 1U 1U 2U

D-12

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Effect Presets with Algorithms

60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 Plate 90 91 92

Classic Chapel Semisweet Hall Pipes Hall Reflective Hall Smoooth Hall Empty Stage Pad Space Bob'sDiffuseHall Abbey Piano Hall Short Hall The Long Haul Predelay Hall Sweeter Hall The Piano Hall Bloom Hall Recital Hall Generic Hall Burst Space Real Dense Hall Concert Hall Standing Ovation Flinty Hall HighSchool Gym My Dreamy 481!! Deep Hall Sweet Hall Soundbrd/rvb Long & Narrow Long PreDly Hall School Stairwell Real Plate Bright Plate Medm Warm Plate

alg 5 Classic Verb alg 5 Classic Verb alg 404 Chorus<>Reverb alg 5 Classic Verb alg 5 Classic Verb alg 7 TQ Verb alg 11 OmniVerb alg 9 Diffuse Verb alg 7 TQ Verb alg 13 Stereo Hall alg 7 TQ Verb alg 9 Diffuse Verb alg 7 TQ Verb alg 7 TQ Verb alg 9 Diffuse Verb alg 12 Panaural Room alg 12 Panaural Room alg 9 Diffuse Verb alg 7 TQ Verb alg 9 Diffuse Verb alg 11 OmniVerb alg 7 TQ Verb alg 7 TQ Verb alg 9 Diffuse Verb alg 9 Diffuse Verb alg 5 Classic Verb alg 11 OmniVerb alg 7 TQ Verb alg 11 OmniVerb alg 4 Classic Place alg 14 Grand Plate alg 14 Grand Plate alg 7 TQ Verb

2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 2U 3U 3U 3U 2U 3U 3U 3U
D-13

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Effect Presets with Algorithms

93 94 95 96 97 98 99 XL 100 101 102 103 104 Reverse 105 106 107 Gated w/Comprs 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 Unusual 120 121 122 123 124 125
D-14

Bloom Plate Clean Plate Plate Mail RealSmoothPlate Classic Plate Weighty Platey Huge Tight Plate Immense Mosque Dreamverb Splendid Palace Big Gym Huge Batcave Reverse Reverb 1 Reverse Reverb 2 Reverse Reverb 3 Gated Reverb Gate Plate Vocal Room Vocal Stage Reverb>Compress Reverb>Compress2 Drum Comprs>Rvb Rvrb Compression Snappy Drum Room Roomitizer Live To Tape L:SmlRm R:Hall Non-Linear 1 Non-Linear 2 Non-Linear 3 Exponent Booth Drum Latch 1 Drum Latch 2

alg 9 Diffuse Verb alg 9 Diffuse Verb alg 11 OmniVerb alg 9 Diffuse Verb alg 5 Classic Verb alg 5 Classic Verb alg 9 Diffuse Verb alg 7 TQ Verb alg 10 OmniPlace alg 5 Classic Verb alg 11 OmniVerb alg 12 Panaural Room alg 15 Finite Verb alg 15 Finite Verb alg 15 Finite Verb alg 3 Gated MiniVerb alg 3 Gated MiniVerb alg 53 Gate+Cmp[EQ]+Rvb alg 53 Gate+Cmp[EQ]+Rvb alg 51 Reverb<>Compress alg 51 Reverb<>Compress alg 51 Reverb<>Compress alg 50 Reverb+Compress alg 50 Reverb+Compress alg 50 Reverb+Compress alg 50 Reverb+Compress alg 2 Dual MiniVerb alg 10 OmniPlace alg 15 Finite Verb alg 6 TQ Place alg 10 OmniPlace alg 10 OmniPlace alg 10 OmniPlace

3U 3U 3U 3U 2U 2U 3U 3U 3U 2U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 2U 2U 4U 4U 3U 3U 3U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 3U

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Effect Presets with Algorithms

126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 Laserverb 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 Rvb w/Dly 144 145 146 147 148 149

Diffuse Gate Acid Trip Room Ringy Drum Plate Oil Tank Wobbly Plate Pitcher Hall DistantTVRoom Drum Neurezonate Growler LaserVerb Laserwaves Cheap LaserVerb Gated LaserVerb Rvrs LaserVerb LazerfazerEchoes Simple LaserVerb Crystallizer Spry Young Boy Gunshot Verb Slapverb Far Bloom Room + Delay New Hall w/Delay Delay Big Hall

alg 9 Diffuse Verb alg 10 OmniPlace alg 104 Gated LaserVerb alg 104 Gated LaserVerb alg 104 Gated LaserVerb alg 383 Pitcher+Miniverb alg 383 Pitcher+Miniverb alg 102 Mono LaserVerb alg 104 Gated LaserVerb alg 100 LaserVerb alg 100 LaserVerb alg 101 LaserVerb Lite alg 104 Gated LaserVerb alg 103 Revrse LaserVerb alg 102 Mono LaserVerb alg 102 Mono LaserVerb alg 100 LaserVerb alg 101 LaserVerb Lite alg 105 LasrDly<>Reverb alg 11 OmniVerb alg 9 Diffuse Verb alg 105 LasrDly<>Reverb alg 403 Chor+Dly+Reverb alg 403 Chor+Dly+Reverb

3U 3U 3U 3U 3U 2U 2U 1U 3U 3U 3U 2U 3U 4U 1U 1U 3U 2U 2U 3U 3U 2U 2U 2U

Delays
DELAY 150 151 152 153 154 155 BasicDelay1/8 BasicDly250ms SimpleSlap60ms TightSlapbk30ms MedSlapback76ms LongishSlap95ms alg1504TapDelayBPM alg190MovingDelay alg190MovingDelay alg190MovingDelay alg190MovingDelay alg1514TapDelay 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U

D-15

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Effect Presets with Algorithms

156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192

WideSlapbk76ms TiteSlapAmb50ms 33msAmbience 17msAmbience StereoDelayms StereoFlamDelay CheapTapeEcho BetterTapeEcho StereoTapeSlap DubDelayms 4TapDelayBPM 4TapDlyPanms SemiCircle4Tap 8TapDelayBPM Multitapsms DiffuseSlaps OffbeatFlamDelay SloppyEchoes PadPsychosis 500msBehindSrce DubSkanqueDly ElectronicaSlap Spectral4Tap AstralTaps SpectraShapeTaps FanfareInGmaj EckoPlecksBPM EckoPlecksms Degenerator NanobotFeedback Takesawhile... WaitforUFO NewsUpdate TimbreTaps LaserDelay>Rvb Furbelows Festoons

alg191DualMovDelay alg191DualMovDelay alg191DualMovDelay alg191DualMovDelay alg1514TapDelay alg191DualMovDelay alg154Spectral4Tap alg171DegenRegen alg171DegenRegen alg190MovingDelay alg1504TapDelayBPM alg1514TapDelay alg1514TapDelay alg1528TapDelayBPM alg156ComplexEcho alg156ComplexEcho alg1504TapDelayBPM alg156ComplexEcho alg191DualMovDelay alg156ComplexEcho alg154Spectral4Tap alg156ComplexEcho alg154Spectral4Tap alg154Spectral4Tap alg155Spectral6Tap alg155Spectral6Tap alg170DegenRegenBPM alg171DegenRegen alg170DegenRegenBPM alg170DegenRegenBPM alg170DegenRegenBPM alg170DegenRegenBPM alg172SwitchLoops alg105LasrDly<>Reverb alg105LasrDly<>Reverb alg9DiffuseVerb alg9DiffuseVerb

1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 2U 4U 4U 1U 1U 1U 1U 2U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 2U 1U 2U 2U 3U 3U 4U 4U 4U 4U 4U 4U 2U 2U 2U 3U 3U

D-16

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Effect Presets with Algorithms

193 194 195 196 197 198 199

DuckedDelay Drum+BassZapper 3BandDlyDrums=! WarpedEchoes Weenvox L:FlangeR:Delay 2Dlys1Chr1Flng

alg174GatedDelay alg174GatedDelay alg1733BandDelay alg191DualMovDelay alg190MovingDelay alg191DualMovDelay alg192DualMvDly+MvDly

2U 2U 2U 1U 1U 1U 2U

Chorus
CHORUS 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 BasicChorus SmoothChorus Chorusier OrdinaryChorus SlowSpinChorus ChorusMorris EverydayChorus ThickChorus SoftChorus RockChorus SmStereoChorus LgStereoChorus FullChorus DenseGtrChorus StandrdGtrChor BassChorus StereoChorus ChorusFastback WideChorus NickelChorus RichNoodle PinchChorusDelay StChorus+Delay StChor+3vs2Delay CDRforLeadGtr alg202DualChorus1 alg202DualChorus1 alg202DualChorus1 alg202DualChorus1 alg202DualChorus1 alg202DualChorus1 alg202DualChorus1 alg202DualChorus2 alg202DualChorus2 alg202DualChorus2 alg200Chorus1 alg201Chorus2 alg402Chorus<>4Tap alg201Chorus2 alg406StChorus+Delay alg202DualChorus1 alg202DualChorus2 alg400Chorus+Delay alg202DualChorus2 alg387WackedPitchLFO alg190MovingDelay alg406StChorus+Delay alg406StChorus+Delay alg406StChorus+Delay alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 2U 2U 2U 1U 2U 2U 2U 1U 1U 2U 1U 2U 3U 1U 1U 1U 1U 2U

D-17

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Effect Presets with Algorithms

Flange
FLANGE 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 BigSlowFlange SqueezeFlange SweetFlange ThroatyFlange PseudoAnaGtrFlng FlangerDouble WetlipFlange SimplyFlange AnalogFlanger SoftEdgeFlange NedFlangers WispyFlange CrystalFlange NarrowResFlange TightSlapFlange FlangedTaps StFlange+Delay StFlng+3vs2Delay SingingFlanger DampedEchoFlange StereoFlanger GulpFlange SplatFlange SpreadFlange CacophonousFlng alg225Flanger1 alg225Flanger1 alg225Flanger1 alg225Flanger1 alg225Flanger1 alg225Flanger1 alg225Flanger1 alg225Flanger2 alg225Flanger2 alg225Flanger2 alg225Flanger1 alg225Flanger1 alg456StFlange+Delay alg452Flange<>4Tap alg450Flange+Delay alg455Flange<>LasrDly alg456StFlange+Delay alg456StFlange+Delay alg456StFlange+Delay alg456StFlange+Delay alg225Flanger2 alg225Flanger1 alg225Flanger1 alg225Flanger1 alg225Flanger1 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 2U 2U 2U 1U 1U 1U 2U 1U 2U 1U 1U 1U 1U 2U 1U 1U 1U 1U

Phaser
PHASER 250 251 252 253 254 255 SlowDeepPhaser Circles SaucepanPhaser ThunderPhaser FastPhaser VibratoPhaser alg251LFOPhaserTwin alg250LFOPhaser alg253SingleLFOPhaser alg254VibratoPhaser alg251LFOPhaserTwin alg254VibratoPhaser 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U

D-18

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Effect Presets with Algorithms

256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269

Fast&SlowPhaser Wawawawawawawawa SlowSwishPhase SlipperySlope StaticPhaser1 StaticPhaser2 StaticPhaser3 StaticPhaser4 StaticPhaser5 SlowRiser BarberPoleNotch BarberPolePeak AllTheWayDown WestwardWaves

alg250LFOPhaser alg253SingleLFOPhaser alg253SingleLFOPhaser alg385FrequencyOffset alg255ManualPhaser alg255ManualPhaser alg255ManualPhaser alg255ManualPhaser alg257AllpassPhaser4 alg258BarberpoleComb alg258BarberpoleComb alg258BarberpoleComb alg258BarberpoleComb alg385FrequencyOffset

1U 1U 1U 2U 1U 1U 1U 1U 4U 4U 4U 4U 4U 2U

Trem / Panner / Spatial

TREM/ PANNER/ SPATIAL 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 TremoloBPM FastTremoloBPM TremoloinHz FastPulseTremolo SimplePanner DualPanner Widespread WidenerMn>St DynamStereoizer alg270TremoloBPM alg270TremoloBPM alg271Tremolo alg270TremoloBPM alg275AutoPanner alg276DualAutoPanner alg280StereoImage alg281Mono>Stereo alg282DynamicStereoize 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 2U 1U 1U 2U

Rotary
ROTARY 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 CleanRotorsfast CleanRotorsslow CleanRotorsfC1 CleanRotorsfV1 CleanRotorsfHi CleanRotorssHi SlightDstRotorf SlightDstRotors alg290VibChor+Rotor2 alg290VibChor+Rotor2 alg290VibChor+Rotor2 alg290VibChor+Rotor2 alg290VibChor+Rotor2 alg290VibChor+Rotor2 alg291Distort+Rotary alg291Distort+Rotary 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U

D-19

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Effect Presets with Algorithms

288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299

DirtyRotorsfast DirtyRotorsslow MoreDistRotorf MoreDistRotors HeavyDistRotorf HeavyDistRotors ResRotor1fast ResRotor1slow FullRotors4fast FullRotors4slow MegaVCRotors8f MegaVCRotors8s

alg292VC+Dist+HiLoRotr alg292VC+Dist+HiLoRotr alg293VC+Dist+1Rotor2 alg293VC+Dist+1Rotor2 alg294VC+Dist+HiLoRot2 alg294VC+Dist+HiLoRot2 alg295Rotor1 alg295Rotor1 alg296VC+Dist+Rotor4 alg296VC+Dist+Rotor4 alg298BigKB3Effect alg298BigKB3Effect

2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 1U 1U 4U 4U 8U 8U

Distortion
DIST 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 ClassicGtrDist CrunchGuitar SaturatedGtrDist Mean70sFunkGtr BlownSpeaker SynthDistortion Superphasulate DistCabEPiano Distortion+EQ BurntTransistor SubtleDistortion Alittledirty SlightOverload ODriveGtrLdDlCh KrazyGtrComper MildGtrOD+Dly+Fl LeadGtrDlyFlng DrumShaper SubtleDrumShape SuperShaper 3BandShaper New3BandShaper alg310Gate+TubeAmp alg310Gate+TubeAmp alg310Gate+TubeAmp alg310Gate+TubeAmp alg390Chaos! alg303PolyDistort+EQ alg170DegenRegenBPM alg301MonoDistort+Cab alg302MonoDistort+EQ alg304StereoDistort+EQ alg300MonoDistortion alg305SubtleDistort alg305SubtleDistort alg317TubeAmp<>MD>Chor alg317TubeAmp<>MD>Chor alg320PolyAmp<>MD>Flan alg318TubeAmp<>MD>Flan alg306SuperShaper alg3073BandShaper alg306SuperShaper alg3073BandShaper alg3073BandShaper 3U 3U 3U 3U 2U 2U 4U 2U 2U 3U 1U 1U 1U 3U 3U 3U 3U 1U 2U 1U 2U 2U

D-20

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Effect Presets with Algorithms

322 323 329

Shaper>Flange Shaper>Reverb Aliaser

alg321Flange<>Shaper alg322Shaper<>Reverb alg308Quantize+Alias

2U 2U 1U

Dynamics
DYNAMICS 330 331 332 333 334 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 HKCompressor3:1 HKCompressor5:1 SKFBComprs6:1 SKCompressor9:1 SKCompressr12:1 Compressw/SCEQ Compress/Expand Comprs/Expnd+EQ Expander SimpleGate Gatew/SCEQ 3BandCompressor 3BandCompress2 MidCompressor OddHarmSuppress 60HzBuzzKill DualSKCompress DualComprsSCEQ Dual3BandComprs alg330HardKneeCompress alg330HardKneeCompress alg331SoftKneeCompress alg331SoftKneeCompress alg331SoftKneeCompress alg332Compressw/SCEQ alg341Compress/Expand alg342Comp/Exp+EQ alg340Expander alg343Gate alg344Gatew/SCEQ alg3363BandCompress alg3363BandCompress alg335BandCompress alg374HarmonicSuppress alg374HarmonicSuppress alg347DualSKCompress alg348DualComprsSCEQ alg349Dual3BandComp 1U 1U 1U 1U 1U 2U 2U 3U 1U 1U 2U 4U 4U 3U 2U 2U 2U 3U 8U

EQ / Filters
EQ/ FILTERS 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 AMRadio UShapedEQ 5BandEQFlat GraphicEQFlat DualGraphicEQ Dual5BandEQ BasicEnvFilter alg3503BandEQ alg3503BandEQ alg3515BandEQ alg352GraphicEQ alg353DualGraphicEQ alg354Dual5BandEQ alg360EnvFollowFilt 1U 1U 3U 3U 3U 3U 2U

D-21

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Effect Presets with Algorithms

357 358 359 360 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392

PhunkEnvFilter SynthEnvFilter BassEnvFilter EPnoEnvFilter LFOSweepFilter DoubleRiseFilter CircleBandsweep TripFilter ResonantFilter DualResFilter 2BandEnhancer 3BandEnhancer ExtreemEnhancer HFStimulator RingModulator PitcherA PitcherB PolyPtVoxChanger HollowPolyPitchr Pitcher+Chorus Pitcher+Flange Pitcher+Chor+Dly Pitcher+Flng+Dly RingLinger Waterford HipHopAura Woodenize Marimbafication FrequencyOffset DrumLoosener DrumTightener VoxHonker EQMorpherahoo EQMorphereeaa EQMorpherawer

alg360EnvFollowFilt alg360EnvFollowFilt alg360EnvFollowFilt alg360EnvFollowFilt alg362LFOSweepFilter alg362LFOSweepFilter alg362LFOSweepFilter alg362LFOSweepFilter alg363ResonantFilter alg364DualResFilter alg3702BandEnhancer alg3713BandEnhancer alg3713BandEnhancer alg372HFStimulate1 alg380RingModulator alg381Pitcher alg381Pitcher alg382PolyPitcher alg382PolyPitcher alg411MonoPitcher+Chor alg461MonoPitcher+Flan alg409Pitcher+Chor+Dly alg459Pitcher+Flan+Dly alg390Chaos! alg103RevrseLaserVerb alg256AllpassPhaser3 alg256AllpassPhaser3 alg256AllpassPhaser3 alg385FrequencyOffset alg385FrequencyOffset alg385FrequencyOffset alg386MutualFreqOffset alg365EQMorpher alg365EQMorpher alg365EQMorpher

2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 1U 1U 1U 2U 2U 1U 1U 1U 1U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 4U 3U 3U 3U 2U 2U 2U 2U 4U 4U 4U

D-22

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Effect Presets with Algorithms

395 396 397 398 399

Contact DrumFrightener MadHatter Fallout Ascension

alg387WackedPitchLFO alg387WackedPitchLFO alg387WackedPitchLFO alg387WackedPitchLFO alg387WackedPitchLFO

3U 3U 3U 3U 3U

Chorus / Combi
CHORUS COMBI 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 BasicChorusDelay ChorusPanDelay Chorus&Echo CDRLead CDRLead2 ChorusDelay2 Doubler&Echo ChorusBooth ChorusSmallRoom ChorusMedChamber ChorusMiniHall ChorusHiCeiling ChorBigBrtPlate CathedralChorus FlamDlyBckgrnd CDHallHalo CrackedPorcelain RichDelay FastChorusDouble MultiTapChorus ChorusedTaps MultiEchoChorus DeepChorDlyHall ClassicEPChorRm ChorusSlowHall SoftChorusHall ChorusAir PsiloChorusHall alg400Chorus+Delay alg400Chorus+Delay alg400Chorus+Delay alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg400Chorus+Delay alg400Chorus+Delay alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg401Chorus+4Tap alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg400Chorus+Delay alg401Chorus+4Tap alg402Chorus<>4Tap alg405Chorus<>LasrDly alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb 1U 1U 1U 2U 2U 1U 1U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 1U 2U 1U 1U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U

D-23

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Effect Presets with Algorithms

428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449

SpeeChorusDeep ChorusRoom ChorusSmallhall ChorusMedHall ChorusBigHall ChorusEchoverb ChorusBassRoom NewChorusHall FloydHall IntoTheAbyss BroadRevSlapback CarlsbadCavern Chr>GtrDst>Chr ThatsNoMoon!! LaserAmalgam Cutitout!!CDR ChorDelayBooth ChorTinRoom BoilerPlate O.T.T.Pad TheChorusCloset CD

alg400Chorus+Delay alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg402Chorus<>4Tap alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg404Chorus<>Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg317TubeAmp<>MD>Chor alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg405Chorus<>LasrDly alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg402Chorus<>4Tap

1U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 3U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U

Flange / Combi
FLANGE COMBI 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 Flange+Delay ThroatyFlangeDly SlapbackFlange FlangeBooth FlangeVerbClav FlangeAmbSmack FlangeDly3D FlDlLargeHall FlangedEdge Flange+4Tap FlangeDelayHall SloFlangeDlyRoom alg450Flange+Delay alg450Flange+Delay alg450Flange+Delay alg454 alg454 alg454 alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg321Flange<>Shaper alg451Flange+4Tap alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb 1U 1U 1U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 1U 2U 2U

D-24

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Effect Presets with Algorithms

462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 494 495

FlangeHall FlangeDlyBigHall FlangeTheatre FlangeTapSynth FlangeRoom FlangeEcho Flange4Tap FlangeHall2 FlangeDlyHall FlangeDelay MechaGodzilla IndustroFlange PanningFDRoom Drum&BassFlgDly Laserflange PewterFlangeVrb WeirdFlangePlate FDHall SyntheticRmFlg SpaceFlanger LazertagFlange Flange>Pitcher Flange>Shaper PitchSpinner FDLeadMadness BriteRippleverb RotaryClub FlangeyHall Flg>GtrDst>Chr MyGtrAteYoMomma GlacialCanyon UltimaThulePad Dr.Who

alg454 alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg454 alg452Flange<>4Tap alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg452Flange<>4Tap alg452Flange<>4Tap alg454 alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg450Flange+Delay alg451Flange+4Tap alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg451Flange+4Tap alg455Flange<>LasrDly alg454 alg454 alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg452Flange<>4Tap alg455Flange<>LasrDly alg384Flange<>Pitcher alg321Flange<>Shaper alg384Flange<>Pitcher alg450Flange+Delay alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg453Flan+Dly+Reverb alg319PolyAmp<>MD>Chor alg318TubeAmp<>MD>Flan alg456StFlange+Delay alg403Chor+Dly+Reverb alg225Flanger1

2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 1U 1U 2U 2U 1U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 2U 1U 2U 2U 2U 3U 3U 1U 2U 1U

799

PassThrough

D-25

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Effect Chains

Effect Chains
#
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Chain
LittleBooth Soundboard SmallDarkRoom SaxChamber SmallHall MediumHall GreenRoom OperaHouse RealNiceVerb EmptyStage MedDrumRoom AbbeyPianoHall PredelayHall SweeterHall ConcertHall SymphonyHall CathedralChorus DeepChorsDlyHall OmniStage ClassicPlate MediumWarmPlate RealPlate SmoothPlate GatedPlate BasicDelay1/8 4TapDelayBPM EchoPlecksBPM TimberedTaps DubDelay SmStereoChorus Chorusier

#
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62

Chain
StereoChorus DenseChorus SoftFlange WetlipFlange FlangedTaps SlowDeepPhaser Fast&SlowPhaser PhaserEGT ThinPhaseSweep TremoloBPM SimplePanner ThinPhaseSweep Lesliestart SubtleDistortion EPianoDistortzn Distortion+EQ RaysEP ScoopedDistort BurningTubes! 3BandDrumComp SnareCompressor SnareCmpw/Rvb KickCompressor HardKneeComprs BassCompMutrn PnoEnhancement LA2AforStrings ResonantFilter AuxEchoplex BandsweepFilter HiFrequencyStim

#
63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 129 147 176 193 203 204 206 209 210 211 212 213

Chain
RingModulation FrequencyOffset LazerTagFlange FalloutPitchLFO ReverseReverb ReverseReverb2 OilTankReverb LaserReverb GatedLaserverb ReverseLaserverb EnvelopeFollowr EnvelopeFilter2 TripFilter Stereoizer BarberpolePhzr LaserDlyReverb Degenerator BasicDelay1/8 ArpDelayLoop BasicDelay1/8 snarcmp1 LeadEGT6 LitePad2 PhaseDly1 ThinphaseSweep hhpitchr1 Snarcmp1 SymphonyHall1 SymphonyHall2 SymphonyHall3 JazzStage

D-26

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Effect Chains

#
214 215 216 217 218 219 220 223 224 226 229 230 233 240 255 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274

Chain
LiveRoom StringChamber FifeStage LiveRecitalHall AbbeyBrasHall2 SmoothLongHall kickcmp3 kickcmp4 snarcmp4 kickcmp5 BrightHatRoom BrightFlange snarshaper6 Reverb2 Flange+Delay EmptyStageII AbbeyPianoHall2 OperaHouseII VintageStrings2 ClassicPlateII RecitalHallII SmallHallII RealNiceverbII MediumHallII SmallDarkRoom2 PnoRvbII ShortPnoRvbIII PnoEnhancRvb3 RevComp5 ClunkerII StCHDlyII OmniStage OmniStage

#
275 276 277 278 279 300 301 302 303 304 310 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 333 334 335

Chain
gshotvrb deeppart1 DblSloFlangeCmp alphacentauri1 TimberedTaps2 GospelDistLeslie GimmeSomeLeslie DFOrganRoom GimmeSomeLesl GimmeSomeLesl2 AcceleratorLes2 ExpressLeslie Leslie122a MitchsLeslie MelvinsLeslie GregsLeslie RoomyLeslie122 SoftLeslie122 CrunchLeslie147 ThimmerLeslie JimmysLeslie2 OrganTaps LeslieCleanAS Leslie122cr JimmysBrakeLes GregsLatcher NiceLeslie CleanLeslie WarmLeslie NewLord1 CrunchLeslie122 HotLeslie122b BostonLeslie1

#
337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 375 376 377 378 379 380 385 386 387 388 389 391 392

Chain
HotLeslie122e HotLeslie122f SoulLeslie1224 LeslieB122 JoeyLeslie122 HotLeslie122g HotLeslie122h TapChorusLeslie SlowPhasedLeslie Nonkb3A WarmLeslie12 WarmDistlLes1dw BrighDistlLes1 DistleratorLes6 BrightDistlLes DistlLesdw41 ProgLeslie1 LightDistlLes2 DWLeslie13 LeeMichaels1 DWLeslie12 DistlLes5 SlyLeslie LightDistlLes FisherLeslie SoulLeslie1227 NewLord1 SystemTempTap WaterDistSynth FlangeVoiceHall BrightFlangeHall FlngRecitalHall MedDrumRoom

D-27

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Effect Chains

#
395 396 397 399 400 401 403 411 412 414 415 416 420 422 424 425 426 427 428 430 431 434 435 436 439 440 441 442 445 446 447 448 449

Chain
CathedralVx BurningTubes5 PunchBassAmp RevverLeslie BradleysBarn1 BradleysBarn2 LA2AforStrings ChrsDly RealDrmComp RealDrmComp2 TiteDrmComp MarimbaHall AGTReverb WarmCruncher FierceLead CompTrem 12StWarmCrunch PhaserEGT SnareComp1 KickComp1 60sBigDrumRoom AGTEnhCD CDRecitalHall NylonEnhCD ChrsDblRoom EnhcBassAmp FlangVoiceHall2 VocalswFXnMic Harpolicious ChrsDly EGTHall BurningTubes ChorusAGT

#
450 451 452 454 455 456 457 458 459 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 472 473 474 477 478 479 480 482 483 484 485 486 487 488

Chain
SynthLead SynthBassAmp MosqueySwirl PadFX2 PadFX1 Chr&Echo VocalswFX DrySynthCDR WetSynthCDR VibesRoom PercussionRoom CagesRoom CmpRecitalHall StrRecitalHall1 StrRecitalHall2 RecitalHall MyJaco UprightBassRoom LevinChorus BrightRoom MedDarkRoom BasicReverb MediumHall4U KickComp2 ColdPliano2 FDRPercRoom NylonAgtVerb 3BandDrumComp KikComp4:1 ToxicStrings 3BandDrumComp2 ScoopdDistEGT2 NotScoopdDist

#
489 491 492 493 496 500 501 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 644 645 646 648 651 652 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665

Chain
HeavyBuckers ProBassComp NYCTripStrings ProBassComp2 DirtLordAmp SetupAuxVerb SetupAuxDDL EarlyReflection PadDepthPt1 GunshotVerb AlphaCentauri1 BasicCDR SynthorcBPM BPMFlangeDly DblSloFlangeCmp StevieTremEP1 BeaterEP1 Jamerson1 SlyBASSComp1 Trampler1 HipHopDrms1 HipHopDrms2 TOPDrumReverb1 HOPDrumReverb1 HopKickcmp1 NoQuarter TechnoHHDly1/8 HOPDrumReverb3 HopKickcmp7 Roomverb1 Kickcmp6 Snarcmp11 Reverb3

D-28

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Effect Chains

#
666 667 668 670 671 675 676 680 681 682 685 687 690 691 692 694 695 696 697 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 711 713 714 715 716

Chain
SmallDarkRoom Snarcmp12 Kickcmp13 BeastieDrums Clunker13 Funksnare9 Funksnare8 EPDistPhase1 RayEP1 DeepFuzz1 DeepFuzz31 ReverseVerb1 Acidflute Blueman1 CompDelay12 SmallDarkRoom3 PlainComp15 RevComp4 EPRotoAmp12 HiMutron1 SaxChamber21 BigDarkRoomDW NewGtr31 PnoRvb14 SmallHall11 PnoRvb21 EmptyStage11 Mutron2 PlainComp12 CDRSynth SynthFlangenDely QuantzEnhanceSyn BladerunnrRvb

#
717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 726 727 729 730 732 733 734 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 750 754 756 757 758 759 760 762

Chain
DeepFuzzBass1 EberBass SynFatener&Ech2 CP80Enhanc1 FishersHarmMic AbbeyPianoHall2 MediumHall2 FagenPhaser SmallWurly BasicWurlyEP CheeseHorns BasicChorusDly2 WallflowerCh ChPanDlyComp CheeseChorus CompDelay SynFatener&Ech3 BIGCompDelay UprightPiano SitarCmpRvb ACBass3 VoxKB3 Blackfriday Blackestfriday Flange4 GoodLeslie1 GoodLeslie4 GoodLeslie6 WhitrShadeLeslie Inagadadavita GoodLordLeslie SmallHallComp1 GoodLeslie5

#
764 765 766 768 771 772 773 775 780 781 782 784 785 786 787 788 790 792 793 794 795 797 798 799 801 802 803 804 805 806 807 808 809

Chain
ShortPnoRvb31 StCHDly Synphase1 StCHDly WalrusEP EPChr16 Siberia DeepFuzz5 FlangeEcho2 ARPMosqueRoom Chr&Echo MutronClav2 SiberiaII EnhanceComp1 Shaper>Reverb2 ClavPhase1 SynlaserFlange1 RockyRaccoon Squire Flange4 DeepFuzzClav ClavComp1 SmallClav SynthShimmer PhaseDly1 Shredlead1 ThinphaseSweep EnvComp41 MoogBASSComp11 SynFatener&Ech4 Shredlead15 PlainComp21 Garth

D-29

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Effect Chains

#
810 811 812 813 814 815 816 817 818 819 820 821 822 823 824 825 827 828 829 830 831 832 833 834 835 836 838 839 840 841 842 843 844

Chain
BassFleaCompMu Chr&Echo2 BasicCDR2 ShaperFuzzLead2 AMBigBand Clunker20 PadFX3 SynFatener&Ech5 MarleyClav1 FlangeEcho4 DeepFuzzClav3 GetBack1 DeepFuzzClav5 ChrsDly4 LeslieBasic MoogBASSComp5 EPChr1Dyno Synphase17 LeslieComp1 PhaseDly104 GoodLeslie52 CPChrRvb1 DistLeslieBasic CompKit111 CarlosSyn MaroonSynbass FloydEP1 PnoCmpSndBoard1 SuperTrmpPhase Wurly1 ShortPlate4EPs ShortPlate4EPs2 AuxDarkRoom2

#
845 846 847 848 849 850 851 853 854 855 856 857 858 859 860 862 864 865 866 867 868 869 871 872 873 874 875 876 877 878 879 880 881 Elton1

Chain
AuxChamber BowiePno1 BluesPnoCmpRvb1 NewGtr31 Soundboard3 OmniStage MedPlateJazFlute MistyMntnEP2 PnoEnhanc22 ClavPhase1 MedRoom10 EPChr11 HardRhds1 PnoEnhancement SmallHornChamber Clunker50 PnoEQCmp3 Comp4 3DogEP1 CompDelay PnoEnhanc22 EPChr11 OldChamber ChefAid1 ZepFuzz1 BernieClav ClavRotoAmp DarkNiceverb BasicRayEP3 LatinHornCmp BasicRayEP2 RaffasDX7

#
882 883 884 885 886 887 888 889 890 891 892 893 894 896 898 899 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 910 911 912 913 914 915 916 EPChr6

Chain
PnoEnhanc3 SynEnhancement CompKik11 VintChamber SmallWurly2 DeepFuzzPnt1 Comp70 FooldAgainVox CompKik111 VintageHorns3 LeslieGospl EPChr60 DeepFuzz51 Shredlead3 Synphase1 Synphase2 SynthTrem2 DWAuxRvb1 SmallDarkRoom2 SaxChamber2 SmallHall2 MediumHall2 RealNiceverb OperaHouse2 MosqueRoom2 BrightHall Echplex1 AbbeyPianoHall RecitalHall2 Echplex2 MedmWarmPlate2 EQVelMorph

D-30

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Effect Chains

#
917 918 919 920 921 922 923 924 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942 943 944 945 946 947 948 949 Farfisa1

Chain
AuxEchplex

#
950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 965 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 982

Chain
Snarcmp112 Snarcmp113 EnvKickcmp1 Kickcmp602 Snarcmp112 HipHopDrms101 PnoCmpSndBoard10 Epicsnare1 JumpSynth Funksnare88 Kickcmp441 Upright3 HopKickcmp701 LeslieComp2 Kickcmp301 PnoRvb1 PnoRvb2 HipHopDrms201 Breakdrums1 Blackfriday2 CompDelay101 SaxChamber2 Clunker501 HornPlate1 VintageHorns BrightFlange2 ThinphaseSweep2 SmallComp102 EPPhase1 NonKB3LesliePdl2 FlangeComp3 MutronClav201 SynChorusDly202

#
983 984 985 986 987 988 989 990 991 992 993 994 995 996 997 998 999 1000 2000 2001

Chain
RayEP1 EnhanceComp121 ClunkerIIa PadDepthPt1 AuxChorusHall TechnoSyn1 Synphase102 CompDelay CompMeltrn ARP Tripletdelay Bigverb Syncpulse compbass2 CompDelay3 Comp501 RMIPhase1 JoeyLeslie122 GMReverb GMChorus

GoodLeslie33 ZepLeslie Snarcmp801 kickcmp401 DeepFuzz6 SynEnv4 SmallComp9 KickComp201 GoodLeslie9 FalgorGtr KickComp701 GoodLeslie34 Syncblip CompDelay3 CheeseHorns2 SynthCDR20 VintageHorns2 ChorusPanDelay Snarcmp101 Filter1 Syncpulsedw Kickcmp501 Snarshaper601 ProBassComp3 SynEnv5 SnareComp101 BostonLeslie2 Kickcmp104 LeslieMShoals Snarcmp121 WhitrShadeLesli3

D-31

PC3K Objects (V 1.31) Effect Chains

D-32

PC3K Legacy File Conversion Object Types and Conversion Details

Appendix E PC3K Legacy File Conversion

ThePC3KcanloadobjectsfromolderKurzweilKseriesproducts,aswellasobjectsfromthe PC3.LoadedobjectsareconvertedtoobjecttypesnativetothePC3K(seebelowforobjecttypes thatcanbeconverted.)Someobjectparameterscannotbeconvertedandmustbeadjustedby theuserafterconversion(seeobjecttypesbelowfordetails.)ObjectsthatusetheKseriesROM soundsetcanbeconvertedafterinstallationoftheoptionalK2661ROMcompatibilityfile (availableasafreedownloadfromwww.kurzweil.com.) Onlylegacyobjectsendingwiththefileextension.K26,.K25,.KRZor.PC3canbeloadedand converted.

Object Types and Conversion Details

Soundblock (Sample Objects)
AllKseriessampleobjectscanbeloaded.ThePC3Kisunabletoconvertthesampleskipping parameter(SmpSkp,)sosamplesconvertedforuseinthePC3Kcanonlybetransposedupward byoneoctave.

Keymap Objects
AllKseriesKeymapobjectscanbeloaded,allparameterswillbeusedorconvertedtoPC3K specificparameters.

Program Objects
MostKseriesProgramobjectscanbeloaded,butFXarenotconvertedandmustbesetbythe user.AreverbeffectissetbydefaultforconvertedPrograms.SomeDSPALGSandDSPobjects (somefilters,oscillators,etc.)cannotbeconverted,sotheusermayhavetoadjustsome ProgramlayerstonewALGsorDSPobjects.ProgramobjectsthatusetheKseriesROM soundsetcanbeconvertedafterinstallationoftheoptionalK2661ROMcompatibilityfile (availableasafreedownloadfromwww.kurzweil.com.)AllPC3Programobjectscanbeloaded. KB3programscreatedwithaK2500orK2600cannotbeloadedtothePC3K,howeverthePC3K containsavarietyofKB3programswhichcaneasilybemodifiedandedited.Also,TripleMode programscreatedwiththeK26seriescannotbeloadedtothePC3K,howeverPC3Kprograms canuseCascadeMode.CascadeModeallowsaprogramsignaltoberoutedthroughupto32 layersofDSPalgorithms(seeAltInputforAlgorithms(CascadeMode)onpage 617fordetails.)

Setup Objects
AllKseriesSetupobjectscanbeloaded,butFXarenotconvertedandtheProgrameffectsare usedbydefault.Also,anycontrollersettingsforafourthswitchpedalwillnotbeconverted (becausethePC3Konlyhasthreeswitchpedals.)AllPC3Setupobjectscanbeloaded.

E-1

PC3K Legacy File Conversion Object Types and Conversion Details

E-2

Index
Numerics
50%Weight922

Attackparameter(ASR)640 AttackPortamentoparameter(Common)635 AttackTimeandLevelparameters(AmpEnv)642 Audiocables22 AutoPan922

B
BankButtons32 BankSelect MIDIReceivepage109 Banks32 Basicediting51 BasicMIDIchannel106 BassFreq913 BassGain913 Battery14 Bipole924 BootLoader14 BootloaderB1 Bottomlineofdisplay36 Bounce SongModeTRACKPage1225 Brake921 Breath24 breath15 Brightness25 Build911 Buildingakeymap147 Buttons Panic610 Bypasseffects57

A
A/Dry>Bparameter911 A>Bcfgparameter911 About1116 Addinglayers651 additionalsounds15 Adjustparameter(EnvCtl)645 Adjustingsamplevolumes144 AIF AutomaticPreviewinaProgram1117 AlgorithmsD11 Editing618 AllControllersOff106 AllNotesOff106 AlphaWheel27,39 Alphabeticentry39,53 Alphanumericpad39 AltInputforAlgorithms617 AlternativeAttackparameter(Keymap)Parameters621 AlternativeStart SampleEditor1412 AMPENVpage(ProgramEditor)641 Amplitudeenvelope Decaysegment643 Natural641 User641 Amplitudeenvelopeparameters642643 Amplitudeenvelopes641 Appendsoftbutton139 ArpActive743 Arpbutton35 Arpeggiator Active743 Beats743 Duration744 Glissando751 Latch750 Limit747 LimitOption747 LowKey(LoKey)andHighKey(HiKey)751 Order744 Shift747 shiftingnotes747 Velocity744 ASCIIcharacters53 ASRpage(ProgramEditor)639 ASRparameters639640 Assignsample146 Assigningsamplestokeymaps143 AtkRate918 AtkTime914 Attack915

C
CabBypass920 CabPreset919 CabinetHP920 CabinetLP920 Cabinetsimulations919 Cancelsoftbutton1310 Carrier ringmodulation923 CascadeMode13,61,617 Categorybuttons34 CenterGain923 CentrAtten922 ChainInfo Export1312 Chains effectD26 Chan/Layerbuttons37,57 Change SongModeTRACKPage1230 Changingintonationkey118 Channel/Program(CH/PROG)Page76 SetupMode72 Channelsonandoff1013 Characters53 Chorus916 Clickingduringportamento634

Index-i

Clock1115 setting27 Source1110 COMMONPage SongMode1219 Commonparameters634661 Compare57 Compatibility KSeriesObjectsE1 ComplexEcho912 Compressors914 Configuringcontrolsources69 ConnectingMIDI23 continuouspedals15 Contour918 Contrast25 ControlSetup69 SetupEditor72 Controlsources Configuring69 FUNs640 Keytracking615 Source1andSource2616 Velocitytracking616 Controllers entryvaluesinProgramMode610 ControllingLFOrate638 conventionsforeditingobjects51 Copy SongEditorTRACKPage1224 Copyinglayers651 Creatinglayers651 CrossCoupleparameter910 Crossover920 Crossover1915,924 Crossover2915 Cursorbuttons37 Curve920

Dialogs Save53 diamondicon54 DiffAmt913 DiffGain923 DiffScale911 DiffBassF923 DiffBassG923 Digitalaudiooutput23 DigitalOutputMode119 DigitalOutputVolume119 Directories133 DiskDriveInformation133 Diskformatrequirements131 DiskMode56,131 Diskmode43 Display36 DistDrive919 Distortion919 DlyCoarse917 DlyFine917 DlyCrs917 DlyFi917 Doublebuttonpresses310 DRAWBRpage(ProgramEditor)662 Drive914 DrumRemap632,112 DrumTracks Songmode1220 DryBal912 Ducking916 DuplicateLayersoftbutton651 Duplicatinglayers651 DynamicVAST13,61,618 DynamRange917

E
EarRefLvl911 EasyAudition27 EDITbutton38 Editbutton57 Editcompare57 EditSong COMMONPage1219 EVENTPage1231 Editing51 EditingAlgorithms618 editingconventions51 EditingKB3programs660 EditingSamples149 EditingVASTprograms611 EditProgExitpage53 EditProgSavepage53 EffectAlgorithmsD11 EffectChainsD26 EffectPresetsD11 Effectbox Parameters910 Effects Parameters910

D
Dataentry39 DCOffset917 Decaysegment643 DecayTimeandLevelparameters(AmpEnv)643 DegenRegendelay913 Delay924 Delayparameter(ASR)639 Delays912 DelayScale912 Delete onObjectUtilitiespage1113 DeleteLayersoftbutton651 Deletesoftbutton652 Deletinglayers651 Deletingobjects56 Deletingprograms652 Density911 Depth922 Destination MIDITransmitPage102

Index-ii

Effectsbutton57 Effectsbypass57 Effectsmode43 EffectsParameters910 Electricalgrounding22 EnableMIDIchannels1013 Enableparameter(Layer)624 EnableSenseparameter(Layer)624 Enhancers914 EnvRate919 EnvTime916 ENV2andENV3pages(ProgramEditor)643 ENVCTLpage(ProgramEditor)644 Envelopecontrol644 Envelopecontrolparameters645 EnvelopeFilter918 Envelopes641,643 EQMorpher914 EQpage(ProgramEditor)670 EQs913 Equalizers913 Erase SongModeTRACKPage1224 EVENTPage SongMode1231 Everything loadingobjectsas1310 EXITbutton38 Exitvalues731 ExpAtk915 ExpRatio915 ExpRel915 ExpThreshold915 Expander914 Expanse911 Expansion915 Export MIDIfile,ProgramInfo,ChainInfo1312 Extendedsampleloop1411 Externalsequencer122 ExternalTempoSource756

Fineadjust615 Flanger917 FormattingaUSBDevice133,1312 FreezePedalparameter(Layer)625 FreqScale914 Frontpanelnavigation36 FUNpage(ProgramEditor)640 Functionsoftbuttons651 fusesC1 FXbypass57 FXModeonMasterModeMAINpage112 FXModDiagnostic924

G
GateTime915 GatedDuckingDelay913 Gates914 GeneralMIDI1111 DrumRemap632,112 Globalsparameter(Common)635,661 Grab SongModeTRACKPage1229 Graphicequalizer913 Grounding22

H
HalfWts923 Hardreset1116 Headroom917 HFDampingparameter910 HiBeamW920 HiFast921 HiGain920 HiResDelay921 HiSize920 HiSlow921 HiTrem920 HiAccelCrv921 HiFst>Slow921 HighKeyparameter(Layer)623 HighVelocityparameter(Layer)623 Highpass919 HiMicA920 HiMicB920 HiResonate921 HiResXcurs921 HiSlow>Fst921 HiSpinDir921 Hold912 HoldThroughAttackparameter(Layer)626 HoldUntilDecayparameter(Layer)626

F
favoriteprograms Categorybuttons34 FB2/FB1>FB913 FdbkDly913 FdbkImage913 FdbkLevel912,916 FdbkComprs914 Files Everything136 Loading56 Master136 Saving56 FillMode139 Fillsoftbutton1310 FilterType918 Filters918 Findingobjects312

I
IDEntry MastermodeMAINpage112 Ignorerelease625 ImageWidth922 Impactparameter(EnvCtl)646

Index-iii

ImportLayersoftbutton651 Importinglayers651 InSelect923 In/Outparameter910 InfinDecay912 Info Export1312 INFOEditor652 INFOsoftbutton ProgramEditor652 Infosoftbutton28,610,82 Insert SongModeTRACKPage1226 Intonationkey118 Intonationtables117 Introductiontoediting51 Intuitivedataentry311

K
KseriesobjectconversionE1 K2600 bankmode79 KB313,28,61,64,660 Polyphony661 KB3channel64 KB3programs28,64 Keyrange143 Keytracking615 Keytrackingparameter(EnvCtl)645 KeyTrackingparameter(Keymap)619 Key/Velocity(KEY/VEL)Page710 Keyboardnaming55 KEYCLKpage(ProgramEditor)666 Keymap147 KeymapEditor141 Assignsample146 Newrange145 KeymapEditorParameters143 KEYMAPpage(ProgramEditor)619 Keymapparameter(Keymap)619 Keymapparameters619 Keymaps62 Keymaps,stereo620 KSP8effectsD11 KVAOscillators653

L
LDiffDly913 LInvert924 LOutMode924 L/RDelay924 L/RPhase916,922 L/RPreDly911 LaserVerb917 LateLvl911 LateRvbTim911 Layerdelaycontrol623 LAYERpage(ProgramEditor)622 Layerparameters623626

Layers Adding651 Deleting651 Duplicating651 Importing651 movingbetweeninmultilayerprograms311 Muting57 LCD36 LegacyobjectconversionE1 Legatoplayparameter(Common)634 Leslieeffect920 LFODpth916 LFOFilter919 LFOLRPhs916 LFOpage(ProgramEditor)637 LFOparameters638 LFOPhase922 LFOPlsWid919,922 LFORate916,922 LFOShape919,922 LFOSmooth919 LFOs637,639 Linecord22 LoBeamW920 LoFast921 LoGain920 LoMode921 LoResDly921 LoSize920 LoSlow921 LoTrem920 LoAccelCrv921 Loadingfiles56 LoadingIndividualObjects138 Lockparameters1014 LoFst>Slow921 LoMicA920 LoMicB920 LoopSwitch SampleEditor1411 LoopTypeparameter(AmpEnv)643 Loopingsamples621 LoResonate921 LoResXcurs921 LoSlow>Fst921 LoSpinDir921 LowKeyparameter(Layer)623 LowVelocityparameter(Layer)623 LPFreq920 Lvl920

M
MainPage MasterMode111 MakeUpGain915 MakeUpGain915 Masterbutton57 Masterfiles136 Mastermode43 MasterTable1116

Index-iv

MasterTranspose112 MaxFreq918,919 Maximumdelayparameter(Layer)624 MaximumRateparameter(LFO)638 Memoryobjects54 Mergesoftbutton139 MicAngle921 MIDextension1311 MidFreq914 MidGain914 MidWidth914 MIDI AllNotesOff106 Basicchannel106 Channelenable1013 Pan1014 Parameterlocks1014 Programchangeformats1015 Receivemode106 Resetchannels1018 Transmitparameters101 Utilities1114 Volume1014 MIDIchannel102 MIDIchannelparameters1013 MIDIconnections23 MIDIdisconnected131 MIDIImplementationChartA1 MIDIMachineControl127 MIDImode43 Softbuttons1018 MIDIprogramchanges105 MIDIReceivepage109 MIDIReceiveparameters105 MIDIsequenceLoad,Save,Export128 MIDIThru/Outswitch23 MIDITimeClock122 MinFreq918,919 Minimumdelayparameter(Layer)624 MinimumRateparameter(LFO)638 MISCpage(ProgramEditor)668 Miscellaneous(MISC)149 MMC127 ModMode923 ModWheel35 Modebuttons32 Modeparameter(ASR)639 Modeselection31,41 Modes41 Program61 Modes,using42 Modulator ringmodulation923 Momentary switchtype731 Monosoundsystems22 Monophonicparameter(Common)634 Monophonicprograms634 Monopole925 MonsterTruckradiospots913 MorphA>B914

MPressure721 MTC122 MultibandCompression915 Multitapdelays912 Multivelocitykeymaps144 MuteEffectsBox57,98 MuteZn725 Mutinglayers57 MutingSetupzones57

N
Namesoftbutton651 Namingobjectsusingthekeyboard55 Naturalamplitudeenvelope641 Navigation36 NewLayersoftbutton651 Noisegenerator621 Nonharmonicovertones creatingwithringmodulator923 Notetriggering623 Numberofloopsparameter(AmpEnv)643 NumericEntry MastermodeMAINpage112 Numericentry39

O
ObjecttypeandID52 Objects51 Deleting56 loadingindividually138 MasterModeDelete1113 MasterModeRename1112 Naming53 RAM52,54 Renaming53 ROM52,54 Octav610,82 OddWts923 OK softbutton1312 Opaqueparameter(Layer)625 Origin922 OSVersion1116 Osc1Freq923 Osc1Lvl923 Osc1Shape923 Osc1PlsWid923 Osc1Smooth923 Oscillators653 OutGainparameter910 OUTPUTpage(ProgramEditor:KB3)670 Overview13 Overwrtsoftbutton139 OvFillsoftbutton139

P
Pages36 AMP(KB3)663

Index-v

AMPENV(Amplitudeenvelope)641 ASR(Attack,Sustain,Release)639 DRAWBR662 ENV2andENV3(Envelopes)643 ENVCTL(Envelopecontrol)644 EQ670 FUN(Attack,Sustain,Release)640 KEYCLK666 KEYMAP619 LAYER622 LFO637 MIDICHANLS1013 MIDIRECV105 MIDIXMIT101 MISC668 OUTPUT(KB3)670 PERC664 PERC2665 PITCH(KB3)663 TONEWL660 PairWts923 Pan920,924 MIDI1014 Panlock1014 PanModeparameter(Output)631 Panparameter(Output)631 PanWidth922 Panicbutton28,610,1018 Parameterlocks1014 Parameters AmpEnv642643 ASR639640 Common634??,635,??661 Envelopecontrol645 Keymap619 Layer623626 LFO638 Parametricequalizer913 Path133 PC3Features12 PC3Overview13 PC3K611 PC3K811 PCH1016 Pedals24 pedals15 PERCpage(ProgramEditor:KB3)663 PERCpage(ProgramEditor)664 PERC2page(ProgramEditor)665 Phaseparameter(LFO)638 Pitch923 PitchBendModeparameter(Layer)623 PitchBendRangeparameter(Common)634 PITCHpage(ProgramEditor:KB3)663 PitchWheel35 Play/Pausebutton withEasyAudition27 Playbackloops621 PlaybackModeparameter(Keymap)621 Plus/Minusbuttons39 Polydistort920

Polyphony62,1115 KB3661 Portamentoclick634 Portamentoparameter(Common)634 PortamentoRateparameter(Common)635 Pos920 Powercable22 PreDly911 PreDelay911 Pressure(Press)Page SetupMode736 PressureMap Master116 MIDIReceive108 MIDITransmit104 PreviewSample(PRVIEW)1117 PrgChgMode106 Programbuttons34,57 Programchangeformats1015 Programchangemode106 Programchanges Extended1015 MIDI105 QuickAccessmode81 ProgramEditor AMPpage(KB3)663 AMPENVpage641 ASRpage639 DRAWBRpage662 ENV2andENV3pages643 ENVCTLpage644 EQpage670 FUNpage640 KEYCLKpage666 KEYMAPpage619 LAYERpage622 LFOpage637 MISCpage668 OUTPUTpage(KB3)670 PERCpage664 PERC2page665 PITCHpage(KB3)663 Softbuttons611 TONEWLpage660 ProgramInfo Export1312 Programlock1014 Programmode27,42,61,69 Softbuttons610 Programmodepage69 ProgramsD1 Addinglayers651 Deleting652 Deletinglayers651 Duplicatinglayers651 Editing(KB3)660 Editing(VAST)611 Importinglayers651 KB328,64 Renaming651 Saving652

Index-vi

selecting27 VAST28,62 PtchOffst923 PulseWidth919,922 Punctuation53

Q
Quantize SongModeTRACKPage1227 Quantize+Flange917 QuartrWts923 QuickAccessbankprogramchanges1016 QuickAccessbutton57 QuickAccessEditor81 QuickAccessmode29,43

PositionMode(PosMode)741 RibbonConfiguration(RIBCFG)Page741 Spring742 Riffs758 RingModulation923 RMSSettle924 ROMobjects54 ROMobjects,saving52 RoomType911 RootKey SampleEditor1410 RotatingSpeakers920 RotoInOut920 RvrbTime911

S
Sample AutomaticPreviewinaProgram1117 SampleEditor147,149 Samples Adjustingvolume144 Assigningtokeymaps143 Playbackmode621 Tuning144 Savedialog53 Savesoftbutton652 SavingandnamingObjects Saving53 Savingfiles56 SavingMasterandEverythingFiles136 Savingobjects RAM54 ROM54 Savingprograms652 SavingRAMobjects52 SavingROMobjects52 SCInput915 Searchfunction312 Selectsoftbutton1311 Selectingmodes31,41 Selectingparameters36 Selectingprogramsandsetups27 Sequencer tutorial121 Setdrawbars662 Setup CompareEditor75 Setupbutton57 SetupEditor75 ControlSetup72 DeleteSoftButton768 DeleteZone(DelZn)SoftButton768 DuplicateZone(DupZn)SoftButton768 ImportZone(ImpZn)SoftButton768 LocalProgram(LocalPrg)76 NameSoftButton767 NewZone(NewZn)SoftButton768 Softbuttons767 SetupMode Channel/Program(CH/PROG)Page72

R
RDiffDl913 RInvert924 ROutMode924 RAMobjects52,54 RateControlparameter(LFO)638 RateScale922 Ratio915 RealtimeControlofArpeggiatorParameters754 Recordingsongs312 Region/Criteriawindow Songmode1221 RelRate918,919 RelTime914 Release915 Releaseparameter(ASR)640 ReleaseTimeandLevelparameters(AmpEnv)643 ReleasingASRs639 Remap SongModeTRACKPage1231 Renamingobjects53 withRenameutility1112 Renamingprograms651 RepeatingASRs639 Reset hard1116 ResetMIDIchannels1018 ResH/LPhs921 Resonance918 ResonantFilter918 Retrigger916,919 Reverbtypes911 Reversingsamples621 Ribbon25 Playingnotepatterns727 ribbon15 RibbonConfiguration(RIBCFG)Page SetupMode741 RIBBONPage SetupMode741 Ribbons Center742 LargeRibbonConfiguration741

Index-vii

Pressure(Press)Page736 RibbonConfiguration(RIBCFG)Page741 RIBBONPage741 WHEELPage733 Setupmode42,71 Setups29,D9 AuxBend1720 AuxBend2720 BENDPage719 BendRange719 COMMONPage756 ContinuousControlPedal(CPEDAL)Page735 ContinuousControllerParameters730 Controllers720 Curve(Curv)730 Destination77 Destination(Dest)730 Entry(Ent)andExitStates732 EntryPan,ExitPan718 Entryvalues731 EntryVolume,ExitVolume718 Footswitch(FOOTSW)Page737 Lowandhighkey711 LowVelocity(LoVel),HighVelocity(HiVel)717 MIDIBank76,77 MIDIBankMode79 MIDIchannel77 MIDIControllerDestinationList722 Mutingzones57 NoteMaps711 OffValue732 Offset(Add)730 OnValue732 Pan/Volume(PAN/VOL)Page718 physicalcontrollers721 RIBBONPage740 SaveSoftButton767 Scale730 selecting27 SLIDERandSLID/2Pages734 Status78 Switchcontrollers731 SWITCHPage738,739 SwitchType(SwType)731 Transpose711 Transposing71 VelocityCurve715 VelocityOffset713 VelocityScale(VelScale)712 ZoneArpeggiation(ZoneArpeg)79 Shapeparameterparameter(LFO)638 Shift SongModeTRACKPage1228 ShiftKeyNumber,ShiftKey(ShKeyNum,ShiftKey)727 ShiftPattern(ShiftPatt)748 Shiftingnotes intheArpeggiator747 SignalDelay915 SignalDly915 Signaltonoiseratio25 SizeScale911

Sliders33,721 Smooth915 SmoothRate918 SmoothTime915 SmthRate919 Softbuttons37 KeymapEditor145 MIDImode1018 inProgramEditor611 inProgramMode610 SampleEditor1411 SetupEditor767 Specialfunctions651 SoftwareUpgrades210 Soloingazone75 Song Export1312 Songbutton57 SongEditor1219 TRACKPage1221 SongMode121 Songmode43 Songs Recording312 SostenutoPedalparameter(Layer)625 soundROM15 Source1616 SourceandDepthparameters(EnvCtl)646 Spacing918 Specialbuttonfunctions57 Specialfunctionsoftbuttons651 SpecificationsA2 SpectralMultitapDelays913 Speed921 StartPoint SampleEditor1412 Startup21 StatDlyLvl917 StereoAnalyze924 Stereoparameter(Keymap)620 Stereosimulation923 Sustainnotworking106 SustainPedalparameter(Layer)625 SustainingASRs639 SWbutton35 Sweep918 switchpedals15 SyncIn23 SystemExclusiveID109

T
TapDly916 TapLvl916 TapPan916 TapPitch913 TapPtAmt913 TapShapr913 TapTempo1110 TaptypesinMultitapdelays912 TapnBal912

Index-viii

TapnLevel912 Tempo Master1110 SongmodeTempoTrack1233 TapTempo1110 Threshold915 Thru/Outswitch23 TimbreShiftparameter(Keymap)621 TimeStamp1115 Toggle switchtype731 TONEWLpage(ProgramEditor)660 Toplineofdisplay36 TRACKPage SongEditor1221 Transpose Master112 MIDI102 SongModeTRACKPage1228 Transposeparameter(Keymap)619 Transposingsetups71 TrebFreq913 TrebGain913 Tremolo922 TrigFilt918 Trigparameter(Layer)623 Trigger919 Triggerparameter(ASR)639 TriggeredFilter918 Triggeringnotesonstartup623 TRIM1412 Tuningsamples144 Tuningtootherinstruments112

USBStorageMode26 Voiceallocation1115 Voicechannels62 Voltage changingC1 Voltagelevels22 Volume MIDI1014 Volumelock1014

W
Warmth919 WAV AutomaticPreviewinaProgram1117 Waveformdisplay1412 WetBal912 Wet/Dry923 Wet/Dryparameter910 WHEELPage SetupMode733 WorldWideWeb210

X
XCoupleparameter910 XcrsFin917 XcursCrs917 Xfer914 XMITpage101 Xover920 Xpose28,610,82

U
USBDevice formatting133,1312 USBMIDIdisconnected131 USBPort26 Useramplitudeenvelope641 Usingthemodes42

Z
Zerocrossings1413 ZonestatusLEDs74 Zones Soloing75

V
VA1Programs13 VariableArchitectureSynthesis13 VAST13 VASTprogramstructure62 VASTprograms28,62 VelocityMap MIDIReceive107 MIDITransmit103 VelocityRange144 Velocitytracking616 Velocitytrackingparameter(EnvCtl)646 Velocitytrackingparameter(Keymap)620 Vib/Chor921 VibChInOut921 Vibrato/Chorus921 virtualdrive

Index-ix